" '

:'

NEWAGE)

Reinforced
Concrete Design
"

N~ Krishna Raju
R.N. Pranesh

Copyright 0 2003, New Age 'International (P) Ltd., Publishers
P-'Jblished by New Age IntemationaJ (P) Ltd., Publishers
!¥'J' First Edition: 2003
Reprint: 2008
All rights reserved.
No part ofthis book may be reproduced in any [onn, by photostat, microfilm,
xerography, or any other means, or incorporated into any information
retrieval system, electronic or mechanical, without the written permission
of the copyright owner.
The book is dedicated 10 "
.r'
The pioneers and research workers,
Isaac Johnson, Thaddeus Hyatt, Koenen, Coignet
Whitney, Emperger, Jenson, Chambaud, Hognestad
Baker, Evans, Neville, Fintel, Johanssen, Wood, Jones,
Regean, Bresler, Park, Paulay, Gerwick, Murashev, Collins,
Taylor, Newmark and a host of others W:10 loiled incessantly
for the development and widespread use of
Reinforced Concrete

ISllN : 81-224-1460-5
Rs.250.00
C-08-03-2345
5678910

Printed in lndia at Nagari Printers. Delhi.

I
t PUBLISHING FOR ONE WORLD

NEW AGE INTERNATIONAL(P) LIMITED, PUBLISHERS

4835/24, Ansari Road, Daryaganj, New Delhi - 110002
Visit us at www.newngepublishen.com
 Preface

The widespread use- of reinforce4 concrete in a variety of structural mem-

bers in the construction industry has necessitated a proper understanding of
the design and detailing procedures adopte,r by civil and structural
engineers. The first Indian standard code of practice for plain and rein-
forced concrete was published in 1953 and revised in 1964 wiih major
: emphasis on working stress design. The third revision published in 1978
I incolporated the Iimit'state design in conjunction with the working stress
I· design.
In recent years valuable infonnation regarding the various aspects of rein-
forced concrete such as ~urability. fire resistance. type of concrete. quaJrty
assurance and limit state criteria. has been gathered and hence the recently
revised fourth edition of the Indian standard code IS: 2000 incorporates the
latest developments and design practices accumulated during the last three
decades and also based on the various national codes such as the B.ritish
co'de BS" 811 0, the American code ACI: 319, the German code DIN: 1045
the European concrete commiltee (CEB-FIP) model code of 1990, th:
Canadian code CAN-A23.3 and the Australian code AS: 3800.
This text book entitled "REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN (IS:
456-2000) is a modem comprehensive text meeting the requirements of
undergraduate students of civil engineering and as a reference book for
civil engineering teachers and practicing structural engineers. The material
covered in the book comprises the first ·course forming the foundation for
the theory and design of reinforced concrete structures and is class tested
over several. years of teaching by the authors.
The book is spread over seventeen chapters covering the fundamental top-
ics in reinforced concrete design generally taught in the first course of B.E
and B·T.ech (Civil engineering) curriculum in Indian unive~sities to be
covered in a time frame of 50 hours.
In the first Introductory chapter. the evolution of reinforced COncrete as a
structural material for domestic industrial, highway, marine. environmen-
tal and storage structures is highlighted and prominent landmarks in the
development of the material during the 20th century is examined in the
light of continuous research by various investigators about the different
properties of structural material.
The second and third chapters present a comprehensive description of the
various properties of concrete and types of reinforcement used in structural
concrete along with the relevant Indian Standard code specifications. ..', i
v:.,':"
,·;,;)t!t~J~~r<:·
t~t~:~
?:~:..~'.::"':;~~{:i:~;~.·::~~·1:d&~~.~t: '.l~
 Contents Contents xv
5. LIMIT STATE METHOD OF DESIGN 54
8.4 Design of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Beams 227
8.5 Design of Flanged Beams 233
5.1 Philosophy of Limit State Design 54
8.6 Design of Cantilever Beams 246
5.2 Limit State Design and Classical Reliability Theory 54
8.7 Design of Continuous Beams 249
5.3 Limit States 55
8.8 Examples for Practice 254
5.4 Safety Factors 56
5.5 Characteristic and Design Strengths and 256
9. LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF SLABS
Partial Safety Factors 56
5.6 Characteristic and Design Loads 57 9.1 Introduction . 256
9.2 Design of One Way Slabs 256
6. ULTIMATE STRENGTH OF REINFORCED
9.3 Design of Two Way Slabs 259
CONCRETE SECTIONS 60
9.4 Design of Cantilever Slabs .272
9.5 Design ofContinuou~ Slabs 275
6.1 Introduction 60
9.6 Design of Flat Slabs 279
6.2 Ultimate Flexural Strength of Rectangular Sections 60
1, 9.7 Yield Line Analysis of Slabs 287
.""l , 6.3 Ultimate Flexural Strength of Flanged Sectiom 84
9.8 Examples for Practice 318
ll"i
, 6.4 Ultimate Flexural Strength of Doubly Reinforced
Concrete Sections 109
10. LIMIT-STATE DESIGN OF COLUMNS
6.5 Ultimate Shear Stren~th of Reinforced Concrete 321
, Sections 126
AND FOOTINGS
6.6 Torsional Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 147
10.1 Introduction 321
6.7 Bond and Anchorage in Reinforced Concrete Members 172
10.2 Classification of Columns 321
6.8 Examples for Practice 191
10.3 Effective Length of Columns 323.
10.4 Design of Short Columns Under Axial Compression 330
7. SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS OF
10.5 Design of Short Columns Under Compression with
n-"", REINFORCED CONCRETE MEMBERS 195
Uniaxial Bending 336
10.6 Design of Short Columns Under Compression and
7.1 Introduction 195
Biaxial Bending 345
7.2 Codified Deflection Limits 196
10.7 Design of Slender Columns 352
7.3 Deflection Control in Beams and Slabs
,-, 10.8 Design of Footings 361
~
(Empirical Method) 196
10.9 Examples for Practice 382
7.4 Deflection Computations (Theoretical Method) 201
7.5 Control.of Cracking in R.C. Members 203 384
11. LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF RETAINING WALLS
7.6 Examples 209
" , 7.7 Examples for Practice 218
11.1 Introduction 384
11.2 Types of Retaining Walls 384
8. LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF BEAMS 220
11.3 Forces Acting on Retaining Walls 385
8.1 Introduction 220 11.4 Stability Requirements 388
11.5 Proportioning and Design of Retaining Walls 390
8.2 Guidelines for Selection of Cross Sectional Dimensions
11.6 Design Examples 392
an,d detailing of Reinforcements 220
II.7 Examples for Practice 405
8.3 Design of Singly Reinforced Rectangular Beams 221
 Co1ltellts xvii
xvi Contents
408 16. REINFORCEMENT DETAILING IN STRUCTURAL
12. DESIGN OF STAIR CASES
CONCRETE MEMBERS 521
12.1 Introduction 408
12.2 Types of Staircases 409 16.1 Introduction 521
12.3 Loads on Staircases 414 16.2 Structural Distress and Collapse 522
12.4 Design Examples 420 16.3 Common Shapes of Reinforcements in Slabs 522
12.5 Examples for Practice 428 16.4 Detailing of Reinforcements in Slabs 524
16.5 Detailing of Reinforcements in Beams 528
13. DESIGN OF CORBELS (BRACKETS) AND NIBS 430 16.6 Detailing of Reinforcements in Columns 531
16.7 DetailingofReinforcements in Foundations and Walls 533
13.1 Introduction 430 16.8 Detailing at Junctions 535
13.2 Shear SpanlDepth Ratio and Shear Resistance 431 16.9 Detailing in Corbels 543
13.3 Dimensioning of Corbels 431 16.10 Lapping, Splicing and Welding of Reinforcements 545
13.4 Analysis of Forces in a Corbels 432 16.11 Bundling of Reinforcing Bars 548
13.5 Design Procedure of Corbels 434 16.12 Cover to Reinforcement and Reinforcement supports 549
13.6 Design of Nibs (Beam Shelves) 436 16,13 Expansion Joints in Concrete Structures 550
13.7 Design Examples 439 16.·14 Do's and DonI's in Detailing of reinforcements 553
13.8 Examples for Practice 445
17. EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DESIGN AND
14. PILE AND RAFT FOUNDATIONS 446 DETAILlNG 567

,14.1 Introduction 446 17.1 ,Introduction 567

14.2 Design of Pile Foundations 447 17.2 Earthquake Forces 568
14.3 Design of Pile Caps 448 17.3 Ductility of Reinforced Concrete Members '569
14.4 Design Examples of Piles and Pile Caps 453 17.4 Design Principles and Code Provisions 576
14.5 Design of Raft Foundations 463 17.5 Indian Standard Code Provisions for Earthquake
I' 14.6 Design Example 463 Resistant Design 579
i' 14.7 Examples for Practice 468 17.6 Isolation Concepts in Earthquake resistant Design 588
I!
"

15. WORKING STRESS METHOD OF DESIGN 470 REFERENCES 592

15.1 Introduction and Penmissible Stresses 470 SUBJECT INDEX 603

15.2 Design of Slabs 473
AUTHOR INDEX 610
15.3 Design of Beams 477
15.4 Design of Columns and Footings 483
15.5 Design 'of Retaining Walls 486
15.6 Design of Staircase 492
15.7 Design of Water Tanks 494
15.8 Examples for Practice 517
 ·~.

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

1.1 BASIC CONCEPTS OF REINFORCED CONCRETE

Reinforced· concrete is basically, concrete ,in which steel bars of desira~le

magnitude, are introduced in the casting stage so that the resulting com-
posite material resist the stresses developed due to the external loads. In
flexural members 'the steel reinforcement is generally provided ncar the
tension face to resist the tensile stresses since the tensile strength of con~
crete is hardly one tenth -of its compressive strength. In the case of com-
rt'~~f.f ' pression members, the. steel reinforcement is distributed uniformly in 'the
~! "I
cross section to resist the compressive stresses developed due to the
external loads.
The revolutionary engineering concept of reinforcing the weak tensile
zone of concrete by steel reinforcement was developed in mid-nineteenth
century. The early 20th century witnessed significant improvcments,in the
development aJld use of reinforced concrete mainly due to the production
of good quality concrete with improved strength and improved quality ot
steel with surface characteristics suitable to develop good bond 'between
concrete and steel.
The success of reinfJrced concrete as a revolutionary material for use
in various types of structures is mainly due to the improved quality of
.concrete and steel over th.e years and also the improved bond characteris-;
tics between the two ingredients.

1.2 HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT

The presen~ state of development in the field of reinforced concrete is due
to the c0!1tinuous research done by scientists and engineers in this field
during the last 150 years. I
Isaac Johnson' first made the prototype of modern cement in 1845, by
burning a mixture of clay and chalk until clinkering. so that reactions nec-
essary for the formation of strong cementatious compounds arc complete.
Early 20th century witnessed the development of mass production of good
quality cement. At present Ordinary Portland cement of various strengths
designated as C-33, C-43, and C-53 are available for use in different types
of structures. Different types of cements with specific properties have been
 2
developed 1'01' lise in the c(Jns,tl'lIcli~lI1 ol~ highways, marine stlUctures, rnul- factors to the working loads.
tistol'cy buildings and ilHlu~'ltr.JaI slnh.·Il~[Cs. . . Several Investigators' like Emperger (1936) Whitney (1937) Jenson
ROllHIJI,~ usml iroIH'c;lnfol'(.'l'd Ilh\sonry dunng fIrst century B.C. (1943), Chambaud (1949) and Hognestad (1951) developed the ultimate
Lamhot or I,'ranee constructed u. ~\)\~'~l~)at 3.3m .long b~ pl,,;tcring Roque- load theory based on different types 'of stress blocks. Reinforced concrcte
forl cement 011 ti sKeletoll net WUI k ~~t lion and ,wIre. COlgnet of France and structures designed solely on the basis of ultimate load theory resulted :In.
his contemporaries in Englllnd, IIkd the fIrst patents for the use of slender structural elements and their serviceability characteristics (defie~­
rcinl'on':l:d eOllCI'C10 around I K~~5, . tions and cracks) under working loads were not within the codified accept-
55 Wilkinson ...cclll'cd n patent• 10• England for a concrete arch able limits.
I11 18•• I ·
. "ll\l'ol'ccd with ,tic burs. Mml)' sCientists around this time obtained The ultimate load method of design ensures the safety of the structures
11 001 I.... • l'fr
't'lt" on reinforced concrete 11\ II erent types of structures in various against the collapse limit state only and as such does not give any infor-
p.lel" '9" 'f
countries. In thc Lntol' purt oj l century I r~l~ arced concrete passed mation about the behaviour of the structure at service loads and the range
lllcriod oflll\tcnts held h~' ~('veral specialIsts. between service and collapse loads, The inadequacy of the ultimate load
t Ill'oug 1\ I , 'h I " method in not ensuring the serviceability of the structure resulted in the
Slgllilkllll t developlllcllts dlll'lll~ t e car y part of 20 century resulted
, '1llllnlVCd <Iun!ity of concrete tlnd ~tce1. Cement was mass-produced with development of limit State design,
1\" 'I't '()Illml nnll illll)f'OVClI
qUIl I Y (
lif"
, Illl't 'Ot a ' proportlOnmg concrete mixes
The philosophy of limit state design"'" WIlS first incorporated In the
resulted In conCl'Ctc of dcsu'cd \'('Impresslve strength ranging from 15 Russian code in 1955, Basically. limit stllte design is a method of design- J

~
ing structures based on a statistical concept of safety and .the associated
Nlmm' III 60 NllIlIlI', " .
Hnrly Il\vcstiglltors workml on the theoretIcal basIs to explain the , statistical probability of failure, Limit slate design is based on the concept
I
I' slru~lUrul hchuviOl' of rcilllim,.'cd \'\.'It\i..'l'cte as early as the end of the nine- of probability and comprises the application of the method of slatistics to
the variations that occur-in practice in the loads acting on the structure and
teenth cl'nlury, .
, , I' 1I 111 IH77, Thndtlt'us lIyllll, nil :\mt'l'Ican lawyer established Hie basis of 'the strenglh of the materillls,
nnnlysil'i or sln~ss in rdnl'ol'l:cd l,\)lh,'~te by explaining the concept of bond The Limit stat~ design overcomes the inadequacies of the working
11' bCIWt'CIl Slt;'C.!I'tld,<; I\l\lll~()lICI'Cll', - . stress and ultimate load methods and ensures the safely of the structme
iI I till'!' l\oCI\l'n nt' Ocnllllny dl'Y·doped the deSign rules of analysis of
rcinl\m.'l't1 conen'le sl'l,.'litlllS ill 1$~('I, Coignet of France also published the
against excessive deflections and cracking under service loads and also
provides frir the desirable load factor against failure, Hence, the British
1 - ' ,
prindpks or cillstk' dl'si!;l1 (It'n.'int\\t\.'cd concrete dU~ing ~he ~ame period. Code. American Code', Australian Code' and Germlln Code" and the
Enrl\' 20 th centlll)' Wlll\l~ssl'd lht end of patents In thiS fIeld when the
ll
recently revised Indian Code have adopted the limit Stale design con-
Pllls:-;illl~ I'l~gull\tions cllll1pl'i.<;in!~ tlx' ,c~mpletc set of design rules of rein- cepts,
, ",i l'OIU,,'I'Ch.~ l\ppl..,t1I'l~d in 19t)7, "hlle the French commission on rein-
Itlt'CO 1 h d' I·' ' 1.3 PHILOSOPHY OF STRUCTURAL DESIGN
fo\'\'cd concrcte had l'onulI!l\ll'l 1 ,e eSI~n ru es In 1906, professional
SOCIC , t'H.:....
,,' l'lkc the t\l\ll't'icnll. Cl'lh--rett::
, .. ~ •
Instttute (ACI)
,
and
••
the Amerl'can The main objective of reinforced concrete structural design is to comply
Socict)' of Civil Enp,illl'crs lASl 1:'\ mtroduced the fIrst JOlIlt code on rein- with the following essential requirements,
f(,li'(,'cd \'OI1CI'Ch.' in 1909, , . I) Stmctures designed should satisfy the criterion\of desirable ultimate
Th\' first 1111\io1' uppli(,'lltiol\ \,"{ l"e.lI1forc~d concrete was in "bridges
strength. in flexure, shear, compression, tension and torsion developed
uuinl" dUl~ to the l'l'lllltuny in \"\"Il'l.1,!......':lson wIth steel bridges. The elastic
:11l'thl~d l'll' dcsillil "':IS .nn~lly ~~;;;ttbhs~e~ and ",:idely used dUring this under a given system of loads and their combinations, In addition. the
stresses developed in the stmcture under the given system of loads
period, Thl~ rclmi\~tin,~~ 01 h~'ll,.t.l~~'~ ~~":\..~ bmldlllgs dunng the po.st war periods
should be within the safe permissible limits under service loads.
r'Csulted in cstl\bh~h\l1!l- I'l'l1\llll\"t,\:" ... vncrete as an econol1llcal structural
Il\l\tct'inl t~l1' usc in diffl'nmt t)l~$ \,~ struc,tures. . 2) The stmcture designed should satisfy the criterion of serviceability,
Howl.wut\ Ihl' i1H\ltClj'U\l'y l)t th: elastIc or working load design in pre- which limits the deflections and cracking to be within acceptable lim-
lli~ting the ullln"'to !<ll\ds of II st'''',dre paved Ihe way for the ultimate load ils, The stmcture should also have actequate durability and imperme-
IheorleS and design bllsod ou ulti"'''te loads computed by applying load ability, resistance to acids, corrosion, frost etc.
 4 Reinforced ConcreleDesign
3) The stmcture should have adequate stability against overturning, slid-
ing, buckling, and vibration under the action of loads.
A satisfactory structural design should ensure the three basic criteria of
strength, serviceability and stability. In addition, the structural designer
should also consider aesthetics and economy. The structural designer and
the architect should co ordinate so that the structure designed is not only
aesthetically superior. but also strong enough to safely sustain the designed
loads without any distress during the life time of the structure.
1.4 APPLICAnONS OF REINFORCED CONCRETE
Reinforced concrete is well" established. as -an important construction
inaterial often preferred to steel constmction mainly due to its versatility,
adaptability, and resistance .10 fire and corrosion resulting in negligible
maintenance costs. Development of better quality cements during the last
decade has resulted in stronger and more durable concrete for use in dif~
,rr ferenttypes of stmctures.
n ",.-
Reinforced concrete is ideally suited for the construction of floor and
roof slabs, columns and beams in residential and commercial structures.
The present trend is to ,adopt reinforced concrete for bridges of smali,
medium and long spans resulting in acstheticaliy superior and economical
structures in comparison with steel bridges.
Typical use of reinforced concrete in earth retaining structures includes
abutments for bridges and retaining walis for earthen embankments.
Reinforced concrete is ideally ..suited for water r~taining structures like
ground and overhead tanks and hydraulic structures like gravity and arch
dams. The material is widely used for the constmction of large domes for
water tanks and sports stadiums and conference halis.
Reinforced concrete grid floors comprising beams and slabs are widely
used for covering large areas like conference halls where column free
space is an essential requirement.
For aircraft hangers, reinforcement concrete shells comprising of thin
circular slabs and deep edge beams provide an economical soiution.
Reinforced concrete folded plate constmction has been used for indus-
trial stmctures where large column free space is required under the roof.
In coastal areas where corrosion is imminent due to humid
environment, reinforced concrete is ideally suited for the construction of
marine structures like wharfs, quay walis, watchtowers, and iighthouses.
For warehouses in coastal areas, reinforced concrete trusses are preferred
to steel trusses. I shorter direction and maximum shear at supports under gravity loads.
Reinforced concrete poles have almost replaced steel poles for power
transmis~'ions. Tall towers forT.V.transmission are invariably constructed
using reinforced concrete.
lntroduction 5
Multistorey reinforced concrete buildings are routintiIy adopted for
both residential and office complexes. For heavy-duty floors in fac.tories,
reinforced concrete is ideally suited due to its resistance to wear and tear
and improved durability.
In atomic structures, reinforced concrete is preferred to steel for pres-
sure vessel construction due to the superior radiation absorption character-
istics of high strength and high density concrete.
Reinforced co'ncrete piles, both precast and cast in sites have been in
use for foundations of stmctures of different types likes bridges and build-
ings.
Another novel application of reinforced concrete is in the construction
of pavements for highways and aitport runways.
The Twentieth century has witnessed reinforced concrete as a revolu-
tionary material suitable for the construction of most simple to complex
structures. With significant improvements in the quality of cement and
steel. reinforced concrete will continue to find new applications and wide-
spread use in the 21st century.
1.5 REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS
Any type of structure ma~' be considered as an assemblage of various
. stmctural eiements, which perform a predetermined function of resisting
various types of forces. Basicaliy a structure can be b~ilt up using struc-
tural and non-structural elements l2 . The structural elements (beams, slabs
columns etc.) have the primary fu~ction of resisting the external loads,
while the nonstructural elements (partitions, false ceiling, doors etc.) do
not support the external ioads.
Basically, the structural elements can be classified as one-dimensional
\ elements (Ex: beams, columns, arches etc) or two·dimensional elements
(Ex: slabs, plates, shells etc.) and three-dimensionai elements (thick pipes,
'~ walls of nuclear reactor vessels, domes etc.)
{I Circular girders generally used in water tanks are subjected combined
q flexure, shear and torsion while the corner columns in a multistorey framed
I
'.]
stmcture is subjected to biaxial bending.
a) One Way Slab Systems
"1· Fig. l.I(a) shows the floor system comprising a one-way slab supported at
1,
the edges by walls or beams and supports dend and live loads. The slabs
are subjected primarily to maximum flexure at centre of span along the
 6 Heinjorced Concrete Design Introduction 7
y
Fig l.1(b) shows a cantilever slab generally used in ch'lijas projecting
from lintel beams. r---- - - - - 1
I I
Fig 1.1 (c) shows a continuous slab, supported on beams generally used

---."r" ,
x I ,, I x '"
I I '"c,
in a building complex.

tV
Stab
I
I
I
I -
.2
u
~

~
III

~SUPPOrl
I
L
I ____ I
_ _ _ _ .J
!

(a) One Way Slab =====y= = ; f t a b

Wall
Slab m Seclfon-xx ij
Fig. ·1.2 Two Way Slab Floor System
y

lintel beam
x
DD,EJD
'-----'1-'----
x

(b) Cantilever Stab

tf/
Slab
DEJ:DD
"
o se6JJ u ec} Continuous Slab
lJ r.===:::;r===Y::::::;--;:::==:::;J====tiStab
oata{ilJ U
Section-xx
U
I ,
Fig. 1.1 Types of Reinforced Concrete Slab System

b) Two Way Slab floor Systems

Fig. 1,3 Beam and Slab Floor System

d) Flat Slab floor System

Fig 1.2. shows a typical two-way slab floor system commonly nsed in Fig 1.4 shoWs a flat slab floor system in which the slab is supported on
buildings. In this case the slab is supported at the edges and it is subjected columns directly without any beams. This type of floor system is generally
to flexure in two principal directions while resisting gravity loads. preferred for large span office complexes, commercial buildings and
garages, where head~oom is less.
e) Beain and Slab floor systems
Fig 1.3 shows a typical beam and slab floor system genen,lIy used in resi-
,dential and commercial building structllres. In this case the gravity loads
are resisted by flexure of slab and beams.
I e) Grid Floor system
Fi~ 1.5 shows a typical grid floor system comprising beams spaced at short
intervals running in perpendicular directions a~d supports a thin slab. This

'I
,I

II
I
 Introduqtion 9
, "" strip+MiddlesiriP-fC0lumn strip + rF'-'-'
y

,-,-'=1

DDD,DDDi
-$
Column
head
W
Column
iOOOIOODI
\DDD\DDDI
.. >-
,
>-
c
x

DOq4rDDO
~
u
~
III
'DDDDDD\
x bodOODI
t
-$ $ 10 B-J 0100 01
DOD,DOD
VC- . I' y.-J

V"om.."
Fig. 1.4 Flat Slab Floor System
Section-xx
Fig. 1.5 Grid Floor System

1,\'1"-' of roof is generally used for large conference halls and commercial
hU\hlings I"cquiring column free space. The grid floor is supported at the
\'d~~l'S on solid walls or columns at regular intervals.

\) l\tulllstorey Vertical Framing System

F\~ l.h shows the multistorey vertical frame-comprising columns beams Column
Bam
nn\i s.labs forming three-dimensional structure. The gravity loads are trans-
H\itll'd from slab to beams which in turn transfer the loads to columns and
l\n..:\lly to the foundations. The rigid _column and beam frame can resist
l.\\~'r;\llllads due to wind.

CO U':'1"
Fig. 1.6 Multistorey Vertical Framiilg System
 10 Reinforced Concrete Design ImrodllctiOIl 11

g) ~h'ear Wall System b) Design Codes and Handbooks

This system consists of solid concrete walls covering the full height of the
building. Generally the shear wall box is located at the lift/staircase
regions. Sometimes the shear walls are l-ceated as exterior or interior walls
placed along the transverse direction of the tall building to resist lateral
loads due to wind. A typical shear wall provided anhe core of a tall struc-
ture is shown in Fig 1.7.
R.C.C. Wall
Floor slabs
Fig. 1.7 Shear Wall System
All reinforced concrete structural design in our country should conf~i'm to
the recentlv re\'ised Indian Standard Code IS:456-2000 Code of practice
for plain u"nd reinforced concrete (Fourth Revision). The corresponding
national codes of other countries, which are often referred to, are the
American Concrete Institute Code ACI-3I8 and the British Code BS:
8110.
. The design examples presented in this book conform to the Indian
standard code. The Bureau of Indian standards have released over.the years
s~veral handbooks to facilitate reinforced concrete structural designers to
d~sign routine structural elements quickly by referring to the various tables
and graphs presented in the handbooks.
The following handbooks will serve as useful design aids for structural
concrete designers.
1) SP: 16-1980"· J:ksign Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS: 456.
2} SP: 24-1983 ". Explanatory Handbook on IS: 456. , .,
3)', SP: 34-1987 15• Handbook on Concrete Reinforcement and DetailIng.
4):, SP: 23-198~" _ Hand book on Concrete Mixes (B ased on Indian Stan-
dards)

1.6 DESIGN CODES AND HAND BOOKS 1.7', LOADI:"G STA:"DARDS

,a) Objective of Codes - Reinforced concrete structureS are designed to resi~t the following types of
loads: -
Based on extensive research and practical knowledge, various countries
haye evolved their national codes, which serve as guidelines for tlie design a) Dead Loads
of structures. The main objectives of the codes are
These are loads that will not change with respect to time. T~e dead loads
I) To provide adequate structural safety by ensuring strength, service· acting on the structure include the self-weight of the structural. element.s.
ability and durability. '
Partitions•and finishes which depends upon the type of matenal used 111
• 11 'b
2) To specify simple design procedures, design tables and formulae for' the structure. The Indian standard code IS: 875(Part-l) - 1987 prescrt es
easy computations. the unit weight of building materials and stored materials to be used in t~e
3) To provide legal validity and to prolect structural engineers form any design. Salient dead loads of most common materials used in structural
liability due to failures of structures caused by inadequate design and elements are presented in Ta!?le l.l
impr~permaterials and lack of proper supervision .during construc-
Table I I Dead Loads of Materials
tion,
Unit Weight (kN/m 3 )
4) To provide a uniform set of design gnide lines to be followed by vari- i
,
l\.'.3tetial
ous structural designers in the country. Briel4.. Masonry 18.85 to 22
Plain Coocrete 22.00 to 23.50
National building codes are periodically sevised to reflect the improve· 22.75 to 26.50
Rejnfor;:;:ed CCClCfete
ments in the quality of materials and design procedures evolved as a result 21 to 27
Stone Masonry
of comprehensive research investigations conducted in the various
6to 10
institution.s in the country ·and abroad. T<nbe'
(Contd... )

,I
 "', , Introduction 13
12;, Rein!orced-C;om;rete Design
Table 1.1 Dead Loads of Materials (Collld..• ) Table 1.2 Live or ImpoSed Loads (Collld...)

Cement Mortar 20.4 7.5 Floors of warehouses, workshops, factories and 'other
buildIngs or parts 01 buildings of similar category for· 7.5
Lime Mortar 15.7 to 18.50
heavy weight loads, .floors of bookstores and libraries,
Steel 78.5
10.0 Floors 61 ware houses, work shops, factories and other
Floor Finishes 0.6 to 1.2 buildings 0; parts of buildings of similar qategory for 10.0
Rool Finishes 0.2 to 1.2 heavy weight loads, floors of book slores and libraries

Steel work for Roofing 0.16to 0.23 Garages (light)

0.2 Floors used for garages for vehicles nOI exceeding 25 kf>:!
Cement plaster - 10mm thick gross weight.
Concrele Tile flooring Slabs 4.0
25 mm thick 0.5 Beams 2.5
Terraz40, 10mm thick 0.2 Garages (Hea\!}')
1.91 Floors used lor garages for vehIcles not exceeding 40 kN 7.5
Brick Wall, 100mm thick
gross weight.

b) Li ve Loads Staircases
Stairs, landings and corridors lor class 2 but not liable to 3.0
over crowding.
These are loads that change with respect to time. Live or imposed loads
include the loads due to people occupying the floor and those due to mate- Balcony
Balconies not liable to over-crowding' for class 2 loading - .

rials stored or vehicles in garage floors. The imposed floor and roof loads loading for other classes 3.0
111 5.0
for different occup,mcies are specified in IS 875 (Part-2) - 1987 • Some of Balconies liable to over crowdIng
5.0
the common live loads encountered in the design of buildings are compiled
Flat, Sloping or Curved roof with slopes up to and includ-
in Table 1.2 ing to degrees.
1.5
Table 1.2 Live or Imposed Loads a) Access provided.
0.75
b) Access not provided, except lor maintenance. 2
loading Types of Floors Minimum live Sloping rool with slope g'reater than 10°:' 0.75 kN/m
load k'Nfm 2 c) less 0.001 kNfm 2 for every Increase in slope over2 10
Class
2 degrees up to and Including 20° and 0.002 kN/m for
Floors in dwelling hOuses, tenements, hospital wards,
2
Bedrooms and private siUing rooms in hostels and dormi- , every degree Increase in slope over 20°
0
tories.
Office Iloors other than entrance hall floors of light work 2.5·4.0
2.5 c) Wind Loads
rooms.
Floors of banking halls, office entrance halls and reading 3.0
3.0 Wind loads have to be considered in the design of multistorey buildings,
rooms
Live load in plan
towers and poles. Wind loads depend upon the intensity of wind prevailing
ROOFS
Types of Roof kNfm 2 in the locality of the structure. IS: 875(Part-3) _1987" prescribes basic
ShOp floors used for display and sale of merchandise, 4.0 wind speeds in various zones by dividing the country into 6 zones. The
4.0
floors of work rooms, floors 01 class rooms. restaurants, design wind pressure is computed as
machinery halls power stations etc, where not occupied
. by plant or equipment. P x = O.6V:
Floors of warehouses, workshops, lactories and other
5.0
buildings or paris of building or similar calegory for light Where p,,- :;::; design wind pressure in N/ml~2 at a height Z <)l1d
weighlloads, ollice floors for storage and filling purposes. 5.0
V,,-;::; design wind velocity in mls at a height Z.
Assembly floor space without fixed seating, public rooms
in hotels, dance halls and wailing halls. Wind Load 'F' acting in 'a direction normal to the individual structural
(eontd.) clement or cladding unit is computed as,
F ~ (C,,-Cp;lA.p,
 14 ReiJ1!orcedConcrete Design

Where '.Cpe;;; external pressure coefficient. .

Cpi ;;; 'intei·nal ptcssure coefficient.
it ;;; surface area of structural element or cladding unit and
Pd ;;; design wind pressure.
The values of external and internal pressure coefficients depend upon CHAPTER 2
the type of structure and are presented in a tabular form in IS 875 (Part-3)-
1987. I Materials For Reinforced Concrete
d) Snow Loads and Local Combinations

Structnres subjected to snow loads'have to be designed suitably by consid-

ering the snow loads prevailing in the region and also the various load
combinations. These are specified in IS 875 (Part-4) and (Part-5) - 1987'0
-respectivel y.
e) Earth Quake Loads
Seismic or earthquake forces have to 'be considered in the d"esign of struc-
lUreS located in seismic zones according to IS:1893-84". The horizontal
seismic force (Feq ) is computed as,
F,.=[c<PAGJ
Where ex;:;; Horizontal seismic coefficient depending on location with
values of 0.08,0.05, 0.04, 0.02, and 0.01 for Zones V, IV,
III, 11, and I.
~ ;;; A coefficient depending on soil-foundation syst~m ral).ging
from 1.0 to .1.5
'A ;;; A coefficient depending upon the importance of the struc-
ture varying from 1.5 to 1.0
G :;:: Dead load above the section considercd.
Structures located in Zone V to III (~evere earthquake zone) should be
designed for seismic forces.
2,1 CONCRETE
Plain .Concrete is a composite material composing of cement, aggregate
and water, in suitable proportions. Cement reacts'in tile presence of water
to produce complex compounds which gradually harden and bonds the
aggregate comprising sand and coarse aggregate into a solid mass with -
time. Fresh concrete exhibits plastiCity and flowability so that it can be
placed iIlto the mouids of required shape and compacted to form a dense
mass. Thp compacted and hardened concrete is cUl'ed in the presence of
water so that it gains most of its strength withill four weeks, after which the
external h;>ads can be applied. .
2,1.1 Cell1~nt
Various types of cemcntshave been developed for use in different types of
structures. For a detailed study of the type and properties of different types
of cements, the reader may refer to the treatise on properties of concrete
authored by Neville.
According to IS: 456-2000, the types of cements aud their suitability
for a specific situation arc outlined in Table.2.1.
2.1.2 Aggregates

In concrete, aggregate volume is nearly 75 percent of the total volume.

Hence, thc'structural behavior of concrete is significantly influenced by the
type of aggregates uscd. Fine agg'reg-ate comprises of sand dug out from
riverbeds and pits having particle sizes from 0.075 mm to 4.75 mm.
Crushed rock and gravel are generally used as coarse aggregates with
maximum size of 10 mm, 20 and 40 mm. For reinforced concrete work 10
and 20 mm ,are commonly used. For mass concrete works like dams, larger
sizes of aggregates upto 150 mm are used. The "nominal maximum size of
<:o~rse aggregate should be as large as possible but it should be limited/to
"~:n"e ,fourth of the minimum thickness of the member. Lightweight and
heavy weight aggregates are also used in specific works. The various
 : Reinforced Concr~te Design
Materials For Reinforced Concrete 17
Table 2.1 rypes 'of Cements and their usc
made !;>y using heavy aggregates like Magnetite, Hematite, Limonite and.
No Type of Cement IS:Code Where used
Barytes", Steel punchings" and shots have been successfully used for
1 Ordinary Portland Cement
G-33 Grade IS: 269 All General Concreting works. prodUcing concrete with a density in the range of 50 to 60 kN/m'.
I C·43 Grade IS: 8112 Mullistorey structures.
C·53
.. -
~
Grade
.-. IS: 12269 Bridges-Tall structures 2,1,3 Concrete Mix Proportions
Prestressed concrele work.
2 Rapid Hardening Portland IS: 6041 Road works and Repairs. The. main objective of cQ:ucrete mix design is to select the optimum pro-
Cement portIOn of the various ingredients of concrete, which will yield fresh con-
3 Low Heat Portland Cement IS: 12600 Mass Concrele Dams crete of desirable workab)'~ity and hardened concrete- possessing the
4 Portland Slag Cament, IS: 455 .
Marine Structures. speci~ied characteristic compressive strength and durability. The mix
5 Portland Pozlolana Cement IS: 1469 Mass Concrete· Marine Structure pr.o~o~tions should also satisfy ,the additional requirement of the use of
and General bUi.lding Works.
nll.l~lInum possible cement content so that the maximum economy is
6 SUlphate Resisting porlfa.nd , ·15: 12330 Marine Structures foundalions In
Cement" Sulphate bearing soils.
achlcved in the unit cost of concrete according to the lluthor28•
7 Hydrophobic Cement 15:6043 SwImming Pools floors of food Pro- a) Nominal Mix Conncte
cessing plants.
6 High Alumina Cement IS: 6452 Marine Structures. The Re~iscd Indian Standard Code' IS: 456-2000, prescribes the propor-
9 Supersulphated Cement IS: 6909 Marine Structures construction of tIons of IIlgredients of concrete for nominalmixes of concrete grades lower
sewers.
than M-20 which are used for ordinary and small works, as shown in Table
2.2.
properties of aggregates like specific gravity, strength, toughness, hard-
ness, soundness, particle size distribution (grading) should comply with the Table 2.2 Proportions for Nominal Mix Concrete
lI"
,. Indian Standard Code: IS: 383-1979". . . (Table-9 o' IS: 456-2000)
Crushed rock and gravel aggregates with specific gravity in tbe rang~ Total Quantity of Dry Aggre-
of 2.5 to 2.7 yields concrete with a density in the range of 23 to 24 kN/m'i gates by mass per 50 kg of Proportions 01 Fine
Grade 01
However special concretes like light weight and high density required for Cement, to be taken as the sum Aggregate 10 coarse Quantity of water
Concrete
ollha individual masses 01 Fine Aggregale per 50 kg of"
specific.applications can be. produced by using suitable aggregates. . and Coarse Aggregates (kg) (By Mass) Cement (Max)
Light weight aggregates" generally used to produce structural light': Max (lilres)
weight concrete having a density in tho range of 10 to 18 kN/m', widely 2 3 4
M-5
used in U.K., U.S.A and Europe belong to the category ~f M-7.5
600 Generally 1: 2 but 60
625 SUbject to an upper 45
a) Expanded shales, clays, and slates produced in a rotary kiln (Leca, M·l0 460 limit 011:1 'lz and a 34
M15
Kermazite) 330 lower limit of 1 :2'lz 32
M-2Q
250 30
b) Expanded shales or clay produced on a sintering grate (Aglite, AgIo-
porite) b) Design Mix Concrete
c) Slags expanded mechanically or by water jet process (I'oamed Slag)
d) Sintered pulverized fuel ash aggregate (Lytag) For all-important works involVing large quantities of concrete, it is prefer-
able .to use design mix, which results in considerable cconomy ensuring the
Lightweight concrete is now a firmly established building material
reqlllred strength. The design mix uses the following parameters:-
having extensive applications in most of the developing and developed
countries. Light Weight concrete is used in the block making industry~4 I) Type of cement

,
find also in reinforced and prestressed concrete constructions.~5 2) Aggregate size and grading
High densi.tY concrete with a density, in the range of 30 to 40 kN/mJ. 3) Water / Cement ratio
required for the construClion o'f biologiCal shields for atomic reactors is 4) Aggregate I Cement ratio

I
l
~
 18 Reinforced Concrete Design
·5) Workability of concrete
6) Relation between mean and maximum strength and standard deviation
7) Grade of concrete
Over the years, several mix design methods have been developed based
on the above parameters. The most prominent, well-established and widely
used methods are,
1) The American Concrete Institute Method".
2) The British Method, developed by Teychenne, Franklin and Erntroy'O
3) The Indian Standard Method'l. '
The above methods are based on extensive experiment~l investigations
in their respective counttiys. A critical review of the Indian, British and
American methods of concrete mix design has been reported by Krishna
Reddy" and the author. The salient experimental observations being that
the American and British methods resulted in concrete having compressive
strength nearly equal to the desired character;'tic strength while the Indian
Standard method yields significantly higher compressive strength than the
desired characteristic strength. Also the concrete mixes designed by·the
Indian ,Standard Code method utilized the highest cement content for unit
volume of concrete in comparison with the American and British methods.
For eXh.8ustive information regarding the format of design of concrete
mixes of various ~ypes and computer aided design of mixes, the reader may
refer to the treatise on 'Design of Concrete Mixes' recently revised by the
author'. ' leI: is the characteristic compressive strength of concrel~ expressed in
ej Properties of Concrete
I) Compressive strength
The Characteristics strength is defined as the strength of material below
which not more than 5 percent of the test results are expected to fall. The
concrete mix should be designed for the target strength computed as,
Target Strength =(Characteristic Strength) + (1.65 time the Standard
deviation)
The Indian Standard Code IS: 456-2000 specifies the characteristic
compressive strength of 150 mm cubes at the age of 28days as Grades of
concrete varying from 15 to 50 N/mm' designated as M-15 to M-50. For
Reinforced concrete, the minimum grade of concrete to be used is M-20.
ii) Tensile Strength
Th.e flexural strength of concrete·generally referred to as Tensile strength is
I
I
A1menals "or l<ellljO/'(.."C'U LUIH.. lele
required to compute the on set of visible cracks in a concrete structure
under flexure. For compuration of load factor against cracking, knowledge
of the flexurai strength is required. According to IS: 456-2000, the tensile
strength of concrete can be computed from the compressive strength using
the empirical relation given by
Fiexural strength 10,= 0.7 {i;N/mm'
Wh~re hI: = Characteristic cube compressive strength of concrete (N/nlln
2
)
iii) Modulus of Elasticity
Modulus of elasticity of concrete which is significantly influenced by the
type of the aggregates used, type of cement and mix proportions is an
important property required for the computations of _deflectic)fis of st.I:UC-
tural concrete members which forms an important Hmit state in the design
of concrete mcmbers. In the absence of tcst data, the modulus of e.lasticity
of {::oncrete is normally related to the compressive strength and is com-
puted by the empirical relation recommended by IS: 456-2000 code and is
exp~essed ·as,
E, = 5000 14
Whel'e Ec is the short-term static modulus of elasticity of concrete
expres.sed in N/mm 2.
N/mm2 •
iv) Shriukage of Couerete
The ingredients of concrete and environmental conditions like temperature
and humidity influence the total shrinkage of concrete. Water content in
concrete significantly affects the shrinkage. The IS: Code 456-2000 rec-
ommends the total shrinkage strain as 0.0003 in the absence of test data.
Drying shrinkage in plain concrete may result in surface cracks. Shrinkage
of concrete also influences the deflections of reinforced concrete members.
v) Creep of concrete
The inelastic time dependent strain developed in a concrete member under
sustained loading is 'J.·~ferred to as creep of concrete: Creep of concrete is
influenced by cement content, W/C ratio, A/C .ratio, temperature and
humidity, size of the structural element, type ofioading and' period of
loading. ' ,
 Reitifoiced,C01~cre& Design· Materiai!/·For Reinforced Concrete 21

In the absence of reliable experimental data. the' creep coefficient is I ensure the durability of concrete.
expressed as the ratio of ultimate creep strain / elastic strain at various ages The values of cement content, water/cement I1itio uncllninimum grade
of loading as recommended by IS: 456-2000 are given in Table 2.3 .. of con~retefor normal weight aggregat~s of 20mm nominal maximum size'
are cO/llpiled in Table 2.5 and the adjustments requited for cement content
Table 2.3 Creep coefficient (IS: 456·2000) when other sizes of aggregates used are' shown in Table 2.6.
Age al Loading Creep coefficient
2.2 Table 2.5 Minimum Cement Contents, Maximum W/C Ratio, and Minimum Grade
7 days
28 days 1.6 of concrete for different exposure condition with normal weight aggl'cgates or'ZOmm
1 year 1.1 Nominal maximum size. (Table,~5 of IS: 456·2000)
••
Exposure Plain Concrele Reinforced concrete Minimum Grade of
Creep of concrete significantly affects the deflections of reinforced Concrete
concrete flexural members. Higher creep coefficient results in larger Minimum Maximum Minlmu'm Maximum
deflections. The value of creep coefficient is useful in the computation of cement con- Free WIC cement eon- FreeW/C. P.C.C. R.C.C
time dependent deflections in reinforced concrete members. tent (kglm 3) Ratio tent (kglril 3) Rallo
Mild 220 0.60 300 0.55 M·20
vi) Coefficient of Thermal Expansion Moderate 240 0.60 300 0.50 M·15 M·25
Severe 250 0.50 320 0.45 M·20 M·30
Very severe 260 0.45 340 0,45 M·20. M-35
The coefficient of thermal expansion of concrete. influenced mainly by the Extreme 280 M·25 M·40
0.40 360 0.40
type of aggregate used in concrete is required for the design of structures
like chimneys, water tanks, silos etc. The values recommended in IS:
456-2000 are compiled in Table 2.4. Table 2.6 Adjustments to Minimum Cement contenis for Aggregates other than 20
(1'"
mill nominal maximum size. (Table ·6 of IS: 456.2000)
Table 2.4" Coefficient of Thel'mal Expansion for Concrete
.Nomlnal Maximum Aggregate size (mm) Adjustments to Mlnll)lum Cement Contents
Coefficient of Thermal expansion In Table 2.4.(kglm'l
Type of Aggregate
for concrete I'e 10 +40
20 0
Quartzite 1.2to 1.3>< 10-5 40 . . - 30
Sand stone 0.9t01.2x1(y"s
Granite 0.7 to .95 x 10-s
Basalt 0.8 to 0.95>< 10-s
0.6 to 0.9 x 10-s
b) Freezing and thawing
Lime stone
Under severe exposure conditions where concrete is subjected to freezing
and thawing, it is, preferable to use air-entrained concrete for grades less
vii) Durabiljty of Concrete
than M·50. Air entrained concrete obtained·by using air entraining admix-
a) General Features tures is ideally suited to resist the destructive effects of freezing and thaw-
ing conditions. The IS: 456-2000 code recommends the percentages of
Concrete is durable if it performs satisfactorily without deterioration when . entrained air for nominal maximum size of aggregates of 20 and 40 mm as
exposed to different types of exposure conditions during its service life. shown in Table 2.7. . .
.The main factors influencing durabiljty are, the iype of environment, the I
type of quality ofconcrete, cement content, water/cement ratio, workman- Table 2.7 All' Entrained Concrete
.

ship, cover to the embedded reinforcement, the shape and size of the Nominal Maximum size of Aggregate (mm) Entrained air (percentage by VOlume)
structural member. IS: 456-2000 categorizes the exposure conditions into 20 5± 1%
six types designated as a) mild b) moderate, c) severe d) very severe e)
40 4 ± 1"/"
extreme f) abrasive.
The Indian code prescribes the ~inimiJm cement and maximum water-
cement ratios to be used in concrete for different exposure conditions to
 L.L. -" l\l:;;tlIJVI .... C;U '--'VI' ..... ' ........... .....,~ ..... 6'·
Malerials For Reinforced COllcn.'/t· 23
Table 2.8 Requirements for Concrete Exposed to Sulphate Attack
Nota: (Tabtc·4 of IS: 456·2000)
Ij Minimum Cement Content prescribed in the Table is irrespective of '.

grgdes of cement and it is inclusive of supplementary cementatious Class Concentration of Sulphate Type of cement Requirements for
expressed as S03 dense fully COm.
materials such as fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag or silica pactad concrote
fume. made with
2) . Minimum grade for PCC under mild exposure conditions not speci- Aggregates com.
plying with IS:
fied. 383-1970
In Soil In ground Min. Ma••
c) Exposure to sulphate attack cement Fmo
water (gil)
content wator I
Concrete used in marine structures is subjected to extreme exposure con- (Kglm') comont
ditions due to the sulphate bearing waters of the sea. Depending upon the ratio
concentration of sulphate expressed as SO, ,different types of cements are . '. ..
Total SO, SO, In 2:1
preferred to resist the destructive. effects of stilphate bearing waters in (percent) water 5011
marine environment. extract (gil)
IS: 456-2000 recommends different types of cements from ordinary
Portland to sulphate resulting Portland depending upon the sulphate con- 1 Traces Less than Less than Ordinary portland
Less.than 1.0 0.3 cement or portland
tents. The minimum cement content and the corresponding maximum free slag cement or 280 0.55
0.2
water/cement ratins are compiled in Table 2.8. - portland pozzo-
"
lona cement.
d) Fire resistance, Corrosion and Cover requirements for 330 0.50-
'2 0,2 to 0,5 1.0 to 1.9 0.3 to 1.2 Ordinary portland
R.C.C. members or portland slag or
portland pozzo·
The alkaline environment of Portland .cement concrete generally protects lonacement
embedded steel reinforcement, against corrosion from various environ- Supersulphated 310 0,50
mental agencies. However, the carbonation of hydrated cement gradually cement or sul-
phate resisting
progresses from the surface to the interior of"concrete, tijus reducing ·the . portland cement
.effective protection provided by the concrete against rusting of steel rein- Super sulphaled 330 0.50
3 0.5 to 1.0 1.9 to 3.1 1.2 to 2.5
..'forcement. Many codes have provided for minimum cover requirements in . cement or sul-
. this regard. It is important to note the thickness of clear cOver and the phate resisting
density of concrete in the protection to steel against corrosion and fire portland cement.
Portland pozzo- 350 .. 0.45
resistance. lana or portland
slag cement
Notes: Super sulphated 370 0.45
4 1.0 to 2.0 3.1 to 5.0. 2.5 to 5.0
J) Cement content given in Table 2.7 for ordinary Portland cement is or sulphate
irrespective of grades of cement. . resIsting portlan~
2) Use of supersulphated cement is generally restricted where the pre- cement
More than More than Sulphate resisting 400 0.40
vailing temperature is above 40'C, 5 More than
'2.0 5.0 5.0 portland cement or
3) Supersu]phated cement gives an acceptable life provided that the con- super sulphated
.crete is dense and prepared with a water/cetoent ratio of 0.4 or less. In cement with pro-
mineral acids, down to pH 3.5. tective coatings
. I
Materiais For Reinforced Concrete 25
1 "'Relnjdrced:ContreteDesign
4) The cerilent contents given in class 2 are tlie minimum recommended. Notes:
For SO; contents near the upper limit of class 2, cement contents l)" For main reinforcement up to 12mm diameter bar, for mild·.exposure,
above these minimums are advised. the nOminal cover may be reduced by 5mm.
5) For severe conditions such as thin sections under hydrostatic pressure 2) Unless specified otherwise, actual COllcrete cover should not deviate
on one side only and sections partly immersed, considerations should from the required nominal cover by + 1Omm.
be given to a further reduction of water/cement ratio. . 3) For exposure conditions 'severe' and 'very severe', redudion of 5mm
6) Portland slag cement conforming to IS: 455-1989 with slag content may be made, where concrete grade is M-35 and above.
more than 50 percent exhi,bits better sulphate resisting properties.
7) Where chloride is also encountered along with sulphate in soil or . T~ble 2.10 Nominal covers to all Reinforcement to meet specifled perIods of Fire
ground water, ordinary Portland cement with C,A content from 5 to 8 reslstanee (Table·16A ofiS' 456·2000)
percent ~hall be desirable to be used in" concrete, instead of sulphate Nominal Cover
Fire
resisting cement. Alternatively, a blend of ordinary Portland cement Resistance
and slag may also be used provided sufficient information is available Beams Floors Ribs Columns
on performance of such blended cements in these conditions. Simply Contr· Simply Conti· Simply Conti·
Supported nuOUS Supported nuous Supported nuous
The Indian Standard Code IS: 456,2000 provides for separate nominal mm mm mm
mm mm mm mm
cover requirements to meet durability and fir~ resistance requirements. The
Hours
0.5 20 20 20 20 20 20 40
cover requirements varying from 20 to 75 mm for durability requirements 20 20 40
1.0 20 20 20 20
depend upon the type of exposure conditions as outlined in Table 2.9. 20 40
1.5 20 20 25 20 35
These covers may be used'for reinforcements in beams and slabs. In the 45 35 40
2.0 40 30 35 25
case of longitudinal reinforcements in columns, the code prescribes a 40
minimum nominal cover of not l~ss than 40mm or less than the diameter of·
3.0 60 40 45 35 55 45
·4.0 70 50 55 45 65 55 40
the bars. In the case.of columns' having minimum dimension of 200mm or
under and where reinforcing bars do not exceed 12 mm, a cover of 25mm 2.1.4 Progress in Concrete Strength and its use in Buildings
may be used. For footings of columns where the footing slab is in contact
Over the years, Pllenomenar progress has been acnieved to produce con-
with soil, the mihimum cover shall be 50 mm.
The minimun\ nominal: cover re~uirements to be provided to all rein- ~rete of higher compressive strength through continuous research resulting
forcement includirlg links embedded in normal aggregate concrete to meet m the production of cements of superior quality. In 1950, concrete grades
specified periods of fire resistance varying from 0.5 tl> 4 hours is compiled of M-15 to M-40 were commonly used. The dawn of 21st century has wit-
in Table 2.10. the cover requirements'depend upon tile type of Structural nessed concrete grades ranging from M-30 to M- 100. Table 2.1 I shows the
element such as, beam, "t1o?r, ribs and c~lumns as well tts the support can.. progress in concrete strength from 1959. to 1990. Recent developments in'
ditions, whi'ih include simply supported or continuous members. These the technology of cement production in Japan indiCates that it Is possible to
specification~ are based on the British Code BS: 8110 recommendations
33
achIeve concrete grades exceeding M-IOO by using Ultra High strength
for fire resistance. . . . ., " cements. .
Fig 2.1 shows the various types of reinforced concrete buildings in
Table 2.9 Nominal Cover to meet Durability Rcquirements
(TabJe.16 oflS: 456·2000) , whIch concrete of different grades and steel reinforcement of different'
strengths find extensive applications. 21" ~entury will herald in a big way
Nominal concrete cover. in (mm) not less
Exposure than the use of high strength concrete and ste~1 in the construction industry.
20
Mild 30 2.2 Steel Reinforcement
Moderate 45
Severe 50 Steel bars are primarily used to reinforce- concrete in the tension zone of
Very Severe
Extreme
75 flexural members to compensate for the low tensile strength of con~rete
 Reinforced COllcrete Design Materials For Reinforced Concrete 27
26
a) Mild steel and Medium tensile steel bars conforming to IS: 432 (Part"
N 1200 !)J4
E
E b) High strength deformed steel bars conforming to IS: 1786".
"-
z c) Hard-drawn steel wire fabric conforming to IS: 156636 •
37
C 800 d) Structural steel conforming to Grade A of IS: 2062 which covers
~

E various types of rolled steel sections.

~
u
~
The typical stress-strain ·curves of different grades of steel bars are
o
C shown in Fig. 2.2.
.
~
600
0:: 400
Fe"500

500 Fe - 5
Ol,,-_ _~_ _-';!;,.--_~----,!.;;_=--'--,.,I
o 30 60 90 120 Fe"250
Slrength 01 concrete (N/mm 2 )
A - low rise bu'ildlngs In common
,j B - High rise buildings of last decade
1 - High strength concrete and reinforcement

I: 2 - High strength concrete (ultra) and

high strength reinforcement
3 - High strength concrete and ultra Es = 2 X 10 5 N/mm 2 (for all steels)
high strength reinforcement 100
4 - Ultra high strength concrete and
reinforcement
Fig. 2.1 Types of R.C. BuiJdhlgs and Materials 0'0!:----4:----!-8---1,12---'1,6---.J
20
strain (percent)
Table 2.11 Progress in Concrete Strength Fig. 2.2 Ty,plcal $tress-Strain Curves for Reinforcing Steels
Place Building Height Concrete
Year Reinforcerru:m"is used in reinforced concrete work should be free from
(m) Grade
(Nlmm 2 ) loose mill.scale, loose iust, oil, mud and any other substance, which
Chicago Executive House 150 34 reduces bond between steel and concrete which is vital for composite
1959
Chicago Marine 200 34
1962
Place Division 200 41 actlops. The modnlus of elasticity of steel of all grades is taken- as 200
Monlreal
1964
1964 Chicago 1000 Lake store Drive 212 ,kNfmm'. The characterislic_yield strength of different type~ of steels shall
Lake Point Tower 220 41 "be assumed as· the minimum yield or 0.2 percent proof stress.
1966 Chicago One Shell Plaza 230 51
1970 Houston Watch Tower Palace 267 51 _The nominal diameters presently available in India are 5, 6, 8, 10, 12,
311 South Walker Drive 62
1975 Chicago
320 63 16,18,20,22,25,28,32,36,40,45 and 50mm. The most commonly used
1989 Chicago Tower
1990 Seallle Pacific First Centre - 96,5(124 in 56 .type of reinforcement is the high strength deformed bars with a specified
days) yield strength of 415 N/mm 2, since the surface characteristics with pro-
il and in compression members to increase the load carrying capacity.
truding ribs result in increased bond between concrete and steel in com-
I Steel reinforcement generally used comprises the following types of
parison with mild steel bars with plain surface.

bars
 Reinforced,Concret.e'Design:
.The· stress-strain curve shown in Fig. 2.2. indicates that all steels exhibit
increase in strength beyond the yield -point due to -strain hardening. tlow- CHAPTER 3
ever, for design- purposes .this increase in strength ',beyond yield point is
generally neglected. In general. t~e design c?~es r~c?~m~nded \he use of Reinforcement Specifications For
idealized elasto~plastic stress-stram curve witH an 10ittai lmem elastIc hne
up to yield followed by a line at constant stress, denoting post-yield beho- Structural Concrete Members
viour.

3.1 REINFORCEMENTS IN SLABS

In concrete slabs, the minimum reinforcements to be provided in either
direction together with details of reinforcement spacing and covel' require~
ments a,re shown inPig. 3.1
/,.c.s
R Ia b

..
!! ··t._
T '1
)- d - E Ifeclive depth Overall depth- 0
".
J?pacin~~
. A.
ever A/ .
£
/ /
Distribution Ma in reinforcement
reinforcement
IS: 456 -2000 SpecH ications
1} Minimum Reinforcement: -of:: 0·15 1. of the total cross sectional
area for mild steel and 0·12~
when HYSD bars afe used
2} Spacing:' a) Main Steel-::t- 3d or 300 mm whichever
is smaller
b) Distribution- -l> Sd or 450 mm whichever
Steel . is smaller
3) Maximum -Diameter of Bars: ::} 1/8 0
4) Cover: { 20 mm nor < diameter of bar whichever is higher

Fig.3.1 Reinforcement Speciflcatlolls in R.C. Slabs (IS: 456·2000)

'.
3.2 REINFORCEMENTS IN BEAMS
Generally, beams are provided with main reinforcement on the tension side
for flexure and transverse reinforcement for shear and torsion.

a) Tension Reinforcement
The minimum area of tension reinforcement shall be not less than that
given by the relation,
 Reinforcement Specificatio~IS For Structural Concrete M('mlv rs )'1
30 Reinforced Concrete Design

A, = (0.85 bdlf,l
i-b--t
Where As = Minimum area of tension reinforcement.
b
d

D
=
breadth of beam or breadth of web of flanged sections.
=
effective depth and

=
nverall depth of the member
2
/y ;:; characteristic strength of reinforcement expressed in N/nuri •
r
'Overall
depth=D
Hanger bars

Effective
depth=d

The maximum area of tension reinforcement shall not exceed 0.04 bD

/ Stirrups ,--r-.+i.,--l-Tension
reinforcement Ast
b) Cot:nprcssion Reinforcement
over
The maximum area of compression. reinforcement shall not exceed' 0.04
bD. The compression reinforcement in beams shall be enclosed by stirrups IS: 456-2000 Specifications
fOr effective lateral restraint as shown in Fig. 3.2~
1I Minimum Reinforcement: Ast = (~) or
0) Side Face Reinforcement Ast ~ 0·34 X for mild steel
Cf y =250 N/mm )
When the depth of web or rib in a beam exceeds 750 mm, side face rein-
~ 0·20 X for HYS~ bars
forcement of cross se,tional area not less than 0.1 percent of the web area (fy=415 N/mm )
is to be provided and distributed equally on two faces and the spacing of
, 2) Maximum Reinforcement: ~ 0'04 bD for both tension and
the bars not to exceed 300mm or web thickness whichever is smaller.. compression reInforcement
i 3} Spacing Between 8ars~ 0( diameter of larger. bar nor lesS
d) Transverse or Shear Reinforcement than the maximum size of coarse
aggregate t 5 mm, wh,lchever l.s greater
Minimum' or nominal area of shear reinforcement provided in the form of
4) Cover: --t: 25 mm nor less than the 'diameter of bar
stirrups is computed by the relation,
51 Curtailment, Refer clause 26·2'3 of IS: 456-2000
0.4 bS,
Asv~ 0. 87 / y Fig.3.2 ReJnforcement Specifications In R.C. Beams (IS: 456·20011)
Where A sv =total cross sectional area of stirrup legs in shear circular cross section. Columns are provided with main longitudinul r~iJ~~
S, =spacing of stin'ups along the length of the member forcements and lateral ties to prevent buckling of the main bars. The 11I1111-
b =breadth of beam (or web in a flanged member) mum and maximum limits of reinforcements, minimum numbcr of bnrs
h .;:; characteristic strength of stirrup reinforcement in N/mm 2 and their size, cover requirements and the diametcr and Spaciilg of Jalcnll
which shall not exceed 415 N/mm'. ties are illustrated in Fig. 3.3.
The maximum spacing of shear reinforcement should not exceed 'O.75d' In R.C.Columns with helical ties, at least six main longitudinal rein-
for vertical 'stirrups and 'd' for inclined stirrups at 450 where'd' is the forcements have to be provided within the helical .reinforcel)1ellt. The
effective depth. The maximum spacing is restricted to 300mm. spacing of longitudinal bars measured along the periphery of thc column
The specifications of reinforcements in beams are illustrated in shall not exceed 300 mm. The pitch of helical reinforcement is Jimilcd 10 a
maximum value of 75 mm and a minimum of 25 mm.. Helically reinforced
Fig. 3.2.
columns have marginally higher load carrying capacity than those. with
3.3 REINFORCEMENTS IN COLUMNS ordinary lateral ties due to hi,gher degree of confinement of concrete III the
core.
Reinforced concrete columns are generally of square; rectangular. or I
"".",'>"

·liein!orced COflcr~te. pesign.

CHAPTER 4

Laterat
ties
RectanQular
Main
reinforcement Elastic Theory of Reinforced
Cover
Concrete Sections in Flexure

15:455-2000 Specifications 4.1 ELASTIC THEORY OF REINFORCED CONCRETE

SECTIONS
1) Maximum Reinforcement: :t>o 6·0 X
2) Minimum Reinforcement: ~ 0·8 % The working stress method of design' of reinforced concrete structures
3) Minimum Number of Bars: 4 in rectangular and developed during the beginning of 20th century is based on the elastic
6 in circular columns theory of reinforced concrete sections. The working stress m'ethod is based
4) Diameter of Bars:,~ 12 m m on the 'assumptions that the structural materials behave in a linear elastic
5) Minimum Cover: 40 mm nor diameter of bar whichever manner and the required safety is ensured by restricting the stresses in the
is greater materials under service or' working loads. The permissible stresses in con~
6) Lateral Ties Diameten c4: 1/4 diameter of largest crete and steel are obtained by dividing the characteristic strength of the
longitudinal/bar nor less than 5mm ,
material by the fac.tor of safety to restrict the working stress in the material
Pitch Than: a} Least laleral dimension of member under service loads to be well within the linear elastic phase of the materi-
b) 16 times the smaller diameter of als.
longitudinal reil1forcement
c) 48 times the diameter of tran sverse 4.2 NEUTRAL AXIS DEPTH AND MOMENT OF RESISTANCE
reinforcement
OF SECTIONS
d} For effective arrangement of lateral
ties refer Fig. 6,9, 10 and 11 of
Consi,jer a rectangular sec.tion shown in Fig. 4.1 subjected toa moment
IS:· 455-2000
'M' under working loads.
Fig. 3.3 Reinforcement Specifications in R.C. Columns (IS: 456·2000) Let O'cbc:::= compressive stress devel9ped in Concrete,
D'SI:::: tensile stress developed in steel.
ASI = area of tension reinforcement.
d = effective depth.
b = width of member.
n = neutral axis depth.
k = neutral axis depth factor.
m = modular ratio. = (280/3 a",,)
C :;:;: compressive force in concrete.
T:::: tensile force in Steel.
M:::: moment of Resistance of the section.
 34 Reinforced Concrete Design
For any given section with known values of b, d, OSlO ache' and Asl ' we
can evaluate the neutral a~is depth by equating the first moment of areas
above and below the neutral axis. "
O.Sh.1l 2 =III ,An.(d -11) (2)

By solving Eq. (2), the value of 'n' and 'k' can be determined
In equation (I) substituting, Q = 0.5 0,,,, k.j
Asl
We have M = Q.b:d'.
~ .. d = VMIQb (3)

Fig. 4.1 Stress Distributlon in Rectangular Section

Equation (3) is generally used to check the adequacy of the depth of sec-
tion assumed to resist the~given moment M.
In the cracked section, concrete below the neutral axis is neglected in The Moment of resistance of the section c~mputed from the tension
computations. Below the neutral axis, the steel area is converted into an side is gi ven by
equivalent area of concrete by multiplying the steel area by modular ratio
and this area contributes to the tensile force for equilibrium of th~ section. M =A".n,,(d-i) =A,,' n,,(d - k:) =A".o".d (I-~) = (A;,.o".d.j)
From the stress distribution diagram shown in Fig. 4.1 we have the
relation, A,,=(~)
CJSI").d
(4)
n,,,,)·=(d-II
(aJm II )
=
( kd )
d-kd E9uation (4) is generally used to compute the area of tension reinforcement
in the section to resist the given moment.
From the above relation we get
Neutral axis depth factor

The neutral axis depth factor 'k' depends only on the permissible stresses
Further when the section is subjected to external loading, resisting in concrete and steel 'ache and OS! and modular ratio 'm', The value of 'k'
moment is developed due to compression in concrete and tension in steel. can be evaluated by the following equations.
Moment of Resistance of the section is given by the relation.
M = C (d -11/3) =0.5 n,,,,. b.lI(d -11/3)
Frorn Fig. 4.1, CJ
cbc
(n.lm)- _(.l!!!....)
d-kd

M =0.5 n,,,,. b .kd (d - k:) =0.5 n,,,,. b.k.d'(I- ~) Solving k [ 1']

. = 1+ (n.lmn,,,,),
(5)

.,
•
The factor (1 - ~)is termed as lever arm factor. and is represented by 'j' Also ( mn,,,,)=(~)
O'~l 1 k

Hence, we have Substituting (m. 0,,,,) = (280/3)

(I)
and Solving,

k-(- 280+3(n,,)
280 ) (6)
 !lP,;"f.orc'PdCoricrete Design '.
Equation (5)or (6) can be ·used to evaluate 'k'.·
In the analysis of reinforced concrete sections, it is often necessary to
evaluate the neutral axis depth factor k using Equation (5) or (6). Equation
(3) and (4) is generally used in the design of reinforced concrete sections.
The values of the design coefficients k, j, and Q depend only on the
permissible stresses ac~' a SI and the modular ratio m.
The permissible stresses in steel and concrete according to IS:
456-2000 are shown in Table 4.1 and 4.2 respectively. The values shown
Elastic Theory ofR;!inforced Concrete Sections in Flexure 37
4) When mild steel conforming to Grade II ofIS: 432(Part-l) is used, thO"·
permissible stresses in col.3, or if the design details have already been
worked out on the basis of mild steel conforming to Grade I ofIS: 432
(Part-I), the area of reinforcement shall be increased by 10% of that
required for Grade I steel.
Table 4.2 Permissible stresses in concrete (IS: 456·2000)
(Tabte-2I orIS: 456-2000) .

All values in N/mm 2

Table 4.1 Permissible stresses in Steel Reinforcement (IS: 456·2000)
(Table-22 of IS: 456-2000) Permissible stress
Grade of Permissible stress In ~ompresslon In bond (Avg.) for
Permissible stresses In N/mnf cqncrete plaIn bars In
tension,
Type of Stress in Steel Rein- Mild Medium Tensile bars HY8D (0.,)
forcernElint. Sleel IS: 432 bars
~.No. Bars 18:1766 Bending (crcbc ) DIrect (cr,;o) .
IS: 432 Grade M·10 3.0 2.5
Fe-415
M-15 5.0 4.0 0.6
(1) (2) I (3) (4) . (5)
M·20 7.0 5.0 0.8
m Tension (crot or a. v) Half the guaranteed yield
M-25 8.5 6.0 0.9
a) Up 10 and inclUding 20mm 140 sfress subject 10 a maximum 230

li
b) Over 20mm 130 01190 230 M·30 10.0 8.0 1.0
(ii) Compression in Column 130 130 190 M·35 11.5 9.0 1.1
8ars (osc) M·40 13.0 1.2
10.0
(iii) Compression in bars in beam or
slab when the compressIve
The calculated compressive stress in the sur·
rounding concrete mUllJplied by 1.5 limes the
!i
" resJstance of the concrete is modular ratio or 0sc whichever is lower in Table 4.2 are obtained by applying a factor of safety of 3 to characteris- ~
\
.
laken Into account
tic strength of concrete. Accordfngly the permissiole values of stresses in I
(iv) Compression In bars In a beam
or slab where the compressive Half the guaranteed yield
I
steel are obtained by applying a factor of safety of 1.78. ~;
resistance of the concrete is not stress subject to a maximum In the design of reinforced concrete members, the most commonly I
laken Into account. of190
a) Up 10 and including 20mm 140 190
used grades of concrete are M-20 and M-25. The revised Indian standard
b) Over 20mm 130 190 code IS: 456-2000 prescribes M-20 as the minimum grade of concrete for
reinforced concrete while M-15 and M-IO may be used for plain concrete
Notes: constructions.
For Design office use, it is convenient to use the values of design coef-
I) For high yield strength deformed bars of Grade Fe-500, the permissi-
ficients 'j' and 'Q' to check the depth of the section and to compute the
ble stress in direct tension and flexural tension shall be 0.55 J,. The
area of reinforcements required to resist the working moment 1M' using
permissible stresses for shear and compression reinforcement shall be
equations (3) and (4). The values of design coefficients are compiled in
as for Grade Fe-415.
Table 4.3, for the most commonly used gradeS of concrete.
2) For welded wire fabric conforming to IS:1566, the permissible value
in tension is 230 N/mm2.
3) For the purposes of this standard, the yield stress of steels for which 4.3 BALANCED, UNDER REINFORCED AND OVER
there is no clearly defined yield point should be taken to be 0.2 percent REINFORCED SECTIONS
proof stress.
III reinforced concrete sections, the depth of neutral axis generally deter-
mines the type of section. The analysis of reinforced concrete sections
38 Reinforced Concrele Design Elastic Theory ofReinforced Concrete Sections in Flexure 39

Table 4.3 Design Coefficients

k J Q
ad< M a.
(N/mm 2
)
(N/mm 2) Referring to the Fig. 4.3
140 OAOO 0.87 1.22
7 13.33
230 0.288 0.90 0.91
280 0:250 0.92 0.80
140 0,400 0.87 1.48
8.5 11 !
230 0.288 0.90 1.10
280 0.250 0.92 0.98
140 OAOO 0.87 1.74 _ --,,/L-.:;Actual neutral
10 9.33 1.30 -~xis
230 0.288 0.90
, 280 0.250 0.92 1.15

include the deiennination of 'critical neutral axis' which depends only on

the pennissible stresses in concrete and steel and modular rat.io and the
actual neutral axis, which is inf]uenged by the sectIOnal properlles and the Fig. 4.3 Depth of Actual Neutral Axis
quantity or'reinforcement used in the section.
Referring to the Fig. 4.2 Let n. = actual neutral axis depth. By equating the first moment of
Let b = width of section areas above and below the neutral axis, we have
d =effective; depth. 0.5 bli; = mAu (d - na)
nc = critical neutral axis depth.
As! = Area of tension reinforcement. Solving this quadratic equation. the actual neutral axis depth can be
0Sl = Permissible Tensile stress in steel. determined.
O'cbc = Permissible Compre~sive stress in concrete.
1/! =modular ratio =(280/3",,,) Case-! Under reinfol"ced section

N A
rr d
f-O"cbc-f-

.,1<..,-. '_-7I'-~crlllcal neutral

If na < ne• the section is under reinforced. The moment of resistance is
computeq from tension side with steel reaching the maximum permissible
stress O'st and the moment of resistance is computed from Fig. 4.4.

O'cbc<Permisslble

ti
'1"" '-axls stress
c
nL.= )- - - '

+(~)+
Flg.4.2 Depth of Critical Neutral Axis

From the stress distribution diagr~m

cr'b< [/'] Fig. 4.4 Under Reinforced Section

(crs/m)= d-lIc
Solving. the critical neutral axis depth is computed by the relation . If M, =Moment of Resistance.
:j
 '40
I
"Reinforced Concre!e Design Elastic Theory ofReinforced Concrete Sections. in Flexure 41

M,= T. (d -n/3) .""."

<rebe = P,rmlsslble
Mr ~ ~Sl AS! (d - n/3)
--r-- ,I' . stress

Where (J" = 140 N/mm' for Grade-I, Mild steel. na=nc-=n !---,'+-C
I,
= 2]0 N/mm' for HYSD bars.

Case-2 Over reinforced Section

--+- "
i
.1
II'

If /la> nco the secti~n is overreinforced (more reinforcement used) and the
moment of resistance is computed froin the" compression side since the
concrete in" the extreme fibres reach the p~rmissible stress 0cbc first; hence
Flg.4.6 Balanced Section
the moment of resistance is computed from Fig. 4.5.
Also

Equating C=T

0.5 act.>c k.d.b. = 0.\1 A>!

Hence percentage steel reinforcement in the balanced section is given by

n·· Pb= - -
I bd [ IOOA"J =50k [a;",]
-0'1 (1)

Fig. 4.5 Over Reinforced Secllon Also.

If M r = moment of resistance. kd
M'b =0.5a,,,,.b.k,d(d- 3 )
Mr == 0.5 a cbc ~ " a. b (4 - n/3)
Where (J,t< = 7 N/mm' for M-20 grade concrete. M'b =O.5a,,,,,b,k.d'(I-~J
Case-] Balanced Section M rb
,.
,
= 0.5 a .b.k.d ,J (2)
dlC

If na =nc =n. then the section is balanced. In this case, the ~teel and con...
crete reach their ~aximum permissib.le stresses siinultaneously· and .th~
Qb =(~)=0.5k(t-~3)=O.5k.j
a .b.d
cbc

moment of resistance can be computed either from the compression Of
tension side.
From Fig. 4.6
M rb = a.l.Aid - n13) = 0.5 acbc.n .b.(d - n13)
Where Mrb ;::: resisting moment of balanced section~
Hence, Equations (I) and (2) can 'be conveniently used to compute the
percentage reinforcement and moment of reSistance of balanced sections in
which steel and concrete reach the permissible stresses simultaneously and
the section is economical since optimal utilization of materials is achieved
in balanced sections. Typical values of the design constants Ptb and Qb for
different grades of concrete and steel most commonly used in structural
concrele are compiled in Table 4.4.
=:('; :=..
:;:. 2 ~~3'g~~_
<-
'J
rl ~(tIC'II=::::O::l
-~=-.....j
..... ~
lJ'>~o..,o.oO"..,"O
:::r''-<~otn'''~g..,
"g ~ S2: ~ "9. o' < S·.o _. 0. g :D ;;0
_. " "
~ -:;;n::l~n:::::lv.lp'.
~ ~
~ ~ ~
~
-
Z
3 ~ ... ::. ::.. rn _ § So :;' g :J;:IQnr- o
o 0 Lrt ::l~§O::r'a.oo_ a (') (D (tl (I)
;::
" ~
~ ~ ""I1 e:. 0.. ~ 0 :::. '='" ("0 ::0.' ~
or
3~~~G)
c < "" ~ ~ g 50 00' !t
..
(l)<otIlE.in
(;5 ~ 5 ::l ::l
'."
rj;"
~@J~~Bg,;:s~~
_ ffi.m3~g-
,';j".
... ~~
§0.. ~ ~
_. Vol '." ....q or iii" g,
-...J~_oo;:;:@...,.,
f'- :.., '''0''<::::.:::: 000. go (')
o ~ :S. Q. I;/)

~ " "" ~
..... ~eo_._::Ev.l ~ g ~ i
~
ttl
s- -
"" - "0 ;:C
:::s C1l <; 0.. _ ::l p;, :::..: I>l:l' ~
0. a () 0.. ~ O'~ _ g
11
"0
_. til

"
"

~
"

3
C
2 ~cn¢gO'Q(5('tlc"Ol .y
~ ~ s:
-~ '" "t l
~
~.
""
o ;: 3 2 OO....,.,~'<·..c8O"oO
. OO--Go..,G ..... g ~
fl' ~G~ ~ ~ ~
~ "
~
:l' @e 00·
~ "
g~ "c.-<
" 0
~
3
;;
3
1J'>::l
1l go
?" ::E C 0
-'§::l
S-:.... U .., ~.
0 p;, Vol
."
""
"g"liQ',o..
0- 0 ~ £,
o
£,
co
U..,
_. @
(§ _.
x c.
(ll 0.-'·:::: :::s
0 < g ~ ~
'Eo en0 0 en '3 . '0""'
~ ~''::'@:=Jg.
-::I 0 ..,:.:>_.(')
~,,"o. ~ ':::8"
3 g: Ol

'" 1"'1"'1"'1"'["'1"' ."!l.-

?" ...... ;" < 0 __ 0.
o - "
1:' " o 5' ~ ~~t;~~~
~1l
0-10 s £o 0..
(1)

:.:> 0
::I

""'0
.,...
....... '="'0'<. _ ......
0 0
./:lo. -...j(,,)<O .... CO Ul ~
"
(ll
:::.: (1 (i :::: ::s 3
~
0' p;,
~ ::! C o$E: 0.."0 00
? ~ 2 - ~ 3 ........... '"Ii
~ (ll en ;a.
::I ~
~
(\l
~
c- c- o
~
...,~

~
0- @
_. Ol Ol :.:>:=gg:9:c:r ~.
~
~ .., 5. ;:=··c Jg e-
-"
" ..,
... g
"s S 2.
g,
::E8.~[~g
. " ::;:S-:.:>n;::.:n
"'''
~ 3

o -
,,""
"
a e.
;
D D o
d'
("0
0..
a'
o
::::"0-'''':::0.-
:::: (T,l
os::!£.
re,.0o&loc
0 ~"
..,
..... 8 ........ _ : : l
cr,g. 0" "g :S. 5- g.
a .....
~

'8" \"'1"'1"'1"'1"'1"'g
....
(j)
0
to:I
(0
....
to:I
I\)
I\)
(0
....
(j)
I\)
()'I
(.,)
•
(1l

s-g 3~ g~<"fS-'o..,
"
,,""
 j
~

.
--rici-,
~ ~

"<..a
~:;

as.'wai)-ulvrtiffist\trtc;t*-·-tf5I,Dliwan-e ,C-xitJ9'
, f
.;;;,~

.fiji'
~

i r .f~t d .n"?"~1,~",q,~,t:. !k';n.

:'A
.....
Table 4.6 Areas of Bars At Given Spacings Values in cm l per Meter Width

Spac.cm Bar Diameter, mm

i';'
6 8 10 .12 14 16 18 20 22 25 28 32
~ ~
5 5.65 10.05 15.71 22.62 30.79 40.21 50.89 62.83 76.03 98.17 123.15 160.85 '.~
6 4.71 8.38 13.09 18.85 25.66 33.51 42.41 52.36 63.36 81.81 102.68 34.04 :~
7 4.04 7.18 11.22 16.16 21.99 28.72 36.35 44.88 54.30 70.12 87.96 14.89
8 3.53 6.28 9.82 14.14 19.24 25.13 31.81 39.27 47.52 61.36 76.9 100.53 ~
.<;
9 3.14 5.58 8.73 12.57 17.10 22.34 28.27 34.91 42.24 54.54 68.42 89.36 ...
;~
2.83 5.03 7.85 11.31 15.39 . 20.11 25.45 31.42 38.01 49.09 61.57 80.42
10
11 2.57 4.57 7.14 10.28 13.99 18.28 23.13 28.56 34.56 44.62 55.98 73.11 "tJ
12 2.36 4.19 6.54 9.42 12.83 16.75 21.21 26.18 31.68 40.91 51.31 67.02 ~
;0'
2.17 3.87 6.04 8.70 11.84 15.47 19.57 24.17 29.24 37.76 47.37 6U6
13
14 2.02 3.59 5.61 8.08 11.00 14.36 18.18 22.44 27.15 35.06 43.98 57.45 "
15 1.88 3.35 5.24 7.54 10.26 13.40 16.96 20.94 25.34 32.72 41.05 53.62
16 1.77 3.14 4.91 7.07 9.62 12.57 15.90 19.63 23.76 30.68 38.48 50.27
17 1.66 2.96 4.62 6.65 9.05 11.83 14.97 18.48 22.36 28.87 36.22 47.31
18 1.57 2.79 4.36 6.28 8.55 11.17 14.44 17.45 21.12 27.27 24.21 44.68.
19 1.49 2.65 4.13 5.95 8.10 10.58 13.39 16.53 20.01 25.84 32.41 42.33
20 1.41 2.51 3.93 5.65 7.70 10.05 12.72 15.71 19.01 24.54 30.79 40.21.
21 1.35 2.39 3.74 5.39 7.33 9.57 12.12 14.96 18.10 23.37 29.32 38.30
22 1.28 2.28 3.57 5.14 7.00 9.14 11.57 4.28 17.28 22.31 27.99 36.56
23 1.23 2.18 3.41 4.92 6.69 8.74 11.06 13.66 16.53 21.34 26.77 34.97
24 1.18 2.09 3.27 4.71 6.41 8.38 10.60 13.09 15.84 20.54 25.66 33.51

(COil/d... )

Table 4.6 (Contd.)

Spac.cm
Bar Diameter, mm

25
6
1.13
8
2.01
10
3.14
12 14 16 18 20 22 25 28 32 ."<;.!:l::?
4.52 6.16 8.07 10.18 12.57 15.20
26 1.09 1.93 3.02 19.63 24.63 32.17
4.35 5.92 7.73 9.79 12.08 14.62 . "'l
18.88 23.68
27
28
1.05
1.01
1.86
1.79
2.91
2.80
4.19
4.04
5.70
5.50
7.45 9.42 11.64 14.08 18.18 22.81
30.93
29.79 ""~
29
7.18 9.09 11.22 13.58 17.53 21.99 28:76 ~
0.97 1.73 2.71. 3.90 5.31 6.93 8.77 10.83 13.11 16.93 21.23 27.73 -Q,
30 0.94 1.68 2.62 3:77 5.13 6.70 8.48 10.47
:.,
12.67 16.36 20.52
32
34
0.88 1.57 2.45 3.53 4.18 6,28 7.95 9.82 11.88 . 15.34 19.24.
26.81
25.13
"
~
0.83 1.48 2.31 3.33 4.53 5.91 7.48 9.24 11.18 14.44 18.11 , "
"
36 0.78 1.40 2.18 3.14 4.28 23.66.:
5.58 7.07 8.73
'",.~"'
38 0.74 10.56 1.3.63 17.10 22.34
1.32 2.07 2.98 4.05 5.29 6.70
40 8.27: 10.00 12.92 16.20 21.16
0.71 1.26 1.96 2.83 3.85 5.03 6.36 7.85 9.50 12.27 15.39 20.11
"i<
~.

'""
~.
g'...
S',
::J
~
"~

&

':;='."
46 Reinforced Concrete Design Elastic Theory of Reinforced Concrete Sections in Flexure 47

These tables are very useful in design computations o{ reinforcements Solving II, ; 100.2 mm..
in structural concrete members like slabs, beams and coluInns.
e) Critical Neutral Axis Depth
4.4 ANALYSIS OF EXAMPLES OFR.C.SECTIONS
If fl c ;:; Critical neutral axis depth.

~ J500::: 144.3 rum.

4.4.1 Example
(.

A singly reinforced concrete beam with an effective span of 4m has a rect- J333,,7

angular section with a width of 250 mm and an overall depth of 550 mm.
Sin~e J.Z a < nc , the section is underreinforced.
The beam is reinforced with 3 bars of 10 mm diameter Fe'415 HYSD bars
at an effective depth of 500 mm. The self-weight of beam together with the
f) Moment of Resistance
dead load is 4 kN/m. Calculate the maximu.m permissible live load on the
beam. Assume M-20 grade concrete.

a) Data ; (230 x 235.5)(500 - 100.2/3)

Effective Span; 4 m = (25.3 x 10') N.mm

Width of beam; 250 mOl ;25.3 kN.1ll
Effecti ve depth; 500 mill
Overall depth; 550 mm 2 g) P~rmissible Live load
Tension steel (A,,) ; (3 x 78.5); 235.5 mm .
Materials: M-20 Grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
M q ; Live load moment; [25.3 - 8J ; 17.3 kN.m
If q; live load on beam . .
. b) Permissible Stresses

(feb<:'::: 7 N/mm
2 11/ = 13.33
q= (8;") = CX4~7.3) ; 8.65 kN/m

(J ; 230 N/mm' lie = 0.288d .. (Permissible Live ]oadpn beam = 8.65 kN/m
"
4.4.2 Example
c) Loads and Moment

Self-weight and dead 10"(1;£; 4 kN/m. A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular section 300 mm wide by 650
mm over all depth is reinforced with 4 bars of 32 mm diameter at an effec-
.. M,;(0.125 x4X4 ')=8kN.m tive depth of 600 mm. Usi~g M-20 Grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD
bars·, estimate the moment of resistance of the section.
d) Actual Neutral Axis Depth
a) Data
If fl a ;:; depth of actual neutral axis.
. Width of beam = 300 mm
0.5 b n;=m.A sl (d -n a) . Effective depth = 600 mm

x
(0.5 x 250 x II;); 13 235.5(500 - II,)
 Elastic Theory ofReinforced Cf!ncrete Sections in Flex.ure .49
tension steel; (A,,) ; (4 x 80M; 3216 lUlU': a) Data
Materials:M-20 Grade concr,te
Fe-415 HYSD bars.
Moment of Resistance;;; M r ::: 65"kN.m
Width of beam; b
b) Permissible Stresses
Effective depth; d.
2 III ; 13.33
Materials: M-20 Grade Concrete.
CJ'cbc ;::; 7 N/mm Fe-415 Grade HYSD bars.
2
a st ;::; 230 N/mm ",; 0.288 d
b) Permissible Stresses
e) Neutral Axis Depth
7 N/mm2
O'cbc::: Q; 0.91.
If na ;::; depth of actual neutral axis.
a" ; 230 N/mm' j; 0.90
(b 11;12) = 111 .A'l Cd - l l a ) III ; 13.33 b; 0.5 d

(0.5 x 300 II,'); [13.33 x 32.16 (600 -II,)] c) Cross Sectional Dimensions
" ' "
Solving ",; 295.16 J;l1IU.
M,; Q.b.d'
Critical neutral axis depth is (65 x 10'); (0.91 x 0.5 x d x d')

~] d;[1+(~)]600;172.8IUm;
I Solving d; 522.8 mm
I .'. b; (0.5 x 522.8); 261.4 mIU
I "';[1+
"~ "~ """<be 13.33x7 Cover; 40 mm.
I
J'l . c~ Adopt a section 265 mm by 570 mm.
I d) Moment of Resistance Provided, d; (570 - 40) ; 530 mm.
I

I Since n a > /lc. the section is over reinforced.'

':' '4 d) Reinforcements
I
1
., Moment of Resistance is computed as
I
M r = O.5'O'cbc.b.lla Cd -1I/3j Area of tension Reinforc~meni is
1
I
1
I
~ [0.5 x7 x300x295.16(600- 295.16/3)J AM::::;
(-
J(
M,- =
rJ".j.d
65xlQ' J -593mm2
230 x 0.9 x 530 -
1, ; (155.46 x to') N.mm
1 4.4.4 Example
; 155.46 kN.m.

A r~inforced concrete beam of rectangular section is required to resist a

4.4.3 Example serVIce moment of 120 kN.m. Design suitable dimensions and reinforce-
The cross section of an RC.C beam of rectangular section is to be. ments for "the balanced section of the-beam assuming M-20 grade concrete
and Fe-415 grade HYSD bars.
designed to resist a bendini moment of 65 leN.tn. Assuming the width of
beam as half the effective depth, determine the dimensions of the beam and
a) Data
the area of tension reinforcement--for the· balanced section. Adopt M-20
Grade cOncrete and fe-415 Grade HYSD'bars.
Moment of Resistance of the balanced section; M ; 120 kN IU
Width of beam; b ,b'
 Elastic Theory of Reinforced Concrete Sections in Flexure 51
50 Ul'il{/'orced Corycrete D~sig1i

Effool ive depth = d

Mllterilll s: M-20 Grade concrete and Fe-415 Grade HYSD bars.
~
no
I
f--
N
+--300 -t-
1 ti'r
2 #16
7.N/mm
2

no=250'
I
T' N
,<the=

A,
'r •
OCbc= 5-6
N/mm 2
b) pcrlldsslble slresses d=850

~I'= 7 N/mm'
v,:"
~ =230N/mm
V"
11/ = 13.33
2
Assume b = (dI2)

Lf--I--I-iL
J +rO'sl Iml +
2#201.2#22
c) Cross Sectional Dimensions
Fig. 4.9 Reinforced Concrete Sectiion
11) Dala
Forth. balanced section (Table 4.4)
Area of tension steel (A,,) = 2 bars of 20 mm diameter and 2 bars of 22 mm
M,. ,)=Q,=0.1301
( diameter. - .
""" .b.d
... A" ,= 1388 mm'
120x 10' ) = Q = 0.1301 Area of compression steel (A,,) = 2 bars of 16 mm diameter = 402 mm'
( 7xO,Sdxd' , 'Covei' to compression steel = de = 50 mm
Width of beam = b = 300 m z
Solving d = 641 mm.
. EtTeetive depth = d = 641 mm Effective depth = d = 850 mm
Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
co\'er = 39 nun.
Adopl ol'erall depth, D = 680 mm,
Width of seclion b = 0.5 d = 321 mm. b) Permissible Slresses

d) Rdnforcemellts 111=13 and me =l.5m I

I,' •
~1
Rc.~infi.m:ement in balanced section is computed from Table 4.4 as n, = 0.288 d I

= (100A,,) = 0.438
,I
Plb bd c) Deplh of Neulral Axis ,
I
=(~)=(0.438X321X64I)= 901.23 mm' Let n. = actual depth of neutral axis
,

I
A" 100 100 .. First moment of the areas above and below the neutral axis yields the Ph ••
I
A_h'pt 3 bars of 20mm (A", = 942mm') following relation. I
I
O.5b.n.' + (1.5m -I)AIe (n 8 -d)=mA
c 51
(d-n)8 I
I
4.4,5 Rx1lmple
(0.5 x 300n;) + [(1.5 X13) - IJ402(n,- 50) = (13 X1388)(850 -n,)
C I ,pute the moment of resistance of the reinforced concrete section
Sl::,'" 11\
Fig. 4:9. The beam section is reinforced with tension and com- Solving, n. = 250 mm ,
.Critical neutral axis depth is given by the relation
pression reinforcement. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD .,; .

ba....
n, = '.1
[I '"
+ (m.oo",
J d = [,I
+
I]
13)(7 .
,'"
'.E'C, 850 = (0.284 X850) ",241.4 mm.
'
. "'
"52 Rein!orcedConcrete. Design Elastic' Theory ofReinforced Concrete S~ctions in Flexure 53

Since na >. ne. ih~ section is over reinforced. cover 01' 50 mm. Using M-20 grade concrete and Fe·415 HYSD bars
compute a) the actual neutral axis. b) the critical neutral axis and c) tli;
:. Moment of resistance of the section is computed from the compression
s~fe momcllt.of resist~nce of the section. .
side as
7) A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular section 30b mOl wide by
M. = 0.5 ",,,,,.II,.b(d - 11,13) + (1.5m - I)A~cr',,,,,(d - do) 600 mOl overall depth is reinforced with 3 bars of 36 mOl diameter at
= (0.5 x 7 x 250 x 300) [850- (250/3)] + [(1.5 x 13) - 1]402 x 5.6(850 - 50) an effective depth of 550 mOl. The section is also reinforced with 2
bars of 25 mm diameter on-the compression side at an.effective cover
= (234.56 x 10') N.mm of 50 mOl. Adopting M-15 grade concrete and Fe-250 grade steei,
calculate a) the stresses developed in 'concrete and steel corresponding
= 234.56 kN.m
to a service load moment of 175 kN.m. b) Determine the safe moment
of resistance of the section.
4.5 EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE
8) A reinforced concrete rectangular section 300 mOl wide by 600 mm
overall depth is reinforced with 4 bars of 25 mOl diameter at an effec-
1) A singly reinforced simply supporled beam 200 mm wide by 550 mm tive cover of :So mOl on the iension side. Assuming M-2D grade con-
overall depth is reinforced with 4 bars of 12 mm diameter at an effec- crete and Fe·415 HYSD bars, determine the allowable bending
tive depth pf 500 mm. The self weight of the beam together with the moment "and the stresses in steel "and concrete corresponding to this
dead load is 3.5 kN/m. Adopting M.20 grade concrete and Fe-4l5 moment.
HYSD bais estimate.the maximum permissible live load on the beam.
2) A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular seclion 300 mm wide by
650 mm deep is reinforced with 4 bars of 25 mm diameter at an effec·
tive depth of 600 mm. Calculate the neutral axis depth and estimate
the safe moment of resistance of the seCtion adopting M-25 grade'
concrete and Fe-4l5 HYSD bars. . .
. 3) A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular section 250.mm wide by
550 mm deep is reinforced with 4 bars of 32 mm diameter at an effec- .
tive depth of 500 mm. Using M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD
bars, calculate the safe moment of resistance of the beam.
4) A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular section 350 mm wide by
750 mm overall depth is reinforced with 3 bars of 20 mm diameter at
an effective depth pf700 mm. Adopting M·30 grade concrete.and fle-
500 grade steel reinforcement, calculate the safe moment of resistance
of the section. If the beam spans over 5 m, estimate the safe
permissible live load on the beam.
5) A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular section is to be designed to
resist a service load moment of 200 kN.m. Assuming the width of the
beam as half the effective depth. calculate the dimensions of the beam
adopting M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
6) A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular section having a width of
400 mm and overall depth 850 mm is reinforced with 4 bars of 25 mm
diameter both on the compression and tension sides at -an effective
 Limit State Method ofDesign 55
1 Factor of safety applied to the yield or ultimate

I CHAPTER 5

Limit State Method of Design ,

1900-1930
Working or
permissible
stress" method
2
stress to get permissible, stress
Sfructu~e designed t~ support working or seryice
loads WIthout exceeding the permissble
stresses in concrete and steel
Inadequacy of the method - Actual safety
'

'against ultimate loads' not known

I I
1 load factors applied to working loads to
estimate ultfmate Joads
5.1 PHILOSOPHY OF LIMIT STATE DESIGN .1930-1960
2 Safety factors applied to the ultimate
strength of materials
The inadequacies of the elastic and ulrimate load methods of design paved Ultimate
load/strength 3 Structure' designed to suppor t the design
the way for the limit state method of design with a semi-probabilistic ultimate loads .
,method
approach. Limit state design is a method of designing structures based on a Inadequacy ot the method' - Serviceability
statistical concept of safety and the', associated statistical probability of aspects such as deflection and cracking at
fuilure. St~uctures designed should satisfy the dual criterion of service toads are not' considered
"

a) Safety and j 1960 to date 1 Structure designed tosatisfyall the limit

states such as
b) Serviceability. limit state a) ,strength - Collapse
, Safety may be defined as an acceptable degree of security against complete method '. b) Serviceability ~ Deflection and cracking
~ 2 ,Statistical"probability concepts incorporated
collapse or failure: which in concrete structures can occur by various
limit state for loads and strengths
modes such as compression, tension, flexure, shear, totsion, fatig~e or their method 3 CharQ.cteri~tlc loads',and characteristic strengths
combinations. incorporated obtained by 'applying partial safety factors
in various for load and material 'strengths
Serviceability requirement means that the member or structure should not national codes
iil its intended lifetime deteriorate to stich an extent that it fails to fulfil its This method overcomeS the inadequacies of
working stress and ultimate load methods
function for which it is designed. In concrete structures, this state may be ,

reached due to excessive deflection, cracking, ·vibration, corrosion of rein-
forcement etc.
Limit state design philosophy'" 39. 40 uses the concept of probability and
is based on the application of the method of statistics to the variations that
occur in practice in the loads acting on the structure and the strengths of
the materials. The evolution of limit State method of design ov~r the years
is presented in Fig. 5.1.
5.2 ~IMIT STATE DESIGN AND CLASSICAL RELIABILITY
THEORY
In Limit state design, probabilistic concepts are explicitly incorporated for
the first time. Applications of classicaJ..reliability theory"'" to structural
design require comprehensive statistical data regarding loads and strengths
and their exact shapes of pormal distribution curves. At present the prob~­
bilities of failure that are socially acceptable must be kept very low (1 in 'a
million). At such low levels, the probability of failure is very sensitive to
the exact shape of the normal distributiop curves. To determine exact,'
shapes of normal distribut10n curves, we require very large numbers of
Fig. 5;. Evolution of Limit State Design Method
statistical data and such comprehensive data is not yet available. In partic-
ular,sufficient numbers of extreme values of the strengths of complete
structures (to qefine accurately the shapes of the tails of the 'normal
distribution curves) may never be available~ .
In.a simple example, only one type of loadarid one-strength variables
are used. For a real structure, there will in general be many types of loads
and many modes of failure, nonhally with complex correlations between
thenfmaking it very difficult to calculate.the probability of failure". Hence
in the limit state design, our eJ.1gineering experience and judgement have
been used to modify and to remedy the inadequacies· of earlier design
methods and partly use the probabilistic concepts. Hence, it is appropriate
to desi~nate the limit slate design met,hod currently practiced as Semi
pr~balJllIstlc approach to structural design. ,
5.3 LIMI'I: STATES
"A structure may become unfit for its intended purpoSe in a number of ways
iillenns of either Safety or,Serviceability. The prominent limit states are:

The structure may collapse due to' rupture of one or more critical sections,
as a result of static, sustained, pulsating or dynamic loading ,or 19ss of
overall stability) disintegration due to fire or frost.
b) Serviceability Limit State
,Limit State Method of DeSIgn J I
I
strength less than the, characteristic s t r e n g t h . "
In the absence of statistical data, the characteristic strength of concrete Ii
and steel maybe taken as the works cube strength and minimum proof or
yield strength respectively as recommended in the current codes.
I'
Since the materials in the structur""re likely to differ in quality from
those tested, design strengths are obtained by dividing the characteristic
strength by Ym, the appropriate partial safety factor for the Limit State
being considered. The proposed values for the partial safety factors are as

The structure may exhibit excessive deflections or displacements adversely given in Table 5. J.
In contrast the ACI Code'" provides for these variations in material
affecting the' finishes causing discomfort' to the users. Also the structure strengths and workmanship in the form of capacity reduction factors.
may suffer excessive local damage resulting in cracking or spaIling of
Hence we have
concrete which impairs the efficiency or appearance of the, structure.
" (CharacteriStiC. strength)
DeSIgn Strength = n 'I SaJely
.artw. ~ t or
.r. rae
5.4 SAFETY FACTORS

."
'j~" 1" '
Safety is expressed in terms of the probabi'lity that the structure will not
become unfit for its intended function during its useful life that is the
structure will not reach a limit state. The initial idea 'of referring to a single
Table 5.1 Partial safety Factors for Material Strengths (Yin)
(IS: 456·2000)

LImit State
Deflection Local Damage
failure criterion has been replaced by the comprehensiv.e concept of multi- Malerial Collapse
1,00 1,00
ple limit states. With this concept the local or the overall behaviour in all Steel 1.15
1.00 1.00-or1 ;30
stages-elastic. cracked, inelastic and ultimate-are considered. In the limit: Concrete, 1.50
state approach, a structure'is considered as well designed if it could be '
shown that the probability of any limit state being attained is substantially 5.6 CHARACTERISTIC AND DESIGN LOADS AND
constantJor all the component members and for the structure as a whole
PARTIAL SAFETY FACTORS
and that consequently, the latter posses adequate and uniform structural
safety. Due to the number of variables involved, a rational determination of the Characteristic loads are expressed as
the safety of a structure, based on probability theory is not yet practical in
the design office. Partial safety factors are therefore introduced for each
Characteristic Load (F) =[Mean Load + k x Standard Deviation]
limitstate and these consist of 1m , reduction factor for characteristic Where k is a factor, which ensures that the probability of the characteristic
strength of materials and y, , enhancement factors for characteristic loads load being exceeded is small. For the immediate future, the characteristic
, loads can not be assessed in this way'due to lack of statistical information
on the structure. '
about the nature of loads and it is necessary to assu'me that the characteris- ' ,11 ,:
tic loads are equivalent to the values of loads currently recommended in I '
5,5 CHARACTERISTIC AND DESIGN STRENGTHS AND'
PARTIAL SAFETY FACTORS
the loading standards IS: 875 17-20 • The revised code IS: 456-2000 I' '
distinguishes between three types of loading in traditional use which are 1

The variation in the properties of concrete ancl steel are expressed as char- dead, imposed or live and wind load. In addition, loads resulting from the
effects of creep, shrinkage or temperature ate also considered if their effect
I. ,
1
i, I
'I'
acteristic values related tathe' mean values and standard variation.
Characteristic Strength (f) = [Mean strength - k x Standard Deviation]
is judged to be significant. . ' , :1
The characteristic loads do not allow for lack of precision in design
Where' k' is a factor chosen to ensure that the probability of the character- calculation and inadequacies in the methods of analysis and construction.
istic stre)lgth not being exceeded is small. Many of the national o('(des As such the desigidoads are obtained by enhancing the characteristic loads
including the Indian standard code IS: 456 - 2000 have recommended a
value of 1,65 for k so that only 5 percent of the test results could have ,a
 58 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Method of Design 59

by suitable partial safety fc:(;tors fOf the various limit.states as given in The characteristic loads and strengths are expressed in terms of the
Table 5.2. Hence we have, standard deviation, mean strength, and the probability ~actor as,
Design Load; (Characteristic loati) x (Partial safety factor) F = F", + 1.65 °" l._.';'

Table 5.2 P<lrtlal Safety Factors for Loads (Yr)

. fc~::::. /,,, -1.65.0"
(Table,IS Of IS: 456·2000)
Where F ;characteristic load
Load Limit S'.ale of COllapse I Limit stale of Serviceability
Fm ;mean load
Comblnalion DL T LL WL DL LL WL
DL+ LL 1.5 - 1.0 1.0 - fe, = characteristic strength
DL+WL 1.50,0.9'1 1.5 1,0 - 1.0 fm ; mean strength
(J = standard deviation.
DL+LL+WL 1,2 1.0 0.8 ,0,8

Note , ..
I) While considering eanhquake effects, sub"ilule EL for WL
2) For the Limit slates of serviceability, the valu,es of Yr given in this
Table are applicable for shan-term effects. While assessing the Long- .
term effects due to creep,lhe dead load and that part of the Livc-Load
likely to be permanent may only be considered.
* This value is to be considered when stability against overturning or I
stress reversal is critical. I

,,r'"
The interaction between load effects and strength is shown in Fig, 5.2
~,j.tJ
where the normal distribution curves for loads and .material- strength are
superposed.
Effect of
loads
,,
f

Characteristic
~rength
strength of
concrete or steet
l'
r .~
Load ' I I

II

Fm Flc. 1m
Load & strength variables
,n limit state design
F; Fm + "65 CT}For good
,,"=Im - "65CT design
Fig. 5.2 Classical Reliability Model for Strength Design
 uli;m~teStre;'gti.ofRemJo}c:d Concrete Sections 61

I) Plane sectionsnormal to the axis remain plane after bending. .

CHAPTER 6 2) The maximum. strain in concrete· at the extreme compression, fibre is
assumed as 0.003 in flexure.
Ultimate Strength of Reinforced 3) The' relationship between the compressive stress distribution in con-
cret,e and the strain in concrete may be assumed to~~_e~rectangle, trap-
Concrete Sections eZOId, parabola or any other shape which results in prediction of
strength. in substantial agreement with the test results. The
recommended" stress-strain curve' is shown in Fig. 6.1, 'which shows
the characteristic and design strength curves. .,
6.1 INTRODUCTION ! i l

The most common typt$ of structural concrete elements comprise. slabs,

bea~s and columns; which are used extensively in buildings of all types.
Reinforced concrete slabs are primarily subjected to flexure and shear 0.67 lek
Charae teristic eurve
while beams have to be designed to resist flexure and shear and also tor-
sion or a combination of these forces in some cases. Columns ,are primarily
:::
I I
designed .for compression but in some cases for compression and bending, ~ 0.45 'ek
Desi n curv
which develops in edge or corner co.lumns. The composite action of steel Vi
, a'ri"d concrete is mainly dUff to bond and anchorage.
1 This Chapter deals with the theoretical concepts involved in develop-
I
I ing the strength computations of reinforced concrete sections under differ:- ,
~l "
t ent states of stress and the basis of the various formulae given in IS:
"1, 456-2000, Section-5. Structural Design (Limit State Method) and·
Annexure-G "'Containing various formulae for the computation of flexural'
o 0·001
Strain
0·002 0·003 0·0035
leeu)
, I
strength of rectangular and flanged reinforced concrete sections.
'-;, Structural designers and students should be familiar with the deriv-
atiQns to _have a better insight into the design process. However practical
Fig. 6.1 Characteristics and Design Strength Curves for
~o":crete in Flexural Compression'

designers may use the formulae given in the codes or the tables and charts Chilfacteristic Strength hk =
of "Design Aids to IS:456" published as special publication SP: I6", by
the Bnreau of Indian Standards. Designers may also refer to ihe Manual for Design Strength =[0.67Ym f,k] =[ 0.671.5"
f,;] =0 45 '
Jck
limit state design of Reinforced concrete members authored by Varyani
and Radhaji 46 which contains exhaustive design tables and charts to facili- The stress block parameters are shown in Fig. 6.2.
tate faster design of Structural concrete members. Area of stress block is the sum of rectangular and parabolic portion and is
computed as .
. I
6.2 ULTIMATE FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF
RECTANGULAR SECTIONS
A = (0.45 hk 0.42 x,) + (213 x0.45 hk xO.?8 x.J = 0.36 h.·x,.
wher~' x,.= depth of Neutral Axis.
6.2.1 Assumptions .fck.= Characteristic Compressive Strength.
p.osIt1on~f .centre of. compression from extreme compression fibre
"
The following assumptions are relevant in the computations of ultimate
flexural strength of reinforced concrete sections as specified in IS! 456- = 0.42 x,
2000 Clause 38. I. 4) The tensile strength of concrete is ignored.
62 Reinforced Concrete Design Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections 63
500

t 0·45 10k ++ Characteristic curve

0'42 Xu

d
-~--l~
_J _'- ' -",", '
Xu
C = 0·36 fck Xu' b 1
.!;z 300
Design curve

(d-0'42 xu)

Ast -l
Section strain 5 tress
€y = (0,87 t y ) + 0.002
Fig. 6.2 Strcss Block Paramcters Es

5) The stresses in the reinforcemet are obtained from the stress-strain

curves shown in Pig. 6.3. Por design purposes the partial safety factor
Ym equal to 1.15 is applied to compute the design strength. 0·002 0·004 0·006 0·008
6) The maximum" strain in the tension reinforcement in the section at the Strain
collapse limit state shall be not less than ~ ~ig. 6.3 Characterislic and Design Stress-Strain Curves for J?e 415 Grade Steel <_,w

L.{;E, +0002HO'~1, +0.002]

(l.ver. reinforced sections are those in which concrete reaches the yield
strain-earlier than that of steel. Over reinforced beams fail by compression
failure· of concrete withou.t much warning and with ,very few cracks and
Where fy ::: characteristic strength of steel. negligible deflections. Over reinforced concrete beams are not preferred
E, = modulus of elasticity of steel. since they require large quantities of steel and they fail suddenly with
explos~ve failures without any warning.
6.2.2 Balanced, Under reinforeed and Over reinforced Sections
6.2.3 Depth of Neutral Axis
Reinforced concrete sections in flexure reach the failure stage when the
compressive strain in concrete reaches a value of 0.0035 as shown in Consider a rectangular beam section shown in Fig. 6.2.
Fig. 6.2. When the sections are reinforced in such a way that the tension Let b = width of section. .
steel reaches the yield strain of d:' Effective depth.
e, = (0.871,) I E, + 0.002] ASl ;;;: Area of tension reinforcement.
and simultaneously the concrete strain is Be = 0.0035, ~hen the section is
=
x, depth of neutral Axis.
termed as Balanced. In Under reinforced sections, the tension' steel Por equilibrium of forces at the limit state of collapse,
reaches yield strain at loads lower than the load at which ~oncrete reaches Total tension (D = Tota.! compression (C)
the failure strain. , (A" ·0.871,) = 0.36fo.·b.x,
When the steel yields earlier than concrete, .there will be excessive
deflections and cracking with a clear indicatio~ of impending failure.
Hence it is preferable to design beams as underreinforced si.nce failure will (X'dJ = [0.87 I,
0.36/" b.d
A" ] .•.(6.1)

take place after yielding of steel with clear warning signals like excessive
deflections and cracking before the ~ltimate failure.
 ReiJ~force¢ Concr~/e Design Ultimate Strength ofReinforced COllcrete Sections 65
'::-64 ,.
Limiting values of (xu ld) to avoid brittle failu'reis determined- from the Eq· (6.3) can be used for estiroating the flexural strength of sections in·
condition that the steel strain em at failure should be not less than the value which (x, I d) is less than the limiting value given in Table-6.1. This equa-
given by tion is specified in ANNEX-G of IS: 456-2000.
Expressing the area of steel as a percentage of the effective area, we
e =[0.87/'+0.002] have
l~ E~

Assuming Es = 2 X 105 N/mm 2, the yield strain for design purposes for dif- (= [ bdA.. ] xlOO
ferent grades of steel are given in Table 6.1.
Where p is the percentage of steel. Substituting for (A" I bel) from the
From proportionality of strains, we have the relation, above expression in Eq. (6.3),lwe get

(~)=[e,::"eJ[0.g~~~3:eJ ...(62) M" =,0.87 1,( I~O) [1-1:;00] bd'

Substituting the- various values of €su for different grades of steel, the max-
imum limiiing values of (x/d) for different grades of steel are also shown
in Table 6. I.
[:~] =0.871,·1~0[1-(l)L~)] ... (6.4)

<;."1:'_
Table 6.1 Limiting values of (:<",m•• ! d)
Po: a. given value of [Mjbd'j./, andh" the value of 'p' can be computed.
Th,s IS presented in I.S.Publication SP: 16 as design tables. In these tables,
Grade of Concrete I, Yield strain {.lI;".ma.! dJ the percentage of tension steel in the beam corresponds to the yield stress
(e. u )
in steel when the beam fails by yielding of steel as in under reinforced
Fe- 250 Mild Steel 250 0.0031 0.53
sections. The design tables I to 4 in SP: 16 are very useful for structural
HYSD bars Fe- 415 415 0.0038 0.48
500 0.0042 0.46
designers to compute the percentage of tensile steel for known values of
HYSD bars Fe- 500
(M,Ibet) and different grades of steel and coucrete. The moment of
resistance of a concrete section can also be determined in terms of concrete'
6.2.4 .Moment of Resistance of Reinforced Concrete Sections strength by taking the moment of compression force about the tension
force in steel, which yields the relation,
The moment of resistance of rectangular reinforced concrete sections can
be computed by using the stress diagram assumed at the limit state of M, = 0.361" bX,(d -0.42x)....
/

collapse shown in Fig. 6.2. Taking moments about the centre of compres-
sion, = 0.36};.( ~) [1-0.42(J)] bd'
M" = T (d - 0.42x.)

0.87/,A,,]
If (~) =(x,;'') which is the limiting value as given in Table-6.I,
Substituting x" = [ 0.36 };•. b from Eq. (6.1)
. then the limiting values of the moment of resistance of the section is given
by,
and T = (0.87 A"./,)
Hence M, = 0.87 A".I, [d - 0.42 (0.87 I, A,/0.36};. b)J M u.lJm Jck (X".m")[1_042(.x.'"'=')]bd'
. =0.36' d ' .. d

Simplifying and rearranging, = K.b.d' ... (6.5)

A"./, ] .. .(6.3) ~here K:;:: A constant.
M" = 0.87 A".f,d [ 1- b.d.};,
F r different grades of s'tcel, the expression -for Mu for different grades of
Steel are compiled in Table- 6.2.
 Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 67
66 Reinforced Concrete Design

Table 6.2 Montent of Resistance for Limiting Values of (Xu.",.. ! d) for different Balanced percentage of steel, 'PI Hm. evaluated for different grades of con-
Grades of Steel crete and steel are shown in Table 6.4. '.
Grade of Steel Expression for Mil
[X'd-·J Table 6.4 Balanced Percentage of Steel, PI, 11m for Singly Reinforced
2
Rectangular Sections (Table -E of SP: 16)
Fe-250 0.53 0.149 f<;/<bd
Fe-415 " , 0:48 0.138 fel< bd 2 fck (N/mm 2) Iy (N!mm 2 )
0,4'6 0.133 ,<;/< b d 2 250 415 500
Fe-500
15 1.32 0.72 0.57
20 1.76 0.96 0.76
6.2.5 Expression for Steel Area for Balanced Singly 25 2.20 1.19 0.94
Reinforced Section 30 2.64 1.43 1.13
Equating the compressive force in concrete and tensile force in steel (Fig.
6.2) we"have. 6.2.6 Use of Design Charts and Tables of SP: 16 for Singly
0.87 i, A,," 0.36 J., b x, Reinforced beams and slabs

Rearranging the terms, The Indian Standards Institution's special Publication SP: 16, Design Aids

A,,) ,,(0.36
(btl x,) (&)"(Constant) (J.')
0.87 d i, i,
for Reinforced concrete to IS: 456(1978) or (2000) contains a number of
charts and tables for design of reinforced concrete" members. Based on
. Equations (6.3) and (6.6). the various charts and tables have been evolved.
Since (x,ld) is constant for a given value of!, The following are the data presented in SP: 16 for design and analysis
of beams and slabs of singly reinforced "concrete sections.
If p, "I .imiting percentage of tension steel.
1) Tables 1 to 4'give the percentage steel required' for various values of
p,
,,(100bdA,,) (M,Ibcf) and!, for concrete grades};,,, 15,20, 25, and 30. Three typ-
=
ical tables for};, 20, 25 and 30 are presented in Tables 6.5, 6.6 and
The Reinforcement Index can be expressed as 6.7 in the text.
2) Tables 5 to 44 give the moment of resistance per metre width for var-
(~)" 41.3 (~)
(P..!'
h,
) 100(0.36)
0.87 d d
...(6.6) ious thicknesses of slabs (I = 10 to 25 cm) for different bar diameters
and spacing for various values off, and};;.
For different grades of steel, the reinforcement index and the limiting 3) Charts 1 to 18 present the moment of resistance per metre width for
moment of resistance for singly reinforced rectangular sections are com,;, varying depths (5 to 80 cm) and varying percentage of steel and for
piled in Table 6.3. two Concrete grades of};, = 15 and 20 using steel grades off," 250,
415 and 500.
Table 6.3 Limiting moment of Resistance and Reinforcement Index for Singly' The SP: 16 design tables and charts !'re very useful for structural
Reinforced Rectanguiar Sections designers, since the designs of beams and slabs can be quickly worked out
(Table·C nf SP: 16) and checked without using the detailed procedure 'of using 1he design
f.(Nfmm'j 250 415 500 equations.
(M,.". )
fck· b .d2
0.149 0.138 0.133
6.2.7 Annlysis Examples

[p,,;j~) I" 21.97 19.82 " 18.87 I) A singly reinforced concrete beam having a width of 250 mm is rein-
. 1<1 forced with steel bars of area 3600 mm'. at. an effective depth of

I
 ~ ~ c; !l

t 1 -$'11 11#1t·'1 ci -& ¢AA~ 4 d J

- ........;;
-y~- '-::7':?'~'-c., -.'$."""_

Table 6.5 Flexure-Reinforcement Perc~ntage,PI For Singly Reinforced Sections

(Table-2 of SP: 16)
fc~ == 20 N/mm
2
,
2
Mjlx! t'l' N/mm
fy,N/mm2
Mjlx! Nlmm' I
N/mm2 I (')

240 250 415 480 500 240 250 415 480 500.
"
~

......".,
1.203 0.725 0.627 0.602 .':~
0.085 0.073 0.070 222 ".253
0.30 0.146 0.140 1.267 1.2.16 0.733 0.633 0.608 .tl
0.086 0.082 2.24
>~"
0.35 0.171 0.164 0.099 0.74" 0.640 0.615
0.098 0.094 2.26 1.281 1.230
0.114
0.40
0.45
0.1.96
0.=
0.188
0.213 0.128 0.111 0;106
0.119
2.28
2.30
1.295
1.309
1.243
1.256
0.749
0.757
0.647
0.664
0.621
0.628 ."
:-
0247 0237 0.143 0.123 .~;.

0.50
.1.270 0.765 0.661 0.635
0.136 0.131 2.32 1.323
0.55 0.272 0262 0.158 1,283 0.773 0.686 0.642
0.143 2.34 1.337
0.60 0298 0.286 0.172. 0.149 1297 0.781 0.675 0.648
0.156 2.36 1.351
0'.65 0.324 0.311 0.187 - 0.162 1.311 0.790 0.683 0.655
0.175 0.186 2.38 1.365
0.70 0.350 0.336 0.203 1.324 0.798 0.690 0.662
0.181 2.40 1.380
0.75 0.376 0.361 . 0:218. 0.186
1.338 0.806 0.697 0.669
0201 0.193 '2.42 1.394
0.80 0.403 0.3d7 0.233 1.352 0.814 0.704 0.676
0215 0.206 2.44 1.408
0.85 0.430 0.412 0248 1.366 0.823 0.711 0.683
0228 0219 2.46 1.423
0.90 0.456 0.486 0264 0.831 0.719 0.690
0242 0.232 2.48 1~486 1.380
0.95 0.483 0.464 0.280 0.840 0.726 -0.697
0.255 0.245 2.50 1.452 1.394
1.00 0.511 0.490 0.295
(Contd.)

- .~.

I
:~~ .;t.;>~'1~:,~::::':~:~~:~~~~;:~:;':::~'::~~'~.' .::. ::~.:': ...~.:;.>:.:;~. .., . .-. .' '.:~, ~)>~:;;<~i~
Table 6.5 (Contd.)

f<:k =20N/mm 2

Mjlx! fy. Nlmm2 Mjbrf fy. N/mm 2

Nlmm' I Nlmm' I
S;
240 250 415 480 500 240 250 415 480 500 §'"
1.05
UO
0.538
0.566
0.517
0.543
0;3f1
0.327
0269
0283
0.258
0.272
2.52
2.54
1.467
1.482
1.408
1.423
0.848
0.857.
0.734
0.741
0.704
0.711
"";<
~
US 0.594 0.570 0.343 0297 0285 2.56 1.497 1.437 0.866 0.748 0.719 ~
120 0.622 0.597 0.359 0.311 0.298 2.58 1.612 1.451 0.874 0.756 0.726 So
125 0·650 0.624 0.376 0.325 0.312 2.60 1.527. .1.466 0.883 0.764 0.733 ~
0.678 0.651 0.392 0.339 0.326 2.62 1.542 1.481 0.892 0.771 0.740 ~
1.30
1.35 0.707 0.679 0.409 0.354 0.339 2.64 1.558 1.495 0.901 0.779 0.748 ~
1.40
1.45
0.738
0.765
0.707
0.735
0.426
0.443
0.368
0.383
0.353
0.367
2.66
2.68
1.573
1.588
1.510
1.525
0.910
0.919
0.786
0.794
0.755 "It
~

~
1.50 0.795 0.763 0.460 0.397 0.382 2.70 1.604 1.540 0.928

1.55 0.825 0.792 0.477 0.412 0.396 2.72 1.620 1.555 0.937 ";<
1.60
1.65
1.70
0.855
0.885
0.916
0.821
0.850
0.879
0.494
0.512
0.530
0.427
0.443
0.458
0.410
0.425
0.440
2.74
2.76
2.78
1.638
1.651
1.667
1.570
1.585
1.601
0.946
0.955 ".,
'v,
0-
1.75 0.947 0.909 0.547 0.473 0.454 2.80 1.683 1.616 5'
""
(Contd.)
0\
10

.> ~ . " " " " =::=~?~:':::C:I~:;l:',_ ....,..":_0' '..... -- H ~:..=::.~"

:~--:' --:-:.;:K;}..,,,~:;;;:;; ....:;.- ,1""'»d~;::::
 -----~.-.--

....
o
Table 6.5 ({).ntd.)
2
fa. :::: 20 N/mm
8'
%,
f1' N!I:nm2 "01
fy. Nlmm
z \ MJtx/
MJtx/ Nlmm;<: 1 ~

I "-
Nlmm'
250 415 480 500 240 250 415 480 500
~ ~
240 ;;:
2.82 1.700 1.632 ;;;
0.565 OA69 0,469
1.80 0.978 0.939 1.716 1.847
1.85 1.009 0.969 0.584 0.505 0._ 2.84
2.86 1,732 1.663 ~
0.602 0.521 0.500 ~
0;;'
1.90 1.041 1.000 2.88 1.749 1.679
0.537 0.515
1.95 1.073 1.030 0.621
0.640 0.553 0.531 2.90 1.766 1.695 "
2.00 1.106 1.062
2.92 1.782 1.711
0.647 0.559 0.537
2.02 1.119 1.074 2.94 1.799 1.727
0.655 0.566 0.548
2.04 1.132 1.067 2.96 1.816 1.743
0.662 0.573 0.550
2.06 1.145 1.099 2.98 1.833 1.760
0.670 0.579 0.556
2.06 1.159 1.112
0.678 0.586 0.562
2.10 1.172 1.125

1.138 0.685 0.593 0.569

2.12 1.185
1.151 0.693 0.599 0.575
2.14 1.199
1.184 0.701 0.606 0.582
2.16 1.212 0.588
1.177 0.709 0.613
2.18 1.226
1.190 0.717 0.620 0.595
2.20 1.239
Note-Blanks indicate inadmissible reinforcement percentage (see Table E).
 'll ~ '~
~ ~

Table 6.6 (Conld.l

fcl:=25N/mm2.

Mjlx! fy, N/mm2 Mjlx! fy• Nlrnm2

Nlmm2. I N/mm' I
240 250 415 480 500 240 250 415 480 500

1.05 0.530 0.509 0.307 0.265 0.255 3.30 1.947 1.669 1.126 0,973 0.935
1.10 0.557 0.535 0.322 0.279 0.267 3.32 1.962 1.684 1.135 0.981 0.942
1.15 0.584 0.561 0.338 0.292 0.280 3.34 1.978 1.899 1.144 0.989 ''=l
1.20 0.611 0.587 0.353 0.306 0.293 3.36 1.993 1.914
1.929
1.153 '"'"'
~.
1.25 0.638 0.613 0.369 0.319 0.306 3.38 2.009 1.162 ~

1.30 0.666 0.639 0.385 0.333 0.320 3.40 2.025 1.944 1.171
1.35 0,693 0.666 0.401 0.347 0.333 3.42 2.040 1.959 1.180
1.40 0.721 0.692 0.417 0.360 0.346 3.44 2.056 1.974 1.189
1.45 0.749 0.719 0.433 0.374 0.359 3.46 2.072 1.989
1.50 0.777 0.746 0.449 0.388 0.373 3.48 2.088 2.005

1.55 0.805 0.773 0.466 0.403 0.387 3.50 2.104 2.020

1.60 0.834 0.800 0.482 004,17 0.400 3.52 2.120 2.036
1.65 0.862 0.828 0.499 0.431 0.414 3.54 2.137 2.051
1.70 0.891 0.856 0.515 0.446 0.428 3.56 2.153 2.067
1.75 0.920 0.883 0.532 0.460 0.442 3.58 2.170 2.083

(Collld.)

Table 6.6 (Contd.)

1:1 =25 N/mm2.

Mjlx! fy, N/mm2
Nlmm' Mjlx! fy, N/mm2
I N/mm2
I
240 250 415 480 500 240 250
~
§.
415 480 500

""
1.80 0.949 0.911 0.549 0.475 0.456 3.60 2.186
1.85 0.979 0.940 0.566 2.099
0.489 0.470 3.62 2.203 2.115 5:?
1.90 1.009 0.986
~;:;.
0.563 0.504 0.484 3.64 2.219
1.95 1.038 0.997 2.131
0.601 0.519 0.498 3.66
2.00 1.068 1.026 2.236 2.147
0.618 0.534 0.513 3.68 2.253 2.163
<Q,
2.05 1.099
2.10 1.129
1.055
1.084
0.635 0.549 0.527 3.70 2.270 2.179 ~
~
0.653 0.565 0.542 3.72 2.287
2.15 1.160 1.114 0.671 2.196
0.680 0.557 3.74 <>
'2.20 1.191 1.143 0.689 0.596' 0.572
2.304 ;;
2.25 1.222 1.173 0.707 0.611 0.587 !l..
2.30 1.254 1.204
6l
~
0.725 0.627 0.602
2.35
2.40
1.285 1234 0.743 0.643 0.617 "
«
2.45
1.317
1.360
1.285
1.296
0.762
0.781
0.649
0.675
0.632
0.643 "
~
~.
2.50 1.382 1.327 0.799 0.691 0.663
Note-Blanks indicate inadmissible reinforcement percen~ge (See Table E). "
"
w
~T:::':: ","",,,,,,,,,-=~,><, "~",,, ,j,',c ,,""",' ",' "~~"C"-'" ,'" ,~"""~,,,»';">~"".~""""'''"~'''''''V~'',o,4o~ , " , .;-',.".' 0,

Table 6.7 (Contd.)

fc~ = 30 N/mm 2

M,/b<f
N/mm'
fy, N/mm 2
I
I N/mm'
M,/br:! fy, N/mm 2
I

1.05
240
0.525
250
0.504
415
0.304
480
0.263
500
0.252
240 250 415 480 500
~
~
3,30 1,859 1.785 1.075 0.930
1.10
1.15
0,552
0,578
0.529
0.555
0.319
0.334
0.276
0,289
0.265
0.2n
3.35
3,40
1.893
1.928
1,818
1.851
1.095
1.115
0.947
0.964
0.892
0,909
0,925
"~::;
1.20 0:604 0,580 0.350 0.302 0.290 3,45 1.963 1.884 1.135 0,981 0,942 ;;
1.25 0.631 0.606 0.365 0.315 0.303 :;;.
3.50 1.998 1.918 1.156 0.999 0,959
.~
~,
1.30 0.658 0.631 0.380 0.329 0.316 3.55
1.35
1:40
0.685
0]12
0,657
0,683
0.396
0,411
0.342
0.356
0,329
0.342
3.60
3,65
2.034
2.069
2.105
1.952
1.986
1.176
1.197
1.017
1.035'
0.976
0,993 "
; !.
Sa
2.021 1.218 1.053 1.001
1.45 0.739 0]09 0.427 . 0.369 0,355 3,70 M
2.142 2.056 L239 1.071 1.028 ~
1.50 0]66 0.735 0,443 0.383 0.368 3]5 2.178 2.091 1.260 U89 1.046 "-
C)
1.55 0]93 0]62 0,459 0.397 0.381 2
3,80 2.215 2.127 1.281
1.60 0,821 0]88 0,475 0,410 0.394 3.85 2.253 2.163
1.108 1.063 5
1.65 0.849 1.303 1.126 1.081 r{
0.815 0,491 0,424 0,407 3.90
1,70 0.876 0.841
2,291 2,199, 1.325 1.145 1.099 "
"'"
0.507 0,438 0,421 3,95 2.329 2.236
1.75 0,904 1.347 1.164 1.118
0,868 0,523 0,452 0,434 4.00 2.367 2.273 1.369 1.184 3.
§
~

(Contd.)
--J
V>

. . . . ...,. _z 1¥"" $_'¥'6 t"'.'~" f------,...---·

L :\i: s 11 f
 Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections 77

400 mm. IfM-20 Grade Concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars are used,
compute the ultimate flexural strength of the section.

Method-} (Using IS: 456-2000. Code Equations).

a) Datu
b ~ 250 mm
d ~ 400 mm
II" ~ 3600 mm'

b) Material Properties

hI; = 20 N/mm 2 1;. = 415 N/mm 2

c) Depth of Nelltral Axis:-

If x, ~ depth of neutral Axis.

From Annexure G (IS: 456- 2000) Clause G- I. I.

(:"J=[ 0.87/,11" ]=[ 0.87x415x3600 ]~1805

i'iT T !.
d 0.36];. b.d 0.36 x 20 x 250 x 400 .

Limiting value Of(;;J for Fe- 415-,grade steel is 0.48

~
"
i

Since (~J= 1.805> 0.48, section is over reinforced.

d) Moment of Resistance

Referring to Table 6.2, Limiting value of moment of resistance is com-

as

M u. Jim = 0. 138 .t.k· b .d" .

= (0.138 x20x250x400')

= 110.4 X 106 N.lllln.

= 110.4 kN.m
 78 Reinforced COl/crete Design Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sectiolls 79

d) Moment of Resistance
j. Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Aids.)

A".f., ]
! 1OOA,,) _(1OOX3600) = 3 6 M, = 0.87 f,A".d [ I-'v.d.'fo.
I Percentage of steel = p, = ( ----;;d" - 250 x 400 . ..
I For Fe-415 grade steel and};k T 20 N/mm'. RefelTing to T~ble 6A(Tabie E
2214 x4t5
~0.87x415x22t4x700 [ 1- ( 350x700x20 ~
)11
of SP: 16), maximum percentage of tensile reinforcement PI,linl for singly
i = (454.6 xlO') N.mm.
reinforced rectangular sections is 0.96.
Hence the section is over reinforced. =454.6kN.m
d2
Hence, Mil = Muc = O.13 8 fck· b .
Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Aids.)
" (O.138·x20x250x400')
Percentage reinforcement in the section.
= llOAx lO'N.mm.
= , =( 100A,,) =( 100X2214) = 90
= 110.4 kNm. I, b.d. 350 x 700 O.
2) A rectangular reinforced concrete section having a breaddt~l of350 mm Refer Table 6.5 (Table-2 of SP: 16), and read out the value of (M,Ibd')
is reinforced with 2 bars of 28 mm and 2 bars of 25 mm tametcr at an cOI:responding tof, = 415 N/mm' and};, = 20 N/mm'
effectivc depth of700 mm. Adopting M-20 grade c~ncrete an<l Fe-415
HYSD bars determine the ultimate moment of resIstance of the sec-
tion.
(M,) = 2.64
b.d'

M, = (2.64 x 350 x 700')

Method _ l(Using IS: 456 - 2000 Code Eqnations)
= (452.7 X 10') N.Jlun
a) Data
=452.7 kN.m
b = 350mm
d = 700mm 3) A reinforced concrete slab 150mm thick is reinforced with !Omm
A = 2 [491 + 616] = 2214 mm' diameter bars at 200mm centres, located at an effective depth of
" 125n\m. If M- 20 grade concrete aud Fe- 415 grade HYSD bars are
b) Material Properties used, estimate the ultimate moment of resis,tance of the section.

h. = 20 N/mm'. J,= 415 N/mm'. Method-I (using IS': 456- 2000 code equations)

a) Data
cj Depth of Neutral Axis:-
b = 1000mm
Let Xu ::;; Depth of neutral Axis.
d= 125 mm
X,) [0.87J,A" ]_[ 0.87x415x2214 ]=0.453<0.48.
(d = 0.36h•. b.d - 0.36x20x350x700 . A = [1000(" x 10'/4)] = 393 mm.'
51 200 .
Hence, the section is under r~inf~rced.
fck = 20 N/mm2, 1; = 415 N/mm 2•
 Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections. 81
RebifoJ;cedConcj-ete Design
d= 550 mm i
I, t
.' b) Depth of Neutral Axis A,,~(4x491)= 1964mm' 'i,!I
h. = 20 N/mm' and!, = 415 N/mm'. I:
Let Xu = Depth of Neutral axis. , ;I
ij; : (I
X"J _ _. _ = [ 0.87x415x393 ] =0157<048
_ = [0.87f,.A,,] b) Neutral AxIs Depth
(d 0.36J;,.b.d 0.36x20x 1000 x 125 . . , ,

Hence, the section is under reinforced_ X'J [0.87f,.A,,] [ 0.87x415xI964 ]

( d = 0.36J;,.b.d = 0.36x20x300x550 =0.596>0.48
c) Moment of Resistance Hence, the Section is over reinforced.

A".f, ] c) Moment of Resistance

M" = 0.87 f,.A".d [ 1- b.d.J;,

393x415 )] Referring to Ta~le 6.2, Limiting value of moment of resistance is

=(0.87x415x393xI25) [ 1- ( 100xl25x20
M u,lim =O.l38.fck· b .d2
= (16.58 x 10') N.mm
= (0.138 x 20 x 300 X550')
= 16.58 kN.m.
=250x IO'N.mm
Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Aids)
= 250kN.m
Percentage reinforcement in the Section
Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Aids)
X
= =(100A"J=( 100 393)=0.314
p, b.d 1000 x 125
r.' .• Refer Tab1e-2 of SP: 16 and read out the value of (M,Ibd') corresponding ' ••m b.d
J
Percentage of steel = p ,. = ( 100An = ( 100 x 1964) = 1 19
300x550 .
to values of p, = 0.314,/, = 415 N/mm' andh' = 20 N/mm'. Interpolating
For Fe-415 grade steel and!" = 20 N/mm'
the value, we have Referring to Table 6.4 (Table-E of SP: 16)
(Mjbd') = 1.06 Maximum percentage of tensile reinforcement PI, tim for singly reinforced
rectangular sections is 0.96.
.. M, = (1.06 x 103 x 125') = (16.56 x 10') N.mmlm = 16.56 kN.m1m. -
Hence the section is over reinforced
4) A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular section 300mm wide by
M" = M", = 0.138f..bd' = (0.138 x20 x 300 x 550')
600mm deep is reinforced with 4 bars of 25mm diameter at an effec-
tive depth of 550mm. The effective span oflhe beam is 7m, If!, = 415 = (250 x 10') N.mm = 250 kN.m
N/mm' and h' = 20 N/mm', find the uniformly distributed ultimate
1fw" = uniformly distributed ultimate load, I
load on the beam.
w,=(8;'}(8X :50J=40.81 kN/m
Method-l (Using IS: 456·2000 Code equations) 7

a) Data
b=300mm
D=600mm
 Ultimate Strellg~1l ofl<e-inJorced COllcre;"e :wdiol/s 83
82 Reinforced Concrete Design
b) Area of Rclilforcemcnt
6.2.8 Design Examples

1) Determine the area of reinforcement required for a singly reinforced Refer 2Table"'2 of SP: 16 (Table
2
6.5 of text) corresponding
• ...
to • d. = 20 r
concrete section having a breadth of 675 111m to support a factored N/mm ~ndfy = 415 N/mm read out the percentage rClI1forcemcnt PI for
moment of 185 kNm. Adopt M- 20 grade concrete and Fe-415 Grade the reqUired parameter.
HYSD bars.
I
M".) = 1.35 and the corresponding vullie of P
(bd" l = 0.409 percent.
Method-I (Using IS: 456 - 2000 Code Formulae)
_(P'bd)_[OA09X300X675]_ ,
.. A,( - 100 - 100 - 828 mill
a) Data
b = 300mm !ok = 20 N/mm' The area of reinforcement obtained by both the methods are sH~nc.
d = 675 mm f, = 415 N/mm' 2) Design the minimum effective depth required and the area of rein-
M" = 185 kNm forcement for a rectangular beam having a width of 300mm to resist
an ultimate moment of 200kNm, using M-20 grade concrete and
b) Limiting Moment o~ Resistance Fe-415 HYSD bars.

For Fe-415 HYSD bars,

2
Method-l (Using IS: 456 - 2000 Code Formulae)
I
I Mu• 1im = O. 138 hk b.d

I = (0.138 x 20x 300x675'llO"'

. a) Data
b=300mm !ok = 20 N/mm'
i = 377 kN.m > M" = 185 kN.m M" = 200 kNm f, = 415 N/mm'
Hence, the beam is under reinforced.
I· c) Area of Tensile Reinforeement:-
b) Minimum Effective depth

For Fe-415 HYSD bars, limiting moment of resistance is given by ,

2 '~~
,,
M" = 0.87 f,A".d (l-A,J/bd·h,) Mu,lim =O.138!c".b.d

A". 415 )] Mu,lim 200 x 10' I

(l85xlO")=0.87 x 415xA"x675 [ 1- ( 300x675x20 d = 0.138,/;,.b 0.138x20x300 492mm.

Solving All = 830 mm'. c) Area of Reinforcement

Mcthod-2 (Usiug SP: 16 Design Tables) Awl, ]
M" = 0.87 f,A".d [ 1- b.d.,/;, .,I
a) Design Parameters I
200 XIO'=0.87X415XA"X492[I-( A"A15 )] I
300x492x20 I
M")=( 300
(bd' 185XIO')=1.35
x 675' Solving,
I
(A,~-7114A,,+8X 1O~ =0
 Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections 85
Reinforced COllcre/~ D(!sign

A.. :::: 1400 mnl.

,
bf ,
Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Tables)
.
Referring to Table- D of sr: 16 for h' = 20 N/mm and I, = 415 N/mm .
.' .H1 - - - - ~

M •.
( b.(P
~~) =2.76 d

d=
Mu,lill'
2.76b =
200 x 10'
2.76x300
492mm .-1-=-
'---
Asl IT = O'87A s t f y

Referring to Table-2 of sr: 16 (Table 6.5 of text), read out the value o(

(~;,) = 2.76
Fig. 6.4 Stress Block Parameters'for Tec·BcalU (xu < Dr)
percentage reinforcement p, corresponding to the parameter
A,,!, ] (6.7)
M. = 0.87 f,.A".d [ I - ~b
I'
.
.,
'T:l
..

A -
p,= 0.955

P,.b.d) (0.955 x 300 x 492) -_ 1410 mm.

. '-
. r,t: ·Jck

.. ,,- (liiO -- 100 6.3.2 Neutral Axis falls outside the Fillnge (Did 1> 0.2)

6,3 ULTIMATE FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF FLANGED
SECTIONS
The flexural stre'ngth of flanged beams (Tee and L-beams) depends upon
the position of neutral axis. The Indian Standard Code IS: 456-2000 pre-
scribes a method for computing the ultimate moment of resIstance of
flanged sections for different cases as detailed below: -
When the neutral axis falls outside the flange and the ratio (DId) 1> 0.2,' the
moment of resistance can be computed using the stress block parameters
shown in Fig. 6.5. The stress blocks are separately shown for the rectangu-
lar portion and the flange portion. The moment of resistance of the section
of the Tee Section is computed by the relation,
bf

6.3.1 Neutral Axis within flange

Referring to Fig. 6.4

- I
I
I
:
I

Let br :;:; width of compression flange. d -f-- -- (d-O'S DO

bw = width of rib.
d
Dr
ASl
Xu
= Effective depth.
= Depth of flange.
;;; Area of Tension Reinforcement.

:;:; Depth of Neutral Axis.

1 Asl
-• •• T
1
When neutral axis falls within the flange, the moment of resistance of the Fig. 6.5 Strcss Block Parametcrs for Tce Beam (xu> Dr)
section can 'be calculated by the same procedure as that of rectangular sec~ .
lions.
Hence wh,en Xu < Dr the moment of Resistance of the section can be com- Where

puted by the relation,

 86 Reinforced Concrete Design. Ultimate Strength ofRein/orced Concrete Sections 87

I c, ~ 0.45J;,D,.(b,-b.,j. For (DlxJ < 0.43 t-0 45 Ick 1 -t-0.45Ick-+

. • M. ~ 0.36 J;,.x•. ",,,.bw (d - 0.42x•. ",,,) + 0.45 10k (b,~bw) D~d - 0.5 D,)
This equation can be recast as that given IS: 456-2000 (ANNEX-G). in
theform,
o.t
t- - TT 0'8x u

I,
M~~ 036 (x.;''')[t _ 0.42 ( x.;''')] Vwd'

Note:
+ 0.45J;,(b,- bw)D~d - 0.5 Dr) ... (6.8) 0'5
7x
u _. j ~" _ .(b) Whitney
For Dr I x,> 0.43, Dr to be replaced by y, Fig. 6.6. Equivalent Stress BI!lcks

A = 0.15 and B = 0.65.

6.3.3 Neutral Axis falls outside the Flange (Dr I d > 0.2)
Hence, =
Y, (0.15 x, + 0.65 D,)

When the neutral axis falls outside the flange arid the ratio (D, I d) > 0.2,
we cannot assume that the flange is uniformly stressed as in case (2).
Hence the expression for case (2) is modified by substituting Yr for Dr in
Eg. (6.8) where
Yr = (0.15 x. +0.65 Dr) but Yr should be not greater than D,. Hence, the
e:~pression for momeJ1t of resistance is given by the rehitiqn, .
. The Indian Standard code further stipulates that for xu,max > Xu > Dr . the
.moment of resistance may be calculated by the equations (6,8), When
(D,Ix,) does not exceed 0.43 and when (D,Ix,) exceeds 0.43, the moment of
resistance is computed by the equation (6.9) by substituting xu,max by Xu'
6.3.4 Computation of Tension Reinforcement in Tee beam Sections

~ 036 (x.;'')[1- 0.42 (X.;mJ ]t".bw'd'

Case..,! (x, < D,)
M.
In this case of Tee-Section the area of tension reinforcement can be com-
+ 0.45J;k(b,- bw)y~d - 0.5 y,) ... (6.9) puted by treating the section as rectangular and using the equation 6.7 and
solving ASI for a given value of M u expressed as
Where Y, =(0.15 x, + 0.65 Dr) but nOlgreater than Dr·
The equation Y, = (0.15 x, + 0.65 Dr) is based on the Whitney'S stress . [A".f,].
Mu = O.8?J;..A 5I ,d 1.- br.d.fck
block shown in Fig. 6.6.
Let x, =Depth of Nentral Axis. Knowing the value of Xu.
Dr = Depth of flange.
Let Yr~Ax.+B Dr (6.10)

The constants A and B are solved by specifying the following two condi-
tions to be satisfied by this equation.
I) When Dr = 0.43 x,. Y, = 0.43 x,
2) When Dr =x, Yr =0.80 x, For a given value of M u• evaluate Xu by using Eq. 6.8and replacing'xu•mu by
Substituting these conditions in Eq. (6.10) the constants A and B are eval- xu' Referring to .stress block parameters shown in Fig. 6.5. force equilib-

uated as ~ium yields the following equations:-

 Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Seelio/ls 89

T, ::: C 1
Case-~ [,,>D, and (j»0.2]
(A"w·O.87 I,) :::: 0.36 fck bw'xu
_r0.36J;,h w .Xw]
Similar h.l ~sse (3)
.. AMW -L 0.871,
6.3.5 l's,' of Design Aids (SP: 16) for Design of Flanged Beams
Also T2 :::: C2
In most C';\~ of tee beams used in buildings, the neutral axis falls within
(A",.0.87 1,) = 0.451:, (h, - hw) Dr
the flange- .mJ the computation of steel area can be made as in the design of
= [0.45J;,(hf -bw)Df ] rectangular t"ams nsing Tables I to 4 of SP: 16. lu the case of tee beams in
AMf 0.87 I, which th~ neutral axis fnlls in the rib, design Tables provided in I.S. Spe-
cial publk'llion SP: 24" (Explanatory Hand Book on IS: 456) are very
Hence, the total tension reinforcement in the Tee Sections is given by llseful in \..'\Jlilputing the area of reinforcement for a given tee beam to resist
Asl :::: [A.,w + A.lfl a specitit."\t ~nding moment.
SP: 16 dt:5igns Tables 57 to 59 are also useful to compute the limiting
= [0.361:,hw.Xw] +[0.45 10k (h, - bw)D,] moment of resistance factor (Mu,lim I bw • d2 • fck) for singly reinforced Tee
A" . 0.871, 0.87 I, beams. 111< tables covcr different grades of steel (250,415 and 500) and
ratios of to/,') varying (roll] 0.06 to 0.45 and ratios of (blb w ) varying from

Case.3 [Xw>D,,(~)}0.2 and (~»0.43] I to 10. l1lk',,", tables arc preseuted as Tables 6.8, 6.9 covering FcAI5 and
500 grade sh."els in the text.
For a given value of M u• evaluate Xu by using Eq.6.9 and replacing xu,max by-
Xu'Referring to stress block parameters shown in Fig. 6.6 in which the-, 6.3.6 An"I~"is Examples
depth of stress block-is I) DClwuiu" the Ultimate flexural strength of the T-beam having the
folk'i\\'ing section properties:- .
Yr = (0.15 X
w
+ 0.65 Dr) but not greater than Dr·
Width "I' tlange = 800 mm
Force Equilibrium yields the following Equations:- -
Depth "I' flange =
150 mm
Tl ::: C1 Wid,a of rib = 300 mm
(A"w.O.871,) = 0.361:, bw'x"
Eft""l;''' depth =
420 ml11
A,,,,ofsteel = 1470 mm'
= [0.361:khw.xw] M-25 Gm<le ,'Oncrete and Fe-415 Grade HYSD bars.
A. IW 0. 871,

Tz = C2 Melhod-I (Vsing IS: 456·2000 formnla)

Also
(A",.0.871,) = 0.45 1:~ (br - bw) y, a) Dahl

= [0.45J;,(b,- hw)Y'] b.. = 800111111 A" = \470 mm'

A Slf 0.87 fy Dr = 150mm h, = 25 N/mm'
d ;;;: 420mm f, = 415 N/mm'
bw = 300u1lu
 ---------------_.

Table 6.8 Flexure-Limiting Moment of Resistance Factor, MIIJ;rrlb.,li~ fd,.

For Singly Reinforced T-Beams. N/mm2
(Table-58 of SP: 16) ""o
I y = 415 N/mrn~

Did
b,Ib,.
I
'"
"
~
c

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.00 10.0 i
0.06 0.138 0.164 0.190 0.216 0.242 0.268 0.294 0.320 0.346 0,372 ~
0.07
0.08
0.138
0.138
0.138
0.168
0.172
0.176
0.198
0.207
0.215
0.228
0.241
0.253
0.259
0.275
0.291
0.289
0.309
0.330
0.319
0.344
0.368
0.349
0.378
00406
0.379
00412
0.445
00409
0.446
0.483
i
~
0.09
0.10 0.138 0.180 0.223 0.265 0.308 0.350 0.392 0.435 '·00477 0.519
00'
0.11 0.138 0.184 0.231 0.27.7 0.324 0.370 00416 . 00463 0.509 0.555 ::
0.12 0.138 0.188 0.239 0.289 0.339 0.390 0.440 00490 0.541 0.591
0.13 0.138 0.192 0.247 0.301 0.355 00409 00463 0.518 0.572 0.626
0.14 0.138 0.196 0.254 0.312 0.370 0.428 00487 0.545 0.603 0.661
0.15 0.138 0.200 0.262 0.324 0.386 00428 0.509 0.571 0.633 0.695
0.16 0.138 0.204 0.260 0.335 00401 00466 0.532 0.598 0.663 0.729
0.17 0.138 0.207 0.277 0.346 0.416 0.485 0.554 0.624 0.693 0.762
0.18 0.138 0.211 0.284 0.357 00430 0.503 0.576 0.849 0.723 0.796
0.19 0.138 0.215 0.291 0.368 0.445 0.522 0.598 0.675 0.752 0.828
0.20 0.138 0.218 0.299 0.379 0.459 0.540 0.620 0.700 0.780 0.861
0.21 0.138 0.221 0.305 0.388 00471 0.554 0.638 0.721 0.804 0.887
0.22 0.138 0.224 0.309 0.395 00480 0.566 0.651 0.737 0.822 0.908
0.23 0.138 0.226 0.314 00402 00489 0.577 0.665 0.753 0.841 0.928
0.24 0.138 0.228 0.318 00408 0-498 0.588 0.678 0.768 0.859 0.949
0.25 0.138 0.230 0.323 00415 0.507 0.600 0.692 0.784 0.876 0.969

(Comd.)

"-".-

Table 6.8 (Could.)

I y= 415 N/mm2
b,Ib,.
Old I
1.0 2.0 3.0' 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.00 10.0 s;
0.26 0.138 0.233 0.327
0.27 0.138 0.235 0.331
'00422
0.428
0.516 0.611 0.705 0.800 0.894 0.989 ~.
0.525 . 0.622 0.718 0.815 0.912 1.008
0.28 0.138 0.237 0.336 00435 0.534 0.632 0.731 0.830
;;;
0.929 1.028
0.29 0.138 0.239 0.340 0.441 0.542 0.643 0.744 0.845 0.946 1.047
0.30
0.31
0.138
0.138
0.241
0.243
0.344
0.349
. 0.448
00454
0.551
0.559
0.654
0.664
0.757
0.770
0.860
0.875
0.963
0.980
1.006
1.085
X
".
0.32 0.138 0.245 0.353 00460
0.33
0.568 0.675 0.782 0.890 0.997 1.104 ~
0.138 0.248 0.357 0.468 0.576
0.34 0.138 0.250 0.361 00473
0.685 0.795 0.904 1.014 1.123 ~
0.584 0.696 0.807
0.35 0.138 0.252 0.365 0.479 0.592 0.706 0.819
0.919
0.933
1.030
1.046
1.142
1.160
~
c
0.36 0.138 0.254 0.36~ 00485 0.600 0.716 0.831 0.947 1.063 1.178
g
0.37 0.138 0.256 0.373 00491 0.608 0.726 0.843 0.961 1.079 1.196
"-
0.38
0.39
0.138
0.138
0.258 0.377 0.497 0.616 0.736 0.855 0.975 1.094 1.214 ~
~
0.260 0.381 0.503 0.624 0.746 0.867 0.989 1.110 1.232
0.40 0.138 0.262 0.365 0.508 0.632 0.755 0.879 1.002 1.126 1.249
0.41 0.138 0.263 0.389 0.514 0.840 0.765
0.42
0.890 1.016 1.141 1.267 ~
0.138 0.265 0.393 0.520 0.647 0.775
0.43
0.44
0.138
0.138
0.267
0.269
0.396
0.400
0.526
0.531
0.655
0.662
0.784
0.793
0.902
0.913
0.924
'1.029
1.042
1.055
1.156
1.172·
1.187
1.284
1.301
1.318
'"
~.
0.45 0.138 0.271 00404 0.537 0.670 0.803 0.936 1.068 1.201 1.334

',-X!~
'"
~

:~::'~-,

fi~~;::~::;;:::.~;:' .
--.:t: i 1(21 LfYl£2LFvaf3£i $$U@iititSPIJt( g;
~ !2Z: 1& Ii: f:i ~ : ~'. ~.
~,,,;';;;J' • •• --_:Ji. _ 'i : . _ ~__ ~.."

Table 6.9 Flexure-Limiting Moment of Resistance Factor, MuJ .,,/b.,d2Iok'

2
For Singly Reinforced T-Beams. N/mm
(Table-59 of SP: 16)
'"tv
2
f y = 500 N/mm ::0
b,lb" "
~
I c
Did <1
5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 ""-
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 (')
0.341 0.367 ~.
0.185 0.211 . 0.237 0.263 0.289 0.315
0.06 0.133 0.159
0.193 0.223 0.254 0.284 0.314 0.344 0.374 0.404 .,C;
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.133
0.133
0.133
0.163
0.167
0.171
0.202
0.210
0.236
0.248
0.270
0.286
0.304
0.325
1J.339
0.363
0.373
0.401
0.407
0.440
0.441
0.478 ".
"
tl
0.133 0.175 0.218 0.260 0.303 0.345 0.387 0.430 0.472 0.514 ~
0.10 0;;'
0.411 0.458 0.504 0.550
0.11 0.133
0.133
0.179
0.183
0.226
0.234
0.272
0.284
0.318
0.334
0.365
0.385 0.435 0.485 0.536 0.586 '"
0.12
0.241 0.296 0.350 0.404 0.458 0.513 0.567 0.621
0.13 0.133 0.187
0.249 0.307 0.365 0.423 0.481 0.540 0.598 0.656
0.14 0.138 0.191
0.257 0.319 0.381 0.442 0.504 0.566 0.628 0.690
0..15 0.133 0.195
0.264 0.330 0.396 0.461 0.527 0.593 0.658 0.724
0.16 0.133 0.199
0.202 0.272 0.341 0.411 0.480 0.549 0.619 0.688 0.757
0.17 0.133
0.206 0.279 0.352 0.425 0.498 0.571 0.644 0.717 0.791
0.18 0.133
0.133 0.210 0.286 a.363 0.440 0.516 0.593 0.670 0.747 0.823
0.19
0.133 0.213 0.292 0.372 0.452 .0.532 0.611 0.691 0.771 0.850
0.20
0.133 0.215 0.297 0.379 0.461 0.543 0.625 0.707 0.789 0.871
0.21
0.133 0.217 0.302 0.380 0.470 0.555 0.639 0.723 0.808 0.892
0.22
0.133 0.220 0.306 0.393 0.479 0.566 0.653 0.739 0.826 0.912
0.23
0.24 0.133 0.222 0.311 0.400 0.488 0.577 0.666 0.755 0.844 0.933
0.133 0.224 0..315 ~.406 0.497 0.589 0.680 0.771 0.862 0.953
0.25

DId

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.26 0.133 0.226 0.320 0.413 0.506 0.600 0.693 0.786 0.880 0.973
~
~.
0.27 0.133 0.229 0.324 0.420 0.515 0.611 0.706 0.802 0.897 0.993
0.28
0.29
0.133
0.133
0.231
0.233
0.328
0.333
0.426
0.433
0.524
0,532
0.622
0.632
0.719
0.732
0.817
0.832
0.915
0.932
1.012.
1.032 "
0.30
0.31
0.133
0.133
0.235
0.237
0.337
0.341
0.439
0.445
0.541
0.550
0.643
0.654
0.745
0.758
.0.847
0.862
0.949
0.966
1.051
1.070
XS-
0.32 0.133 0.239 0.346 0.452 0.558 0.664 0.770 0.877 0.983 1.039 <Q,
0.33 0.133 0.241 0.350 0.458 0.566 0.675 0.783 0.891 1.000' 1.108 ::0
0.34
0.35
0.133
0.133
0..243
0.245
0.354
0.358
0.464
0.470
0.575
0.583
0.885
0.695
0.795
0.808
0.906
0.920
1.016
1.033
1.127
1.145
.g:"c
0.36 0.133 0.248 0.362 0.476 0.591 0.705 0.820 0.934 1.049 1.163 <1
0.37 0.133 . 0.250 0.366 0.483 0.599 0.716 0.832 0.949 1.065 1.181 ""-
0.38
0.39
0.133
.0.133
0.252
0.254
0.370
0.374
0.489
0.494
0.607
0.615
0.725
0.735
0.844
0.856
.0.962
0.976
1.081
1.097
1.199
.1.217
~
0.40 0.133' 0.255 0.378 0.500 0.623 0.745 0.868 0.990 1.112 1.235 ""-
0.41
0.42
0.133
0.133
0.257
0.259
0.382
0.386
0.506
0.512
0.630
0.638
. 0.755
0.764
0.879
0.891
1.004
1.017
1.128
1.143
1.252
1.270
"~.'
v,.

0.43 0.133,', 0.261 0.389 0.518 0.646 0.774 0.902 1.030 1.158 1.287
0.44
0.45
0.133
0.133
0.263
0.265
0.393
0.397
0.523
0.529
0.653
0.661
0.783
0.793
0.913
0.925
1.043
1.056
1.174
1.188
1.304
1.320
''""
'"'"

-
.~:-.~
~:.:;;:

=. ,0
."._" c.;:~_.:'_'

...
, ;~,~. - . --------_. __ __
._~----_

. ....
.
.",~=-.::;.-:~.'~~,:·,c·· ... ,,',:I<I""','7"l":"'C',·;--
I 94 Reinforced Concrete Design Ultimate Strength of Reillforced COllcre.te Sections 95
I
I
,,
b) Depth of Neutral Axis
Width of rib = 325 mm
Effective depth = 600 mm
Area of steel = 4000 mm'
X,) (0.87 II',,) ( 0.87 x 415 x 1470 ) M-20 Grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
(d = 0.36hk.br.d = 0.36x25x800x420 =0.175
Method-1 (Using IS: 456-2000 code formula)
x, = (0.175 x 420) = 73.5 mm < Dr
Neutral axis falls inside the flange. The section can be considered as a a) Data
rectangular section with b ;;:: b r-= 800mm. The section is under reinforced
br = 1300mm ,};, = 20 N/mm'

(~) < 0.48 Dr = 100mm I, = 415 N/mm'

since
bw = 325mm A" = 4000 mm'
Hence, the ultimate flexural strength is computed as, d = 600mm.

M, = 0.87 II'" [d - O.42.xJ b) Depth of Neutral Axis:-

= (0.87 x415 x 1470)[0.42 x 73.5»)
Assuming Neutral Axis to faU within the' flange, compute the depth of
= (206.52 x 10') N.mm Neutral axis.
= 206.52 kN.m X,) (0.8711',,) = (0.87X415X4000) =0257
(_=
d 0.36 };,.b.d 0.36 x 20 x 1300 x 600 .
Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Aids)
x, = (0.257 x 600) = 154.3mm > Dr
Percentage Reinforcement in the section (Assuming br = b for the rectan-
Hence the assumption that Xu < Dr is not correct. ,Neutral Axis falls outside
gular section)
the flange.
_(100A,,) _(100X 1470)_
P,- [;;i - 800x420 ,-0,44
(iH~~~) =0.166 <02
Refer Table-3 of SP: 16 and read out. the value of (M,Ibd') corresponding
The neutral axis depth can be determined by referring to Fig. 6.5 and by
to compatibility of [qrces as shown below.
I, = 415 N/mm' and};, =25 N/mm'
(Mjbd') = 1.47

M, = (1.47 x 800 x 420')10-< .

A~summg (Dr)
Xu < 0.43
,= 207,4 kN.m

2) Calculate the Ultimate moment of resistance of a tee-beam having the

following section properties. = (0.36 x20 x 325 xx,,) = 2340 x, N
Width of flange = 1300 mm C, = 0,45/,,(b r- bw)D,
Thickness of flange = 100 mm
= (0,45 x20)(1300- 325)100 = 877500 N.
 Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections .97
Reinforced ConcreleDesigll

T=0.87 f,A" d = 565 mm

bw = 250 mm
= (0.87x415 x 4000) A" = 1256.6 mm'
= 14442000 N.
a) Depth of Neutral Axis
2340x. + 877500 = 1444200
Assuming neutral axis to fall within the flange, the depth of neutral axis is
XIf= 242.18 rom.
computed.

(~H2~g.~8)=0.413 <0.43 (x.) (0.87f,A,,)

d = 0.36J;k. br,d =
(0.87X415X 1256.6)
0.36x 15x950x565 =0,16
x., mn = 0.48 d = (0.48 x 600) = 288mm, x. = (0.16x565) = 90.4mm > 80 mm
Hence according to clause G-2.3 of I.S 456-2000, the moment of resistance Hence, the assumption that Xu < Dr is not correct. The Neutral axis falls
is computed by replacing Xu by x....mu in Eqn.6.8. outside the flauge.

:~'':'l
, M. = 0.36( ~) [1-0.42 (~)]J;k.bw.d'+0.45J;k(b,-bw)DJd - 0.5D,) (i) =U~sJ=0.14 <0.2

(~~~) [1 - 0.42 (~~~ )] (20 x 325 x 600')

Neutral axis depth is deterillined by referring to Fig. 6.5 and by compati-
I = 0.36 x bility of forces as shown'in figure we have
,
1

I +[0.45 x 20(1300 - 325)100(600 -0.5 x lOO)J [CI+CJ = ITI +TJ = T.

1';!:1t1
I
= (764.84 xla') N.mm = 764,84 kN.m.
Assuming ( Dr) .
tlf'''tctj
I Xu < 0.43
I
I Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Tables)
I C I = 0.361ok bw x. = (0.36 x 15 X 250 x x.) = 1350 x•.
t~"f><1
I Tables 57, 58 and 59 of SP-16 give the vaiues of (M•. Hm I bw d'lok) for sin-' C, = 0.451ok (bl - bw ) Dr
1
I
gly reinforced T-beams. These tables can be used wncn Xu = Xu,mall in which = (0.45 x 15) (950-250) 80
1
case the limiting moment of resistance can be compu'ted. In the present = 378000 N.
example Xu < xu,mall and hence the tables cannot be used for computing the T = 0.87 f, A'I
moment or-resistance as the sectioll\is under reinforced section. = (0.87 X 415 x 1256.6)
3) A singly reinforcedT- beams has a flange width of 950 mm,thickneSS = 453695.43 N.
of flange 80mm, width of rib = 250 mm. Effective depth 565mm. Heace we have (1350 x. + 378000) = 453695.43
Area of tensile reinforcement 1256.6mm'. If M-15 concrete and Fe, ... Xu = 56.07 mm < 80 mm.
415 HYSD bars are used, estimate the ultimate flexural strength of the
section using IS: 456-2000 code provisions. Therefore
.
the assumption that .
Method-l (Using IS: 456·2000 code provisions) (~) < 0.43 is wrong and (~) will be > 0.43. As such value of C, will
change.
a) Data
br = 950 mm 10k = 15 N/mm'.
Dr = 80mm ,
J,
= 415 N/mm'
 Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 99
98 Reinfqrced Concrete Design
Mcthod-l (Using IS: 456-2000 code provisions)
c, ~ 0.45 f" (b, - bw ) y,
y, ~ (0.15 x, + 0.65 Dr)
~ (0.15 x, + 0.65 X 80) a) Data
~ (0.15 x, + 52) b, = 900 mm
C, ~ 0.45 X 15 (950-250) (0.15 xu + 52) Dr ~ 150 mm f" ~ 20 Nlmm'
~ (708.75 x, + 245700) d ~ 650 mm f, ~ 415 Nlmm'
b. ~ 300 mm
[1350 x, + 708:75 x, + 245700] ~ 453695.43. ASl :;;: 4000 mm2
x, ~ 10\.03 mm> 80 mm.
b) Depth of Neutral Axis

( ~)
x,
~ (~.)
10\.03
= 0.80 > 0,43
Assuming neutral axis to fall within the flange, the depth of neutral axis is
x = 0.48d ~ (0,48 x 565) = 271.2 mm. computed.
u, max . . . '
x.) (0.87 / ,11,,) ( 0.87x4t5x4000 )
( d = O.36/".b r,d ~ 0.36 x 20 x900 x 650 ~ 0.34
Hence according to Clause- G.2.3 of I.S.456-2000 the moment of
x, = (0.36 x 650) = 221.mm > D,
resista~ce of Tee-section is computed by replacing xu,max by Xu in Eq.(6.9).
Hence the assumption that Xu < Dr is not correct. The neutral axis falls out-
M, ~ 0.36 (x,~",) [1 _Q.42 (x,;'')] /".b•.d' + 0.45fo,(b,- bw)y~d - O.sy,) side the flange.

(i) =U~~)
(x)
~ ~ (101.03)
_ _ =0.18 and Y,= [O.l5x, +0. 65DJ =0.23>0.2
d 565·
Neutral axis depth is determined by referring to Fig. 6.5 and by compati-
Yr= [(0.15 x 101.03) + (0.65 X 80)] = 67.15mm < Dr
bility of forces as shown below. .
M, ~ 0.36 (0.18) [1-0.42 X 0.18] (15 X 250 X 565') [C,+CJ =[T,+TJ ~T
+ 0.45 X 15 (950-250) 67.15 (565-0.5 X 67.15)
C, = 0.36/,.b.""•.
...
'u.\ti
~ (240.03 X 10')N.mm
~ 240.03 kN.m ~ (0.36x20x300xx.) ~ 2160 x.

C, ~ 0,45/,,(b, ~ b.) Yf
Method 2 (using SP: 16 Design aids)
Y,= 0.15x, +0.65 D,
In the present example, x, < X,.m" and hence~P: 16 Design tables 57,58,59 ~·._,u

~ 0.15x, + (0.65 x 150)

cannot be. used to compute the moment of reslsta.nce.
4) A singly reinforced T-beam has a flange width of 900mm, thickness ~(O.l5x,+97.5)
of flange is 150mm width of rib ~ 300mm, Effective depth ~ 650mm.
2
Area of tensile reinforcement:;;: 4000 mm . M-20 grade concrete and C, ~ [(0,45 x 20)(900 - 300)(0. 15x. + 97.5)] ~ [8 lOx, + 526500]
Fe-415 HYSD bars are used. Estimate the ultimate flexural strength of T ~ (0.87f,.A,,) ~ (0.87 x415 x 4000) ~ 1444200 N
the section using IS: 456-2000 code provisions.
(2160x,+8IOx,+526500)~ 1444200
 Ultimate Srrnrgth ofReinfdrced Concrete Sections 101
100 Reinforced Ca,ncrete Design
x") (O,87,r.,~'
_= ' ='( 0,87x415x5520 ,) =0307
,
.. xu =309mm>Dr
(d 0,J6/.,.bJ. 0.36x20 x 1200x750 .
Xu, "'"~ = 0.48d = 312mm l'
.. x. =(l1.:-:-X i50) = 230.25 mm > Dr' , I"
, <

Hence, according to Clause-G.2,3 of LS: 456-2000, the moment of

Hence, the assumption rhat :1;, < Dr is not correct. Compute the neutral axis
depth by force compati~ilit~ ~·(the section;
'il, ,
resistance of tee~section is computed by repladng XU,I113~ by Xu in Eq. 6.9 :"
J:,,'1 = l'150)
750 =0,2
I!
I.'I
M" = 0.36 ( J) [1-0.42(J )];;k,bw,d'+0.45;;k(b,-bw)Y~d - O.5y,) , .I
Refer Fig. 6.5 and by equ:1rin? me compressive and tensile forces, we have
the relation ,i
(J)=(~~~)=0,475 and y,=(0,15x"+0,65D,)
(e, -C,)=(T,+ T,) = T
, II
i
Y,= (0,15 x 309) + (0,65 x 150) = 143,85mm < Dr

M" = [0.36 x 0.475(1 - 0.42 x 0.475)20 x 300 x 650'J

: 111 '
= (0.36 x 20 x 300 xx,,) = 2160x"
+ [(0.45 x 20)(900 - 300)143,85(650 - 0.5 x 143,85)J
,1'1 j

C, = 0,45t,(b,-b w)Dr Ill'

i !
= (796,05 x lO')N,mm ;! I
= 0,45 x 20(1200 - 300)150 = 1215000 N
= 796:05 kN,m
r = 0.87fy,A"
5) A tee-beam is singly reinforced and has the following sectional prop-
'1 erties. Estimate the ultimate moment of resistanrze of the section using r = (0,87 x415 x 5520)
I.S code provisions. . = 1992996 N
Width of flange = 1200 mm
[:tl<1<,_1215000J = 1992996
Thickness of Flange = 150 mm
Width of rib = 300 mm .l:. = 360mm > Df
For Fe-415 HYSD bar<, x",,, = 0,48 d= (0,48 x 750) = 360 ~m,
Effective depth = 750 mm 2
Area of tension reinforcement;::: 5520 mm
M-20 Grade Concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars

Method-l (Using IS: 456·2000 Code Provisions),

and 10J=(150)=02
(t, ,750 '
a) Data
b, = 1200 mm A" = 5520 mm'
D, = 150 mm tk =20 N/mrn' The moment of resisranc' is computed by using Eq, (6,8)
bw = 300 mm J, = 415 N/mm'
d =750mm xu=xll.rnl.\ = 360 mm &(~) = 0.48

b) Depth of Neutral Axis x)[ 1- OA2 (,\1

j 'J
' ,, . , '
:;'.;_,d' +0.45h.(b,- bwP~d - O.5D,)
, (
M" = 0.36 -;;
Assuming neutral axis to fall within the flange, we have,
 Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 103
102 Reinforcqd Concrete Design

='0.36 x 0.48[1 -0.42(0.48)]20 x 300 x 750' (x.)

_= (0.87/,11,,) = ( 0.87x415x3966 ) =0368
d 0.36h,.br.d 0.36x20x900x600 .
+0.45 x 20(1200 - 300)150(750 - 0.5 x 150) x. = (0.368 x 600) = 220.8 mm > D,.
6
= (1285 x 10 ) N.mm Hence. the assumption that Xu < Dr is not correct. Compute the ncutral ,\xis
depth by force compatibility of the section.
,
= 1285 kN.m

Method.2 (Using SP: 16 Design Tables) (~,)=U6~) =025

Refer Fig. 6.5 and by equating the' compressive and tensile forces, wc have
Refer Table-58 of SP: 16 [Table 6.7 of text]
Corresponding to the ratios of the relation

(~)=(~~~)=0.2 And (:}C:~~)=4

and Fe- 415 N/mm' and read out the value of ratio. = (0.36x20x 300 xx., = 2160x.
M•.;'m ] = 0.379 C, = 0.45h.(b,- bw)D,
[ bw·d ·h,
= 0.45 x 20(900- 300)150
M. = [0 379 x 300X 760' x20j = [1279 x 10'] N.mm = 1279 kN.m
u,lIm •
= 810000 N
6) Determine the ultimate moment of resistance of the tee beam having
the following section properties:-
T = 0.87J,.A st
.Width of Flange = 900 mm = (0.87 x 415 x 3966)
Thickness of Flange = 150 nlln = 14,31,924N
Width ofrib = 300 mm
Effective depth = 600 mm . 2 (2160x..81O,OOO)= 19,92,996
Area of Tension Reinforcement:;:; 3966 mm
xu =288mm>Dr
M-20 Orade Concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
For Fe-415 HYSD bars, the limiting depth of the neutral axis is given by
Method-l (Using IS 456·2000 Code. Provisions) the expression, x•.m" = 0.48 d = (0.48 x 600) = 288 mm.

a) Data
br =900mm A" = 3966 mm'
and (H= Gm = 0.52 > 0.43

=
10, 20 N/mm'
Dr
bw
= 150 mm
= 300 mm f, = 415 N/mm' also . (~}=(~~~)=0.25>0.2
d =600mm Hence according to Clause 0.2.3 of IS: 456-2000, the moment of
resistance is computed by the Eq. (6.9)
b) Depth of Neutral Axis

Assuming neutral axis to fall within the flange thickness, we have,

M. '" 0.36 (x.;'') [1 _ 0.42 (x.;'')] h •.bw.d' + 0.45J;,(b,- bWly~d - O.5y,)
 ·R"inJ'o,,;ed Concrete Design l/Ltimate Stre,,:gth of ReJnjorced Concrete SectiOJl~' 105 "/1 I/'
.• y,= (0.15x, +0.65Dr) = (0.15 x 288) + (0.65 x 150)= 140.7mm <Dr= 150mm .. M,.I'm = [0. 138J;.bw.d' + 0.45J;,(b,- bw)D~d - 0.5D,l] It,
0"
I!
. d
M, = (0.36 x 0.48) [1- (0.42 x 0.48)] (20 x 300 x·600') = [(0.138 x20 x300x6002)+0.45 x 20(750- 300)120(600- 0.5 x 120)] ;"t I

+(0.45 x 20)(900 - 300)140.7[600 - (0.5 x 150)] = (554 x 1O')N.mm I.,;

;1· ,
i
·';'·1:
,
I
= (700 x 1O')N.mm = 700kN.m Since M u =.(300 x I06)N.mm < Mu,lim
.,
Xu < 0.48d
Method.2 (Using SP: 16 Design Tables)
Assuming Xu < Dr, compute the val.ue of Xu from moment equation
Refer Table-58 of SP: 16 [Table 6.7 of textl M, = 0.36J;,.br.x"(d - 0.42x")
Dr) (150)
( d = 600 =0.25 And (·bb = (900)
r
w
)
300 =3 (300 x 10') = (0.38x20x750xx")(600-0.42x")

[x~ - 1428.5x" + 1.32 x 105] = 0

M,."m ]
Read out the value of [ - - ,- = 0.323
bw·d ·f.:k Solving xu;:;: 99 mm. He~ce. Xu < Dr
M"."m = [0.323 X300x600' x 20] = (698 x 1O')N.mm = 698 kN.m
c) Tensile Reinforcement

6.3.7 Design Examples The section is consid~red as rectangl,llar and under reinforced
I) Determine the area of tensile reinforcement required in a flanged A ...!, )11
beam having the following sectional dimensions to support a factored M"=0. 87 f,A.,· d [ 1- ( b,d.J;. ~
moment of 300 kN.m
A x415 )]
Width of Flange (b r) =750 mm (300XIO')=(0.87X415xA;,x600) [ 1- ( 750~600X20
Width of rib (b w ) =300 mm
Thickness of Flange (Dr) =120 mm Solving A" = 1493 mm'
Effective Depth (d) = 600 mm
. M-20 Grade Concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars Method-2 (Using SP:. 16 Design Aids)

Method-1 (Using IS: 456·2000 Code Provisions) Since neutral axis fall~ wi~hin ,flange. t,he section is considered as rectan-
gular. . .
a) Data Referring to Table-2 ofSP: 16 (Table 6.5 o(Text)

b,
bw
= 750 mm
=300mm
h' = 20 N/mm'
f, = 415 N/mm' (M,) _( 750x60o'
bd' -
300x 10')
-
-Ill
..
Dr = 120 mm M,=300kNm Read out percentage reinforcement P, corresponding to 1, = 415 N/mm'
D =600m yielding p, = 0.33% .

b) Limiting moment of Resistance (~) =( ~~~) = 0.2 .. A =(P,.b.d) =(0.33X750X600) = 1485mm'

"tOO tOO
2) A tee-beam has the following dimensions:-
 Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections 107
101,
~) Area of Tension Reinforcement
I ;fkcli',- ,,'dth of flange (br) = 2000 mm
'J'l1idlll'::S ,-'f FlJ.nge (Dr) ;:: 150 rom
Widlh \,fri~ lr'O);:: 300 mm
Ellec,i"- ,o'T'h (d) = 1000 mm
J(0.36};, bw.X") + (0.45};' (b r- bw)Dr)]
M-20 tir,,-" Concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars
~ 0.87!, 0.87 t,
· tl"-~ timitin O moment of capacity of the section and the corre-
Ca Iell IaI( " e
A _~(0.36X20X300X480) (0.45 x 20(2000-300)150] _
spondillg ~n'('J. t.'f tension reinforcement. ,
,,-~ 0.87x415 + 0.87x415 -9227 mm

Mclhod -Itl'sing IS: 456-2000 Code Formulae)

Method-2 [Using SP: 16 Design Tables]
a) IlnW
Dr =2000 mm 10, = 20 N/mm' Table-58 of SP: 16(Tab1e 6.8 of text) is used to compute the limiting
D, = 150 mm t, = 415 N/mm' moment of resistance. T~e parameters are
b, = 300 mm
d = 1000 mm ('IiD = (150)
f)
1000 =0.15 and (bb r) = (2000).
w
300 =6.66

h) N,'Ullll\ ,,,is Depth Read out

(-bw·d
M".,,~) . to the parameters
- , - correspondmg
let
Fnl' ,. ;: : ..\.15 JS/mm2, limiting depth of neutral axis is
.' M".;'m ] = 0.490
x, = 0.48 d = (0.48 x 1000) = 480 mm [bw.d .};, .
Df ) = (150)
(d 1000 =0.15<0.2 M".". = (0,490 X 300x 1000' x 20) = 2940 x 10' N.m'" = 2940 kN.m
3) A tee beam has a cross section as delailed below:-
Df )=(150)=0.31 <0,43
( Xu 480 Effective Width of Flange = 1500 mm
Thickness of Flange = 200 mm
h) 1\ lmnt'nt llf resistance Thickness of rib = 300 mm
Effective Depth = 750 mm
Hem','. E~. ,,,,) recommended in IS: 456-2000 yields, If};, = 20 N/mm' and!, = 415 N/mm'. design the tension reinforcement

,/ =
'",
le"':~)
. ~d
[1-0,42(~) t.. ,.bw.d'+0,45"';(b,- bw)DId -O.5D,)
d Yc
required to resist an ultimate design bending moment of 1600 kN.m

. Method-1 [Using IS:· 456·2000 Code Provisions]

ThiS c,'tlU:ltk'{'l ,--an be recast as
AI.. " 1<'.1."':, .'o,J' + 0,45"',(br- bw)D~d - 0.5Df )] a) Data
b, = 1500 mm 10, = 20 N/mm'
• 1(lll."" ;l.1:doo X 1000') + 0,45 x 20(1000 - 300)150(1000 - 0.5 x 150)J
bw = 300 mm J, . = 415 N/mm'
t> (~~~h.1t1'1Xmm d =750mm M" = 1600 kN.m
Dr =200mm
::.: :\\."t.' l'S.tU

.,!
 Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 109
it
/Rei1i.!iircet!'Concrete Desiglj
=[0.36X20X300X273.] . .[0.45 x20 (1500-300)(0.15 x273 +0.65 x 200)]
ii'
': .:

r i
b) Lin;iting M~mentoiResistance.·
,.', r I~
A, 0.87x415 + . 0.87x415

I
2
= 6746 mm
(d) =G~~) = 0.26>0.2 Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design tables)
j
x,. m" =0.48" =(0.48 x 750) =360 mm spi 16 Design tables cannot be .used for the computation of area of tension
Using IS: 456"2000 Code Equations given Under Clause G..2.2.I for reinforcement in tee·beams. Tables 58 and 59 of SP: 16 [Tables 6.8 and 6.9
the ratio of (DId:) > 0.2,
of text] can be used only for determining the limiting moment of resistance
(M"Hm) for known value of parameters (DId:) and (bIb.) and!,.
M, = 0.36( X,;") [1-0.42 (x,;'')] h,.b•. "'+ 0.45hk (b,-b.)y~d -0.5y,)
6.4 ULTIMATE FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF DOUBLY
Where Yr = (0. 15xp + O.65Dr)but not greater Ihan Df• REINFORCED CONCRETE SECTIONS

y, = [(0.15 x 360) + (0.65 x 200)] 6.4.1 Design principles

= 184mm<D,=200mm
Reinforced concrete ~eams with compression reinforcement will be
.. M, = [0.138 h,.b•.'" + 0.45hk(b,- b.)y~d - O.5y,)] required in cases where the depth of the beam is restricted and the singly
reinforced section is insufficient to resist the moment on the section.The
= [0.138+ 20 x 300 x 7S02j +0.45 x20(1500- 300)184(750-0.5 x 184)]
,, .behaviour of R.C.C. beams 'with compression steel for ultimate load design
= (1773 x 10') N.mm '(,is sometimes referred ~o as. the Steel beam theory. The ~inal beam section
I
~mnl with tension and compression steel is assumed to consist of two separate
= 1773 kN.m >M,= 1600kN.m .beams consisting of
""..j1
c) Determination of Nentral Axis:- a) A singly reinforced . section' which reaches its limiting value of
,
I
moment of resistance expressed as M lI ,lim'
I
~., For the known value of M u• compute Xu by repla.ei~g x u.max by x u.- in the A steel beam without any concrete but reinforced with tension and
, moment equation. , compression steel.
f

..
(1600x 10') = 0 36
.
(~)
750
[1- 0.42(~)] (20 x 300 x 750')
750·"
The moment of resistance of the doubly reinforced section will be the
~um of the ,moment of resistance of the two different sections specified in
(a) and (b). . '-
+ (0.45 x 20)(1500 - 300) [0.15x, + 130] x [750 ~0.5(0.15x, + 130)J
."

Simplifying we have (x~ - 2500 x,..+ 620700)

~. .-
=O. ·6:4.2 Design Equations

x,= 273 mmand .... {~}(~~~)=0.7:l>0.43 \SQnSider t4e doubly reinforced concrete section split -,into two parts as
.shown in Fig. 6.7. . .
J4et MlI :::; moment of resistance of the dou~ly reinforced section.
d) Area of tensile reinforcement Mill :::; MII,li~::::: the limiting or the maximum moment capacity of the
singly reinforced section [Eq. 6.5].
, M 1I2 moment capacity of the steel beam neglecting the effect
;:;:

of concrete
A =
016' b
.~ ~hl; w
.x.] + [0.45/o,(b,-b.)(0.15X,+0.65D
u .. f) ]
= f~ A~ (d - d')
" [ 0.87 x415 0.871, !
 Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections III
r-b-j Table 6.10 Stress in Compl'essioll Reinforccmcnt Us<) in Doubl)' reinforced Beams
.4..-. A. sc with Cold Workcd Bars(Tablc-F of SP: 16)

{y (N/mm~) (d'ldj
0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20

+ (d-d') 415
500
355
424
353
412
342
395
329
370
T] ==C]
l . -_ _-' A.st, -t-~:.:.··~:t..,j",!A'st2
(A,,, X 0.871,)" (0.36 h.bx","m)
Mu Mu,lim =Mu, Hence, we have, A,,, =[0.36J;k b X","mJ!(0.87 1,)
Fig. 6,7 Doubly Reinforced Section Where T 1 and C] are. the tensile andcompr.essive force capacity of balanced
singly reinforced section,
where /., = the stress in the compression steel corresponding to the strain
reached by it when the extreme concrete fibre reaches a strain of 0.0035.
Hence, we have the relation,
2) M", =
(M" - M","m) =/.,
A" (d - d')
=
Hence we have, A" [M",/f" (d - d'»)
M u :;;: Mu,lim + Isc A sc (d-d') =
: 3) T, C,. Hence, we have (0.87 I, A",) =(/., A,,)
, Where, Asc ;:: area of compression reinforcement Therefore A." = [if., A" ) ! 0.87 f,J
d = cffective depth to tension steel Where_ T2 and C2 are the additional, tensile and compressive force carrying
d':;;: depth of compression reinforcement from compression 9apacity of section. .
face
Asl, ;:: area of tensile reinforcement for a singly reinforced sec- 6.4,3 Analysis of doubly Reinforced Sections
tion.
A 2;:: area of tensile reinforcement required to balance the Method-l (Using I.S. Code Formula)
" compression reinforcement.
Ail := (A stl + As12) := total tensile.steel. I) As a first trial, assume XII :::: Xu lim' and calculate strain in concrete at the
level of Compressioil steel (~S~) computed as
The value of stress in the compression reinforcement (he) depends upon
the ratio (d'!dj and the grade of steel as shown in Table 6.10 based on Esc == 0.0035 [xu.tim -tlllxu,lim

SP:16. 2) For mild steel bars, if E" < 0.00125, where 0.00125 is the yield strain
For values of (d'!dj up to 0.2, the stress in concrete in the extreme fibre of mild steel. We have the stress in mild steel as,
is equal to 0.45f,. and for mild steel reinforcement/., would be equal to the
design yield stress having a value of 0.87 f,. When the reinforcement is· fsc == (0.87Es Esc) = (0.87 x2 x 10\c)
cold worked bars, the design stress in compression reinforcement Ise for If E" > 0.00125, then f. " 0.87 I,
different values of (d'!dj is shown in Table 6.10, based on SP: 16.
The reinforcements .A sll ' A!J2 and As~ in the doubly reinforced- section is For HYSD bars, obtain the value of he from the stress-strain curve shown
in Fig. 6.3. (Fig. 3 of SP: 16-1980). .
computed using the following steps.
in
1) Equating tensile force steel and compressive force in concrete, we 3) Calculate the value of A,,, using the relation A", =[(/., A,,)I 0.87 f,J
Obtain the value of ASII = (Asl - ASI2 )
have
Calculate the value of Xu using the relation,
=
x" [(0.87 f,A,,,)! (0.3610. b)]
 Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete S;ctioJ1s 113
112 Reinforced Concrete Design
This method of computing the moment of resistance is referred to as the
6) Considering this value of Xu , repeat the steps· 1 to 5 to obtain COlost,ant strain compatibility method or force equilibrium method and it gives a
value of Xu . . correct value of the moment of resistance of the section.
7) Comparing this value of ,xu with Xu,nm. calculate thevaluc of Mu -
8) If Xu < Xu,tim. compute the value of the mornc?t capacity of section as· 6.4.4 Use of Design Aids (SP: 16) for design of
M. = [0.87/,;1,,, +/,jI,,(d - d')] Doubly reinforced Sections
If t" > x. compute the value of the moment capacity of section as
9) • II lI,hm' The tabIc~ and charts of SP: 16 are very useful in the analysis and design of
M, ~ [0.36 hk x,.lim b (d - 0.42 x,.lim) +f., A~ (d - d')]
doubly rClnforced beams.
The moment of resistance of a doubly reinforced section can be
Method-2 expressed in the form, .
M".= [M•.I'm + p"bd(0.87/,) (d - d')J
Alternatively, strain compatibility method may be used to analyse
doubly reinforced sections as detailed below: (Mjbd') = (M•.""Ibd') + p" (0.87/,) [I - (d'ld)J/IOO
I) Select a trial value for x" the depth of neutral axis. Assuming that the = additional percentage of tensile reinforcement
, Where Pl2
extreme compression fibre in concrete fails at a strain of feu = 0.0035 s"UI!llli'
expressed as (100 A", I b d)
determine the strain in the tension reinforcement by the relation.
PI =: total percentage of tension reinforcement
Est = Ecu (d - d')/xu PI,lim =: percentage of tension reinforcement for the singly

reinforced section ~ (100 A,,/ b d)

2) Compute the stress jn steel (f., <f, ) corresponding to E" by the
strain curve shown in Fig. 6.3. Hence, we have PI' = VJi,lim + Pa)
3) Total tension in steel is computed as T=fslA sl p, ~ percentage of compression reinforcement ~ (100 A.j b d)
4) Compute the strain in compression steel using the relation SP: 16 design tables 45 to 56 present the percentage of tension and com-
e = [0.0035(x, - d' )!xJ pression reinforcements (P, and p,) for different ratIos of (d'/d) varying·
from ?05 to 0.20 and for various grades of concrete Ifok ~ 15 to 30 N/mm')
K

5) Read out the compressive st"ress.fsc corresponding to the strain Esc
Fig. 6.3.
6) Compute the compressive force in steel as C s =: fsc Asc
7) Using the standard stress block for concrete on the compression
compute the compressive force in concrete as
Cc = 0.36J;k b Xu
8) D,termine the total compression as C ~ (C, + C,) . 6,4,5 Analysis Examples
9) Check whether total tension T is equal to the compression C. (T ~
If T=: C. the assumed neutral axis'deptli~lI is satisfactory.
chose another trial value of x. and repeat the steps from (I) to (8)
the value of T ~ C.
10) The ultimate 'moment of resistance is computed by taking
moments of forces Cs and Cc about tension steel yi~lding the
M. = [CJd -O.42x,) + C,(d -d')]
and dIfferent grades of steel (I, ~ 250,415 and 500 N/mm') covering the
moment of resistance factor (M jbrl') varying from 2.24 to 8.30.
Some of the salient tables coverIng M-20, M-25 and M-30 grades of .
co~crete and Fe-415 grade steel arc reproduced in Tables ·6.11,6.12 and
6.13 of the text.
I) Determine the ultimate moment of resistance of a doubly reinforced
beam of Rectangular section having a width of 300 mm and ·reinforced
WIth 5 bars of 25 mm diameter at an effective depth of 600 mm. The
compression. steel is made up of 2 bars of 25 mm diameter at an
effective cover of 60 mm. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and fe-415
HYSD bars. .
 Table 6.11 Flexure-Reinforcement Percentages For Doubly Reinforced Sections
(Table-50 or SP: 16) :;;:
fck = 20 N/mm 2

M,jlxf d'ld= 0.05 d'ld= 0.10 <1'ld= 0.15

f y= 500 N/mm2
d'ld= 0.20
'"
~
~
~.

N/mm' ;;
~
P, P, P, P, P, P, P, P, "-
2.77 0.958 0:002 0.958 0.002 0.959 0.003 0.959 0.003 g
~
2.80 0.967 0.011 0.968 0.012 0.968 0.013 0.969 0.015
2.90
3.00
0.996
1.025
0.042
0.072
0.998
1.029
0.045
0.077
1.001
1.034
0.049
0.084
1.004
1.038
0.054
0.093
~~

3.10
3.20
1.055
1.084
0.103
0.133
1.060
1.091
0.109
0.142
1.066
1.099
0.119
0.154
1.073
1.108
0.132
0.171
"'"
~

~.
3.30 1.113 0.164 1.122 0.174 1.131 0.190 1.142 0.2·10
3.40 1.142 0.194 1.152 0.207 1.164 0.225 1.177 0:249
3.50 1.171 0.224 1.183 0.239 1.197 0.260 1.212 0.288
3.60 1.200 0.255 1.214 0.271 1.229 0.295 1.246 0.327
3.70 1.230 0285 1.245 0.304 1.262 0.331 1.281 0.366
3.80 1.259 0:316 1.276 0.336 1.294 0.366 1.315 0.405
3.90 1.288 0.346 1.306 0.369 1.327 0.401 1.350 0.444
4.00 1.317 0.376 1.337 0.401 1.360 0.437 1.385 0.483
4.10 1.346 0.407 1.368 0.433 1.392 0.472 1.419 0.522
4.20 1.375 0.437 1.399 0.466 1.425 0.507 1.454 0.561
4.30 1.405 0.468 1.429 0.498 1.457 0.542 1.489 0.600
4.40 1.434 0.498 1.460 0.530 1.490 0.578 1.523 0.640
4.50 1.463 0.528 1.491 0.563 1.523 0.613 1.558 0.679
4.60 1.492 0.559 1.522 0.595 1.555 0.648 1.593 0.718

(Contd.)

Table 6.11 (Contd.)

4.70 1.521 0.589 1.553 0.628 1.588 0.683 1.627 0.757
4.80 1.550 0.620 1.583 0.660 1.620 0.719 1.662 0.796
4.90 1.580 0.650 1.614 0.692 1.653 0.754 1.696 0.835
5.00 1.609 0.680 1.645 0.725 1.686 0.789 1.731 0.874
5.10 1.638 0.711 1.676 0.757 1.718 0.825 1.766 0.913
5.20
5.30
1.667
1.696
0.741
0.772
1.707
1.737
0:790
0.822
1.751
1.783
0.860
0.895
1.800
1.835
0.956
0.991
~
is
5.40 1.725 0.802 1.768 0.854· 1.816 Ii:
0.930 1.870 1.030
5.50 1.755 0.832 1.799 0.887 1.849 ~
0.966 1.904 1.069
5.60 1.784·
~S-
0.863 1.830 0.919 1.881 1.001 1.939 1.108
5.70 1.813 0.893 1.861 0.952 1.914 1.036 1.974 1.147
5.80 1.842 0.924 1.891 0.984 1.946 1.071 2.008 1.186 ~
5.90 1.871 0.954 1.922 1.016 1.979 1.107 2.043 1.225
6.00
6.10
1.900
1.930
0.985
1.015
1.953
1.984
1.049
1.08T
2.012
2.044
.1.142
1.177
2.078
2.112
1.264
1.303
'"'"
~.

<;;,
c
6.20 1.959 1.045 2.014 1.114 2.077 1.213 2.147
;;
1.342
6.30 1.988 1.076 2.045 1.146 2.109 1.248 2.181 . 1.381 '"
"-
~
6.40 2.017 1.106 .2.076 1.178 2.142 1.283 2.216 1.421
6.50 2.046 1.137 2.107 1.211 2.175 1.318 2251 1.460 Q
6.60 2.075 1.167 2.138 1.243 2.207 1.354 2.285 ~
1.499
6.70 Ii:
2.105 1.197 2.168 1.276 2.240 1.389 2.320 1.538
6.80 2.134 '"
"'"
1.228 2.199 1.308 2.272 1.424 2.355 1.577
6.90 2.163 1.258 2.230 1.340 2.305 1.459 2.389 1.616 §-
7.00 2.192 1.289 2.261 1.373 2.338 1.495 - 2.424 1.655 0;
. 7.10 2.221 1.319 2.292 1.405 2.370 1.530
-
2.459 1.694

'-"

f t: ~ ", f'
 , -c. ;, •,
"' ~ ~

Table 6.12 Flexure-:Reinforcement Percentages For Doubly Reinforced Sections

(Tablec 51 ofSP: 16) .
hk= 20N/mm
2
:>,
f y= 415 N/mm2
"S·
~.-
Mjtxf d'ld= 0.05 d'ld=0.10 d'ld= 0.15 d'ld=0.20
Nlmm'
;::
P, P, P, P, P, ""l
"'-
P, P,
0.002
P,
1.i97 0.002'. 1.197 0.003 1.197 0.003
.,.
."""
3.46 1.197
3.50 1.209 0.014 1210 0.Q15 1210 0.017 1.211 0.019
3.60 . 1.238 0.045 1.240 0.048 1.243 0.052 1.246 0.58 0:.
3.70 1.267 0.076 1.271 0.08) 1.276 0.088 1.281 0.097 t:l
3.80 1.296 0;106 1.302 0.113 1.308 0.123 1.315 0.137 "
"
00'
0.176
3.90 1.325 0.137 1.33
1.363
0.146
1.178
1.341
1.373
0.159
0.194
1.350
1.385 0.215
"
4.00 1.355 0.167
4.10 1.384 0.198 1.394 0.211 1.406 0.230 1.419 0.254
1.413 0.229 1.425 0.244 1.439 0.265 1.454 0.294
4.29
4.30 1.442 0.259 1.456 0.276 1.471 0.301 1.488 0.333

4.40 1.471 0290 1.487 0.309 1.504 (Y.336 1.523 0.372

1.500 0.320 1.517 0.341 1.536 0.372 1.558 0.412
4.50
1.530 0.351 1.548 0.374 1.569 0.407 1.592 0.451
4.60- ~
1.559 0.382 1.579 0.407 1.602 .0.443 1.627 0.490
4.70
0.530
, 4.80 1.588 0.412 1.610 0.439 1.634 0.478
0.514
1.662
1.696 0.569
4.90 1.617 0.443 1.641 0.472 1.67
1.646 0.474 1.671 0.504 1.699 0.549 1.731 0.608
5.00
1.675 0.504 1.702 0.537 1.732 . 0.585 1.766 0.648
5.10
1.705 0.535 1.733 0.570 1.765 0.620 1.800 0.687
5.20
1.734 0.565 1,764 0.602 1.797 0.656 1.835 0.726
5.30
-
-- ----- -~- --- ----
,.~: .",'.' . :--'C:" ." "~" .. '. '~ ,:,ti;_;;,,~:~~;'f~

Table 6.12 (Conld.)

5.40 1.763 0.596 1.795 0.635 1.830 0.691 1.869 0.766
5.50 1.792 0.627 1.825 0.667 1.862 0.727 1.904 0.805
5.60 1.821 0.657 1.656 0.700 1.895 0.762 10939 0.844
5.70 1.851 0.688 1.887 0.733 1.928 0.798 1.973 0.844
5.80 1.880 0.718 1.918, 0:765 1.960 0.833 2.008 0.923 ~
§.
5.90 1.909 0.749 1.948 0.798 1.993 0.869 2.043 0.962
6.00
6.10
1.938
10967
0.780
0.810
1.979
2.010
0.830
0.863
2.025
2.058
0.904
0.940
2:.077
2.112
1.002
1.041
"0:
~
6.20 1.996 0.841 2.041 0:896 2.091 0.975 2.147 1.080 ;;;
""";;.
6.30 2.026 0.871 2.072 .0.928 2.123 1.011 2.181 1.120
6.40 2.055 0.902 ' 2.102 0.961 2.156 1.046 2.216 1.159
6.50
6.60
2.084
2.113
0.933
0.963
2.133
2.164
0.993
1.026
2.188
2.221
1.082
1.118
2.251
2.285
1.198
1.238 """"::0
",.
6.70
6.80
2.142
2.171
0.994
1.024
2.195
2.226
1.059
1.091
2.254
2.286
1.153
1.189
2.320
2.354
1.277
1.316
.,
'5,

6.90 2.201 1.055 2.256 1.124 2.319 1.224 2.389 1.356

~
"'-
7.00
7.10
2.230
2.259
1.086
1.116
2.287
2.318
1.157
1.189
2.351
2.384
1.260
1.295
2.424
2.458
1.395
1.434
bl
7.20 2.288 1.147 2.349 1.222 2.417 1.331 2.493 1.513
"";;;
7.30
7.40
2.317
2.346
1.177
1.208
2.380
2.410
1.254
1287
2.449
2.482
1.336
1,402
2.528
2.562 1.552 "
~
7.50 2.376 1.239 2.441 1.320 2.514 1.437 2.597 1.591 ~.
7.60 2.405 1.269 2.472 1.352 2.547 1,473 2.632 1.631
7.70 2.434 1.300 2.503 1.385 2.580 1.508 2.666 1.670 "'"
7.80 2.463 1.330 .2.534 1,417 2.612 1.544 2.701 1.709
.
...-....,

.£~i'''c1i:~~;~:~~~.:~ ~ J:-~i: ;:"'L..= ~;-.,;.:::3".-._"•. c·,~_· . :. c,

"'~. :,,:<:."; ~;;;':
.. ...
.::'.,"';':;'~, "-...,,...':, ,;...
"" ..,.... '""""'""'"',.,..,.. """·I'~· f,_
" , "
.'- ...
.'

'---'1'---':"----'
~ ~;; ~ ~ ,: '
 ..-" ,". -' Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sec/ions 121
,'120 Reinforced Concre.le Design
Second Trial

Method- (Strain compatibility) Assume Xu =·250 mm

e" = [0.0035(250- 60)/250] ~ 0.00266
a) Data
, ~ 20 N/mm' From Fig. 6.3, read out the value ofI., = 345 N/mm'
b ~
300mm J,k
d ~ 600mm I, ~ 415 N/mm'
, C, = (345 x 982)10" ~ 338.8 kN ., I''ii
d' =60mm , , 'H
A,, ~ (5 x 491) ~ 2455 mm , C, ~ (0.36 x 20 x 300 X 250)W-' ~ 540kN ,"
., i
Aw ~ (2 x 491) ~ 982 mm
Hence C ~ (C, +G,l = (338.8 +540) ~ 878.8 kN
b) Neutral Axis Depth en ~ [0.0035(600 - 250)/250] ~ 0.0049

As a first trial, assume the neutral axis depth as Tension steel yields and henceh, = 0.87 I,
Tensile force T= (0.87 f,A,,)= (0.87 x 415 x 2455 x 10-') = 886.4 kN.
x" ~ x",m" = 0.48" = (0.48 x 600) ~ 288 mm
Since C is nearly equal to T, compute the moment of resistance of the
c) Strain in tension reinforcement is computed as section by taking ~oments about tension steel.
M" = C.(d - 0.42x) + C,(d - d')

E'l
= [e,,(dx-'x")] =[0,0035(600-;
288.
288)] ~ 0,00379 = [540(600 - 0.4~ x 250) + 338.8(600 - 60)] 10'
" \
From stress-strain curve [Fig, 6.3] read out,h, ~ 0.87 f, = (450.25 x lO')N.mm
= 450.25 kN.m
d) Total tensile force
Method-2 (Using IS: 456·2000 Code Formula) .
T = 0.87 f.,A,,= (0.87 x415 x 2455 x lO-')~ 886.4 kN
e) Strain in compression steel is computed by the equation First Trilil
a) , Assume x" = x"l;m = ( 0.48 x 600 ).= 288 mm
~(O:0035(X"- d')) ~ (0.0035(288 - 60)) ~ 0.00277 b) e,,"; [0.0035·(x:."m - d')] 1x".lim
~c x" - .
.
288 ..
, = =
[0.0035 (288 - 60)]/288 0.00277
t) Read out the value ofh, from Fig. 6.3 aSh, ~ 350 N/mm
c) From the stress-strain curve (Fig. 6.3) read outh, = 350 N/mm'
d) A", ~ [(h, AK ) I (0.871,)] =[( =
350 x 982) I (0.87 x 415)] 952 tnm'
g) Force in compression steel~ C, ~ h, A ~ (350 x982 x 10-') ~
K e) A,,, ~(A" -A",) ~ (2455 - 952) ~ 1503mm'
h) Compressive force in concrete ~ C, ~ (0.36 x 20 x 300 x 288) =
f) x" [(0.87 I, A,,,) /(0.36};k b)]
~ [(0.87 x 415 x 1503) I (0.36 x 20 x3bO)] = 251.23 mm < 288 mm
~622kN
I) Total compressive fOrce= [C, +C,l ~ [343.7 +622] ~ 965.7 kN Second trial
j) For equilibrium of forces at the section, C =T a) Assume x" = 251.23 mm , I,'

= =
Since C 965.7 kN and T 886.4 kN, C> T =
b) e" [0.0035 (251.23- 60) 1251.~3] 0.00266 = 2
i :~

• Hence reduce the value of "'" and repeat the steps (b) to (j ) c) From stress-strain curve read Dutfse;: 345 N/mm 'II!
= =
d) An' [(345 x 982) I (0.87 x 415)] 938 mm'
 Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 123 ,,,
[ 122 Reil/forced Concrete Design b) Neutral axis depth
,,
,,
e)
f)
A", = (2455 - 938) = 1517 mm'
x, = [( 0.87 X 415 X 1517) I (0,36 X 20 x 300)J
x. = X. Jlm ~ 0.46d = (0.46 x 500) = 230 mm ,
h. ;.>

= 253.6 mm which is nearly equal to the assumed value E" = [0.0035(x•.Hm - d')/x•.,,") = 0,0035(230 - 50)/230 = 0.00274 I
I
and Xu < Xu,lim and hence the section is under reinforced
M, = [0.87 f, A", (d - 0,42 x,) + .r.,A~ (d - d')]
I g)
M, = [(0.87 X 415 X 1517)(600 - 0,42 X 253,6)]10-<>
c) Stress in steel· ,
I

1·-· ••\
+ [345 X 982 X (600 - 60)] 10-<> Refer the stre~s-strain curve (Fig, 6.3) and read out!., = 410 N/mm'
I = 453,24 kN,m .
I
I

Hence, the two methods yield nearly the same moment capacity of the d) Cheek for nentral axis depth
section. A", = if., A,,)/(0.87 f,) = (410 X 400)/(0.87 x 500) = 377 mm'
A", = (A" - A,,,) = (2450 - 377) = 2073 mm'
Method.3 (Using SP: 16 Design Tables)
=
x, (0,87 f, A,,,)/(0.36fo, b)
= [(0,87 x 50Q x 2073) I (0,36 x 30 x 280))
a) Compute parameters for use of design tables,
= 298.2.mm > x"Um = 230 mm
(d'ld) = (60/600) ~ 0.1 Hence, the section is over r~inforced
. p, ~ (100A,,)/(bd) ~ (100 x 982)/(300 x 600) = 0.55
e) Moment of resistance L'.M
p, = (IOOA,,)/(bd) = (100 x 2455)/(300 x 600) = 1.36

a) Refer Table-50 of SP: 16 corresponding tofo, = 20 N/mm' andf, = 415
N/mm', read out the ratio' (M, I bd') for (d'ld) = 0,1 ' = [(0.36 x 30 x. 230 x 280)(500 - 0042 x 230)+ 410 x 400
(M. I bd') = 4,45
Hence M. = (4,45 X 300 X 600') 10-<> = 443 kN,m
The moment of resistance computed is nearly equal to that computed
by the rigorous methods of analysis.
2) Determine the ultimate moment capacity of a rectangular beam having
a width of 280 mm and overall depth 550 mm, The tension and com-
pression reinforcements provided at an effective cover of 50 mm arc
I 2450 mm2 and 400 mrn2 respectively. Assume m-3D grade concrete
M. = 0.36fo. x"I'm b (d - 0,42 x",um) +!., A,; (d - d')
(500 - 50)]10-<>
= 354.37 kN,m
Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Tables)
a) Compute parameters for use of design tables
(d' I d) = ( 50 1500 ) = 0.1
p, = (100 x 400) I (2802< 500) = 0,285
p, = ( 100 x 2450) I (280 x 500 ) = 1.75 ~ __ H

II and Fe-500 HYSD bars, b) Refer Table-56 of SP: 16 forf" = 30 N/mm' andf, = 500 N/mm'

II Method-1 (Using IS: 456·2000 Code Formulae)

For (<tId) = 0.'1 read out the ratio (M/btf)
(M/bd') = 5,00, p, required is 1.698
"
I: P, provided is 1,75% which is only slightly higher than p, required
a) Data Hence, M. = (5 x 280 x 500') 10-<> = 350 kN,1ll .
b =280mm fo, =30 N/mm' The ultimate moment capacity of the section computed using SP: 16
d = 500 mm f, = 500 N/mm'
E, = 2 X 10' N/mm' design tables is nearly the same as that computed by rigorous methods.
d' =50mm
A" =2450 mm' Asc ::: 400 rnm2
 I~': 'Ii
! II!I
i24 ,Reinforced Concrete Design· Ultimate Strength ofRei'!forced Concrete Sections 125

6.4.6 Design examples Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Tables)

I:
I) A rectangular reinforced concrete beam of width 40Qmm and,effec- 0) Compute parameters to be used in SP: 16 design tables.
. tive depth 600 mm 'is to be designed to support an ulumate moment of [M, 1bd'] = [600 x 106]/[400 x 600'] = 4.16 n
600 kN.m. Using M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars deSIgn
b) Refer-Table-50 of SP: 16 corresponding tOh, = 20 N/mm',f, = 415
il
suitable reinforcements in the beam at an effective cover of 60 mm.
N/mm' '
And (d'ld) = 0.10
Method-l (Using IS: 456.2000 Provisions) Interpolate the value of percentage ofreinforcements PI' and Pc corre-
sponding to the parameter 4.16.
a) Data
h, = 20 N/mm' p, = 1.386% and p, = 0.452% ,
b =400mm A" = [(P, b d)1l00] = [(1.386 x 400 x 600) 1100] = 3326 mm'
d =600mm f, = 415 N/mtn'
M, =600kN.m A w = [(Po b d)/100] = [(0.452 x 400 x 600)/100] = 1085 mm'
d' =60mm
The results of reinforcements from SP:16 design tables are nearly the
b) Limiting Moment of Resistance same as that obtained by using IS:456 code provisions.
The limiting moment of resi'stance of singly reinforced section is 2) Design the reinforcements for a doubly reinforced concrete beam sec-
tion to support a factored moment of 1000 kN.m. AssUl;le b = 400 mm,
' = (0138 r b d') = (0.138 x 20 x 400 X 600') 10" = 397 kN.m
M lI,lim. • Jck· " d = 550 mm, cover d' = 50 mm,h, = 30 N/mm' andf, = 415 N/mm'.

c) Reinforcements Method- I (Using IS: 456-2000 code provisions)

A = area of tensile reinforcement for a singly reinforced section for
511 .

Mu,um ' . .
= [0.36h, b (0,48 d) ]1 (0.87 f,) b =400mm M,= 1000 kN.m
= [0.36 x 20 x 400 x 0,48 x 600]1 (0.87 x 415) 'd =550mm h, =30 N/mm'
= 2297 mm' d' = 50mm f,' = 415 N/mm'
[M, _ M,.um] = [600 - 397] = 203 kN.m
b) Limiting #bMomcnt of resistance
But [M, - M,.um] = [fw A w (d - tt)]
Esc = [0.0035 (xu,mall - d')] I XU,ffi:V;
M,.um = 0.138h, bd'
= [0.0035 {(0.48 x 600) - 60}]I (0.48 x 600)
= (0.138 x 30 x 400 X 550') 10"
= 0.00277 / =501 kN.m
From stress-strain curve (Fig. 6.3) read out fw = 350 N/mm'
Hence, A w = [M, - M,.;;m] 1 [fw (d - d'))' Reinforcements
= [203 X 106] 1 [350 x (600 - 60)]
= 1072 mm' A,,, = [0.36h, b (0.48 d)] 1 0.87 fy
A", = (Awl.,) 1 (0.87 f,) = [0.36 x 30 x 400 x 0.48 x 550]1 (0.87 x 415)
= [1072 x 350]1 (0.87 x 415) = 3159 mm'
= 1039 mm' (M,-M,.um) = (1000 - 501) = 499 kN.m
Total tensile steel = A" = [A,,; + A",] = [2297+ 1039] = 3336 mm' Esc = [0.0035 (xu,max - d')/ xu,max]
2
Compression steel;;; Asc = 1072 mm = [0.0035 {(0.48 x 550) - 50}/(0.87 x 415)J
= 0.00207
 Ultimate Str~ngth a/Rein/arced Concrete Sections 127
126 - ReiJl/orc~d Concrete Design

From stress-strain curve (Fig. 6.3) read out the value of stress, f" = 330

T0-
N/mm'
A" = [M, - M,."",] I Lt., (d - tf)J ,
A" = [499 x 10'] I [330 (550 - 50)] = 3024 mm Diagonal
A,,, = [(A"f.J I (0.87 i,)] i . . ~ tension cracks
= [(3024 x 330) I (0,87 x 415)] = 2764 mn;'
Tv
A" = (A,,,+ A",) = (3159 + 2764 ) = 5923 mm ~

.Method-2 (Using SP: 16 design Tables)

Compute the parameters to use SP: 16 design tables.
=
[Mjbd'] [(1000 x 106) I (400 X 550')] Ii.Z6 =
Refer Table-52 of SP: 16 for 10k = 30 Nimm',f, = 415 N/mm' and (tfld)
-OJ and interpolate the values of p, and p,.
=
p, 2:70% and p, 1.35% = 4)
= =
A" [(2.7 x 400 x 550) 1100] 5940 mm' ,
=
A" [(1.35 x 400 x 550) 1100] 2970 mm =
The reinforcement values are nearly the same as those obtained by
method-I.
6,5 ULTIMATE SHEAR STRENGTH OF REINFORCED
CONCRETE SECTIONS
6.5,1 Introduction
Investigations over the years have shown that there are two major modes
47
of shear cracking in structural concrete beams .48. Near suppo.rts of rein-
forced concrete members, the shear stresses developed are accompanied by
diagonal tension as shown in Fig. 6.8. As concreteis weak in tension, if the
tensile stresses developed exceed the low tensile strength of concrete,
diagonal tension cracks develop near supports as'shown in Fig. 6.8. Hence,
beams are invariably checked for safety against 'shear failure'. If the nom-
inal shear stress is excessive, steel in the form of vertical stirrups or bent up .
bars should be designed to resist the large shear forces. Limit state design
of reinforced concrete beams comprises of the design for flexure at centre
of span and the design for shear in the vi~inity of supports.
6.5.2 Shear FailureMechanisms
The major types of sh,ear failure modes encountered in reinforced concrete
beams are identified under the following groups: -
f
Fig. 6.8 Diagonal Tension In Beams
= I) Shear-Tension or Diagonal Tension
2) .Flexure-Shear
3) Shear-Compression
'Shear-Bond.
The types of cracks developed and the failure modes are shown in I:ig. 6.9
(a to'e). The four different types of shear failure modes depend upon the
ratio 'of shear span to effective depth. The transverse shear force in a
flexur;e-shear ,mode is generally resisted by the following major mecha-
aismslis outlined in Fig. 6.10.
1) Shear resistance Vc of the uncracked portion of concrete.
2) Vertical component of the interface shear (aggregate interlock)
force Va
3) The dowel force Vd developed due to the tension reinforcement.
4) The shear resistance Vs developed in the shear (cinforcement.
In the case of very deep beams having shear span/depth ratio (aid) <1
without web reinforcement, inclined cracks from supports develop trans-
forming the beam into a tied arch which .may fail by yielding of longitudi-
nal reinforcement or d.ue to crushing of cOl-lcrete of the compression chord.
Normally short beams have the shear span/depth ratio (aid) greater than I
but less than 2.5. In such beams the failure may be due to
a) Crushing of reduced concrete section above the progressing diagonal
tension crack under combined shear and compression.
b) Secondary cracking along the tension reinforcement termed as shear-
bond failure.
c) Failure may also be initiated by flexure-shear cracking mode.

"-Reinforced Concrete-Design
(oj SheorSp'cin in Beams
(b) Diagonal Tension Cracks
[2·5< (aid) <6J.
1 lows: -
(d) Shear-Compression Cracks
Fig. 6.9- TypeS of' She~r Failures
" V
Fig. 6.10 Shear Transfer Mechanism at a Flexure Shear Crack
Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 129
In most of the normal cases of beams, the shear span Idepth ratio (aid)
will be greater than 2.5 but less than 6. The limiting (aid) ratio above
which flexural failure is certain is dependent upon the area of tension rein-
forcement and the. compressive strength of concrete and it is generally
common when the (aid) ratio is in the neighbourhood of 6.
In beams with (aid) ratio between 2.5 and 6, flexural cracks develop
first and the failure is due to propagation of fleJ{ure cracks as flexure-shear
cracks. If web reinforcement is provided, the shear strength of such beams
can be considerably enhanced.
In the case of I-beams with thin webs, failure due to. web crushing of
concrete is common and this type of failure can be prevented by proper
designing of web reinforcement and using high strength concrete.
6,5.3 Nominal Shear'stress
The theoretical shear stress distribution in a rectangular reinforced con-
crete section in- the elasti~ and ultimate stages vary parabolically in the
(c) Flexure-'Shear cracks
compression zone assuming that concrete below neutral axis is ineffective
[1 < laid) < 2·5J
due to cracking and neglecting the tension in concrete. For the sake of
simplicity the nominal shear stress across the cross section- of a beams is
computed as the average shear stress on the section and evaluated as fol-
t,=(:~)
Where Vu :::: ultimate shear force'at the section
'tv =
nominal shear stress
, b = breadth (width of rib for flanged beams)
(e) Shear~Bond cracks , d = effective 'depth
Incase of members with ,varying depth,
= [ V, ± (Mjd) tan ~]
t, 'bd
j-c
. Ye' - Y'here,
~ = inclination of flexural tensile force to the ho,izontal.
Mu :::: factored bending" moment at the section.
Negative sign to be used when M u increases in the same direction as the
depth and positive sign wJ1en "Mu d~creases in this direction.
6,5.4 Design shear strength of concrete
Experimental investigations have shown that the resistance of reinforced
Concrete beams to diagonal tension failure depends upon,
 Ultimate Strength of Rein/orced Concrete Sections 131
,.
a) Thll gmdl~ ('<f oX'ncrete ((c~) . . 0.8f,']
b) Tlu' pt'I\'l'llt3:ge of tenston remforcemf?ot (A~l) 1ll the beam. Where P = [ 6.89 p, but not less than I.
1'al1I<.-11) l,f IS: ~56-2000 and Table- 61 of SP: 16 and Table 6.1~ of the
text glVl' Ih(' ultimate allowable shear stress 'te • termed as design shear p,=[ I~~,,]
'1' '111\111
s Ie .
of ('l..'n.:rete in beams
,
as a function of concrete grade and percent- ,
age lll'Wl\slon reinforcemeht. 0.8 t., = Cylinder Strength in terms of cube Slrength I
'l'hl' IS: C,'-'" Table-19 is based on the research investigations of the
stUll)' grOlip \"If \he Institution of Structural Engineers London, CU. K) in
0.85 = Reduction factor similar to (lIYm) ,,..I

Table-19 of IS: 456-2000 is applicable for sections wilh effective depth I

19(,1). 300 mm or more. For smaller depth (R.C.Slabs), the strength is larger as
I
I
given in clause 40.2.1.1 of Ihe IS: 456 code which suggests Ihe shear I
T~bk6.14 Design Shear Strength of Concrete ('ft , N/nu11 2) I
strength as 'k<; where k is multiplying factor depending upon the overall 1-•..
(Table-19 oflS: 456-2000) I
depth of slab as given in Table 6.15.
~J~~~~)
: Concrele Grade
Table 6.15 Multiplying Factor (k) for slabs
,I
I
; M·15 M·20 M·25 M-30 M-35 M·4Q and above 1
"0"

(6) Overall depth 300 or

.J~) ! (2) (3) (4) (5) (7)
of stab (mm) more 275 250 225 200 175 150 or
·'0.15 I 0.28 0.28 0.29 0.29 0,29 0.30 Less
---
t\1:'5 J 0.35 0.36 0.36 0.37 0.37 0.38 k 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30
l\f,O ; 0.46 0.48 0.49 0.50 0.50 0.51
I
l\15 I 0.54 0.56 0.57 0.59 0.59 0.60 t><tdU
It is important to note that there is a limit to the maximum nominal shear I
\.(\1 I 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66· 0.67 0.68 b.tiil'J
~'-' .
",
,
I 0.64 0.71 0.74
sttess value for which the beam can be strengthened by shear reinforce- I
no'S 0.67 0.70 0.73
.__ ., " ments. Beyond these values, diagonal compression is prevalent even ifthe I
1.f.i.1 ! 0.66 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.79 I
.. -._.
~,

,:"S , 0.71 0.75 0.78 0.80 0.82 0.84

diagonal tension is resisted by shear reinforcements. Hence the maximum
nominal shear stress computed should not exceed the maximum shear
~.(\) I 0.71 0.79 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.88
I 0.90 0.92
stress in concrete (~,.m,,) given in Tab1e.20 of IS: 456-2000 and Table 6.16 I
~'.~'!' 0.71 0.81 0.65 0.88
~.~) i 0.71 0.82 0.86 0.91 0.93 0.95
of the lext. According to SP: 24 these values are computed by Ihe empiri- ~
cal relation, I
~::s I 0.71 0.82 0.90 0.94 0.96 0.98 I

Table 6.16 Maximum Shear Stress in Concrete ('t'~,mu)

'~",\.~~:~..i~N\'t1 I 0.71 0.82 0.92 0.96 0.99 1.01
I:II .\\~\..... The- term As is the area of 'longitudinal tension reinforcement Concrete Grade M·40 and above
1\ which continues at least one effective depth beyond the seclion 4.0
t-<ing considered except at support where the full area of tension
IJ! tdnfo"'ement may be used provided t.he detailing conforms to t~.mu =0.83..,g; N/mm
2
...(6.12)
1111 Cbuses 26.2.2 and 26.2.3
"._- Where!, = cylinder strength of concrete by applying a reduction factor of
!i 0.85 to convert the cube to cylinder strength and a partial safety factor for
:1,I 1
Tht ~l\.~' gn."'\up recommended an empirical equation ror the computation material strength. Ym ::: 1.25. The· empirical equation expressed in terms of
i 1 . ."i. ~)..""\\t sotrength. concrete as cube strength is given as,

-I]
\
! I

t, =[ O.85.,t(O:8jJ{(T+sj3)
..
. 6
A ••• (6:11)
'te.",ax = 0.62 ~ ...(6.13)
p
If Ihe value of the nominal shear stress ~, =(V/btl) exceeds the values of
 Ultimate Strength of R~inforced Concrete Sec(ions, '133
132 Reinforced Concrete Design "
\
'tc,m:J.X' the section should be redesigned by enhancing the croSS se,:tiQ,nal
dimensions. ·1 '

6.5.5 Design of ShearRcinforccments ~;>

The various types of reinforcements used to resist shear can be classified

,
under the following two groups:~ l
I) Vertical Stirrups, ""
2) Main tension reinforcement bent up near supports.
The, typical arrangement of these types is shown in Fig. 6.11 (a), (b)
(a)' Vertical Stirrups
Inclined stirrups are also used but they 'are not preferred due to practical
difficulties.
At the Limit state of collapse in shear, the forces are resisted by the ,
combined action of concrete and steel.
If V,; total Shear Force.
V,; ;::: shear resisted by concrete
VIIS ;::: shear resisted by reinforcements (Links or bent up bars)

Then V;,; (V, - V,) I

; (~,-~,) bd '.:.(6.14) I
Where = nominal shear stress.
!
'tv I
~, ; design shear stress of concrete (T~ble 6.14) {

Let Asv ;::: total area of the legs of shear reinforcement.

(bl Bent up Bars .,i
Fig. 6.11 Types of Shear Reinforcements
S, ; spacing of the links.
d ; effective depth of section. Equations (6.15) and (6.16) are recommended for the design of shear rein-
The number of stirrups links cut by a 45' crack line is given by forcements in IS: 456-2000 clause 40.4.
N; (diS,) Eq. (6.15) is recast in the form.

Heo:c, ~~e total shear resist~nce- of the vertical stirrup system acrss ( V,,~
d) SV
;(A,., (0.87 J:)IY) ;[Shearcarrkd by
Depth 10 em.
steel] (6.17)
sectlOn 1S ~xpressed as ' , , '
Ta~le-62 of SP:16 adopts this equation facilitating the direct design of two
V" ; 0.87 J, A" (diS,)
legged stirrups for known values of (V,/dJ expressed in (kN/cm). This
Hence, the spacing of vertical stirrups is given by the relation, table is reproduced as Table 6.17 in this text. The design table covers two
grades of steel Fe-250 and Fe-415 and diameter of stirrups of 6,8,10 and
=[0.87J;A".d]
Sv,. , -Vus· •
12mm. The spacing of stirrups can be directly read out for ,a given
shearldepth ratio. '
The shear force resisted by the bent up bar inclined at an angle 'a'to 'the Table-63 of SP: 16 gives the shear resistance of single bars of diameter
0
!
0
horizontal is expressed as, ranging from 10 to 36mm which are bent up at (X ; 45 or 60 and covering
...(6.16) steels of Fe-250 and Fe-415 grades. This table which is useful in designing
 ._."~ ... - ._---,._---."

Table 6.]7 Shear-Vertical Stirrups

(Table-62 of sP: 16)
Values of V.jd for two legged stirrups, kN/em.
-
w
+>
!r = 250N/mm 2
f y =415 N/mm 2

Diameter, rnm Diameter, mm '"

"
~
c
Stirrup ! I ~
Spacing,
em
I
6 8 10 12
I I I ""'-
6 8 10 12
~
5 2.460 4.373 6.833 9.839 4.083 7.259 1.342 16.334
"";;;
6 2.050 3.644 5.694 8.200 3.403 6.049 9.452 13.611 ;;;
7 1.757 3.124 4.881 7.028 2.917 5.185 8.102 11.667 tl
8 1.537 2.733 4.271 6.150 2.552 4.537 7.089 10.208 "
~.
9 1.367 2.429 3.796 5.466 2.269· 4.033 6.30~ 9.074
10 1.230 2.lli6 3.416 4.920 2.042 3.630 5.671 8.167
11 1.118 1.988 3.106 4.472 1.856 3.299 5.1256 7.424
12 1.025 1.822 2.847 4.100 1.701 3.025 4.726 6.806
13 0.946 1.682 2.628 3.784 1.571 ··2.792 4.363 6.286
14 0.879 1.562 2.440 3.514 1.458 2.593 4.051 5.833
15 0.820 1.458 2.278 3.280 1.361 2.420 3.781 5.445
16 0.769 1.366 2.135 3.075 1.~76 2.269 3.545 5.104
17 0.723 1.286 2.010 2.894 ·1.201 2.135 3.336 4.804
18 0.683 1.215 1.898 2.733 1.134 2.016 3.151 4.537
19 0.647 1.151 1.798 2.589 1.075 1.910 2.985 4.083
20 0.615 1.093 1.708 2.460 1.020 1.815 2.836 4.083
25 0.492 0.875 1.367 1.968 0.817 1.452 2.269 3.267
30 0.410 0.729 1.139 1.840 0.681 1.210 1.890 2.722
35 0.351 0.625 0.976 1.406 0.583 1.037 1.620 2.333
40 0.307 0.547 0.854 1.230 0.510 0.907 1.418 2.042
45 0.273 0.486 0.759 1.093 0.454 0.807 .1.260 1.815

~~~~~~M~~~~~~',':)X:~.: ---,.;~-:~ ",';' ''':.'

Table 6.18 Shear- Bent-up Bars

(Table-63 of SP: 16)
Va~ues of V... forsingal bar, kN

f y = 250N/mm2 /y = 415 N/mm2

~
§.
Bar
I I
,,= 60' I
Diameter, c
mm u= 45· u= 60· u = 45·
;;;
10 12.03 14.79 20.05 24.56
12
16
17,39
30.92
21.30
37.87
28.87
51.33
35:36
62.87 X
;;;.
18 39.14 47.93 64.97 79.57
20 48.32 59.18 80.21 98.23 ~
22 58.46 71.60 97.05 ·118.86
"'"
25
28
75.49
94.70
92.46
115.98
125.32
157.20
153.48
192.53
~
32 123.69 151.49 205.32 251.47 [
36 156.54 191.73 259.86 318.27"

Note-a. is the angle between the bent-up bar and the axis of the member.
~
";;;
;;;

i"
-
w
V>

" ~
 . Reinforced,Concrete,Designi·1. ', .• ,,1' .. ', Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concr~te Sections

the number of bent up bars to resist a known magnitude of shear force is value and in members of minor structural importance such as lintels, the
re~fOduced inTable 6.18 of this text. provision of minimum reinforcement may be waived.
This equation (6.18) can also be written as
6.5.6 Minimum Shear Reiuforcements

IS: 456-2000 clause 26.5.1.6 stipulates that all reinforced concrete beams
( s: f,.d
A,,) (OAbd)
~ 0.87
... (6.20)

should be provided with at least some minimum shear reinforcements even Comparing this equation with Eq. (6.15) it can be seen that providing for
if computation does not require them. nominal reinforcements is· equivalent to designing the shear reinforcement
The minimum shear reinforcements are required to prevent the follow~ for a shear stress of
ing types of failores:- (t. - t,) ~ OA N/mm'
1) Brittle shear failure cracks which can occur without shear reinforce-
and V"'~(t.-t,)bd ... (6.2t)
ments.
2) Sudden failure due to bursting of concrete cover aud bond to the ten- This concept is useful while designing nominal shear reinforcements using
sion reinforcements. SP: 16 design tables.
3) The shear reinforcements help to hold the main reinforcements while
concreting, forming an effective cage. 6.5.7 Euhanced Shear Near Supports
4) Formation- of cracks due to the thermal and shrinkage stresses are
minimized. Investigations on s~ear failures of beams and cantilevers without shear
5) Shear reinforcements act as effective ties for the compression steel reinforcement indicate that shear cracks develop on planes inclined at an
and make them effective. a
angle of 30° as shown in Fig. 6.12(a). Hence if section is considered near
The minimum shear reinforcements to be provided in all the beams is the support, it is customary to enhance the shear strength capacity, the
computed by the relation, common examples being the design of brackets, .corbels etc. Hence, the
design shear strength is different when beams are supported on members,
(:;')~(o.~;f,) ... (6.18) which are in compression as shown in Fig 6.12(b) and when supported on
members which are in tension such as that shown in Fig 6.12(c).
Where Asv ::: total cross sectional area of stirrup legs effective in shear. The following specifications of IS: 456 Code are useful in the design of
Sv = spacing of stirrups. shear reinforcements in the vicinity of supports.
b ~ breadth of the beam or breadth of web of flanged beams.
I) In the simplified approach, the IS: 456 code specifiestiiiit the critical
/y = characteristic strength of stirrup reinforcement in N/mm2
section for shear is taken at a distance equal to the effective depth 'd'
which shall not betaken greater than 4I5N/mm'.
from the face of support when the beam supports uniformly distrib-
The spacing of the stirrups can also be expressed as; uted load or a concentrated load farther than 2d from the face of
support.The value of't"c is calculated in accordance with Table-19 and
S. ~ 543 [ A;.] for Fe-250,I ... (6.t9)
. appropriate shear reinforcements are designed at sections closer to the
support without any further check fo, shear at sections closer to the
S. ~ 902 [ :"] for Fe-415 support.
/
2) The enhancement of shear strength may be taken into account while
Also, the spacing of the links should not exceed 0.75d or 300mm wbkh- designing sections near a support. The value of 't"c is enhanced by a
ever is less. The IS: 456-2000 code also specifies that in cases where the factor and is given by the equation,
maximu~ shear stress ('Tc,maJt) computed is less 'than half the· permissible
Enhanced shear strength ~ [(t,.2d) / a.] ... (6.22)
 Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections . 139
138 Reil~torced Concrete Design
This area is provided within a distance of 0,75 a y • If a y is ress than effective
depth. horizontal shear reinforcement will be more effective than vertical
steel since the action is similar to that of deep beams.

6.5.8 Influence of Axial Force on Design Shear Strength

In general. the actual shear 'strength of concrete is improved in the presence

e =30' of uniaxial compression and weakened in the presence of uniaxial tension.
J<--- av --J;. The design shear strength of concrete is based on a safe es~imate of the
limiting nominal stress at which the first inclined crack develops.
(a) Beam The presence of tension accelerates the process of cracking and also
increases the angle of inclination, of the shear cracks while the presence of
uniaxial.compression has the opposite effect which is generally prevalent
49
in prestressed concrete beams •
Hence the IS: 456,2000 code (Clause 40.2.2) specifies that the design
shear strength in the presence of axial compression should be taken as S'tc •
the multiplying factor /) is defined as

t 3P"]
[ AI<.
B= 1+- ...(6.24)

(bl Face of support in Compression Or 1.5, whichever is less

Where P, =factored compressive force (Ne.wtons)
2
A ::;;; gross area ofconcrete section (mm )
2
g
fck ::;; characteristic strength of concrete(N/mm )
t The Indian Standard Code does not mention the case of axial tension
which evidently reduces the design shear strength. However the American
Code AC1: 318-89" specifies the multiplying factor as

(c) Face of Support in Tension

[ p"]/ for
S= 1+ .45A
3 g
Pu<O
...(6.25)

Where Pu ::;;; factored axial tension (N) with a negative sign.

FJg. 6.12 Crilical Sections for Shear
6.5.9 Analysis Examples
Where G, = length of that part of a member traversed by a shear plane
called the shear span as shown in Fig 6.12(a), . 1) A reinforced concrete beam has a support section with a width of
If shear reinforcement is required. the total area of this reinforcement is 300mm and effective depth of 600mm. the support section is rein-
given by . forced with 3 bars of 20mm diameter at an effective depth of 600mm.
8mm diameter 2 legged stirrups at a spacing of 200mm is provided as
.. ,(6.23) shear reinforcement ,near'supports using M-20 Grade concrete and
FeAI5 HYSD bars, estimate the shear strength of the support section.
 ·140 Reinforcedeone!'ele Design UllimaleSlrenglh of Reinforced Conerele Seclions 141

Method-'l(Using IS: 456·2000 Code formnlae) corresponding toJ, = 415 N/mm' and diameter of stirrups as 8 mm and
spacing S, = 200 mm (20 em).
a) Data
b =300mm .10'
, =20N/mm' (d') = 1.815 kN/c~
d =600mm ,
Jy = 415 N/mm'
A" = (3 x 314) = 942 mm' A" = (2 x 50) =100 mm' Vo> = (1.815 x 60) = 108.9 kN.
S, = 200 mm
c) Total Shear Resistance
b) Percentage Reinforcement i
v. = (Vo< + V,,) = (86.4 + 108.9) = t95.3 kN.
= (100A,,) = (100 x 942) = 0.52 2) A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular section has a width of
p, bd 300x600
250mm and an effective depth of 500mm. The beam is reinforced with
Refer Table-19 of IS: 456 (Table 6,17 of text) and read out the design 4 bars of 25mm diameter on the tension side. Two of the tension bars
shear strength of concrete 'tc corresponding to fck ;; 20 N/mm2, are bent up at 45° near the support section. In addition the beam is
providec\ with two legged stirrups of 8mm diameter at 150mm centres
~, = 0.48 N/mm'
c) Shear Resisted by Concrete near the supports. If};, = 25 N/mm' andfy = 415 N/mm', estimate the
ultimate sheaf strength of the su~port section.
I v,,, = (~, b d) = (0.48 x 300 x 600) 10-3 = 86.4 leN il
Method-l (Using IS: 456·2000 Code Formula)

IIIi
I II
d) Shear resisted by Stirrups:- a) Data
J

IiIi = [A,,(0.87S, 1,) d] = [100 xO.87200x415 x 600J 10- = 108 .3 kN . b =. 250 mm ' = 25 N/mm'
J<k
I
V.,
3
d = 500 mm f, = 415 N/mm' I:
A" =(2x491) . S, = 150mm
Ii e) Total shear resistance of support section:· =982 mm'
1'1
1-1
II V. = [V., + V"J = [86.4 + 108.3] = 194.7 kN A" = (2 X 50) = 100 mm' ·iI,
1I . I
j[ Method-2 (UsIng SP, 16 Design Tables) b) Percentage Reinforcement ; ,'1
r
.1
'I
a) Shear resistance of concrete } =(100A,) =(100X982) =0.78
pi
( ::1
n
I, I, bd 250x500 I
, 'I
II " '
I Refer Table-61 of SP: 16 (Table 6.14 of text) and read out the design Refer Table-19 of IS: 456 (Table 6.11 of text) andread out ~, correspond- 1;1
f: strength of concrete as ing toi., = 25 N/mm'.
j;',;
I ;'1
j!, 2
1\';1
\ -,
! 1 t c = 0.48 N/mm for PI = 0,52 ~, = 0.584 N/mm'
.I
Vo< =«,.b.d) = (0.48 x 300 x 600)10-3 =86.4 kN
c) Shear Resisted by Concrete
b) Shear resistance of two legged vertical stirrups
Refer Table
"
62 of SP: 16 (Table 6.17 of text) and read out the ratio (V.'!d)
 ----------------11IIII
142 Reinforced COllcrete Design Ultimate Strength qfReinforced Concrete Sections 143

d) Shear resisted by Stirrups Method-l (Using IS: 456·2000 code formulae)

_[A,,(0.87f,ld]
S,
=[ 100xO.87150x415 x 500] 10- =120.3 kN
3 a) Data
V,,- . . b =300mm 10k = 25 N/mm'
d = 600mm !y = 415 N/mm'
c) Shear resisted by bent up bars A, = (4 x 491) = 1964 mm' V, =400 kN.

V"W ::: As(O.87 /y) sin a b) Nominal Shear Stress

= [982 xO.87x415 xsin45~ 10-'
V" =400 kN.

(bdV,) =(400X
= 250.7 kN.
10')' , . ,
o Total Shear resistance of Support Section ty ::: -
300 x 600
=2.22N/mm <tcma~=3.1 N/mm
.

v, = IV" + v" + V,J = [73.0+ 120.3 +250.7] = 444 kN. c). Shear resisted by concrete:-

Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Desigu Tables)

~(100A,)=(100XI964)= 0
p, bd 300x600 I. 9
a) Refer Table 61 of SP: 16 (Table 6.14 of text) and read out ", = 0.58
N/mm' for p, = 0.78 andhk = 25 N/mm' Refer Table-19 of IS: 456-2000 and read out ",. corresponding to p, and

.. v" = (t,bd) = (0.584 x250 X500110-3 = 73.0kN 10k'

2
:. 'tc = 0.658 N/mm < t y
b) Refer Table 62 of SP: 16 (Tabie 6.17 of text) .and readout (V,/t!) =
Hence, stirrups are to be designed.
2.420,
3
V", = (2.42 x 50) = 121 kN. V" = (t,bd) = (0.658 x 300x 600110- = 118.4 kN
c) Refer Table 63 of SP: 16 (Table 6.18 of text) and readout V,m for " Balance shear is given by
single bar in kN as
V'" = IV, - V"J =[400-118.41 =281.6 kN.
V,," = (2 x 125.32) = 250.64 kN.
d) Total Shear Strength = V, = IV", + V", + V",,,J = [73.0 + 121 + 250.64] d) Design of Vertical Stirrups
=444.64 kN
Using 10mm diameter 2 legged vertical stirrups, spacing is given by
6.5.10 Design Examples 0.87!y.A,•.d] [0.87 x415 x 2 x 78.5 x 600]
S, = [ V = 6' = 120.77 mm
1) A reinforced Concrete beam of rectangular section 300mm wide is " 281. x 10
reinforced with fOlll" bars of 25mm diameter at an effective depth of S•. ",,, = 0.75 d = (0.75 x 600) =450 mm
600mm. the beam has to resist a factored shear force of 400 kN at
2 2
support section. Assuminglr:k = 25 N/mm andJ'I = 415· N/mm , design Also S.:; 300 mm
vertical stirrups for the section. .Provide 10mm diameter 2 legged vertical stirrups at 120 mm centers at
support section.: '
 Ultimate Strength afReinfarced Concrete Sections 145
Reinforced Concrete Design .
S, = (A".0.87f,) =(2X50XO.87 X 415)
Method-2 (Using SP: 16 design Tables) , DAb . 004 x 300

Compute the ratio ( d') kN/cm =( 2~~6) =4.69 kN/cm

= 300.8 mm < (0.75d) = (0.75 x 600) = 450 mm.
Use 8 mm diameter 2 legged stirrups at 300 mm centres.
Refer Table-62 of SP: 16 (Table 6.14 of text) and read out the spacing cor-
responding to!, = 415 N/mm', 10mm diameter stirrups and (V,/d) = 4.69 Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Tables)

",.,
.. S,= 12cm= 120mm
Provide 10 mm diameter 2 legged stirrups at 120 mm centres.
SP: 16 requires the computation of the parameter (;5) kN/cm.

2) Design the shear reinforcements in a beam of rectangular section hav- Design for nominal steel is equivalent to designing for a shear stress of 0.4
ing a width of 300 mm and effective depth 600 mm. the ultimate shear N/mm' (Refer Eq.6.18) ..
at the section is 100 kN. Uselo, = 20 N/mm' and!, = 415 N/mm'. The
beam -is reinforced with 4 bars of 25 mm diameter in the tensile zone. (Yo,)
d
=(OAX300X600) =
lO'x60 1.2

"" Method-'-1 (Using IS: 456·2000 Code Formnlae) Where VIIS is expressed in kN and 'd' is expressed in cm.
Refer Table-62 of SP: 16 (Table-6.17 of text) and read out the spacing
correspondmg to f, = 415 N/mm' and diameter = 8mm and (V,,Jd) = 1.20
a) Data
, = 20 N/mm' S, = 30 em = 300 mm
b =300mm Jo'
d =600mm
f, = 415 N/mm' Adopt 8mm diameter 2 legged vertical stirrups at 300 mm centers.
A, = (1964 mm') V" = 100 kN
3) A".tell1forced. concrete beam of rectangular section 350 111111 wide is
remforced with 4 bars of 20 mm diameter at an effective depth of 550 .
b) Nominal Shear Stress mm out of which 2 bars are bent up near the support section where a
factored shear force of 400 kN is acting. Using M-20 grade concrete
v" = 100kN and Fe-415 Grade HYSD bars design suitable she~r reinforcements at
the support section. '.:
T =(V")~(100X10')=0.55N/mm2
, bd 300 x 600
Method-l (Using IS: 456·2000 Code Formulae)
c) Shear Strength of Concrete
a) Dala

= (10011,) = ( 100 x 1964) = 1.09 b = 350 mm 10, = 20 N/mm'

p, bd 300x600 d = 550mm ,
J. = 415 N/mm'
Refer Table-19 of IS: 456-2000 and read out T" corresponding to p, andlo,· A, = 628 mm' V" ,400kN

•• T, = 0.658 N/mm' > T,. il) Nominal Shear Stress

Hence, nominal shear reinforcements are to be designed. v" = 400kN

d) ~ominal Shear Reinforcements

t
, -_( /Hi v") =
(400X lO')
350 x550 = 2.07 N/mm'

Using 8mITI diameter t\\'o legged stirrups the spacing is computed by

Eq.(6.18)
 \1
; \
146 Reill!orced COllcrete Desigll Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 147

a) Design of Vertical Stirrups:-

100A') _(100X628\ ;0.32
P,; ( bd" - 350x550)
Shear force to be resisted by vertical stirrups is V" = [323-160] =162.6
' 456-2000 and read out t, corresponding to p, and!" kN.
Refer Table- 19 0 f IS .
,
•• 't == oAO N/mm? < "t y < 'te , m.~== 2.8N/mm Compute the ratio (;s) kN/em.
Hencce, shear reinforcemen~s have to be designed.

c) Shear resisted by Concrete

(l'); e ~~.6) ; 2.96 kN/cm
Using IOmm diameter 2 legged stirrups, Refer Table' 62 of SP: 16 and
V,,"' «,bd)"' (0.40 x 350 x 550) 10"; 77 kN. read out the spacing S" corresponding to <I> = 10 mm and!, = 415 N/mm'
and the ratio of (V,Id)
.. Shear to be carried by steel is V" = [Y, - V,,] = (400-77] = 323 kN.
S,: 19cm= 190mm
d) Shear carried by bent up bars .. Adopt IOmm diameter 2 legged vertical stirrups at 190 mm centres.
I•. '~
V"' ",A,(0.87!,) sina
6.6 TORSIONAL STRENGTH OF REINFORCED CONCRETE
"' (628 x 0.87 x 415 x sin 45') 10" SECTIONS "
",160.3 kN.
, 6,6.1 Introduction
. it by Vertical Stirrups is =[323-160.3] = 162.7 kN.
. . Shear to b e cafne
In reinforced concrete members, torsion gi:mer~lly occurs in combination
e) Design of Vertical Stirrups with flexure and transverse shear. Pure torsion (metallic shafts) rarely
develops in reinforced concrete. Several investigations have revealed the
· 't r 2 legged stirrups the spacing S, is calculated as complex behaviour of interaction between flexure, shear and torsion.
Using 10 mm d tame e '0"
Based on various experimental investigations. the national codes prescribe
O,87!,.A",d]_(O.87X415 x 2 x 78.5 X550)", 192.8 mm
simplified pi·ocedures combining the significant aspects of theoretical COn-
S,"' [ V - 162.7 X 10'
siderations and experimental results.
S, < 0.75 d and S, <'300 mm. Use IOmm diameter 2 legged stirrups at 190 Several types of loading produce torsion in reinforced concrete
mm centres. structural elements. The resultant torsion in classified under two main
groupSSI.
Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Tables) a) Primary or equilibrium torsion
b) Secondary or compatibility torsion
.' d by bent up bars and vertical stirrups = 323 kN.
The shear to be can le
6.6.2 Primary Torsion
a) Shear resisted by bent np bars
0

2 bars of 20mm diameter are bent up at an angle a. : : ; 45 near support sec- Primary or equilibrium torsion is induced by eccentric loading, the com-
taken by bent bars using Table-63 of SP: 16 cor- mon examples being,
tion. Compute tIle shc ar
a) Cantilever Beam with slab
responding to
45' V 0: = (2 x 80.21); 160.4 kN. b) Bow Girder
!,=415N/mm',<I>=20mman d 0:= , ", c) L-Beams

Reinforced Concrete Design '.••.:. "" .•
The loading on these elements developing torsion is shown in Fig.
6.13. In all these cases the loading is eccentric to the line of reaction at
supports. The total torsion is equally distributed to the support sections
equilibrium or primary torsion is induced by eccentric loading and equi-
librium conditions are sufficient to estimate the torsional moments.
Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections· . 149
example of compatibility torsion is shown in' Fig. 6.14 in which the sec'
ondary beam AB is monolithically connected to the main beam CD at A
and B. The beam AB rotates at the junction due to loading on AB.
Corresponding to the angle 8M a torsionnl momen,t will develop at A in
beam CD and a bending moment will develop at A in beam AB.
D

Main
beam
I
I
lI - _ E
c

(a) Canopy Beam

I l1\r,..

" Column
F
Main beam
f')Torque

FJg.6.14 Typical Example ofCompnllbility Torsion

(b) BOW Girder The bending mOment will be equal to and net in a direction opposite to the til
i'Jl
torsional moment to ~aintain static equilibriur,n. The magnitude of f<?tation . '~
SA and the torsional and bending moments at A depends upon the torsional :j
stiffness of beam CD and the flexural stilllless of beam AB. .!j
·ih
Ii'
6.6.4 Torsional shear slress 113
:il
The theory of torsion52,53 of prismatic homogeneous members of different
In·
;.Ii
types ofcross section is welf establish"" and described in detail in books of I"
(cl L-Beam mechanics of materials.54. 55 The effect of torsion is to induce shear stresses
:11)
I'
I" ,
Fig. 6.13 Examples of Equilibrium Torsion
and causes warping of non-circular stXtions,lThe failure of a plain concrete
member in torsion is caused by torsional cracking due to the diagonal ten- .i!
6.6.3 Secoudary or CompalibUily Torsion sile stresses. Due to torsion, a plain cot1l.:'r('te rectangular member develops
diagona.l tension cracks.in the irHer fi'Pres as shown in Fig. 6.15 leading to a
In compatibility torsion. the torsion is induced by the application of an sudden failure of the ~ntir~ section due to 10\~ strength of concrete in ten-
angle, of twist such as the rotation of a member and the resulting torsional sion. To improve the torsional strem~:lh of rectangular concrete sections
moment depends upon the torsional stiffness of the member. A typical torsional reinforcements are generally~pn.Wided ill the form of longitudinal
and transverse steel, the former in [h~ fllrllll)f bars distributed around the
 150 Reinforced Concrete De~ign Ultiniate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections 151
,
I Potential Torque (T)
tensile ~rack
Torque (T)
Heavily
reinf?rced
"
Moderately
reinforced

~---
Torque (T)
Lightly .
reinforced

Fig.6.15 Torsional Shear Stresses and Cracks in a Beam of Rectangular Section

cross sections close to the periphery and the latter in the form of closed Twist (al Twist Cal
.rectangular stirrups, placed perpendicular to the axis of the beam, the lon- (a) Plaine Concrete (bl Reinforced Concrete
gitudinal reinforcements resists the tension and the transverse reinforce-
\ Fig. 6.16 Torque-Twist Characteristics of Plain and Reinforced Concrete Members
ment is required to resist shear.
The torque~twist characteristics of torsionally reinforced concrete t =[1.6 (Tjbl] ... (6.27)
members is similar to that of plain concrete until the formation of the nrst t b.d
torsional cracks as shown is Fig. 6.16 (a) and (b). The value of cracking
torque Tcr is practically the same for both plain and reinforced concrete
=
If V, shear due to torsion, the expression specified in IS: 456-2000 code
members. When cracking develOps, there is a large increase j'n twist under is given by
constan~ torque due to drastic loss of torsional stiffness~6. Post cracking
behaviour is influenced by the magnitude of torsional reinforcement in the
V,=(t,.b.d) = 1.6(~) ...(6.28)

member as shown in Fig. 6.16 (b). Increase of torsional reinforcement will This is similar to the expression for flexural shear stress, '1', = (V/bd)
also increase the ultimate torsional strength and the ductile" failure is prec~ Hence for a section of overall dimensions band D subjected to shear V.
eded by yielding of steel, which can be realised only at very large angles of and torsion Tu th~ equivalent shear VI! is calculate~ from the relation as
tw'ist. However, the increase in strength is limited- since failure due to
specified in IS: 456 code as
crushing of concrete may take place prior to the yielding of reinforcement
...(6.29)
in tension.
For rectangular sections subjected to a torque TO' using the sand heap
analogy,~1,S8 we can express the torque in terms of the torsional shear stress 6.6.5 Reinforcement Design for shear and torsion
t( and the cross sectional dimensions 'h', 'D' and 'd' as,
Reinforced concrete'members, when subjected tor~ion and shear have to ~e
2T., [
t, = b'd m-(b)
1 )
... (6.26) suitably reinforced so that the equivalent nominal shear stress 'rve expressed
as
2T. ( 1 ) =[V,+ 1.6(Tj b l ] ...(6.30).
:;: b2~' Constant t ve bd

-lowever, the constant [(DId) - (bI3d)] has a value in the range of 0.8 to lies between 10 , the permissible shear stress given in table 6:14 and. the
1.15 f~r most of the rectangular:'sections in practice; Sele"ding -an average maximum sheacr stress 't'c,nlax compiled in Table 6.16. '-',', ... " .
'alue for the constant and applying a correction factor for the asSUmption If the shear tve exceeds the value of 't'c,maxl ,the section has tg b~sUltably.­
)f full plastifi.cation of the section the final expression reduces to redesigned by increasing the cross sectional area and'lor increasing the
 '152 Reinforced Concrete Design Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete, Sections 153
, .
grade of concrete. If'tve is less than the design shear strength 'tel minimuJll'~., ultimate shear (Vo)'
shear reinforcements has to be provided conforming to the equation (6.18)/ Therefore Vus ='= 0.4 Vu'
explainOct in section 6.5.6. " Using this relation, Eq (6.30) reduces to

6.6.6 Torsion-Shear Interaction i( To) ( V" )] -1

~ Tuo + 2.5Vuso -
...(6.32)

The design of reinforcements fOf'torsion and shear is based on the interac~ If S, ~ spacmg of stirrups (Fig. 6.18)
tion curve for concrete with web steel under shear and torsion as investi~::i A ;;; cross sectional area ofweb remforcement
gated by Hsu", Collins et aI 60, who formulated the Space-truss analogy arid' ' "
Tuo
skew bending theory. The interaction curve for concrete with and without;
web steel under combined torsion and shear is shown In Fig. 6.17 (a) and '/'(
(b)".
lY.. lY..
Tuo Tuo

1l!l!~:J
/
1·0
•
1·0
,, ,/ •
•• • •• •
••
• ..
' ,,
Transverse
reinforcement

•
•
•
.. Longitudinal
corner bars
0
0 1·0 V
0
0 1·0 ~
+':::b~
~ Vuso Fig. 6.18 Space Truss Model for Torsion in R.C.C. Deams
, {al Without Web Steel (b, With Web Steel ,r
.:.(6.33)
1" Then, V"' ~ 0.87 f, A" (diS,)
Fig. 6.17 Interaction Curves for Torsion and Shear
Where d ~ effective depth , •
The interaction relation shown is Fig. 6.17 (b) for beams with web Using the thin walled tube model shown in Fig. 6.19, the shear flow q
reinforcement can be assumed to follow the conservative linear relation (force per unit length) across the thickness oflhe tub'e (Ref. 58).ls gIven by
given by the equation.

.. .(6.31)

Where
./
Tu = torsional moment in the section ,/1
Vus ;::: shear force shared by web steel out of the total shear force in the
seclion (Vo ) , '

Vu~o == shear strength of reinforcement assuming no torsion is present.

Tuo ='= Torsional strength of reinforcement assuming no shear is present.
TuO)_(TUO)
Based, on experimental investigations, it can be. safely assumed that the q = ( 2Ao - 2 bid,
Tuo
shear carried by the web reinforcement (Vus) is about 40 percent of the
Fig. 6.19 Shear Flow in Thin Walled Tube
 Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 155
154 Reinforced Concrete D.f::':gn

q= [T~/2A,] ...(6.34) ...(6.4t)

And
Where A, = area enclosed by tIe centre line of the thickness.
But Ao =0: dl In practical examples, it has been found that equation (6.40) results in very

I
,
I
Where b l and d, denote the =.ue-to-centre distances between th .
. h d' . f 'dth
baes In t e IfecllOns 0 WI a:.d depth respectively.
e comer
large values of spacing and hence Eq (6.41) is generally used for designing
the transverse reinforcements for beams subjected to combined torsion and
shear·
I Accordingly, we have
6,6.7 Design strength in Torsion combined with Flexure
q = (T,j2b l d,) ... (6.35)
Assuming
I b torsional
F' cracks (pure torsion) at 45' to the 10ngl'tud'IllaI aXIs
. of When a section is subjected to torsion (7:,) and flexure (M,), experimental
t Ie earn ( Ig. 6.18) and considering the equilibrium of for I investigations by Iyengar etal61 have shown that the interaction behavior
the section (Fig. 6.19), ces norma to of rectangular sections under torsion and flexure following a parabolic -
relation is influenced by the magnitude of longitudinal reinforcements
qS, = A,(0.87J,J ... (6.36)
provided in the flexural tension and compression zones. Warner and Ran-
=
Where A, cross ' " sectional area of the stirrups. =(A ,.orwoegged
)2)' t I gan" have investigated the different modes of failure of rectangular rein-
stIITUps. Sb
u slitntlOg 10 Eq (6.34), we have forced concrete members under combined flex.ure and torsion. They have
T J 2A,.b,.d,(0.87J,») identified three different modes of failure depending upon the various
variables and their combinations as shown in Figs. 6.20 (a), (b) and (c) and
\10 ~ Sv
(d)."
or T
00
Jl O.87f ,A...
S,
b,.d,)
... (6.3;)
a) Mode-l Type Failure
Substituting Eq. (6.33) and (6.37) in Eq. (6.31) we have the final e ua'
for the web reinforcement given by the relation, q hon The most common type of failure encountered in beams is the mode-I type
failure which occurs when flexure is predominant over torsion. The mem-
A J(
" Ub,.d,O.87 f, +
T•.s, ) ( V,.S, )]
2.5d,0.87J, ...(6.38)
ber fails by skew compression at top as shown in Fig. 6.20 (b). This type of
failure is often referred to as modified flexural failure.
Which is the same
. equation specified in IS'. 456 -2000 <lor the computation
of transverse remforcement for combined torsion a d h . I' . b) Mode-2 Type Failure
design. n S ear In Imll state
In the case of beams having a narrow section with depth exceeding the
Also clause 41.4.3 also specifies that the transverse steel should natu
width -and when torsion is greater than flexure, mode-2 type failure char-
rally be not less than that required to with stand the f II . I -
given by the relation. u equlva ent shear Ve acterized by_ .the compression zone skewed to the side of the" member as
shown in Fig. 6.20 (c) generally occurs and this type of failure is also
A.. =[("t,'-')b.S,]
0.877;"" ... (6.39)
referred to as lateral flexural failure.

It is more con\'fuient to reCast the equations (6 38) and (6 39) . c) Mode-3 Type Failure
~:ethe spacing S, since the diameter· and hence th~ cross seetionat:::~n~~ In rectangular beams having longitudinal top reinforcements much less
He web steel
h (A,,), IS generally assumed and the sp'
i' .
aCIng IS computed than that of the bottom reinforcements. mode-3 type failure, also termed as
nee, we ave t Ie equations for the spacing Sv-as .
negative flexural failure develops with the compression zone occurring
S, J(A,N,(0'87J,l) + (A".2.5d,(0.87J,)) ] towards the soffit of the member. This type of failure is shown in Fig.
1I Tu '.', .Fl,' 'VII lH _ ... (~..40)
6.20(d).
 I~I
Ultimate Strength ojReinjo','ced Concrete Section~
Reiiljorq¢d Con¢rete Design .~.; ,

Compression ...(6.42)
zone

For mode-3 Failure,

(TT,), (A,,)
ur
A
-
(M,), ~ 1
sc
M
ur
...(6.43)

Tu 1·4
'R:, Mu
(~1=0'3
Ast

Bars in
tension
Ib) Mode-l
(a) Beam Section 0·8
IModifled Flexural
(Flexure - Torsion) Failure) ~
~
to
I't ....
~

~
0·6
~

-'
-'
0·4

Bars in 0'2
tension

0
0 0.2 0·4 0·6 0·8 1·0
(M u IMur)
Flg.6.21 Torsion-Flexure Interaction
Compression
lone Where AS! :::: Area of longitudinal steel in the flexural tension zone.
Ie) Mode-2 Idl Mode ,3 Asc :::: Area of longitudinal steel in the flexural Compression zone
(Later~1 Flexural Failure) (Negative Flexural Failure)
Fig. 6.20 Failure Models of R.C. Deams Under combined Flex~re and Torsion The flexure:'torsion interaction curves based 011. the above relations are

The ultim.ate strength of rectangular reinforced concrete section sub- shown in Fig. 6.21 for the ratio Of( ~:) varying from 0.3 to 1.0.
jected to combined flexure (M,) and torsion (T,) is generally described by
the interaction diagram shown in Fig. 6.21. . For low values of the ratio (M,)
M"
. the torsional strength is marginally high~r: When

Let Tur :;;: pure torsional strength

Mur ;:: pure Flexural strength (A")
A" .1, mode-} type failure generally
.= OCC':lfS .
with the tyielding of tension reinforce-

,,
61
Based on experimental investigations. Iyengar et a1 have suggested the ..
, following interaction formulas:
ment. In general, presence of torsion reduces the flexural strength of the
member.
For rnode-l Failure,

\
 158 Reinforced Concrete Design Ultimate Stre1lgthiJ/Reinforced C01lcrete Sections 159

6.6.8 Reinforcement design for Flexnre and Torsion 8) If~" >~, given in Table- I9 of IS: 456 and < ~,.m'" given in Table-20
of 1~:456•.then assume diameter of shear stirrups and compute theil
The revised Indian standard code clause 41.4.2 IS: 456-2000 recom- spacmg usmg the equations:
61
mendations are based on the skew bending approach in which the tor-
sional moment Tu is converted· into an effective' bending moment Mt a) s. = (A...O.87 1,)
.«.,-<,)b
I
I
defined by the relation.
~ = (T,O +Dlb)} b) S. =[(A,.(0.8;!')b,d,) +(A••(O.8~)2.5d,)]
... (6.44)
1.7
I I

Where D = overall depth of the beam. 9) The spacing S. selected should be the smaller of the two values from
The longitudinal reinforcement is designed to resist an equivalent bending (a) and (b). AlsoS, should not exceed b, or [(b, + d,) 14] or 300 mm
moments Mel and Me2 expressed as, . which ever is l e s s . ' -
=
M" (M, + MJ (6.45)
M" = (M, - M,) (6.46) 6.6,10 Design procedure using SP: 16 design aids
For values of M ~ M u• the longitudinal reinforcement is designed to resist
t
the equivalent moment Mel with the. steel located in the flexural tension The computation in steps 7 and 8 are modified to use the SP: 16 Table-62
zone. For values of M, > Mu • the reinforcement is desigried to resist M e2 (Table-6.17 of the text).
with the steel located in the flexural compression zone. - Compute the parameter
In the case of pure torsion (M, :: 0), it follows that equal longitudinal
steel is required at the top and bottom of the section. (:') = «,., -<)b =(A••(~~7f,)J
6.6,9 Design of Reinforcemcnts for Flexure, Shear and Torsion
Also compute (A,,(O.871,») J(~) + (~)]
according to IS: 456 • 2000 Code Specifications. s. Ub,.d, 2.5d,
The procedure outlined in the following steps may be followed to design For known values of the ratios. read out the diameter of stirrups and their
sections subjected to combined bending, shear and torsion.' spacing from Table-62 of SP: 16 or Table 6.17 of the text.

Design Steps 6.6.11 Analysis examples

1) Compute design moments M u and Tu' and design shea.r force Vu
2) Calculate equivalent moment 1) A cantilever canopy is made up of monolithically constructed beam of
8m span with a cantilever slab..of 4m. "The beam section is 400mm
T,(1 + Dlb »)
M" = (M,+M,) = {M, + 1.7 wide by 1200 mm deep. The live load on slab is 1.5 kN/m'. Determine
the torsion and shear due to live load for which the beam should be
3) Design. tension steel for Mel designed.
4) If M, > M, then compute M" = (M,-M,)
5) Design steel on compression face for the moment M e2 a) Data
6) Compute the equivalent shear force as
Span of beam = L = 8m
. V, =V, + 1.6 (T, 1b) Cantilever slab span = 4m
7) Determine shear stress 'tyC = (Vc / bd).··.Check that the shear stress is Cross,section of.beam.= 400 mm wide by 1200 mm deep
less than the maximum shear stress 'tc.m~ Live load = f,5 kNlm' ;

I
":160 Rein/orced Co.ncrete Design'
Ultimate Strength O!Reiliforced Concrete Section~ 1.61
0)· :.
b) Loads on beam
c) EquivaleJ1t Shear Force
Live load ori beam = (1.5 x 4) = 6 kN/m" '. .
Maximum shear at support = V= (6 x 0.5 x 8) = 24 kN v, = V. + L{f) =[150+ 1.6 ( ;.~)}= 246 kN
c) Design Torsion in beam The cross-section has to be designed for an equivalent bending
moment of 203 kN.m and an equivalent shear force of 246 kN.
Tdrsion per metre length of beam = (1.5 x 4) (0.5 x 4) =.12 kNmlm 3) 'Determine the design torsional resistance of a reinforced concrete
Torsion is zero at centre of span and maximum at the two fixed ends of beam of rectangular section using the following data. The beam is
beam,"· ", reinforced using Fe-415 HYSD bars. Adopt IS: 456-2000 code provi-
Design torsion at support section i~ sions. .
T= (12xO.5 x 8) = 48 kN.m
a) Data
d) Design shear b = 350mm b, =300mm i, i
D =900mm d, =800mm
v, = V + 1.6m ;'[24+ 1.6(~.~)] = 216kN A.. = (2x79)
~ 158 mm2
S, = 150mm

2) A circular R.C.C. girder has a rectangular section with a width of 500

mm and over all depth of 1000 mm. At a particular section, the fac-
tored values of bending and torsional moments are 150 and 30 kN,m
respectively. The ultimate shear force at the section is 150 kN.
Analyse the design moment and shear for which the' beam has to.?e
designed.
b) Design torsional resistance
According to IS: 456-2000 code, considering the shear-torsion interaction
[Eq.6.38] with V. = 0, which corresponds to the space truss analogy, con-
sidering the contribution of the transverse reinforcement only (Eq.6.40] the
ultimate torsional resisraIlce is computed as.

a) Data T. =( 0.87f~:,.b,.d,) =( 0.87X415x i~~ x 300x 800) = (86.65 X10') = 86.65kN.m

M,= 150kN.m b =500mm
T, = 30kN.m D = 1000mm 4) A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular section has a width of 350
V, = 150 kN mm and overall depth of 700 mm. The beam is reinforced with 2 bars
of 25mm diameter both on the tension and compression' faces at- an
b) Equivalent bending moment effective cover of SOmm. The side covers. are 25mm.. 10 mm diameter
two legged stirrups are provided at 100mm centres. The section is
Mel = (Mu +Mt) subjected to a factored shearforce of 200 kN. If Fe-415 HYSD bars
are used, estimate (he torsional resistance of the beam using I.S. code
Where M = T [(I +D/b)] = 30[(1 + 1000/500J] = 53 kN.m provisions. I
I u 1.71~

a) Data
M" = (150+53) = 203 kN.m.
b = 350 mm b, =)OOmm
D = 700mm d, .=600mm
V. = 200 kN A,,= (2 x 79) = 158 mm'
Sv =:: 100 nUll
 162 Rl'illforced 0',P'/J~~ fJr:~ign Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 163
I!.
b) Torsional SteW'.¢. ",...tUdering Y, = 0 Solving T= (9.2 x 10') N.mm = 9.2 kN.m '.
!,I
I T, -
_(0.~7 J,A.A4
S.
(r,;;; /415 x 158x 300 x 600)
( • . . _. 100 = (102.6 X 10') N.mm d) Maximum lorsionlll cllpacity of the section (Torsion + shear)
I
/
= 102.6 kN.m Refer Tllble-20 of IS: 456 and read out the value. of ~,.mu for .!o, = 25
N/mm' .
c) .Torsional ste....., ¢l tI~dering Y, = 200 kN

A•. ~;{_~)+( V,.S, )]

It T = Maximum allowable torsion, then
" b,A,O.87 f, 2.5d,O.87 f, .[ V, + 1.6(Tlb)] _

15-l;~r(_ T.xlOO
'.: YfJ/600xO.87x415 2.5x600xO.87x415
)+( 200xlO'x100 )]
bd -3.1

(120X 10') + 1.6(TI4oo)] = 3 I

Solving, T, = (n/) / Hl) )i.mm = 78.6 kN.m. Hence, torsional strength is [ 4oox800 .
smaller of the tWl) '1~J!"~.:\.,
Solving T= (218 x 106) !'I.mm = 218 kN.m
5) A ~'Cit~forw:l CI.OW..<* rectangular beam has a breadth of 400 mm and ~., ..l,
6) A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular seclion with a breadth of
eflectlve de¢, "I ~/f;",m.1t has a factored shear force of 120 kN at a
350mm Ilnd overall depth of 800mm is reinforced with 4 bars of
pnrticular ~("J. A""ming thath, = 25 N/mm' and/, = 415 N/mm'
mut per~ent;-...ge of ttrl1.He :\teel at that section as 0.5 per~ent, determine
20mm diameter on the. tension side at an effective depth of 750mm.
The section is subjected to an ultimate moment of 215 kN.m. Ifh' =
tilt.' torslOnaJ rr;(Jff:ent tl":e ~ion can -resist-for the following cases.
30 N/mm' and I, = 415 N/mm', estimate the ultimate torsional
Casc- 1: If no addi~~1 reirlforcement for torsion is provided. moment that can be allowed on the section.
easel: 2: If the m;;';Jrfmm \tf'~1 for torsion is provided in the section.
Adopt IS: 456 ClJI1t.I prrrrj",rm, for the analysis.
11) Dllla

a) Dnlll b = 350mm h' = 30 N/mm'

d =750mm I, '= 415 N/mm'
b =41/} mm h' =25 N/mm' D = 800mm A" = (4 x314) = 1256 mm'
=
d ~If)mm f, = 415 N/mm'
b) Neutrlllllxis depth
b) l'ermisslble .hear .tr... x,. m.. = (0.48d) = (0.48 x 750) = 360 mm
For 1'1 = 0.5% and Ie, = 25 N/mm' referring to Table-19 of IS:456 code
But _[0.87 /,A,,]
_[0.87 x415 x 12~6]_
'tc.(rilll = 0.49 N/mm'2 Xu - 0.36 hk. b - 0.36 x 30 x 350 -.120 rom < xu. mill<

Hence, the beam is under reinforced

c) Allowable t""lon
c) Equivalent Ultimllte momenl capllcity of section
V.'V.+J.6(Tlb) .. (:~)=0.49
r V,+ 1.6 (Tlb)J . [. (A,,f,)]
M, = 0.87 f,A".d 1- bdh.
L'- bd = 0.49

[
(I.!JX 10')+ 1.6(TI400)J = 49
400 x 800 .
°
 Ultimate Strength ofReinforcedC'mcrete Sections 165
164 peinforced Concrete Design ,,'

1256X750[1-(3;g~~;;~~0)]~ (317 x 10') N.mm"'~

d) Longitudinal reinforcements
M,:" 0;87 x415x
Since the eqnivalent bending moment M. = 4.41 kN.m, design the longitu-
~3i7kN.m. dinal reinforcement for this moment.
The section is under reinforced since the steel requirement to resist the
. d) Allowable torsional moment small moment will be less than the minimum.

..
Me={Mo+Mt)=Mu+Tu
(I + (Dlb»)
1.7
_- [(A'J')]
M. - 0.87f,A",d I - bdh,
Ii
'. (I + 1.7
317=215+T,
(800/350») M,=0,87X415XA"X350[1-( 415A" )]
".
1
" d!
200x350x25
i,~
Solving T, = 62.2 kN.m [A;' -4218 A" + (1.47 x 10')] = 0 I,jl.
,
I

.. As, =36mm
2
I
!'iii
i :iJ':1
...~J
.~ "!'1
6.6.12 Design examples
Providing minimum reiriforcement of )ii
,,
R.CC. 'sectlon ZUO X400 mm is su~lectea to a cnaracteflshc
I , f 'An ~(0.~bd)~(0,85X:~~X350)
,j.,

A, = 143 mm' ..
torsional moment' of 2.5 kN.m and a transverse shear of 60 kN. 'j;
Assuming the use of M-25 grade concrete and Fe-415.HYSD bars. Provide 2 bars of IOmm diameter as tension reinforcement and 2 hanger f
,'I"l
, ,!
determine the reinforcements. required according to the IS: 456 code bars of lOmm diameter on compression side at an effective cover of ,.jl

·. ~
provisions. using the following data. 50mm(A" = 158 mm')..
Method-l (Using IS: 456 Code Formulae) e) Permissible shear stress "j
.fI"
•
'!,•.I .I•
)..
, I.·' .

'
l~"
a) Data I:',

b ·~200mm h, = 25 N/mm' ~" =(v.)=(

bd
80XIO')=114NI '
200x350 . mm
'I",
""1
\");
, I,i

d ~350mm , =415 N/mm' h'i:

J,
IOOA,) (lOOX i58)
D ~400mm b, = 150mm p, = ('bd = 200 x 350 = 0.225
T, ~ 2.5 kNm
V, ~60kN
d, =300mm
ReferTable~19 ofIS: 456 and read out~, corresponding tOh, ~ 25 N/mm',
iiiI'; ,
r,' ,
;,)/,
"I

tc = 0.34 N/mm 2 II
b) Equivalent shear force
t(,ina~ =3.1 Nmm
2
t ve > 'tc and tve.. < (Table-20) :.li.l.r
H
V,= V, + 1.6(¥) =60+ 'A~:~) =80kN .. Design transverse reinforcements using t?e IS: code recommendations. ,II;
I,
:-1.1

f) Transverse reinforcement
Iii'"
c) Equivalent bending moment
T,(I+Dlb) 0+ 2.5(1 +14~0/200) _ 4.41 kN.m Using 8mm diameter 2 legged stirrups with side covers of 25mm. the
M.=("!.,+M,)=M,+ 1.7
spacing is given by
 Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 167
, 166 Reinforced Concrete Design

0.87 f,) =(0.87 x415 x2x 50) = 225mm

i
moment of 100 kNm together with an ultimate bending moment of
,I" S.
= (A...
(t.. -t,)b (1.14-0.34)200 200 kN.m. Adopting M-20 Grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars
and assuming top and bottom covers of 50 mm and side covers of 25
r.(T"S•. ) ( V"S. ] - 100 mm, design suitable longit~dinal and transverse reinforcements for the
Also, A.. = ~ b,d,O.87 f, + 2.5d,O.87 f, - section.
_~( 2.5 x 10' )+(. 60xl0' )~S Method-l(using IS: 456 code formulae)
100-L 150x300xO.87x415 2.5x300XO.87x415 IJ'

Solving . ". s. = 266mm a) Data

V'·,1,
b =350mm b l = 300mm
Adopting the smaller of the two values, use 8mm diameter 2 legged stir-
d = 650 niril d l = 600mm
rups at a spacing of 225mm.
D =700mm f.k = 20N/mm'
M" =200kN.m fy = 415 N/mm'
Method-2 (using SP: 16 Design Tables)
T" = 100kN.m
&A,·,iI'>
a) ~ngitudinal reinforcements
b) Equivalent bending moment and shear forces
Equivalent bending moment = M. = M" = 4.41 kN.m M =M
C II +
T
II
[1+1.
D/b] = 200 100[1 +700/350] = 376kN.m
7 + 1.7 .
M") =( 200><350'
(bd' 4.41 x 10') = 0.18

Referring to Table') of SP: 16 (f'k = 25 N/mm') the minimum' value of the

V, = V"+ 1.6 (i7:) .=0+1.6-.( 0.35
100) =457kN

parameter (Mjbd') listed as 0.30. Hence, the table cahnot be used. The longitudinal reinforcement is designed for Me and transverse rein-
Provide minimum longitudinal reinforcement of p, = 0.20 percent for fy forcement for Ve
= 415 N/mm', as worked out in method-I.
c) Longitudinal reinforcements
b) Transverse Reinforcements
M" = 0.138J;,.b.d' = (0.138 x20 x350X 650') '" 408 x 10' N.mm> M,
Compute the parameter

A.iO.87f,)) J(~)
~ b,d,
+(~)] =[( 2.5 X10') J 60 x 10')] = 135.5 N/mm
Hence, section is under reinforced
( S. 2.5d, 150x300 l2.5x300
Refer Table-62 (SP: 16) and read out spacing of 8mm diameter two legged
M,=0.87 fy4,,·d [1-( :~~J]
stirrups at 27cm = 270 mm.

S. f y)) =(t.. -t,)b =(1.14-0.34)200=

Also A..(0.87 •
16OON/mm= 1.6 kN/cm
" [ (. 415 A"
(376xlOj=(0.87x415xA.x650) 1- 350x650x20
)J
(
Refer Table-62 and read out spacing of 8mm diameter two legged stirrups Solving A" = 1940 mm'
as 22.5 em= 225 mm. Provide the smaller spacing of the two values which Use 4 bars of 25mm diameter (A" = 1964 mm') on the tension side and 2
is 225 mm. hanger bars of 16 mm diameter on the compression side with effective
2) A reinforced concrete beam of tectangular section with a width of covers of 50 mm.
350mm and over all depth 700mm is subjected to an ultimate torsional
 Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections ·169
168, Reinforced Concrete Design.;'

d) Transverse Reinforcement p, = 0.857 ... . (100A

-;;;tn) = 0.857

A _(0.857 X350X650)_ 90
'= =( V,) =(457
bd
x 10') = 2 N/mm'
350x650
sr- "100 -1 5 n)m
2

b) Transverse Reinforcement
_ (100A,) =(100 x 1964) = 0,86
p, - bd 350x650 Compute the paramyters given by
Refer Tab1e-1 9 of IS: 456 and read out permissible shear s~ear stress as "
:;: 0.59N/mm 2 • 'rve > 'tc but less than 'tc,mu = 2.8 N/mrn ..Hence. shear (
A,,(0.87 fy)) =
S,
[('~) + (~)]
b,d, 2.5d,
J(l' 6
100 X 10 ) +(0)1
300 x 600 ~
reinforcements are required. Assuming lOmm diameter 2 legged stirrups,
the area' of shear reinforcement is computed by using the equation speci- = 555.5 N/mm " 5.55kN/cm
fied in IS: 456 code, clause 41.43, Refer Table-62 (SP: 16) and read out spacing of IOmm diameter 21egged
~( T,S, ) ( V".\', )],
stirrups as S, =10.2 em = 102 mm.
A" = l' b,d,0,871, + 2,5d,O,87 I, Also
A"CO.871,))
( S, = ('= -',) b = (2 -0.59)350 = 493.5 N/mm = 4.93 kN/cm
100X106) ] S,
158 = [( 300 +(0) 600xO.87x415
Refer Tab1e-62 (SP: 16) and read out spacing of IOnlln diameter two
Solving S, = 102.7 mm legged stirrups as '
S, = 11.5 em =115 mm. Provide the smaller of the two spacing, S, =
Also,
100mm.
A".0.871,)
3) A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular section with a width of 350
Sv:t- ( (tye - 'tc)b
mm and overall depth of 800 mm is subjected to a factored bending
158XO.87X415)1> ll5.6mm moment of 215 kNm, ultimate torsional moment of 105 kNm and
S, 1> ( (2 _ 0.59)350 ultimate shear forcec of 150'kN. Using M-20 grade concrete and Fe-
415 HYSD bars and side, top and bottom covers of 50 mm, design
Hence, adopt lOmm diameter two legged stirrups at a spacing given by
suitable reinforce.inent in the section.
smaller of the above two equations which is 100 mm.
a) Data
.~" -,., Method-2 (using SP: 16 Design Tables)
b = 350'mm b, = 250 mm
a) Longitudinal Reinforcements d = 750 mm d, =700mm
D = 800 mm hk = 20 N/mm'
M, = M, = 376 kN.m b = 350mm M, =215kN,m I, =415 N/mm'
h, = 20 N/mm' b , = 300mm T, = 105kN.m V, ='150 kN
I, ,= 415 N/mm' d, = 600mm
d =650mm V,=O b) Equivalent bending moment and shear force
6
Compute the parameter (
, bd
M,,)
= ( 376 X10 ,) = 2.54
350x650
Refer Table-2 (SP: 16) and read out the percentage reinforcementp, forh,
= 20 andJ; = 415 N/mm'.
.~.l
 Reinforced Concrete Design Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 17 i
I
I

J,!" Mo+ To [!2J~

IJ1b ] = 215 + 105 [I + 8001350] = (215 + 203) = 418 kN.m
I~
Solving S. = 8~.2 mm
Also the spacing should conform to the equation, f
~
A".0.87J,) (158XO.87X4l5) 85 mm
S.1' ( « .. -~,)b l'
V.= Vo + 1.6(t) = 150+ 1.6(~.~~) =630kN (2.4-0.56)350 .1' 8 .
Hence, provide IOmm diameter 2 legged stirrups at a spacing of 80mm
V".Vtudinal reinfrJrcements are designed for the equivalent bending moment Me. .centers.

C) lAmgitudi.nal reinforcements Method-,2 (Using SP: 16 Design Charts)

Sju...e Ml > M u' design reinforcements for Me only.
a) Longitudinal Reinforcements.
Mu,lirn ::; O.138.fck b.cf
= (O.138 x 20 x 350 X750') M, = M. = 418 kN.m b =350
= (543.3 x 10') N.mm f.k = 20 N/mm' d =750mm
= 543.3 kN.m > M. f, = 415 N/mm'
0 b, =250mm
I f!;/lcc, section is under reinforced d, =700mm

M. = 087 fjl,,·d [I -l:~t) ] Compute the parameter

Mo) _( 418x 10') _ 212
. [ 1- ( 350X75~'X20
4l5A )] (bd' - 350x750' - .
{418xlO')=0.87x415XA"x750
. Refer Table-2 (SP: 16) and read out the pereentage reinforcement p, for
Sf,Iving Ail = IH02 rnm 2
I'mvide 4 bars of 25 mm diameter (A" = 1964mm') f, = 415 N/mm', as p, = 0.685
= (0.685 x 350 x 750) = 1798 '
d) Transverse I{cinforcements .. A" 100 . mm

b) Transverse reinforcements
< =(V.)=(630XIO')=2.4N1mm'
.. bd 350 x 750 0
Compute the parameter given by

! X
= (100A,,) =(100 1964) = 0.75 A,.(0.87J,») =O[(~) +(~)U( 105 X10') +( 150 x IO')J = 685.7 N/mm
p, bd 350x750 ( So bid, 2.5d, ~. ~ 250x700 2.5x700 .
I
I
Rei",. Table-19 (IS: 456-2000) and read out ~, for f.k = 20 N/mm' as Refer Table-62 (SP: 16) and using IOmm diameter two legged stirrups I
read out spacing So = 8.8cm = 88mm. I
= 0.56 Nmm2 < 'tve
r"~
'tc
Also
lind
. ,
"eve < 'te•max = 2.8 N/rnm
( A,.(~~7f,)) = {<" -<,)b ={2.4 -0.56)350 = 644N/mm = 6.44kN/cm
Hljllcc. transverse reinforcements are required. .. II
Using lOmm diameter 21egged stirrups spacing is computed as Refer Table-62 (SP: 16) and using 10mm diameter two legged stirrups, I
ToSo ) ( V.So )] read out the spacing as
A,,= [( b,d,0. 87 f, ": 2.5d,0.87f,
So = 8.5cm = 85 mm

(2X79) =[(105X 10') +(150X 10')] So

Adopt smaller of the two spacings, ( So = 85 mm).
o 250 2.5 0.87x415x700
 Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections - 173
,'.:tpt; ·.. ·Re!nfofced'Concrete.l)esign
::':\;\~"~.~;'BOND and ANCHORAGE IN REINFORCED CONCRETE 1) Flexural Bond stress

MEMBERS Flexural bond stresses develop in a member under flexure due to variation
6.7:1 Introduction . of bending moment or shear at a section. Referring to Fig. 6.22, the differ-
enhal moment dM from section X to Y causes the additional tension dT
'The composite action of a reinforced concrete member is mainly dueto the
bond or the adhesion between the reinforcing steel' and the surrounding expressed as
concrete. Bond between concrete and steel facilitates the transfer of axial (IT ~ (dM I jd)
force form a reinforcing bar to the surrounding concrete and bond ensures Where jd ~ lever arm
strain compatibility and composite action oftlle composite materiaL The Thi's unbalanced bar force is transferred to the surrounding concrete by
assumption of plane sections remains plane even after ~ending in the sim- means of flexural bond developed along the interface.
ple bending theory is valid only when there is effective bond between con- If ~b ~ flexural bond stress, then the equilibrium of forces yields the rela-
crete and 'Steel. The stress in a reinforcing bar can vary form point.to point
uoo
along its length mainly due to the bond resistance. If there is no bond, the
stress in the bar will be constant along its length as in the case of a straight <lr.O)dx ~ dT

cable used in a prestressed concrete member. Where :EO == total perimeter of the bars

" .. "=(dmltl<)) ...t

" 6.7.2 Bond Mechanism (W).jd
b
I
Bond between concrete and steel develops due to the following three W W
mechanisms:-
a) Chemical adhesion is the grip developed due to the gum like property
i' ii'I.:.
i'!I',.
of the hydration products of cement in concrete. .-. .
ill
. b) Frictional Resistance developed due to the relative movement
between concrete and steel' bars depending upon the surface charac~ .
, ,!:
\ Ii iP
teristics of .the bar and the grip developed due to shrinkage of con- v
(oj

c)
crete. I
Shearing resistance or dilatancy due to mechanical interlock devel-
oped as a consequence of surface protrusions or ribs provided in
deformed bars,
Plain bars cannot develop_ the bond resistance due to mechanical interlock
and the development and widespread use of deformed bars is attributed to
their superior bond resistance. The present trend is to prefer deformed bars
IV
~T+dT
)C~::MI Jd
--+-
01 I
.+
Perimeter:: ~O
for main rein~orcements and plain bars for ties and stirrups.
Ib) Ie)
6.7.3 Bond Stresses
The tangential or shear stress developed along the contact surface of the
t~-=t
reinforcing bar and the surrounding concrete if generally' termed as 'Bond
stress' and is expressed in terms of the tangential force per unit nominal
surface area of the reinforcing bar.
--'----
T - ~-
'(b
T+ dT

Depending on the type of Load situations the following types of bond Idl .
Fig. 6.22' Flexural Bond Str~ss
stresses develop in structural concrete members.
But V = (dill I <Ix), Hence we have
 174 Reinforced Concrete Design Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 175

t, = (};~jd ) ... (6.47) are high. Hence, it is preferable to limit the magnitude of local bond stress
by using a larger number of smaller diameter bars than using a few large
The flexutal bond stress is higher at locations of high shear force but it diameter bars. However, with the development and wider use of deformed
can be reduced by providing an increased number 'of bars of smaller diam- or high bond bars, more emphasis is laid on anchorage or development
eter yielding the same equivalent area of reinforcement. length requirements than the local bond stress. Hence, the Indian standard
The actual bond stress is influenced by flexural cracking, local slip and code IS: 456-2000 does not specify any permissible values for the flexural
other secondary effects which are not taken into account in Eq.[6.47] or local bond stress.
i
I 2) Anchorage (Development) bnnd stress
Flexural Concrete
.~ crack~ <~
The anchorage bond stress is the stress developed in the vicinity of the
I extreme end (or cut off point) of bars in tension or compression. '
- It Fig. 6.24(a) shows a cantilever slab in which the tensile stress in the bar
varies from a maximum (O's) at the continuous end B to a value of zero at
(0) Constant Moment Region Between Flexural Cracks the end A. Since the moment is maximum at B, the tensile stress is also
maximum at B and to develop the maximum stress (as the bar requires a .,,(;

certain length (AB), which is termed as anchorage, or Development

r=£tL£j Length. Also, the stress is zero at the discontinuous end A.

,.-j\U.

(b) Variation of Tension in Reinforcing Bar

T~
--~I'~~
........ ~ ~ma)(
A
Ld
B
"f'l i.,1ft

I ' (a) Cantilever Slab

't'bd
A------S A---.. ...... S
-- ....... -- -T=As&s -- ....... -- ~T =AsO""s
.~ ITIJIIIIl]J t'l'bd
(b) Variation of 80nd stress (e) Average Bond stress
(c) Variation of Flexural (Local) Bond stress Fig. 6.24 Anchorage BOlld Sh'('ss
Fig. 6.23 Variation of Flexural Bond Stress Between Cracks
The variation of bond stress from A to B is shown in Fig. 6.24 (b). A simi-
The effect of flexural cracks on flexural bond stresses in the constant lar situation exists in the bars terminated at" the supports of a simply sup-
moment region is shown in Fig. 6.23(a)~The variation of tension in the ported beam.' For design purposes an average bond stress assuming
reinforcing bar is shown in Fig. 6.23(b)' and the bond stress variatioil in uniform distribution over the length AB [Fig. 6,24(c)] is specified in the
Fig. 6.23(c) Experimental investigation~ have shown that splitting cracks Indian Standard Code IS: 456-2000. The average bond stress ~bd can be
develop in the vicinity of the flexural cracks where the local bond ~tresses
 "Reinforeedeonerete Design Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections 177

expressed. in terms of the. diameter of the bar $~ ~he. stress in steel O's and
anchorage length Ld• by· considering the eqUlhbnum of forces shown
Fig.6.24(c),
anchorage in terms ofdevelopment length given byEq.6A9.
The code prescribes that deformed bars may be used without end
anchorage provided, the development Length requirements is satisfied.
Hooks are normally provided for plain bars in ten'sion. Bends and hooks
shown in Fig. 6.25 should conform to the specifications of IS: 2502-1963 64
and SP: 34(1987).

~ ~
The development length' L; required to develop the design stress cr, in the Le =16d __ r = kd where
'y /' k =2 for plain bars
bar i~ expressed as,
L :'( ~cr,)
.
... (6.49)
.2f-.4
d--.!' k =4 for HYSD bors

d 4tbd

The values of ~ depend upon the grade of concrete and in the limit stale s_=I===:t:P
method for plai~ bars, the values of design bond stress specified in clause
la) Standard 90' Bend lb) Standard U-Type Hook
26.2.1.1 of IS: 456-2000 are compiled in Table 6.19.
Fig.6.25 Anchorage Lengths of Standard Bends and Hooks (SP: 34)
Table 6.19 Design l\ond stress in Limit state method for Plain bars in Tension
6.7.5 Reinforcement Splicing
M·20 M-25 M·30 M·35 M·40
Grade of ~""·15
Splicing of reinforcement is required when the bars. are to be extended
Concrete
1.4 1.5 1.7 1.9 beyond their availalJle length as in the case of column bars in multistoried
Design Bond 1.0 1.2
buildings. It is recommended that splices in flexural members should be
stress
<., (N/mm~ kept away from sections with high bending stresses and shear stresses.
Also the splices should be staggered in the individual bars of a group. The
a) For deformed bars conforming to IS: 1786, these values have to be I.S. Code recommends that "Splices in flexural members should not be at
sections where the bending moment is mor~ than 50 percent of the moment
increased by 60 percent.
b) For bars in compression. the value of bond stress in tension is of resistance, and not more than half the bars shall be spliced at a section".
When' splicing in such situations becomes unavoidable, special precautions
increased by 25 percent.
such as a) increasing lap length and b) using spirals or closely spaced stir-
6.7.4 Code Requirements for Bond rups around the length of splice. should be adopted.
The various types of splicing of reinforcement are:
The design for safety aginst bond failures requires the consideration
1) Lapping of bars (Lap splice)
both flexural or local bond stress and the Anchorage or development 2) Stirrups af splice locations.
stress. Due to non uniform distribution of actual bond stress and
factors influencing bond strength and despite checks provided by the com-
3) Staggered splicing.
4) Mechanical connections.
I
I
putations, localized bond failures which occur do not suwificantly
the ultimate strength of the member provided the reinforcement
.-
5) Butt welding of bars. I
6) Lap welding of bars.
properly anchored at their ends. In addition the wide spread use
deformed bars in place of plain bars, the design emphasis is centered "'lIW
The different types are shown in Fig. 6.26(a to f)
around the anchorage or development bond stress rather than the In the case of beams, particular care has to be taken in providing sufficient
anchorage or development length near supports to limit the magnitude of
or local bond stress.
Hence, the Indian Standard Code IS: 456~2000 prescribes a check on bond stress. If the bond stresses are excessive, horizontal cracks at the
I
f:..----;
178 Reinforced Concrete Design Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections 179 ,
rL-t I
I

r i +;
(a) I
I
I
I
-./'~--..j:l·3L
cross section I
of R. C, beam I-

I Stirrups @ 22Tl 1 I
I

tl :2:0:0:m:m::e:/e:~::~_~~~~_~====J (b) craCkS at

. ·6 rnm spirals @100 mm

tt:.
.l/?\% t tt ill's.;; S'
pitch
(e)
lf side faces
of beam
I
I,
I
I

6 Mechanical joint ~craCks·at soffit ,.

'j! 3 mm EfuJ====:::J {dl
Fig. 6.28 Typlcal Crack Pattern due to Failure of Bond Between Concrete and Steel

6.7.6 Use of SP: 16 for checking Development Length

C::=====~=====:::::J (e)
! :.::=::J (f )
<5¢-H .f->5¢-+
Fig. 6.26 Splicing of Reinforcement Bars
(a) Splicing of Bars, (b) Stirrups at Splice Points,
(e) Splicl~g Using Spirals, p > 36 nun, (d) Mechanical Joint,
(e) lIuU Welding, (f) Lap Welding of Bars.
level of reinforcement are formed at such locat-ions. Typical horizontal
cracks developed due to the failure of bond between concrete and steel bars
in beams are shown in Figs. 6.27 and 6.28.
W
: Development Length can be easily checked by using the Tables of SP: 16.
The Tables 64, 65 and 66 of SP: 16 (Tables 6.20, 6.21, 6.22, of text) cover
plain and deformed bars and different grades of concrete from M-15 to
M-30. For a given bar diameter varying from 6 mm to 36mm the develop-
ment length required for bars fully stressed to design strength of 0.871, in
tension or compression can be directly read out from the appropriate
tables.
In general
Ld(TeIlSi01t ))
Ld (Compression) = (
1.25
For any other design stress level less than 0.87 f" the development length
L'd required is computed using the relation. .

L'd = ( O.~ 1,) L d ...(6.50)

R.C. Beam Where as = design stress in the bars.

Plain steel bars
Horizontal cracks due to bond failure
Table 67 of SP-16 (Table 6.23 of text) gives the anchorage value of hooks
and bends for tension reinforcement. The effect of hooks and bends, if
provic.Ied can also be considered as development length. However, in bars
u,nder compression, only the projected length of hooks or bends are con-
sidered as effecti ve towards development length.

Fig. 6.27;Typical Horizontal Cracks due to Bond Failure

 '.1
" ~ ~
"~
.~ .,;.

',,~:

"~ _,:=. ,_;>'!;20::~,~~2.,~:~~"_,~ ..,,,.....: ,,~,",'~'>'~'"" ,~, >,~.'

.• , . >_• • • , •• ,~~, • ':"~:;'::;Ki

......;;.': ;-~"""

. ---,.---;._~_ .. -... -.-

-_ .. """ .. ~""7~_~

. ., , -::::-.-- -"""'":'""'::'~-··"-:',c-""~~~l:'_:.----·'~-"";'.~.~_. ;'¢ .---., " •• -.,-,,::_-=:::,-.. :,~":-'''':''':'::~':~~:-:''_.o ._- "':;"";-'=~; :0::"""'" :
 Reinforced Concrete Design Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Conci-ete Sections 183
182
6.7.7 Analysis Examples
"e <olt'!C!lt'!
~
-0 cootnU') 0('1')1000
N "':oi<ricoi cduiCl-io> d ..... (£)O I) A cantilever beam having a width of 200mm and effective 'depth
::;: C\J C\J C') o:t. LO<Df'..J'-. O)~~~
8
~
300mm supports a uniformly distributed load and is reinforced with
" four bars of 16mm diameter. If the factored total load is 80 kN. calcu-
~
co C") ..... co<o ..... O'lt--'<t ..... cqC'1«! late
. co '<t 0>

'";;;;o"" u~"
~ N
::;: cY:i "":,00
(\J ('1')"'"
to ~ffir::~ S;~~~
'<t ...:
oj
.0 a) The maximum local.bond stress.
0
" b) The anchorage length required.
~ 00 ~
-5
• ~ 0
,5
c) If the anchorage length provided is 900 mm, the average bond
'"'""~
( " ) 0 ) 0 .....
0. " C\JC')C")'<:t LO<D<Df'-.

~]
0
N r--:<cilt'i...t eJ""':om crS<rit.riC":i stress.
::;: ..... C\l'<t<D
C\lM'<tlO I"- ex> O'l -en ..... ,....-- ..... ~
<-
oS 00 Assume M-20 Grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars,
Q" a
'-
'll
00 g co <ql!?'Q;~
C\IC">"<tltl
bcn~~ 0>('1)000
. . co en lriN..,fuj
~b;~~ .....................
~
0
Method-l (Using IS: 456·2000 Code Formulae)
E
en "e i (I')'<;f'U')C!)
C")U')!'--CJ) ~

~
:£ '""8 ~
a) Data
...~ 0;
':-15
~ ,E
It)<D<Dr-.. ('1')0>0..-
oj
~

J:: h =200mm !<'k =20 N/mm'

",~
~
0
:g ~
-0

'"::;:
NC')(")V
r--:<citri..r
C\IC">'<tl()
..... (\1"'"<0
(")<0..0(1')
~aigm ................... ~ d = 300mm f, =415 N/mm'
.c ~bd = (1.6 x 1.2) = 1.92 N/mm'
00
Asr 4 bars of 16min diameter.
~"
oj
;;:;
""• ~b :0 > ">0' LO =4(nx 16)=201 mm L, = 900 mm
'"' '"•
" "
.0

i0.
'3
.0
~ ~
~
0
co
N
::;:
..... COIOC') t'--"<t ..... «!
o>cciooo:i
C\JC')'<tU')
r::-r--:,...:~
com ....
~~"'!;cq
.... It)U')''<t
.................
N(")l{)f'-.
oj
r=
">
ti) Maximum Local Bond Stress
~> " ';;;,
g;:
'. =[' ~]=[ 20t80x =
'" 0
Q" 0
~
10' ] 132 ~/m~'
'""!
§ ~
.... e 0
N
OC")<OO
..,fltic.cicci
coc!~<q <0(0('1')0>
• (\J ('I') '<t .-:cci"':c<i ~
r=
T, LO,d x300
::;: °O .... C\J ""'lOWO
'" <:> M'<;tlOCD en ............. ............ C\J .£ c) Anehorage Length
:1i c:
....• "E
co
i
oo'<toco CQC"lO>lO
ooiro""': cONuioi
0>C")l{)f'-.

mg~~
0.
0;
L, $"') =( t6XO,87X415)
=( 4T" 4 x 1.92
=752 mm
'<;I" U"l coco .................
OC\JC')'<:t
........ C\JC\J >
"
-0
d) Average Bond Stress
$
"
.r=
E-<
" Q> E
'" E E
m",
is
<DCO~~
<,OOOON
,.... .... C\JN
Il)CQC\JCD
C\JC\J(')C")
I
~
0 T"
$"') =( 16 xO,87
=( 44" 4x900
X415) = 1.6 N/mm'
Z
Method-2 (using sr: 16 Design tables)

Refer Table 65 of SP: 16 (Table 6.21 of text) and read out Ld for 16mm
bars (M-20 concrete) as L, = 752mm,
2) A reinforced concrete beam of 6in span is uniformly loaded and is
 /R~eilifoir(;edClmerete Design.": . Uitimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 185 I
reinforced with 5 bars of 20mm diameter on the tension .side at an
effective depth of 400mm. Find the distance from the center of the
b) Computation of Lap Length (L)
L = Development length of bars (only projected length of hooks and bends
I,
beam where one of the bars can be curtailed. Adopt M-20 grade con- is considered) I
crete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. Average bond stress ~bd in compression (Table 6.19 of text)
n) Dntn = «bd inTension) x 1.25 I
d
= (1.6 x 1.4) x 1.25 = 2.8 N/mm' I
L =6ril hk =20 N/mm' I
d =400mm f, = 415 N/mm' L d = ($O')'=(<I>XO.87 X415) = 32.2 $ = (32.2)36 = 1160 mm.
<I> =20mm ~bd = (1.6 x 1.2) = 1.92 N/mm' 4<bd 4x2.8
From Table 65 (SP: 16) Read out L d = 1161 mm.
b) Theoretienl eut of point from Bending Moment eonsiderntions

Let x ;::. Distance of cut of-point measured from center of span. c) Method of Redncing Lap Length

Then (wL'/8)-(wx'l2) ,_(~) Shorter lap length can be used with welding. Using a lap length of 15<1>
(wL'/8) 5 together with lap welding at 5<1> intervals, the welds are designed to resist
.. Solving x = 1.34 m = 1340 mm the equivalent force (F) for a lap of [32.2 - 15] <I> = 17.2<1>

e) Development Length for Mnximum Tension at Centre in Fe·41S

F = (0.87 X415)( nX 36')
4
C~:~) N = 196306 N = 196.306 kN
grnde steel
4) A simply supP9rted beam of 8 m span is reinforced with 6 bars of
n··
_($0,) _(.20(0.87 X415») -_ 940 mm 25mm diameter at center of span and 50 percent of the bars are con-
L,- - _
4<b<l 4xl.92 tinued into the supports. Check the development length at supports
assuming M-20Grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. The beam
d) Physicnl cut of point (PCP) supports a characteristics total load of 50 kN/m.

The theoretical cut off point (TCP) is larger of (b) 0,' (c). a) Data
PCP =Tcp+dor 12<1> L =8m. hk = 20N/mm'
= 1340 + 400 or (12 x 20) which ever is higher w =50kN/m f, = 415 N/mm'
= 1740mm. No. of bars at center of span = 6. ~bd = (1.6X 1.2) =1.92 N/mm'
';' No. of bars at supports = 3
Hence, one bar. can be· curtailed at 1.74 m from center from span.
<I> = 2'5mm
3) A reinforced concrete. column of a multistoreyed building is rein-
forced with 36mm diameter longitudinal bars and with ties at regular b) Bending Moment and ShearForce
intervals. Assuming M-25 Grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars
calculate (i) the lap length required and (ii) specifY the method of Design Load = w, = (1.5 x 50) = 15 kN/m.
rcducing the lap length to reduce the quantity of steel. M m" = (0.125 w,L') = (0.125 x 75 x 82) = 600 kN.m
V"" = (0.5 w,L) = (0.5 x 75 x 8) = 300 kN.
n) Dntn
Diameter of bars $ = 36 mm.
hk = 25 N/mm' if ,
f, = 415 N/mm' .
i
I
 186 Reinforced Concrete Design Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Sections 187

c) Moment of Resistance of bars continned into snpports +-500-+

t- 300+
3 .
M, = (; (600) = 300 kN.m. -t 00 4#20

d) Development Length of 25 mm diameter bars

f~· .. t
+.. -J-
I d =550 600

~~~JJ
Using M-20 Concrete and Fe-415 grade HYSD bars.
!!
Ld
=($(1,) =(25 xO.87 x4t5) = II
4tbd 4 x 1.92 . 75mm ~Cantilever beam Section at
Face of Support
From Table-65 (SP: 16), read out L d = 1175mm. R.C. Column

e) Check for Development Length at Supports Fig. 6.29 Cantilever Beam

According to clause 26.2.3.3. (IS: 456) assuming 30% increase in devel- b) Limiting moment of resistance
opment length computed as (M,IV) we have
6
M,.l;m = 0.138J:,.b.d' = (0.138 x 20 X 300 x 5502) = (250 x 10 ) N.mm
(t3M') =(13300x
V
x 300x 10') =1300 mm
10'
=250kN.m
Since Mu < Mu,lim' section under reinforced ~ .. ;,,\
Condition to be satisfied is given by

[La + (I.~M,)] > L where La = anchorage beyond support line.

d
c) Reinforcements

[Lo + 13001 ~ 1175 r

M. = (0. 87f,A".d)1 1 -
(A,JY)~
bdf,. IJ
Hence, Development length ~s satisfied without any anchorage value.
. [ ( 415A )]
(200 x 1O')=(0.87x415 x A"x550) 1- 300X55d~20
6.7.8 Design Examples
Solving A" = 1181 mm'
1) A reinforced concrete cantilever beam of rectangular section 300mm :. (Provide 4 bars of20mm diameter (A" = 1256 mm')
wide by 600mm deep is built into a column 500mm wide as shown in
Fig. 6.29.The cantilever beam is subjected to a hogging moment of
d) Auchorage Length
200 kNm at the function of beam and column. Design suitable rein-
forcements in the beal.n and check for the ,required anchorage length.
Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. 0.87!,]
Ld = [ - 4 - $
MetllOd-l (Using IS: 456 code formulae) '.,
Using 20 mm diameter bars, <I> = 20 mm
a) Data' For bars in tension, ~bd = (1.6 x 1.2) =1.92 N/mm' and M-20 Grade Con-
b =300 hk =20 N/mm' crete
d = 550 f, = 415 N/mm'
M, = 200kN.m L =[0.87 X415] $ = 47$ = (47 x 20) = 940mm
. d 4x 1.92 .
 ,.Reinforced Concr~te Design Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections ,189

The bars are extended intn the column to a length of 400 mm with a 90' aY Data
hend and SOOmm length as shown in Fig. 6.29. Diameter of bars: 25 ~ at G.F hk = 20 N/mm'
Anchorage Length provided = [400 + (8 X 20) + 500] = 1060 mm > 940 20 ~ at F.F , = 415 N/mm'
J,
mill ~bd = (1.2 x 1.25) =1.5 N/mm'

Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Tables) b) Lap Length

Refer Table-2 (SP: 16) 'ahd read out the percentage steel corresponding to At location of splice, smaller diameter bars (20,,!m diameter) are adequate
the ratios, in providing the desired strength. The lap length is based on smaller diam- 1\

M")_(
(bd' 200XlO')_22
- 300x55o' - ,
eter bars.
L = L,j or 30 ep whichever is greater.

lienee p,=C~~")=0.7l7 L
d
=[0.871,] ~ =[ 0.87 X415] ~ = 60 ~
4~bd 4]S15

.. A" = [
0.717 x100
300x 550] = 1l83mm'(Adopt4 bars of 20~) L = L d = (60 x 20) = 1200mm

From Table-65 (SP: 16) for f, = 415 N/mm' and 20mm diameter, the e) Staggered Splicing
required anchorage length is L d = 94 em = 940 mm
Hence, the bars are built into the column and bent aDO' fnr the According to IS: 456 Code (Clause 26.2.5.1) the splicing of bars should be
required total anchorage length. ideally staggered with'minimum centre-to-centre spacing of .
2) A reinforced concrete column subjected to compression combined "
1.3L = (1.3 x 1200) = 1560mm
with flexure is shown in Fig. 6.30. It is requi'red to reduce the longitu-
dinal reinforcement diameter from 2Smm in the ground floor to 20mm ~ The lap length and staggering of spacing is shown in detail in Fig. 6.30
in the first fl.oor. Design a suitable lap slice. Assume M-20 grade ','I 3) A doubly reinfnrced beam of width 300 mm and overall depth SOOmm
concrete and Fe-4IS HYSD bars. - is built into a column having a width of 600 mm as shown in Fig. 6.3 I.
~ I'-
The section of the beam at snpports is reinforced with 3 bars of 16mm
20 IS bOr\ lr20 ~ bor diameter to resist-the hoging moment and 2. bars of 12 mm diameter
/ on the compression side. Usinghk= 20 N/mm'.andf,,= 415 N/mm',

-T' ~' '---

'1200 t lop splice design and detail the anchorage length required at the junction of col-
umn and beam.
Lo psplice
-+-. t- ,
1560
J a) Data

6?0
V25 ~ bor b
d
= 300'mm
=SOOmm
hk = 20 N/mm' ,
f, =,415 N/mm'
-,- A" = 3 bars of 16<1> 'tbd :::;; 11.2 N/mm2
J>- ? A" = 2 bars of 12 <I>
// b) Anchorage Length for Tension bars (top) ; iI

Slop e 1:6~~
./ ~r be om
I L =(0.87/,) <I> = ( 0.87 x415 ) <I> = 47~ = (47 x 16) = 752inm
25 IS bor d
4'tbd - 4x 1.2 x 1.6
I'
Fig. 6.30 Typical Lap Splice
 190 Reinforced Con~rete D(!sign Ultimate Strength ofReinforced Concrete Sections 191
,
I

,I"
\.,

I
(O<C!CX!
", ...","I" "", r 600
---t Tension bars
C\lC\!e.t:!
"'~"'
'" ..
-i!• N 3 #16
·
","I
"~ f"-500 300-+
co~~
"':;j:gj
ll)C!q
0
z
UJ
m
t••
500
C\l~~ g
C\l"!<C!
"I"''''
"'~
-LI
0
r-----'°l
j oqq ;!
.~
"'••"
","I'"
"+ en
,; "'- c
!:l 11 roCX?"'f:
. +
o!!.

t-
zw Fig. 6.31 Anchorage Details In Doubly Reinforced Beam

.5.'"
~.,
S
8 "'~
III
Anchorage Length Provided = [500 + (8 x 16) + 200] =764 mm
~!1
'p -
til C
~
"- (Q<qcq z •
.d
0
~ co:
..•
0
." g •c
....
...... ll) (\J ~

~'l5 "'~ lo<: c) Anchorage Length for Compression bars (Soffit)

~
0 ~
>
~, -'"
•". .-
" I
N"!<D
.,....~m
0
:I: ""s .'"
.0

~
.3 "
.'ll
it:. oC!o
..... ~o:i
c
a:
co:
c
u
~
<S
'""E
~
u
't bd can be iJ'creased by 25%
/
Ld = (47$)0.8 =37.6 $ = (37.6 x 12) =451rnrn
z 'E u

'" "•
'"
OJ
.0
f-<
co~'<:f: ~
Ul
~
0
g
;;
2 Provide an Anchorage length Ld = 500 mm as shown in Fig. 6.31 .
'" ~'" .1! <s.
"
:0 e
• ~
§ 6.8 EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE
f-<
.L
<o<qet.;l
"' '"
0
0
:J:
0
';j
g =
-
1!
I) A rectangular R.C.C beam has a width of 201) mm and is reinforced
l, .. 'J

-,,'" ."
0 a: :a~ ~

-l~;!
3 with 2 bars of 20 mm diameter at an effective depth of 400 inm. If
. 0
~o
'l5 m
. E
&

'" .
~.8
§-~
c

.~ ,lil
M-20 grade concrete and Fe-4I5 HYSD bars are used, estimate the
ultimate moment of resistaoc;e of the section.
Ea>,2
E " •
.... «i>
m>
T &
;::-
11
.!! XI
~ ~ 0
0
,!! 2) A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular. section 200 mm wide by
'"
~
QiQ)Q>
E"'''' <0 u ~ I I 550 mm deep is reinforced with 4 bars of 25 mm diameter at aneffec-
m~ ~ £ .~
'"
N
.- 0 0 tive depth of 500 mm. Using M-20. grade concrete and Fe4I5 HYSD
~;g '0 ~ ~
O.c.c"O ~
'- u
en ceQ)
0 c
~~ U Z Z
bars, calculate the safe moment of resistance on the section.
(0««.0
3) . A reinforced c~ncrete beam 300 mm wide is reinforces 1436 mm2 of
Fe-415 HYSD bllfS at an effective depth of 500 mm. If M-20 grade
concrtfte is .used,
, .
estimate the flexural strength of the section.
' . .
4) .J Determine
,._
the area
.
of reinforcement
.
required for a singly'"reinforced
. '.' .
I' concrete,sectitm having a breadth of 300 mm and an effective depth of

'600 mmto support a fractured moment of200kN.m'i ' ..,

 Uitimate Strength ofReinfor'ced Concrete Sections' 193
R"iiilo,,:ed Con,crete Defig~
M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars, estimate the flexural
5) , Determine the minimum effective depth required and the correspond- strength of the'section using IS: 456-2000 code specifications.
ing area of tensio." reinforcement for a rectangular beam havin? a
width of 200 mm'to resist an ultimate moment of 200 kN.m, Usmg 11) A doubly reinforced concrete section has a width of 300 mm and is
2
reinforced with tension reinforcement of area 2455 mm at an effec-
M-20 Grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars
tive depth of 600 mm, Compression Steel of area 982 mm' is provided
6) Determine the moment of resistance of a tee-beam having the follow- at an effective cover of 60 mm, Using M-20 Grade Concrete and
ing section properties: Fe-415 HYSD bars,' estimate the ultimate moment capacity of the
Effective width of flange = 2500 mm section.
D~pth of flange = 150 mm
12) A reinforced concrete,beam has a support section with a width of 250
Width of rib = 300 mm
mm and effective depth of 500 mm, The support section is r~inforced
Effective depth = 800 mm
with 3 bars of 20 mm diameter on the tension side.8mm diameter two
Area of steel: 6 bars of 25 mm diameter
legged stirrups are provided at a spacing of 200 mm centers. Using
Materials: M-20 grade Concrete'
M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars, estimate the, shear
Fe-415 HYSD bars,
strength of the support section. -
7) Calculate the ultimate flexural strength of the tee-beam section having
13) A reinforced concret~ beam of rectangular section with a width of 300
mrr: the following section pr.operties.
~:f'a'
mm and an effective depth of 600 mm is reinforced with 4 bars of 25
Width of flange =1200 mm
mm diameter as tension reinforcement. Two-of the tension bars are
Depth of flange = 120 mm
bent up at 45° near the SUPPOl:t section. The be11m is also provided with
Width of rib = 300 mm
two-legged vertic.al links of 8 mm diameter at 150 mm centers near
Effective depth = 600 mm
,

Area of tension steel = 4000 mm

, supports. Using M-25 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars, com-
Materials: M-20 grcde Concrete
Fe-415 HYSD bars, i'
8) A tee beam has an effective flange width of 2500 mm and depth of
150 mm, Width of rib = 300mm, Effective depth = 800mm.Usin$ c '
M-20 grade Concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars, estimate the area o~
tension steel required if the section ha.s to resist a factored moment of
1000 kN.m
9) A tee beam has the following cross sectional details: ~
Effective width of flange = 2000 mm
Thickness of flange = 150 mm
Width of rib = 300 mm
Effective depth = 1000 mm ,
Calculate the limiting moment capacity of the section and' the corre~'
sponding area of tension reinforcement. Adopt M-20 grade concrete
and Fe-415 HYSD bars, I section is subjected to a factored bending moment 200 kNm. If fck =
10) A doubiy reinforced concrete beam having a rectangular section 250
mm wide and 540, mm overall depth is reinforced with 2 bars of 12
IJlrn di-~meter 'on the compression face and 4 bars of.1O mm diam~ter
on the tension side. The effective cover to the bars IS 40 mm. USlOg
pute the ultimate shear strength of the support section. Using IS:
456-2000 code specifications,
14) A reinforc~d concrete beam of rectangular section having width of.
300 mm and overall depth 600 mm is reinforced with 4 bars of 25 mm
diameter, distributed at each of the corners at an effective cover of 50
mm in the depth direction and side covers of 25 mm in the width
direction. 8 mm diameter 2 legged stirrups are provided at 100mm
centers
Estimate the torsional strength of the section adopting Fe-415 HYSD
bars for the following cases: -
a) Factored shear force is zero
b) Factored shear force is 100 kN '
15) A reinforced concrete beam 0,£ rectangular section with a breadth_ of
300 mm and overall depth 850 mm is reinforced with 4 bars of 20 mm'
diameter on the tension side at an effecti've depth of 800 mm. The·
415 N/mm2 ._ calculate the ultimate torsional resistance of the section.
16) A beam of rectangular section in a multistorey frame is 250 mm wide
by 500 mm deep, The section is subjected to a factored bending
 194 Reinforced COliC rete Desigll

moment of 55 kN,m and torsional moinent of 30 kN,m together with

an ultimate shear force of 40 kN, Using M-20 grade concrete and and CHAPTER 7
, Pe-415, HYSD bars design suitable reinforcements in the section

II Serviceability Requirements of
, assuming an effective cover of 50 mm in the depth and width direc_
. .
, tions and using IS: 456-2000 code specifications. ,
17) A cantilever beani having 'a width of 20? mm and ove;all depth 400 Reinforced Concrete Members
, , mm is reinforced with 3 bars of20 mm,d,ameter as tenSIOn steel and 3
,, bars of 12 mm d'iameter as compression reinforcement. The beam
suppqrts a total uniformly distributed factored load of 100 kN over a
span of 2 m. Using M-20 grade concrete and Pe-415 HYSD bars, 7.1 INTRODUCTION
compute the anchorage length required for the reinforcements.
Reinforced concrete members should be designed to conform to the limit
state of strength and serviceability. In addition to the limit state of strength'
outlined in Chapter-6. th,e members should also satisfy the serviceability
conditions under the action of dead and live loads. The primary service-
, ability conditions are:-
l
I

I) The member should not undergo excessive deformation under service ~, .t~
loads. This limit state is. generally referred to as the 'limit state of ,
I

I
deflection'. I
2) The width of cracks developed on the surface of reinforced concrete ''i.',.~l
I
members under service loads should be limited to the values pre- h;,,~
,
scribed in the codes of practice. This limit state is refetred to as 'limit ,
Slate afcracking'. ,I
Depending upon the environmental conditions and type of structure,
other limit states such as durability and vibration should also be consid- I
ered. These limit states' are also important for structures like bridges .~::;
located in marine enyironment. . ,,
IS: 456-2000 code has specified the partial safety factors for load,
combinations under which tbe deflection and cracking are to be checked.
Table-18 of IS: 456-2000 code (Table-5.2.of text) outlines the combi-
nations of loads for serviceability conditions. The largest value Should be
used for the computations. The load combinations are as follows:
I) 1.0 p.L + 1.0 L.L
2) 1.0 D.L + 1.0 W.L
3) 1.0 D.L + 0.8 L.L + 0.8 W.L (E.L)
Generally the codes specify the following two methods for control of
deflection. .
a) The empirical method in which the span/effective depth ratio of the
structural members are limited to specified values in the codes.
j."
 Reliij,,,ce'c/ Concrete Design Serviceability Requ.irements of Reillforcec/ Concrete Mempers 197
The theoretieR! method in which the actual deflection is computed and
checked witl},the codified permissible deflectinns. O=(3~4)( ~~')=U8)( w~')(~;)
Fo~ control bf crack widths also, two methods are specified.
a) The empirical method which requires the detailing of reinforcements
according to the codified provisions, such as minimum percentage of
=(~)(Md(~')
steel in the section, spacing of bars, curtailment and anchorage bars, Suh'tituting (~) =(~J and y =(~)
,lapping bars etc. ,,
(~)=U8)C;)(ff)=U4)(i)m
b) the theoretical method of computing the actual width of cracks and I,
1,1
checldng them with the codified requirements for the specified envi- ' Wehave
momenta} conditions. .
In this relation, it can be seen that the ratio of deflection/span is a function i/
The widespread use of high grade steels like Fe-415 and Fe-500 with' of span/depth ratio and the values of cr and E can be suitably assumed. I
higher allowable stresses replacing the Fe-250 grade during the last few, For example, assigning the values for cr =5 N/mm', E = 10 kN/mm'
decades coupled with the use of high performance concrete generally' and «JIL) = (11350) ,
results in slender structural elements necessitating greater· attention to
deflections and ,rack control in the modem methods of design of rein-'
The span/depth ratio is obtained as )I
=[24(10 x 10 )J = 27
3
forced concrete structures. ~--
(1:.)
d 350x5x5
,
1 7.2 CODIFIED DEFLECTION LIMITS This relation indicates that assuming certain terms as constants, the per-
I
I missible deflection/span ratio can.Q!Lcontrolled by spanldepth ratio. The
urn
Deflections of flexural members like beams and slabs if excess~Ye-causes. IS: 456 cnde recommendations are based on this principle.
n!"J distress to users of the structure and also likely to cause cracking of parti- :
tions. As given IS: 456 code Clause 23.2, the accepted limits to permissible' 7.3.2 ,Basic SpanJDepth ratios
deflections are given as,
a) The final deflection including the effects of all loads, temperature, ,', The following factors are considered in the specifications of basic
creep and shrinkage of horizontal structural members should not ,: span/depth ratios recommended in IS: 456 codes.
exceed the value of span/250. a) The spanleffective depth ratios
b) The deflection including the effects of temperature, creep and shrink- b) Percentage tension and compression reinforcement in the section
age occurring ofter the erection of partitions and the application of J c) Type of beam (Rectangular or flanged)
finishes should not exceed span/3500r 20 mm whichever is less. ' d) Type of supports .(simply supported, fixed or continuous)
Table-7.I gives the basic span to effective depth ratios to be used for
7.3 DEFLECTION CONTROL IN ~EAMS AND SLABS J beams and slabs with spans up to 10 m. For spans greater than 10m, the
(EMPIRICAL METHOD) ratios have to be multiplied by a factor F = (Wlspan) in metres. A graphical
representation of the basic span/depth ratios is shown in Fig. 7.1.
7.3.1 Theoretical Basis of EmpirIcal Method
7.3.3 Modification Factors for Basic Spantpepth Ratios
The empirical method is based on the principle of expressing deflection'
. span ratio of beams in terms of span/depth ratio and assuming constant Modification factors have to be applied to ,the basic spanldepth ratio to
values-of material properties. The deflection of a beam or slab supporting account for the percentage of tension and compression reinforcements in
uniformly distributed load can be expressed as the section and also the type of section such as rectangular or flanged. The
(inal expression of the span/effective depth ratio can be expressed as"
 Re'info rced Concrete Design Serviceability Requirements of Reinforced Concrete Members 199
_c"o~n!!t!!in!!!u2.0u!"s~~,, l
26 ....

Fe - 250 mild steel bars

20 Sim 1 su orted

I 2
L
~120
I
I
.E' l'21-1~~::t~'t=:::t=~~~I~t:==:3
.~ 1
."-'... I ~ Fe-41S HYsD 2
I .§ 0·8 bars 2
'0 Fe-500 HYSD bars
10 I. o
~ Note: fs Is stress in steel at service loads
I
--i
7I--"C!<la!!n!;t!;ll~ev~e,-r_ _ 0,41'---1---'-1 . (N/mm2 )

I
f =0·58 f
s
['As
required
Y As provided
J .
I
I~ ..· o0!'--"'0".t'4"'-~0"l.l,;8-'~"'1,J,'2"-,~""1.J,6~'-;2,J'0'--~--'2""'4-r-~-:-I2-8·
P.ercentage tension· relnforc.ement

I
,
bO 10
Span (m)
Fig.7.i Basic Span-Depth Ratios for Beams and Slabs
20 Fig. 7.2 Modification Factor for Tension Reinforcement (lS:456-2000)
1·5
~
v---
I Table 7.1 Basic Span.Effcctive depth Ratios for Beams and Slabs.
(Claus. 23.2.1 of IS: 456-2000) - u 1· 4
/
I
Type of support" Rectangular Sections
7
Flanged Sections
Multiply Values for
~

3
.

./
V
Cantilever
Simply supported 20 rectangular seclions by V
Continuous 26 factor ~ (Refer Fig. "7.4)
2
/
7
(Lid) = [(Lid)..", X K, X K, X KJ
l
/
Where (L/alb"" is as given in Table-7.1
K, = modification factor for tension reinforcement (Refer Fig. 7.2)
K = modification factor for compre'ssion reinforcement (Refer
c
1·0 V
o 05 1·0 . 1'5 z.o z.s 3·0
Percentage compression reinforcement
Fig.7.3) .
Fig.7.3 Modification Factor for Compression Reinforcement (18:456·2000)
K = modification or reduclion factodor flanged sections (Refer
r
Fig. 7.4) (lO/span) in metres, except for cantilevers in which case deflection com-
In general, higher percentages of tension reinforcement are associated putations are required to satisfy the limit state of deflection.
with lower values of K, and higher:va\ues of K,. For Fe-415 grade HYSD In the case of flangedbeams(T and L beams), the modification factors
bars, the val~e of K, is unity corresponding to the unit percentage of ten- K, and K, should be based on a(larea of section b, d (flange width X effec-
sion reinforcement. .." . tive depth) and the calculated (Ud)ratio is further modified by a r~duction
For ~Pllll~ above 10 m, the (Utl),,,,, Y,alU~s have to be multiplied by factor which depends on the ratio (bjb,) as shown in Fig. 7.4 (Fig.6 of IS:
456 Code).. .
 j(eiiijor'2MCiJitcrete Design ServiceabilitY Requirements ofReinforced Concrete Members 2QI
1·0 0

o·g 5
/ cons.iderations. For two way slabs of spans not exceeding 3.5 m and for
loadmg class not exceeding 3 kN/m', the span to overall depth ratios rec~
ommended by IS: 456·2000 code are compiled in Table-7.2

2 0·9 0
..
/ 7.4 DEFLECTION COMPUTATIONS (THEORETICAL
METHOD) .
u
.i.!
~ 0·8 5
/ The. defe~tlOns
l' ..
of remforced
lowmg salient factors:
concrete members are influenced by the fol-

u
.g
:8: 0·80
/ .
I) Self weight and imposed loads
2) Strength and modulus of elasticity of concrete
3) Reinforcement percentage
4) Span of the structural member
0·75 5) Type of supports (simply supported, fixed or continuous) II· "
, :-(
6) Flexural rigidity ,
iJ
0·70 7) Creep and shrinkage of concrete
o 0·2 0·4
0·6 0·8 1·0
I
Ratio of web widlh 10 flange width The computation of deflections are generally considered in two parts.
Fig. 7.4 Reduction Factors for Ratios of Span to Effective Depth for Flanged Beams Instantaneous or short term deflections occurring on, application of load. !
. (IS: 456·2000) Long. termdeflection resulting from differential shrinkage and creep under

,I
sustam~d loading. Annexure-C of IS: 456-2000 code presents a method of
The codal procedure yields anomalous results in the case of flanged, computm~ short and long term deflections as outlined below: >
".-' beams as outlined in the explanatory handbook to the code". Hence it is; !,
preferable to consider the width of the web bw in place of b, in computa:' a) Short term deflection
tions and thfs'procedure yields conservative results. The short-term defleCtion is computed using the elastic theory and short-
. The empirical procedure recommended for control of deflection in ~enn modulus of elasticity Er; and an effective moment of inertia 1 which'
slabs is the same as in beams, i.e. to limit the spao/depth ratios and the use IS expressed as elf
of same modification factors. .
For preliminary propoJtioning the thickness of slabs using Fe-415
HYSD bars, it is recommended to assume 0.4 percent value for p, which
gives a value of K, of about 1.25 and the corresponding (Uri) ratio being
But Ir'5.leff '5.lgr
25.
Where I r = moment of inertia of the cracked section
Table 7.2 -Span I Depth Ratios for Two Way Slabs
. (IS: 456·2000 Claus. 24.1) M, '" cracking moment, equal to [(1;, [s')/Y']
Span/Overall Depth Ratio
fer = modulus of rupture of concrete
Support Conditions 19r = moment of inertia of gross section about centroidal axis
Fe.250 Grade Slee] Fe-415 Grade HYSD barS
neglecting the reinforceme'pt .
Simply Supported Slabs 35 28
y, = distance of extreme fibre hi-tension from centroidal axis.
Continuous Slabs 40 32
M = maximum moment under service loads
In the design of beams which carry heavy loadiog, it is preferable to z = lever arm
assume spao/effective depth ratio in the range of 10 to 12 from practical x = depth of neutralaxis
d = effective depih
bw = breadth of web
b = breadth of compression flange
 Serviceability Requirements of Reinforced Concrete Members 203
202 Reinforced Concrete Design
. f /' 'given in IS' 456 is l"sed on the earlier version of the initial plus creep deflection due to pennanent loads
Qcc(perm) ;::
The expressIOn or err . . obtained using an elastic modulus of elasticity E cc =
British code BS: 8110_1985'. [Ej(I+8)] &
Hence the short-terln deflection j~ CXl'l'tssed as
8 = creep coefficient
Ow ~ Kw(lrt;! Qi(penn) = short term deflection due to permanent "load using Ec

The deflectioudue to creep depends upon the effective modulus of

where K = Constant depending uI"'" the type of load and support elasticity and creep coefficient. It is based on the assnmption that the total
w
conditions strain in concrete (Le. initial elastic strain plus creep strain) is directly p'ro-
E, = 5000 w:;: 'portional to the stress induced by the permanent loads"., '
W = total load on the bClllu 7.5 CONTROL OF CRACKING IN R.C.MEMBERS
L = span of the beam
7.5.1 Cracks in Reinforced Concrete Members
6S
b) Shrinkage Deflection Cracks in Reinforced Concrete Members develop due to various reasons •

The deflection due i~-;hrinkage (Chlll'C C-" of IS: 456-2000) is expressed The main causes of cracking are due to.
a) Excessive flexural tensile stresses due to bending under applied loads
as since the tensile strength of concrete is only a tenth' of its compressive
a~, ".\ "f't~ l..:
",,"
strength.
k) ;:: aconstant dcpendinf:, Ul'~.n the support conditions b) Differential Shrinkage, Creep, thermal & aggressive environmental
Where ; ii~
:::: 0.5 for cantilevers effects.
= 0.125 for sil',lply ,upI'),"",,1 members . _ c) Settlement of supports & excessive curvature due to contirtuity
:::: 0.086 fdr members l'l\nthtu\.\Us at one ~nd and effects.
;:: 0.063 for fully. cnntin\h'\:l.l.$ nl('rnbers . d) Shear & diagonal tension cracks
\j!" = shrinkage curv"tlll~ ='"
\fJD) -- e) Splitting cracks along with reinforcement due to bond and anchorage
f ;:: ultimate shrinkage str.'l.h~ ;,."{ \,."\."'lncrete (el,ause 6.2.4.1 of failure.
where
" IS:456,2000) The various specifications prescribed in the codes regarding detailing
D ;:: total depth of sccth'll of reinforcements are generally meant to reduce the width of cracks to
allowable limits. According to the specifications 'at IS: 456 Code Clause
k. = 0.72 [ I' ~ ] ~ 1.0 (,-.r ,\:5 ~ (I', - Pol < 1.0 35.3.2 cracks in concrete should not adversely affect the appearance or
'\ durability of the structure.
=0.65[1';]~l,\1

I
'" \1',-1');'1.0 7.5,2 Codal Crack Width Limits
1', = (lOOA.lbd ) ......1 !',=(tOOAjbd) The IS: 456 Code recommends a limit of. 0.3mm for the surface crack
where widths of reinforced concrete members.-This limit is adequate for the pur-
lind L = spnn of the l\li"nlt ' 1r pose of durability when the structural' member is completely protected
i' The expression for shrinkage dctk...' Hl'r· :J.t\I..",-ing shrinkage curvature \J1cs . against aggressive environmental conditions '4 • For particularly aggressive
environm~nts, (Refer Table 2.4 of text orTable-5 of IS: 456) a more strin-
is based on empirical fits with the ti'st (lllli··...,
gent limiting crack width of 0.004 times the nominal cover is prescribed.
Using a nominal cover of 25mm, the limiting crack width works out to 0.1
c) Creep Deflection mm. This limiting crack width is generaiiy prescribed in most of"lhe v
The creep deflection due to pcn",nt'" l.....'ilio "'-"""" may be expressed as -national codes where, water ~~ghtness is,required.l~.,.For structures -e>.tI'9c~H~,/';::f;,t~:P?'J
to moderate environmental conditions,. the limiting
• -
crack width .maybe:··:~
,'~':X%;);;},/-'
 "\ SerViceability Requirements ofReinforced Concrete Members 205
as 0.2mm.,
IS: 456 code cla~se·.j3.I does not require explicit calculations of crack
widths in the case of normal flexural members'in which the spacing and
cover requirements of reinforcements speCified in section 26 of the code
are adopted. In special ·structures and in aggressive environments, crack
is-t tsfts 1:
widths should be calculated by the method specified in Aunexure-F of the
code.
o 0
i 8 8 8
o ,0 8 8 8
7.5.3 Empirical Method of Crack control
The empirical method of crack control renders the str~ct~res with cracks
well within the permissible limits by detailing the reinforcements accord·
ing to the specifications of the code of practice. The following factors are
considered in this method. ' \
1) Maximum and Minimum spacing of reinforcements
The horizontal & vertical spacing of bars are specified in Clause26.3.2 &
26.3.3 of IS: 456 Code. The minimum spacing requirements are detailed in
Fig. 7.5. 00 00

The maximum spacing requirements in the tension zone is a function of

the stress level in the steel and the redistribution of the moments to and S < Diameter of largest bar
from that section. It should not be more than the values specifieq in -< (maximum aggregate size + 5mm)

.'.'
Table-I5 in IS: 456 Code. (Table 7.3 of Text). Tho spacing depends upon 9 -I: 15mm
the grade of steel and percentage redistribution of moments. In the case of '1: Diameter of largest bar
negative redistribution' (the moment of the section is distributed to anoth.~r 'i: 2/3 the maximum size of aggregate

section) the actual working stress in steel is higher than that, with no redis· Fig. 7.5 Maximum Spacing Between Grou)J of Bars
tribution and hence the difference in spacings shown in Table 7.3. ' . and temperature (distribution bars), the horizontal distance is limited to
five times the effective depth of the solid slab or 450 mm whichever is
Table 7.3 Clear Distance Between Bars (mm) smaller (Refer Fig. 3.1 for details).
(Clause 26.3.3 & Table-1S ofIS: 456)

Percentage Aedistribulion to or from the seclion considered 2) Side Face Reinforcements

Clear distance between b~lJS (mm)
-30 ~15 0 +15 +30 According to Clause 26.5.1.3 of IS: 456 code, if the total depth of beam is
250 215 260 300 300 300 greater than 750 mm, side face reinforcements of area not less than 0.1
415 125 155 H10, 210 235 percent of web area should be distributed equally on two faces at a spacing
500 105 130 150 175 195. not exceeding 300 mm'or web thickness whichever is smaller as shown in
Note: The spacings given in the lable are not app'Jicable to members subjected to particu- Fig. 7.6. ' I
larly aggressive environments unless in the caJculalion of the moment of resistance. Iy has
been limited to 300 N/mm 2 in the limit state design and U SI limited to 165 N/mm 2 in working The British code BS: 8110 1, limits the spacing of side face reinforce-
stress design.
ments to 250 mm and the diameter of the side face reinforcements ($)
should be not less than the value in mm given by the expression
In the case of slabs, the horizontal distance between parallel main rein·
forcement shall not -be more than three times the effective depth of solid ",(7,1)
'slab or 300 111m whichever is smaller. For bars provided against shrinkage
 206 Reinforced COllcrete Design Serviceability-Requiremems of Reil1fOl:ced Concrete Members' 207

Assuming the lever arm, a = 0.7 d, and in rectangular beams, the Tatio of
I- total depth to effective depth is very nearly unity. Hence replacing effec-

1
I···· ....
I tive depth as total depth, the moment of resistance is expressed as I
I
M,=(A.o.87 fya) ... (7.3:
I Equating . M u = Mer
I
. I
I
D >750mm A.(0.871,) (0.7d) = 0.7 {i:. (bd'/6) ", u

,,t.
(:;)=(O.I~~)

1
Fig. 7.6 Spacing of Side Face Reinforcement
For 1" = 20 N/mm'

A, = (0.85 bd) ...(7.4)

I
~,

f
I
I
..

Where Sb = vertical spacing (mm) Jr'

'b = breadth of beam (mm) This value of minimum tension reinforcement is prescribed in IS: 456
f, = characteristic strength (N/mm') 'code clause 26.5.1.1. Provision of this magnitude of reinforcement will
This provision is made to guard against the bar yielding locally at a crack. 'prevent the f~ilure in tension zone when the first cracks develops in con-
The side face reinforcement should invariably be pr<,>Vided and is manda- ~rete.
tory on the tension ZOIl.C of deep beams below the neutral axis as shown in In the case of slabs the ratio of total depth to effective depth, compared
Fig, 7,6, to beams is as large is 1.25 so that the coefficient worked out in the equa-
tion of the beams will be much smaller. In addition, the loads will be better
3) Mini~l1um percentage of steel distributed laterally in slabs than in beams. Hence the minimum
reinforcement (0.15 percent for mild steel and 0.12 percent for HYSD
The minimum percentage of steel prescribed in the IS: 456 code is derived bars) specifiedin the IS: 456 code is based on shrinkage and temperature
by considering the probability of cracking of the beams on the tension side effects rather than strength considerations.
when the tension in concrete reaches a strcs~ equal to the modulus of rup-
ture. Hence the main criterion for minimum percentage of steel is 7.5.4 Calculation of crack width
expressed as
The, empirical method of controlling crack widths to permissible limits is
[Strength of reinforced concrete beam] > [Strength as plain concrete
sufficient for mo~t. of the ,reinforced concrete structures. However in spe,-
beam] dal structures and in aggressive environments, crack widths should be cal,.;
According to IS: 456 code, clause .6.2.2 , the modulus of rupture of culated by appropriate methods. The Indian Standard code IS:456-2000
concrete is computed by the empirical relation, prescribes an analytical method for estimation of design, surface crack
7
hr=O.7...jJ::. and Mer=fcr Z width which is the same as that specified in British code BS: 8110-1985 •
The for~ula recommended by the British code BS: 8112-1985 for the
For a rectangular section having width 'b' and overall depth 'd', the value esti.mation 0f surface crack width Wer is based on the research investiga-
=
of section modulus, Z (b d'/6).
67
tions- of Beeby66 and' the same has been used by 3uthor in the computation
Hence M" = 0.7 Jj;,.,(bd'/6) ...(7.2) of crack widths' in Prestressed ~oncrete members.
I ""The empirical formula. for the design surface crack width Wer is

expressed as
 Rei;'jor<'edConc~ete Design Serviceability Requirements ofRefnjofced Concrete Members 209

. [3a,,€m] ... (7.S)

It is important to note that Eq.(7.6) is empirical, based on test data and
wcr = I +2 {a<~:mi"} dimensional homogeneity. The constant 3 in the denominator has the
inverse unit of stress.
Where Gcr :::;distance from the point considered to the surface of the near- If the crack width is measured at the soffit of the beam, then Eq.(7.6)
est longitudinal bar can be modified as follows:
Referring to Fig. 7.?
a'=h and J.
el;:;~ [h -xJ
Es d-x
--' and

..
",
€
m
~~ [h -xJ[ _
b,(h -X)]
E, d-x Is . .3A ,
...(7.7)

where is;:; stress at the centroid of the tension reinforcement

expressed -in N/mm 2 units.
In flexural members, the maximum widths of cracks are generally
fft-. encountered at the soffit of the beam and at sections where the moment is
maximum and at points mid way at soffit between the reinforcements and
• • • at corners.
• , • lmin 7.6 Examples
~cr I
+- bt ---t--
1) A simply supported'rectangular beam of 12 m span has all effective
Fig. 7.7 Parameters for Crack Width Computation
depth of 800 mm; The area of tension reinforcement required to sup-
Where S :;:;. spacing between bars port the loads is designed as 1.6 percent. Check the deflection control
C1nin :::; minimum Coyer to the longitudinal bat:s of the beam by empirical method if a) Fe-415 grade HYSD bars are
of
x :::; depth neutral axis used and b) Fe-500 grade bars are nsed.
h = Overall depth. of the member
e :::; average strain at the level of steelwhere"cracking is a) Data
In being considered and calculated by allowing for the stiff- L ~ 12m f, ~ 415 N/mm'
ening effect of concrete in the tension zone and obtained d = 800mm f, = 500 N/mm'
from Eq.(7.6). AS1 ;:; 1.6 percent

__ € _ (b,(h -x)(a' -X») ... (7.6) ;;,:

€
m 1 3EsA s(d -x) b) Actual span/depth ratio

where £. = strain at the level considered, considering a cracked sec~. (Lid) ~ (12/0.8) = IS
tion
bl :::; width of section at the centroid of tension steel c) Allowable span/depth ratio
a' :::; distance from the compression face to the point at which
crack width is being measured.
,
E, ~ modulus of elasticity of steel (N/mm') I;, ,I'
Since A$';:; 0, K, ;:; I
't As';:; area of tension reinforcement
Since the beam is rectangular, K f ;:; 1

Ii
 Serviceability Requirements of Reinforced Concrete Members 211

210 Reinforced Concrete Design

(Jt.. ~ (20 x 0.95 x 1.1 x 1.0) ~ 20.9 > 16
From Table-7.1, (U<f)b";' = 20
From Fig. 7.2, K, = 0.9 for Fec41S steel Hence, the beam is safe with regard to serviceability limit state of deflec-
= 0.8 for Fe-SOO steel
tion.
Case (a): (U<f) = [20 X0.9 X I X I] = 18 3) Check the deflection requirement for the following tee-beam continu-
Case (b): (U<f) = [20 X0.8 X I X I] = 16 ous over 10m spans and having flange width of 1200 mm, web width
Since permissible span}dep;h ratio is greater than the actual, of 250 mm and effective depth = 400 mm, Area of tension
reinforcement =ISOO mm', Area of compression reinforcement'" 960
deflection control is satisfactory.
2) A doubly reinforced beam of rectangular section 2S0 mm wide by ssd mm'. Adopt Fe-4IS grade HYSD bars. '
mm overall depth is reinforced with 4 bars of 22 mm diameter on th~
tension face and 2 bars of 16 mm diameter at the compression face;' a) Data
The effective cover is 50'mm. The beam spans over 8 m. If Fe'4l L = 10 m (Continuous beam)
HYSD bars are used, check for the deflection control using the empir br = 1200 mm
ical method. d = 400mm

a) Data
b=2S0mm
A" = (4 X380) = IS20 mm' bw = 2S0 mm (~:) =U~~O)
A" = (2 x 201) = 402 mm'
d=500mm A" 1500mm'
Fe-415 HYSD bars
L=8m A" = 960 mm'

b) Actual SpanID.!'pth ratio , h) Percentage reinforcement

(!:)
d· atlUal
= (8000) ~ 16
500
100A,,] = [100XI500]'
P,= [I¥i 1200x400 =0.31

IOOXA,,] [100X960]
c) Allowable span/depth ratio P,= [ b.d = 1200x400 =0.20
.
(!:)
-;,

~(!:), ,x K, x K, x K, c) Actual span/depth raUo

d max d ba.<1t

,[!:]d _[10000] ~ 25
(!:)d "= 20
ba$;C
from the table"7.1 aclual - 400 -

~(IOOA,,) ~(lOOX 1520 ~ 1.21%\

p, bd 250 x 500 'J d) Modification factors

p,
~(lOOA")
bd
~(100X402 03 %\
250x500' 2 'J
From Fig.7.2,K, = I.S0
From Fig. 7.3,K, = 1.00
From Fig.7A,K, = 0.80
From Fig. 7.2,K, = 0.9S
Fig. 7 .3,K, = 1.1
Fig. 7 A,K, = 1.0
 Reinforced Conereie Design Serviceability Requirements ofReinforced Concrete Members 213

e) Permissible spanJdeplh ratio I r ::::: Moment of inertia of cracked section

Let x =depth of neutral axis, then

[!oJ
d ma~
=[!od J . xK,xK,XK,
basiC
0.5 b x' = m A,,(d -x)

(0.5 x 200 xx') = 13 x 600(420-x)

= [26 x 1.50 x 1.00 x 0.8]
Solving x = 146 mm
=31.2>25
Distance of centroid of steel from neutral axis is obtained as
Hence,thf' tee beam is safe with regard to th~ limit state of deflection. r = (d -x) = (420-146) = 274mm
4) A rectangular section beam 200 mm wide by 450 mm overali depth is Ir = (b x 3/3)+m ASI r
2
,
reinforced with 3 bars of 16 mm diameter at an effective depth of 420
mm. Two hanger bars of 12 mm diameter are provided at the com~ . =(200~1463)+(13X603X274')
pression face. The effective span of the beam is 5 m. The beam sup-
ports a service live load of 10 kNim. Iff" = 20 N/mm' andf, = 415
N/mm', compute a) the short-term deflection b) the long term = (7.95 x 10') mm'
Iif'!;~
/1:\'
deflection according to IS: 456 code specifications.
.1,,=( b~}UOO;2450l) = (15.18 x 10') mm'
a) Data
b = 200min
D = 450mm
fo,
f,
= 20N/mm'
= 415 N/mm' M, = (f~'J = ( 3.l3;;~.~;; 10') = (0.211 x JO') N.mm
d = 420mm .E, = 5000.g:. z = lever arm = [d-(x/3)] =[420-(146/3)] = 371.34mm
L = 5m = 5000 -./20 = 22360 N/mm'
M = (0. 125lV L') = (0.125 x 12.25 x 5') = 38.3 kN.m = (0.383 x 10') N.mm .
q = IOkN/m
As! ::::: 603 mm' fo, = 0.7 .g:.
A sc ::::: 226 mm' = 0.7 -./20 = 3.13 N/mm'
m = 13

b) Service loads on beam

, (7.85 x 10')'; (9.037 x 10') ,; (15.18 x 10')
Self weight = g = (0.2 x 0.45 x 25) '" 2;25 kN/m Maximum short-term deflec,tion is computed as
Live load = q = 10 kN/m
Service load = IV = (g + q) = (2.25 + 10) = 12.25 kN/m = 12.25 N/mm . a = [ -5lVL'
-- = J[ 5x 12.25 x 5000' =494mmJ
1(",,,:,, 384£,/,,, 384x22360x9.02x 10' .
c) Maximum Short term Deflection I
d) Long term Deflection

aLd = (Short term deflection) + (Shrinkage deflection) + (Creep deflec-

tion)
aLd::::; [al(penll) + Q cs + Qcciperm)J
Where'
 214 Reinforced Concrete Design Serviceability Requirements of Reinforced Concrete Members 215

Shrinkage Deflection .. Permissible deflection = (span 1 250) = (5000/250) = 20,mm

Actual deflection = 13.664 mm .
Hence, the beam satisfies the limit state of deflection.
acs=kJ'I'c.L2
where k, = a constant = 0.125 for simply supported beams 5) A simply snpported beam spanning over 8 m is of rectangular section
with a width of 300 mm and overall depth 600 mm. The beam is
\jIcs:::::; shrinkage curvature;:: k4 (fe/D) reinforced with 4 bars 0(25 mm diameter on the tension side at an
where f
es
= ultimate shrinkage strain of con~rete = 0.0003 effective depth of 550 mm. Two nominal hanger bars of 12 mm
diameter are provided on the compression side. The beam i.s subjected
k = O.72(P,-P,l]
[
1tJ: : ; 1.0 for O. 25 ::; (PI-PC) < to
. to a service load moment of 140 kN.m at the centre of span section.
Assnming M·20 grade concrete and Fe~415 HYSD bars, check the
4

beam for the serviceability limit states of deflection and cracking

IOOX603) . _(IOOX226)_
P,= ( 200x420 =0.7t. and ~,- 200x420 -0.269 using the following methods:
I) Deflection control (empirical method)
(p,_P,l=(0.71-0.269)=0.44t>0,25 and <1.00
2) Deflection control (Theoretical method)
=[0.72 X0.441] = 0.377 3) Maximum width, of cracks (Theore,\ical method)
k, "0.71
Data
'II" = k, [eJD] = 0,377[0.0003/450] = (2.5t x 10") b = 300mm f., = 20 N/mm'

L'] =[0.125x2.5IxlO·'x5000~=0.784mm
D = h=600mm • = 415 N/mm'
Jy
•• acs =[k3 '"
't'cs d = 550mm til = 13
M = 140kN.m E, = 5000 {iO = 22360 N/mm'
Creep Deflection A" = 1963 mm' Jcr - '2c5 = 3.13 N/mm'
• = 0.7 ~,i,V
2
A sc == 226 mm E, = (2 x 10') N/mm'
a I,cc(perm). = Initial + creep deflection due to permanent
••
loads obtained by L = 8m
using the effective modnlus of elastiCIty as E" = [Ej(l + 8)]
where 8 = creep coefficient = 1.6 ( at 28 days loading) 1) Deflection. Control (Empirical Method)

-
GJ,cc(perm) - [3845wL'
Ec)efr
] andE=--=-
ce
[1 +E,1.6] [E,]
2.6
= (lOOA,,)=(lOOX(963)= 119
p, bd 300x550 "
a = 26 (short term deflection) = (2.6 x 4.94) = 12.84 mm
•• I,cc(pcrm) •

Hence the creep deflection due to· permanent loads may be obtained from =( lOOA K ) = (100X226) = 0.14
p, bd 300x550
the J;elation,
a) Modiflcation Factors
ace (pcrrnJ ;:: [a'.cc(pcrm) - al (permj] =(12.84 - 4.94)::;: 7.9 mm
Total long-term deflection is given by the relation, . From Fig. 7.2,K, = 0.95
ar." = (short term deflectiOl;)+(shrinkage deflection)+(creep deflection) . Froin Fig. 7.3,K, = 1.05
From Fig. 7.4,K, = 1.00
= Ql, (perm) + acs + ace, (perm)
= (4.94 + 0.784 + 7.9) = 13.664 mm b) Span/depth Ratio
According to IS: 456·2000 code, the maximnm permissible long·term

I
deflection should not exceed the valne of (span/250). Allowable span depth ratio is expressed as
 Reinfotced:Concrett;,Vesign-:' (,. i;'·';', \\--":';-', Serviceability Requirements ofReinforced Concrele-Nembers 217

(Lid) = [(Lid)",;" x K, x K, x KJ e) Short term Deflection \

= (20 x 0.95 X 1.05 X 1.00)

5ML'] =[ 5xlAxlO'x8000'
a sd =[ - - . ] = 10.92 mm
= 19.95 48EJ.ff 48 x 22360 x 38.2 x 10'
I) Shrinkage deflection
Actual span/depth ratio = (LI d) = (8900/550) = 14.54 < 19.95
Hence the deflection control is satisfactory.
~,,=k{;)
'f'lIl
2) Deflection Computations (TheoreticaiMet)tod)
(P, - p,) = (1.19 - 0.(4) = 1.05> I
a) Neutral Axis depth
.. k, =0.65 [P{f.'] = 0.65 [J;0:9] =0.626
Let x = depth of neutral axis
. For simply supported beams
'I
r;;;; (d - x), neglecting the compression steel in computations,
~,,= 0.626(0.0003/600) = (3.13 x W-') i
0.5bx' = lIiA,,(d - x) , ;
k,=0.125
(0.5 X 300 xx') = [13 x 1963(550-x)
a" = [k,'JI"L ~ "[0.125 x 3.13 x 10-' x 8000;J = 2.5 mm
Solving x = 233 mm and r ='(550 - 233) = 317 mm
g) Creep deflection_
Lever arm = z = [d - (xI3)] = [550 - (233/3)] = 472.34 mm

b) Moment of Inertia of Cracked Section

E.. =C ~'8) =(:.~)
" al.cc(pum) = (1 +6) (asd) = (2.6 x 10,92) = 28.4mm
Deflection due to creep only is
acc,{perm) = [al.~(pe.m) -al{perm) = (28.4 - 10.92) = 17.48 mm
= [(300 x 233')/3J + [13 x 1963 x 317~ = (38.2x 1O')nim'
h) Long term Deflection
,
c) Moment of Inertia of Gross Section ,I,
aLd = [asd +acs +aCC,(perm)] = pO.92 +2.5 + 17.48) = 30.9 mm

I" = (b h'/12) = [(300 x 600')/12] = (54 x 108) mm' i) Check for Deflection Control

Maximum permissible long-term defle"ction is giv.en by the expression

d) Effective Moment ofInertia
span) (8000) -
alimiting =. ( 250 = 250 = 32mm
M,= U;1,,)IYJ = [(3.13 x 54 x 10')/300] = (0.563 x 10') N.mm
Actual deflection is = aLd = 30.9 ~m < 32 mm
Hence the deflection is within safe per~issibl~ limits.

3) Maxhnum Width of Cracks

Assuming the spacing of tension steel (25 $) at 60 mm centers, S = 60 mm

Cover = C ml , = (50 - 12.5) = 37.5 mm
= (38.2 X 10') mm'

i ;~
I
 218 Reinforced Concrete Design Serviceability Requirements of Reinforced Concrete Members 219
O~ 2 21 us
a" = ((O.5S)' + C",,"l . = [(0.5 x 60) + 37.5 J = 48 mm diameter on the tension face and 2 bars of 16 mm diameter at the
I~ Crack width will be maximum at the soffit of the beam.
compression face at an effective cover of 50 mm. The beam spans
over 6 m. Using Fe-415 grade HYSD bars check for the serviceability
I .. a' =h = 6000101 limit state of deflection using the empirical ~nethod.

E=~[h-X] 3) A tee beam continuous over 8 m spans and having a flange width of
1
,:
E d-x
$
1200 mm and web width 300 mm, effective depth of 500 mm is rein-
forced with tension reinforcement of area 1600 mm2 . Adopting Fe-
f,="i[~:] where y=r=317mm
415 grade HYSD bars, check for the limit state of deflection using IS:
456-2000 code empirical method. .
6
= 13[140XI0 X317]= 151 Nlmm' 4) A simply supported reinforced concrete beam of rectangular section
38.2x 10' 250 mm wide by 450mm overall depth is used over an effective span
of 4 m. The beam is reinforced with 3 bars of 20 mm diameter Fe-415
151.3)[600-233] -4 HYim grade ;teel at an effective depth of 400 mm. Two hanger bars
f,= ( 2xlO' 550-233 =(8.74xlO )
of 10 mm diameter are provided. The self weight together with the
b,(h -x)(a' -X)] dead load on the beam is 4 kN/m
f. = '. - [ 3E,A,(d -x) Service live load is 10 kN/m. Using M-20 grade concrete,compute
a) The short term deflection
= (8 74 x 10-4) _ [300(600- 233) (600 - 233)] = (7.66 x 10-4) b) The long-term deflection according to the provisions of the
. 3x2xIO'1963(550-233) IS: 456-2000 code. ,
~;<;ll~

w =[
3a,l~ J [3X48X7.66XIO-4]
--\,;-:c---r = 1 'J ~8-31.SJ = 0.104 mm
5) A simply supported beam of rectangular section spanning over 6 m I
lU~A

.. "1+2-~-:;~j +4..600~23J • has a width of 300 mm and overall depth of 600 mm. The beam is ~ I
,j
reinforced with 4 bars of 25 mm diameter on the tension side at an
,,
I
According to IS: -156 code Clause 35.3.2, under general (normal) condi- effective depth of 550 mm spaced at 50 mm centers. The beam is sub-
tions,
Maximum width of crack l' (0.004 x C m,")
jected to a working moment of 160 kN.m at the centre of span section.
Using Fe-415 HYSD bars and M-25 grade concrete, check·the beam
,.
l' (0.004 x 37.5) for the serviceability limit state of cracki~g according to the provi- ~u.;;
r
:t 0.15 mm sions of the Indian standard code IS: 456-2000. I
Since Wcr = 0.104 mm < 0.15 mm, the serviceability limit state of crack- 6) A simply supported beam of rectangular section 300 mm wide by 700
ing is satisfied. mm overall depth has an effective span of 8 m. The beam is rein-
forced with 4 bars of 25 mm diameter spaced 50 mm apart on tension .r
7.7 EXAMPLES HlR PRACTICE side at an .effective depth of 650 mm. Two nominal hanger bars of 12 :"I1.·•.J.1
I
mm diameter are provided on the compression side at a cover of 50
I) A simply sUPl'0rted beam of 8 m span has an effective depth of 800 mm. The beam is subjected to a service load moment of 140 kN.m at \t
.~

mm.·The ht;,un is. reinforced with tension steel of 1.5 percent. Check
the deflection ",)mrol of the beam by empirical method using
a) Fe-415 HYSD bars and
b) Fe-500 grade steel bars
2) A doubly re.int\'I\.-ed concrete beam of rectangular .section 250 mm
wide by 500 lUlU effective depth is reinforced with 3 bars of 20 mm
centre of span section. Using M-25 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD ·1
bars, check the beam for the limit states of deflection and cracking
using the following methods:
a) Deflection _c_ontral using empirical method
b) Deflection computations using the theoretical method.
c) Maximum width of cracks using the theoretical method.
 11
Limit State Design of Bea1~s 221
i:j,
Table 8.1 SpanlDep'h ratios for Trial 'Section
CHAPTER 8 SI. No. Span Range Loading Span/Deplh ratio"
JiJ
'- t!
(Ud) !jJ
LimitState Design of Beams 1 3t04m Light 151020
" ~ "

2
3
51010
>10m
Medium to Heavy
Heavy
12 to 15
12
'i!
8.1 INTRODUCTION
2) The minimum percentage of tension steel shonld be around 0.3 per-
The design of a reinforced concrete beam element to resist a given system cent. Generally the depth of the beam should be such that the percent-
• of external loads involves the material properties and the skeletal dimen- age .of steel reqnired is about 75 percent of that required for balanced
sions such as width and depth are assumed based on specific guidelines. sectIOn.
The cross sectional dimensions generally assumed to satisfl( \he 3) The minimum number of bars" used' as tension reiforcement should be
serviceability criteria and housing of reinforcements with suitable spacihg atIest two and not more than six bars should be used in one layer in the
and cover is required to estimate the dead loads and moments. In designing , beam.
the reinforcements for flexure and .shear, the bending moments arid,shear, The width of th~ section shOUld accommodate the reqnired number of
• . . -. " - 'I "-'!/,I,~\)/:';
4)
" forces along the length of beam must be obtained from structuralanalysis. "j,:/,i)':.">:
The designed beam should satisfy the limit states of safety and service-
bars WIth suffiCIent spacings between them and a minimum side cover
of 2?mm to t?e stirrups. The minimum spacing between groups of
ability discussed in earlier chapters. ' . bars IS shown III Fig: 7.5
In contrast to the analysis 'problem. the design problem does not have 5) The diameter of hanger bars should be not less than of tOmm and that
unique solution since the flexu!:aJ strength of a section is governed of main bars 12mm. The normal diameter of bars' used are
• cross sectional dimensions. material properties· and magnitude of 08,10.12,16,20,22,25 and 32mm. If different sizes of bars are used in
• forcements in the section. The desired strength can be obtairied by several
combinations of these variables. It is possible that different designers may
" one layer, the hanger bars should be placed near the faces of the beam.
6) In flanged Tee-beams. the depth of the slab is usually taken as 20per-
produce different solntions all of whieh may satisfy the design criteria. cent of the overall depth.
• A comprehensive design of a beam requires th_e considerations 7) The general widths of beams used are 150, 200, 230, 250 and 300mm.
safety under the ultimate limit states of flexure, .shear, torsion and Also the widths of beam shonld be equal to or less than the dimension
together with the limit s!lites of servieeability cilteria byompirical. meth- of the columns supporting the beam.
ods.
8.3 DESIGN OF SINGLY REINFORCED
8.2 GUIDE LINES FOR SELECTION OF CROSS RECTANGULAR BEAMS
SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS AND DETAILING
OF RE1!'!FORCEMENTS 1) Design a singly reinforced concrete beam to suit the following data:

The following gnidelines may be nsed to select the cross sectional Data:
sions of reinforced concrete beams.
Clear span = 3m
1) The depth of the beam is fixed based on span/depth ratios to satisfy
the deflection requirements. The ratio of overall depth to width should Width of Supports = 200mm
be between 1.5 and 2.0
=
Working Live load 6 kN/m
M-20 grade concrete
Table 8.1 shows the trial section(span/depth) ratios to be assumed as a Fe-415 gr~de HYSD bars
function o(span' and loading.

I
 Limit State Design of Beams 223
222 Reinforced Concrete Design

I Method-! (Using IS: 456 Code provisions) M, = 0.87 f,.A•.d [1 _b.d·lo,

,.I, ]
A,

I"
a) Stresses
"
(13.IXlO~=(0.87X415XA.XI60)[1
"
A"X415]
200 X160x20
fo, = 20 N/mm'
f, = 415 N/mmm' Solv~ng A. = 275 mm' > A"ml. = [(0.85 bdJ/f,l .
Load Factor = 1.5 for dead-and Live Loads. Provlde
10 d'3 bars
' of 12mm
, diameter (A -
• -, 339 mm') and 2 hanger bars of .' ,.,
rom tameter on compression side.
b) Cross Sectional Dimension
0' ,Check for Shear stress
Refer Table-8.1 and adopt a span/depth ratio of 20 for the given span and
range of loading.
. depth = d = (span)
( ~) '(16'59
t:-
,- bd -
U _. x 10') ...
•
200x160 =0.51 N/mm '
2

Effechve 20 = (3000)
20 = 150 mm
p = (1 00A.) =(I00X339)_
Adopt d = 160mm ,, , ' b d , 200x 160 - 1.05
D=200mm R~fer Table-19
s,...i.ngth 'f of IS·456·2ooo
. . (Tab'le·6.11 ,of text) and read out the design shear
b=200mm u"; 0 concrete as, .
.. Effective Span = [Clear span + effective depth] = (3 + 0.16) = 3.16 m i

Center to center of snpports = (3 + 0.2) = 3.2 m

Hence L = 3.16 m.

c) Loads

Self weight = g = (0.2 X 0.2 X25) = 1.00 kN/m

Live Load = q = 6.00 kN/m
Total Load = w = 7.00 kN/m
Design Ultimate Load = w, = (1.5 X7) = 10.5 kN/m
p, =,1.05. From Fig.7.2 read out the modification factor K, = 0.95.
d) Ultimate Moments and Shear Forces
.. (!it (!iL,
= xK,xK,xK,
M, = (0.125 w, I}) = (0.125 X 10.5 X 3.162) = 13.1 kNm.
';(20Xl.1Xlxl)=22
V, = (0.5 w, L) = (0.5 x 10.5 x 3.16) = 16.59 kN.

e) Tension Reinforcements
, (!iLdw =(~::~)= 19.75<22.
Hen<:e, deflection control is satisfactory.:
M,.lim= 0.138 fo"b.d'
= (0.138 x 20 X200 X 160') 10-"
= 14.13 kNm,

I Since Mu < Mu,lim. section is under reinforced.

 224 Reinfo~ced Cpncrete Design Li1i)itState Design ofBeams :zl:S:
Method-2 (using SP: l~ Design Charts), Me.thod.l (using IS: 456 Code FormUlae)

(M')
a) Stresses
(13.1XIO') 255
a) Compute bd'" 200x 160' " .

b) Refer Table-2 (SP: 16) or Table-6.5 of text lind read out p," 0.861 ];, = 20 N/mm'. 1, = 415 N/mm'
Load factor = 1.5 for dead and live loads.
0.861 x200x 160) ,. .
.'. A = = 276 rom (Provldu 3 burs of 12 rom diameter)
.51 ( 100 b) Cross sectional dimensions

c) Compute parameter (dV=) kN/cm , :t ReferTdble-8.1 and adopt a span/depth ratio of 15 for the' given sf'J!l ani'
range of loading.
Where V=" (OAb d)" (004 x200x600)IO" = 12.8kN Effective depth = (span/15) ='(5000115) = 333 mm.
Adopt effective depth = d = 350 mm
.. (dV,,) = (12.8)
16 =(J.B Overall depth = D = 400 mm
Width of beam = b = 200 mm
Refer Table-62 (SP: 16) and read out the splicing of 6 mm two legged stir- .. Effective span = [Clear span + effective depth]
rups 1-'. = [5 + 0.35] = L = 5.35 m
As S, = 25 cm = 250 mm. BUI S, :l- 0.75 d = (0.75 x.160) = 120 mm
0) Loads

d) The detailing of reinforcements are shown in Fig. 8.1.

S~lf weight of beam = g = (0.2 x 0.4 x 25) = 2.00 kN/m
j> LIve load = q = 10.00 kN/m
"'6-120 clc Total working load= w = 12.00 kN/m
Design ultimate load = w, = (1.5 x 12) = 18.00 kN/m

d) Ultimate Moments and Shear Forces

3 #12 M, = (0.125 ~,L') =(0.125 x 18 x 5.35') = 64.4 kN

I'~'-_ _
Cleor span (3 m)--_,l<. V,:; (0.5 w, L ) = (0.5 x 18 x 5.35) = 48.2 kN
,- +---- Effeclive span C)'16m) ---t-
) Reinforcements
Fig. 8.1 Reinforcement Details in Singly Rt'inl\ll~cd Rectangular Beam

,2) Design a singly reinforced concrete bem" of clear span 5m to Limiting moment of the section is
a design working live load of 10 kN/m. Adopt M-20 grade COl1Crl:te·.i~ ~,= 0.118];, b d' = (0.138 x 20 x 200 x 350') 10"' = 68 kN.m
SmceMU <Mu,lirn' the sec t"IOn IS underremforced
.
and Fe-415HYSD bars. ,
Data: M," (0 87f,A"d) [1-(bA~iJ]
Clear span = 5m
Working live load = 10 kN/m (64AxlO')=(O.87x415xA X35(J)[I-( 415A" ]]
M-20 grade concrete and Fe-4IS IlYSD bars. 51 200x350x20
I Limit State Design ofBeams 227 ,,
I 22CJ
, '

Method-2 (USing SP: 16 Design Tables)

,,
I
, 1111' .\ :024mm ,
I· ~(l VI,; 'I' ~ of 20 mm diameter (A" = 628' mm') as tension reinforce-'
"
I II )Vhtl\" '",,- . . , 'd
\ ' ~'\~ of 10 mm diameter as hanger bars on compreSSlOn 81 ,e.
I
I
I
IIll~llll\\H.. -' a) Compute the parameter, (M.,)
bd
"(64.4 10
X
200 x 350'
6
) = 2.62
~' -

I
I
..
n Ch,'\'k t\>r Shear Stress b) Refer Table-2 of SP: 16 (Table-6.5 of lext) and read out p, correspond- ,,
I

ing to the parameter (M.tb d') and fy = 415 N/mm'.

p, = 0.892 = (100A.lbd) l-
, M'
\'\
.
f 'w l~" = (48.2 X 10
3
A" = [(0.892 x 200 x 350)/(100)] = 625mm:'
,f
I
"
I

)IX''' ....' ,)=0.68 N/mm'. c) Compute parameter (V,,Id) kN/cm ;~ .,.

ll\\1.,,) = (100 x 628) = 0.89
(V,,Id) =(7/35) =0.2 ,I
"

1\"
l 'M 200x350
. ,\,.\ \~\9 oflS'456 (Table-6.11 of text) and read out the design shear
Refer Table-62 of SP: 16 and read out the spacing of 6mm diameter two
legged mild steel stirrups, S; = 300 mm.
,

"
,
t,

l{l'It'.. " \ , , 2
'lh "f..'\.'ucrcte as. 'Ie:::: 0.59 N/mm . . d
s(t't'l\},
- But S"rnu > 0.75 d= (0.75 X 350) = 262.5 mm ~.u
• t >'" ~hear remforcements are reqUire .
Sltll'l' " ".. . ' , Adopt a spacing of 250 mm
"~I
,
1\11 I.1\\, .
=
",l><w. V" [V, - (~, b d)] I
= [48.2 _ (0.59 X200 X 350) 10-3] = 7 kN d)" The detailing of reinforcements are shown in Fig. 8.2.
~d'
, , lIllI' diameter 2 legged mild steel stirrups, "6 250 cc
~
tlst1\)~ ,. -j #' Ll.t·,lU

. _[0.87 frV] =[0.87 x250XLX28 X350],= 609 mm / I

".. V.. 7x 1000 , l !

I
~ ,,\\{5d=(0.75X350)=262.5mmandals~ S,:t> 300 mm ,
• "II'~\. \ mttl diameter 2 legged stirrups at a spacmg of,250 mm centres.
A
1'1\W\\ {'" ,

~, ell'''''' t\3l' denection Control l 212O r

: .'
• ,
I Clear s Pan (5m I ----1-1
, "" F,wn Fig. 7.2 read ant the modification factor K, =0.99
1\ to.' l ., +-- Effective span (5·35ml--.!'-
( ~)
d
max
"(~).
d
xK,xK,xK,
basIC
Fig. 8.2 Reinforcement Details In Singly Reinforced J.l.ectangular Beam

= (20xO.99 x 1 x I)" 19.8 8.4 DESIGN OF DOUBLY REINFORCED

RECTANGULAR BEAMS
_L) " (5.35)
- ,,15,3 < 19.8.
( .d ,provided 0.35
1) Design a reihforced' concrete beam of· rectangular se~tion using the
following data:
Ht'\"'X'\ \k"{\~tion' control is satisfied.
Data:
Effective span = 8 m
Working live load = 30 kN/m
 Limit State Design of Beam.,;.' ·229

Overall depth restricted to 650 mm . . Butf~ 1> 0.87 f, i= (0.87 x 415) = 361 N/mm
2

M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars

.. A = [(M. - M o",",)] =[ 120x 10'] = 604 mm'
Assuming width = b= 300 mm ~ I~(d-d') 361x550
Effective cover = d' .z:: 50 mm
Provide 2 bars of 20 mm diameter (A~ = 628 mm
2
Effective depth = d" 600 mm )

Method -I (Using IS: 456 Code provisions) A",= [A,J~]1,

0. 87
[604X361 ]
= 0.87x415 =604mm
'

J;~
a) Stresses Ii
=[0.36/" b(Xo'lim)] =[0.36X20 x300x0.48 X600] = 1723 mm'
A,,, 0. 87 1, 0.87x415 I;
h, =20 N/nim2 2
f, =415 N/mm :. A" = (A,,, +A,,,) = (1723 + 604)= 2327 mm'
r :;1
2
Load factor = 1.5 for dead and live loads. Provide 5 bars of25 mm diameter [A,,= (5 x 491) = 2455 mm

b) Loads
]
!,
I,
f) Shear ReinforcementS ; ,
Self weight = g = (0.3 x 0.65 x 25) = 4.875 kN/m ii
Live load = q = 30.000 kN/m , =(V.)=(209XIO')=1.l6N/mm'
• bd 300x600
II
{,
Total workIng load = w = 34.875 kN/m
Ultimate Design 1lJad = w. = (1.5 x 34.875) = 52.3 kN/m = (100A,,) =(100X2455) = 1.36
. p, bd 300x6UO

Refer Table-19 (IS: 456) and read out~, = 0.70 N/mm

c) Moments and Shear Forces 2

2
M. = (0.125 x 52.3 x 8 ) = 418 kN.m Since'ty > 'te • shea:rreinforcements are required.
V. = (0.5 x 52.3 x 8) = 209 kN v.. = [V. - (t,.b.d)]
d) Limiting Monlent of Resistance = [209 - (0.70 X300 X600) 1O''j

2
=83kN
M.,Hm = 0.138h, b d .
= (0.138 x 20 x 300 X 6002) 10" = 298 kN.m < M. Using 8mm diameter 2 legged stirrups
Hence design as doubly reinforced section. =[°.87I,A.. d] =[0.87 x41583xx2x10'50 x 600] = 261 mm
S. V
. .
S. 1> 0.75d = (0.75 x 600) = 450 mm
e) Main Reinforcements
Also S. 1> 300 mm
(M. -M•.lIm ) = (418 -298) = 120 "''1.m
Adopt spacing S. = 260 mm near the supports and gradually increasing to
300mm towards the centre of the span.
r'· _ [0.0035 (x., mu -
fy; -
d')] Es
xu, max g) Check for Deflection Control

=[0.0035[(0.48 X600) - 501] (2 X 10') = 578 N/mm'

(0.48 X600) ( L-.)
d .c!ual
=(8000) = 13.33
600
 230 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design ofBeams 231

,(~)
d
=(~)",
d
xK,xK,xKf , # 8 -260 clc 2 # 20 t-300"i.

p,=1036 and
max basIC

100X628)
p, = ( 300x600 =0.34
.r;::::::;:::::;:::::;:i:::::;:::=;::=:;=:;:=;~=ri t
650
1
600

Refer Fig. 7.2, K, = 0.9 .~::!::::::!=~~::::!:::=!:~ t 4-

Fig. 7.3, K, = l.l 5 #25 , 5 #25
Fig. 7.4, K(= 1.0
~---'EEff.ctlv. span (8 ml-----f-,'
.. (1:-) = [20xO.9xl.l x 1.0] "19.8> 13.33
d ma~ Fig. 8.3 Reln.forcement Details in D~ubly Reinforced Beam
Hence, deflection criteria is satisfied
a) Data:
Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Tables)
b = 250mm 10, = 20 N/mm'
D = 550mm r =
Jy 415 N/mm'
a) Main Reinforcements
d = 500mm q = 20kN/m
[M, / btf] = [(418 x 106)/ (300 X600')] = 3.87 and (a/d) = 0.1 L = 7m ' I
d' = 50mm
Refer Table-50 (SP: 16) and read out the values of p, and p, .
,p, = 1.297 and p, = 0.359
g, = 15 kN/m L.F = 1.5 for dead and live loads
't.:
I
b) Loads 1
A" =[ 1.297 xl~~O x 600] = 2335 mm' I
Self weight Of beam = g,,= (0.25 x 0.55 x 25) = 3.44 kN/m
Dead load = g,= = 15.00kN/m
_[0.34XO.359X600]_64 '
A~- 100 - 6mm Live load = q = 20.00 kN/m
Finishes etc = 1.56 kN/m
The tension and compression reinforcements arc similar to that obtained Total service load ,,; 40.00 kN/m
'from method-I. Ultimate design load = w, = (1.5 x 40) = 60 kN/m

h) Shear reinforcements c) Ultimate Moments and Shear Forces

(V,jd) = (83/60) =' 1.38 kN/cm }d, = (0.125 x 60 x 7') = 367.5 kN.m
Refer Table-62 (SP: 16). Using 8 mm diameter two legged stirrups, spac- V, =(0.5x60x7)=210kN
ing is nearly 260 mm.
d) Limiting moment of resistance
c) The reinforcement details in the beam is shown in Fig. 8.3.
M"lim = 0.13810, b d' = (0.138 x 20 x 250x 500') 10-<> = 172.5 kN.m < M,
2) A rectangular beam of span 7m (centre to centre of suppons), 250mm
wide by 550 mm deep is to carry a uniformly distributed load (excl- Hence the beam is designed as doubly reinforced.
uding self weight) of 15 kN/m and a live load of 20 kN/m. Using
M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD'bars, design the beam section
at mid span. Check the adequacy of the section for shear and perform

l a check for deflection control.

 Reinforced Conc~eteDesign" Limit State Design ofBeams 233

'0) Tension and Compression Reinforcements ,g) Check for Deflection Control

(M, - M"lim) =,(367.5 -172.5) = 195 kN.m

, [0.0035~,.mu -d')]
f~ = xu, max
Es For p, =1.97 and p, =1.00
=
FromFig.7.2. K, 0.82
, =[0.0035{(OA8 x 500) ~50}] (2x 10') Fig. 7.3. K, = 1.24
J ~, (0.48 X500)
Fig. 704. K, = 1.00
= 554 N/mm'l> (0.87 x415) = 361 N/mm'
(~).u = (20 x 0.82 x 1.24 x 1.00) = 20.33
A = [(M,-M""m)] =[ 195 X10' ] = 1200 mm'
~ I~(d-d') 361x450
L) , =(7000)
( d proy,dcd 5000 = 14 < 20.33
Provide 4 bars of 20 mm diameter (A~ '= 1256 mm')
Hence, deflection control check is satisfactory
A =[A"f",,]=[1200X361]=1200nu'
'" 0.871, 0.87x415 n
h) The reinforcement details in the beam are shown in Fig. 8.4.
A==
,,' [
0.36J;k b (OA8d)]
0.871,
=[036X20X250,XOA8X500]_1
.
97
-lmm
0,87x415
'
>t 10~250 clc r#2 o t-250-t

.~. ASl == (A.II +A sr2 ) = (I 197 + 1200) = 2397mm2

I-- ~
t i500
I-'-- l-
Provide 4 bars of 28 mm diameter (A" =2464 mm') 550
!'fl'"

p,
= ( 10M,,) = (100 X2464) = 1.97
bd 250 x 500
q
,
1 ~
=(100A,,) =( lOOx 1256) = 1.00
~
,
, k
4#{8 l, 4#28

p, bd 250x500
o Shear reinforcements -+- Effective span' (7m) }

Fig. 8.4 Reinforcement Detalis In Doubly Reinforced Beam

< =( V,) =( 210x 10') = 1.68 N/mm'
, bd 250x500
8.5 DESIGN OF FLANGED BEAMS
For p, = 1.97. read out from Table-19(lS: 456). ~,= 0.79 N/mm'
8.5.1 Introduction
v" = [V, - «,.b .d)] = [210 - (0.79 x 250 x 500)10-'] = 111 kN '
Using 10 mm diameter two legged stirrups When a reinforced concrete slab is cast monqIithically with the beam as in
the case of beam supported floor slab system, the beams can be considered
=[0.87 IrA" d] =[0.87 x415x2x79 X500] = 256 mm as flanged beams with slab acting as an effective flange on the compres-
S, V 111xIO'
" ' sion side. It is important to note that continuous T or L beams act as
S, :j> (0.75d) = (0.75 x 500) '= 375 mm and S, :j> 300 mm flanged beams only between the supports where the bending moments are
negative (sagging) and the slabs are on the compression side of the beam,
Provide spac,~ng of stirrups;;;: 250 mm.
In the vicinity of ihesupports where the bending, moments are nega-
itive(hogging),the slab is on the tension side and hence the beam acts as a
1,-

P
 234 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Beams 235

I rectangular beam with the tension steel located in the slab portion of the stress distribution, which is not sUitable for computations.
I beam. Hence at the locations of negative moments, the beams have to be'
I' designed as singly or doubly reinforced rectangular beams b) Effective depth (d)

.8.5.2 Design Parameters The basic span/effective depth ratios specified for beams and slabs in
IS:456 code (Clause 23.2.1 or Table.7.1 of text) can as well be used for
Fig. 8.5 shows the salient design parameters of flanged beams using the flanged beams along with the modification or reduction factor K r (Refer
notations used in IS: 456 code. Fig. 7.4 of text). However for purposes ofdesign, the span/depth ratio of
the trial section may be assumed in the range of 12 to 20 depending upon
the span range and type ofloading as given in Table-8.1.

c) Width of web (b w)

The width of web generally depends upon the width of column on which
the beam is supported. The normal range of values being 150 mm to 400
mm.
Fig. 8.5 Parameters of Flanged Beams .1''----- bf --~f-
Assumed stressr""",~~~-"=<1z-r"""""I
a) Effective width of Flange (b r) distribution
._ >J
The effective width of flange should in no case be greater than the breadth
of the web plus half the sum of the clear distances to the adjacent beams on
either side.
i) For T-beams, br = [(L.,I6) + b w + 6 Del +---,-Effeclive width--t
ii) For L-beams, br= [(L.,I12) + bw + 3 Del Actual width
iii) For isolated beams, the effective flange width is computed as,
N

T-beam,

T-beam,
• • k~.\'ill

Where Fig. 8.6 Compressive Stress Distribution in Flange of Tee Beams

br = effective width of flange
La ::::: distance between points of zero moments d) Thickness of flange (Dr)
bw = breath of the web
Dr = thicknessof flange and The thickness of flange is governed by the thickness of slab which is con-
b=- actual width of flange' tiriuous over T-beams. The slab thickness is influenced by the spacings of
T-beams and the/type of loading.' and generaIly governed by the basic
The effective width of flange is the assumed equivalent width of slab
span/depth ratios specified in the IS: 456 code.The thickness of
with uniforIjl stress distribution shown in Fig. 8.6' to replace the actual
,'_ ,'. 'I,. .". . generally Varies from lOa to 200 mm. ".
, .
 Limit State Design ofBeams 237
,'236 Reinforced Concrete Design
150mm and with the area of main reinforcement of the slab(parallel to the
e) Minimum and Maximum Reinforcement in Flanged Beams
beam) .at its middle is 500 mm2/m, the transverse reinforcement re·quired
accordmg to the provisions of the IS:456 code will be equal to (0.6 x 500)
The minimum percentage of reinforcement to be provided in a flanged
=300 mm'/m. .
beam as per IS: 456 code clause 26.5.1.1 is to be computed using the width
of web and effective depth. The code recommendation gives the. minimum
8.5.5 Design ofT-beams Using SP: 16 Design Tables
reinforcement as

(b~~ }=(0J,S) The limiting moment capacity of a T-beam section (by failure of concrete
in c?mpression) can be computed by the design equations presented· in
sectIOn 6.3. The moment of resistance factor based on the IS: 456 code
Using Fe-415 grade HYSD bars, the minimum percentage works out to
pro~isions h~ve been tabnlated in SP: 16 usi?g the parameter [(M•. llm ) / (};,
about 0.2 percent. Also, the maximum percentage of tension reinforcement
b w d )J for different values of the ratios (blb w ) and (Did) in Tables-58 and I
in T-beams (based on web width) is limited to 4 percent.
59 of SP: 16 for the two different grades of steel Fe-415 and Fe.500
respectlvely.(Tahles 6.8 and 6.9 of text.)
I
8.5.3 Expressions for M" and A" for Preliminary Design
The amount of reinforcement required to re~ist the limiting moment·is

,~ .,'
The moment ofresistance of a T-beam section can be expressed by a sim-
ple equation by assuming the neutral axis to coincide with the bottom of
the flange and the lever arm length is (d - 0.5 Dr)' Accordingly we have
not given in these tables. However the tables are useful to e'stimate ·'die
m~ximum moment the T-beam can resist as singly reinforced beam~ with
fmlure ~f concrete in compression. In most cases of practical design
examples, the moment capacity of the T-beam will be considerably greaier
I
the relation,
than the applied moment and the steel requirement will be much lower
M, = 0.36};, br Dr (d - 0.5 Dr) than that requirell for the limiting moment. Hence the tables are useful
The area of flange width required for the neutral axis to be at the soffit of only to check the capacity of the concretesection. In cases where the nen-
the flange can be expressed as tral axis falls within the flange, the section can be treated as rectangular
beam and the percentage of reinforcement can be readily obtained from
bf = 2M"]
[0.36 h,D~2d or bf = [S.S6M. ] Tables-I to 4 of SP: 16 for different grades of concrete and steel.
- Dr) h,N2d - Dr)
This required width is compared with the effective width of T-beam to 8.5.6 Design Procedure for L-beams
ascertain whether the neutral axis will be within the flange or below the
flange. An approximate estimate of tension reinforcement required to resist !n the case of beam and slab floor systems, b~ams are spaced at regular
the factored mo~ent M u can be evaluated using the simj)le expression, mtervals. The interior beams which are cast monolithic _with slabs on both
sides of the rib behave as T-beams. The edge beams which are cast mono-
A" = [0.87 f, ;"- O.5DJ lithic with slabs on one side of the rib only are termed as L':'beams. Due to
eccentricity of the load coming ·on the flange as shown in Fig. 8.7. torsional
moments are induced in the I.-beams in addition to the bending moments
8.5.4 Transverse Reinforcement and shear forces.
Torsional and hogging bending moments are maximum in the vicinity
The' ~ompressionnange of a flanged beam should l?e adequately reinforced of the column supports where theL-beam is built into the column while the
for effective T-beam action. According to IS: 456 code clause 23.1.1, the sagging moments are maximum at the centre ofspan. The support section
,
transverse reinforcement in the slab should be not less than 60 percent of .i
of the L-beam is the most critical section which is- designed for combined
~~ ..... the main reinforcement at mid span of the slab and the reinforcement torsion, bending arid shear forces according to the IS: 456 code provisions.
should e.;ctend to a length of at least one fourth of the span of the slab on
either side of the beam.
For example, the transvers.e re~nforcement in a T-beam with Dr ::;:
238 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Beams 239

Adopt d= 700 mm, D = 750 mm and bw = 300 mm

c) Effective span

Centre line of ~.
/ The least value of
i) Centre to centre of bearings = (10 + 0.45) = 10.45 m
columns >./T)e"'.!.. . .Ii) Clear span + effective depth = (10 + 0.70) = 10.70 m

.1 11
. . Effective span = L = 10.45 m
Column . .
support
d) Loads
Torsional
moment
I j
Self weight of slab = (0.15 x 25 x 3) = 11.25 kN/m
. L-beam
and slab
=
Floor finish = (0.6 x 3 ) 1.80 kN/m
Bending Self weight of rib = (0.3 x 0.6 x 25)= 4.50 kN/m
moment Plaster finishes = 0.45 kN/m
Total dead load = g= 18.00 kN/m
Live load = q = (4 x 3) = 12.00 kN/m
Design Ultimate load = w, = 1.5 (18 + 12) = 45 kN/m
. Fig. 8.7 Moments and Forces at Support Section ofL-Deam
e) Ultimate Moments and Shear Forces
8.5.7 Design Examples
I) A T-beam slab floor of reinforced concrete has a slab ISO mm thick M, = (0.125 x 45 x 10.45') = 614 kN.m
spanning between the T-beams which are spaced 3 m apart. The V, = (0.5 x 45 x 10.45') = 235 kN
beams have a clear span of 10 m and the end bearings are 450 mm
thick walls. The live load on the floor is 4 kN/m'. Using M-20 grade t) Effective width of FI~nge (b r) -.t: __;"
:;-,-g
concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars, design one of the--intermediate
T-beams. br = [(Lj6) + bw + 6 Dr]
Method-l (using IS: 456 code equations) '= [(10.45/6) + 0.3 + (6 x 0.15)] = 2.94 m < 3.00 m
br = 2940 mm
a) Data:
g) Momeut capacity of Flange section ( M,r )
Clear span = 10 m f,k = 20 N/mm'
fy = 415 N/mm' M,p 0.36 f,. b r Dr (d - 0.42 Dr)
Bearing thickness ::; 450 mm
Working live load = q = 4 kN/m' Dr = ISO mm = [0.36 x 20 x 2940 x ISO) (700 - 0.42.>< ISO))
= (2022 X 106) N.mm
Spacing ofT-beams = 3 m
= 2022 kN.m
b) CrQss sectional Dimensions Sinyc M IJ < MIJr> XIJ < Dc
3 Hence the section is treated as.rectangular with b ::; be for designing rein-
. effecttve
. Assummg ' . depth = (span]
15 = ( .-1-5-.
10 X 10 ) = 666 mm forcements. . .
 Limit State Design of Bepms 241.
I'I~
11
':,"1,)';
(1:.)
,1
h) Tension.Reinforcements =.( 10450) = 14.92 < 32
I . 'i~

[ (A"f,)]
d provided 700 ),ir
,.j.;,

M, = (0.87 f, A" d) I - b d 10k Hence, check for deflection control is satisfactory. ;'::,,:
-~ ::"
(614 X10') = (0.87 x415 xA" x70o) [1-C940~~~~x20J] k) Details of reinforcements
Ilr
The reinforcement details in the T-beam are shown in Fig. 8.8.
Solving A" = 2492 mm'
Provide 2 bars of 32 mm diameter and 2 bars of 25 mm diameter
2#16~~­
Total A" = 2590 mm'.
-
#8- 250 cI c
. "j r-" ·~r"=±.=--i
i) Shear reinforcements
1-1-
W 100 I
I-- I--
t
•
=(2) =(235 x 10') = 1.l9N/mm'
bw d 300x700 15ot:'f--300-J...
-c( 100bwdA,,) -_('1OOX2590)_
P,- 300x700 -1.23
UJ Effective span 110·45 ill)
1 ')<-
2#32
2 #25
Refer Table-19 (IS: 456) a~d read out the value of t, = 0.67 N/mm'.
Fig. 8.8 Reinforcement De\ails 'in ·r~e'.Beam
"11 Balance Shear = V" = [V, - (t, bw d)]
r""l =[235 - (0.67 x 300 x 700)] 10-' = 95 kN Method-2 (Using SP: 16 Design Charts)
Using 8 mm diameter 2 legged stirrups. spacing is given by
a) Tension Reinforcement
0.87 x4t5 X2X50X700]
'.~ '-I S =[ =266mm
• 95x1O 3
. Since x, < D,. the section can be treated as rectangular and Tab1e-2 of
, Provide a spacing of 250 mm at support, and gradually increasing to 300 SP:16 can be used.
mm at centre of span.
M',J=( 2940 P,=O.l20=(1~0,dA"J
I
1
I (bid 614xlO' )=0.42
X700'
Also

1 j) Check for Deflection Control

0.120 X2940X700) _ 2470 '
y. .. Asl =( 100 - mm
1OOA,,) (1OOX2590)
'P,= (b;d = 2940x700 =0.126 b) Shear reinforcements
(bjb,) = (300/2940) = 0.102
Refer Fig. 7.3 and read out K, = 2.0
Fig. 7.3 and read out K,= 1.0
(;}(~~)= L35~/C';
'i
Fig. 7.4 and read out K, = 0.8 Using 8 10m diameter 2 legged stirrups and referring to Table-62 (SP: 16)
Spacing S, = 26 em = 260 10m.
'. (-dL) m"~ = (L)-d ba'ic
xK.xKcxKf The values of tension and shear reinforcements are almost the same as that
obtained by method- L
= (20 x 2.0 x 1.0 x 0.8)= 32
242 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design ofBeams 243

3) Design a L-beam for an office room floor to suit ihe following data. i) b, =[(LJI2) + b + 3 D,]
w
=[(6300112) + 300 + (3 x 100)] =1125 mm
aJ Data ii) b, = bw + 0.5 (spacing between the ribs)
=300 + (0.5 x 2450) = 1525 mm
Clear span = 6 m .. b,=1l25mm
Cenire to centie of supports = 6.3 m
The L-beams are monolithic with R.C. columns o Ultimate bending moment and shear forces
Spacing of beams = 2.75 m c/c
2
Loading (Office floor) = 4 kN/m At support section,
Thickness of slab = 100 mm M, =1.5 (w L2/12) =1.5 (14 x 6.3 2)/12 = 70 kN.m
Width of column:' 300 nun V, = 1.5 (0.5 wL) = 1.5 (0.5 x 14 x 6.3) =66 kN
Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
At centre of span section,
b) Cross sectional Dimensions M, = 1.5 (w L 2 /24) = 1.5 (14 x 6.3 2)/24 =35 kN.m
Since L.beam is subjected to flexure. torsion and shear forces, assume a . g) Torsional moments at support section
trial section having span/depth ratio of 12. '
6300)'
.. d= ( 12 =525mm

Hence adopt d =550 mm, D = 600 mm and bw =300 mm.

c) Effective span

Effective span is the least of

i) Centre to centre of supports = 6.3 m
ii) Clear span + effective depth =(6 + 0.55) =6.55 m/Hence, L =6.3 m "II

d) Loads

Dead load of slab = (0.1 x 25 x 0.5 x 2.75) = 3.43 kN/m

= =
Floor finish (0.6 x 0.5 x 2.75) 0.83 kN/m
= =
Self weight of rib (0.5 x 0.3 x 25) 3.75 kN/m T
= =
Live load (4 x 0.5 x 2.75) 5.50 kN/m
Plaster finishes etc = 0.49 kN/m
= =
Total working load w 14.00 kN/m

e) Effective Flange width

II .1--300+
Fig.8.9 L·Beam Loads !Supportsedion)
Effective flange width (b,) is the least of the following values;
 LiinirSlafbDeiign ojBeam~ ':'45
244, Reinjorced Concrete Design

h) Equivalent Bending moment and Shear force' Provide 8 mm diameter bars (4 numbers) two on each face as horizont~\
reinforcement Bpac~d 200 mm centres.
According to IS: 456-2000 code clause 41.4.2, at the support section, the
equivalent bending moment is computed as k) Shear Rcinforccment
=(M, + M,)
(v.)
Mol
:(173XIO') ,
Where =
0
[ 1 + (Dlb )] = 0 [ 1 + (600/30 )] = 35.3 kN/m < M T..." b.,d = 300 x 550 = 1.05 N/mm
Ml Tu 1.7 2 1.7' u

toOA,,) (100 x 628)

.. M., = (70 + 35.3) = 105.3 kN.m p, = ( bwd = 300x550 =0.38 j

Equivalent shear force (Clanse 41.3.1' ofIS:456) is computed as From Table-19 (IS: 456 Code) read out T. 0.42 N/mm' < Too = "1
i
V. = v, + 1.6(Tjb) = [66 + 1.6(20/0.3)] = 173 kN " Hence shear reinforcements "are required. Using 10 mm diameter two
legged stirrups with side covers of 25 mm and top and bottom covers of 50 II j
i) Main Longitudinal reinforcements mm. we have
b, =250 mm, d, =500 mm, A" =(2 x 78.5) = 157 mm'
i ,i
Support section is designed as rectaogullir 'section to resist the hogging The spacing S, is computed using the equations specified in clause 41.4.3
equivalent moment Mel 105.3 leN.m = of/So 456 code.
M,,"m = (0.138 10k b,d')= (0.138 X20 X300x 550')10"' = 250 kN.m

Since < M u,lim. the section is underreinforced and < xu,lim'

S _ {0.~7
,- -'
f,A"d,}
(~)
~ !A./J.87
or S,- ( ye _ )b
1,)
Mel Xu
b
l
+ '2..5 " 't t~

M., =0,87 f,A"d[ 1-( bA~1J]

In ~'"

..
, '( 415A" )
(to5.3x 10 )=(0.87X415 x A"x550) k (300 x 550 X20)
S _!157XO.87x4l.'i)_
Or , - (1.05 -0.42)300 - 300 mm
2
Solving ASI = 572 mm > ASI(min)
Provide 2 bars of 20mm diameter on the tension face (top) (A" = 628 ' 2#20 R1q~tab
mm2) Area of steel requii'ed at centre of span section to resist a moinent Mu .
# 10 - fOO clc
° -r i:"

'f
/ 1 l ,:

= 35 kN.m will be less than the minimum givenby ....- 1

l)
, = (0.85b,w d ) =(0.85 X300X550) = 338 mm' V
Asl(m,"l i'
J..y"
415

Provide 2 bars of 16 mm di~meter at the bottom face (A" = 402'mm').

" V V
1~
600 1:>4#8

1..--2#16

j) Side face reinforcement 2#16 'I~

R. C.column
\ f-- 3OO --..f.
Cross Section

According to clause 26.5.1.7 of IS: 456 code, side face reinforcement of longitudinal Section
0.1 percent ·of web area is to be provided for members subjected'to torsion. Fig. 8.10 Reinforcement Details in L-Bcam
when the depth exceeds 450 mm. ' /
Provide 10_mm diameter two legged stirrups at a minimum spacing given
. . Area of reinforcement = (0.1 X 300 x 600)/100 = 180 I1J.m' by theclallse 26.5.1.7 of/So 456 code.
 2L: J~:~<lr~~:i Concrete Design I Limit State Design olBeams 247

i i) >:;:S; <:t'+ 10); 280 mm =

.. depth; (span/7 ) (2500/7 ) 357 mm, =
!" ti) [:~ - " I "]; [(280 + 530)/4] = 202 mm = =
Adopt effective dept\! d 400 mm
ill' 3:( rr.:r. = =
Overall depth D 450 mm
A6.:p: mmmum spacing S. = 200 mm, = =
. Width b 300 mm
De~;>:; :t:ent\."'{'.:ement5 are shown in Fig. 8.10.
c) Loads
I) <:bed: roc IMIection Control
Self weight of beam = (0.3 x 0,45 x 25) = 3.375 kN/m
[=1-'<; JoJ p,;[(lOOAjb.d)]; [(100 x 402)/(300 x 550)] ;0,24 Live load = 20,000 kN/m
=
Finishes 0,625 kN/m
(bjb,) " (30011125) ; 0.266 = =
Total working load w 24.000 kN/m

Refer Fi< ~..2. K = 1.30 d) Ultimate moments and shear forces

F;~ -_'. K,; 1.07
Fl!:
-J. K, = 0.80
M,= L5[O.5wL'l =1.5[0.5 x24 x 2.5'1 =112.5 kN.m
( ~) ;(~)
Il\~~ basic
xK,xK,xK, V,; L5[w L); 1.5 [24 x 2,5] ;90kN

; (20xUOx 1.07 x 0.8) = 22.2

e) Main Reinforcements
L)
(d . ; (6300)
550 ; 11.45 <22,2
prOVIded M',Hm; (0.13810, b d')
Hence. t~ ~k for deflection control is satisfact9ry. = (0,138 x 20 x 300 x 4ll0')ro-<

8.6 DESIG'i Of CANTILEVER BEAMS = 132kN.m

+-(:;2.)]
Since M u < Mu,liml the section is under reinforced.
Design I'.. '::~G:rik'\"er beam to suit the following data:
.. M,; 0,87 !,;I"
a) DalE

CleM~.m = 2.5 rn ; (0,87 x415 A"X400)[ I ~(300:1::~'X20)]

W"rl,iT'-!, Ii"" load = 20 kN/m
Canril:'),~r beam is monolithic with R.C. column 300 mm wide and Solving A" = 928 mm'
450mm&~ Provide 3 bars of20 mm diameter (A" = 942 mm') on the tension face (top)
,1';, = ~i' "'mm' and I, = 415 N/mm' and 2 bars of 10 mm diameter as hanger bars on the compressio~ face.

t) Shear Reinforcements
·b) Cros;; "",tional dimensions

For canit"""r beams, the trial scction is based on Ihe (span/depth) ratio t
•
=(V,)=(
bd
90XIO').;0,75N/mm'
300x40q
of7, . .

p,
=( tOOA,,)
bd
=( 300
100 x 942) ; 0,785
x 400
 Reinforced Co;'~fete D~sign Limit StateDe;ign ofBeams 249

Refer Table-19 (IS: 456) and read out ~,= 0.56 N/mm' <~,
Hence, sh~ar reinforceJ!lents are required. (dL) provIded
,
(2500) .
,'= 400 =6.25<7.175

Balance shear ~ Vus ~ [Vu - t c b d] ~ [90 - (0.56 x 300 x 400)]10- ~ 23 kN

3
Hence, the deflection criteria is satisfied.
Using 8 mm diameter 2 legged stirrups, the spacing S, of the stirrups is
i) The'reinforcement details in the cantilever beam are shown in Fig. 8.11.
given by
, ,_[0.87 f,A" d] ~[0.87X41SX2xSO X4oo] ~ 631mm 8.7 DESIGN OF CONTINUOUS BEAMS
S,~ , V '23xlO'
"
But S, :1-' (0.75 d) = (0;75-X 400) = 300 mm 8.7.1 Bbnding moment and Shear Force Coefficients
Adopt 8mm diameter 2 legged stirrups at 300 mm centres.
In the case of muitistoried reinforced concrete framed structures, the floor
slabs are cast monolithic with secondary and main beams continuous over
g) Anchorage length at snpports
several spans supported on columns at regular interv~ls. The continuous
beams framing into the columns are designed for maximum bending
Anchorage length required is given by
moments and shear forces developed due to dead and superimposed loads.
L_(0.871,$)
,- 4t",
~(0.87X41S X20) ~ 940mm
4xl.2xl.6
Rigorous analysis of moments and shear forces in continuous beams is
generally made by using the classical methods such as moment distribution
The main tension bars are extended into the column to alength of 400'mm method, Kani's rotation contribution method, stiffness or flexibility matrix
and bent at 90' and extended up to 500 mm as shown in Fig..8.11. , methods which involve Ien:;thy computations. However the IS: 456-2000
;i code permits the use of moment and shear force coefficients shown in
• " Tables 8.2 and 8.3 of the text (Tables IZand 13 of IS: 456 code) for com-
t-4~f 3/20 r- 3#2 300{ puting the design bending moments and shear forces- in continuous beams
t supporting substantially uniformly distributed loads over three or more

t
500 I-- ~ --I /
k
' -
450
t=.J.I
spans which do not differ by more than 15 percent of th'e longest span.
However redistribution of moments are not permitted when using these
coefficients.
t- f-450~ 11 8-300 C/C
2#10 #8-30c/e
8.7.2 Effective Span

• ~COlumn According to IS: 456-2000 code clause 22.2, for a continuous beam having
Fig. 8.11 ReJnforcemeht Details In Cantll~ver Beam a support width less than 1/12 clear span, the effective span shall be as per
freely supported beams, I.e. clear span plus the effective depth or centre to
centre of supports whichever is less. If the supports are wider than 1/12 the
h) Check for Deflection Control cl~ar span or 600 mm whichever is less, th'1 effective span is computed
usmg the following specifications.
Po = 0.785, From Figs. 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4 read out the mqdification fac,
a) For end span with one end fixed and the other. continuous or for inter-
tors

1 K, = 1.025. K,= 1.0 and K, = 1.0 mediate spans. the effective span shall be the clear span between the
supports. . i

I
'I
(i:.)
d mu
~(i:.), xK,xK,XKr~(7XI.02SXI.OxI.O)~7.71S
d baSIC
b) For end span with one end free and the other end continuous. the
effective span shall be equal to the dear span plus half the effecti,,"
I.
1"
,"
~.,'
I:
 250 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design ofBeams 251

I
I
Table 8.2 Bending Moment Coefficients
(Clause 22.5.1 oflS:456.2000j
span/deplh ratio of 26, results in shallow deplhs requiring high percentages
of tensile and compressive reinforcements tending towards over reinforced
Span Moments Support Moments sections. The span/depth ratios are modified using the modification faclors
Type of Load Near middle of At middle of At support next .At other Interior explained in section 7.3.3.
end span Interior span to end support supports
Dead load and I 1 . I I
Imposed load (fixed) +12 +16 -ill -i2 8.7.4 Design Example
l. • .i
Imposed load (not . 1 1
. +- 1 I
fixed) +10 12 -9 -9 .1) Design a continuous reinforced concret~ beam of rectangular section
Note:· For obtaining the bendi.ng moment, the cOefficient shall be multiplied by the total to support a dead load of 10 kN/m arid live load of 12 kN/m over 3
design load and effective span - .
spans of 6 m.each. The ends ate simply supported. Adopt M-20 grade
concrete and Fe·415 HYSD bars. Sketch the details of reinforcements
Table 8.3 Shear Force Coefficients in the beam.
Type of Load At End At support next to the end sup- At all other\ a) Data
Support .
port interior
Outer side Inner Side supports
,Dead loadand ~/_O.4 0.6 0.55 . 0.5 Effective span = 6 m fok = 20 N/mm'
imposed load - Dead load = 10 kN.m J, = 415 N/mm'
(fixed) Live load= 12 kN/m
.
imposed load (not 0.45 0.6 0.6 0.6 Concrete: M·20 Grade
fixed) / Steel: Fe-415 HYSD bars
Note:- For obtaining the shear force, the coefficient shall be multlpl.ied by t~e total desIgn
load b) Cross sectional Dimensions

,depth of beam.or the clear span plus half the width of the disconlinu- As the continuous beam supporls heavy loads, span/depth rallo is
assumed as 10
ous support whichever is less.
c) In the case·of spans with roller and rocker bearings, lhe effective span = =( i:n) =( ~) ='600 mm
:. Effective,depth d
. shall always be Ihe distance between the centers of bearings.
d) In the case of continuous monolithic frames, the effective span of :. Adopt d = 600mm
continuous beams are taken as the centre line distance between the D = 650mm
members b = 300mm
Cover to tension steel == 50 mm
8.7.3 SpanlDepth Ratio
c) Loads
The span to effective dc;pth ratios has an important influence on the
deflection characteristics of the beams. Th~_ vertical deflection limit of
Self weight of beam = (0.3 x 0.65 x 25) = 4.875 kN/m
span/250 specified in "IS: 456 code (Clause 23.2) may generally be
Dead load = 10.000 kN/m
assumed 10 be slliisfied if the basic span/deplh ratio of continuous mem-
Finishes =0.125 kN/m
bers are not gteater than 29' Fat spans greater lhan 10 m, this vMue is
Total Dead load = g = 15.000 kN/m
multiplied by the rallo of IO/span in metres.. .
Live load = q = J4. kN/m
. In general, "onti~uqus beams. carry heavy ,dea4.~n~, sup,rimposed
loads and consequently the.spailldeplh ..ratios· recommended. in·. practical
designs are normally between 10 to·. 15. The use of upper· limit of
 ·Rein!orcedConcreteDesign Limit State Design of B.eams 253

d). Bending Moments .and Shear Forces V" = [145.8.- (OA9x 300x600)W)= 57.6 kN

Using 8 mm diameter 2 legged stirrups, the spacing near supports is

Referring to the bending moment and shear force coefficients (Tables,8.2
and 8.3) 0.87 f,A,,d] [0.87X415X2X50 X600]
Sy= [ = 3 : : = 376 mm
Negative B.M at interior support is computed as, Vus 57.6x 10

M, (-vo) = 15 [ L' L']

L+L
. 10 9
= 1.5 [15X6'
- +12X6']
-10 -9 - = 153kN.m Adopt 8 mm diameter 2 legged stirrups at 300 mm centres throughout the
beam.

., Positive B.M at centre of span is computed as,

. . [L' L']
M(+Ve)=15 L+L =1.5 [15X6'
- - +12X6']
- - =132.3kN.m
h) Check for Deflection Control
I'
, . 12 10 . 12· 10 p, = 0.54.· From Fig. 7.2, read out the modification factor K, = 1.2 ,I
Maximum Shear force at the support section is given by Neglecting hanger bars, K, =1.0 and K, =1.0
V" = 0.6 L (g + q) 1.5 = (0.6 x 6) (15 + 12) 1.5 = 145.8 kN
(J) =(J).
"'"
',"", e) Limiting Moment of Resistance
M,.lim = (0.138];, b d') = (0.138 x 20 x 300 X 600') 10-'6 = 298 kN.m
m.~

~
l>."c
xK,xK,xK,

(26 x 1.2 x 1.0 x 1.0) = 31 I

Since M u < M U,lm'
'" the section is under reinforced. (d-L) =.(6000)
-
aClual600
=10<31

l) Main Reinforcements i) The rej.nforc~ment details in the continuous beam are shown in Fig
8.12. !
M,= (0.8?f,A" d) [1-(bd1J] # 8-300 c/c
2 #25
415A" )~
(153 x 10 ) = (0.87 x 415 A" x 600) [ I - ( 300 x 600 x 20 'J
6

Solving A" = 780 mm'

Using 2 bars of 25 mm diameter on the tension side (A" = 982 mm') at
supports. For positive bending moment the area of steel required is 675
mm2. Hence provide 2 bars of 22 mm diameter on the tension face at mid
2~25
span.
g) Shear Reinforcements T
650

<,
=( V,) =( 145.8
bd
x 10') = 0.81 N/mm'
300 x 600
1
.J.-300-P +-360-+22
_ ( 100
p, - bd
A,,) = ( 300
100 x 982) = 0.54
x 600
Section~YY S,"clion-XX

Refer.Table-19 (IS: 45§) and read put theyermissib1e shear stress in cOo-, Fig.8.12 Rcinrorcement Details in Continuous Beam
c~·e(e. as 'tc ;;:: 0.49 ·N/Il1:m2 • Since :tv > 'tel' shear reinforcements are to be"-
designed to resist thebaHmce shear c'ornputed as
254 Reinforced Concreie Design Limit State Design of Beams 255

8.8 EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE 6) Design a L,beam for an office floor usin.g the following data:-
Clear span = S m
. . ly reinforced concrete beam to suit the following data. Thickness of flange ,= 150 mm
I) DesIgn a smg
Clear span = 4 m =
Spacings of beams 3 m centres ~ ....
=
Width of supports 300 mm brick walls =
Live load 4 kN/m' '
Service live load 5kN/m = Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. The L-beams are
Materials: M-20 grade concrete monolithic with columns 300 mm wide. Design the beam and sketch ,
Fe-415 HYSD bars the details of steel reinforcements in the beam.
,
l'
. f d concrete beam is to be designed ov~t an effective span of 7) Design a cantilever beam to suit the following data. I
2) A rem orce . I d f S kNl Adopt M 20 I
5 m to su port a design service live oa o.
p
m.
d Fe 415 HYSD bars and desIgn the beam to sallsfy
.- =
Clear span 1.75 m
I
I

grade concrete~ aIJ... - - -. . . Service load live load = IS kN/m I

the limit states of collapse and Serviceablhty. , Cantilever beam is monolithic _with r~inforced concrete column 250 I
I·
• . • I: rced concrete b'eam of rectangular section using the mm wide by400mm deep. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 I
3) DeSIgn a rem,a , I
HYSD bars. ' , I
following data:- I
Effective span= 5 m .8) A canopy of the entrance of a b.'lilding comprises of cantilever beams I
=
Width of beam 250 mm supporting a\ -reinforced -concrete slab. --The cantilever "beams ·are I
I
Overall depth = 500 m m , . spaced at 3 n\ intervals and have a span of 3 m. The thickness of the lb .•'.
=
Service dead and live loads including self weIght 40 kN/m , ,slab is 120 mm.The live load on the slab may be assumed as 1.5
I
I
=
Effective cover 50 mm . kN/m 2, Using M-25 grade concrete and Fe-500 grade reinforcements,
Materials: M-20 grade concrete
Fe-415 HYSD bars . .
design a typical"ca~tilever beam and sketch the details of steel rein-
forcements in the beam.
I,· "
k it
Check the b,eam for deflection control and sketch the detalls of rem-
forcements.
' or of an office comprises of a slab 150 mm thick
I b flo a ,
.f-,) Alee b eam s .
. b t eenribs spaced 3 m centres. The effechve span 0 tIe
f I
9) Design a reinfo;ce,d concrete continuous beam of rectangular section ,.
to support a dead load of S kN/m and service live load of 15 kN/ni
over· 4. spans of ~ 'm each. Assume the ends as simply supported;
I
I
Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. Sketch the details
eamlS·
= 2
sbPanm.ngs me wServl'ce liveload on floor 4 kN/m .Using M-20 grade of reinforcements in the continuous beam. "
YSD'bars design one' of th e 'mtermed'late tee

5)
concrete an d F e· 415 H .
beams and sketch the details of reinforcements.
The floor 'of a school building ismade up of tee beams and slab wllh
.
10) A three span continuous beam is to be designed to support an imposed
dead load 15 kN/m and a service live load of 15 kN/m. The three
spans are S m each. Adopt suitable load factors as specified in IS: _
r··
I
I
the following data:- . ' 456-2000 and design the beam, using M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415
.Clear span of tee beam 7 m = HYSD bars.
bistance between c/c of supports = 7.45 m
Spacings of tee beams = 2.75 m c/c
Width 'of rib = 250 mm
Thickness of slab 100 mm= 2
. Service live load on floor;:: 4 kN/m
=
Floor finish 0.6 kN/m
2
,!
Materials: M-20 grade concrete
Fe-415 HYSD bars "
Design an intermed\at.~:, ~~e b.~~~ .and s~etc~. t.~~ detmls of remforce~
ments.
 Limit State Design ofSlabs 257

resisted by concrete a Ione WIt' hout any extra. reJnforcements~. The

CHAPTER 9
Limit State Design of Slabs
9.1 INTRODUCTION
The most common type of structural element used to cover floors and roofs
of buildings are reinforced concrete' slabs of different types. One-way slabs
are those supported on the two opposite sides so that the loads are carried
along one direction only. A common example of one way slab is the
verandah slab spanning in the shorter direction with main reinforcements
and distribution reinforcements in the transverse direction.
Two- way slabs are supported on all the. four sides with such dimen
w
sions such that the lo~ds are carried to the supports along both directions.
Two-way slabs are common in the floors of multistorey buildings.
Cahtilevered slabs are generaIly used for ehajjas over windows & in bal-
conies 'projecting from 'the buildings. In Tee beam-slab floors, the slab is
continuous over tee beams and designed as a con~inuous slab with positive
moments at mid span and negative moments over supports. .
shear. '.
shea~ enhancement factor (k) specified in clause 40,2.1.I of IS: 456 cdde
varymg from 1 to 1.3 depending upon the thickness of slab will consider-
ably Increase the permissible shear stress in slabs when multiplied with the
values of shear stress given in Table-19 oflS: 456- 2000.
In slabs, shear reinforcements may be allowed if the thickness is 200
mm'or more b ut'III no.. case the maximum shear stress in slabs due to ulti-
mate load exceed one half ofthat given in Table-20 of IS: 456-2000.
. In the case of slabs the depth selected is usually greater thanlhe
mlllImun:t depth for the balanced section and hence the steel required may
be calculated by the formula given in IS: 456 or by use of SP-16charts and
Tables
, : . The deslgne
. I b Should be checked for shear stress and deflec-
d sa·
tIOn control.
9.2.2 Design Example
i
De' .
i sIgn. a SImply supported R.C.C. slab for an oftice floor having clear
d menslOns of 4m by 10 m with 230 ",ails all,rounc, Adopt M - 20 grade
!
concrete & Fe-4l5 grade HYSD bars.

a) Data I
Flat slabs are generaIly ,multispan slabs, which are direc,tIy supported Clear span = 4 m
mH-' I
on columns at regular intervals without beams. In the'-case o(basemenis Wall thickness= 230 mm
where headroom available is limited, flat slabs ,can. be conveniently Live load = 4 kN/m'
adopted. Flat slabs are commonly used for garages where limited head, Floor finish = 0.6 kN/m'
room is available. =
hk 20 N/mm'
f, = 415 N/mm'
'.
9.2 DESIGN OF ONE·WAY SLABS
j: b) Thickness of Slab
9.2.1 Desigp Principles
Assume effective depth = d = (span)
25 = (4000)_
25 -160"""'-
Reinforctd concrete slabs. supported on two opposite sides with their
longer dimension exceeding two times the shorter dime!1~ion are referred' Adopting
. a clear cover 0 f 20 mm an dusmg
' ..
10 n:z:l Cllameter bars the total
depth IS computed as D = 185 mm.
to as one-way slabs.
One way reinforced concrete slabs supporting floor or roof loads are
generally designed as beams of unit width. For a given type of support e) Effective span
condition, the span/depth ratio applicable for beams in IS: 456 is also valid
for slabs. Since the percentage of reinforcements in slabs is generalIy low The Icast of
in the range of 0.3 to 0.5 per cent, a span/depth ratio of 25 to 30 is more i) (Clear span + Effective depth) = (4 + 0.16) = -":-5 ill
appropriate by considering the modification factor K, (1.2 to 1.4 for Fe"4l5 II) (centre to centre of supports) = (4 + 0.23) = ~ ~ -co
steel) NormaIly the thickriess of slabs is so chosen tllat the shear can be
" L=4.J6m
 Limit State Design of Slabs 259

d) Loads _(100A.,,) _ (100 x531 x 0.5) _

P,- ~ - 1000x160 -0.166
Self weight of slab = (0.185 x 25) = 4.625 leN/m'
Permissible shear stress in slab (Refer Table-19 of IS, 456) is computed as
Finishes = 1.500
Live load = 4.000 k" = (1.23 x 0.293) '" 0.36 N/mm' >',
Total seivice load'" 10.125 leN/m'
... Ultimate load = 1.5 (19.J.25) = 15J91eN/m' Hence the slab is safe.in shear.

e). Ultimate Moments and Shear Forces j) Check for delleclion conlrol

x
M, = (O.l25w,.L') = (0.125 15.19 X4.16') = 32.86 kN.m
(J) .=(J) xK,xK,xK,
mu b3.lfc .
V; = (O.5w,.L) = (0.5 x 15.19 x4.16) = 31.60 leN
Refer Fig. 7.2, K. =.1.4 for P:= [(100 x 531)i(1000 x 160)] = 0.33 percent.
; 0 Limiting Moment of Resistance . =
Fig. 7.3, K, 1.0 . .
Fig. 7.4, K,. = 1.0
M,.tim = 0.1381., b.d' = (0.138 x 20 x 10' X 160') 10-" = 70.65 leN.m
Since Mu< Mu,iim. se'dian is under reinforced
g) Tension Reinfor.cements
(Jl~ =(20xI.4x1x1)=29

.( A,I, )]
.( L)
d = (4160)
160 =26<29.
M, = (0.87 A"f,ti) [ 1- b ti I.k FrovJded .

Hence. the deflection cnterion is satisfied.

415
(32.86 X 10') = (0.87 x 415A" x 160)[1-( 3
10 x160x20
A" )] . k) Design using SP: 16 Charts
Solving, A" = 531 3IJll' > Aimin) = 216 mm'
Using 10 mm diameter bars, the spacing of the bars is computed as Referring to Chart-p ofSP: 16, for d= 160 mm and M, = 32.86 leN.m
l
.~

S =(1000o,,) =( 1000 X 78.5) = 1~7 mm p, = 0.3625 and A" = 580 mm'·

A" 531 Spacing of 10 mmdiameterbars is [(1000 a,,)fA,,] =J(1000 x 78.5)/580] =
Adopt a spacing of 140 mm. Alternate bars are bent up at supports. 135mm
Which is almost the same as that of analytical computations.
h) Distribution BarS
A" = 0.12 percent = (0.0012 x 1000 x 185) = 220 mm' I) The reinforcementdetails in the slab are shown in Pig. 9.1.
Provide 8 mm diameter bars at 230 mm centres (Ast = 217 mm').
9.3 DESIGN OF TWO WAY SLABS
i) Check for Shear slress
9.3.1 General Fealnres

'.
=(~)
bd
=( 31.6x 10') ~0.198 N/mm'
1000 x 160 , Reinforced co))crete slabs supported 'on'all the four sides ,;"ith theirl;l'f'ec-
bve span in the longer direction not.excee(1ing.twQ ti I11es the effective span
in. the shorter directi9n are ,design~d. ~s i .\!"o-wayslabs.Two,way. slabs
I
I
l
262 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design ofSlabs 263

Where Mr. and My are the design moments in the x and y directions:
w = uniformly distributed load on slab.
L, and L, are the short and long span dimensions of the simply supported
•
°fl
...
0
!i:o.E
i
I1l- CIll .--.

8 t?'~~
~-
O
~~,
qq
00
{:;re
qq "''''
00
"''''
qq
00
~~
00
do
I
"
"''"0 0
0 "'" do 8"
<0 "'
0
' -
~

"'d

~]j~~-
~

slab. "
,£ a:i '0 .Q_ :ro
The values of' coefficients ax and uy are compiled in Table-9.l. •.,.~ ~

~~- "'''' "'"' ~O> 0>'"

'"'"6
c ... -l!?
(Table-270flS: 456) (\j~o "'"'
00 "'"'
E dd dd dd dd 00
"''''
00 0>
00 '" 00 I

. These coeffiCients ate "due to Rankine-Groshoff-theorl8 in which the ~ d

slab is divid~d into a series of ortho'gonal beam strips and the load is £ lQ g~. ;1;~ "'0> OIffi "' 0>
0 0 0 0 . "''' r~
apportioned to the short and long strips such that there is compatibility of
deflection at the junction of strips. .
'~

~• - qq
00
00
do
"'"'
cio dd do
0",
00
0

"'~ [;;:1' "'~ "'''' "'''

"''' qq "'"'
0 0 ' qq "'"'
'"
'"
,.."=0 ~ dd 0 0 0 0 d d' 00
00 00 I 0
0
Table 9.1 Bending Moment Coefficients for Slabs spanning in two directlons at right
• "' ~ "'''
angles, simply supported on four sides (Table-27 of IS: 456·2000)
~
0
... ~O>

"'''' "''' "'''' ~'"

"'"' "'''
0>" 0>
'"0
~0. i'0 '"
00 00
dd cid cid dci 00
00 00 00 I 0

lel 1.0 ':1 1.2 1.3 I.' 1.5 1.75 2.0 2.5 3.0 ~
'"=
i
I
10
J!l
"'"= :3 "''''
"'" 0 0 ~3 "'''
... 0>
qq "''''
"'0>
"''''
qq "'''
00 I 0 '"
U1

0.074 0.084 0.093 0..099 0.104 0.1013 0.118 0.122 0.124 "~ C ~ c ';ij 0 0 do dd 0 0 do 0
a. 0.062 011 '1.
"
'0 >
u;
a, 0,062 0.06'" 0.059 0.055 0.051 0.046 0.037 0.029 0.020 0.014
. . u-cafa IE"0
In

~
"'OJ "'''' "'0> 0 " '
0 0 "'"
"'" 0 0 "'''
0 0 "'''' qq
"'0
U1"
00 I 0
i;~ () dci od dd 0 0 do 0
Clause D.2.1.1 of the IS: 456 codes specifies that at least 50 percent of the • :0•
II '(:1 Pl 0>'"
'I
tension reinforcement,provided at mid span should extend to the supports. ~ e 8~ 00 U "'0
"'''
0 0 "'"
dd do
00 I 0

The remaining 50 percent should extend to within 0.1 L, or 0.1 L, of the "
,£
'" do 9 d dci
U1U1
0

support, as appropriate. . tJ "''' "'''' "'''' "'"'

0 0 "'"
0 0 "'"
"'
~
0
"'''' 0 0 "''''
0 0 "'''' 00 I ~ '"
'0 '" dd do do dd od 0

9.3.3 Two Way Restrained Slabs with Corne,'s Held Down IS

Xr Xr Xr Xr Xr Xr
Restrained slabs are referred to as slabs whose corners are prevented from
<3
.e '01"
~~
Q5 '00
'0

'"
"0>
lifting. They may be supported on continuous or discontinuous edges. All
the four edges of the two-way slab are assumed to be supported rigidly
against vertical translation. The gesign moments in restrained slabs are
..
0
:;:
:a
",0
C C
o. U
-J!l
o c
"
0>",
~~ E
1il 5
t
~g "0 t" 0
= o>c M~ o ,S
'0
'"
"0>", '"~~
" '"= '0= ~g
= o>c
III• "" ~:§ oc',;;;;
o.E '0',;;;; .c - C .-
easily evaluated using the moment coefficients recommended in IS:
~~ .g~ '"
Qj '" c
c " c '" c .2 C
0;8 08 o 8 o §
456-2000 code and as shown in Table-9.2 (Table-26 of IS: 456 code). "l " 8 c '"
$~ ·c '"
These moment coefficients are based on inelastic analysis or yield line '"• .so. 0'5 0:0 ~~ ~~ ~'5
...:g
0
theory69,70.71 with the following assumptions: Z
'" '" " "' '"
1) The reinforcement for positive- moment is uniformly distributed over
the middle strip extending over 75 percent of the span.
2) Edge strips cover a width equal to (L,I8) Or (L,I8) as shown in Fig. 9.4.
3} Minimum reinforcements prescribed for slabs should be provided in
edge strips.
 Limit State Design ofSlabs 261
260 Reinforced Concrete Design
# 8-230 clc
j
bC!1ding moments are maximum at the centre of the slab and tlie larger

I monient invariably develops along the short span. "

The bending moment in the slab depend upon the following parame.
ters.
i) The short and long span (L. and L y )
ii)' Edge conditions at the support (Fixed, free, continuous etc)
,
.1 Section XX
iii) Magnitude and type of load on the slab (Uniformly distributed, can·
centrated etc).
The reinforcements are generally placed along the transverse and lon~
t230i~'- - - - - , 4 0 0 0 - - - - - + 1 '230-+
gitudinal directions of the slab.

I 420 t- o :
~' (C·IL) f# 10-140 clc I 9,3,2 Simply Supported Slabs
~
I I When a slab simply supported on all the four sides is subjected to trans·
: / I verse loads. the bel1ding of the slab in the two principal directjons causes
I 1>1-20
: Fe-415
I 185mm
- -;7'#

•
8-230 clc I
I
I
:
the corners to curl and lift up as shown in Fig. 9..3. due to non-uniform
variation of load transmitted to the supports, Sjmply supported slabs which
do not have adequate provision to resist torsion at corners and to prevent
the corners from lifting, the maximum moments per unit width are speci-
Fig. 9.1 Details of Reinforcement hI One Way Slab fied in the IS: 456·2000 code and computed by the following equations,
Mx~axwL;
rT
Deflection
tt:=========t My=: uy wL;
,I diagram Corners will lift up
unless restrained

J
/.
I
<4-

--
r r 1 -- ___::-c_==-= -

! ! ! - Lx

.~~,l
Corner reinforcement
in slabs held down to
resist torsion

~ Ly Bending\moment
~dlo9rom
r I Crocking in
corners held down

Supports
Fig. 9~2 Two Way Slab Action With Moment & DeOection Diagrams
Fig. 9.3 Torsion Effects In Two Way Slab
deform with significant curvatures in two orthogoJ¥.ll directions with
moments developed in the principal directions'as shown
in Fig. 9.2; The
 '-,','

ijr;~4 Concrete Design Limit State Design ofStabs. 265

>:,t'.?---:,,~,_
.... 0 0
4) Torsion r~inforcement is provided at comers where the slab is simplY'
....
_~2-c en.-.
d~~J
'<t
I 0 '" ;g :g
0"' '" 0
supported on both edges meeting .at that corner. The reinforcement
c en (ij J
o 0 0 0 0 comprising three quarters',of the area required for the maximum mid
.:E 11I OJ>- span moment in the slab is provided in each of the four layers in the
o:i '0.Q m
.... form of a mesh extending to a minimum distance of one-fifth of the
<:> ... @' ....0 ....'" <D
0> 0

0'"
~o <:> I <:> sllorter span. As shown in Fig. 9.4, full torsional steel is provided at
'" ~ 0 <:> 0
corner A where the slab is discontinuous on both edges meeting at that
i(?
~

'"0 r- 0
~ corner. At comer B where the slab is discontinuous on only one edge
-
<0 0
0 "'
'" I 0
meeting at that corner, 50 percent of full torsional steel is provided. At
0 0 0 0
'"5 comer C, as the slab is continuous on both edges meeting at the cor~
~
<b ;1;
0 0
0 0
I
<D
....
0
0
0>
<0
0
0
"C" ner, torsional steel is not required (Refer Fig. 9.4a).
8
on ~ If-'----Ly
gill ;::
C J
:J- ~ 00 I 0
<0
0 "
,~

r
'0 0
.. .,'" dd 0 .~
0. !;
~
I 0
~0 J'l.,c
0>
~'<K1 ~
~
Ie it;
0 0
<D
I 0 "' r-
0
"t_',

~
ro 0 0 0 0 ii'
;g.,
> ,;
on }-

on 0~ ","" ~~ocy
~ ;:: 0>
"''"0
':)
0
0 ;':! 0 I 0
~- Lx
:is 0 0 0 0 ,c
0
,..• <D 'g Moment
I

:3 0~

1
°
;1; on
..: I
"'
<:>
0
0
0
0
u

"~
C
coefficient

.... <D
( striP
Ed~e).
:3 on '" '<t '<t
I 0 '" on
0 I 0'125Lx
~
0 0
0 0 0 0 --,f-
."
X >- X >- X
">
.~
-1; ,f 0.75 Ly - L-L
"0
., '125Lx (Middle stri~125i'.x
"""
"0 ~
c (Edge strip)
~ (Edge strip)
'"c
Q;
)2
x
'"c Fig. 9.4 Middle & Edge Strips in Two Way Slabs
'" 8c
0.
0., J'l
'"., '" "0'"., '"0 .,'" '"0
~ ~
., 0
0>
~
~ ,
0.
>-'" E
0
E .,., ·E ., c ."0., °E
0> ~
"0 C ~ 0> C
V
~ 8 ~ "
c 0
0 ~ 0
.c .." .c g 0 B
>- "0 >- "0 LL '0 '" C
.
ci
z .... <0 0>
i
1- I

D A

Fig. 9.4a Provison of Torsional Steel in Slabs

 266 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design ofSlabs 267

9.3.4 SpanlDepth Ratio Adopt effective depth = d = 145 mm

Overall depth =; D = 170 mm '.
In the case of two-way slabs, the magnitude of moments will be smaller c) Effective span
than one-way slabs since the load is distributed in two principal directions.
COhsequently the percentage reinforcement being- s~all, the modification Effective span = (Clear span + effective depth)
factor for tension 'steel K, is higher resulting in higher values of maximum' = (4 + 0.145)
permissible span/depth ratios. Hence the following span/overall depth = 4.145 m
ratios have heen recommended in IS: 456 code clause 24.1 for two way
slahs with shorter spans uP'lo 3.5 m, using Fe"425 HYSD bars. d) Loads
Ii)' Simply supported slabs = 28
b) Continuous slabs = 32 Self weight of slab = (0.17 x 25) = 4.25 kN/m'
Live load on slab = 4.00
9.3.5 Deflection and Crack control Floor finish = 0;60
Total working load = w = 8.85 leN/m'
The deflection of two-way slabs is controlled by spim/depth ratio similar to .. Design ultimate load =w. = (L5 x 8.85) = 13.275 kN/m'
the case of one-way slabs and beams. In tw~ Way slabs 'the shorter span aul
the percentage of steel in that direction have to be considered for compu- c) Ultimate Design Moments and Shear Forces
tations of modification factors.
Crack control in two way slabs may be assumed to be satisfactory if the Refer Table-9.2 and read out the moment coefficients for (L/L,) = L25
J":
empirical rules for detailing of reinforceme~tsoutlined in section 7.5.3 arc a, = 0.076 and a, = 0.056
l

followed. M., = (a, w. L;) =(0.076 x 13.275 x 4.1452) = 17.37 leN.m

9,3.6 Design Example M., ;' (a, w. Li) = (0.056 x 13.275 x4.1452) = 12.80 leN.m
V., =(0.5 w. L,) =(0.5 x.13.275 x 4.145) =27.6 kN
Design a two way slab for a room of size 4m by Sm with discontinuous and
l) Check for Depth·
simply supported edges on all the sides with corners prevented from lifting
to support a live load of 4 kN/m' Adopt M-20 grade concrete & Fe-415 M mu = 0.138 fo. b a'
HYSD bars.
17.37 x 10'
a= 0.138x20x 10
) -79.33 mm < 145 mm
a) Data
Hence, the effective depth selected is sufficient to resist the design ultimate
L,= 4 m(L/L,) =L25 moment
L, =5 m
10k = 20 N/mm' (A")m;, =(0.0012 x 1000 x 170) =204 mm'
f, = 415 N/mm' g) Reinforcements (Short and Long span)

[ A,,J,]
Two way slab simply supporte~onall the-sides with provision for torsion
at corners. M" = 0.87 A,,!, d 1- b d !".

b) Depth of slab
(17.37 x lO'l=(0.87x415A"x 145)[1 ,415A" ]
(10 x 145 x 20)
As the span is more than 3.5m, adopt a span/depth ratio of 25
.. Depth = (span/25) =(4000 /25) = 160 mm
,.','
',:
 . Reinforced <::o(lcretppesign Limit State Design ofSlabs 269

:;01IV"'211•• '" 302 mn1" =

ii) Spacing of main steel < 3d < (3 x"145) 435 mm
Adopt 10 mm diameter bars at 255 mm centres in short span direction.. iii) Diameter of reinforcement < (DI8) = (175/8) = 21.8 mm
Using 10 mm diameter bars in the long span direction; .'
Hence cracks will be within· permissible limits as per the specifications of
Effective depth'" (145-10) = 135 mm.·Hence reinforcements in the long
IS:456 code.
span direction is computed using the relation,
k) Torsion Reinforcementat Corners
(t2.8x 10').= (0.87x415A"x 135)[1 ,415A" ]
10 x 135 x20
Area of reinforcement in each of the four layers = (0.75 x 302) = 226.5
Solving A" = 237 mm'. Hence provide 10 mm diameter bars at 300 mm
mm 2.
cemres in the long span direction (A" 262 mm') = Distance over which torsion reinforcement is provided = (,lIS short span)
= (0.2 x 4000) = 800 mm. Provide 6 mm diameter bars at 100 mm centres
II) Check for Shear Stress
for a length of 800 mm at all four comers in 4 layers.
Considering tne short span 4. and unit width of slab, the shear stress is
I, I) Reinforcement in Edge Strips
1 given by ,
I
.m~
'." 1 T
,
=(~)
bd
= (27.6 x 10') =0.1~ = =
A.. 0.12 percent of cross sectional area (0.0012 x 10' x 170) 204 =
, lO'x145 ,
mm 2/m .
, Provide 10 mm diameter bars at 300 mm centres (A.. ~ 262 mm') in all
,
"
1
tOOA") (100X302) 2
P, =( IJd = lo'x 145 =O.ON/mm
'
edge strips.
I
IT'-:'1 Refer Tnble-19 (IS: 456) and read out the permissible shear stress as
I m) Design using SP: 16 design Tables
t'! ;~ h, '= (1.26 x 0.32) = 0040 N/mm' > T,
I
, M" = 17.37 kN.m and M" = 12.80 kN.m. overall depth = D = 170 mm
Hence the slab is safe against shear forces.
Referring to Table-41 of SP: 16. read out the reinforcement i along short &
i) Cheek for Deflection long spans as
a) 10 mm diameter bars at 240 mm centres along the short span.
Considering unit width of slab in the short span direction Lx b) 10 mm diameter bars at 300 mm centres along the long span.
\
n) The details of reinforcements in the two-way slab are shown in Fig. 9.5.
( ~) basIC
, = 20 and for P, = 0.20, From Fig. 7,2. read out K, = 1.7

9.3.7 Design Example

(7) "
(, ma~
(20 x 1.7) = 34.;;
Design a two-way slab for an office floor to suit the followi.ng data.
,
.. (~) =(4150) = 28.6 <34 a) Data
(provided 145 (
Hence deflection control is satisfied
Size of office floor = 4 m by 6 m
Edg~ conditions = Two adjacent edges discontinous
j) Check for Cracking Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-4l5 HYSD bars.
'. /.7
i) Steel provided is more than the minimum percentage of 0.12 percent.
 Limit State Desigll ofSlabs 271
270 Reillforced COllcrete Desigll
e) Effective Span
d Edge
E ge Middle strip strip
striP,'
+500 ... ' ---3000 - I 500Ci1 Torsion reinforcement
~
Effective span in along the short and long span directions are computed as L
I 66-100 cle L", = (clear span + effective depth) = (4.000 +0.145) = 4.145 m
--f14Iayers) =
L,,= (clear span + effective depth) (6.000 t 0.145) 6'.145 m =
l Edge strip
O.lOLy
,,
(5001 • 625
-1 d) Loads

"
~
t'J,2 Lx~
(aO )
'I
Middle strip
Live load = 4.00
Finishes = 1.50,
=

Totai working load = w = 9.75 kN/m'

=
Self weight of slab (0.17 • 25) 4.25 kN/m'
I"
I
I
I
I
I

I "
3750
.,. 'Design Ultimate load =w.
= (1.5 X 9.75) = 14.625 kN ,
Ie< ".
I

#1~-255 t-0·1O Lx. \ ,

I

~
(400 ) e) Ultimate Design Moments
,
I

.. 10-300 i71~-300 Refer Table-9.2 and read out the moment coefficients for (LIL,)
'1.5 '
=(6/4) ='
r"
)
Short span moment coefficients:
a} - ve moment coefficient = a, = 0.075
= =
b} + ve moment coefficient a, 0.056
,
.,I'~ Lx = 4 m - - - - + ' t
Long span moment coefficients:
--+
= =
a) ~ ve, moment coefficient a, 0.047
#10-300 #10-300 =
b) + ve moment coefficient i:t, = 0,035
'l? ~1~8~0~0~~I:!~:::~~~~~ {4layersl M,,(-ve) = (a, w. 1-';,) =(0.0075 x 14.625 x 4.145') = 18.85 kN.m
400-+ .,," 10-220 M,,(+ve) =(a, w. L;,) =(0.056 x 14.625 x 4.145') = 14.07 kN.m
,
.:.)'f- 4000 -~~--+
M o,(-vel =(n' w:L;,) = (0.047 x 14.625 x 4.145') = 11.81 kN.m
sect ion X X M.,(+ve)';' (a;·w. L;,) " (0.035 x 14.625 x4.145') = 8.80 kN.m
Fig. 9.5 Reinforcement Details in Two Way Slabs
(with provision for torsion at corners) t) Check for depth

b) Depth of slab Mu,h'm = 0.138 kk b d'

As the span is more than 3.5 m, adopt a span/depth ratio of 25. 18.85 X 10'
d= 0 138 0 0 = 82.64mm < 145 mm
:. Overall depth = (span/25) = (4000/25) = 160 mm . XW~lO _ _ ,_
Adopt effective depth = 145 mm Hence, the effective depth selected is sufficient to resist ihe design ultimate
And Overall depth = 170 mm moment.
A".m;" = (0.0012 x 1000 x 170) = 204 mm'
 272 Reinforced Concrete Design ,Limit State Design ofSlabs 273 ."

g) Reinforcements along short and long span directions

.. ,
'I : II
The area of reinforcement is calculated using the relation, LeXe I
'I I
M. = 0.87 f,A" d [1- :;1,] 1
L ex l3l I
I

I I
Spacing of the selected bars are computed using the relation,

Spacing::: S ::: Area of OI'JC bar) X 1000 such that ASl (provided)
. ~ A' .
SI (minimum) 1---
-+ J::
!4ey/3- i'- Leyl3
+------ .
t- Ley/3-
-- ----
( Total Area
1--- -- ---. ------
In addition, the spacing should be the least of three times ,the effective depth or ),.. 300 h ;I> 10-300 c/c_"-
300mm.
Using 10 mm diameter bars for long span, d = 145 mm & for short span;d =
135 mm.
The details of reinforcements provided in the two-way slab is compiled in
I I - l'-
Table-9.3. 1 r
Table 9.3 Reinforcement details In Two way slab
.. 10 -235 clc
;ri--235
"'1"1
location A.t (Required) Spacing of 10 mm $ bars
Ler
1) Short span
~ ! "

328.7 mm2 235 mm C/C

a) -va B.M(IOp of supports)
b) +ve 8.M (centre of span) 242.2 mm 2 300 mm c/e
Long span.: # 10 at 300 clc
2) Long span
218.10mm2 300 mm c/o Slab thickness: 170 mm
a) -ve 8.M (lOp of supports)
204 mm~ (A.1.rn1fI) 300 mm c/o
b) +ve 8.M (Cenlre of span) Fig. 9.6 Reinforcement Details In Two Way Slabs n
iI
h) Torsion Reinforcement at cor':l~~s from the wall face from lintel beams or floor slabs. The slabs are generally 'i
designed as one-way slabs as a cantilever fixed or continuous at the sup- "

Referring to Fig. 9.4 (a), ' , pOrIs. The trial depth is selected based on spanldeplh ratio of 7 recom-
Area oflOrsional steel in each of41ayers at - A = (0.75 x 242.2) = 181.65 mended in IS: 456 codes. The reinforcements provided in the slab at the
m~ . tension face should be checked for lhe anchorage length near the supports.
The thickness of the cantilever slab is generally varied from a maxi- i
Provide 4 layers of reinforcement at Awith 4 bars 0(8 mm diameter in
mum at the fixed end to a'minimum of 100 to 150 mm at the free end. I
each layer (two layers at top level and two layers at bottom level) over a i
" length of 800 mm in each direction from the corner. Distribution steel is provided in the transverse direction.
Proper selection of depth and detailing of reinforcements will safe-
At .'B' 50% of total torsional steel is 2 bars of 8 mm dimeter in eachof
gaurd againSl excessive deflections and cracking of lhe cantilever slabs.
form layers. Cantilever structural elements should be checked for, safely against
At 'C' torsional steel is not required.-
overtufning.
i) Details of reinforcements are shown in Fig. 9.6. 9.4.2 Design Example

9.4 DESIGN OF CANTILEVER SLABS Design a cantilever slab projecling 2.1 m from the support using M-20
concrete and Fe-415 grade steel:
9.4.1 General features
a) Data
Cantilever Slabs are commonly used for chajjas and balconies projecting Cantilever Projection =L =2.lm
 Limit State Design of Slabs 275
274 Reinforced Concrete Design
Solving A" = 305,6 mm'
Materials: M-20 Concrete Provided 10 mm diameter bars at 255 centres at top of slab,.
Fe-415 Grade Steel
10, = 20 N/mm' andf, = 415 N/mm' g) Distribution steel

b) Depth of slab ASI = 288 mm2 • Provide 10 mm dimeter bars at 270 mm centres.

Effective Depth,:, (span/10) = (2100/10)" 21 h) Anchorage Length

Provide d = 240 mm
D = 215mm
Maximum depth of 240 mm at support is gradually red,uced to 120 mm at 0.871,) ( 0.87X415)
L,= ( 42" $=, 4x1.2x1.6 1O=470rnrn
free end.
Main tension bars are extended into the support to a minimum length of
470 mm inCluding anchorage value of hooks and 900 bends. Further safety
c) Load
against overturning has to be satisfied by providing sufficient balancing
Self-weight of slab = 0.5(0.24 + 0.12) 25 = 4.5 kN/m' moment.
L.L. (Assuming Residential Building) = 2.0,
I) Check for Deflection Control
Finishes = 1.5
Total working load = w= 8.0 kN/m'
... Ultimate load w, = (1.5 x 8) = 12.0 kN/m' ( ~) =(~) xK,xK,xK,
max basic .

,
d) Ultimate Moments
,
looA,,) (looX305.6)
P,= (~ = 100x2i5 =0.142
M, = 0.5 w, I! = (0.5, x 12 x 2.1') = 26.46 kN.m
From Fig. 7.~read outK,= 2, K, = Land K,= 1

e) Check for depth .. (~)~ =(7';2xtx1)" 14

. .
(~L",= (2d~) = 9.76 < 14
26.46x10'
d= 0.t38x20xlooo =98.9rnrn<215rnrn Hence the cantilever slab satisfies the deflection limits prescribed in :the
code.
Hence the effective depth selected is sufficient to resist the design ultimate
moment. j) Reinforcement details in the cantilever slab are shown in'Fig. 9.7.
A".m', = (0.0012 x 1000 x240) = 288 mm'
, 9.5 DESIGN OF CONTINUOUS SLABS
f) Reinforcement details

,[
Mu=O. 87 AnJyd 1- bdfck
A,J,] 9.5.1 Introduction

In the case of tee beam and slab floors, the slab'is continuous over ,tee
(26.46 x 10') = (0.87 x415 A" x 215)[1' 415A,,]
11, " . 1ooox215X20

I
 -Riiinforced Co~crete Design Limit State Design of Slabs 271

c) Loads
# 10-255 cle Self weight or'slab = (0.16 x 25) = 4.00 kNlm'
Finishes= 1.00
Fi:===;=4=::::;=::;:=:;:::;-, '-.I'-
t-
240m
120mm
-./<-
Total dead Load = g = 5.00 kN/m'
Live load = q = 4.00 kN/m'

+-f~-- ------'r 2·1 m

# 10-210 cle d) Effective span = centre to centre of supports = L = 4 m

e) Moments and shear forces

Fig: 9.7 Reinforcement Details in Cantilever Slab
beams spaced at regular intervals of 2.5 to 305m, Continuous slabs are
designed similar to that of continuous beams using moment and shear
coefficients recommended in IS:456 - 2000. The depth of the slab is based
Referring to Table-12 and 13 of IS: 456 - 2000 code.
Maximum negative moment at support next to the end support is
M.(-ve) = 1.5 [( gl~') +( q~')] = 1.5 [( 5 ~04') +( 4~4')] 22.66 kN.m

[(gl~'J +(~~'J] = 1.5 [( 5 ~24') +( 4 ~04')] = 20.65 kN.m

on the basic span depth ratio of 26 recommended in the IS. Code with
M.(+ve) = I.5 I,
suitable modification factors applied for tension reinforcement. /
The limitations regarding variations in spans and redistribution of'
moments discussed in continuous beams, also apply for the design of con- ~ Maximum shear force is computed as
tinuous slabs when the moment and shear co-efficients specified in Tables V. = (1.5 xO.6)(g +q)L
1:'1" -12 and 13 of the IS : 456-2000 code. are used in design.
= (1.5 x 0.6)(5 + 4)4 = 32.4 kN
9;5.2 Design example
e) Check for depth
1'''.'' Design a continuous one- way slab for an office floor. The slab is continu- -
ous over tee beams spaced at 4m intervals. Assume live load of 4 kN/m'
atid adopt M·20 grade concr~te and Fe-415 HYSD bars. x e-
-,:2::;2",.6",6::e
-=-
1O:...'c:-; - 90 6
_ . mm< 140 rom.
d=
0.138x20xI0'
a) Data
Hence the provided depth is safe.

Live Load = q = 4 kN/m'. Ie, = 20 N/m' and J, = 4 I5 N/mm' f) Reinforcements

b) Depth of slab
[ A.I,]
M. = (0.87 f,A"d) 1- bdh'
./
Since the slab is continuous and the percentage of reinforcement is small,
the span/depth ratio may be assumed as 30 ,, [ 415A,,]
(22,66 x 10') = (O.87x415 xA,.x 140) 1- 10'x 140x20
:. spanJ = (4000)
Depth= ( 30 30 =134mm Solving. A" = 485 mm'
Adopt effective depth = d = 140 mm and Overall depth = D = 160 mm Provide 10 mm diameter bars at 150 mm centres at supports (A" = 524
mm')
 278 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design ofSlabs 279

'. The same reinforcement is provided for positive moment at mid span. 9.6 DESIGN OF FLAT SLABS
=
. Dislribution reinforcement (0.0012 x 1000 x 160) 192 mm' = 9.6.1 Introduction
Provide 10 mm diameter bars at 300 mm centres.
A flat slab is a reinforced concrete slab supported directly over column's
g) Check· for Shear without beams generally used when headroom is limited such as in cellars
and warehouses.
,, =(V,)=(32.4XlO')=0.23N/mm~
bd lO'x140
Refer Table-I 9 of IS: 456 and read out the permissible shearslress as r----l-i-.-L-----y Slab
t, =(1.25 x 0.36) = 0.45 \'I/mm' >-t,
Hence, the slab is safe against shear failures.

h) Check for Deflection Control (a) Slab Without Drop and Column Without
Column Head

( ~d)......... =(~)
d
xK basic I
and 100X52~)
p,=( 1000 x 14
=0.37. Prom Pig. 7.2, K, = 1.35

(~L =(20;26) 1.35 =29.9 r-----'-.j--l-----y Slab

.~ a'I.ll!

( ~) ""....'W..,.'!
=(4000) = 28.5 < 29.9
140
e:}4S· Column head .j ,
i

Hen",""e, the slab is safe against excessive deflections.

(b) Slab Without Drop and Column With "
i) The details of reinforcements in -the continuous .slab are shown in Column Head ! i"~JA1IZ
,
"
Fig. 9-". ,
-+
#: 10-300
t o'3 L, t-0'3L2i
# 10-150 # 10-300
....
/60
.c- -l-f-lL....-----=!CSlab

Drop
..L e :I> 45·
column head
As, 0·5 As, AS 2 AS 2
(#10-150) . (#10-150)
+0'2SL, +0'2SL2+ (e) Slab With Drap and Column With
-1"~---'--L, (4000) ---~'I' L2 (4000)-+- column Head

Fig. 9.8 Reinforcement Det~.lIs in One Way Continuous Slnb Fig. 9.9 Different Types of Flat Slabs

The different types offtat slabs shown in Fig. 9.9 are referred to as
(i) Slabs without drops and column heads
 Limil State Design of Slabs 281
Reinforced COflCr~te Design

(ii) Slabs without drops 9.6.3 ~ Proportioning of Slab thickness,

iii) Slabs with drops and column with column head Drop panel and Column head

9.6.2 Panel Divisions a) Thickness ofFlat slab

The thickness of flat slab depends upon the span I effective depth ratio
The flat slab panel is generally divided into column strip and middle strip. which is specified as 40 for two-way slabs. However the IS: 456 code per-
a) Panel: P.anel is that part of the slab bounded on each of its form sides mits a reduction factor of 0.9 resulting in a span I effective depth ratio of
by the centre line of columns or centre lines of adjacent spans. 36 for flat slabs. However the longer span should be considered in the
b) Column Strip: Column strip is a design strip having a width of 0.25 computations. The millimum thickness of a flat slab is 125 mm.
I.-, but not greater thanO.25 1.-" on each side of the column centre line
whereL. is the span in the direction, moments are being determined b) DrOps
measured centre tq centre of supportS and _~ is the span transverse to The drop panel is formed by increasing the thickness of slab in the vicinity
L) measured centre to centre of supports. of the supporting column. The main purpose of providing drops is to
c) Middle Strip: Middle strip is a design strip bounded on each of its reduce the shear stress around the column 'suppqrts. Since the moments in
oppositesides by the column strip. . the column strip are higher than in middle strips, drops help to reduce the
Fig. 9.10 shows the division of flat slab into column and middle strips. steel requirement to resist the negative moments at the column supports.
--J<
I
colu:n n -'
strIp
" Middle
strip
t ~olumn
strip
f- The code clause (CI.3I.2.2) prescribes that drops should be rectangu-
lar in plan, and have a length in each direction not less then one third of the
1 . panel length in that direction. For exterior panels. the length measured

~:;:;" ~.+---Ln--H.~
.- perpendicular'to the discontinuous' edge from the column centre line
should be taken as one half of the. corresponding width of drop for the
interior panel (Fig. 9.12). Although the code does not specify the thickness

t-
of the drop, it is recommended by the ACI code", thnt the thickness of the
drop should be not less than one fourth the slab thickness and preferubly
not less than 100 mm.

Middle c) Column Head

strip
I The column head or capital located by flaring of the column at the top is
primarily .intended to in~rease the punching shear strength of the slab. The

~
IS: 456 Code clause (CI.3I.2.3) specifies the useful portion of the cO,lurnn
Column heod capital as that which lies within the largest circular cone or pyramid that
or co pltat has a vertex angle of 90· and can be included entirely within the outlines of
.f---Y-f----I---:-l-- the column and column head.
olumn
Column
slrlp _+~I+-+ 9.6.4 Direct Design Method
The direction design method facilitate~ the computation of positive and
L.-l-·---'----'.-l---L---"----.J negative design moments under design loads at critical sections in the slab
using empirical moment coefficients. However, the code (C 1.21.4.1) spec-
ifies that the following conditions must be satisfied by -the flat slab system
Fig. 9.10 D1visio~ of Flat Slab into column and Middle Strips for the application of the direct design method.
a) There"must be"at least three continuous spans in each direction.
 282 Reinforced Concrete Design
Limit State Desigll of Slabs 283
6) The panels should be rectangular and the ratio of the longer span to
the shorter span within a panel should not exceed 2 The total design moment M, is distributed in the following proportions.
c) The columns must not be offset by more than 10 percent of the span 0.10 ]
from either axis between centre lines of successive columns. Interior Negative Design Moment = 0.75 - [ 1+(1/0;,)
d) The successive span lengths in each direction must not differ by more
than one third of the longer span. , [ 0.65 ]
Exterior Negative Design Moment = I + (1/0;,) .
e) The design live load must not exceed three times the design 'lead load.
'\
9.6.5 Total Design Moment for a span
Positive Design Moment =0.63 -[ I :(~~o;,) ]
In the direct design method. the total design moment for a span b~unded
laterally by the centre lines of the panel on each side of the centre line of Where Uc = Ratio of flexural stiffness of exterior columns tq the
supports is expressed as (CI.31.4.2.2) , flexural stiffness .of the slab at a joint taken in the direc-
tion. moments are being determined and is given by
M.=(~L,) lX, = [EK,} K,J
Where L K, = Sum of the flexural stitfness of tile columns meeting at
Where M, = absolute sum of the positive and average negative bending the joint and .
mom'eht in each direction. K, = Flexural stiffness of the slab, expressed as moment per
W = total design load covered on an area L 2 Ln unit rotation..
L n = clear span extending from face to face of columns,capitals
:At an exterior support, the column strip must be designed to resist the total
brackets or walls, but not less than 0.65 L j (Refer Fig. 9.12)
L 1 = length of span in the direction of M o ~egative moment in the panel at that support.
,.
~ = span length tn~nsverse to L 1
9.6.6 Eqnivalent Frame Method
The expressions for Mo is computed as the maximum mid span static
moment in an equivalent simply supported span L n, subjected' to a uni-
The structure is analysed as a continuous frame with the following
=
formly distributed total load W w (L, L,) where L, L" is the effective
assumptions.
panel area on which the unit load 'w' acts.
According to IS: 456-2000 Clauses 31.4.3.2. the total miJlllent M in a) The struCture is considered to be made up of equivalent frames longi-
the panel is distributed to the column and middle strips in the followOing tudinally and transversely consisting of row of· columns and strip of
proportions. slab with a width equal to the distance between the centre lines of the
panel on each side of the row of columns. '
a) Moments in Interior Panel b) Each frame is analysed by any established method like moment distri-
bution or any other suitable method. Each strip of floor and roofmay
Bending Moment Di,stribution (Percent of M,) be analysed as a separate frame with the columns above and below
....
Type of Moment Column Strip Middle Strip assumed fixed at their extremities.
c) -The relative stiffness is computed by assuming gross cross section of
Negative Moment (0.65 x 0.75) = 49% 15% the concrete alone in the calculation of the moment of inertia.
Positive Moment (0.35 x 0.60) = 21 % 15% d) Any variation of moment of inertia -along _the axis of
the slab on
account of provision of drops should be considered. In the case of
recessed or coffered slab which is made solid in the region of the col-
, b) Moments in Exterior Panel umns, the stiffening effect may be ignored provided the solid part of
The moments in.the ~xterior panel are influenced· by the flexuralsti.ffness the slab does not extend more than 0.15 Lef into the span me~s\Jred
of columns and'slab. from the centre line of the columns: The stiffening :effe.G1 'offlared
column heads may be ignored. . , "'" >c ;' " '
 284 Reinforced Conc.rete Design Limit Srate Design ofSlabs ·285

9.6.7 Shear In Flat Slab Length of drop < (U3) in either direction < (6/3): 2 m
Adopt drop width: 3m
In the case of flat slabs, the critical section for shear is at a distance (dl2) ... Column strip: drop width: 3m
from the periphery qf the column 1 capital 1 drop panel, perpendicular to Middle strip: 3m
the plane of the slab where 'd' is the effective depth of the section. The Span of flat slab: L, : L, : 6m
shape in plan is geometrically similar to the support im'mediately below the
slab. c) Loads
The nominal shear stress· in flat slabs is computed as (V/bo.d) where Ii
is the shear force due to design load and bo is the periphery of the critical Self weight of slab: (0.15 x 25): 3.75 kN/m'
section and d is the effective depth. Live Load : 5.00
When sheaf reinforcement is not provided. the calculated shear stress D,ead Load due to extra depth
at the critical section shaH not exceed ks.'tc where of slab at drops: (0.05 x 25). : 1.25
Total working load: w : 10.00 kN/m'
k, : (0.5 + ~Jbut not greater than I. .. Ultimate load: W,: (1.5 x 10): 1,5 kN/m'
~, : Ratio of short side to long side of the column 1 capital and
~, : 0.25..J];;in limit state method of design and 0.16 ..J];; in d) Ultimate Bending Moments
'" working stress method of design.
M o : (WL ,/8)
When the shear stress exceeds this value, suitable shear reinforcements
L,: (6 - 1.5): 4.5 m > 0.65 L, > (0.65 x 6): 3.9 III
according to the provisions of the code should be provided.
and L,: L, :'6m
In practice it is preferable to increase the thickness of the slab near the
., W : (lV,.L,.L,): (I5 x 6 x 4.5): 405 kN
column head to reduce the shear stresses rather than providing shear rein":
.. M o : [(405 x 4.5) 1 8] : 230 kN.m.
forcements. .
For Interior panel with drops:
9.6.8 Design Example Columns strip moments
Negative B.M: 49% M o : (0.49 x 230): 113 kN.m.
Design the interior panel of a flat slab for a ware house to suit the follow- Positive B.M.: 21 % M o : (0.21 x 230): 48 kN.m
ing data:
Middle Strip Moments
a) Data Negative B.M.: 15% M o : (0.15 X 230): 35 kNm
Positive B.M.: 15% M o : (0.15 x 230): 35 kNm
" ",

Size of ware house 24 m by 24 m divided into panels of 6 m by 6 m

e) Check for thickness of slab
Loading c1ass-5 kN/m'
Materials: 'M- 20 Grade concrete
i) Thickness of slab required near drops
Fe-415 grade HYSD bars.

b) Interior Panel· Proportions

d _~ M,
;
where . b : 3000mm
- 0.138/0, b

Thickness of slab: (Span/40): (6000/40) : 150 mm

Thickness of slab at drops: (150 + 50): 200mm :
..y Il3xlO'
0.138x20x3000: 117 mm
ColuffiQ., head diameter is computed as
D> 0.25 L: (0.25 x 6) : I.5 m
. Adopt diameter of cohimnhead : D : 1.5 m
286 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit Sta.it~ Design of Slabs 287
Effective depth provided = d = 170 mm
Overall depth =; 200mm M.= 0.87 f,A"d[l- bA;fJ

ii) Thickness of slab required in middle strips

(I13XIO')=(0.87X415A"XI70)[1 415A" ]
(3000 x 170x20)
49 x 10'
d= ::::;;77mm
0.138x20x3000 Solving ASl = 2000 mm 2

Provide effective depth =d = 120 mm and overall depth =150 mm :. AJmetre = (2000/3) = 667 mm'
, .~
Adopt 16 mni diameter bars at 300 mm centres (A" = 670 mm'j
o Check for shear stress AS1 (for +ve moment) is given by
Shear stre;s is checked near the column head at section (D 4- d). 415A" ]
Total load on the circular area with (D + d) as diameter is given by (49 x 10')= (0.87 x415A"x 120)[ I
(3000 x 120 x 20)
WI = (n/4)(D + d)'w" Solving Asl ;::; 1215 mm 2

= (n/4)(1.5 X 0.17)' 15 :. AJmetre = (1215/3) = 405 mm'/m

Provide 12 mm diameter bars at 250 mrn centres (A sl ;::; 452 mm 2 )
=33kN
Shear force = [(Total Load) - (Load on circular area)] ji) Middle Strip
= [(15 x 6 x 6) - (33)]
= 507 kN ASl for +ve and -ve B.M. is computed as
Shear force / meter of perimeter _----'4.::15:::.-A" ]
(35 x 10') = (0.87 x 415A" x 120) [I
(3000 x 120 x 20)
_[ 507 ] =[ 507 ] = 97 kN/m
V"- 1(D+d) 1(1.5+0.17) Solving A s1 = 850 rnm 2
3 :. AJmetre = (850/3) = 284 mm'/m
2
Shear Stress::: 't = ( V") = ( 97 X 10 ) = 0.57 N/mm Provide 10rnm diameter bars at 270 rnrn centres (A sl' =290 mrn 2 )
.. , bd lO'x 170

According to clause 31.6.3.1 of IS: 456. h) Reinforcement Details

Permissible shear stress = ks·1:c
Where k, = (0.5 + ~,) where ~,= (L.tL,) = (6/6) = I The details·of reinforcements in the flat slab are shown in Fig. 9.11.
= (0.5 + I) = 1.5 > 1.0 :. k, = 1.0
and t, = 0.25 w:;; = 0.25 ;JW = 1.12 N/mm' 9.7 YIELD LINE ANALYSIS OF SLABS
:. k,.t, = (1.0 x 1.12) = 1.12 N/mm'
The actual shear stress of 0.57 N/rnm2 is within safe pCl'missible limits. 9.7.1 Introduction

g) Reinforcements in Column and Middle Strips The failure of reinforced concrete slabs of different shapes such as square,
rectangular, circular with different types of edge conditions is preceded by
a characteristic pattern of ctacks which are generally referred to as yield
i) Column Strip
lines which arc characteristic of the shape of slab, type of loading and edge
conditions. The yield line theory was. innov~ted .,by .it Danish engineer
A" (for -ve Moment) is computed as.
 Limit StateDesign ofSlabs 289
Reirif'Jrc"d C'onc'ret< Design
design of slabs using the yield line theory. The Indian standard code IS:
Column strip I Middle slriD I Column strlo I.

'T ------- 456-2000 specifies that two way slabs carrying uniformly distributed loads

1
m 1 3m 3m 1"

---'--
#16-300c/<(lDP)
-';;:::-'
---,~--
-----
may be designed by any acceptable theory, The most generally used elastic
methods are based on Poteau's or Westergaard's th eory 80,81 and the ulti-

C,S
3m
~~- -
- '3
#12 250c/c
. .~-~
'-l-/
mate load methods are based on Johanssen's yield line theory and HilIer-
borg's" strip method of design. The ultimate load methods have been used
by the author83,84 for the design of different types of slabs.

~1_.Q:!4!J~~~lb~lt~o~m~)~~~~~~~~~~_~
M,S
t 0'22l n
_ _
==.:::<-:..
:11000
:./Z'#12 -270 c/c
(lop)
1....
=. =J-==
:'I-!-
L2=6m
9.7.2 Characteristic Features of yield lines

The typical crack pattern (yield lines) developed in an isotropically rein-

forcedsquare slab is shown in Fig. 9.12, As the load is gradually increased

_
3m

i
. I---+--,-+-H+--I---+I--I
~10-270 c/c'I
bD(lom)
on the slab, the region of highest moment will yield first and the yield lines
are' propagated until they reach the boundaries of the slab, The final failure
will take place by the rotation of the slab elements about the axes of rota-

+
C,S
.
3m
. ~COI umn .-$-_ 1-;-
tion which are usually the supporting edges of the slab,

/,
.- .-

~
/,

1
Ln = 4,5 m I. '.Bmf
L.----~~~
1

4j'~--- L, = 6m
Plan
Column head
of X v~
V
777/~

10-270 c/c -#- 16- 300 c/c Initial Final

;t to Fig. 9.12 Yield Line Pattern in a Simply Supported Slab

It is important to note that for the complete yield line pattern to

't' #12-250c/c
\ olumn develop, the slab must be under reinforced so that sufficient rotation
- head capacity is available for the initiation and propagation of the yield lines,
l' The following characteristic features of yield lines are helpful in
selecting a possible yield line mechanism in a typical slab,
Fig. 9.11 R~inforcement Details in Flat Slab a) Yield lines end at the supporting edges of the slab
b) Yield lines are straight
Ingerslav7J , and waS considerably improved and advanced' by c) A yield line or yield line produced, passes through the inteTsection of
JollilnSSen74 , 75. In the case of slabs the computation of ultimate loads "is the axes of rotation of adjacent slab elements,
relllly complicllted and is a challenge 10 the research workers and design- d) Axes of rotation generally lie along lines of supports and pass over
l'f$. any columns.
The determination of ultimate loads on slabs based on yield line theory Fig, 9.13 shows the notations used to represent the yield line and sup-
78
has ,been further extended by WOOd 76. 77 ; and Jones of Great Britain. ports, The yield line patterns developed in slabs of different shapes and'.
Shllkla's" hllnd book published by SERe is also a useful reference for the
2.9:") Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Slabs 291

~ positive Yield line

(Tension in bottom face

_ _ _ _ _ Negative Yield line

(uaaUIt/(U Simply ~upported Edge

.cMMc<>I)QOtX'>5XY C6ntinuous or Fixed Edge

,
_ . __ ' __ Axis of Rotation Rectangular Stab
Square Slab
Beam Support
---,-----
o point Load -ve yield line
+ve yield line
Column Support
~
Fig. 9.13 Notations For Yield Lines and Supports

with different edge conditions ...re compiled in fig. 9.14. Negative yield
lines form near the supports in the case of slabs fixed or continuous at the
Triangular Slab Rectangular Slab
edge,.
{Fixed support l
9.7.3 Yield Moments

When the yield lines form at right angles to the direction of the reinforce-
ment as shown in Fig, 9.15 (a).The yield or ultimate llloments is computed
by considering the slab section as under reinfoi·ced.
According to IS: 456-2000, the yield or ultimate moment is expressed
as

/11 =M.=0.87 fyA".d [1 ::h:'] Hexagonal Slab Circular Slab

Referring to Fig. 9.15 (0), if an yield line ah has an ultimate moment '/11'
Fig. 9.14 Typical Yield Line Patterns in Reinforced ConI... de Slabs
per unit length and the yield line ab makes an angle 'Q' with the yield line
cd which is at right angles to the reinforcement, the yield moment 'm' is Ina = Lm.cos ex
2

calculated as follows:
In squareslabs, isotropically reinforced, equal steel is provided in perpe -
ma.ab = (m. cos a x cd)
dlCular dlrectl~ns. !f 'm' is the ultimate moment of yield lines at rig~t
ma = m .cosa(cd/ab) = m.cos a
2 angle~ to t!lC dIrectIon of the reinforcement, then the ultimate moment of
.any yIeld hne at an angle a to the horizontal is given by
If there is more than one mesh reinforcement 2 · 2 ·
ma :::; m. cos ex + Jim . cos (90 - ex)
= 111 • cos2 ex + Jim.sin 2 ex
 ',.\.\:.,:,.
I.",,',. ,
''''''.'.: '.
,

; ,':. , 292. .Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design ofSldbs . 293

1 ·m
9.7.4 Ultimate loads on slabs
t Yield line
\ There are two methods of determining the ultimate load capacity. of slabs.
IIIIIIII,I
I (aJ
They are based on the principles of (a) Virtual work (b) Equilibrium.
Reinforcementj
The virtual work method is based on the principle that the applied loads
causing a small virtual displacement is equal to the internal work done or
b
energy dissipated in rotation along the yield lines. It is generally assumed
that the elastic deformations in the slab are negligible and all the plastic
deformation takes place at the yield lines.
In the equilibrium- method, the equilibrium of the individual segments
of slab formed by the yield lines under the action Of the npplied loads and
( bJ moments and forces acting on the edges of the segments are considered.
a =-_-+0:,-__
Yield lines Both the virtual work and equilibrium methods give an upper bound to
c m d
the collapse load on the slab. Hence it is essential that all possible yield
line patterns have to be investigated to find the lowest value of the ultimate

Reinforcement I,IIIIIIIII load.

If a correct yield line pattern has been assumed, the lower bound solu-
tion will coincide with the upper bound solution but lower bound solutions
are not available except for a few simple cases of slabs. Test results have
b
shown that the actual failure loads of slabs is greater than the predicated
L'lJ!11 values by yield line analysis because of membrane action. Hence the upper
mo: bound solutions resulting from yield line analysis can be used with a rea-
,um (c)
sonable degree of safety.
0:
c a L:._"-_ m d 9.7.5 Yield line analysis. by virtual work method
T (1) 1sotropically reinforced square slab simply supported and
Reinforcement/ IIIIIIIII I supporting uniformly distributed load

O'
Fig. 9.15 Yield Momen.ts The principle of the virtual work method is "to equate the internal work
done due to rotation of yield lines to the external work done due to the
= m (cos2 0. + sin 2 a) loa,ds having a virtual displacement.
=m External work done = (W. 0)
This criterion indicates that in an isotropically reinforced slab. the yield =
WhereW Loads i~
moment is the same in all directions. Referring to Fig. 9.15 (c), if the rein- o" Virtual displacement
forcement is arranged in two directions at right angles but with unequal. Internal work done = (M e) = L (m.L.e)
magnitude, the slab is said to be orthotropically reinforced. This type of
'Where Tn:::: ultimate moment per unit length of yield line
arrangement of different steel in perpendicular directions is very Common .
L = length of yield line
in rectangular slabs. In such cases the yield moment along a line inclined at
an angle 'a' to the horizontal is computed as Referring to Fig. 9.16,
2 2
rna= m . cos ex + J.l m . cos (90 - a) The square slab is isotropically reinforced. The ultimate moment along the
2
= m . cos 2 ex. + Jl m . sin ex yield'line is also 'm' and the total work done in yield line ac is given by
 294 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design ofSlabs 295

T- L

T/. li'-'-

r
1m
I L
n;-

~
m L

~
m
J-dl~
Fig. 9.16 Yield Line Pattern in a Square Slab (Simply Supported)

L (M e)" = L(m L 0) = [m fiL (2f2)/L] = 4 m

Fig. 9.17 Yield Line Pattern in a Square Slab (Fixed)
The work done in yield line bd is the same as in ac.
Total internal work done = L(M0) = 8 m Internal work done along the negative yield lines ab,.bc, cd, and de is given
For a virtual displacement of S = 1 at e, the centre of gravity of -each of the by
triangular elements deflects by 113
L(M.0)=4[m.L (2/L)] =8m
L (Wo) = (113) IV.L'
=
.. Total internal work done L (M . e) 16 m =
Where IV = uniformly distributed load on slab, By equating = =
External work done L (W. 0) (1/3) \V.L'
L (M.0) = L(W.o) Equating internal to external work done
L(M.0) = L(W.o)
We have, IVL')
m = ( 24 16m =(1/3) wL'
(2) Isotropically reinforced square slab fixed on all edges and
snbjected to a uniformly distributed load
m =( ":s')
RefelTing to Fig. 9.17, since the edges are fixed negative yield lines will (3) Triangular slab simply supported on adjacent edges and subjected
form along the edges. to uniformly distributed load and isotropically reinforced
Internal work done along the positive yield lines ac and db is given by
Referring to Fig. 9.18, the triangular slab acb is simply supported at ac alid
L(M.e) = 8 m (Refer previous problem), cb. The yield line formed is cd. Unit displacement is given for point d.
Since slab is isotropically reinforced m1. = my = m
 iieinforced Concrete Design. Limit State Design ofSlabs 297
-1... m=
_,---:W::aL='..'::S1~'n-,o/,-~

6[cot(o/ - $) + cot $]
~
m = (1I6)war.', sin $, sin('!' - $)
2
,
x
For a maximum value of m, (dmld$) ~ 0
7
c cos $, sin('!' - $) = sin $ cost'!' - $)
.2
~ tan $ = tan('!' - $)
;,
'"" "-r'Q
·c
2
$ = (1I2)'!'
Hence the yield line bisects the angle opposite the free edge,
x . Substituting the value of <I> we have the final value given by
~~ m~ {(J 16) waL', sin' ('1'12»)
In a right angled triangle 'I' ~ 90', Then m ~ (w,a.L')/6

4) Orth'!.tropicaUy Reinforced Rectangular slab~SimplY

supported
along its edges and subjected to a Uniformly distributed
load of w/unit area

Referring to Fig. 9,19, the rectangular slab abcd is simply supported at the
Fig. 9.18 Triangular Slab Simply Supporled on Adjacent Edges edges, The yield line pattern assumed is given by ae, de, bf, cf and ef. M
and '.1m are the yield moments along the x and y-axis respectively. In the
For Element A, 8A• =(lIde) =(lIx, tan $) and 8A, =0 yield line pattern shown 'f\L' is an unknown dimension. The yield line efis
given a virtual displacement of unity.

For element B, 8•• ~ (lid!) ~,II(x tan 'I' - x tan $) For Element A, O. = (2/a.L), 0, = 0, M, = mL
•• (M"O, + M"O')A ~ (2mla,)
and 8B,~(l/gd)~ lI(x-yco!\V)
For elementD, Ox =O,O,.(IIf\),M, =(a.LlJI'l)
(M,O.+M,O)
• , 'B
~m[ tan\jl-tan$
I + I
cot<l>-cot\jl
]
.. (M"Ox+M"O')D ~ (a,wnlf\)

~m
I + tan \jI tan <1>] ()
~mcot\jl-<I>
Since elements A and C and Band D are similar
[ tan \jI- tan <I>
l.:(M,8) =2[2; t ,,~n]
Thus :1:(M,O) ~ m[cot('I' - $) + cot <1>]
The external work done is given by
:1:(W,o) ~ (116) waL ',sin 'I'
~ w ,L' [2~a + a(l ; 2f\) J
And
l.:(W,o)
Equating :1:(M,O) ~ :1:(W,o)
,
We have
 298 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Slabs 299

"r~-- t.r Cross multiplying, we get the quadratic as

f L

a~~'-LL<:LLLLLLJ.~AOLLL~:CLL..~;,jb h [4f3'+4~a'f3-3~a1 =0

~m .exJ1O:L/2
The positive root of this quadratic as
f3 = 'I, [-yr(3-.~-a"'-'+~~"ac-,) -3a ..r,;.

i
LQ"L

-+-Il L
e

-+-(
,
tI

1-2 Jl) L-+- Il L

'.,

-----f-
YL J?J
X
Substituting the value of f3 in the equation for m, we have

III
(wa'L')
= ~ [-Y(3+~a') - ~a1 ,
5) Isotropically reinforced circular slab, simply supported all round
ilL and uniformly loaded

g~=1 Referring to Fig. 9.20, a circular slah of radius 'r' is simply supported at
e the edges and supports a uniformly distributed load of w/unit area. In the
Fig. 9.19 Rectangular Slab Simply Supported at the Edges circular slabs, the faHuce will take place by the formation of an infinite
number of positive yield lines running radially from the centre to the cir-
Equating Z(M.8) = L(W.o) we get· cumference, resulting in the formation of a flat cone at collapse.
I.-,',,'

III =(..!..) a,J 3f3-2f3'l

12. L2f3+~a'J
If the work equation is of the form
111 :::: W [Ji(X_,X2)]
. f,(x,x,) o~ ,
h:_,U

I ~
For a maximum value of m, fA =
~ - A

(~)=o I
This is obtained for the condition
I
c~_ ~.L..:~::'"
It,;

!.(x"x,) (~) (f;(x"x,)] 6=1- 0 d

f,(x"x,)

Using this criterion, for a maximum value of m,

(~) ({,(x,,'x,)]
+- Y ---t- +- 1 -4- Yr+
Fig. 9.20 Circular Slab Simply Supported at the Edges

(~~)=o For unit displacement at the centre of slab

Hence we have External work done = Z (W . 0) = (1t.r'.wI3)

For a central displacement of unity
3f3-2~')=(3-4f3) "
( 2f3+~a' 2. LAOa = $ = (I/r)
 '~f' ~' ~;;.="c_,::~:. (,.• h'
Limit State Design ofSlabs 301

i" Change of slope of the slab in the taIlgential direction at A. pei unit length
Q/.
-r-- l l'
b
of are is equai to the angle between the two normal unit length of arc apart
at A and is given by (IIr..r). Total change of slope in one complete revo-
C
lution is give by m
1
LO = (2WA X IIr"r) = (21rJr) 8 D
e m
Internal work done in rotation at yield line = L(mLS) since all the yield
A
lines are of equal length.
d Yc
Work done.= mLre = m r (2rr1r) = 2n11l
Equating internal work to external work done we have
,~
(1/3).nJ1l.,2 w =2nm Q
f l
b

m = (6wr')
l' '

9.7.6 Yield Line Analysis By Equilibrium Metbod e

Fig. 9.21 Equilibrium of Element C

1'1"1
1) Square slab, isotropically Reinforced and Subjected to a Uniformly
Distributed Load

The assumed yield line pattern is shown in Fig. 9.21. Considering the
equilibrium of the triangular element C. we have by taking moments about
r ,1<-;- l

a /.~~~~LLL..<'LLL,~b
~~'r

the edge ab a:l

m.L = (112) L.(L/2)(w) (L/6)

m =(~')
1
2) Rectangular slab Orlhotropically Reinforced and subjected to a
Uniformly distributed load
b-r--
c.....,-,--l a:l
The assumed yield line pattern is shown in Fig. 9.22. Considering the
equilibrium of the trapezodial element A.

m.L =w [(I ~2P)L{ a;)( ~)+2(P~)( a;)( ~)] m

j
m

W~:L') P)]
m = [( (3 - 4
Fig. 9.22 Equilibriuin of Element in a Rectangular Slab

Taking moments about be for element B

 302 Reinforur/ ('(Jflr
,
hV,DeSlgn
.rr;l';
. Li/llit State Design ofSlabs 303

I ~,m,L = (1/6) w .a.j3',L J

,,
. m:::::~(
Wj3'L') , I

I
Equatmg the lV/fJ /'/
' fill'1'1J JTium equations we have, ,I
ra'(3-4j3)] =(13') m I
I

ur
L24 6l!
. ,I
1413' + 4l!a'j3 - 3l!a'l = 0 •I
the positive roC){ (/1' II I .., I
I Ii (/uadratlc III 13 IS I

'I,
II = [.,j(3l!a'+ l!'.a') -l!a'j J
Substituting the v'll . ":~
, lit' til f~ in the equilibrium equation we. have
I•

(wa'L') [..j(3+ l!a') - "aw1 '

I
/II "24 I

~... ,
3) Hexagonal Sill" I Fig. 9.23 Equilibrium of Elements in a Hexagonal Slab I
uniforml II ."lUh'opically reinforced and subjected to I

~",~ "
Y' NIo'IJ'"'"d load b) Depth of Slab
The isotropieally I{\j r
,
d
Considering the ('( II UI'~;cd hexagonal slab is shown in Fig. 9.23. For simply supported slabs using FeAl5 HYSD bars. according to IS: I
, IIIlJlhl'lilm of element A we have, ', 456-2000 code (span I overall depth) ratio = (35 x,0.8) = 28
,I
",./. =[! L {3L ,I {3 L]
2"2"3'2'
W
.. Overall depth = D = ( s~;n ) = (5~~O) = 178.5 mm I
I

W.L') Hence adopt overall depth = 180 mm L~

ffZ = ( -8-
=
And effective depth = d 160 mm ,
I
I
9.7.7 Design EXIUl\lll,,'
c) Ultimate loads
Design a simply Slip ,
vice live load of (I Y~'rtc2d square slab of 5 m side. length to support a ser-
HYSD bars A', ~NII\\. Adopt M·20 Grade concrete and Fe·415 grade
I
Self weight of slab = (18 x 25) = 4.5 kNlm'
code. . "'",\\' I"<IeI f
actors ' to the IS: 456 - 2000 standard
accordmg Live load = 4.0
,
~·UlIlI

=
Floor Finishes 1.5 "
"

a) Data
=
Total Load W = 10.0 kNlm'
,
~I
(U1timateload'= w, = (1.5 x 10)= 15 kNlm'

Square slab, silll!'1 ' . d) Ultimate moments and shear forces

Side length _ L ) '''''l''lrted at edges
- :;: ~\\\
Live Load = q =.\ ", • The yield or ultimate moment capacily of a simplysupported square slab is
" ~", \ll'
f"f= 20 N/mm',.t; = ·1\:- Nlmm' ~iven by "',' ' .
m = M," (w,.L'/24) = (15 x 5')/24 =15.625 kN,m/m
 Lilllit State Design ofSlabs 305
304 Reinforced Concrete Design

Ultimate shear= V, = (0.5 w,.L) = (0.5 x 15 x 5) = 37.5 kN/m b) Depth of Slab

e) Limiting Moment capacity of slab section

Overall depth = D = ( s~;n) =( 4~~O) = 143 mm
M,= 0.1 38J.".b.d' Adopt overall depth = 150 mm
= (0.138 x 20 x 10 3 X 160') 1O-6kN.m Effective depth = 130 mm
=70.65 kN.m
Since Mu < Mu,rirn the section is under reinforced. c) Ultimate loads

o Reinforcements in slab Self weight of slab = (0.15 x 25) = 3.75 kN/m'

Live load = 4.00
. [ A,,fy]
M, = III = 0.87 f.;1."d 1- bdj;,
Floor Finishes
Total service load
= L25
= 9.00 kN/m2

6 [415A" ] Therefore, ultimate load = w, = (L5 x 9) =13.5 kN/m'

(15.625 x 10 ) = (0.87 x415A" x 160) 1 - (lOOOx 160 x 20)
d) Ultimate Moments and Shear Forces
Solving A51 := 280mm 2
Adopt 10 mm diameter bars at 280 mm centres (A" = 280 mm')
M =m = (W"a'L') [.,j(3+~a')-a{,JY
" 24
g) Check for shear stress
=( 13.~: 16) [.,j(3 +0.7 x 0.44) -D.666,,[Q.7]'
X
T
•
=(V")
bd
=(37.5 10')=0.23
1000 x 160
N/mm' = 14.3 kN.mlm

( lOOA,,)
bd
=( 100X280) =0.175
1000 x 160
V, = (0.5w,L) = (0.5 x 13.5 x 4) = 27 kN/m

Permissible shear stress = k,T,= (L25 x 0.36) = 0.45 N/mm' e) Limiting Moment capacity of the Slab
Since ks'f:c > 'Tv. shear stresses are within safe permissible limits.
M,.lim = (O.l38/o,bd') = (0.138 x20x 1000x 130') 10-6
9.7.8 Design Example = 46.64 kN.mlm < M,
Hence, the section is underreinforced.
Design a rectangular slab 6m by 4m in size and simply supported at the
edges for a service live load of 4 kN/m . Assume co~eftlcient of orthotro-
2

phy (~) as 0.7, M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD Bars.
o Reinforcements
a) Data
A,,fy]
[
M" (short span) = 0.87 f,A" d 1- bd j;k
L =6m ~ =0.7
aL =4m J." =20 N/mm' 415A,,]
(14.3 x 10') = (0.87 x 415A" x 130) [ I - (1000 x 130 x 20)
a = 0.666 , =415N/mm'
Jy
 306 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Slabs 307

Solving A" = 323 0101'/01 b) Yield or ultimate moment

Adopt 10 0101 diameter bars at 240 0101 centres (A" = 327 mOl') in the short A,J; ]
span direction. III = M, = 0.87 f,A".d [1- bd h,

A" (Long span)= It (A",)

= (0.7 x 323)
2
;: 226 mm > ASl' min
= (0.87x415 x785 x 120)[1- (lO~~:~~:)20J .
~ (29.4 X10 ) N.mm
6
provide 10mm diameter bars at 340 mm centers along the long span (l1s1 =
231 mOl')
= 29.4 kN.m ,
g) Check for shear Stress c) Ultimate load on Slab
t·,. ••
i
= 11.025 kN/m'
,,
=(6m) =(6X29.4) I
= (--""-) = ( 27.x 1000 ) = 0.20 N/mm' IV
'" bd 1000 x 130 'aL' Ixl6
I

(100A,,) = ( 100 x 327 ) = 0.25

d) Service Live Load I

bd 1000 x 130
Permissible shear stress (Table-19 of IS:456) = k,.',= (1.3 x 0.36) = 0.468
Total Service Load = (11.025/1.5) = 7.35 kN/m'
Dead load of slab = (0.15 x 25) = 3.75 kN/m' r""
N/min2 which is greater than 't y • Hence shear stresses are within safe per- , Therefore, service live load = (7.35 - 3.75) = 3.6 kN/m'
missible limits. . 9.7.10 Analysis Example ;,U

9.7.9 Analysis Example
A right angled triangular slab is simply supported at the adja.cent edges AB
and Be. The side AB = BC = 401 and CA = 601. The slab IS Isotroplcally
reinforced with lOrom diameter bars at 100mm centr~s. both . ways at an
average effective depth of 120mm. The overall depth of the slab is 1500101.
Ifh' = 20 N/mm' and!, = 415 N/mm'. Estimate the safe permissible ser-
vice live load on the slab.
A hexagonal slab of side length 3m is simply supported at the edges and it
is -isotropically reinforced with 12mm diameter bars at 150mm centres.
both ways at an average effective depth of 118 0101. The overall'depth of
the slab is ISO 0101. Calculate the ultimate load eapacity of the slab and
also the safe permissible service live load ifh, = 20 N/mm' and!, = 415
N/mm'.
aj Data

a) Data Hexagonal slab, simply supported at edges

Side length = L = 3m
Triangular Slab ABC right angled at B 120101 diameter bars provided at 1500101 centres
AB =BC=4m
L=4m,aL=4m ... a= I .. x 113) = 753 mm'IIII
AsI ;;; ( 1000150
Reinforcement provided (lOmm diameter) at 100 mm centres both ways.
b) Yield or ultimate moment
A =(1000 x 78.5) = 785 mm'/m
SI 100
. [ A,J;]
III = M, = 0.87 !,A"d 1- bdh'
h, = 20 N/mm' and !, = 415 N/mm'.

I
 Reinforced Corycrete Design Limit State Design ofSlabs 309

Floor Finishes = 1.5

=(0.87x415x753x 118)[1- (753x415) ]
. (JOOOx'18x20) Total Service Load = 10.0 kN/m2
Ultimate design load = w, = (1.5 x 10) = 15 kN/m'
=27.84x IO'N.mm
=27.84 kN.m d) Ultimate moments and shear forces

c) Ultimate load on Slab The yield moment or ultimate moment capacity of a simply supported cir-
cular slab is given by the relation.
wu = -8m)
(U =
(8X27.84) ,
9 . = 24 .75 kN/m . m= (w{) =( 15 ~2.5') = 15.625 kN.m/m
d) Service live load
e) Limiting or balanced moment capacity of slab
Total service load =(24.75) = 16.5 kN/m'
. 1.5
M,.nm = 0.138 h,·b.d'
Dead load of slab = (0.15 x 25) = 3.75 kN/m' = (0.138 x 20 X 103 X 150') 10-6
:. Safe permissible live load = (16.5 - 3.75) = 12.75 kN/m' = 62.1 kN.m
Since m < Mn.1im • section is under reinforced.
9.7.11 Design Example
l) Reinforcements
Design a circular slab of diameter 5m which is simply supported at the
edges. Live load -= 4 kN/m'. Assume M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415
HYSD bars. Assume load factors according to IS:456-2000. . [AI.!']
m = M, = 0.87 f,.A,,·d I - bdh'

~~:~ x 20J
a) Data
(15.625 x 10') = (0.87 x415 xA" x 150) [I (1000
Circular Slab, simply supported at edges
Diameter of slab = 5 m, radius;' r = 2.5 m Solving A" = 300 mm'/m
Live load = 4 kN/m' Adopt IOmm diameter bars at 250mm centres (A" = 314 mm')
h, = 20 N/mm',f, =415 N/mm'
g) Check for shear stress
b) Depth of Slab

span) (5000)
v, = (0.5w,.L) = (0.5 x 15 x5) = 37.5 kN
Overall
. depth of slab = D = ( -28- = -28- = 178.5 mm
Adopt overall depth = 180 mm
t
,
=( V,)=( 1000
bd
37.5 x 10
x 150
3
;) =0.25 N/mm'
Effective depth = d = 150 mm

c) Ultimate Loads ( 100A,,)

bd·
=( 100 x 314) = 0 209
1000xl50 . .
Self weight of slab = (0.18 x 25) = 4.5 kN/m' Fronl Table.-19 ofl5:456 code, k, t, = (1.25 x 0.36) = 0.45 N/mm'
• Live Load = 4.0 Since ks 'tc->'t~. shearstresses are within safe permissible limits.
 310 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State [)(',\'ign of Slab.\'
311
9.7.12 Analysis Example t -'-,-c----- Lx = cc Ly -

A rectangular slab 4.5m by 6.5m is simply supported at the edges. The ra~
coefficient of orthotrophy. /.l : 0.75. If the ultimate design load is 12
kN/m2 • estimate the ultimate ~oment capacity of the slab in the short span !:.l /
2
direction by deriving the expression.
w = (24mIL;)(W lan'$) o

from first principles where

e of- 4 2

w : ultimate design load

!:r
2 3,
m = ultimate moment capacity of the slab in the short span direction
/.l : coefficient of orthotropy
L, : short span length
$ : angle made by the shorter yield line with the side L.,

a) Data
1 ~

+-.s:2 tan ~ ----t-

L Ly Icc -tan ~) I L ~,
- - r - t tan ~--f-
1
t
Short span length: L, : 4.5m
Long span length: aL, : L, : 6.5m ,.~
Ultimate design load: w: 12 kN/m' Fig. 9.24 Rectangular Slab With SimpJ)' SUlllllJl'h~d gdges
Coefficient of orthotrophy ,; /.l : 0.75 ~ Therefore,
Ultimate moment capacity of slab in the short span direction: m kN.m/m
, Total external work done in elements 1' 2·3
, and 4 ',,,.~ ()II'
) arne d as
, Ultimate moment capacity of slab in the long span direction: /.l m kN.m/m
L(W.o): 2 (work done in element I + work don~ in cloment 2)
b) Derivation of relation between ullimate load
L(W.o): (l12).w.L; (a - 1/3.tan $)
and ultimate .moment
Internal Work done on
. yield.
lines 'ae bf, cf
<'md de bY rotatIOn
. of
Referring to Fig. 9.24 eIements 1,2,3 and 4 IS obtamed as follows:
External work done: L (W . 0) For element -I,
Yield line of 'ef is given unit deflection, 0 : I
Work done by the elements I, 2, 3 and 4 are computed as detailed below
ex = (2JLy), ex = 0, Mx= m.Lx=m.aLy
For element -1. (Mx.ex+My.e y) = 2m,a)
Work done: [L, (a - tan $) (L,f2).(1/2)] For Element - 2,
+ [(2 x 'I,) x (L/2) tan $) x (L/2) x 1/3)]
8,=(2IL,.tan$),8,=0 and M,=""mJ.,
: [(114) L; (a - tan $) + (1/12) L; tan $]
.. (M.,8.+M,.8,) = 2",m/tan$)
For element 2.
(Total internal work done in all the yield lines is
Work done : [(1/2),L, (L/2) tan $ (1/3)]
: (I/12)L; tan$ L(M.S): 2 [2m.a+ (2/.ltnltan$)]

:4m[a+(Wtan$)]
 R,dh''lmced Conc~ete Design Limit State Design of Mabs . . 313

For equilibrium we must equate If the slab is fixed on all fOUf sides and m' is the moment capacity of the
negative reinforcement, then the relation between the ultimate moment and
ultimate load on the slab is expressed by the relation,
(1/2).IV.L,:(a -1/3tan$) =4m(a+ JL'tan$)
IV = [24(m +m')IL~ [JL'tan'$)
(IV L,:i24m) = (IX + JL'tan $)(3IX - tan $) ... (3)
If iii =m', then
For a maximum value of 'm', we have
[dmld (tau tjJ)] =0
Differentiating the R.H.S. of equation - 3 we have 9.7.13 Analysis Example
(IX + JL'tan $) (3a - tan $) =(-JL'tan'$)/(-I) = (JL'tan' $)
I A two~ way R.C.C. slab is rectangular having a size 4111 by 5 m with two
I [IX. tan' $ + 21t. tan $ - 3IX.ItJ = 0 longer edges fixed in position and the two shorter edges are simply sup~
I
The positive root of the quadratic is ported. Derive the relation between moment capacity of slab and ultimate

~.~
load by first principles and hence design the slab for a working Jive load of
tan $ = ...j~(3-1t-+~1t,c-/IX7,) -(JL'IX) 3 kNlm' by yield line theory. Assume Il = 0.8 Adopt M-15 grade concrete
Which gives the values tan <l> for minimum collapse load. and HYSD bars.
I
I Substituting this in equation 3, the collapse load is expressed as
a) Data
lt w = (24.m/Z;)(Wtan'tjJ) ...(4) Short span length = L y = 4 m

::q c) Example
Long span length = L, = 5 m
Coefficient of orthotropy Il 0.8
= =
Working live load q 3 kN/m'
= =
,
..yt
In the given example: Longer edges are fixed and shorter edges are simJ?ly supported.
.,~

, w =
12 kN/m'
Concrete: M-15 grade
Steel: Fe-415 grade HYSD bars
Il = 0.75
L, =6.5 m
b) Stresses
L y =4.5 m
'j a = (6.5 1 4.5) =
1.44
!ok = 15 N/mm',fy = 415 N/mm'
tau tjJ = V(31l + Il'/a') - (wa)
c) Derivation of Relation
., = V(2 x0.75) + (0.75'11.44') ,- (0.7511.44)
'1 Referring to Fig. 9.25
= 1.06
External work done is obtained as
m = (wL:124) (tan'tjJ/ll)
L(W.Ii) = w.(II2)L:(a-1I3 tantjJ)
= [(12 x 4.5')/(24)] [(1.06'/0.75)] Internal work done by rotation of
= 15.16 kN.m/m (a) Positive yield lines = 4m (et + wtan tjJ)
. (b) Negative yield lines = 4 a.m'
 314 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Slabs 315

d) Example "j

I
(Total internal work done (MO) is expressed as
t Lx ------~'I~ a ~ (L, I L,) ~ (5/4) ~ 1.25

T
I
'~~-; L, ~ 5 m, L, " 4m, 11 ~ 0.8
- - - ~~9~i::- y~et-; l~e - - - - - - - e) Thickness of Slab
i
For a two way slab (IS: 456)
Ipm Effective depth ~ d ~ (span/35) ~ (4000 I Jj) ~114 mm.

1
Adopt d ~ 120 mm and overall depth D ~ 150
Ly
4m
---k-.L
t) Loads

Positive yield line ~ Self weight of slab ~ (0.15 x 24) ~ 3.6 kN/m'
Finishes ~ 0.6
~-m-~-~-:xm;-~-XJC-OO-:XX;-W-;;:X;-oo-:Xx--Xi-rn-ro-m'· .
Live load ~ 3.0
Total working load ~ 7.2 kN/m'
.,/~~-------- 5m ---------,}_ (Ultimate load ~ w ~ (1.5 x 7.2) ~ 10.8 kN/m'

Fig. 9.25 Rectangular Slab With Fixed and Simply Supported Edges
g) Moment of Resistance
I(MO) ~ 4a(m + m') + (4""J1tan $)
tan$ ~ "';(1.511 + 1"/40:') -(fl/2a)
Equating 2:.(W.8) ~ I(M.O)
w .(1I2)L;(0: - 1/3 tan$) ~ 40:(m + m') + (4mfl/tan $) ~ "';(1.5 x 0.8) + (0.8'M x 1.25') - (0.8/2 x 1.25)

Assuming m = m' ~0.82

w.(1I2)L;(a-1I3tan$) ~ 4m(20: + fl/tan$) m ~ (wL;124)(tan' $/1')

(w .L;)(24m) ~ (20: + fl/ tan $)/(30: - tan $) ~ (10.8 x 4'/24)(0.82'10.8)

For a maximum value 'm' differentiating the right hand side of the equa- ~6.05kNm/m
tion we have
For the R.C.C. slab with d ~ 120 mm
20: + (fl/tan $)/(3a - tan $) ~ (-fl/tan' $)(-1) ~ (fl/tan' $)

[20: tan' $ + 211 tan $ - 30:.11] ~ 0

The positive root of this quadratic is ~ (0.148 x 15 x 1000 x 120')/10'

tan $ ~ (1.511 + 11'/40:') - (fl/2a) ~ 331.968 kN m/m

and Since m < Mu,lim. the slab is under reinforced

.. (6.05 X 10') ~ 0.87f,.A"d [1- (A,J,)/(b.d.!,,)]

~ (0.87 x 415 xA" x 120)[1'- (1l,,.415)1(1000 x 120x 15)]

I
 Limit Stale Design of Slabs 317
Reinforced.Coll~fe/e.Desigll _.
Ultimate load :;; IV
Solving, A" = 150mm' Slab is isotropically reinforced.
But minimum quantity of sieel = 0.12% Three adjacent edges are simply supported and the rcmaining edge. is
= (0.i2 x 1000 x 150/100) = 180 mm'l m unsupported.
Adopt 6 mm diameter bars at 150 mm centres both ways and also over the b) Derivation of Reh'tion
fixed edges as negative reinforcement.
Rcferring to Fig. 9.26, the external work done is computed for elements 1,
9.7.14 Analysis Example 2 and 3.
For element 1, we have
A uniformly loaded isotropically reinforced concrete square slab is simply
supported on three sides and unsupported on the fourth.lfw = load per unit (W.8) = [(0.5 x 0.5L tan'" x (l13)Jw = (w.L '. tan "'/I 2J
area at collapse of slab and m :::positive plastic mo~ent per unii'width, For element 2, we have
show that for the yield line pattern shown in Fig 9.26, the minimum upper
(W.8) = [0.5w x 0.5L(L - 0.5L tan"')] + [(0.5w x O.5L IOn'" X 0.5L(1/3)J
bound solution is given.by the relation,

w =C~~m) Where tan"'= 1.4

'~ '1'
Where '" = Angle made by the inclined yield line with the edge. (TOIaI external work done for elements 1,2 and 3 is given by

---.F-f-L- Ll2 ¢--+ (W.8) = [(w L '. tan <I»1I2J + [2(w.L '/4) (I - tan "'/3)]

1
-f---LI2 tan. tan
= [(w.L')121 [1-(tan(/6)1
/. ¢
Internal work done by rotation of yield lines is computed for the elements
2 LI2 1,2, and 3. . i
For element 1, we have
,
I
8, = (2/L . tan 8), 8, = 0, and M, = m.L
"" (M, 8,+ My 0,) = (2/L.tan 0) (m.L) = (2m/ta" 8)
I L
I For elements 2 and 3 we have
,• /

8, = (2/L), 8, = 0, and My = m.L

1
j (M, 0,+ My 8,) = (2/L) (m.L) = 4 m
LI2
1 3 .
, " Total internal work done is given by the equation

.~~'7'77777 JL
I

I ~(M8) = [4m + (2mltan"')]

I
j x Equating ~(W.8) = ~(MO)
" , -------+A
.,tf------- L
I
, [ 1 -tan
(IVL-) -- 2m 'J
"'] = [ 4m +--
I
Fig. 9.26 R.C. SI~b With Three Edges Simply Supported and One Edge Free
6 tan'"
I

V" "1
1
a) Data IV.L \,,)
( 24
=[ 2 + (IItan",)]
(6-10""')
Side length of slab = L, = L, = L
Moment capacity of slab::: m
 318 R~illforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Slabs 319

For a maximum value of '111', differentiating the right hand side of the '5) De~ign t~e .interiorspan Df a .continuous slab for an office floor ·to suit
equation. we have the relation. the following data:
(2 + (1/tao<l»)] ~[-(1Itao'<I»] ~[_l_, ] Slab is continuous over tee-beams spaced at 4 m intervals. Width of
rib ~ 250 mm
[ (6-tao<l» -1 tao <I>
Superimposed load on office floor ~ 4 kN/m'.
Cross multiplying. the quadratic equation. is obtained as
Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe415 HYSD bars.
(tao'<I> +tant;> - 3) ~ 0
,I 6) A flat slab floor with drops is proposed for a ware house 20 m by 30 m
The positive root of this quadratic equation is in size. Using a column grid of 5 m by 5 m design an interior panel of
the flat slab to support a live load of 7.5 kN/m'. Adopt M-20 grade
tao<l>~[-1+~J~1.3 concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. . "
7) Design the exterior panel of a flat slab using the following data:' _...
Substituting this value of tan <I> in equation (I), we have the final relation =
Size of panel ~ 6m by 6 m,· Loading class 5 kNlm', Column size =
between collapse load and ultimate moment capacity of the slab as 400 mm diameter. Height between floors ~ 4 m. Thickness of slab in
=
column strip 250 mm and·thickness of slab in middle sttips 200 =
(W.L') [ I ]
24m ~ (1.3)'
mm. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. Sketch the
details of reinforcements in the slab.
14.2m) 8) A square slab of 4 m side length is simply supported along the edges.
W=
.(
-U The slab is required to support a uniformly distributed load of 4
kN/m'. Using the yield line theory, design the slab using M-20 grade
9,8 EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
9) A rectangular slab 6.5 m by 4.5 m, simply supported along its edges-is
I) A simply supported slab has a clear span of 2.1 m and is supported on to be d~signed as an isotropically reinforced slab· to ·support an uni-
walls 400mm thick along the edges. If the hve load on the slab IS 4 formly distributed working live load of 4 kN/m'. Design the slab using
kNlm', and the floor finish weighs 0.6 kNlm',design the slab using yield line theory and adopting M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415
M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. HYSD bars.
2) Design a two" way slab for a residential roof to suit the following data: 10) A triangular reinforced concrete slab has equal sides of length 5 m.
Size ofroof~ 4.5 m by 6 m The isotropically reinforced slab is simply 'supported on two sides and
Edge conditions: simply supported on all the sides on load bearing carries a uniformly distributed load. If the moment of resistance of the
masonry walls 300 mOl thick without any provision for torsion at cor- section of the slab is 30 kN.m1m, estimate the ultimate collapse load
ners. carried by the slab from first principles.
Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
II) A hexagonal slab, simply supported on all the edges has a side length
3) Design a two- way slab 4 m by 6 m continuous on all the edges and of 4 m. Find the uniformly distributed load which would cause col-
supported on 300 mm wide beams to serve as an office floor. Adopt lapse of the isotropically reinforced slab if the ultimate moment of
M-25 grade concrete and Fe-500 HYSD bars. Sketch the details of resistance of the slab is 6 kN.m1m.
reinforcements in the slab.
12) A rectangular slab 6 m by 4 m is isotropically reinforced and is con-
4) A cycle stand shade consists of a R.C slab which cantilevers 3 man linneus 'over all the edges. The slab is reinforced with similar rein-
each side of a central R.C. beam and is monolithic with the beam. f~rcements to resist both positive and negative moments. Show that
Design the cantilever 'slab for a superimposed load of 1.5 kN/m'. the ultimate inoment capacity of the slab fan be expressed as
Aaopt M-20 grade concret~ and'Fe-41~, HYSD bars.
m = (w.r..;. tan' <jl)/(48)
 320 Rei,Vo"rteclConcrete Design
where. m =' ultimate moment of resistance of the slab per unit length
L = short span length CHAPTER 10
q/ = angle made by the positive yield line with shorter edge
2
Also, design the slab for a service design live load of 6 kN/m lIsing Limit State Design of
yield line theory. AdoptM-20 grade concrete and Fc-415 HYSD bars.
Columns and Footings
13) A rectangular slab 6m by 4.5 m is simply supported at the edges. The
coefficient of orthotropy Il = 0.7; If the ultimate design load is 16
kN/m2, estimate the ultimate moment capacity of the slab in the short
span direction using yicld linc theory. 10.1 INTRODUCTION
14) A two way reinforced concrete slab 6 In by 4 In has two longer edges
fixed in position and the two shorter edges are simply supported. Structural concrete members in compression are generally referrcd to as
Derive the relation between the moment of resistance of the slab and columlls and struts. The term 'Column' is associated with members tfHns-
the ultimate load using yield line principles. Also design ~he slab for a fCITing loads to the ground and the term 'strut' is applied to compression
service load of 4 kN/m 2 using yield line theory. Assume the coeffi- mcmbers is any direction such as those ill a truss.The IS:456-2000 code
cient of orthotropy as 0.8. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 clause 25.1.1 defines the column as a 'compression mcmber' the effective
length of which exceeds three times the I.cast lateral dimension.The term
HYSD bars.
'pedestn!' is used to describe a vettical compression member whose effec-
15) An isotropically reinforced square slab of side length 5 m is simply tive length is less than three times to least lateral dimcnsion.
supported on three sides and unsupported on the fourth side. Derive
Axially loaded columns may fail in any of the following three modes:
the relation between the moment 0f resistance and the ultimate I?ad
carrying capacity of the slab using yield line the~ory. Also, design thc I) Pure compression failure
slab to support a working live load of 4 kN/m-. Adopt M-25 grade 2) Combined compression and-bending fail me
n' ...
concrete and Fe-500 HYSD bars. 3) Failure by elastic instability.
The failure modes depem! primarily on the slenderness ratio of the member
16) A square slab of 4 m side length is simply supported along2
ihc edges
and supports a uniformly distributed load of 20 kN/m , including its which is turn depends on the cross sectional dimensions, effective length,
own self- weight. If the slab is reinforced isotropically to give an ulti- and support conditions of the member.
mate moment of resistance of20 kN.m/m, calculate the magnitude of
the additional central point load rcquired to cause collapse of the slab. 10.2 Classification of Columns
Assume a pattern of simple diagonal yield lines.
a) Based on Type of Reinforcement

Depending on the type of reinforcement used, reinforced concrete columns

are classified into the following three groups.
1) 'Tied Columns' in which the main\ longitudinnl bars are confined
within closely spaced lateral ties [Fig. 10.1 (a)]
2) 'Spiral Columns' having main longitudinal reinforcements enclosed
within closely spaced and continuously wound spiral reinforcement
[Fig. 10.1 (b)]
3) 'Composite Columns' in which the longitudinal reinforcement is in
the form of structural steel section 01' pipes with or without longitudi-
nal bars [Fig. 10.1 (c)]
 Limit State Design ofCoiwnns and Footings 323
~22 Reinforced Concrete Design
P .P
•

Longitudinal Centroidal
bars axis

/T ie Elevation

]
(bl Spiral Coiumn (c) Composite Column
ill
(a) Axial Loading
Cross section
(b) Uniaxial (c) Biaxial
Fig. 10.1 Types of Columns 1 Eccentric Eccentric
Loading lOf,.;ding
In general tied columns are the most commonly used havihg different
Fig. 10.2 'T)'pes of Loading on Columns
shapes (Square. rectangular. T. L. circular etc).
Spiral columns are adopted with circular cross sections and also for Col.umns may be classified as.
square"and octagonal sections. i) 'Short Columns
ii) Slender or Long columns
b) Based on type of loading
IS: 456-2000 code clause 25.1.2 classifies a rectangular compression
Depending upon the type of loading columns may be classified into the member as short when both the slenderness ratio's (f,.,/D) and (L,/b) are
following three types. less than 12,
i) Axially loaded columns supporting concrete loads are relatively-rare. Where Le1l. = effective length in respect of major axis
Interior columns of multistoried buildings with symmetrical loads D ~ depth in respect of major axis
.from floor slabs from all sides are common examples of this type [ Ley = Effective length in respect of minor axis and
b ~ width of the member. .
Fig. 10.2 (a)]. .
ii) Column with uniaxial eccentric loading are generally encountered 10 If any of these ratios is equal to or more than 12, then if is, termed as
the case of columns rigidly connected to beams from one side only slender or long column. This definition is not suitable for non-rectangular
such as the edge columns [Fig. 10.2 (b)]. and non-circular sections where the slenderness ratio is better defined in
iii) Columns with biaxial eccentric loading is common in corner columns terms of the radius of gyration rather than the lateral dimensions.
with beams rigidly connected at right angles on the top of the column
[Fig. 10.2 (c)]. 10.3 EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS
Eccentrically loaded columns have to be designed for combined axial force
and bending moments. 10.3.1 Computation of Effective Length

e) Based on Slenderness Ratio The effective length of a column depends upon the unsupported length
(distance between lateral connections) and the boundary conditions at the
Depending on the slenderness ratio. (Effective length/Least lateral dimen- ends of column due to the conditions of the framing beams and other
members.
sion)
 'R"inll:m,ed Concrete Design Limit State Design o/Columns and Footings, 325
"The effective length 'L,r' can be expressed in the form. recommends that the clear distance between rcstrHints (un supported
L,r= kL length) should never exceed 60 times the least lateral dimensions of the
Where L = ·Unsupported length or clear height of columns column (clause 25.3.1). For llllbraced columns, it is recommended thal this
k = Effective length ratio or a constant depending upon the value is limited to 30. In cantilever columns, in addition to the abo\'c
degrees of rotatipnal and translational restraints at the restriction (L:$ 60b), the clear height should also not exceed the vallie of L
:::: (I 00 b~/D), where D is the depth of cross section mcasured in the plane
ends of column.
under consideration and 'b' is the width of cross section (clause 25.3.2)
The effective length of compression members depends upon the brac-
ing and end conditions. For braced (Laterally restrained at ends) columns, 10.3.3 Minimum Eccentricities
the effective length is less than the clear height between the restrains,
whereas for un braced and partially braced columns, the effective length is All columns should be designed for minimum eccentricity (Clause 25.4),
greater than the clear length between ihe restraints: which may arise due to iJilperfections in constructions and il1<lccunlcy in
For design purposes, assuming idealized conditions, the effective loading given by the relation,
length Le may be assessed for different types of end conditions using the
Table-IO.l (Table 28 otIS: 456-2000).
em,,, =[5~0 +~J
TabJe 10.1 Effective Length of Compression, members but not less than 20 mm
I (Table-28 of IS: 456-2000)
I
Where L = Unsupported length
I Degree of EndRostraint of Theoretical Recommended D = Lateral dimensions in the plane of bending
I Compression Member Value of Eft8C~ Value of EffBC'i~8
,I live Length longth For non-rectangular and non-circular cross sectional shapcs, SP: 24'~ rec-
.
1I'1,'I'lf 1
Effectively held In position and restrained against
2
0.5 L
3
0.65 L
ommends the minimum eccentricity as

rolalloo at both ends

e min :::: (Lj300) or 20 mm (whichever is grcater)
Effectively held in P9siIJon al both ends, restrained, 0.7 L 0.80 L
agaInst rolation alone end 10.3.4 Braced and Unbraced Columns
Effectively held In position at both ends, but no 1.00L 1.00 L
restrained rolation
In a framed stl'llcture, an approximate method of deciding whether a col-
Effectively held in position and restrained against
rOlatlon at one end, and al the other restrained 1.00 L
umn is 'braced' or 'unbraced' is specified in the ACI code COlllll1entar/ 5
1.20 L
agaInst rotation but not held in position and is reproduced in the revised IS: 456-2000 code. For this purpose. the
Effectively held in position and restrained against •stability index' (Q) of a storey in a framed multistorey stl'llcturc is defined
rolatlon at one end, and at the other partially - 1.50 L as
restrained against rotation but not held in position
Effectrvely held In position at one end bUl not
restrained agaInst rotation, and at the olher end 2.00 L 2.00 L
.Q= [IP"
-x-
h
1I"]
Hs u
... (10.2)
r~strained against rotation but not held in position

Etfecliveiy held in position and restrained against Where "LPIJ:::: sum of axial loads on1all columns in the storey
rotallon at one end but not held In position nor 2.00 L 2.00 L
restrained against rotation at the other end Jr, = height of the storey
.61J = elastically computed first order lateral deflection of
the storey
10.3.2 Slenderness Limits HIJ = total lateral force acting within the storey.
In the absence of bracing elements, Taranath 86 has shown that the Interal
The columns' dimensions should be selected in such a way that it fails by
material failure only and not by buckling. To ensure this critcril)!l. the code
 326 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Columns and Footings 327

flexibility measure of the storey (6JHu) (storey drift per unit storey shear) l'O'~--,,--,,"---'''''----'--~
~
Hinged '0
can be expressed by the relation.

(fi:"'"J ~ ["; 11;]

12£,.<0,,£([./11,) + 12£"",,",L(J,/L
b)
... (10.3)

Where 'L( ;::; sum of second moment of areas of all columns in the
storey in the plane under consideration.
I
'f.Utl4)= sumaf the ratios of second moment of area to span
of all floor members in the storey in the plane under
consideration.
Ec := modulus of elasticity of concrete
The equation for the stability index 'Q' is based on the assumption that ·the
points of contra flexure occurs at the mid heights of all columns and mid
span points of all beams and by applying unit load method to an isolated
store86; If Bracing elements such as trusses, shear walls and infill walls arc
used then their beneficial effect will be to reduce the ratio (6./H u) signifi- O' 21--'""-,
cantly.
If the value of Q ,,; 0.04, then the column may be considered as no sway
column (braced), otherwise the column may be treated as sway column
Fixed O{32.~~h-.L"l.}-~.....':>.-,t.~~~&~'--~
(unbraced). 1·0
IS: 456-2000 codal charts (Fig. 10.3 & lOA) are very useful in determining Fixed J\z Hinged
the effective length ratios of braced and unbraced columns respectively; in Fig. 10.3 Effective Length Ratios For a Column tn a Frame With no Sway (Braced
Cotumns) (IS: 456:290 Fig. 26)
terms of ~I &~, which represent the degree of rotational freedom at the top
and bottom ends of the column. The values of ~, and ~, for braced and Calculate the'effective length of the typical lower storey columns assuming
unbraced columns are gi ven by the- relations, a total distributed load 30 kN/m' from all the floors above & the grade of
concrete as M-20. Adopt IS: 456-2000 codal method for computations:
'£1./11, ] (For braced columns) .. .(1004)
~,~ [ '£1./11. + '£0.5(I,/Lb )
a) nata

~'~['£I./1I.;i;~([,/LbJ (For unbraced columns) ... (10.5) Size of columns ~ 300 x 300 mm
Height of storey =Ii. =3.5 m
The limiting values ~ ~ 0 and ~ = I, represent the 'fully fixed' 'fnlly =
Width of beam 250mm
hinged' conditions respectively. =
Depth of beam 500 mm
The following example illustrates the checking of braced and unbraced Length of beam = 4 m
columns and the computation of effective length. =
Total distributed load 30 kN/m'
No. of Columns ~ 16
No. of Beams in XX or YY-directions = 12
10.3.5 Example
Grade of concrete~M-20
A multistoreyed building plan shown in Fig. 10.5 (a) has 16 columns of

I
size 300 x 300 mm iilterconnected by floor beams of size 250 mm by 500
mm in the longltu.dinal & transverse, ~irectiohs.The storey height is 3.5 m.
 , , . . Limit Stale Design bj Columns and Footings 329
328 Reillforce4 (on!;rete Design
"T- 4 m -+--
r
'1' 4m 4 m---+
Hinged
1·0 r:=::::::::-'f~--I----,T-":::::-T'~~~
All beams
4m
200J 500

l
YLx 1-
4m

VOcoiL
All
dOO
XL ..Jx +
4m

."
(a) Framing Plan
1
n
...
Fixed 00~--'--":>"0"l.L,,2-"-'-r-~01..
4j..~-'0~''='6--I~L;;J-:!-..\..L.Ll.,Jl'O
112 Hinged.
Fig. 10.4 Effective Length Ratios For a Column in a Frame Without Restraint
Against Sway (Unbraccd Columns) (IS: 456:200 Fig. 27)

b) Relative stiffness of Columns and Beams

.Ii " ·····{l
" Referring to Fig. 1O.5(b)
Un-snpported length of column = L = (3500-500) = 300 mm
i) Columns: 16 Nos, (300 x 300mm) and ii, = 3500 m
1 ,., -7
:~O,.
~
;T~
,., . . 1
't 500
-t-
L (~) = [ 16 x ~~~~4/12 ] = (3086 X lO'l mm' (b) Sectio'n X X
Fig.tO.S Multi-Slorey Building Frame
ii) Beams in each direction XX or yy

L(I..)=[12X250X(500)l/12]=(7812
4 4000 x
lO'l
mm
l (H"'0) =(12X22360)
o
3500' [ I I] X --
(3086XIO,t(7812XIO') =(5.99I IO )mm/N

Total axial Load on all columns = (12 x 12 x 30) = Po = 4320 kN

c) Cheek for braced or Unbraeed Columns
Stability Index = Q = [Po x "'''] = [4320X 1O' (5.991 x 10--;1'J = 0.00739 < 0.04
h; [I
(H"'0) = 12E, I]
L(llh,) +"DiJL b)
h, Ho 3500
o
Hence, the columns in the storey can be considered as braced in XX and
E, = 5000 .:.g;; according to c1anse 6.2.3.1 of IS: 456 - 2000 YY directions.
Therefore E, = 5000 120 = 22360 N/mm'
 Limit State DesIgn oJ Columns and JoOOlll1gs .l.ll
330 Reinforced Concrete Design

d) Effective length of columns using IS: 456 code charts ... (10.6)

Where
~ _~ _ 'f,(I/h,)
The IS: 456-2000 code requires that all columns are to be designed for
1- ,- bI/h,) + 'f,0.5(1,/4)] minimum eccentricity of 0.05 times the lateral dimension. Hence the -final
expression for the ultimate load is obtained by reducing the value of P, by
12 10 percent in the equation (10.6) specified above as
'f,(I/h);' [(300)4/ "'2J.= (385 x 10') mm'
, 3500
P, = 0.4 /,,A, + 0.67 f,.A" ... (10.7)
'f,(I"I4) = [ 250 :ggg'/12 x 2] = (1302 X 10') mm' = (0.4 /".A, + (0.67 f, -0.4/"JA,J . ... (10.8)
Where P, = axial ultimate load on the member
.. ~1 = ~, = L385 x 1O'/:~0~5IS'1302 x IO,J = 0.371 '. fck
Ac
== characteristic compressive strength of concrete
= area of concrete
Referring to Fig. 10.3 [Fig. 26 of IS: 456-2000] and interpolating the
f; = characteristic strength of the compression reinforcement
Asc = area of longitudinal reinforcement.
effective length ratio as,
Short columns with helical reinforcement (spiral columns) have increased
k =(~) = 0.630 ductility prior to collapse and hence the code permits 5 percent increase in
the load carrying capacity of spiral columns. However the ratio of the vol-
.~

L, = (0.630 x 3000) = 1890 mm ume of helical reinforcement to the volume of the core shall be not less
than,
. of the coI
Slenderness rallo umn''s = (L,)
D'= (1890)
300 = 6.3 < 12

Hence, the column should be designed as short column. according to clause 39.4.1 of IS:456-2000.

10.4 DESIGN OF SHORT COLUMNS UNDER AXIAL 10.4.2 Design Example

COMPRESSION
Design the reinforcements in a column of size 400 mm by 600 mm sub-
10.4,1 Assumptions jected to an axial working load of 2000 kN. The column has an unsup-
ported length of 3m and is braced against side sway in both directions.
The main assumptions made for limit state design of columns failing under Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
pure compressi9n as specified in clause 39.1 are as follows:
·J.l

a) The maximum compressive sJrain in concrete in axial compression is a) Data

0.002.
b) Plane sections remain plane in compression Column Dimensions 400 mm by 600mm
c) The design stress-strain curve of steel in compression is taken to be Axial service load = 2000 kN
the same as in tension Un supported length L = 3 m
The design stress in steel is 0.87 f, in Fe-250. 415 and Fe-500 grade steels. Column Braced against side sway
Accordingly, under pure axial loading conditions the design strength of f" = 20 N/mm' and f, = 415 N/mm'
short columns is expressed as D, = 400 mm and D, = 600 mm
 'Reinforced Concrete Design LimitState Des.ign of Columns and Footings 333

I) Lateral Ties
b) Slenderness Ratio
Tie diameter: < (1/4)(25) = 6.25 mm
k, =e:'J and k, =(i'J > 16mm
Hence, provide 8 mm diameter ties
As the ·column is braced against side sway in both directions, effective
Tie spacing: > 400 mm
length ratio k~ and k)' are both less than unity.
> (16 x 20) = 320 mm
And (~J=e4~000) = 7.5 < 12 .. Provide 8 mm diameter ties at 300 mm etc

Hence, the columns is designed as a short col~lmn. g) The detailing of reinforcements in the column section is shown in Fig.
10.6.
c) Minimum Eccentricity

. II<
e . = 3000
x. mill
600J
--+~ ;:::26>20mm
[ 500' 30 {C (ear cover
t----- 600--t
n'o! =40 mm) 4-#25
e . = [3000 + ~Q~J = 19.33 < 20 mm
y.ml" 500 30

t~~~~~~~j~Ties
2-#25
Also 0.05 D, = (0.05 X 600) = 30 > -"m;" #8-300 ele
(at middle 01 (Staggered)
0.05 D, = (0.05 X 400) = 20 > -"m;" short face) 4-#20
Hence, the codal formula (Eq: 10.6) for short columns is applicable
Fig•.10.6 Reinforcements in Short Column

d) Factored (Ultimate) Load 10,4,3 Design Example

p" =(1.5 x 2000) = 3000 kN Design the reinforcements in a circular column of diameter 300 mm with
helical reinforcement to support a factored load of 1500 KN. The columns
a) Longitudinal Reinforcements has an unsupported length of 3 m and is braced against sidesway. Adopt
M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
p" = [OAld.A, + (0.67/, - OA/,,)AJ
a) Data
(3000 x IO J ) ~ (004 x 20 X 400 x 600) + [(0.67 x 415) - (004 x 20)lA"
Diameter of column = D = 300 mm
H ._.,
Solving A" = 4000 mm' Unsupported length = L = 3000 mOl
Provide 6-25 mm diameter bars: (6 x 491) = 2946 mm' Column braced against sidesJvay.
4-20 mm diameter bars:(4 x 314) = 1256 mOl' Factored Load'; P = 1500 kN
Total A" = 4202 mm' > 4000 mm' };. = 20 N/mm' "
The area of reinforcement provided is greater than the minimum steel f, = 415 N/mm'
requirement of 0,8 percent = (0.008 x 400 x 600) = 1920 mm'
334 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Colunms and Footings 335

b) Slenderness Ratio According to code clause 39.4.1 (IS:456)

(LjD) = (3000/300) = 10 < 12

(V,,)
V, < 0.36[(A,!A,) -1] (/,/1,)
Hence, the column designed as short ~olumn,
3330 i x 10' ) < 0 36 r(170685) - IJ (~)
c) Minimum Eccentricity ( p(34317xI03) . . U34317 415
Solving pitch 'p' 52.78 mOl
e. = -L+ D-J = [3000
- - +300J
- =16mm(20mm) Codal restriction on pitch [Clause 26.5.3.2 (d)]
m'" [ 500 30 500 , 30 . '
/ P < 75 mOl or (core diameter/6) = (220/6) = 36.6 mOl
AlsoO.05D = (0.05 X 300) = 15 mOl < 20 mOl / p > 25 mOl or (3 times the diameter of helix) = (3 x 8) = 24 mOl
Hence, the codal formula for axially compressed column can be used. Hence, provide 8 mOl diameter spirals at a pitch of 36 mOl,

d) Longitudinal Reinforcements / o Reinforcement Details

According to IS: 456-code clause 39.4 ,.The details of reinforcements in the helically reinforced column are ShOy.'1l
in Pig.l 0.7.
P, = 1.05[0.4 hk A, + (0.67 I, -0.4 l'k)A,J /

1500 X 10') =[0.4 x20 x nx 300' + {(0.67 x415) _ (0.4 x 20)}A,,]

( # 8 spiral at

1
1.05 4 pitch 36 mOl
Solving A" = 3197 mOl'
ASC,lllln. = 08%
•
of gross cross section = (0.008 x. n x 2300'/4) = 565 mOl' 6# 28
Provide 6 bars of 28 mOl diameter (A" = 3696 mOl )

e) Helical Reinforcement (spirals)

Clear cover
40 mOl
..
Assuming clear cover of 40 mm over spirals
Core diameter = [300-(2 x 40)] = 220 mOl
+-300--+
Area of core =A,=[( nX~20')_3696] =34317 mOl'
#: e spiral at
Volume of core/m = V, = (34317 X 10') mOl' 36 mOl pilch

. (n
Gross Area of sectIOn = A, = - x- 300')
4 - = 70685 mOl,
6 #8

' - l / v - t -.......Clear cover

40 mOl
Using 8mm diameter helical spirals ata pitch 'p'. mOl, the volume of heli-
cal spiral per metre length is given by
Fig. 10.7 Reinforcement in Helically Reinforced Column
V" = n(300 - 80 - 8)50 x (1000/p) mm'/m

= (33301 x IO')/p mm'/m

 1~einfotced Concrete Design
Limit State Design ofColumns and Footings 337.
10.5 DESIGN OF SHORT COLUMNS UNDER COMPRESSION
WITH UNIAXIAL BENDING Pu M P
Mu ,--e=(~)-fU
10.5.1 Introduction

The external columns of multistoreyed buildings and columns supporting

crane· loads through corbels arc subjected to direct loads and bending
moments. The compression members should be designed for axial load and I
bending m~ment based on the assumptions prescribed in 15:456-2000 code i
~I'-'-
m·,
clauses 39.1 and 39.2
The analytical design of members subjected to combined axial load and
uniaxial bending involves lengthy calculation by trial and error and the
I
+--
I
0
I
method uses equilibrium equal to determine the area of reinforcement
required to resist direct loads and uniaxial moment. In order to overcome
•
•
I •
•
3, e ::,eb
I
,I
• 2, e::eD
these difficulties, LS code recommends the use of in~eracti0!1 diagrams •
- - - -~~l:-----,
involving non~dimensional parameters presented in SP: 16 design aids for
reinforced concrete. Cross sec t ion l' , e:: emin .fI ;>::::::~s.~&:d £cu=0·002
l l,e=o Pivot
I . £cu=00035

"n
10.5.2 Interaction Diagrams

The interaction diagram represents the design strength of eccentrically

loaded·column of known section ·properties. The salient points on die
interaction curve corresponds to the design strength values of axial load Pu
Pu
e=
<D
0 L . +---xu=O 0·420
Xu O----_t-
Strain Distribution

and the moment M u associated with an eccentricity •e'. Fig. 10.8 shows a
typical interaction curve with P u on Y-axis and M u on X-axis along wit~ /
strain profiles. INTERACTION CURVE
The interaction curve deftnes the different load-moment (P, & M,)'
/ /
combinations for all possible eccentricities of loading.. For desi~n pur- / /
poses, the calculations of M u and P u are based on the design stress-strain / / e<'e'b (compression
failure)
curves (including partial safety f~ctors).The design interaction curve / .L. / :
e:=eb _ ---:-
represents the failure envelope and the point given by' the co~ordinates (M u _~-e>eb '
PUb
and P u ) faIling within the interaction curve indicates the safe values of the
, combination of load and moments.
The salient"points on the interaction curve are note worthy.
/
-- _e=oo-

Muo Mub
I
:
.
\ (tension failure)

1) Point-I. on the load axis corresponds to the axial loading with zero
moment (Puo ) and e;; O.
2) Point-l 'corresponds to the condition of axial load with the minimum
eccentricity prescribed in 15:456 code clause-25.4. The corresponding
ultimate load is represented as P'uo.
3) As the eccentricity increases, the mO,ment, increases with the neutral
axis Xu moving from outside towards the extreme fibre,
Mu = (Pule)
Fig.tO.8 Column Under Compression With Uniaxial Bending
Point-2 corresponds to the condition,·
Dand e ;; eD_ For e < eo, the entire cross sectipn is under com-
Xu :::;
pression ang the neutral axis is located outside the section (xu> D) and
the extreme fibre strain in concrete lies between 0.002 & 0.0035. With
a further increase in the moment and eccentricity (e > eo), the neutral
axis lies within the section (xu < D) and the extreme concrete fibre
strain eCll ~ 0.0035.
 338 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design ofCollullns Gild Footings 339

4) Point-3 on the interaction diagram represents the balanced failure s:ae Typical design charts covering the parameters f, = 41S !'I/mm' and
with e ::::: eb and Xu ::::: xu,ma:>;' The design strength values for the balan.:ed (d'/D) = 0.10 are reproduced in Figs. 10.9. 10.10 & 10.11 for the three dif-
'failure condition are denoted as Pub and Mub. For values of e > elo • p oJ1( ferent arrangements of reinforcements in the cross section.
< Pub and the failure mode is termed as tension failure, similar to that
of beams. It is important to note that MUb is only marginally less than l'-4~---r---'--'~ICy-:-'~4';;5-;N:;/m=mil.r:d;;-·/;;o:-:.-;o::,,:;"lo
the ultimate moment of resistance of the sectioQ Muo under pure flex-
tt-~-t-
',~__-+----t---j
ural condition.
S) Point-4 on the interaction curve refers to the pure flexural state (e ::::: eo 1·2e b
Im . -' :
:• As",PbO/l00
and PuR = 0) with the ultimate moment of resistance Muo associated .,... .' #-d' .
with the minimum neutral axis depth xu,mill'
~AXiS of bQndinll
10.5.3 Design charts (Uniaxial eccentric compression) ill 81': 16

The design of structural concrete members subjected to combined axial

load-and uniaxial bendinr moment involves lengthy theoretical computa-
tions by trial an"d error procedure. To overcome these difficulties. interac-
tion diagrams involving non dimensional parameters arc useful in the rapid
design of reinforcements in eccentrically loaded columns. SP:16 presents
the design charts covering the foHowing three different cases of symmetri-
calIy reinforced column sections, covering re.:tangular and circular cross
sections.
The non dimensional parameters used for the construction of design
charts are (P,Ib.d:t,) and (M,Ib.d'h.) plotted along the Y and X-axis
respectiveiy.These parameters are plotted for different values of the ratio
(p(fck)where 'p' is the percentage reinforcement in. the section.
The following eases are covered in the SP: 16 Design charts: _
I) Rectangular section reinforced with equal number of bars on opposite
sides parallel to that axis of bending (Charts 27 to 38)
2) Rectangular sections reinforced with equal number of bars on ali the 0,2 0·3 0·5
four sides (Charts 39 to SO) Mu lIck boO
3) Circular sections reinforced with 8 bars symmetricaily spaced (charts Fig. 10.9 Compression With Bending-Rectangular Section-Reinforcement D1strib-
. uted Equally on Two Sides (SP: 16 Chart 32)
SI to 62) and these charts can also be used for bars not less than 6.
The charts for each of these types have been given for three grades of The following examples demonstrate the use of the design charts to
steel (Fe-2S0, Fe-4IS'and Fe-SOO) and four values of the ratio (d'/D). design reinforcements in the columns subjected to combined axial' load and
The dotted lines in these charts indicate the stress in the bars nearest to uniaxial bending moment.
the tension face of the member. It is pertinent to note that all these stress
values are at the failure condition corresponding to the limit state of col-
10.5.4 Design Example
lapse and not at working loads.
. The construction of these design charts ate based on the equilibrium Design the longitudinal and lateral 'reinforcement in a rectangular re!n-
equations at the Iimitstate coilapse as outlined in SP:16. forced concrete column of size 300mm by 400 mm subjected to a deSIgn
 340· Reinforced Concrete Design Umit State Design of Columns and Footings 341
'y =415 Nlmrri' d'lO =0'10
1.4,.:-----,----1.,-=-;4:;15:-:N:;-/;:m~m::'22Td:;;'/;;O:--=-;0:-:'1::l0
1'0k--+-"---+---'-I~=p'02/100
+-- - t .
1.2k-"'--+-------j! i.T· ~ As=pbO/100 ~d'
l~xiS of bendin
. #d' 0·8 k.'::~~~~f+---L-,-~~T="'-j
IAxiS of bending

,
,
"'''1
,
'1' ·'lj

o·21--H--+l--H-\--\-'H++-I--'f-I-f+----j
..:.!.xd
00J::::....LGf.Ob5L-1-<0~.1l5;0;-'-...L..*0.';;15t-";J-.io.tc201"~OO::. 25 .
. Mu/ 1ck03
Fig. 10.11 Compression With B;~dlng-Clrcular Section (SP:16 Chart-56)
0·3
It) Non Dimensional Fdrameters
Fig. 10.. 10 Compression With Bending·Rectangular Section-Reinforcement Distrib.

(~J:'-(
uted Equally on Four Sides (SP: 16 Chart·44)
1200 x 10' ) ='0.5
};,b D':-l20 x 300 x 400
ultimate load of 1200 kN and an ultimate moment of 200 kN.m with
respect to the major axis. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 grade ~ ._ ( 200x 106 J' =0.208
HYSD bars. ( };,b D') - 20 x 300 X 4002

a) Data c) Longitudinal Reinforcement

b =300mm E
10k = 20 N/mm'
D =400mm E = 415 N/mm' Adopting an effective cover of 50 mm = d'
Jy
P, = 1200 kN
(d 'ID) = (50/400) = 0.124 nearly equal to 0.15
Refer Chart 33 of SP: 16 and read out the ratio (PI};,) = 0.20
M, = 200kN.m
.. p=(20XO.20)=4
 Limit State Design oj Columns and Footings 343
I
P, = 1000 kN Adopt d'; 50 mm
M,; 250 kN,m Ratio of (d '/D) ; 0,1 r
b) Non Dimensional Parameters ~"
~:.<,~:,_:::'~~:':~ :-.m'
I
I

:.'~:;:_.:...~~"-:-t,,-l.~~>{':l~ ~1\.~rt f.ll."'eS at an effective cover of 50 mill. P, ) _( 1000 x 10' )-0266

( j,.!J D ' - 25x300x500 - .
",:,,_i.t~,*iZ,.S"""'~""~\tV"--:tlU~ :b.5.3.I, the spacing of longitudinal bars I,
"",~._.....~~~:r,:;_\~;t~:~tl!i~~ J:~.~ colu~ shall not exceed 300 mIll.
.;~.",~~,;::~~\,'V~~~",,~~~~ of relOforcement =:: [400 - (2 x 50)) = ( ~) ;(' 250xlO' );0.133
j"bD'" 25 x 300 x 500' ~
I,
I

c) Longitndinai Reinforcements
..I ,
',I
I
,>._;;\i"~"'te ..... :..:"j:::..:-~_ ... tn.nJOO not greater than 16 mill Refer ehart _44 (SP:16) with equal steel on all the sides and read out ,
I

I
_~.-,.t'm"',~~
''''':'',:·_~'if''' ~
'.-..,i.... '~
,. 116 x 28); 448 mm " (~J;0.O'9" P ; (0.09x25);2.2-5
'~""--';;': ::::.f',:)'J,'>~~"",*
A ; (Pbd) ; (2,25 x 300 x 500) ; 3375 mm'
" '100 100 '
Provide 8 bars of 25 mm diameter (A~; 3927 mm'),
The bars are arranged equally on all the four sides (3 bars on each face)

d) Ties
#8ties

~----+
" :#'t2! 6 at 300 clc Tie diameter i: (2514); 6.25 rom. Hence, provide 8 mm ties.
• '. -+ -\:6 nun
*75 Tie spacing :I- 300 mm and :> (16 x 25) ; 400 rom
_ _---....J+ Hence provide 8 rom diameter ties at 300 rom clc (staggered)
--. - - ..00
e) Details of Reinforcements
*." .l.t.,;::-~~ is Columns With Uniaxial Bending
Fig. 10.13 shows the detailing of reinforcements in the column sectio!l
.~: ,;,;.;;.#-';~' ~!~~ .~I~.Zl1\:rere rectangular column of size 300 x 500
,,,w,,,,, ": '" "",.: _'-'IDf\"ssi\,e factor<d load of 200 kN and a
10.5.6 Design Example
"': .c,_ '':'i''''~-I ~- ,-'_n. J.C\."Xlt the major axis. Adopting M-25 grade
.....;"".~, •....l.- .~,~~"- ~"~'" ~ detennine the reinforcement in the col~ Design a short circular column of diameter 400 rom to support a factored
axial load of 900 kN, together with a factored moment of 100 kN.m. Adopt'
M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 grade reinforcements.
, .. ,..."
".sti""'"
!" ; 25 Nlmm'
-~:;.:*lm.'!l:
J; ;415 Nlmm'
 Limit State Design 0/ CO/limns and Foot/llgs '345
,Reinforced Concrt:te Design
d) Lateral ties

Tie diameter 'I (2514) = 6.25·mm

:j> 16 mm (Hence select 8 mm diameter ties)
3 .. 25 Tie spacing :j> 400 mm
:j> (16x25)=400mm
300
2 #25 :j> 300mm

l.~~
Provide 8 mm diameter ties at 300 mm centers.
· r·,
e) FteinforcenBents
""'1' +-
.. 8 at 300 clc 300-+
I (staggered) Fig. 10.14 shows the details of reinforcements in the column scction.
I
I Fig.l0.13 Reinforcements In Columns With Uniaxial Bending
1

~,
a) Data #- 8 at 300 clc
ties 6 # 25
D =b=400mm Assume d ' = 40 mm main bars
p. = 900 kN :. (d '/D) = 0.10
M. = 100kN.m

j hk = 20 Nfmm'
/, = 415 Nfmm'

"'''11
lW-r
b) Non Dimensional Parameters
Fig. 10.14 Reinforcements in Circular Column
j

~, •.JI
I
(hk~)
D
=(900XIO')_0 8
20 X400' - .2
10.6 DESIGN OF SHORT COLUMNS UNDER COMPRESSION
AND BIAXIAL BENDING

(hkM.) (WOX 10')

I
1 10.6.1 Introduction
'I
I D ' = 20 X400' = 0.078 Columns located at the comers of a multistoreyed building with rigidly
1 connected beams at right angles. develop biaxial moments tog<ther with
c) Longitudinal Reinforcements the axial compressive load transmitted from beams. Fig. 10.15<.) shows
1
I the column' section subjected to the axial compressive load P, and the
t
I
Refer Chart-56 of SP:16 and read out the values of the parameter moments Mu~ and Muy about the major and minor axis respectiYely. Fig.
1. 1O.15(b) shows the axis ofbeuding and the resultant momentM, ~ts about
I'
1
.. (P)=O.IO
fck .. p=(20XO.IO)=2 this axis inclined to the two princi~al axes. The resultant ecct!itricity is
t computed ass e = (M/Pu) and this can also be e:<pressed as,
,I'
.. A = (PllD') =(2XllX400') =2512 ' e ="e;+ei where ex=(MuIP) and ey=(MJP,)
'400 400 mm
Provide 6 bars of 25 mm diameter (A, = 2945 mm') The possible neutral axis lies in the X· Y plane as shown in Fig. VI.15(c).
 346 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Columns and Footings 347

Where Mux ' Mu are the moments about X and Y axes respectively _due to
M
design loads. ux1 and Muyl are the maximum uniaxial n:ome1)t capacities
with an axial load PUI bending about X and Y a.xes resp'ectlvely.
Un is an exponent whose value depends on the ratio (P/P uz) where
PUl=[0.45hk,A.c+O.75fy.A~J i.e.. Value ofPu whenM=:=-0

The range of values of the ratio (P jP,,) and the 'corresponding value of an
are shown inTable-1O.2 as well as in Fig. 10.16.
2·0
(oj (bl

y/ ......Possible neutral
,--1.."..-</:"/...,/ axis
1-6
./
./ I // Axis of bending
"'n
./
/
X-
/
"-,-X '"
/ I
e ,ex
/ 1· 2
/~--f-....::..L--J
y
..
f..1
(eJ
FAg. 10.15 Biaxial Bending of Short Columns
0 ;1 _~_-;;J,I _-...LI'_-;;~I - - - '
By choosing the neutral-axis which is in the X-Y J?lane. calculations are
o 0'4 0·8
(Pu/Puzl
made from fundamentals to satisfy the equilibrium of load and moments Fig. 10.16 Coefficient an For Biaxial Bcp.<Ung of Columns
about both the axes. This procedure is tedious and is not °generally recom-
mended for routine design. For intermediate values, linear interpolation Inav be done. Chart-G3 of
To overCOme the difficulties of trial and error procedure in the design SP-16 can be used for evaluating P uz for different grades of concrete and
of columns subjected to biaxial moment'), .The Indian standardcode steel and the percentage of reinforcement in the section.
IS:456-2oo0 recommends a simplified procedure based on Bresler's" for-
mulation which facilitates fa'ster design of,reinforcements in the c·olumns. Table 10.2 Values of 0:"
This method is outlined in the following section.
(PjP,,) a.
S; 0.2 1.0
10.6.2 Codal Method for Design of Compression members
~O.8 2.0
subject to Biaxial Bending

The simplified procedure adopted by the code (clause 39.6) based on

Bresler's empirical formul~ti~n is expressed by the relation~ Chart-64 of SP: 16 shows the relation.

M)". + (M
~)"' <10 (MM,,),," + (M" )"" ~ 1.0 for different values of (PjP,J
(M~ uxI
M
UY1
-.
ux1 M uyl
 :@~W~~;5-B48 f~(Ri;;lfor'cedColtcfe~iDesign I "; '\ I,t',' •
Limit Stale Design ofColumns and Footing$. 349

.>;The.se curves'are:-~eI'y"us'efUI in-the design ofc~lumns subjected to biaxial

bending:- '. . ., .L_:.:.;,.. ;/:.,i "." A =(1' bD) =( I x400x
'100 100
600) = 2400 mm 2

The use o(SP: 16 charts for the design of columns subjected to axial
compression and biaxiaFbending is illustrated in the example 10.6.4. Use 8 bars of 20 mm diameter distributed 3 on each face (A, = 2512 mm')

10.6.3 Seleetion of Trial Seetion and reinforcements

.. I
,=( 100X2512) =
400 x 600 1.04 and
(~)
h' =( 1.04)
20
= 0.052

(h,b
~)=( 1600x1O' )=0333
In practice, the, cross sectional -dimensions of the column arc selected
before the structural analysis is performed and the biaxial moments are D 20x400x600 .
derived from the frame analysis. Hence, only reinforcements need to be 2
suitably assumed for the design. However, Devdas Menoo88 has suggested Refer Chart-44 of SP:16 and read out the ratio [M",ifok b D J correspond-
a simpler approach for the selection of reinforcements based on the resul- ing to the ratio [P,ifo, b D] = 0.333 and (d'lD) = 0.10 and (Plf-J = 0.052.~_
tant moment given by the relation, '
.. ( M"1 2) = 0.085
, M== 1.15 -YM;x +Mu~
u hkbD
~
I This bending moment is considered to act in, association with the axial M"I = (0.085 x20 x 400x 600')10-0 = 245 kN.m

"""1, compressive load Pu and using the design charts, the reinforcement per-
centage in the cross section is determined. Thereafter the procedure is the For moments about the minor axis YY, b::; 600 mm, D::; 400 mm and d';:;

,,, same as specified in section 10.6.2 for checking- the adequacy of the 60mm

(d')
designed section~ •
,, D
(60")
= 400yO.15
n'''~
10.6.4 Design Exnm pIe . 2
I Refer chart-45 of SP: 16 and read out the ratio [M",,! I'k b D ] correspond-
,
n'>;i
Design the reinforcements in a short column 400 mm by 600 mm subjected ing to the ratio [P,f hk bPJ = 0.333 and (pI hk) = 0.052
to an ultimate axial load of 1600 kN together with ultimate moments of
120 kN.m and 90 kN.m abollt the major and minor axis respectiv~ly. M"I )
( hkbDi = 0.08
Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fc-415 HYSD bars.
M",I = (0.08 x 20 x 600 x 4002)10-0 = 153 kN.m
a) Dala
P" = [0.45 h,A +0.75 I,AJ
" , b = 400mm hk = 20 N/mm 2
D = 600mm f.., =415N1mt"u2 = [0.45 x20{(600 x 400) - 2512} + (0.75 x 415 x 2512)] 10"' kN = 2919 kN
p" = 1600 kN d' =60mm
M" = 120 kN.m (d 'ID)= 0.1 .. Ratio (P")=(1600)=0.548
M" = 90kN.m P" 2929
Refer Fig. 10.16 and read out the coefficieht an eorresponding to the ratio
b) Reinforeements
(P,fP,J = 0.548. The value of u, = 1.58.
Reinforcements are distributed equally ooall t.lie "foui- sides: .
As a first trial, adopt percentage of reinforcem'ent in the cross section as p
::; 1 percen,t
 350 Reinforced Concrete Design LlmitStdte Design ofCo'lumns and Footings 351

a) Data
-120)'58 +
( 245
(90
-)1.58 =0756<1
153 .
b =450mm f
J"
=20 N/mm'
Hence, the design is safe. Provide suitable lateral ties as per codal provi- D =450mm f
J, =415 N/mm' (

sions. M" =75 kN.m d' =50mm

Provide 8 mm diameter lateral ties at 300 mm centers will conform to M" =60kN.m (d'lD) = 0.10
the codal requirements.
The above problem can be solved by using Chnrls-63 and 64 of SP:16
b) Equivalent Moment
as shown below:
From Chart-63, for p = I percent,};, = 20 N/mm' andj, = 415 N/mm', read The reinforcement in section is designed for the axial compressive load P.-u
out the and the equivalent moment given by the relation,
Corresponding ratio,
¥u:= 1.15 ~M~y'+M~y
(:-:)=12 and hence P,,=(l2x600x400)10-' = 2880 kN
= 1.\5 ~75'+60' = 110 kN.m

Also (:::) G~~) = 0.49 c) Non Dimensional Parameters

And (:::.) = (~~) = 0.59 (j"bd

~) _( 2000xlO' )=0.49
- 20x4505450

Ratio (P,)
P"
=( 1600) =0.55
2880 ( ~)_( 1I0xlO' )=0.06
j"b D' - 20 x450x450'

From Chatt-64 of SP: 16 for [M,,1M,,,l = 0.49 and [PiP,,] = 0.55, read out
d) Reinforcements
the ratio ~l

•
(MM,,)
Refer chart-44 of SP: 16 (equal reinforcement on all faces) with (d'lD) =
= 0.8 > calculated value of 0.59 0.10 and read out the value of (PI};,) = 0.06.
", .. p = (20 x 0.06) = 1.2
Hence, the design is safe. However for economical design, a second trial is
made with lower value of reinforcement and the various steps repeated
such that the ratio of [M,/M"ll obtained from Chart-64 is slightly greater .. A,-
_(PbD) ~(1.2X450X450) = 2430 mm'
100 - 100
"
than the calculated value.
Provide 8 bars of 20 mm diameter (A, = 2512 mm') with 3 bars in each
10.6.5 Design Example face.

A short column located at the corner of a storied building is subjected to an

p =(100X2512) = 1.24 and the ratio(?).=(li~4) ,\0.062
,450 x 450 '"
axialfactored load of 2000 kN together with factored moments of 75 and Refer Charl-44 (SP:lq) and read Qutthe value of the ratio [M,'/if" b D')],
60 kN.m acting in perpendicular planes. The size ofthe column is fixed as corresponding to the value of ratio [P,/f" b D] = 0.49and.(p/f,,) = 0.062.
450 by 450 mm. Adopting concrete of M-20 grade and Fe-415 HYSD bars,
design suitable reinforcements in the ~olumn section.
 '. Rez'nforced Cqncrete Desz'gn
Limit State Design afColumns and Footings. 353

.M", ,) = 0.06 lateral deflection is significantly greater in comparison with short columns
(fo~bD
as shown in Fig. 10.17. Consequently, in slender columns, .the moment
M"" =(0.06x20x450x450')IO-<= 109 kN.m produced by the deflection is large and should be considered in design.
Pu
Due to symmetry, Mux ' ;:;Muy, ;:; 109 leN.m
p", = [0.45fo,·A,+0.75 f,AJ

= (0.45 x 20)[(450 x 450) - 2512] + (0.75 x 415 x 2512) 1\ \ Pu

= (2581 x IO')N
= 2581 kN
1.\
1 I"-oeflection e= 0

. (;'}G~~~)=O.77
I curve No deflection
I. I I
Refer Fig. 10.16 and read out the coeffiCient an = 1.95
-(01 Long Column (bl Short Column
e) Check for Safety under Biaxial Loading
Fig. 10.17 BchnvJour of Long And Short Columns

In the case of eccentrically loaded long columns, the effect of second-

(M",)" +(M",)"
-
M ux •
-
M uyl
:51 ary moments developed due to the lateral deflection together with the pri-
mary moments significantly influences the load carrying capacity of the

,,
1"-'T,<t
,
I
UM" +c~~r" =0.79:51
compression member.

10.7.2 Behaviour of Slender Columns

.,,,
Hence, the section is safe under specified loading;
The structural behaviour of slender columns is significantly differei,t from
,,
f) Reinforcements
that of short columns with increasing slenderness raii~s. Consider a col-
, umn hinged at supports subjected to an ,eccentric load 'p' at an eccentricity
Provide 8 bars of 20 mm diameter as main reinforcement and 8 mm lateral
• ties at 300 mm centres.
'e' as shown in Fig. 1O.18(a).
As the load is increased. the lateral deflection of the column increases.
10.7 DESIGN OF SLENDER COLUMNS If A· = lateral deflection of the longitudinal axis,
(e + A) = total eccentricity
10.7.1 Introduction
!he moment at any section is expressed! as,
Compression members having the ratio of effective length to its least hit- M= P(e +A)
eral dimension (slenderness ratio) exceeding 12 are categorized as slender M=M,,+A
or long columns according to IS:456-2000 code. The deformation Where Mpr ;:; primary moment due to eccentricity of the load.
characteristics of slender columns are significantly different from that of P.A = secondary moment which varies along the length of the
short columns. When slender columns are loaded even with axial loads, the column.
 354 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design ofCqlunllls and Footings 355

I p
restrained against rotation due to the floor level beams and moments M,
and M 2 may develop at the ends. The column may be bent in single or
l-
I
I
I
P-M -Interaction
curve
double curvature, depending upon the nature of moments. The effect of
these moments are taken into account in the design of such columns.
I M= Ple+AI Unbraced slender columns are subjected to sidesway or lateral drift due
I t to the action of lateral loads or gravity loads inducing additional moments
I at the supports. The moment amplification due to the lateral drift effect
which is significantly greater than that of braced columns should be con-
Amax\ sidered in the design of such columns.
\ The design of slender columns is similar to that of columns subjected
\
\ to a given factored axial compression P u and factored moments M ult and
\ M", the only djfference being that the moments should include the sec-
ondary moment components in slender column design, where as these are
ignored being negligible in short column design.
(01 (bl (e)

Fig. 10.18 Behaviour of Slender Columns 10.7.3 Codal method for design of Slender columns

The maximum moment occurs at the m~d height of the column and is
expressed as
Mmax = P (e + 6.ma,J
The variation of maximum moment is non linear with the .flexural
stiffness reducing with increasing values of the load P [Refer Fig.
1O.18(b)].
In the case of very short column, the flexural·stiffness being very high,
the lateral deflection? is very small and the primary moment controls the
behaviour of the column.
In the case of very slender colunm, it is possible that the flexural stiff-
ness is effectively reduced to zero resulting in buckling or instability fail-
ure.
Fig. 1O.18(c) shows the load-moment interaction diagram at the limit
state of collapse representing the strength of the column with varying slen-
derness ratios.
In the ca~e of short column, "'m~ = 0 and hence the failure is due to the
primary moment and axial load. Point A represents the pehaviour of short
column with material failure. Point B indicates the long coluinn behaviour
with primary and secondary moments with material failure.
In the case of very long columns, the failure is due to buckling or
instability. The.curve OC represents the behaviour of very long columns.
III the."ase 0.1 braced slender columns which is not subjected to sides-
way, th~re is no_sigflifi.:;~n.t.r~lati~e.lateral disp~acement bytween the t~p
and bottom ends of the column. The·erids of a braced column are partially
The IS:456-2000 code (clause 39.7) prescribes that the design of slender
compression members should include the fqrces and moments determined
from structural analysis and also the effects of deflections on moments and
forces. The second order analysis involving deflections an.d their effect on
moments and forces being computationally difficult and laborious, the
code recommends simplified procedures for the design of slender columns,
which involves the process of increasing the moments or reducing the
strength to take care of slenderness effects.
·The IS:456 code clause 39.7.1 recommends additional m6ments M"
and M" expressed in terms of the factored axial load PO' overall depth of
the member (D) and the slenderness ratios (L"IDrand (L,,JD) derived from
the deformation characteristics of a pin ended braced· slender column
shown in Fig. 10.19.
The additional eccentricity 8.max is a function of curvature. Denoting the
maximum curvature at mid height as $mllll' it can be shown that AmllJ( lies
between (<I>m~' L'/12) and (<I>m,,' L'/8). From Fig. 10.19, case(a) & (b), Con-
sidering an average value for eccentricity as.
2
ea = 6 m3" = (¢lm""L /1O)
Referring to Fig. 10.20 showing the relation between curvature and failure
strain profile andassuming, .
€
ru
=0 0035 and € =0.002,
'. "
d' =O.W and (D - d')
•
=0.9D
 356, ,Reinforced Concrete Design'
Limit State Design of Columns and Footings 357

Hence, the expressions recommended in IS: 456-2000 code for additional

moments are

r- j1max;:;{12~mol()
~.P'max p
L i" L
"'max ~max

1 1
lea) lea) Where
Pu = axial load on the member
v Le~ = effective length in respect of major axis
Ley:;:: effective length in respect of minor axis
'-.:/' I~J D ;:;; depth of cross sec:tion at right angles to the major axis
M L
b = width of member
Case - (a) Case- (b)
eax and e ay are additional eccentricities (Refer Table-I of SP: 16).

.Fig. 10.19 Relation Between Deflection And Curvature in It is i~portant to note that the additional moments to be considered are
Pin Ended Slender Column in addition to the factored primary moments Mux and Muy in the design of
columns. The additional moments specified in the code are derived on the
assumption' .that the column is braced and bent symmetrically in single
curvature, Al~o the axial load corresponds nearly to the balanced failure
condition ie P u = Pb .If these conditions are not satisfied, the code recom-
,
\1{ .~"
mends the following modifications,
For P, > Ph , the additional moments may be reduce,d by the
multiplying factor 'k' g,iven by the relation,

k=[P"-P,] ,, 1
esl ~0'002 '-,f---""'-.dh,---1 -fSI Pu~
-Pb
Where P" = [0.45 hk A, + 0,75 fy A,] and this value can be read out from
€eu =0,0035
chart-63 of SP:16 and Ph is the axial load corresponding to the condition of
.~. maxjrnum compressive strain of 0.0035 in concrete and tensile strain of
Fig, 10.20 Curvature-Strain R.elationship 0,002 in the outer most layer of tension steel.
The modification suggested in the code is optional and it should always
the additional moment comprises about 80 percent of the total moment. be taken advantage of since the value of 'k' could be substantially less than
We can express the maximum curvature as, ' unity.

<Pm",
= [CO,0035 + 0,002) x 0 8J =
0,90 '200D
(_1_) The value of Ph depends on the arrangement of reinforcement and the
cover ratio Cd'/D) and the grades of concrele and steel. The values of Ph can
be computed for rectangular and circular sections using the constants kl
Substituting the value of </Jrnax in the expression for deflection ea or d max we and k, given in Table-60 of SP: 16 and the relation expressed as,
have
(io;' d) =k +k,(t)
( o~) = (CLIO)')
1

2000
[.
358 Relnforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Columns and Footings 359
I
I The value of the reduction factor 'k' can be readout from Chart-65 of Hence, the column is slender about both axes
I' SP: 16 after evaluating the ratios (P,IP,,) and (Pr/P,,)
i For braced columns subjected to unequal primary moments M, and M2
c) Additional Eccentricities
at the two ends, the value of M u to be considered in computations of the
total moment may be taken as (clause 39.7.1),
From Table-! of SP: 16, for (L,/D) = 12.45, (e"lD) = 0.078 '
M" = (0.4 M, + 0.6 M,) <: 0.4 M, liar (Lib) = 14.67, (e,/b) = 0.108
For un-braced columns, the lateral drift effect has to be included. .. e" = (0.078 X530)= 41.34 mm
Hence~ an approximate method of including this effect is to ass~me the e'l = (0.108 X450) = 48.60 mm
additional moment M a to act at the column end where the maximum pri-
mary moment M l is operational. For design purposes, the total moment is d) Additional Moments
computed as,
M,= (M, + M,) M" = [1600 (41.34/1000)] = 66.14 leN.m
The use of these design principles is illustrated in the following example. M" = [1600 (48.6011000)] = 77.76 leN.m

10.7.4 Design Example The above moments have to be multiplied by modification factot (k) as
per clause 39.7.1.1 oflS:456-2000.
Design, the reinforcements required for a column which is restrained
against sway using the following data: k= p -P]
_"_'_U S;l
[ Puz-P
b
, :·1
a) Data Assuming 3.28 percent reinforcement for the first trial, the ratio,
(P!f.,) = (3.28/25) =.0.131
Size of column = 530 mm by 450 mm
Effective length = 6.6 m From Chart-63 of SP: 16, read out the ratio of [P,/A,] = 21
Un supported length = 7.7 m P =[2IX530X450]=5008kN I:,<!J
Factored load = 1600 leN •• uz 100
Factored moment about major axis = 45 leN.m at top and 30 leN.m at bot-
Assuming 25 mm diameter bars with 50 mm cover,
tom
Factored moment about minor axis = 35 leN.m at top and 20 leN.m at (d'lD) = (50/530) = 0.1 an~ (d'/b) = (50/450) = 0.1
bottom.
Concrete grade = M-25
From Table-60 of SP: 16, read out the values of k, and k, as
k, = 0.207 and k, = 0.425
..
Steel grade = Fe-500 HYSD bars
Column is bent in double curvature and reinforcement is distributed Pb, = Pb, = [k, +k,(P/f,.)]f,•. b.D
equally on all the four sides of the section.
= [0.207+0.425(0.131)][(25 x450x 530)/1000] = 1566 leN
b) Slenderness ratio k, = k, = [(5008 -1600)/(5008 -1566)] = 0.99

(t) =( 65630~) = 12.45> 12 Additional moments are modified as,

, M" =(66.14 X0.99)= 65.48 leN.m
M" = (77.16 x 0.99)" 76.39 leN.m
L,) (6600)
(Ii= ,
450 = 14;67> 12 Asper clause 39.7.1 oflS: 456-2000 code, the,iniHall11oment actiQg on tit!"
co,urnn shblild"be-mQdtfiedas f!>llows:' " -
 360 l!eirz!or(:edConcrete'Design. Limit State Design of Columns and Footings 361
I

M" = [(0.6 x 45) - (004 x 30)] = 15 < (004 x 45) = 18 Hence, the section is safe but not economical. In the second trial, the
M" = [(0.6 x 35)- (004 x 20)] = 13 < (004 x 35) = 14 area of reinforcement may be reduced in the section and the various design
As the above values are less than 004 times the larger end moment, we have steps are repeated until an economical section is obtained.
to consider for ~esjgn the. modified initial moments as, . Provide 12 bars of 25 mm diameter equally spaced on each face and
lateral ties as per' codal specifications.
M" = 18 kN.m and M" = 14 kN.m
These mome.nts are to be compared with the moment due to minimum 10.8 DESIGN OF FOOTINGS
eccentricity and greater of the two values is to be taken as the initial -
moment. " 10.8.1 Introduction
From clause 2504 of IS: 456-2000, the minimum eccentricities are
computed as, Reinforced concrete columns are generally supported by the footings
which are located below the ground level and is referred to as the founda-
e,= [ 7700 530J·
500 +30 =33.07mm>20mm tion structure. The main purpose of the footing is to effectively support the
super structure like columns by transmitting the applied loads, moments
and other forces to the soil without exceeding the safe bearing capacity and
1'«'1
e,= [ 7700 450J
500 +30 =30Amm>20mm also the settlement of the structure should be within tolerable limits anct as
nearly uniform as possible.
M".m;, = 1600 (33.0711000) = 52.92 kN.m > 18.0 kN.m The footings are generally designed to resist the bending moments and
M".m;, = 1600 (3004/1000) = 48.64 kN.m > 14.0 kN.m shear forces developed due to soil reaction as specified in the Indian stan-
Therefore the total moment for which the column is to be designed are" dard code 1,<).,456-2000. This chapter deals with the design principles of
l''''
M" = (52.92 + 65048) = 118040 kN.m different types of footings outlined in the following section.
M" = (48.64 + 76.39 = 125.03 kN.m
10.8.2 Types of Footings

(h;d) =(251~~~;;~~0) =0.27
From Chart-48 of SP:16, for the ratio (p/f,,) read out the moments as,
M", = (0.19};, bd') = (0.19 x 25 x 450 x 530') 10-<", 600kN.m
M", = (0.19h, d b')= (0.19 x 25x 530 x 450') 10-< = 510 kN.m
Footings are grouped under shallow foundations (in contrasf to deep foun-
dations like piles and caissons) which are adopted when the soil of ade-
quate bearing capacity is available at a relatively shol!. depth below the
ground level. Column footing has a large plan area in comparison with the
cross sectional area of the column. The loads on the columns are resisted

... ... (:.:}e~~~0)=0.20 . by concrete and steel and these)oad effects are transmitted by the footing
to the relatively weak supporting soil by bearing pressure.
. Generally, the. safe bearing capacity of the soil is very low in the range

(M,,) =(125.03)
of 100 to 400 kN/m', whereas the permissible compressive stress in con-
= 0.25
Myyl 510 crete is around 5 to 15 N/mm' and in steel, it is in the range of 130 to 190
N/mm2 in reinforced concrete columns under"working loads.

(:.:) =(5~~~05) =0.32

I
a)I~
From Chart-64, for (P/P,,) = 0.32 and (M,,fM,,,) = 0.2 read out the value
In the case of framed buildings with columns located on reasonably firm
of (M,/M",) = 0.92 > 0.25.
soil, it is generally sufficient to provide separate inde2endeni footiI.lgs for
each of the columns. Such a footing is referred to as isolated footing which
is square, rectangular or circular in shape depending upon the shape of
 362 Reinforced Concrete Design

I column cross section. Isolated footings comprise ofa thick slab which 111a
be flat or st~pped or sloped as shown in Fig. 1O.21(a). The footings ar~
ge~erally remforced by a steel mesh located at the bottom of the sl~b to
b) Combined Footings
Limit State Design oJ COlumns an(1 t OOf/!lgs joj

I- reszst the bendmg moment and shear forces developed due to the soil pres- When two are more heavily loaded columns are located close to each other
I sure. . resting on soil with low bearing capacity, the area of isolated footings
overlap on each other and hence it is advantageous to pi-ovide a single
p
P combined footing contributing to the improved integral behaviour of the
columns with the footing. Typical combined footing having rectangular
shape is shown in Fig. 10.21(b). The combined footings comprise of a
connecting beam between the columns integrally cast With a slab on either
side of the connecting beam.
In the case of columns located close to the property line, footings can
not be extended on one side. To overcome this problem of non availability
of space near "the exterior column, the footings of the exterior and interior
columns are combined by using a connecting beam and trapezoidal shaped
slab as shown in Fig. 10.21(c). Due to the soil pressure, the slab bends
transversely while the connecting beam bends longitudinally between the
columns. Strap footing shown in Fig. 10.21(d) is an alternative method of
(a) Isolal.d Foolings, providing combined foundation connecting column located on property
line and the interior of the bnilding. In the case of strap footing. indepen-
dent slabs are provided below the columns, connected by a strap beam.

--------:-- 10.8.3 Design principles and Codal requirements

onn~cting beam
The structural design of the footing, which Includes the design of the depth
-~
-' ""F';:
.
==..: =--------~- .
"7-=-=:--=-= :- ."/,,,-:- and reinforcements, is done for factored loads using the relevant safety
factors applicable for the limit state of collapse. The computation of fac-
tored moments and shear forces acting at the critical sections of the foot-
(b) Combined Footing ing, is based on the fictitious factored soil pressure corresponding to the
2
...LfJ'--------fjm. P2 r' P
' !-L' --ljJP- . ,
factored loads on the column. '
The soil pressure developed due to self-weight of the footing does not
induce any moments and shear forces and hence neglected in computa-
. Prop.rly. I onnect'n tions. The loads acting on the column and the soil pressure developed due
l
COnnecting line --. "beam 9 to the service loads and the factored soil pressure to-be used in design is
r......,b"'.:Q,m :
i-:--, shown in Fig. 10.22. The following design principles are relevant in the
design offootings.

a) General design Featnres

(c) Trap.zoidal Fooling (d) Strap Fooling Footings are designed for flexure and shear (both one way and two way
action), bearing and bond, mainly due to the soil pressure from the soffit of
Ftg. 10.21 Types of Footings
the slab. The design is more or less similar to that of beams and two way
slabs supported on colnmns. Additional design considerations being the
 Rein/oreet! Concrete Design

Limit S/.ate Design oICol,,';'ns and Fooiiitks '365

P (Serv ice load)
M
h ~~[I-sin~J2
1 +sinq,
I
G.L w
JFT~ , ?Wi 7fJP
Where
Column
I h = depth of foundation
w = unit weight of soil
~AP Footing

t
qmax
T
qmin
.....,f.
J p=-safe bearing capacity of soil under the footing
"$ ~ angle of repose

J- Total service load

soil· pressure
c) Thickness of Fooling

The thickness of footing is -generally designed based on the considerations

....,tr--ctr--ctr--ctr--rt
11 P i'- •f
A+- L--...JL-..L-L__L
--cfr-fr--VSel f weight
__ -J_:"'-J_:...-J soil pressure of shear and flexure which -are critical in the vicinity of the column and
, ~
L_
footing junction.
Shear forces being more critical, the thickness is generally based __ on
'*+-'1) shear critctia, It is generally economical to vary the thickness of the·-sl~b

l- Net service load

soli pressure
from a minimum of 150 mm at the edges to a maximum near the face
the column depending upon the variations in bending moment and shear
force. A leveling course of lean concrete of 100 mm thickness is generally
or

t
,~+~)
provided below the footing,

d) Design for Shear

~ Design soil pressure

under factored loads
The overall depth of the footing is mainly dictated by the shear stres~-con­
siderations and generally preceeds the design for flexure. To check for
shear stress, the tension reinforcement in the slab is' assumed as 0.25 to 0.3
Fig. 10.22 Soil Pre$surc Under Column Footing percent and the procedure used for slabs is adoptcd. One way shear is
checked at a critic'al section distant 'd' from the column face as shown in
transfer of force from the column to the Ii .
Fig, I 0.23(a), Th~ behaviour of footings in two way (punching) shear is
~~i:::~~'::2n~:e~;~t~~~fe;~:;~~0;~zontal f~~~:'~~e:~~i:;.s~ns~:t;tr:~:~~;~
e
similar to that of flat slab supported on columns, The critical section for
important but crack widths shoUld gbrouI? kvdel, deflectIOn control is not two way shear is considered at a distance (d/2) from the periphery of the
d etaJJmg requirements and it' d . ble Im,te . to.03
"
'
mm 'th
. ' WI genera
I column as shown in Fig, 1O.23(b).
for . ' . IS eSlra e to provIde a clear coverof75 mm
protectIOn of roam remforcements especially under aggresst've . Shear reinforcements are generally avoided in footing ·slabs and the
mnments. env!- required depth is designed by one way and two way shear cons.iderations.
The design shear strel)gth tc of concreteik computed by assuming a normal· I
b) Depth of Foundation percentage of flexural reinforcement of 0.25 percent in preliminary calcu-
lations. The design ultimate shear force Vuis limited to the shear resistance
I
The of c9ncrete Vue by providing the necessary depth. If Vu >. Vuc' suitable shear
minimum depth of foundation according to Rankine's the 89 . •
by '. . ory IS gl ven reinforcements should be 'designed to resist the balance shear force of
(Vu- Vuc) in a way si,milar to that of beams.
I 366 Reinforced Concrete Design
Limit State Design of Columns and l'OO!lIlgs
I M,i
jO I

f) Force transfer ~t Colnmn Base

I· -,r-d
Column
Footing . 1 'lorce and moment acting
T he axta . at the base
. .of the column must . be
I
, . d t0 the 'ootl'ng
translene either by compresslOn m concrete or by_ com-
I 1 l' " .

I d . --, . I'0 reinforcemeots , The bearmg resistance

presslOlUtenslOn . 'I" or compressive
d 1
~~:'j:rT::;r=T=;=;=~ :=tOil pressure stress deve1oped at 'the J'unction of column and footlllg IS Imlte to a va ue
given by the 15:456 codedause 34.4'as

Critical section all round k.mu = 0.45 1;, -.J(AiA,)

for two~way shear

, I I T
+- r~- -r-['1 (b~l~r
I +-
,a~: ,~_
.,f-<l-f L -- ...J
I I d/2
'---------1
.f I ) ----+-J
I Section XX
I Spacing
5, < So
7
Critical section
L I. Cenlral band
'..".- widlh 8 1
for moment I I
(a)
(bl
Fig. 10.23 Critical Sections I,'or Moment & Shear in Column Footing
e) Design for Flexure
T- t--._-,'
8
I
I
I
! ~
I

I
I
~

.
,

~-l
The critical section for moment is at the face of the column as shown in I
II
Fig. 10.23. The reinforcement is designed to resist the factored moment at I I
the critical section. In two~way reinforced rectangular footings, the rein-
I
forcement in the JO,ng direction is uniformly spaced across the full width of , I I

the footing. In the shorter direction. where the moments are less, the code. Plan
L ~
clause (34.3.l.c) specifies a larger concentration of reinforcement to be Fig. 10.24 Reinforcement Details In Rectangular Footings
provided within a central band width equal to the width(shorter dimension)
of the footing given by the relation, ' Where AI = supporting area for bearing of footing which in sloped Or

[Reinforcement in central band width] = (A".'hort) [2/(~ + I)], ;;~~:;~~f~~t~n~y~:~i~e :;~~n:sc~:ta~:e~ o~~I~o:~~~:,~~:~~~~i~~~:~
Where A5~Short::: total reinforcement in short direction having for it.uppe~ base, the area actually loaded and havlllg Side slope of
~ = ratio of long side to the short side of the, footing, one vertical to two horizontal.
\I
The remainder of the reinforcement is nniformly distributed in the outer ,A, = loaded area at the base of the column. . "
portions of the footing as shown in Fig. 10.24, ' ;
The facto~·i-.J(A,IA,) account~ for the increase in~oncrete strengthi~~e
 368 Reinforced ConcreteDesign".\' :,.' Limit State Design ofColulIIlIs and Footh,gs 369

beadng area due to confinement of surrounding concrete. However~ this
factor is limited to 2 si1lce very high compressive stresses result in trans-
verse tensile strains leading to spalling. lateral splitting or bursting of con-
crete. The area AI geometricaily similar to A, is shown in Fig. 1O.25(a). If
the actual compressive stress exceeds fbr,max. then the excess force is
transfened by reinforcement, dowels or mechanical connectors.
A2 = loaded area at
column base
or tension on both sides of the interface.
The design of a typical column footing is illustrated by the tt)llowing
example.
10.8.4 Design Example
A reinfOl:ced concrete column 400 mm by 400 mm supports an axial ser-
vice load of 1000 kN. The safe bearing capacity of the soil at site is 200
kN/m'. Adopting M-20 grade concrete and Fe·415 HYSD bars design a
suitable .footing for the column and sketch the details of reinforcements.

Al := Maximum area 0.' a) Data

supporting surface
Axial service load = P = 1000 kN
I Size of column = 400 mm by 400 mm
S.B.C. of soil = 200 kN/m'
.~~2 M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.

I b) Size of Footing

Load on column = 1000 kN

Weight of footing and back fill at 10% = 100 kN
(a) Loaded and Supporting Areas =
Total load 1100 kN
. = (1100)
Area of footmg 200 = 5.5 m'

Development Column Development

length (Ld) bars Dowel len~lh for Size of footing =L =B = -.[5.5 =2.345 m
bars column bars Adopt 2.4 m by 2.4 m square footing
Net soil pressure at ultimate loads with a ioad factor of 1.5 is given by
1000X 1.5) ,.,
construction joint q, =( 2.4 x 2.4 =260 kN/m =0.26 N/mm

(b) Reinforcement at Column-Footing Interface

FJg. 10.25 Force Transfer at Base of CoJumn
The detailing of reinforcement across' column-footing interface is
shown in Fig. 1O.25(b). according to the code clanse 34.4.3, the diameter
of doweis should not exceed the diameter of the column bars by 3 mm and
the reinforcement at the interface must comprise of at least four bars with a
lOnd area not less than 0.5 percent of the eros's sectional area of the sup-
ported cblumn or pedestal. In addition, all reinforcement provided across
the interface must have the necessary development length in compression
c) One way Shear
I
The critical section is at a distance >'d' from the column face (Refer I:ig.
10.26)
Factored shear force = V,I = (0.26 x 2400)(lOOO-d) = 624(lOOO-d)
Assuming percentage of reinforcement in the footing PI = 0.25 percent, for
M-20 grade concrete, read out from Table-19 oflS:456 code the permissi-
ble shear stress as,
 UmitSuae Design qrColun11ls and tOOflllgs .) 11

I
"
370 Reinforced Concrete Design

", ; 0.36 N/mm'

I

II
1 I
I-
One way shear resistance; Vol ; (0.36 x 2400 x d) ; (864 d) N ,
I
Column reinforcement I

624 (1000 - d) " 864 d ,f

I
d ?:722 mm ,
I

d) Two way Shear

I800
-r-
d=12Smm ,f
J-L'==~~~-J-
I
Assuming the effective depth of slab; d ; 722 mm and computing the two I
I
way shear resistance at a critical section (dI2) from the face of the column, Section XX I

we have the relation, Section for moment •

I

V,,; 0.26 [2400' - (400 + d)'] ; 0.26 [2400' - (400 + 722)'] ; 1170290 N Section for
,,
I

,
, Two- way shear resistance Ve2 is comput~.d as,
II on~ way shear

,
V" ;k.", [4(400+ d) d] wherek,; 1.0 and",; 0.25 ; 1.118 N/mm'
V" ; (I x 1.118) [4(400 + d)d] ; 1788.8 d + 4.472 d'
r - - t T - ...,
. I Section for
two way shear
XL : . 1 dt2; X
.. Vu2 ~ Vel
1170290 ,:; (1788.8 + 4.472 d') 2400 --' :;m
: W+-di-+
1

T·-t-:-11-'
,.
Solving, d; 349 mm
Hence, one-way shear is morc critical.
Adopt effective depth; d; 725 mm and Overall depth; 800 mm
L_-tt .! _.J

. I 1

e) Design of Reinforcements
I ,
+ 2400 ---~~
I.',');

Ultimate moment at column face (referEg. 10.26) is computed as,

Plan
M,; (260 x I x 0.50) = 130 kN.m/m
M,);( 10'BOxx 725'
(bd' 10');0247
.
Fig. 10.26 Design of Column Footing

Adopt 20 mm diameterbars at 170 mm centres in both directions.

Refer Table-2 of SP: 16 and interpolate the percentage reinforcement as, f) Transfer of Force at column Base
p, ; '0.080 which is less than 0.25 percent assumed for one-way shear.
Ultimate compressive force at column base =P, =(1.5 x 1000) ; 1500 kN
A ;(P,bd)=(0.25XIO'X725);1813 'I Limiting bearing stress at column footing interface is expressed as,
.. "100 100 mm m
fb,.m" ; 0.45 f'k ...jA,/A,
Using 20 mm diameter b,ars,
. . .' (1000X314)
Spacmg of the pars IS S = 1813 ; 173 mm c/c
 Rei~fo~ced
-, '. ,'. ,,' Concrete Design
- \ " '",
Limit Stete Design of Coiumns and Footings 373
i) For column face,.h, = 20 N/mmL
A, = A, = 400a mm'
.. j",.m" (column) = (0.45 x 20 xI) = 9 N/mm'
Ar=( U~IJ=(~J=(~~~)=2.74 m'
ii) For footi~g face,h' =20 N/mm', A, = 2400' mm' and A, = 400' mm'
~
(4X2.75)
Dr = 1.87 m
·n
yA/A, = Y(2400')/(400') = 6 limited to 2.0
Adopt diameter of footing .= Dr = 2 m
hr,mn-(footing):::: (0.45 x20x2) = 18 N/mm 2 > 9 N/mm2
Upward soil pressure:::: p :::: (750 X 24) :::: 238.8 kN/m2 < 300 kN/m 2
Hence the column face governs the design and j""m" = 9 N/mm' u nx2
.. Limiting-bearing resistance. is computed as, !:lence, the diameter of the footing is adequate to resist the loads.
F,,= [(9 x 400')/1000J = 1440 kN< P, = 1500 kN . ,{eferring to Fig; 10.27, eentre of gravity of quadrant ~ffooting (bb 'c c)
from '0' is Rx. and is computed ali.
.. Excess fOl'co(to be transferred by reinforcement) is
R = 0.6[R'+t'+ RT] = 0.6[ 1000' + 150'+ (1000 x 150)] = 61O.mm
I IJ.P, = (1500-1440) = 60 kN
I
'R+r (1000+150)
~1!;'\\1
The required development length for transferring the force of 60 kN can be Upward load on area (b h'c'e)'is expressed as Wq and computed as,
I provided by extending the column reinforcement iuti> the footiug and bent
,
, at 90' (standard bend) resting directly on top of reinforcement mesh as W, =[ u(1 -0.~5')238.81 =183 kN
1
shown in Fig. 10.26.
I c) Bending Moment
I

t~ ' .I
10.8.5 Design Example
Maximum bending "moment at the t~ce of the coh.im~ q'uadrant is com-
n- 'P~ puted as,
I Design a reinforced concrete circular footing for a circular column of 300
mm diameter s~pporting a design ultimate load of 750 kN. The safe bear- M, = 183 (0~61-0.15) = 84.2 kN.m
ing capacity of the soil at site is 200 kN/m'. Adopt M-20 grade concrete I Breadiiioffoo"ting at column face (for one quadrant c 'b ') =[(p x300/4)] =
and Fe-4 I 5 HYSD bars. 235 mm -----

a) Data Depth offooting ,: d ='4

_1M.
D:138 , b =
84.2x 10'
=360mm
h (0.138x20x235)
p" = 750 kN h, =20 N/mm' Depth required from shear considerations will nearly 1.5 times that for
D = 300mm ,Jy = 415 N/mm' moment computations.
p . = 200 kN/m' p, = (1.5x 200) = 300 kN/m' ·Hence adopt effective depth = d", 525 rom and overall depth = D = 600
mm
b) Dimensions of Footing
d) Reinforcements
Load on column = 750 kN
Self weight of footing (10%) = 75 kN
Total load on soil = lV, = 825 kN . [ bdh,
M, = (0.87f;A"d) I A'JY]
7
Let . Dr = diameter of the circular footing
A r = 'area of the footing
,
(84.2 x 10 ) = (0.87 x 415A" x 525) I
[ . 415A,;
(235 x 525 x 20)
J
 374 Reinforced Concrete Design
limit State Design of Coll/mns and Footings 375

Circular
. of perimeter = ( 11 X1.35
Shear per metre wIdth 408 ) = 96 kN '.
Column
Column
=(~)
3
=( 96 X 10 J= 0.18 N/mm'
reinforcement
t 3
, bd 10 X525

-+
.'
11I525
100A,,) = (100X 754) = 0.143
( bd lO'x525
Refer Table-19 of IS: 456-2000 and read out the permissible shear stress in
2-SP ~=::=~~+=~ J-..:J,... concrete
~ 2000
(k, t,) = (I x 0.28) = 0.28 N/mm' > 0.18 N/mm'
M~20 Grade concrele Circular
Fe -415 HYSD bars footing Hence, the shear stresses are within safe permissible limits.

e) Reinforcement Details
A
Io~ ':\ G Thereinforcement details in the circular footing are shown in Fig. 10.27.
~+ .
/Cenlrold
/ofquadrant 10.8.6 Design Example
~;~'V,' bOGe
. Design a combined column footing with a strap beam for two reinforced
concrete columns of size 300 mm by 300 mm spaced 4m c/c and each
supporting a service axial load of 500 kN. Tile safe bearing capacity of
soil at site is 150 kN/m'. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD
bars.

a) Data

Size of columns = 300 mm by 300 mm

Fig. 10.27 Reinforcement Details In Circular Footing
Spacing of columns = 4 m
Solving A" = 484 mm' Working load on eacll column = 500 kN
A".m], = (0.0012 X235 x 600) =.169 mm' Safe bearing capacity of soil = ISO kN/m'
Provide 10 mm diameter bars at 150 mm centres (A" = 524 mm') both M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
ways.
b) Design loads and Stresses
d) Check for Shear stress
Design ultimate load on each column = (1.5 x 500) = 750 kN
Ultimate Shear force at a distance of 0.525 m from the face of column is Ultimate bearing capacity of soil = (1.5 x 150) = 225 kN/m'
.given by, ' 10k = 20N/mm', f, = 415 N/mm'
V. = 238.8(2'-1.35') (11/4) = 408 kN
 Reinforced Concre~e. Design Limit State Design dfCoiumns and Footings '377
'c) Loads on Fooling
t' = (V;) =( 50x 10') =0.2 N/mm'
Totallo,ad on both the columns = (2 x 750) = 1500 kN , bd lO'x 250
Self weight of footing (10%) = 150 kN
Total ultimate load = P, =1650 kN. 100A,,) = ( 100 x 393 'J = 0.157
( bd lO'x250
d) Size of Footing Refer table-19 (IS: 456-2000) and read out the shear strength of concrete
as,
Area of footing = (1650/225) = 7:33 m'
(k, t,) = (I x 0.28) = 0,28 N/mm' > 0.2 N/mm'
Adopt a footing of size 6m long by 15 m wid
Adopt width of strap beam = b = 400 mm e, Hence, shear stresses are within safe permissible limits.

e) Design of Fooling g) Design of Strap Beam

S01'I pressure = p, = ( 61500 J

x L5 = 166,6 kN/m' < 225 kN/m'
Design ultimate load on beam = w, = (L5 x 166,6) = 250 kN/m
Neglecting the small cantilever portion of t~e beam,
Cantilever projeetion of footing = 05 (L5-0A) = 0 55 m M, = 0:125 w, L' = (0,125 x 250 x 4') = 500 kN,m
Ultimate design moment = M, = (05 P L') = (0 5 ~ 1666 -, -V, = 05 w, L = (05 x 250 x 4) = 500 kN
kN,m ' , , x 0,)5 ) = 25.2
Depth of strap beam computed based on shear will be greater than that

Effective depth of footing = d =

.
-Y M,
O, 138 f.k b
= -Y 25,2 X106
0,138 x20x 10-' = 96 mm
based on moment.
Assuming t, = L2 N/mm'

But the depth based on shear eonsiderations is ne'uly doubl h

to moment considerations. ~
h
e t an t at due
d =( V,) =(500X
bt,
10
400x L2
3
) = 1042 mm

Henee ndopt effeetive depth = d = 250 mm aud 0

mm
II d
vera epth = D = 300 Adopt effective depth = d = 1150 mm and overall depth =D =1200 mm
A,,{y]
M, = (0,87 f,A"d) [I _ A,J;, ]
[
M, = (0,87 f,A"d) 1- bd I'k
bd hk
6 [415A" ]
6 (500x1O)=(0,87x415A"xIl50) I (400xI150x20)
(25,2XI0 )=(0,87X415A"X250)[I_ 415A". ]
(10' x 250 x 20)
Solving A" = 1290 mm'
Solving A" = 287 mm' . Provide 4 bars 0[22 mm diameter (A" = 1520 mm')
BUI A",m'" = (0,0012 x 1000 x 300) = 360 mm'
Adopt 10 mm diameter bars at 200 mm eentre< 4 ' Shear stress = N/mm2
and distribution reinforcement. " (. $1 ::; 393 mn)·) as main
t
,
= (V,)
bd
= ( 500 x 10
400xl150
31
) = L09 N/mm'
.
I) Check for Shear slress
100A") = ( I00 x 1520) = 0.33
Design sheaf. foree = V, = (055 - 0.25) 166,6 = 50 kN ( bd 400x 1150
Refer table-19 ofIS:456-2000 and read out the permissible shear stress as
 378 Reinforced COilcrete Design Limit State Design of Columlls and Footings 379

't'c ;;:; 0.40 N/mm2 < 'tv 10.8.7 Design Example

Hence, shear reinforcements are required to resist the balance shear force
computed as The column section of a reinforced concrete portal frame is 450' mm wide
by 600 mm deep at the base. The column section transmits an axial sCJ.'vice
v" = [SOO - (0.4 x 400 x I1S0) 10-3] = 316 kN load of 160 kN together with an uniaxial moment of S2 kN.m about the
Using 8 mm diameter 4 legged stirrups, the spacing is major axis to the foundation. Design a suitable footing for the column of
the portal frame assuming the safe bearing capacity of the soil as 200
S =(0.87X4ISX4XSOX11S0)_ kN/m'. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-4IS HYSD bars.
, 316x103 -262mm

Adopt 8 mm diameter 4 legged stirrups at 2S0 mm centres in the strap a) Data

beam.
Side face reinforcement of 0.1 percent of web area as specified in IS'4S6 Axial service load = 160 kN
code is provided. . Uniaxial moment = M = S2 kN.m
Size of column = 4S0 mm by 600 mm
=
S.BC. ofthe soil 200 kNlm'
h) Reinforcement Details M-20 grade concrete and Fe-4IS HYSD bars

The details of reinforcements in the combined footing and strap beam are b) Size of Footing
shown in Fig. 10.28.
Load on column = 160 kN
Self weight of footing(IO%) = 20 kN
+-'000 rto, Jf., 4000 10oo---t Total load on soil = P = 180 kN
Service load moment = M = S2 kN.m
~
. //4-#22 ,-x 1'.fr /SI'oP Eccentricity = e = (MIP) = [(S2 x 10')/(180 X10
3
)] = 290 mm
I I I " To avoid tension in the foundation the total breadth of foundation footing
#66250 I
41f9¥d stirrups is expressed as,
I I I I II b=6e = (6x 290) = 1740 mm
4 -'" 10,j{ 4.X
,
lOnQitudinal Se lion I Hence, provide a foundation of.size 1m by 2-m
+- 6000
r

~
c

m
. /300 l( 300 R.C.Column

Strap bUlm {400 l( 11.()0}

W.3'roo
1 I 500
M-20 Grade concrete
Fe 415 grade HYSD bars
c) Pressnre Distribution at nase

Intensity of maximum pressure :;:

~~
p= 2P) = (2IX2
(A x 180) =180kN/m<200kN/m
, ,

Hence, the soil pressure is within the safe permissible limits. The distribu-
tion of soil pressure below the footing is shown in Fig. 10,29(a).
Fig. 10.28 Reinforcement Details in Combined Footing
If p' = soil pressure below the footing at the face of the column,

P'=C·3 ~180) = 117 kN/m'

 Limit State Design of Columns lind Footings 381 .

Total pressure on the cantilever portion of the footing is expressed a~, d=

63x10' _151mm
(0.138 x 20 x 10')
P, =C 80 ;1l7) 0.7 =I04kN Depth required from shear considerations will be more than that required
from moment considerations.
acting at a distance of 0.4 m"from column face. Hence, adopt effective depth = d = 250 mm
Hence, the bending moment at column fa~e = M = (104 x 004) = 42 kN.m And overall depth = D = 300 mm
Factored bending moment = M, = (1.5 x 42) = 63 kN.m
e) Reinforcements
+-600-+
ftp M~20 Grade concrete
Fe-415 HYSD bars
M, = 0.87 f,/1"d[l- <ld,,f,] = (0.87 x 415A"X250)[1
.
Solving A.. = 750 mm'
b 10k
.
415A"
UO'x250x20)
]

Provide 16 mm diameter bars at 150 mm centres (A" = 1341 mm')

+-700 700 Distribution reinforcement =0.12 percent = (0.0012 x 300 X 10') = 360
" 1t mm'
~~~~~=j~\~~~r! Provide 10 mm diameter bars at 180 mm centres (A" = 436 mm')

-.I,I~__ 2000,-,-2_50~_~,f- I) Check fo~ Shear stress

-t-
p=180kN/m'
Factored shear force acting at a distance of 250 mrn from the face of the
column is given by [Refer Fig. 1O.29(a)]
Soil pressure
distribution
-l 139
V, = 1.5 [180 +2 .5 ]0045 = 108 kN
Ca) Details af Foating & Soil Pressure

f='#-='=6-=1=50=C=/C::; ===B1
"y
7
# 10-180c/t.)V
r1·
1000
t
,
=(V') =(108X
bd
10') =0.43 N/mm'
lO'x250

.IOOA,,) =(IOOX 1341) =0.53

( bd 1000x250

J,f====-;2;00;oO~=-=-=-=-=-=-~r Refer Table-19 (IS:456-2000) and read out the permissible shear stress as,
(k, to) =. (I x 0048) = 0048 N/mm' > t,

(b) Reinforcements in Footing Hence, shear stresses are within safe permissible limits.
I

g) Reinforcement details
,1, Fig. 10.29 Footing Subjected to Axil Load And Moment
!"
The details of reinforcements in the footing slab are shown in Fig.
d) Thickness of Footing slab
1O.29(b).
Effective depth required for balanced' section is computed as,
.~
I
I
 382 Reinforced Concreie Design
10.9 EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE
1) Design the longitudinal and lateral reinforcements in a rectangular
reinforced concrete column of size 300 mm by 600 mm to support a
factored axial load of 1400 kN. The column has an unsupported length
of 3 m and is braced against side sway in both directions. Adopt M-20
grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
2) Design the reinforcements in a circular column of diameter 350 mm
with helical ties to support a factored load of 1600 kN. The column
has an unsupported length of 3.5 m and is braced against side sway.
Adopt M-25 grade concrete and Fe-500 grade reinforcements.
3) Design a suitable reinforced concrete column of. square section to
support an axial service load of 1000 kN, The size of the column is
400 mm by 400 mm. Design a suitable footing for the column. The
safe bearing capacity of the soil at site is 200 kN/m'. Adopt M-20
grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. Sketch the details of rein-
forcements in the column and footing.
4) Design the longitudinal reinforcements in a rectangular reinforced
concrete column of size 300 mm by 600 mm subjected to a factored
load of 1500 kN and a factored moment of 300 kN.m with respect to
the major axis. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
5) A multi-storeyed building with a floor-to-floor height of 4 m and a
plan area of 18 III by 30 m has the columns spaced at 6 III intervals in
both directions. The columns have a size of 400 mm by 400 mm with
M-30 grade concrete and all the primary beams are of size 300 mm
wide by 600 mm deep with M-25 grade concrete. Calculate the effec-
tive length of the typical lower storey column assuming a total dis-
tributed load of 50 kN/m' from all the floors above the grounll floor.
6) Design a short circular column -of diameter 350 mm to support a fac-
tored axial load of 1000 kN, together with a factored moment of 100
kN.m. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
7) Design the longitudinal and lateral reinforcements in a short column
of size 300 mm by 500 mm subjected to an ultimate axial load of 1200
kN with ultimate moments of 80 and 60 kN.m about the major and
minor axis respectively. Adopt M-25 grade concrete and Fe-415
HYSD bars.
8) A short reinforced concrete column located at the corner of a IllUlti-
storeyed building is snbjected to an axial factored load of 1600 kN
together with factored moments of 60 and 40 kN.m acting in
Limit State Design of Columns and Footings 383
perpendicular planes. The size of the column is fixed as 400 mill by
400 mm. Adopting M-20 grade concrete and Fe-4l5 HYSD bars
design suitable reinforcements in the corner column.
9) A reinforced concrete braced column of size 300 mm by 400 mm is to
be designed to support a factored axial load of 1500 kN together with
factored moments 'of 60 and 40 IeN.Ill with respect to the. major and
minor axis respectively at the top end. Assume that the column is bent
in double curvature in both directions and are subjected t~ moments at
the bottom end equal to 50 percent of the corresponding moments at
top. Also assume that the unsuPP?rted length o.f the column as 7 m and
an effeclive length ratio of 0.85 m both directions. Adopt M-30 grade
concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. Design suitable reinforcements in
the column.
10) Design a suitable footing for a reinforced concrete column of size 300
mm by 500 mm supporting a factored axial load of 1500 kN. Assume
the safe bearing capacity of the soil as 200 kN/m'. Adopt M-20 grade
concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. Sketch the details of reinforcements
, in the footing.
II) Design a combined footing for the two columns of a .multisto:ey
I building. The columns of size 400 mm by 400 mm transffilt a workmg
load of 800 kN each and they r.re spaced at 5 m centres. The safe
bearing capacity of soil at site is 20Q kN/m'. Adopt M-20 grade con-
crete and Fe-415 grade reinforcement. Sketch the detalls of remforce-
ments in the combined footing.
12) Design a trapezoidal footing for the two columns A and B transmitting
service loads of 800 kN and 1600 kN respectively. The column,; IS .
400 mm square and column B is 600 mm squart in size and they arc
spaced at 5 in centres. The property line is 300 mm beyond the face ~f
column A. Tho safe bearing capacity of sOlI at site IS 150 kN/m.
Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
13) Design a strap footing combined foundation for two columns C and D
spaced 6 m apart between their centres. Column C is 400 mm square
and supports a service load of 500 kN. Column D IS 500 mm sqnare
and supports a service load of 1200 kN. The safe beanng capacity of
the soil at site is 200 kN/m'. Adopt M-20 Grade concrete and Fe-415
grade HYSD bars.
14) Design an isolated footing for a column 350 .10m. by 600 mm rein-
forced with 6 bars of 25 mm diameter and IS subjected to a serVIce
. '.' load of 600 kN and a service moment of 80 kN.m with respect to the
:., major axis. At the column base. The safe bearing capacity of soil is
':':',;200 kN/m'. Adopt M-~O grade concr~te and Fe-415 HYSD bars..
 " . ~,. ,'"
CHAPTER 11.
Limit State Design of Retaining
Walls
11.1 INTRODUCTION
Retaining waUs are generally used to retain' earth or such materials to
maintain.,unequal levels on its two faces. The soil on the back face is at a
higher level and is called the .backfill. Retaining walls are extensively used
in the construction of basements below ground level, wing walls of bridge
and to retain slopes in hilly terrian roads. The retaining wan prevents the
retained ea~th to exert a lateral pl,:essure on the wall tending to bend, over-
turn and slide the retaining walL Retaining waIls 'should be designed to
resist the lateral earth pressure from the sides and the soil pressure acting
vertically on the footing slab integrally built with the vertical slab.
Gravity walls of stone masonry were generally used in the earlier'days
to retain earthen embankments. The thickness of the masonry walls
increased with the height of the earth fill. The advent of reinforced con-
crete has resulted in thinner retaining walJs of different types resulting in
considerable reduction of costs coupled with improved aesthetics.
11.2 TYPES OF RETAINING WALLS
a) Cantilever retaining wall
The most common and widely used retaining wall is of the cantilever type
comprising the following structural parts (Fig. 11.1)
i) Vertical stem resisting earth pressure from one side and the slab bends
like a cantilever. The thickness of the slab is larger at the bottom and
graduaUy decreases towards the top in proportion to the variation in
soil pressure.
ii) The base slab forming the foundation comprises the heel slab and the
toe slab. -The heel slab acts as a horizontal cantilever under the
combined action of the weight of retained earth from the top and the
soil pressure acting from the soffit. The toe slab also acts as a cantile-
ver under the action of the resulting soil pressure acting upward. The
stability of the wall is maintained by the weight of the earth fill on the
LimitState Design 'of Retaining 'Walls' 385 ,
stem or
upright slab
Earth fill
Heel slob
Toe slab
Fig.l1.I Cantilever Retaining Wall
heel slab together with the self weight of the structural elements of the
retaining wall. Cantilever type retaining walls are adopted for small to
medium heights up to Sm.
.
b) Counterfort retaining wall
For larger heights exceeding 5 m of earth fill, the bending moment devel-
oped in the stem, heel and toe slabs are very large resulting in larger thick
w
ness of the structural elements tending to be uneconomical. Hence.
counteriort type retaining walls are adopted for larger heights. Fig. 11.2
shows a typical counterfort type retaining wall consistmg of a.. stem or
npright slab. toe slab, heel slab and the eonnterforts which subdivide ~he
vertical slab and they, behave as vertical canti1eve~ beams of tee-sectIOn
with varying width. The stem and· heel slab are effectively fixed to the
counterforts so that the stem bends horizontally between .the counerforts
dne to lateral earth pressure. Consequently the thickness of the stem and
the heel slab is considerably rednced dne to the rednction of moment due
to the fixity of these slabs between the counterforts.
.I
11.3 FORCES ACTING ON RETAINING WALLS
The various forces acting on retaining wall are shown in Fig. 11.3 and
detailed as follows:
a) Lateral earth Pressure
The lateral forces due to earth pressure is the major force acting on the
 386 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Retaillillg Walls 387
·1
retaining wall. The magnitude of the force is expressed by the relation.

[' Counter fort P, ~ C,Y,(h')'12

I
I
Where Ca
y,
h'
;:::

~
~
Coefficient of active earth pressure
Density of Soil
height of the back fill measured vertically above the heel
(Fig 11.3)
The coefficient of earth pres.sure Ca depends upon the angle of shearing
resistance (angle of repose) '$' and the inclination or slope of the back fill
Toe slab to the horizontal expressed as '8'.
The general relation for the coefficient of active earth pressure based
Heel slab
on Rankine's.theory is given by the relation,

C =[ cose-..JcosZe-COS1$] cos e
a cos6+"cos2e-cos2ep
Fig. 11.2 Counterfort Retainhlg Wall
For the case of a level backfill, e ~ 0 and h' = h
I-S;n$)
Hence, C.~ ( 1+sin$
The coefficient of passive earth pressure is given by the relation,
t +sin$)

r
Cp = ( I-sin¢;
h'
I The magnitude of the earth pressure Pa acts at one- third the height of
h
W2 the back fill as shown in.Fig. 11.3, The force Pp developed due to the pas-
wi
!
,f-x sive pressure acts on the toe side of the retaining wall and its magnitude
: 1 ,~
being very small (due to the small height of earth fill on toe slab) is
generally neglectcd in the design computations.
Due to the construction of buildings on a level back fill or due to the
. W4! '
movement of vehicles near the top of the retaining wall, gravity loads act-
Pp !W3 ing can be considered as uniformly distributed load. This additional load of
(NegleCledIF=>\--To-e-,J<--r-:fl=R~' ------\;"""::::::;\<---~f­ w, kN/m' can be treated as statically equivalent to an additional (fictitious)
R height of soil h, = (w, I Y,) acting over tbe level surface. The force devel-
.,f-----Z oped due to the effect of surcharge on a level back fill together with the
B ----- other forces are shown in Fig. 11.4.
The total force due to active earth pressure is expressed as,
I/" pressure
Soil
Pa = Pat +Pa1.
J..-L-l--L---
Where P,I =C,.w,.h =C,.h,.Y, h and Po' =(C,.y,.h')/2
J..-l--L--L--
L.----
Fig.H.3 F~rces Acting on E.etalnlng Wall
 Limit State Design ofRetaining Walls, 389
388 Reit1!orcedConcrete·Vesigli .'."
,-----..'
. L· that these stabilizing forces should be factored by a value of 0.9 in c. ~'~'.
, 'Surcharge . '\
lating the factor of safety.
I I \ Hence, the factor of safety can be expressed by the relation,
I
,
Ws J
I \
\
_ [o.9(StabiliSin g Force or Moment)
F.S, - Destabilising Force or Moment
J 1.4
2:

a) Overturning .

The retaining wall overturns with the toe as the centre of rotation. When
the structure overturns, the upward reaction R will not act and the expres~
h
sions for the overturning moment' Mo and the stabilizing mornen.t ,Ms
depend only on the lateral earth pressure and the geometry of the retammg
I wall.
I Considering the retaining wall with sloping back fill (Fig. 11.3), the
.,' fh/2J expressions for. the overturning and stabilizing moment are,
I M, = (P,cosS)(h '/3) = [e,r,(h ')'/61 cosS

I M, = WeB -x) + (P,sinS)B

,, I

flJFIU
,
I
,
rl~rr1'l
,
L=e _z --4-
Fig. 11.4 Effective Surcharge on a Level BacktllI
Where W =.W,+W,+W,+W,
And W,
W,
=
=
=
weight of earth fill
weight of stem
W, weight of heel and toe slab
W, = weight of earth fill over toe slab
The forces p., and Poi act at a height of hl2 and hl3 respectively above the And x = distance of W from the heel
heel. B = Base width of slab
The factor of safety against overturning is expressed as
b) The vertical forces include the weight of soil, weight of stem, heel, toe
slab and the soil fill above toe slab.
_(O.9M,) ~.14
(F,S)overturriing - 'M
,. ., o

f' •
e) The soil pressure developed to resist the earth presiure and other verti-
cal forces acting upwards from liee! to toe. The pressure distribution at
base is. obtained by stability calculations comprising the equilibrium
eondition of vertical forces and moments.
11.4 STABILITY REQUIREMENTS
The design of retaining walls should conform to the stability requirements
specified in c1ause-20 of IS: 456 whi.ch incl~des overturning and sliding.
The factor of safety against overturning and sliding should be not less than
1.4 since the stabilizing forces are due to dead loads. The code specifies
b) Sliding
The resistance developed agains; sliding of the retaining wall is mainly ~ue
to the frictional forces generated between the base slab and the supportmg
soil expressed as
F=J!R
Where R =: W;:: Resultant soil pressure acting on the base slab and
/l ;Coeffic.ient of friction· between concrete and SOIl (Value of /l varies in
the range of 0.35 for silt to about 0.60 for rough rock)
Hence. the factor of safety against sliding is computed by the relation'
 {

II 390 Reinforced Concrete Design

c) Shear key
(F.S).liding -_[ PO.9~W]
COS
a·
e ~ 1.4
Limit State Design ofRetaining Walls

ti-'so to 200 mm
,.. ,
391

I~ the case of back fiUs with su:charge. the active pressures arc relatively
stem
hl.gh and consequently the requlfed factor Of safety against sliding by the
[fictIOnal forces above will not be sufficient. In such cases, it is advanta-
geous to provide a shear key projecting below the base slab as shown 1n h
Fig. 11.5.

stem
Toe slab

hi
II
1;-'~'-_..J
Toe
"fIsT
-+-
+- --1-
Xh
h. fl_I-!---..,
tXt ~
>j

t
1·4g~r-·F-
B
Sher key
Fig. 11.6 Dimensioning of Retaining Wall Ellcments

~~
pCPVe •
h
the front face of stem or up right slab. Referring to Fig. 11.6,
Let II =height of e3lth fill from the soffit of base slab
B =width of base slab
JI'ig.1l.5 Passive Pressure Duc-to Sheal' Key
Xh = width of heel slab
The passive resistance developed against sliding i1i computed as x, = width of toe slab
Ca :;;; coefficient of active earth pressure.
P, = Cp r,(h; - hi)f2 Assuming the soil pressure 'distribution as triangular with maximum
It is advantageous to provide a shear key just below the stem so that the pressure at the toe and zero at the heel, the resultant Tertical pressure will
reinforcements can be extended into the shear key. pass through the middle third point. For economical design, the soil pres-
The enhanced factor of safety against sliding by the use of the shear sure resultant should line up with the front face of the stem.
key can be expressed as. Adopting this principle, Unnikrishna Pillai and Devadas Menon" have
developed an expression for the minimum width of heel slab as,
(F.S),,;,,", =[O;~Wcos
a'
+;,]? 1.4 ~h:= 1l..fCa73
The effect of surcharge or sloping back fill can be included'byreplac-
11.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF RETAINING WALLS ing 'II' with h+lI, or h' respectively. With known values of 'h'and C.. xh can
be computed.
11.5.1 Preliminary dimensioning of Stem and Base slab =
Hence, base width = B 1.5 xh .
= =
And x, (113) B so that xh (2//3) B

I a) Width of Base slah

An eco~omical de;ign ofth~ retaining'ivall can be obtained by proportion-

mg the,base slab S9 as to alIgn the vertical soil reaction R at the base with
b) Thickness of base slab and stem

The preliminary computations of the thickness ofba~e slab is expressed as, ,';:<
~~
&,
j ';;~~
~.~ ~ ,
 393
. 392 . J

I, = (hIl2) 'or O.08h

(
,-, Tension.
" "
"I,>,:' " "
I
\ face
I
But not less than 300mm \ \ I
\ \ I
Thickness of stem at bottom is assumed aS I
\ \ I
($ := tb
The stem thickness is gradually decreased to a minimum value of 150 to
200mm at top. The front face of the stem is maintained vertical.
\ \
\

+-p
r I
I
I
I
I
c) Design of stem, heel, and toe slahs
Tension I
,,, ,- '
face I
x
The stem, heel and toe slabs, structurally behave as cantilever slabs and y ---
deform as shown in Fig. 11.7. Hence, the critical sections XX, YY and ZZ
shown in. figure have to .be designed. to resist the factored moment and
shear forces with a load factor of 1.5. Usually shear is not a critical design
I
y/
I
--- --I
I

factor and the flexural reinforcement is provided near the tension face in
the slabs with a clear cover of 50 mm. The reinforcements in the stem may
be curtailed in stages for economy. Temperature anp shrinkage reinforce-
ment of 0.12 percent of th~ gross cross section should be provided trans- 1 1
verse to the main reinforcement. Normal vertical and horizontal Soil pressure
reinforcement should be provided near the front face of stem and also at
un,,;-
the bottom face of heel slab and top face of toe slab.
U"~
Fig.H.7 Deformation Characteristics of Retaining Wall
_d) Design of Counterforls 4m high above ground level. The density of earth is 18 kNlm' and'its angle
1
olrepose is 30°. The embankment'is horizontal at top. The safe, bearing
IT

1 1
The counter forts should be integrally built with proper ties with stem and
heel slab so that the horizontal forces due to earth fill is resisted by the
c~pacity of the soil may be taken as 200 kNlm' and the coefficient of fric-
tion between soil and concrete is 0.5. Adopt M-20 grac·'e concrete and Fe-
1 tension'steel provided in the countetforts. In a similar way the vertical ,
1 ,', 415 HYSD bars.
4 forces on base slab are resisted by the vertical ties in the counterfort.
1 The counterfort is designed as a vertica~ _cantilever. fixed at base. Since a) Data
l
I
the stem acts integrally with.the counterfort, the effective section resisting
the cantilever moment is a flanged section, with the flange under compres-
1
Height of embankment above ground level = 4m
1
sion. The counterfoits are designed as tee beams with the depth of the sec- Density of soil = 18 kNlm'
I tion varying linearly from 'the top to the bottom where the section is Angle of repose = 30°
••I, maximum to resist the- maximum moments.
The stem is designed as a continuous slab spanning between the C01Jn-
S,B.C. of soil= 200 kNlm'
Coefficient of friction = 0.5
j terforts with negative and positive moments at supports and mid span Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars
, respectively. The heel and toe slabs are designed for soil pressure as .
"
I continuous and cantilever slabs receptively. b) Dimensions of the Retaining wall
11.6 DESI.GN EXAMPLES
Minimum depth of Foundation :=1:
( 1+sin$ = (200)(1)'
P)[I-Sin$]' 18 '3 = 1.2 m
11.6.1 Design a cantilever retaining wall to retain an earth embankment
394 Reinforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Retaining 'rVa/ls 395

Provide depth of foundation ~ 1.2 m c) Design of stem

Over all depth of wall (h) ~ (4 + 1.2) ~ 5.2 m
Thickness of base slab ~ (hI12) or 0.08h ~ (5200112) ~ 433 mm Height of stem ~ h, ~ 4.75 m
Adopt thickness of base slab ~ t b ~450 mm Thicknes~ of stem;:: thickness of base slab;:: 450 mm at bottom tapering to
:. Height of stem ~ h, ~ (5.2 - 0.45) ~ 4.75 m 200 mm at top.
Coefficient of active earth pressure is computed as,
M, ~ 1.5C, (Y~;'J~ (1.5 x 0.333 x 18 x 4.75 )16 ~ 161 kN.m
3

_ll-sin$I_II-sin3ool_0 333
Ca - 1 +sinlj) - 1 +sin30o - .
Providing a cover of 50 mm, d;:: 400mm
Width of heel slab ~ Xh ~ h ..JC.l3 ~ 5.2 "';(0.333/3) ~ 1.73 m
Width of base slab~ B ~ 1.5 Xh ~ (1.5 x 1.73) ~ 2.6 m ( bd'
M")~( 161 x 106)~ 1 006
10 x 400'
3 .
AdoptB~3 m Refer Table -2 (SP: 16) and read out the percentage of reioforcement as
Width of toe slab ~ 1m and Width of heel slab ~ 2 m (Refer Fig.II.8)
~200 .
100A,,)
PI = 0.30 = ( ---,;J and :. Asl =
103 x 400) = 1200 mm21m
(0.30 x 100
1//«" q,r,.
~¢'
I ".h
I Provide 16mm diameter bars at 160mm centres at the bottom for a
,
I height of 1.75m and gradually increased spacing of 200mm for the next
oIie metre and as 300mrn centres for the remaining height.
I
Distribution Reinforcement ~ 0.12 percent ~ (0.0012 x 10 x 450) = 54'0
3
I

r I . 2
4m mm jm.
I

J""
'4'75m Provide 8mm diameter bars at 180mm centres in the horizontal direction at
W2' I Ihs) both front and back faces. Gradually the spacing is increased to 250 and
m
1 '--Ysh 2
Pa=Ca(~)
300 mm centres towards tlie top of the stem.

I. d) Stability computations (Pressure distribution at base)

""'" "
~ I
, I
1·2m I I
b
~W3
The overall dimensions of the retaining wall is shown in Fig. 11.8 the sta-

+-d ,I
:
.0
10'45m
o-t- - ....
bility calculations arc shown in Table 11.1.

Table 11.1 Stability calculations for one metre run ·of wall

Loads Magnitude of Dislance from Moment (kN.m)

Load (kN) 'a'Im)
dr_+--';',.--Ib<---------i Pm in WI = (1.5Sx 4.75 x 18) 132.50 0.78 103.35
53·84 kN/m 2 W2 = (0.2 x 4.75 x 25) 22.80 1.65 37.62
+ (0.5 x 0.25 x 4.75 x 25) 14.25 1.83 26.07
W3 = (3 x 0.45 x 25) 32.40 1.50 48.60
Momentdue to earth pressure
Pmax M== e" (Yo.h.1)/6
80·76 kN/m 2 9 == 0.333(18 x 4.75 3 )/6
J Soil pressure
,distribution Total, l:W- 201.95 l:M~ 322.81
e. . oJ base.,n,
F'g~ 11.8 Forces Acting on Retaining Wan
 ,','
Limit State Design of Retaining Walls '397
396 Reinforced Conc.rr:te. Design

Distance of point of application of resultant from point 'a' = Z = CVv/lz:.W) Refer Table-19 (IS: 456) and for M-20 grade concrete, the percentage
2
reinforcement required for'tc ::: 0.20 N/mm is read out as, .
2 = [(322.81)/(201.95)] = 1.6 m
Eccentricity = e = (2 - O.5B) = (1.6 - 0.5 x 3) = 0.1 m (l~~,,) =0.15
(8/6) = (3/6) = 0.5 m :. e = 0.1 m < (8/6)
Hence, the soil pressure is compressive from a to d =(0.15 x 1000 x 400) ~600 mm'/m
A" 100
Maximum and minimum soil pressure at 'd' and 'a' respectively are com-

(M,) =(68.IOX
puted as 10') =0.425
bd' 1000 X400'
'. =(-":')[1±6e]_(20,J.95)[
p (ma~.mln) B B, - (6XO.I)]'
-3- 1±--3-
Refer Table-2 (SP:16) and read out the percentage reinforcement as
Pm" = 80.76 kN/m' (at <1)..•• toe P, = 0.121 < 0.15
2
Pm', = 53.84 kN/m' (at a) .... hecl Hence, provide 12 mm diameter bars at 180 mm centres (A" = 628 mm ).

~aximum soil pressure at' toe is less than the safe bearing capacity of soil Provide 8 mm diameter hal'S at 180 mm centres in the transverse direction
~lven by_ (200 kN/m ). Hence, soil pressure is within safe permissible lim-
2
as distribution reinforcement at both faces of the heel slab.
Its.

f) Design of toe slab

e) Design of heel slab
'Maximum bending moment in the toe slab is computed at the section CC
M~xirnum-bending moment in the' heel slab is computed at section 'bb t
as shown in Table-I!.3 (Refer Fig 1!.8)
usmg the moment computations shown in Table 11.2 (Refer Fig 11.8).
l'T',,!
Table 11.3 Moment calculations for 1m length of Toe slah
Table 11.2 Moment calculations for 1m length of heel slab Moment (kN.m)
Magnitude of Distance from
Loads 'c' 1m)
Loads Magnitude of Distance from Moment (kN.m) Load (kN)
Load (kN) 'b'(m)
Upward pressure cdjl 35.89
WI - (f55 x4.75 x 18) 132.50 0.775 102.68 71.78 0.50
= (71.78 x 1)
Self weight of heel slab
(1.55 x 0.45 x 25) 16.70 0.775 12.94 Upward pressure jfa 0.67 3.00
:: (0.5 x 1 x 8.98) 4.49
Total 115.62 38.89
Deduct for upward pressure (ablh) Tolal
= (53.84 x 1.55) 83.45 0.775 64.67
Up ward pressur9 (ghi) Deduct sell weight of toe slab 5.40
10.8 0.50
(0.5 x 1.S5x 13.9) 10.77 0.516 5.55 (1 x 1 xO.45x25)
Tolal Deduction 70.22 Neglect self weight of soil above-toe
slab 33.49 : "
Maximum moment in toe slab
.. Maximum B.M. in heel slab = M w = (115.62 - 70.22) = 45.40 kN m I
Maximum ultimate momentM, = (1.5 x 45.40) = 68.10 kN.m . Maximum ultimate moment in toe slab at CC = M, = !.5 (33.49) = 50.23
MaXImum Shear Force V,= 1.5 Vw = 1.5 [132.50 + 16 70 - 83 45
10.77] = 82.5 kN . .- kN.m
Maximum shear force = V, = 1.5 [71.78 + 4.49 - 10.8] = 98.2 kN

" (V,) (82.5XIO')

',= bd = 10' x 400 = 0.20 N/mm
,
'.
=( V,) = (98.2
bd
x 1000) = 0.245 N/mm'
1000 X400
 398 Reinforced Concrete Design
Limit State Design of Retaining Walls 399
Refer Table-19 (IS : 456) and read out the percentage reinforcement
required for 1 + sin<il}
Then, p =C.p= { . '" 71.78=(3X71.78)=215.34kN/m'
Tc== 0.245 N/mm 1 using M-20 grade concrete as, P PI-sIn",

C~~A}0.15 If a = depth of shear key = 450 mm

Total passive fo·rce Pp= (pp. a) = (215.34 X 0045) = 96.9 kN

-: .. A ~[0.15X1000X400]~600mm'/m Factor of safety against sliding

• 100 " ~[~w+ P p] ~[100.975 +96.9] ~ 2.43 > 1.40
The ultimate moment being small, the reinforcement required will be less LP. 81.12
than that from shear considerations. Hence, provide 12mm diameter bars at
Provide minimum reinforcement of 8 mm diameter bars at 180 mm ceh-
180 mm centres (A" ~ 628 mm') ters. The reinforcement details in the retaining wall is shown in Fig. 11.9.
Provide 8mm diameter bars at 180 mm centres in the transverse direction
and in both directions at the top of the slab. . r-t- 200

... 8 -300
1m
g) Stability against overturning
... 16-300 -----..,J,..
Stability against overturning is checked by computing the overturning and ... 8-250 3m
stabilizing moment about toe.

__}',m
# 16-200
C 1 1{1 (0.33X 18X4.75')
( ......!....I;-) =
Overturning moment = M o =:: 6, = 106.1 kN.m #8-180

Stabilizing moment due to vertical forces about the toe is computed as,
M, =LW (8 - Z) =201.95 (3 - 1.6) =282.73 kN.m I
I
16-160
1·75m •
Factor of safety against overturning is expressed as,

FS
..
~(0.9MM,) ~(0.9X282.73).~
o
106.1
2.39 > 1.40 (Hence safe)
""

#12-180
1
450
--,I<-
h) Stability against sliding 450
....J.-
Sliding Force = p. = (0.5 C. y, h') = (0.5 X 0.33 X 18 X 5.2') = 81.12 kN • tl000--f450f-1550-+
Resisting force (ignoring passive pressure) is expressed as 3000 --------t
F ~ ~R ~ ~W ~ (0.5 X201.5) ~ 100.975 kN. Fig. 11.9 Reinforcement Details in Cantilever Retaining Wall
Factor of safety against sliding = [(0.9 X 100.975)]1(81.12) = 1.12 < 1.4 11.6,2 Design Example (Counterfort Retaining Wall)
Hence, the wall is unsafe ~gainst sliding. Therefore a shear key has to be
designed below the stem. Design a counterfort type retaining wall to suit the following data.
i) Design of shear key Height of wall aboveground level = 6 rtl
Safe bearing capacity of soil at site = 160 kN/m'
Let P == Passive force resisting the sliding of retaining wall Angle of internal friction = 33 degrees
p; == Intensity of passive pressure'developed just in front of shear
I
Density of soil = 16 kN/ni' .
key at C Refer (Fig.l1.8)
 -:'
,~, Limit State Design o!l?etaixiJlJ:1{ n-cills -40]
:,: 400 . Reinforced Conc~~te Design
·' · · · · · .
•. Spacings of counterforts = 3 m clc Provide 12 mrn diameter bars at 150 mm centers fA" :=: 7:S£ E1"x.r~~
I.· Materials: M-20 gradc concreie and Fe-415 HYSD bar,. Dist,ibution reinforc~inent = 0.12% = (0.0012 x n() / J (OG> = :::::'4 ::o'!m
Adopt 6 mm diameter bars at 200 mm centers (All = :2.83]T1r-,~-
i Sketch the details of reinforcements in the retaining wall.
The dimensions of the various structural clemen!!> r:.f -:',-e '::--;:lUmmon
a) Dimensions of retaining wall retaining wall are shown in Fig.ll.lO(a).

.. d h' .
MInJffium ept of Ioundatlon =
p[I-Sin~]'
~ ~-.- = -160(1)'
- = 1.11 III
Yc 1+slnep 16 3

,,-. -, Provide depth offoundation = 1.2 m counter .f~r,::

:. Overall height of wall = H = (6 + 1.2) = 7.2 m
Thickness of base slab = 2,LH cm = (2 x 3 x 7.2) = 43.2 cm
Provide 450 mm thick base slab. 6m ,.-,= :-75m
Base width = 0.6 H to 0.7 H
=
(0.6 x 7.2) 4.32m and (0.7 x 7.2) 5.04 m
Hence, adopt base width = 4.5 m
= H.7·2
m r
w,
Toe projection = (1/4) 4.5 = Ll m
G. L.
.'
b) Design of stem
!'2m
r--_.J
.
Pressure mtensllY at
. b
ase = y. h (I-Sin~)
~
--.-
I +smep Toe slab

where h = (7.2 - 0.45) = 6.75 m ,f-Im----,f.220,f 3·28m----~

:. Pressure intensity = (16 x 6.75)(1/3) = 36 kN/m'
(0) Counter fort Retaining WalL
no,
M. k'
aXlInum wor mg moment = M
w
= (%X9) =
--
12 27 kN.m
(overall dimensions)

d,_,-----';C,--jb1-- --'=
Factored moment = M, = (1.5 x 27) = 40.5 kN.m

~I
Effective depth required for balanced section is computed as, I
z it-
d -~
_ M,
(0.138[",&)
405. x 10'
(0.138 x 20 x 10')
_ 12 lmm ~I
I
~I
Assuming an' un-reinforced s.ection and to provide a suitable thickness to 9
resist the design shear al base of stem, adopt an overall thickness of 220 •
150 kN/m 2
mm constant up to the top of the retaining wall. (b) Pressure Di'slribution
Effective depth = d = 175 mm FiJ!.11.10 Counferforf RetninJn~ WalU
The reinforcements. in the stem is computed using the relation,
c) Stability computations
415A ]
(40.5xlO')=(0.87x415A " x175) [ 1 (I 0' x 175x20)
" The pressure distribution at base is computed by ~~'::.l.;lL.~"':~;f :~l~ \"arious
" forces acting and taking moments of all the force~ 2::1-:'':[ -:::-:: :~ - The val'·
Soiving, AM::;: 700 rnm2 iells forces acting and their moments about the hF;;;;l :,-:'.l:-,r ::. ;:e:;- :-;ilo\vn in
Table-l 1.4. "
 Limit State Design of Retaining Y\'alls 403
402 Rein/orced Concrete Design
Table 11.4 Stability Computations Table 11 5 l\1omcnts of Toe 81 a b
Distance from Moment about loads Magnitude of Distance from 'c'
Magnitude 01 Moment about
Loads 'a'(rn) 'a'(kN.m) Load (kN) (m) ·c·(kN.m)

~_
-
WI =- (0.22 x 6.75 x 25)
Load (kN)
35.64
48.60
3.39
2.25
120:~~
109.35
Upward pressure 'cdjl'
:: (126.6 x 1) 26.6 0.50 63.30
W :: (0.45 x 4.5 x 25) 580.95
2
354.24 1.64 Upward pressure 'eli' 11.7 0.67 7.84
W3 :: (3.28 x 6.75 x 16)
.. (0.5 x 1 x 23.4)
Moment due to earth pressure
= C~ (Ye.lIl/6 ) 331.71 Total 71.14
_ (1/3) (16 x 7.2')16 Deduct self weight of loe slab
LA! ::1142.87
'E-W <438.48 (1 x 0.45 x 25) 10.8 0.5
Total 5.40
Deduct weight 'of soil above toe 12.0 0.5 6.00
slab (0.75 x 1 x Hi)
Distance of the point of application of the resultant from point 'a' is
Tolar deduclion 11.40
(I,M) (1142.87)
Z =lI,W =l438:49 =2.66 m
(89.61 x 1O')=(0.87X415A"X400)[1 415A" ]
(10' x 400 x 20)
.. Eccentricity = e = (2 - b/2) = (2.66 - 4.512) = 0.41 m
Solving A" = 644 mm'
But (bI6) = (4.5/6) = 0.75 m. Hence, e < (bI6)
Provide 12 mm d'Iaffieter bars at 150 mm centres (A - 754 '
.. Maximum and minimum pressures at the base are given by D' 'b' . st- mrn)
IStr.l utlOn bars = 0.12% = (0.0012 x 1000 x 450) = 540 mm'
\ ProvIde 10 mm diameter bars at 280 mm centres on both f

I
= 438.49 (1 + 6 XO.41) = 150 kN/m'
Pm,x 4.5 ~ 4.5 (A ;::: 561 mm2) aces
st

', . = ~.~.49 ( 1 _ 6 x 0.41) ~ 45 kN/m' e) Design of Heel Slab

[ nlln 4.5 l 4.5

The maximum intensity of pressure does not exceed the permissible value Considering 1 m wide strip of heel slab near heel end 'a'
i·
of 160 kN/m'. Upward soil pressure = 45 kN/m' •
The pressure distribution at the base of the retaining wall is shown in Weight of soil on strip = (16 x 6.75) = 108.00 kN/m'
Fig.ll.lO(b). Self weight of strip = (I x 0.45 x 25) = 0.80 kN/m'
Total load = 118.80 kN/m'
d) Design of toe slab Deduct downward pressure = - 45.00 kN/m'
Net downward pressure = 73.80 kN/m'
The maximum bending moment acting on the toe slab is calculated by Spacmgs of counterforlS = 3 m
considering moments of all forces about the point 'c'. rhe computations
.. Maximum negative working moment· at countertorl'IS given
. by,
are compiled in Table·l1.5.
Maximum working moment in toe slab is obtained as, M w =(73.80X3')_
12 - 55.35 kN.m
M = (71.14 - 11.4) = 59.74 kN.m
w
Design Ultimate moment = M, = (1.5 x 55.35) = 83 kN.m
Design Ultimate moment = M, = (1.5 x 59.74) = 89.61 kN.m
Effective depth of toe slab = 400 mm (83XI06)=0.8.7X415A"X400)[I 415A" ]
Rchiforcements in toe slab is computed using the relation, 1000 x 400 x 20)
Solving A" = 600 mm' .
 Limit State Design of Retaining Walls 405
Reinforced Concrete Design
2 h) Connection between counterfort and npright slab
provide 12 mm diameter bars at 150 mm centres (A sl == 754 mm )
Distribution bars = 0.12% = (0.0012 x 1000 x 450) = 540 mm'
Provide 10 mm diameter bars at 280 mm centres on both faces(A sl == 561 Consider the bottom I m height of upright slab.
Pressure on this strip = 36 kN/m'
mm') Total lateral pressure transferred to the counterfort for 1m height
is = 36 (3 - 0.44) = 91.8 kN
I) Design of counterforts
Factored force = (1.5 x 91.8) = 137.7 kN
=
Thickness provided at the top (220 + 220) 440 mm = ., . ,
per metre heIght =
(137.7XIO') 381
= - mm
2
Thickness of counterfort = 440 mm Remlorcement reqUIred
, 0.87 x415
Maximum working moment in counterfort is
Provide minimum reinforcement of 10 mm diameter bars in the fonn of
y•.h' L)_(1
M = C __ - - x 16x6.75' x 3)-820
- . 12kN.m horizontal links at 280 !Um centres.
w ( a 6 3 6

Factored Design moment = M, = (1.5 x 820.12) = 1230 kN.m i) Connection between counterfort and heel slab
Reinforcement at the bottom of counterfort is computed by using the rela-
"'W
tion, Tension transferred in 1 ill width of counterfort near the heel end
= =
(1230 X 10') = (0.87 x 415A" x 4400) [I 415A"
(440 x 4400 x 20)
] is 73.8(3 - 0.44) 189 kN
= =
Factored force (1.5 x.189) 283.5 kN
X
Solving A" = 800 mm' ·'
Remlorcement . ' d tor
reqUIre etg t = (283.5 IO') = 785 mm'
' 1 m h·h·
0.87x415
In''Y
, But minimum reinforcement as per IS:456-2000 code is stipulated as

bd) =[(0.85X440X4400)] =3965 mm' I Spacing of 10. mm diameter bars provided in the form of two legged verti-
IQ') = 200 mm
A =(0.85
'f,
Provide 5 bars of 32 mm diameter (A" = 4020 mm')
415
I ' compu.ted as S = (2 X 78.5
' k S IS
caII In
• 785
X

Provide 10 mmdiameter two legged vertical links at 200 mm centres.

g) Curtailment of bars \ j) Reinforcement Details

Let h, = depth at which I bar can be curtailed

r The detail of reinforcements in the counterfort retaining waIl is shown in
Fig.IUI.
5 --I) = ( -h,-)
Then ( - :. hi = 6m from top
5. 6.75'
Let h, = depth at which 2 bars can be curtailed 11.7 EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE

5-2)
Then - - = ( --
ii,2) :. . h 2 =5.2m from top
I
1
1) Design a reinforced concrete carltilever retaining wall to retain earth
( 5 6.75 level with the top of the wall to a hei~t of 5.5 m above ground level.
Let h, = depth at which 3 bars can be curtailed The density of soil at site is 17 kNim' with a safe bearing capacity of
120 kN/m'. Assume the angle of shearing resistance of the soil as 35
5-3)
Then. - - = ( - ii,
- 2) ..• h 3 =5.2m from top degrees. Further assume a coefficient of friction beween soil and con-
( 5 6,75
'.
The remaining two bars are continued right up to the top.
crete as 0.55. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars,
 'I tr',1:",
I

i
I, 406 Reillforced Concrete Design Limit State Design of Retaining Walls 407
4) Deosign a canti!ever retaining wall to retain ~arth with a backfill sloped
20 to the honzontal. The top of the wall IS 5,5 m above the ground
level. Assume the depth of fOUl~dation as 1.2 m below ground level
with a safe bearing capacity of 120 kN/m'. The unit weight of backfill
is 18 kN/m' and an angle of of shearing resistance of 35·, Also assume
.#12-1!>O the coefficient of friction between soil and concrete as 0.55. Adopt
rigtlt slob
M-20 grade concrete and Fe-4l5 HYSD steel bars.

I
I
I Hol'ilonto.l links
.., to-260
Vt'l"li,al links
:#10-200

-f-~----- 3m
Pion a\ Base 01 Counterfort

Fig. 11.11 Reinforcement Details in Couutcrfort Retaining Wall

2) A cantilever type retaining wall is to be designed to support a bank of

earth 4 m above ground level on the toe side of the wall. The backfill
surface is inclined at an angle of 15 degrees with the horizontal.
Assume that good soil is available for foundations at a depth of 1.25 m
below ground level with a safe bearing capacity of 160 kN/m' and an

I angle of shearing resistance of 30 degrees. Assume coefficient of fric-

tion between soil and concrete as 0,5, Adopt M-20 grade concrete and
Fe-4l5 HYSD reinforcement. Assume the unit weight of soil as 16
I 3)
kN/m',
Design a counterfort type retaining wall to support an earth fill of 7.5
m above ground level. The foundation depth may be taken as 1.5 m
below ground level. The safe bearing capacity of soil at site is 150
kN/m', Unit weight of soil may be taken as 16 kN/m' and an angle of
. shearing resistance of 30°. Assume the value of coefficient of friction
as 0.55, AdOpt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars, Sketch
the details of reinforcements in the retaining, wall.
 Design of Staircases 409

iii) Isolated cantilever tread slab [Fig. 12.1 (c)J

iv) Double cantilever precast tread slab with a central inclined beam
CHAPTER 12 [Fig. 12. I(d)]
(250 to 300 mm) landing
t tread
Design of Staircases
r-r--- (0) Waist Stab Type

12.1 INTRODUCTION

Staircase flights are generally designed -as slabs spanning between wall
supports or landing beams or as cantilevers from a longitudinal inclined
beam.The staircase fulfi,lls the function of access between the various (b) Tread-Riser Typ-e
floors in the building. Generally. the flight of steps consists of one or more
lfl'Rl landings provided between the floor levels. [Fig. 12.1]
-,
I.f'O-l
The structural components of a flight of stairs comprises of the follow- C:=:=:J
ing elements. preea st or l?ZZZJ
, cast in situ I"?77'7'IIZ?Za (cl Isolated Cantilever
1 units" =~ Tread Riser Type
a) Tread
I
, IZiZi - 10 mm
,
1!'1'~.q

The horizontal portion of a step where the foot rests is referred to as tread. :
rzzzalZ2Z2l overlap
~'fq
I 250 to 300 mm is the typical dimensions of a tread. c:::::=:::J1=
,I

1 b) Riser
mF~'"
, - (d) Double Cantilever
Precast .Slab on
-, I Riser is the .vertical distance between the adjacent treads or the vertical
projection of the step with valne of 150 to 190 mm dcpending npon the Inclined Beam
t
Inclined beam
type of building. The width of stairs is generally I to 1.5 maud in any case
not less than 850 mm. Public buildings should be provided with larger
widths to facilitate free passage to users and prevent over crowding.
'1
Width (e) Plan of
c) Going Stair Flight
(1 to{5 m)

Going is the horizontal projection (plan) of an inclined flight of steps

between the first and last riser. A typical flight comprises two landings and
laMding ,f Ooing
I
, landing
t
Fig. 12.1 Typical Flight In a staircase
+
one going as shown in Fig. 12.1 (e).
To break the monotony of climbing, the number of steps in a flight 12.2 TYPES OF STAIRCASES
should not generally exceed 10 to 12.
The tread-riser
, combination can be provided in conjunction with The various types of staircases adopted in different types of buildings can
i) Waist slab [Fig. 12.1(a)] be grouped under geometrical and structural classifications depending
ji) Tread - Riser type (continuous folded plate) [Fig. 12.1 (b)] npon their shape and plan pattern and their stmctural behavior under loads.
 Design of Staircases . 411
410 Reinforced Concrete Design
I b) Single or quarter turn staircase
12.2.1 Geometrical classification

I·
I
Aesthetic considerations have evolved a wide variety of staircases over the Fig. 12.2 (b) shows the plan arrangement of single right angled turn stair-
years. Some of the common geometrical configurations used are compiled
in Fig. 12.2.

(a) Single Flight Staircase

-l-
I ( b) Quarter Turn Staircase

+ (e) Spiral 5taircase

,
'\f

-I-
( c) Dog Legged Staircase

I ... I-

I
-l -
I f
I
(1) Heti~oidal Staircase
Fig. 12.2
,
I '~ Open well (d) Open Well Staircase
case. The staircase flight generally runs adjoining the walls and provides

• I
... l....
uninterrupted space at the centre of the room. Generally used in domestic
houses where floor heights are limited to 3 m.

c) Dog legged staircase

Fig. 12.2 Various Types of staircases (Conld.)
The most common type of stairs arranged with two adjacent flights run-
a) Single Flight Staircase ning parallel with a mid landing as shown in Fig. 12.2 (c). Where space is
at a premium, dog legged staircase is generally adopted resulting in
A typical single flight stairs is shown in Fig. 12.2 (a). This type is used in economical utilisation of available space.
cellars or attics where the height between floors is small and the frequency
'of its use is less.
 Reinjorqed Concr~te Design Design ofStaircases 413

d) Open well staircase a) Staircase Slab spanning in the longitudb1al Direction

In public buildings where large spaces are available, open well staircase In this type, 'the inclined stair flight together vJIth the landings are sup-
shown in Fig.l2.2 (d) is generally preferred due to its better accessibility, ::rted ~n wall~ or be.ams as shown in Fig. 12.3 (a). The effective span to
comfort and ventilation due to its smaller flights with an open well at the conSidered 10 deSign computations is between the centre to centre of
centre. supports.

e) Spiral staircase Wall or

beam

. '" In congested locations, where space available is small, spiral stairs are
ideally suited. A typical spiral staircase shown in Fig. 12.2(e) comprises a
central post with precast slab treads anchored to the central column. It is
not user friendly due to the reduced tread width. near the port and is suit-
able only for single person to use the staircase at a time.

f) Hclocoidal staircase
,ii'
Helicoidal staircase shown Fig.12.2.(f) is 'aesthetically superior compared
to other types and is generally used in the entrance foyer of cinema theatres
----++ Landing+
L---i
and shopping malls to connect the ground and first floors. Helicoidal stair
which is, built as a ramp following the helicoidal curve with supports ~t Supported Sfaircase·
ground and first noor or with intermediate supports involves rigorous:
,
'f
structural computations for the determination of design moments90 and:
shear forces. The reader may refer to the publications of Bergman and; I'
Scordelis91 for the design aspects of helicoidal stairs. x Y Span (m)
<1m' <1 m G+X+Y III
g) Free standing staircase <1m >lm G+ X + 1
<1m I
>lm G + Y+ 1
>lm >lm G+ 1+ 1
Free-standing ~taircase is built out of a large fixed base with the stair flight Wall or
beam Going
cantilevering out of the base. It is essentially a cantilever in space and is
aesthetically superior to other types. The n~ader may refer to the 'works of

1
I
Gould92 and Solanki93 for the analysis and design aspects of free standing
staircase..
I
Landing
I
Lan~ing
1
t
12.2.2 Structural Behavior of Staircases
I I
'.
t
t
1 . Staircases can be grouped depending upon t~e support conditions and the
Wall or
l'
11 , direction of major bending of the slab ,component under the following +X x-,f G j' y+y...,J.. beam
I categories. (b) Transvers;' Spanning of Landings
a) Staircase slab spanning longitudinally (along the sloping line) Fig. 12,3 Staircase FOght (longitudinal spanning)
b) Staircase slab spanning transversely (slab.width wise with central or
side supports)
r
I
1-
414 lleilljorced COllerete Desigll Design of Staircases 415

The slab arrangement may be of the conventional waist slab or the

tread-riscr type between the supports.The slab thickness depends upon the
span and its thickness can be reduced by providing intermediate supports // 7/ ' / ' / / / / / ///
. at the junctions of inclined waist slab and horizontal landing slabs.
Alternatively it is possible to provide supports to the landing slabs in r/
r/<j.
~
Landing
the transverse direction as shown in Fig. 12.3 (b).
In such cases the effective span to be considered according to tIle IS:
Up
~ , 8
456-code clause 33.1 (b) is given by 8 t
L=(G+X+Y) ~
Where =
G going ~
>-
>-
=.
X or Y Half the width of landings V Open we\(
~.
The values to be considered for X and Yare shown in Fig. 12.3 (b). 8 , 1:: v
~

~
In the case stairs with open wells, where spans partly criss cross at right f/ Vl

angles, the load on areas common to any two such spans may be distrib- f/
X b
uted as one-halfin each direction as shown in the Fig. 12.4.
The IS:456 code also specifies that when flights are landings are
embedded into walls for a length of not less than 110 mm and are designed
Lt
oownE;
1+l- Landing 8 J
to span in the direction of flight, a length of 150 mm strip may be deductcd E; ' / ~
/ / ' / '7/ 77 /////'/
from the loaded area and the effective breadth of the section increased by
75 mm for purposes of design.
Loading
b) Staircase Slabs spanning in the Transverse Direction +rrn"TTTI4rn-rrn-rrrM"TT~

The most common examples of staircase slabs spanning in the transverse

direction are grouped under the following :-
i) .Slab supported between two edge beams are walls [Fig. 12.5 (a))
ii) Slab cantilevering on either side of a central beam [Fig. 12.5 (b)]
iii) A Cantilevered· slab from a wall or a spandrel beam [Fig. 12.5 (c)]
In these types of slabs, the widthof flight being small (I to 1.5 m), the
designed thickness will be very small from struc\ural computations. How-
ever, from practical considerations a minimum thickness of 75 to 80 rom
should be provided and suitable reinforcements to resist the maximum
bending moments or the minimum percentage reinforcements (whichever
is higher) should be provided in the slab.
12.3 LOADS ON STAIRCASES
The loads to be considered in the design oestaircases comprise the follo'v-
ing types. . I"
~ fWl.LlllJLilllWll.l..l..UWlllUlWlJJ.W.j:tWI2
Section XX
Fig. 12.4 Loading on Stairs With Open Wells
a) Dead Loads
The various dead loads are
i) Selfweigilt of stair slab concretc which includes the waist slab, tread-
nser etc.
ii) Self weight of finishes (0.5 to I kNlm')
b) Live Loads
Th.e IS: 875: 1987 (part II) code specifies the live loads to be considered as
umformly distributed load of intensity 5 kNlm' for public buildings and'3
kNlm' ~or residential buildings where the specified floor loads do not
exceed 2 kNlm', and the staircases are not liable for over crowding.,
 Design ofStaircases 417
Reinforced Concrete Design
c) Load Effects "n Waist slab spanning In the
longitudinal direction
Width of flight (spon)--'kS-
The thickness of the waist slab (t) normal to the slope may be assumed as
approximately (li20) for simply supported and (li25) for continuous slabs.
The steps are usually treated as non-structural elements and only the thick-
ness of the waist slab is designed to resist the loads. Nominal reinforce-
ment is generally provided in the step to protect the nosing from cracking
(a) Slab Supported on Edge Seam or Walls comprising of 6 mm diameter bars at 150 mm centres.
The waist slab (sloping slab) is inclined at an angie '0' to the horizontal
in a flight of stairs 'spanning in the longitudinal direction as shown in Fig.
-ji'-"' - - - Width of flight ----.......,,~ 12.6(0),
·~I--- .---------1lt >7~omm
~central
beam

(b) Slab Cantilevered From a Central Seam

w: fWs ~J
T
= Ws 'sec a

Width of flight (span = L) ---'t '" (a) Sell Weight of Sloping Slab
~:2L4:--'-:':"":"---=---:--'-----; t > 7~~80 mm'

Beam or
wall Slep bars
(6~-t50 c/c)
r-c*~#~;;m Wall or beam
support

1 ~,,;8:~;-~n;o;s,;n;g~~~~~:
(c) Slab Cantilevered From Wall or Seam
bar Main reinforcement
Fig. 12.5 Staircase Siabs Spanning In the Tra~sverse Direction
Distribution reinforcement
In the case of structura~ly independent.cantilever steps" the code pre-
Waisl slab
thickness (I)
~'.
.I .
.
scribes the tread slab to b}''designed to resist a concentrated lIve load of 1.3
kN applied at the freeenct of the cantilevered tread, " -.1'-------- Span (Ll
'fi"d' 'n the IS'875 code being charactensllc loads, a load
The I03d SSpeCl}c 1 . . " '.,. . .'
n
factor of 1.5 has to be applied to arrive at thedeslg loads for lImit state (b) Reinforcement Detailing in Staircase
design. Spannin~ Longitudinally

Fig. 12.6 Load Effects and DetaiUng in Wafst Slabs

418 Reinforced Concrete Design veslgfL OJ .)!lllrcases

Let R = Rise
T = Tread
w, = Self weight of slab (on slope) per metre
w ;:: Self weight of slab on horizontal span
8 = Angle between the sloping slab and horizontal
Then dead load of slab on horizontal span is expressed as

IV =(W,YR;+ T') =w,.sec 8

(a) Tread-Riser Staircase Arrangement
The self weight of steps (triangular shape) are computed and their weight
MaIn bars at top
per metre length of horizontal span is added to the dead weight of slab
along with the specified live load.The factored load is used to compute the r 1:~t
T-t--f- (cantilever)

design moments and the reinforcements are designed to resist the ultimate
moment and the standard detailing is shown in Fig. 12.6 (b)
d) Load effects on Waist slab spanning Transversely
The load acts normal to the waist slab which bends in transverse planes
normal to the sloping surface of the slab. The main bars are designed to
resist the maximum bending moment and are provided transversely either
at the boltom or top. depending upon whether the slab is simply supported
or cantilevered from the wall support. As the span is very small (l to 2m).
the thickness of waist slab required to resist the bending moment will be
small but from practical consideration,-a minimum thickness of 75~80 mm
is provided with minimum reinforcement as per IS: 456 code.
c) Load Effects on Tread-Riser Stairs spanning Transversely
The tread-riser unit comprising the riser and tread slab shown in Fig. 12.7
(a) behaves as beams spanning in the transverse direction. For purposes of
analysis it is assumed that the riser slab and one half of the tread slab on
either side can be assumed to behave as a Z-section.
The tread-riser unit structurally behaves as a flanged beam which is
transversely loaded with an overall depth of (R + t) as show'n in Fig. 12.7
(b). For design of reinforcements. the contribution of flanges can be
ignored and the "rectangular section comprising the thickness of the riser as
width (b) and the depth of beam as (R + t) will yield conservative results.
The ~einforcements are designed for the m~ximum bending moment
developed at the centre if simply supported or at support if it is a cantile-
ver. The detailing of reinforcements is generally with horizontal bars and
ties as shown in Fig. 12.7(c).
tc121 .+
R' Vertical
ties
Horizontal
ties
MtM
(T -t)12
(H) /2
Main bars at bottom
(simply supported beam)
(b) Flanged Beam of (e) Details of Reinforcement
Z - Section
FJg. 12.7 Tread·Rlser Stairs Spanning Trasv~rsely
o Load Effects on Tread-Riser Stairs Spanning Longitudinaliy
A typical tread-riser type staircase flight spanning .longitudinally is shown
in Fig. 12.8 (a) The structural behavior of this type of stairs is similar to
that of waist slabs spanning longitudinally. The bending moments devel.
oped in various tread slabs which increase gradUlllly towards the centre of
span is shown in Fig. 12.8 (b). The bending moment in risers is constant
for each riser. The variation of shear force in the treads is also shown in
Fig. 12.8 (c). For practical purposes it is sufficient to design both tread and
riser slabs for flexure only as. the shear stresses in tread slabs and axial
stresses in riser slabs are relatively of low magnitude.
The thickness of riser and tread slabs is generally kept the same with
v.alues of span 125 for simply supported and span 130 for continuous stair-
caSes. However, the minimum thickness of 80 mm should be provided
from p.ractical'considerations.
The reinforcement details are shown in Fig. 12.8 (d).The main bars
<I comprise of closed ties in the longitudinal ,direction while the di.stribution
ii bars are provided in the transverse direction. The top leg of the ties resists
the ~egative moments developed near the supports. The close loop system
of ties ensures both flexure and shear:resisting capacity together with the
/'/420" 'R}iiljJ'r'cea'concreteDesign Design ofStairCiises 421

., ditctiiity6fthe tread ~iser

slab's, Inthe case of longer flights, th~
spacing Riser R = 160 mm
and diamet~rofthe main" reinforcement)n the tread-ri.~er unit_sj~ suitably Width. of landing beams = 400 mm
varie<! along the span in conformity with the bending moment diagram, Materials: M-20 Concrete and Fe-4l5 HYSD bars
resulting in an economical design. .
b) Effective span

1!~'M7
OJ
,~
~6
MS
Effective span = L = {(l2 x 300) + 400) = 4000 mill
,S
~ M~3
M4 (a) Tread-Riser Stairs
Spanning .
.
TIl1ck,ness of waist slab = (,pan)
20 = (4000)
20 = 200 mm
CD MI Longitudinally:

V""L~---- L ----~,~ e) Loads

Dead load of slab (on slope) = w, = (0.2 x I x 25).= 5 kN/m

(b) Sending Momenl Dead load of slab on horizontal span is expressed as,
Distribution
B. M. in
tre~.9.s =(
W W)R; +T') =(5JI6~O:300') =5.66 kN/m
Dead load of one step'" (0.5 x 0.16 x 0.3 x 25) = 0.6 kN/m
S.F. In r-...-r-r-::?.d:~--'---'--'(c)Shear Force Load of steps/m length = [0.6 x (1000/300)] = 2 kN/m
treads Distrib'ution
,Finishes = 0:6 kN/m
.'. Total dead load = (5.66 + 2+ 0.6) = 8.26 kN/m
Live load (liable of over crowding) = 5 kN/m
Vertical
lies I :. Total service load = 13.26 kN/m
:. Total Ultimate load = w, = (1.5 x 13.26) = 19.89 kN/m

I
Cd) Reinforcement i
Detailing in
Treads & Risers d) Bending Moments

Maximnm B.M at Centre of span is given by

" Horizontal ties M, = 0.125 w,.L' = (0.125 x 19.89 x 4') =39.78 kN.m
Fig.12.S Tread-Riser staircase Spannlng-LongitudJ,.ally
ej Check for depth of waist slab
12.4 DESIGN EXAMPLES

12.4.1 Design one of the flights of stairs of a school building spanning

~ I M, . 39.78 X 10' _ 120mm
between landing beams to suit the following data.
d=· \f O.138hkb -O.l38x20xlO'
Assuming a clear cover of 20 mm andiusing 12 mill diameter bars,
a) Data Effective rlepth = d= [200 - 20- 6] = 174 mm
Type of staircase:- Waist slab type Hence, the effective depth provided is greater than the required depth.
Number of steps in flight = 12
Tread T = 300 mm .
422 Reinforced Concrete Design Design ofStaircases 423

o Reinforcements 12.4.2 A staircase flight comprises of independent tread slabs. cantile-

vered from a reinforced concrete wall. Assuming the riser is 150mm and
Reinforcements are computed using the relation, tread length as 300 mm, width of flight ~ 1.75 m, design the cantilevered
slab using M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars tu suit the loadi'ng
A,J, ]
M,~0.87f,A"d [ l- bdf'k requirements of IS:875 and IS:456 codes.

Where J, ~ 415 N/mm' a) Data

10k ~ 20 N/mm' and M, ~ (39.78 X 10') N.mm
Rise~R~ 150mm
d ~ 174mm
Tread ~ T ~300 mm
b ~ 1000mm
Span Length ~ L ~ 1.75 m
Or by using Table-2 of SP:16, read out the percentage reinforcement cor- M-20 grade Concrete, 10k ~ 20 N/mm'
responding to Fe-415 HYSD bars,f, ~ 415N/mm'
Width'ofTread ~ (300 + 10 mm overlap)
(bdM,) ~(39.78XIO')=1.31
2 3
10 174 X
2 B~31Omm

. p, = 0.40'~ (l:A,,) b) Thickness of Slab

,.
A=(0.40x10'x174)
51 100
=696 mm' . t =(s~6n) =( 1~~0) =175 mm
Provide 12mm diameter bars at 160mm centres (A" ~ 707 mm') as main
c) Dead Loads
reinforcement. . .
Distribution reinforcement ~ (0.0012 x 10' x 200) ~ 240 mm'/m i) Self weight of tread slab = (0.175 x 0.31 x 25) ~ 1.356 kN/m
Provide 8 mm diameter bars at 200 mm centres (A" ~ 251 mm') ii) Finishes ~ (0.6 x 0.31) ~ 0.186 kN/m
The details of reinforcements in the staircase flight is shown in Fig. 12.9. Total Dead Load ~ 1.542 kN/m
Total Ultimate Dead Load = g, = (1.5 x 1.542) = 2.313 kN/m

d) Live Loads

Case-I, q, = (5 x 0.3) x 1.5 =' 2.25 kN/m

step bars Case-2, q, = (1.3 x 1.5) = 1.95 kN (At free end)
Waist slab
(6.-150 c/c) (t= 200mml
e) Design Moments
~ 12-160 clc (main)
8-200 clc (distribution) At fixed end, M, (Dead load) =(0.5 x 2.313 x 1.75') =3;54 kN.m
M, (Live load) =(0.5 x 2.25 x 1.752) =3.44 kN.m
Landing beam I. And (1.95 x 1.75) = 3.41 kN.m .

+4~0.f 4000 ------.l~ Considering the critical values,

Total Design Moment ~ M, ~ (3.54 + 3.44) ~ 6.98 kN.m
Fig. 12.9 Reinforcement in staircase Flight
 Design of Staircqse~~ 4;!5
'Reinforced Concrete"Design

I) Reinforcements f Ld=376
XI
1750 348

As the moment is small, check for thickness is not required. t + •

Using a cover of 25 mm. effective depth = d = 150 mm. 175
-1.- +-310-,-+
1
M,) = (6.98 X 10
(bd'
6
) = 1.0007 500
31Oxt50'
R.C,C,
wall X..J Sect ion X X
Refer Table-2 of SP: 16 and read Gut thepertentage of rei,nforcement as.
Fig. 12.10 Cantilever staircase
p,=C~~}0.3 12.4.3. D,esign a ,tread-riser type staircase flight between the landings
shown in Fig. 12.11(a). The landing slabs are supported on both the adja-
=(0.3 X3IOXI50)=1395m ' cent edges. Assume the following additional data:-
.• A'I 100 . ' m
2
Provide 3 bars of 8 mm diameter (As! = 150 mm ) on the tension side,
a) Data
Anchorage length required is
"
'-1
L, =(0.87 x4t5 x 8) = 376 mm
Height between landings = 1.76m
Riser=R= 160 mm
4x1.2x1.6
O
In addition to L d • we have to provide sufficient balancing moment to pre~,
vent overtt:rning. . \
-
R-IIOV .
I
Distribution reinforcement = (0.0012 x 10' x 175) = 210 mm'/m
!'- • I
(1000a,,)
Spacing of 6 mm diameter bars = "~=
(1000X28)
. 210 _ = 133 mm I
Landing
Lan.ding

Provide 6 mm diameter bars at 130 mm centres. 1000 I

i
I
1..- LJl
' ;
g) Check for shear at support section

v, = (8, +q,)L '" (2.313 +2,25)1.75= 8.00 kN

to=(V,)=( 8xlO' )=o.I72N/mm'
*
26o-#600+600-j}~---2100-----+-1000--+

R .,160
~,

bd 31Ox150 T "'270
'ReferTable-19 of IS: 456 and read out the permissible shear stress for p, =
0.30.
(k,t,) = (1.25 x 0.39) = 0.48 N/mm' > to
E::~~~~~~_ Section
Hence, shear stresses are within safe permissible limits. ~ 3100 --------+
h)' ,The reinforcement details in the Cantilever slab are shown in Fig. (a) Tread-Riser Flight (Plan and section)
12.10.
Fig. 12.11 Tread·Riser Type staircase

I'
I,
 426 Reinforced Concrete Design
'"
<"':':~~'t'<i'!fS~>--·'_·
,,'

Dead load of steps/m lenglh = [(! .(:>1 " ','.:'0., ::-tV - - ...,
Tread = T= 270 mm Weight of Finishes = 0.60 kN/m- . - 0"4;,,
Width of Flight = landing width = 1.0 m
Materials: M-20 grade concrete (};, = 20 N/mm') Live Load = 5.00 kN/m' <.

Fe-415 HYSD bars (f, = 415 N/mm') .. Total Load = 11.57 kN/m'
.. Factored Load = (11.57 x 1.50) = 17 ,-,,, k~ ,::,,0
b) Effective span and thickness of slab
ii) Loads on landing slab (Assuming 160 '''<ott:'hide
L = [2.70 + 1.00] = 3.70 m Self weight of slab = (0.16 x 25) = -I,l'l.\ l;~"';o
Assume t~ickness of riser slab = thickness o~Tread Finishes = 0.60 kN/m' -
Live load = 5.00 kN/m'
t =(s~~n) = US) =e~~O) = 148 mm Total load = 9.60 kN/m'
(Factored Load = (9.60 x 1.5) = 14,-1 k~ ';;.,'
Adopt Effective depth. d = 125 mm and Overall depth h = ISO 111m peTfeent of this load is assumed to bl" ~l.-t~ tl....~mljj:nr..:i3!J,
o span. - -
Load on Landing slab = (0.5 x 14.-10\ '" .-.c-J.l:....... cr:r=-

d) Design of Tread-Riser portion

Referring to Fig. 12.II(b) showing the k,,,"",. - -- •

I: = 3.70m, the reactions and bending nll..'t.,,-,::=~ ... =:c :!:CJI::2un" '
" .... ,,'-'" ~L --rnJ.::l-~~-
Reaction on Landing is computed as, - ---- -~ ~ -' _:_.~ ••
(bl Loading on Staircase Flight
v = (7.2 x 0.5) + 0.5 (17 ..16" ' "",'..:
-~. -
t- 270m
+r,::::;;:=:::::j -t Maximum moment at mid span
M, = (27.03 x 1.85)-(7.2 x 0.5) 1.60-( l7..'~" ' .." : ,
# 12 -145 ties'
I 150
2#6 ~ Effective depth provided = d = 125 mm.
1#6
r;;:=;;==!.t:::::::h==~==~"#12-145 ties
1#6
(;,;,)=(21~~~ 7Hr '" L~::
#6 Referring & Table-2 of SP: 16, read out, PI::>;: { ~~~' = C.57';;'"
';'''C,i;;',' >, ; , e-..: .
3
#10-130 clc '" A =(0.574X 10 X 1251 "" -
st 100 'J=:.,t,-5rrmc

(c) Reinforcement Detq.i1s In Tread-Risers and mm diameter bars at 150 111m t,~u~ -: ~ ~
~~ lZt m~ :ncm::S"it:X"· '"
"
Landing Slab shown in Fig. 12.11 (c)
Fig. 12.11 (Contd.)
Distribution bars of-8 mm diameter at cm'h ixnl.i.fS 5tio.:F';";IT. _~.

c) Loads on Staircase flight

of Landing Slabs
i) Loads on going (on projected plan area)
Self weight of tread and Riser slab/step = [(0.16+0.27) 0.15x25] l'at,toI'edload on landing slab = 14.4 kN/tu
= 1.61 kN

:1
 426 Reinforced Concrete Design Design of Staircases 427

I Tread = T = 270 mm
Width of Flight = landing width = 1.0 m
=
Dead load of steps1m length [(1.61 x 1000)/270J
Weight of Finishes = 0.60 kN/m'
=5.97 kN/m'
I· =
Materials: M-20 grade concrete (f" 20 N/mm')
Fe-415 HYSD bars (f, = 415 N/mm')
Live Load = 5.00 kN/m'
.. Total Load = 11.57 kN/m'
.. Factored Load = (11.57 x 1.50) = 17.36 kN/m'
b) Effective span and thickness ofSlab
Ii) Loads on landing slab(Assuming 160 mm thick)
L = [2.70 + 1.00] = 3.70 m
Self weight of slab = (0.16 x 25) = 4.00 kN/m'
Assume t1)ickness of riser. slab =thickness of Tread Finishes = 0.60 kN/m'
= 5.00 kN/m'
t =25
(
(L )
span) = 25 = (3700)
25 = 148 mm
Live load
.. Totalload = 9.60 kN/m'
.. (Factored Load = (9.60 x 1.5) = 14.4 kN/m'
Adopt Effective depth,d =125 mm and Overall depth h =150 mm 50 percent of this load is assumed to be acting longitudinally in the direc-
2 tion of span.
7.20 N/m :. Load on Landing slab = (0.5 x 14.40) = 7.20 kN/m'

500~' 2700~500 d) Design of Tread-Riser portion

t 3700 t Referring to Fig. 12.1l(b) showiQg the loading on the horizontal span of
L= 3.70m, the reactions and bending moments are computed.
(bl Loading on staircase Flight Reaction on Landing is computed as, .,.
V = (7.2 x 0.5) + 0.5 (17.36 x 2.70) = 27.03 kN 1\

Maximum moment at mid span

#12-1~5~ --t-
J,. 150 M, =(27.03 x 1.85)-(7.2 x 0.5) 1.60-(17.36 x 1.35 x 0.675) =28.42 kN.m
-t- 2#6........ + Effective depth provided =d =125 mm.
(R) 160 1#6- .~
-+-
#8-250c/c rt--l #6
# 12-14 sties (~",) (21~;~ ;;5~')= 1.82
=
(nomir a \)
T
160 I'
"6 .
Refernng & Table-2 of SP: 16, read out, PI == (lOOA)
bd51= 0.574

+ V
#10-130 clc 2
A =(O.574X10 X125)=7175 '
" $1. 100 .mm
Ie) Reinforcement Oetq.i1s In Tread-Risers and
Landing Slab Provide 12 mm diameter bars at 150 mm centres in the form of closed ties
FIg. 12.11 (Contd.) as shown in Fig. 12.11 (c)
Distribution bars of8 mm diameter at each bend as shown in Fig. 12.II(c)
c) Loads on Staircase flight
e) Design of Landing Slabs
i) Loads on going (on projected plan area)
=
Self weight of tread and Riser slab/slep [(0.16+0.27) 0.15x25]
Factored load on landing slab = 14.4 kN/m
= 1.61 kN
 428 Reinjo(eed, CO;'C!f[e Design
D,esigll of Staircases 429
Load from going = (0.5 X 17.36 X 3.7) = 32.1 kN/m
Risers are 150 mm and treads are 250 mm
r
=
Total load 46.5 kN/m Live load = 4 kN/m'
r Effective depth = (160 - 25) = 135 mm
I
Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
I Effective span = 2.135 m .
I 5) Design a dog legged staircase in a public building to be located in a
I M, = (0.125 X 46.5 xZ.135') = 26.5 kN.m
staircase room 6 In long and 3 In wide.
I
I
I
M.) =(26.5
(bd' x 10') = 1,45
10' x 135'
Height between floors:::: 3.6 m
Live load = 4 kN/m'
1 The stairs are supported on beams over walls and sides of steps are
I

",.,
r'
100A,,) ,
Referring to Table-2 of SP: 16. p, = ( ~ = 0.443

6)
built into the Wall by 120 mm. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-
415 reinforcements.
Design a tread-riser type staircase flight between the landings 1:5 m
iI A"
= (0.433 X 1000 X 135) = 598 mm'
100 long in the direction of span. Adopt 10 treads of 300 mm and dscrs of
150 mm in. the flight. The landings arc built into the reinforced c,on-
Provide 10 mm diameter bars at 130 centres parallel to risers at bottom and crete walls. Adopt a live load of 5 kN/m'. Use M·20 grade concrete
provide nominal reinforcements at top. and Fe-415 Grade HYSD bars. Sketch the details of reinforcements in
the staiI:case.
12.5 EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE
7) Design a waist slab type dog legged staircase for <In office building
lIsing the following data:
I) Design a Staiftase flight for an office type building to suit the follow-
Height between floors = 3.2 m
ing data:
Height between floors 4 = =
Tread 270 mm and riser = 160 mm
Mid landing is cantilevered out and the width is 1.5 m = =
Width of flight landing width 1.25 m
=
Tread 300 mm and rise 150 mm = The stairs are supported on 300 mm load bearing masonry walls at the
outer edges of the landing, parallel to the risers.
Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
Sketch the details of reinforcements in the stair flight. Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.

2) A Siaircase flight compri,es of independeni cantilevered slabs from a

reinforced ·c"oncrete wall. Assuming the risers of 150 mm and treads.of
300 mm. width of flight as 1.7 m. design a typical iread slab. Assume
the live loads specified in IS:875code 10adiM standards for an office
building. Use M-20grade concrete and Fe-415 grade reinforcements.
3) Design the waist slab type staircase consisting of a sti'l!ight flight of
stairs resting on two stringer beams along the two sides. Assume the
span of the slab as 2m with risers of 160 mm and treads of 270 mm.
Live load = 3 kN/m'. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-250 grade
steel.
4) Design a suitable open well type staircase for a multistoried building
complex using the following data: -
Interior dimensions of staircase room is 3.25 m by 3.25 m
Staircase flights are supported on 200 mm thick masonry walls on all
sides.
Height between floors = 3 m
 Design o/Corbels (Brackets) and Nibs 431

13.2 SHEAR SI'ANIDEPTH RATIO AND SHEAR RESISTANCE

. ,
CHAPTER 13 In the-case of corbels, heavy loads afC transmitted very near to the sup-
porting column and the shear resistance of reinforced concrete members is
different from that in which the loads are applied for away from the
Design of Corbels (Brackets) supports. The shear resistance of concrete depenps upon· the shear
and Nibs spallidepth (a/d) ratio and it varies as shown in Fig. 13.2. As the shear
.span/depth ratio increases from 0.5· to 2, the shear strength ~f concrete
decreases rapidly as indicated by the ratio of enhanced shear strength to the
normal shear strength ('t'm/'tc) which decreases from 4 to 1..
! 13.1 INTRODUCTION 4
,. .

Corbels are s.hort brackets pro~ecting from the columns, generally provided
to SUppOlt taIls, whIch translTIltheavy-Ioads from moving crane& in heavy- \
duty factory workshops. A typical Corbel subjected to loads at a short dis- 3

\
2d
't:m -"tc lav}:I- 't'c,max
tance from the face of the column is shown in Fig: il I-(a) Corbels are also
provided at the Cantilever end of girders in double cantilever balanced (~l / (Table 20 of 1.5.456)
reinforced concrete bridges to supports the end spans of the bridge94 . 2

p p
I~
----1
ay F

n'!
ray 1
777I-t
Of
-+- o 1 2 3 4

l'
lJ (ay /d I
Fig. 13.2 Innucllcc of Shear SpanlDcpth Ratio of Enhanced Shear/Strength

The IS: 456-2000 Code considers this enhancement of shear strength in

(01 Corbel (b) Beam
I Fig. 13.1 Shear Span/Depth Ratio in Carbels and Deams
Corbels are short cantilevers whose shear span/depth (aJd) ratio is less
than 1.0 and the depth (D() at the end face is not less than one half of the
elause 40.5.1 and the reinforcements from sections elose to the supports
are designed from the balance shear as per elause 40.5.2. The maximum
shear strength ~m is limited to the values specified in Table -20 of IS: 456
code. However, the British code95 restricts the value of the maximum shear
strength of concrete (~m) to 0.8 ...g;;
subject to a maximum value of 5

depth D, a~ supp,ort. In the case of corbels, the load transfer at support is N/mm'.
malhly by Strut actIon than by stlnple flexure as shown in Fig. 13.1 (b).
The revIsed IS:456-2000 code does not specify any method for the design 13.3 DIMENSIONING OF CORBELS
of corbels· except prescribing the enhanced shear strength of concrete near
the supports. The initial dimensions of t~e corbel is based on the permissible bearing
stresses in concrete which are compiled by Varghese" based on the British
However the British Code BS:81I0", based on severa! research inves-
tigations has recommended some design principles which are outlined in fu1d Indian stalidard code recommendations. The bearing stress is HUlited
the subsequent sections. to the following values. .
 432 Reinforced Concrete Design Design of Corbels (Brackels) alld Nibs 433

1) Bearing stress with no packing material not to exceed 0.4 hk d = effective depth of Corbel at Support
2) Bearing stress on cement mortar packing not to exceed O.6fck F. = applied Vertical Load
3) Bearing stress on steel plate cast into concrete not to exceed O'&-hk F = tension in the horizontal direction
(British Code) F: ;::
compression developed in concrete due to strut action
The width of the corbel is determined by considering the permis- =
Il angle of inclination of force Fe to the horizontal
sible bearing stress. If a plate is used, the size of the bearing plate is to Dr = depth of Corbel at free end
be calculated by limiting the bearing stress to 0.8 10k (Provided the Ds =
depth of Corbel at Support
horizontal force acting is less than 10 percent of the vertical force).
4) The shear span/depth ratio(ajd) should preferably restricted to 0.6
From Triangle of forces, we have
and it should in no case exceed 1.0. F, = F.(ajz)
5) The depth of corbel at the free end should be not less than one half of
the depth at the support. ... (13.1)

13.4 ANALYSIS OF FORCES IN A CORBEL Let x;:: height of c0mpression concrete at the support section
Using the stress block recommended in BS: 8110 (British code),
The design of Corbels is based on the assumption of strut action recom- z = (d -0.45 x)
mended by both the British code BS: 8110 and the American Concrete
Institute Code ACI-318". Hence x = 2.2(d - z)
The forces ,acting on a corbel is shown in Fig. 13.3. The vertical force The force Fc acts over an a-rea- normal to direction of action given by x.cosp
F v is in equilibrium under the action of the horizontal tensile force F I in
~'~ef'l reinforcement and tlre inclined compressive force Fe developed in Hence F,=O.4.t;,b(x.cos~) ...(13.2)
C:.Jllcrete simulating strut action.

Qv
Fv And cos~={.~}
+z "Ia~

Substituting for x and cos Il in Eq. (13.2)

We have the relation,

z Fe F = {[0.88.t;, b<d_-=i!l.y
C
~
a v +z
,} ... (13.3)

0'4tck b·x- Equating Eqs (13.1) and (13.3) we have the relation,
F. (a' + t) = 0.88h,.b.d [I - (zld)] a.Z
0'45x
-I'- Substituting, (0.88~' bd) = k and (aid) = a. ... (13.4)
b. Breadth at corbel
Stress Block
Combining Eqs. (13.1) and (13.4), the resultingequation is expressed as
Fig; 13.3 Forces in a Corbel

a. )(,-)+(_k)(~)' =0
(dz)' - (a.+k
The following notations are used for the analysis of forces in corbels. d k+0. d ...(13.5)
a. = distance ofverlical force from the face of the suppOrt.
b = breadth of the corbel For any given value of (~) and (f:;d) or (i;) the values of the ratio
 Reinjorced Conerete Design Design a/Corbels (Brackets) and Nibs, 435(,.

can be compu~ed using the equation (13.5). The values can directly be read Hence overall depth = D, = (d + effective cover)
out using the graphical chart recommended by Varghese%, shown in Fig. 13,4. 3) Check for Corbel dimensions
0.16 0·"
0·60
Q.10
The value of (ajd) should preferably be less than 0.6 but not greater than
La.
0.121----#-/--b-e:-+-+--1
0·75 4) Determination of Lever arm depth (z)
Compute the value of 'z' from Eq. (13.5) or by using the graphical chart of
Fig. 13.4.
o· 0 Also compute x = 2.22d (I - z/d) and Check for ihe ratio of (xld).
%/d .. 0·95
The Limiting value of (xld) = 0.53 for Fe-250 steel and· (xld) = 0.48
from Fe-415 HYSD bars.
H the value of (xld) is greater than the limiting value, adequate steel
0.2 0·4 1·0 should be provided in compression also. The support steel for main rein-
lay /d) forcement and shear reinforcements will satisfy this condition.
Fig. 13.4 Chart for (ziti) Values for D~ign of Corbels
5) Computation of Force (F,)
'»
For known·yalues of (ajd) and (f:;d) = (i) the ratio of (zld) can be F,= F, (alz)
Also according to the British Code BS: 8110, F, should be at least equal to
directly obtained from the chart. (Fj2).
Knowing the value of z. the values of x, F t and the strain Es can be-eas-
ily computed facilitating the design of reinforcement in the corbel. 6) Area of Main Reinforcement
-n· 13.5 DESIGN PROCEDURE OF CORBELS The stress in steelfs Corresponds to the strain es '
Using the value of x obtained in step- 4; compute

(d-X)
The following stepwise procedure is recommended for the design of cor-
E =E --
bels. s c· X

1) Breadth of bearing plate Where e, =0.0035 & compute J. and Au = (i)

Based on design bearing pressure of 0.8 hk. and the length of bearing plate If there is ·any horizontal forceF then the area of steel is computed as,
h,
being equal to the width of column, the width of bearing plate is deter-
mined.
A"
=(F,+F
t. )
h

, 2)Cvrbel depth at snpport

I 7) Check for Minimum and Maximum percentages of steel

~
fl
..
Due to enhanced shear strength near supports. permitted by the IS: 456
code, assume a suitable value for 'tel nearer to 'tc,mall (Table-20 of IS: 456]
but not exceeding this_"alue and compute the effective depth 'd' at the
Th~ area of steel Au should not exceed L3 percent and not less than 0.4
percent of the value of 'bd'. If it exceeds the maximum limit, increase the

support section using the relatiou, [F'] depth (D,) and redesign.
8) Area of horizontal shear reinforcement (A'h)
d- -
- 'tc·b
A'h = (A,/2)
 436 Reinforced Concrete Design
Design of Corbels (Brackets) alld Nibs 437
Column lies near
The shear reipforcements are provided as closed loops in the upper two- top of corbel
Distance 1:: bar diameter
third portion of the total depth of corbel at support. or 0'75 times cover
9) Check for shear whichever is greater
Stee Main tension
)<nowing the percentage of steel (100 AJbdJ. the exact value of the allow- ptote
able shear stress is gi ven by t~~~~~~;;;g~~~~~~repinforcement (Ast)

~m ~ ~, (2d/a •. )
The support section is checked for safety against shear.
10) Reinforcement detailing 0.
..'l
The detailing of reinforcements in the corbel should conform to clause 7.7 c
o
and Fig. 7.18 and 7.19 of SP: 3498 which are reproduced as Figs. 13.5 and
13.6 in the text.
.~

c
~
Ub:===~b:==:::::~~~~
<;
Horzontal links of
. area Ash oj: 0·25 Ast
>-
Two column ties near
the top of corbel Min. bar diameter or 0·75
times cover whichever ompression bars .
is greater (Ac ",1000 mm2/m width of cor~el)
Steel
plate
Column ties

,"{ "
Compression anchorage
Transverse bar length
welded to main bars
Fig. 13.6 Reinforcement Details in Corbel With Ma,ln Reinforcement of 16 mill
Diameter and Less (SP:34)

columns arc provided with nibs or beam shelves to support floor units
comprising slabs and beams. Continuous nibs less than 300mm in depth
Horiz.ontal links of area are designed as cantilever slabs with suitable reinforcements provided in
Ash "I: 0·25 Ast
the form of horizontal loops to resist the shear forces applied close to the
supports similar to corbels. The Following guide lines recommended by
Compression reinforcement the Cement and Concrete association, U.K is useful in the design of nibs.
A c -l: 1000 mm 2 /m width of corbell I) The bending moment and enhanced shear strength is computed by
considerin.'g the distance a" representing the 'line of action of the load
Column ties as the distance from the centre line of the nearest vertical leg of the
stirrup in the beam to the oute~ face of the main horizontal reinforce-
Compression ment of the nib as shown in Fig. 13.7.
anchorage length
Fig. 13.5 Reinforcement Details in Corbel With Main Reinforcement of 18 mm
2) Additional ties or links are provided as hangers in the beam connected
DJameter or More (SP:34) to the nib. The load on the nib has to be resisted by the compression
zone of the supporting beam. Hanger bars are used to resist not only
13.6 DESIGN OF NIBS (BEAM SHELVES) shear in the beam but also to transfer the load from the nib to the
I In prefabricated structural." systems, the reinforced concrete walls or
compression side of the beam.

\
 Design of Corbels (Brackels) and Nibs 439
· Reinforced Concrete"Design
Where Gy = Distance of the Load F y from the nearest hanger bar.
The additional reinforcement area (in addition to the area neces-
sary to support the shear force) for the hangers is computed using the z = Lever arm

relation, If inclined loops arc used the area of the inclined nib reinforcement" is
given by

A,; = ( 0.87 ;"Sin 8)

Where 8 =angle of the inclined loop with the horizontal (Fig.13.8)
Thes"e reinforcements are to be held securely in position by using
additional fixing bars running parallel to the nib as shown in Fig. 13.8.
4) In the case of nibs suppnrting light loads the horizontal reinforcement
may be bent as a loop as shown in Fig. 13.9.

.
IT
rr=

Fv Fv

3)
Fig. 13.7 Distance a;. for Bending Moment and Shear Force

According to the recommendations of the Cement and concre~e Asso-

""-Ld J.JT
or ciation, U.K, the cantilever portion of the nibs should be reInforced r"
11
with both horizontal and vertical systems of reinforcements as shown
" in Fig.13.8. The.area ofhorizo.ntal nib steel is given by <D Fixing rods CA >12 mm).
./
Diameter ot
x ~ bar diameter links ;t..12mm /
Fig. 13.9 Reinforcements In Nibs With Light Loads

13.7 DESIGN EXAMPLES

I) Design a corbel to support a factored load of 400 kN at a distance of

200 mm from the face of a column 300 mn\ by 400 mm. Adopt M-25
grade concrete and Fe-415' grade HYSD bars. Sketch the details of
reinforcements in the Corbel.

a) Data

Factored load" F, = 400 kN

Horizontal Inclined
loops loops =
Wid!h of column Length of Corbel 300 mm =
Shear span = a, = 200 mm
Fig. 13.8 Reinforcements in Nibs With Large Loads
Materials:M-25 grade Concrete <!ok = 25 N/mm')
Fe-415 HYSD bars if, = 415 N/mm')
F.o, )
Ash = ( 0.87 fy z
440 R.ein/orced Concrete Design Design o/Corbels (Brackets) ([nd Nibs 441

b) Dimensions of Corbel a) ( 0.444 )

( a+k ~ 0.444+0.134 =0.77
Bearing Length ~ Width of Column ~ 300 0101
Using a bearing plate of length ~ 300 0101, k ) ( 0.134 )
and ( a+k ~ 0.44+0.134 ~O,23
Bearing pressure ~ 0.8};, ~ (0.8 x 25) ~ 20 N/mm'

Width of plate = [ 400X 10']

= 66.66 rom
Substituting, we have
300 x20 (~)' - 0.77 (~) + 0.23(0.444)' = 0
Provide a minimum width of 1000101 and adopt a bearing plate 100 x 300
0101 Solving, W=0.7

c) Estimation of depth (d)

o Check for 'z' using chart
From Table-19 of IS: 456, For M-25 grade concrete t;.m" ~ 3.1 N/mm'

..
d~(F.)
't.b
=(400X 10')
3.1 x300
= 430 mOl (J:.t) (F.) ( 400XlO') .
= };,bd = 25x300x450 =0.118

From Fig. 13.4, for (ajd) ~ 0.465 and (tt;;,) ~ 0.118, read oul (ziti) ~ 0.7
Adopt effeclive depth ~ d ~ 450 0101
Therefore, z ~ (0.7 x 450) ~ 315 0101
Total depth at support is
(d - z) ~ 0.45 x (Refer Fig. 13.3)
D s = (d + cover + 1/2 diameter of bar)
:. (450 - 315) ~ 0.45 x
~ (450 + 40 + 10)
:. x~300 0101
~ 5000101

Depth at face ~ Dr ~ (0.5 D,) ~ (0.5 x 500) ~ 250 0101' (~) =( ~~~) ':= 0.66 > the limiting value of 0.48 for·Fe-41S grade bars.
d) Check for strut action Hence, adequate steel should be used in compression also. The support
reinforcemen~ for main steel and horizontal links used as shear reinforce- ..
(a.)
ment will satisfy this condition.
Ratio d = (200) "
450 = 0.44 < 0.6, Hence acts as a corbel.
g) Resolution of Forces
e) .Determination of Lever arm (z)

Using the Eq. (13.5),

F, =( F.; a.) =( 40~~:00) = 254 kN

(~)'-(a~k)(~)+(a:k)(JJ~O 400) = 200 kN

F[ not less than 0,5 F y = ( 2

Where k=( O,88};k

F. bd)=( 0.88 x400xlO'
25 x 300 x 450
)=0.134
h) Area of Tension Reinforcement

a=( ~H~~~) =0.444

 Design a/Corbels (Brackets) and Nibs 443
Reinforced Con,crete'Design:~, ,1<

E= [0.0035 (d -X)J =[0.0035 (450- 300)J = 0.00175

.
Sh ear capacity of steel :::
(0.87/,A,d)
. ==
(0.87X415X 157X450)
:::: 340 kN
S, 75 x 1000
'x 300
From Fig.3 of SP: 16 read out the stress ill steel (fJ corresponding to strain
:. Total shear capacily = (324 + 340) = 664 kN > 400 kN
E, = 0.00175 Hence, design is safe .
J; ~ 320 N/mm'
I) Reinforcement Details
=(254X lo')=794mm'
.. A" 320
The details of reinforcements in the corbel in shown in Fig. 13.10.
Use 4 bars of 16 mm diameter (A" = 804 mm') Cay) Fv
"" Column 200
i) Check for minimum and maxiillum reinforcement ties

100A,,) = ( 100 x 804) = 0.595 > 0.4 bUI < 1.3 percent 4#16
( bd 320

Hence satisfactory

j) Area of shear reinfo~ccment

A",m'"' = ( 'I, A,,) = (804/2) = 402 mm'

Provide 4 numbers of 10 mm diameter 2 legged horizontal links in the Column
bars
upper two third depth (A" = 628 mm').
2 X450)
I Spacing of links =Sy= ( ~ =75 rum
pi,
i
j
k) Shear Capacity of Section
~400 J'
Fig. 13.10 Reinforcement Details in Corbel
I Using Table -19 of IS: 456, for M-25 grade concrete and 0.595 percent
I'
I steel, 2) Design a continuous nib (beam support) projecling from an R.C.C
l'
wall to support a prefabricated slab unit transmitting a service shear
(~) = 0.444
I
1 <, = 0.53 N/mm' 'nd force of 15 kN/m, assuming the following dala.
I
I

""I: 2XO.53) , a) Data

i .. Enhanced shear strength =( ~ = 2.4 N/mrn ,I
I
I = =
F, (1.5 x 15) 22.5 kN/m
Hence, shear capacity of concrete is computed as, Projection of nib = 200 mm
a.= 100mm
= (2.4 x 300 X 450) = 324 kN !,k =30 N/mm' and f, = 415 N/mm'
V, 1000
;.1 .,'!.'
444 Reil~forced Concrete Desigll
Design oj Corbels (Brackets) and Nibs 445

b) Dimensions of Nib Fv
100
Since the shear force is small, adopt an overall depth of nib = D = 200 mm R.C. Walt #10-130c/c
And effective depth ~ d ~ 150 mm ~¥~~+
200
c) Bending Moments and Shear Forces
Walt
+-
2#10
Maximum bending moment and at the face of R.C. wall is computed as reinforcement 200---.f-

M ~ (F,.a;) ~ (22.5 x 10' x 100) ~ (2.25 X 10') N.mm

Fig.13.11 Reinforcement Details in Nib
V ~ F, ~ 22.5 kN
13.8 EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE

d) Reinforcements 1) Design a Corbel for a factory shed column 500 mm by 300 rnm to
support a vertical ultimate load of 500 kN, with ;is line of action 200
Assuming a lever arm depth of z ~ 0.8 d ~ (0.8 x 150) = 120 mm mm from the-face of the column. Assume M-20 grade concrete and
F,a, ) (22.5 X 10
3X
IOO) 52 'I
Fe-415 grade HYSD bars for the construction.
A,,~ ( 0.87J" ~ 0.87x415x120 = mm m 2) Design a Corbel to support a reaction due to a characteristic dead load
of 80 kN and live load of 120 kN. This reaction acts at 200 mm from
Provide minimum area- of reinforcement of 0.4 percent.
the face of the column which is 350 mm square in section. There is
.. A" = (0.004 x 1000 x ISO) = 600 mm'/m also a horizontal reaction of 30 kN due to shrinkage restraint of beams
etc. Design the Corbel and sketch .the details of reinforcement.
Adopt 10 mm diameter bars at 130 mm cenlres (A,,= 604 mm') both at top
Assume};, = 20 N/mm' andJ, ~ 415 N/mm'.
and bottom of the section.
3) A continuous concrete nib is to be provided to a reinforced concrete
e) Check for shear stress beam cast in situ.The nib is to support a series of precast floor units
450 mm wide and 150 mm deep. These floor units have a clear span of
Vo = 22.5 kN 3.5m and exert an ultimate total reaction of 25 kN per metre length on
the nib. The dry bearing of, the floor units on the beam can exelt a
100A") ~(.100X604)= 0 pr~ssure of O.~ fck' Assumin~ that an allowance of 20 mm has to be
( bd 1000 x ISO 0.4 provided fo"r spilling and an allowance of 25 mm has to be made for
the face of column for inaccurate dimension. design a suitable nib and
From Table -19 (IS: 456) for M-30 grade concrete, 2
2
sketch the details of reinforcements. Assume jd: = 30 N/mm and jy =
'C = 0.45 N/mm
c 415 N/mm'.

But. <,~(:JU~~~::~~)=0150N/mm'
Since. 't'c > 'tv shear stresses are within safe permissible limits.

f) Details of Reinforcemellts

The reinforcement details in ilie)lib is show" in Fig. 13.11

, ''.'I
CHAPTER 14
Pile and Raft F04ndations
14.1 INTRODUCTION
Reinforced concrete piles are generally used in soft s.cils having very low
bearing capacity. Buildings and bridges over tank beds are invadably built
over pile foundations which are classified under deepJoundations.
Concrete piles arc further classified as
a) Cast in situ·
b) Precast piles
In the case of cast in situ piles, a steel shell is driven first to the
required depth and concreting is done after placing the reinforcement cage
in the hole. If the shell is left in place, it is called a shell pile. If the shell is
removed it is referred to as shelllecs cast in situ pile. The world's longest
shell pile is provided a: Walt Disney world in Florida, U.S.A". The'Jength
of the pile is 114 m. During 1950 to 1960, cast in situ piles were commonly
used since the technique of precasting was not well developed. With the
introdlU;tion of better tI,uality cement and precasting techniques, now days
precast piles are invariably preferred in place of cast in situ piles s~nce
multistory buildings and bridge structures .genenilly involve foundati,ons
under water or in soils with high water table..
Precast piles can be made with a high degree of quality control regard-
ing dimensions and strength and hence have superior structural properties
in comparison with cast in situ'piles. Precast piles canbe cast to various
shapes such as,
i) Circular,
Ii) Square,'
iii) Rectangular
iv) Octagonal.
Generally circular and square section piles are preferred to other
shapes.
When more than one pile is used for the foundation, the group of piles
are connected at the top by a pile cap to form a singleunit. The piles are
arranged symmetrically about the axis of the columns so that the loads are
.distributed uniformly to all the piles. Pile caps are invariably used to sup-
port very heavy columns of storied buildings and the piers of bridges.
Pile and Raft Foundations 447
\
14.2 DESIGN OF PILE FOUNDATrONS
Reinforced concrete piles are designed as columns to resist the loads
transmitted from the structure. Structural design of reinforced concrete
piles is influenced by the loads acting on the pile, the depth of the pile
below the ground level, type of soiJ~ the grade of concrete and quality and
type of steel used as reinforcements. The precast piles are d~signed for
handling and driving stresses together with loads to be sustamed under,
service conditions.
The minimum longitudinal reinforcement in the pile should be not less
than the following values:
I) 1.25 percent of the cross sectional are of the pile for piles having
length upto 30 times their 'least later dimension. . . .
2) 1.5 percent of the cross sectional area of the pIle for pIles havmg
length between 30 to 40 times their least lateral dlm~nslon..
3) 2 percent of the cross sectional area of the pile for plies havmg length
greater than 40 times their least lateral dimensions.
The latel'al reinforcement comprises of ties or links of not less than 6
mill diameter' and the spacing of the links or spirals shall be not greater
than 150mm. Also the spacing of the ties should notexceed half the least
lateral dimensions.' . " . .
The minimum steel requirements of a typical precast concrete pIle IS
shown in Fig. 14.1 based on the guide lines specified in SP:34". '
30->/,-,--L---t
J Spacing 0/2 max.
Longitudinal steel, min: 1·25 X for 1<300
1-50 X for 300" I "400
2'00r. for I> 400
Fig. 14.1 Minimum Steel Requirements in Precast Concrete Piles
 Pile and R{{/1 Foul/dations 449
448 Rei/!forced Concrete Design t5 32, lifting

~-=m~
I 14.2.1 Design procedure of Piles
I"
, The following stepwise procedure may be followed in the design of piles.

t40~~~
t) The number of piles is 4ecided based on the total load transmitted to
the foundation. The service load on each pile is e~aluated and the fac~
t-;-1O 50-t-:- 1050--j'-- 6000 ---:-t-:-1050 ~ 1050
tared load is computed. (jl'80t70) (1180170) {.680tI40} (1180170) (p80170)
2) The size of the pile is selected depending upon the service load. For
loads in the range of 400 to 600 kN, 300 mm square piles will be suf- longitudinal Section
ficient. Depending upon the increase in the load, the size of the pile is
increased. t 350 i 4- #32
3) The length of the pile depends upon the ~epth of hard strata below t ~~Bclosed
350 stirrups
I
M.S. Straps
ground level for bearing piles and the fiction developed in the case of
cohesive soils. The length of pile above ground is generally around
0.6 m to cast the pile cap and the columns.
+ I Steel forks in
pairs (spacer bars)
.32 lifl hole
Shoe
4) If the slenderness ratio of the pile is greater than 12, it is designed as a
Section AA Toe for Pile
long column, considering the reduction co-efficient applied to the
(suitable for gravel & sand)
permissible stresses.
5) The longitudinal reinforcement designed should be more than the I,'ig. 14.2 Typical Dctails of Rcinforcement in a Precast Concrete Pile
minimum percentage of steel specified in section 14.2
1) Shape of pile cap which is influenced by the number and spacing of
6) The lateral reinforcement consisting of ties or links and spirals and
piles.
their percentages expressed as percent of volume of the pile should be
. 2) Depth of pile cap, whicli should be sufficient to resist the bending
not less than the values specified in Fig. 14.1. The detailing of the
moment and shear forces, developed due to the loads.
larger percentage volume of lateral reinforcernent near the pile head
3) Computation of bending moment, shear force and tensile force due to·
and pile end is of particular significance due to the driving stresses
strut action.
developed at the pile shoe end and pile head.
4) Amount of reinforcement and its arrangement
7) Clear cover to all main reinforcements in pile shall be not less than
50 mm. The following guidelines based on the British practice and .Indian
8) Steel forks (spacer bars) in pairs are provided at regular intervals to Standard Code (is: 2911)100 recommendations are useful in the design of
hold the main reinforcement in position. A steel shoe made up of mild pile and pile caps.
steel plates is embedded at the pile end to facilitate easy driving of the
pile into the soil strata. I) Shape of pile cap
Typical details of reinforcement requirements in a precast concrete pile
Whenever number of piles are used symmetrically, square or rectangular
is shown in Fig. 14.2.
shaped pile caps are commonly employed. When odd numbers of three
piles spaced asymmetrically are used, triangular shaped pile caps are used.
14.3 DESIGN OF PILE CAPS
Minimum spacing of piles = 2.5 to 3 rip
Where, d, = diameter of the piles
The load from the columns and piers in bridges are transmitted to the pile
foundation from a pile cap. When a group of piles are used, ~hey are con- For accommodating deviations in driving of piles. the size of pile cap is
nected .together to form a single unit through pile caps above the ground made 300 mm more than the outer to outer distance of the exterior piles.
level.
The salient parameters in the design of pile caps are:
 Reinforce.d Concrete. Design Pile and Raft Foundations 451

Gover ~ 60 to 80 mm
IVJlIIIIIIUII 1) Depth of pile'cap
Ariothef'criterion in arriving at the shape of the pile cap is to arrange
the center of gravity of all the piles to coincide with the centroid of the pHe Based on cost analysis an empirical relation has been recommended by
cap. Based on these principles, the common shapes of pile caps used for Varghese91 expressing the thickness of the pile cap as a function of diame-
two to' nine piles are as shown in Fig. 14.3. ter of the pile given by
f) :::: (2 d p +', 00) mm for d p not greater than 550 mm
D:::: (13)(8 d p+600) n1ln for d p greater than or equal to 550 mm
0

~
Where, D:::: overall thickness of pile cap (mm)
0 d p ~ diameter of pile (mm)
~'''.',

0 3) Design of Reinforcements in Pile Caps

2 Piles 3 Piles
The transfer of loads from the column to the pile cap and the piles depends
upon the structui'al behaviour of the pile cap under the system of column
0 0 0 0 loads and pile reactions.
The theories that are commonly used in the design of reinforce-
0 ments in pile caps are grouped as,
0 0
0 0 a) Truss theory
b) Beam theory
4 Plies
5 Piles Referring to Fig. 14.4(,), ~hen the angle of dispersion of load 'Wis less
than 30· (tnn 30' ~ 0.58), the value of shear span/depth ratio (a)d) is less
0 0 0 0 0 than 0,6, Under these conditiuns: the load is transferred to the piles by strut
action shown in Fig.14,4 (b) where AB is in compression and Be.in ten-
sion. Experiments have shown that the truss action (similar to deep beams
0 0 0 0 0 0 and corbels) is significant-for ratios of (ajd):::: 2.
In the trus~ theo;y. l+le tensi.le force tJetween the pile heads is assumed
6 Piles
0 0 to be resisted by the reinforcements similar,to the tie member of a truss and
hence special care should be' tnken in detailing of the tension reinforce-
7 Piles ments and its' anchorage at the ends.
0 0 0 When the spacing of piles is at greater intervals associated with thinner
pile caps in which the shear span/depth (a)d) ratio is more than 2, flexural
0 0 0 0
0 0 action is. more predominant than truss action and hence the tensile rein-
forcement at the bottom of the pile cap is designed to resist the maximum
0 0 bending moment as in an ordinary beam. However, the depth of pile cap
0 0 0 0 0 0 should be checked for shear when designed by either of the two methods.
The arrangement of reinforcement in 'pile caps comprises, of the fol-
8 Piles 98
9 Piles lowing types of bars as shown in· Fig, 14,5 96.

Fig. 14.3 Typical Shapes of Pile Caps I) Main reinforcements located at the bottom of the pile cap in the direc-
tion XX bent up at the ends to provide adequate anchorage.
2) Main reinforcements placed at the bottom in the direction of YY also
bent lip at their ends, J
 452 Reinforced Concrete Design Pile ami Uqli FOI~1UlatiOllS 453
3) Horizontal ties comprising of two to three layers of 16mm diameter TiC's ar~ proyided to the pile reinforcements extended into the pile ea
bars as secondary reinforcement to resist bursting. ~\i:d column bars. The reinforcements detailing in pile caps is shown i~
4) Vertical column starter bars which are L-shaped located at the level of Flg.14.5. The plan alTangement of reinforcements llsed'in pile
' I d'··· caps
the bottom main reinforcements. - . Wtl 1 ltterent number of piles is shown in Fig. 14.6.
5) Reinforcements of the pile are extended inw the pUe cap to provide ,
the required development length in compressIOn f-l-I V-CO(U mn

PH cap
r---'
A
'\ - i }0
Column

Pile cap
T
<300
.:v
-
t--
f..7
r-~
I

I
I\ll)
I...lI2..
.C3Y, r-
:-r-r

B~ 11~~~ VI
, -.
....... ;.' .... .,;-.
,

t--
:1. Jo.: r;.:, "~"'.. ': ~.:.. ,•. ..
r--
::',.~ ;'~:";'
=F
t--
I-;-
!'--Pile .Ji -
--:-
7S
cover

r •
Section of Pile Cap Section AA
(0) Load Transfer In Thick Pile Caps
Bar mark: 1,2 - Main reinforcements
3 - Hori zontal ties
4. ~ Column reinforcement starter bars
5 - Main bars in piles
6 - Top reinforcement in pile cap
7 - Ties for column and pile bars
Fig. 14.5 Reinforcement Details in Pile Caps
A
14.4 DESIGN EXAMPLES OF PILES AND PILE CAPS

1) The. foundation for a structure comprising six piles of square cross

sectlon have to support a service load of 3600 kN. The piles are driven
through a hard stratum and bear on hard rock. Design the reinforceM
ments in the pile assuming the pile to be 6 m long and using M-20
grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. Sketch the details of
(bl Truss Action in Pile Caps
reinforcements in the pile.

Fig. 14.4 Truss Theory of Design of Pile Caps a) Data

6) Reinforcements provided as compression steel, in the pile cap at the Service load on each pile = (3600/6) 600 kN =
to if required as per computations. They are lied to the bent up bot- Ultimate load (1,5 x 600) 900 kN = =
I
I
to~ bars to form a rigid cage before casting the pile cap, Length of Pile = 6 m

i'
 Pile and R~ft Foundations 455
,454' Reinforced Concr.ete Design
c) Late~al reinforcement
.. 1Horizonlal ties to
resist bursting ,.::=-1"'" ~
I
=r=::-ll
I I
,..... .., I I - I 1 I Lateral reinforcement in the central portion of pile = 0.2 percent of gross
,-
I,..!--,-j.-l-!-+ r<
I I
I i I
I
I I'I volume.
I ,I I I I I I
i I I i Using 8 mm diameter ties,
: ...l-ic,..;-+--+.-T- I I I I I 1I
, .' I I I Volume of one lie = 50 [4 (300 - 100)] = 40,000 mm', If p ~ pitch of tie,
"--:,.... I I i I
,: ..}j/.:'-;-*-+.,L;- "-1..... . 1 l
.....~-_r:.=C
I JI
_..J
Volume of pile per pitch length = (300 x 300 x p) = 90,000 p(mm')

Therefore, 40,000 = ( ~:a x 90000 p)

For 2 Piles For 3 Piles
Solving,p = 222 mm
Maximum permissible pitch = (DI2) = (30012) = 150 mm
,- - ------ ... I
---- Hence, provide 8 mm diameter ties at 150 mm centres.
,I d) Lateral reinforcement near pile head
I
I
,I
I
Spiral reinforcements is to be provided inside the main reinforcements for
I ,,III
a lenglh of (3 x 300) = 900 mm,
I I Volume of spiral =,0.6% of gross volume
I I
I " Using 8mm diameter helical ties (A, = 50 mm')

~O~X300X300XI) =540mm'
I I
I I
I Volume of spiral per mm lenglh =(
11 I
I I
'----- ----) For 7 Piles
If p =pitch of spiral with d = [300-100-40] = 160mm
P
= (Circumference of SPiral) _
540 -
(11 x 160
540
x 50) _
-46.51 mm
For 4,5, 6, B & 9 Piles
Fig. 14.6 Plan Arrangement of Reinforcement in Pile Caps Provide, 8 mm diameter spiral at a pitch of 45 mm for a length of 90mm
near the pile head. The f-;Jiral is enclos~d inside of the main reinforce-
h, = 20 N/mm' ments.
f, = 415 N/mm'
e) Lateral reinforce~ents near pile ends \
b) Longitudinal Reinforcemeuts
!
Po = [0.4 h,A, + (0,67 f, - O.4h,)A,J
Volume of lies = 0,6% of gross volume for a lenglh= 3 D ~ (3 x 300) =
900mm
I
(900 x 10') = (0,4 x 20 x 300') + [(0,67 x 415) - (0.4 x 20)lA"
Using 8 mm diameter ties, (A, = 50 mm') !
Volume of each tie = 50 [4 (300 - 100/1 = 40,000 mm' ~,
"

Solving A~c = 666 mm

1
If p = pitch of ties, .
But minimum longitudinal steel (Fig. 14.1) for piles < 300 < (30 x 300) < 9000 I
mmis 40,OOO=(~O~X300X300XP) . I'OJ'
A.c = 1.25 Percent of cross section of pile
, = (1.25 x 300 x 300)/100 = 1125 mm'
2
Provide"4 bars of 20mm diameter (A,c = 1256 111m ) with a clear cover of
Solving, p = 74,00 mm
Provide 8Jlll11 diameter ties at 70 ml11 centres for a distance of 900 rom I:
50mm.
fr:'"6rn the end of the pile both at top and bottom. '-
II
,1:1
 Reinforcec1Concrete Design

~
Pile all d 'Ii Foundatiolls
R QJ' 457

'"
f) Spacer for
w""m" ,'",. 1 using 25 mm
"".re<.'""","';'
1500 mm from en .
2)
.
cC~~mn
- consisting 0 f 4 piles mm
1~~
. 0 f 300 mm by 300mm . e
carrying a scrvlc
o~s:~iameterIn hOle\~.7. arra~ge
Pro Design a suitable pge 500 mm by shown in Fig.14.8(a).
cer forks in pairs to support an R.C. The piles are de HYSD bars.
vide spa tres. Provide 32 "Ie .IS shown
1500 Fig. ioad of 2000 kN · concrete and Fe-41 gra
mm cen d tails in the pi d
Adopt M -20 gra e .
RClIlfOice ment e

t-~--+r
y

-t""":l...--j-
1(~D) .-
A
J=
A
~
8 ¢ ties a
I
t10e/e&
4-#200300
45 ele
I +
500 x 500 mm
R.C. Column
o 8¢ spirals at
8 # 10 ek
8 #45 cle
spiral
+-0
1
1500 Sect ian A A
x ffi.T+
'. +-+- 5 0
x

6000

8 ~ ties
150
L600
ffi .

Pile cup
4200 at 150 ele
Y •
-+-50-+

320 lifting
t --J..,8-10
300 __.T ele (01 Plan

t~#20
hole Pu
300 a=500mm
1- 0 • • ..!
column
JJI spocer
L=12oomm
Pu=3000mm
Pull,.
I

900
8 81 8 ¢ ties
1500
steeat 150.0 ele
bars
Section 88 jav PHe cap
•

I~».\ : l'UrS~teel
0110 elc
(301

I.y5 straps

Steel shoe II In Precast Pile -., (bl Section XX .

. 14
Fig. .7 Details 0f Reinforcemen t Deta s
Fig. 14.8 Dcsi'go of PlIe Cap (Truss Action)
 Pile and Raft'Foundations '459
Reil1r.,rc'e{! Con.crete Design
Substituting p. = 3000 kN
L = 1.2 m
Size of Column = 500 mm by 500mm a =0.5 m
Size of Piles = 300 mm by 300 mm . d = 0.62 m
Service load on cOlumn = 2000 kN
Factored load = p. = (1.5 x 2000) = 3000 kN.
H=( 3000 )1(2Xl.2)-0.5l=575kN
IQxO.6~

Ick ::; 20 N/mm 2

f, = 415 N/mm' A =( 575 x 10') = 1593 mm'
" 0.87x415
= =
Distance between clc of piles L 1200 mm
Overall width of pile cap = (1200 + 300) = 1500 mm Adopt 4 bars of 25 mm diameter in XX and YY directions (A" = 1964
mm') within a width (column) of 500' mm (b = 500 mm).
Percentage of steel provided 'is
b) Depth of pile cap
, =(100XI964)=063'il 012'il
Total depth of pile cap = D = (2 d" + 100) PI 500x620 . 0>. I)
Where d" = diameter or width of pile = 300 mm
e) Check for shear
:. D = (2 ><300 + 100) = 700 mm
Assuming effective cover of 80 mm
Effective depth = d = (700 - 80) = 620 mm Nominal shear = v•. =(i) =e~) =750kN

c) Check for Truss action . (v.)

NOillmul shear stress = t = .-
'bd
= (750XIO') = 0.24 N/mm 2
5005620
Shear span = a, = (600 - 250) = 350 mm Neglecting enhanced shear stress, refer Tab1e-19 of (IS: 456-2000) and
Effective depth = d = 620 mm read out the permissible shear stress in Concrete 't'c for M-20 grade con-
. (a,)
Hence,Ratio d = (350)
620 =0.56<0.6
crete as,
't'c ::; 0.52 N/mm 2 > 'tv' Hence Slife.
Hence, Truss action is predominant
t) Check for Moment action
d) Design of Tension Steel
Maximum moment M u at C is given by
Referring to Fig. 14.8 (b)
Let H ::; tension in Steel M = ~[~ _ '!.J ~(3000X 10')[ 1200 _ 500J = (356 X10') N.mm
Taking moments about A '424 4 24

(M~) =( 500 6
Compute parameter, 356x 10 2
) = 11.85
bd x 620

p. ~efer Table-2 of SP: 16 and read out the percentage of reinforcement as,
H =-[2L-a] p, = 0.584.

II
16d
.. A" = (0.584 x 500 x 620)1100 = 1810 mm' < A" provided, hence safe.
 Pile and Raft Foundations 461
460 Reinforced Conc~ete Design
Pepth of Pile Cap = D = (2d p + 100) = (2 x 300) + 100 = 700 mm
g) The details of reinforcements as per standard practice are shown in Adopting a cover of 100 mm
Effective depth = d = (700 - 100) = 600 mm
Fig. 14.9.
-t 500.', (al-t The pile,cap dimensions are shown in Fig. 14.10 (a)
,
T
#16"300 e/e
(hOrizon\ ties) l ~ Nominal steel
-1- '-
# 12-300 ele
r
I
d .620
--;, . r I

I
I

1/
/

Ir-4 #25

- ,. ( main bars)

T
~ T
'--- ./. 0/4

~ .. . '.' , .. ,~:,,l::;";:....~ :~.:;:.;.....:.":. I,..'; . .. -. .; .,,.,. d.600 700(DI

i- 1-1-
L
1
l- Ba e
#- 12-300·Ite 1200 (Ll coner ete 'A
(top) H-
.:j.!Q0 L..,-+--r-----1------,.--1-,-..J
+-300-+
+- 300-f.
(dpl Pu 2
Idpl
Section XX
(Fig.14·801 +30+
Idpl
Fig. 14.9 Details of Reinforcement in PUc Cap (0) Deiails of Forces on Pile Cap

3) Design a pile cap for a group of two piles spaced 1.5 m apart. The Y""l
piles are 400 111m diameter and the column transmits a factored load of
1000 kN and is of size 500 mm by 500mm. Adopt M-20 grade con-
1 520 -+ ,
...

'"
crete and Fe-415 grade HYSD bars. Sketch the details of reinforce-
ments.
.
l --i--
!
II
U I

~'
#- ~-300 ele

/
.-J
j----
w,

I
a) Data I
I I L-,i
I- i
Size of Column = 500 x 500 mm
=
Size of Piles 300 mm diameter
Factored load on Column 1000 kN =
:.r:: .. :-":',.
I--
.: '7, :. ·1';"· ...· :

Y~
I "-
:'.,:':."".

#12:300
~.;.:
"
::l,':. -,.'3· :.1/
6#22
';;:;;:' '.':"-.;::~'~.',:,;"

10k = 20 N/mm' ele ,,

=
f, 415 N/mm'
Distance between C/C of piles L 1500 mm = = +3004 -.'.

(b) Reinforcemenlsdn Pile Cap Section YY

b) Pile Cap Dimensions
,
Allowing a cover of 150 111m from the edge of the pi~e and the column the Fig. 14JO Design of Pile Cap (Flexural action)
'1 !
overall dimension of pile cap is fixed.
=
Length of Pile Cap (1500 + 300 + 300) 2100 mm =
, =
Width of Pile Cap (500 + 300) 800 mm =
 <lY'i4~2 RefnjorcedConcrete.Design Pile and Raft F';un</ations A63
C) Check for Flexural and Truss action Hence, shear stresses are within safe permissible limits.

Shear span = a, = (750- 250) = 500 mm t) Reinforcement Details

.. Ratio of (~} ( ~~~) = 0,83 > 0.6 The details of reinforcements in the pile cap are shown in Fig, 14.10 (by.

Hence, flexural action will he predominant. Design the pile cap for flexure 14,5 DESIGN OF RAFT FOUNDATIONS
and check for shear.
14.5.1 Introduction
I d) Tension Steel
", ....
I Raft foundations are generally provided to support a number of heavily
I Referring to Fig.14.IO(a) and taking moments about the centre of pile cap, loaded columns situated on soils of low bearing capacity. In the case of
I
I the maximum bending moment at A is given by multistorey buildings with columns based at regular intervals, the bearing
=~[I.._"..]= 1000[.1.2_ 0.5]=312.5kN.m
I
M area required for each column overlaps that of the adjacent column. In such
'224224 cases it is advantageous and economical to provide a raft or a mat consist-
ing. of a network of beams connecting the columns with a continuous rein-
M,)· =(312.5XIO')=
(bd' 800 X600'
1.08 forced concrete slab in contact with the soil.
Fig.I4.11 shows a typical raft foundation connecting all the columns
Refer Table-2 (SP: 16) and read out the percentage of reinforcement as with'sil beams and·a continuous inverted slab in contact with the soil.
The slab and the continuous beam forming the raft or mat foundation
rn'
p = (100
I bd
A,,) = 0.325 should be designed for maximum moments and shear forces developed in
the members.
I
=(0.32SX800X600)~ 1560mm'
~'J

A
.. 51 100 14.5.2 Design Principles of Raft Foundations
Provide 6 bars 22 mm diameter with (AM = 2280 mm')
The structural design of raft foundations involves the computation of total
e) Check for Shear stresses area of the slab required to support the loads on the columns. The founda-
tionarea required is obtained using the safe bearing capacity of the soil and
the total loads on tlJe foundation. The slab is normally fixed or continuous
100A,,) =( 100 X2280) = 0.475 at the edges and designed for the moments develope,! in the perpendicular
( bd 800x600
directions and the design of two-way slabs has been presented in chapter-9.
Refer Table-19 (IS: 456) and read out the value of permissible shear stress The beams are normally continuous over several spans and behaves as
as a continuous beam with loads acting from the soffit upwards due to soil
~,= 0.47 N/mm' reaction. The preliminary dimensions are assumed based on span/depth "

ratio and the design moments and shear forces are computed using the
(2d) = 0.47 (2~
Permissible shear stress is = 't~' = 't~ a
y
x 600) = 1.128 N/mm
, dead and imposed loads and the bending moment and shear force coeffI-
cients given in Table-12 and 13 of IS: 456-2000. The reinforcements are
~ computed to resist the factored moments and shear forces.
J
.
Nominal shear stress = 't = (V,)
- = (500XIO 104NImm' < 'tc,
_ x 600 =.
. '. bd 800
. ! . 14.6 DESIGN EXAMPLE

Design a- suitable raft foundation connecting the columns of a building

 Pile and Raft Foundations 465
-\64 Reinforced Concrete Design
~ '--"4 m 4m t 4m
- i
'!C. -w.l--. .-f%j- I%l-- . +15

TI
0 o

:
4m
~
I/"Rafl slab I
L .~
1·5 m wide

t
4m
I
.
r;
'--Columns
300x 300 mm 300 I-
12m
j

t
Beams . /Contineous
0_
1-. beam 300 x 700mm .o~o

x 1/ 750 k-.
x
4m Ii c~ns

Raft
Columns L~_ -
;
0
i/

!
l'--
,i·
. ..m?l--.
-r
.,- U
slab
12 m
(0) pton of Raft Foundation

~
# 10-200 ele
columns #6_'~.legg.ed
. stirrups
1_ ,h;
tH1l1
Sit beams
.# 12-' 0 ele
(main) (b) Section XX
---~---------------

Section XX

Fig. 14.1L Typical Raft Foundation

"-300
shown in Fig. 14.12 (a). The size of the building is 12 m by 12 m with the
# 6 -150 ele 4#25
columns spaced at 4 m intervals. Adopt the following data:

a) Data
13 ;;t 14.J~~~~~~~~
j 1500 f
#.12 -150 ele

(c) Section YY
Size of building = 12 m by 12 m.
Spacing of columns all round;:: 4 m intervals
.Fig. '14.12 Reinforcement Details in'Raft Fo~ndation
Service load transmitted by each column = 500 kN.
=
Size of Columns 300 mm by 300 mm
 466 Reinforced Concrete Design ., Piltf and Rdft Foundaiiol's467'
, Safe bearing capa~ity of soil = 100. kN/m' c) Design of continuous beam over raft slab
Materials: M-20. grade concrete (/" = 20. N/mm')
Fe-415 HYSD bars (j, = 415 N/mm') Maximum Service load on beam
w = (83.3 x 1.5 x I) = 125 kN/m
b) Design of Raft Slab

Total service load on all colnmns = (12 x 500) = 6000 kN M= 1.5 (WL') = 1.5 ( 125 X4') = 300 kN.m
, '10 10
Self weight of slab and beams at 10% 600 kN =
Total service load = 6600 kN. / V, = 1.5 (0.6 wL) = 1.5(0.6 x 125x4) = 450 kN

Area of raftslab = (6160~) = 66 m' ,. Assuming the width of beam =b =300 mm,
300 x 106
Total length of slab = (12 x 4) = 48 m
Width of slab = (66/48) = 1.375 m
Effective depth = d = ,-V 0.138J..b
M
u
(0.138 X20 x 300)
602mm

Adopt a footing width of 1.5 m \'} Adoptingd = 650 mm aud over all depth D = 700 mm, compute the

Intensity of soil pressu(e = ( I ~~8) = 83.3 kN/m' J'

parameter,

M,)=( 300X1Q6)=2.36
(bd'
Cantilever projection of slab =( 1500; 300) = 600mm 300 x 650'
Refer Table-2 (S\,: 16) and read out the percentage reinforcement as
Factored moment in Cantilever slab is computed as,

M, = (1.5 x 83 3 x 0.6') = 22.5 kN.m

p,=0.781 =C~:·,)
H"
2
Limiting depth required is given by
.. A,,=(0.781~:X650)=1523mm'
Provide 4 bars of 25 mm diameter both at top and bottom to resist negative
d=~ I M, , = 22.5xlO = 90.3 mm
\I 0.138J.,b (O.l38x20xlO') moments at the supports. (A" = 1963 mm').

Adopt effective depth d = 100 mm d) Shear Reinforcements

And overall depth D = 130 mm 'I

(M,) =(22.5
X
10') = 2.25 v, = 450kN
bd' 10' x 100'
.
Nommal shear stress ,= •(
't= v.) =(450X 10') =
bd
~
300x650
2.30N/mm,
Refer Table-2 (SP: 16) and read out the percentage of reinforcement as, . ..'

IOOA,,)
p, = 0.737 = ( I;;l IOOA") =(IOOX 1963) = 1.006
,(b d 300x650~
Refer Table-19 (IS: 456) and read 'out the permissible shear strength of
A = (0.737 x 10' x 100) = 737 mm'/m
M. . 100 . concrete·as,
Provide 12mm diameter bars at 150 mm centres (A" = 754 mm') ~,= 0.62 N/mm' <~.
Distribution bars = (0.0012 x 103 x 130) = 156 rom'
Hence,shear reinforcements are to be designed to resist the balance shear
Provide'6riun diameter barS at 150 rom centres (A" = 189 mm')
given by
 Pile and Raft Foundations 469
468 Reinforced Concrete Design
5) Design a reinforced concrete raft foundation connecting the columns
v, = [V. - t,bd] ='[40 - (0,62 X300x 650)/10'] = 33kN
of a multistorey~d bui~ding. !he columns are alTanged in square grid
Using 10 mm diameter four legged stirrups, 16 m by 16 m wtth their spactngs 4 m apart. The safe bearing capacity
of the soil at site is 100 kN!m'. The total service load on all the col-
Spacing =S, =[
0,87 f,A"d] =[0,87X415X4X78,5 X650] = 223 mm
3 umns is '4800 kN. Tge columns are 400 mm by 400 mm in section.
V, 330x1O
Adopt M-10 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. Sketch the details
provide 10 mm diameter fOUf legged stirrups at 200 mm centres. of reinforcements in the raft foundation.
6) The columns of a multistoreyed building with their centre lines form-
e) Reinforcement details
ing a rectangular grid of 10.5 m by 14 m has the columns &paced at 3.5
The reinforcement details of longitudinal and cross section of the raft is m centres in the grid. The columns are 300 mm by 300 111m in cross
section and transmit a factored load of 800 kN each to the foundations.
shown in Figs, 14,12 (b) and (c)"
The. safe bearing capacity of soil at site is 80 kN/m'. Adopting M-15
grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars, design a suitable raft founda-
14,7 EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE
tion for the columns and sketch the details of reinforcements in the
I) A typical column of a multistoreyed building transmits a load of 3200 raft beam and slab.
kN to the foundations, This load has to be sllppOlted by 4 piles having
a square cross section. The piles are driven thr6'ugh hard stratum and
rest on hard rock. 300 mm by 300 mm size Precast piles are proposed
to be used for the foundations. Design the reinforcements required for
a typical pile assuming the pile to be 8 m long, Adopt M-30 grade
concrete and Fe-415 grade high yield strength reinforcement. Sketch
the typical details of reinforcements in the pile.
2) A reinforced concrete column 400 mm by 600 mm carrying a factored
load of 2400 kN is to be supported by six precast piles of length 6 m,
The piles are driven through hard gravelly soil add resting on' hard
strata, Using M-20 grade concrete and Fe'415 HYSD bars design the
reinforcements required in a typical pile and sketch the details.
3) A reinforced concrete column 400 mm by 400 mJ!l calTying a service
load of 800 kN is supported on three piles 300 by 300 mm in section,
The centre to· centre distance between the piles is 1500 mm. Design
the reinforcements in the pile and the pile cap. The length of the piles
may be assumed as 6 m bearing on hard'rock. Adopt M-20 grade con-
crete and Fe-415 HYSD reinforcement.
4) A pile cap connecting 4 reinforced concrete piles of300 by 300 mm is
to be designed to support a reinforced concrete column 400 mm by
400 mm carrying a seryice load I'f 1000 kN. The piles are loeated
parallel to the column faces with their centres loc~ted 800 rom from
the centre of the column. Using M-30 grade concrete and Fe-500
,grade reinforcement, design the pile cap and sketch t~e details of
. I reinforcements. .
 Working Stress Method ofDesign 471

Where =
d effective depth of the section
M = service load moment
b = width or breadth of section
CHAPTER 15 Q:::: a constant depending upon the permissible stresses, neutral
axis depth factor (k) and lever arm coefficient (j).
Working Stress Method of Design Values of design constant IQ' for different.giades of concrete and types of
steel are compiled in Table-4.3. After satisfying the depth criterion, the
ar~ of reinfqrcemeIit ~equired in the section is evaluated by using the
relation,
15.1 INTRODUCTION AND PERMISSIBLE STRESSES
A s1 :::: --M. - )
The working stress or permiss'ible stress method of design developed. and . ( (Jsl·j·d
widely used during the first half of tlle 20" century is based on the elastic The section is reinforced with suitable number of steel bars with due
theory of reinforced concrete sections outlined in detail under chapter~4.
regard to spacing of bars and cover requirements.
BasicaIly, the method assumes linear elastic behavior of materials and the The section is generally checked for resistance against shear by com-
working stresses in the materials are obtained by applying- appropriate par-
puting the nominal shear stress 'tv using the relation,
tial safety factors to the characteristic strength. The resulting permissible
stresses in concrete and steel are well within the linear elastic range of the
materials.
The working stress method does not provide a realistic measure of the Where V = service load shear force at the section
factor of safety against'collapse of a structure. in contrast to the limit state The permissible shear stress in concrete ('1',) is influenced by the per-
method of design. However structures designed. in accordance with . ~e centage reinforcement in the section and the grade of concrete as compiled
working stress method have been generally performing satisfactorily ov'er in Table-IS.! (Table-23 of IS: 456-2000).
many years. In general, the working stress method results in comparatively
larger sections of the structural members with higher} quantities 6f ste~l
Table 15.1 Permissible Shear Stresses In Concrete
reinforcement, resulting'in conservative designs. Nevertheless, the methoq (Table·23 of IS: 456·2000)
due to its simplicity in concept as well as application was widely used by
Permissible Shear stress in Concrete (1'0 , Nlmm2 )
the-structural engineers during the 20th century and even now, the method
has been incorporated in Annexure-B of the revised Indian Standard Code
C:")
IS: 456-2000 for optional use. M·15 M-20 M·25 M·30 M·35 M·40
The permissible or· working stress in concrete under compression, <0.15 0.18 0.18 0.19 0.20 0,20 0,20
flexure, and bond is shown in Table-4.2 (Table-21 of IS: 456-2000) and 0,25 0,22 0.22 0.23 0,23 0.23 0.23·
the working stresses in steel reinforcement are compiled in TabJe-4.1 , 0.50 0.29 0.30 0,31 0.31 _0.31 0,32
(Table-22. of IS: 456-2000). The design shear strength of concrete for vari- 0.75 0.34 0.35 0.36 0,37 0.37 0,36
ous grades is shown in Table-15.1 (Table-23 ofIS: 456-2000). 1.00 0.37 0,39 0.40 0.41 0.42 0,42

In the working stress method of design of structural concrete members; 1.25 0.40 0.42 0.44. 0,45 0.45 0.46
1.50 0.42 0.45 0.46 0.48 0.49 0.49
the ·cross sectional dimensions are generally assumed based on the basic
1.75 0.44, 0.47 0.49 0,50 0,52 0.52
span/depth ratios outlined in chapter-5. The service .load moments and
2.00 0.44 0.49 0.51 0.53 0.54 0.55
shear forces are computed at critical sections and the adequacy of the depth
of the section is checked by using the relation, (COil/d)

" d=~
I
I 472 Reinforced Concrete Design
I Table 15.1 Permissible Shear Stresscs in Concrete
Working Stress Method of Design 473

(Table-23 of IS: 456-2000) However, it is important to note that in slabs, thf? .nominal shear stress ('ty}
1-
, Permissible Shear stress In Concrete (1;, • N/mm 2 should not exceed half the value of ~,.m", given in Table-15.3 (Table-24 of
C~:·)
)
IS: 456-2000).

M-15 M·20 M-25 M·30 M·35 M-40

Table 15.3 Maximum Shear Stress, 'tc mOX ( N/mm 2 )
2.25 0.44 0.51 0.5'3 0,55 -,56 0.57
. (Table-24 of IS: 456.2000)
2.50 0.44 0,51 0.55 0.57 0.58 0.60
2.75 0.44 0.51 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 Concrete M·15 M·20 M-25 M-30 M·35 M-4Q
Grade and above
3.00 0.44 0.51 0.57 6.60 0.62 0.63
't'c.ma.< 1.6 1.8 1.9 2.2 2.3 2.5
Note: A. is thaI area of longitudInal tension reinforcement which continues at least one
effective depth beyond the section being considered except at supports where Itle full
area of tension reinforcement may be' used provided the detailing conforms to
clauses 26.2.2 and 26,2.3 of IS: 456-2000 15.2 DESIGN OF SLABS

If the nominal shear stress, exceeds the pennissible shear stress, suitable 15.2,1 Design Example of One-way Slab
shear reinforcement; are designed in members using the relation,
Design a simply supported verandah Slab to suiI the following data:
s=
, -V,- (""A".d) a) Data
Where S, = spacing of stirrups
Asv ;: cross sectional area of s-tirrup legs Clear span = 3 m
CJsv permissible stress in steel reinforcement
;: Slab supported on load bearing brick walls 230 mm thick.
= effective depth =

I
d . Loading: Roof load (accessible) 1.5 kN/m' .id
V, = working load shear force aI the section. Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
In the case of slabs, the section is revised using greater thickness since
shear reinforcements are no! feasible. However in slabs, the permissible b) Permissible stresses

I shear stress in concrete is increased to a value

plying ·factor depending upon the thickness of the slab as specified in
Table-15c2 and clause 40.2.1.1 ofIS: 456-2000. .'
'k...'tc' where' k' is a multi-
ache

cr..
m
= 7 N/mm:2
= 230 N/mm'
= 13
Q = 0.91
j = 0.90

Table 15.2 Values of 'k' for Solid slobs (Clause B-5.2.1.1 Of IS: 456·2000)
c) Depth of Slab
Overall 300 150
depth of or 275 250 225' 200 175 or
slab(mm) More less . Assuming 004 percent of reinforcement in the slab, Ihe value of K. (Fig.
k 1.00 1.05 . 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 . 1.30 5.1) using Fe-415 HYSD bars is around 1.25..

In the case of beams, nominal shear reinforcemenIs are provided if the

Hence the ratio (J) (Jl"ic
= XK l XK c

nominal shear stress is less than the permissible shear stress and the spac- =(20 x 1.25 x 1.00) =25
ing of such reinforcemenI is computed as,
:. ~d = (3~0) = 120 mm, Using 10 mm diameter bars,
= (Q.87 f, A,,)
s, . OAb Overall depth =[120 + 5 + 15] =140 rom. Adopt overall depth = ISO mm.
 Working Stress Method ofDesign 475
.474 . Reinforced Concrete Design.; ,,:. "

d)' Effective Span j) Check for Shear stress

f
Effective span is the least of the following: - , =(~)=(9.36XIO')=0.078N/mm' Ii
,I

a) Centre to centre of supports = (3 +' 0,23) = 3,23 m 'bd Io'x 120 II

b) Clear span + effective depth = (3 + 0,12) = 3.12 m Assuming 50 percent of tension reinforcement to be bent up ~ear supports, Ii
:. Effective span = L = 3.12 m
. (lOOA,,)(IOOX 147)
Rallo [ ; f = lOOOx120 =0.122
e) Loads
Dead load of slab = (0.15 x 25 x I) = 3.75 kNlm' From Table-23 of IS: 456-2000, interpolating the permissible shear stress
Live load on accessible roof = 1.50 kNlm' for slab is
Roof finishes" 0.75 kNlm' kr, = (1.30 x 0.15) = 0.195 N/mm' >',
Total load =w =6.00 kNlm'
Hence, shear stresses are within safe permissible limits.
Considering I m width of the slab, the uniformly distributed load is 6
kNlm on an effective span 0(3.12 m. k) Check for Deflection Control
I) Bending Moments and Shear Forces
n" Percentage reinforcement = p, = [(100 x 294)/(1 000 x 120)] = 0.245
For p, = 0.245, K, = 1.55 [refer Fig. 4 ofIS: 456-2000]
M.= (0.125 w L') = (0.125 x 6 x 3,12') = 7.3 kN.m
V = (0.5 w L) =-(0.5 x 6 x 3.12) = 9.36 kN :. (Ud)m~ = (20 x 1.55) = 31
= =
(Ud),ro'idoJ (3120/120) 26 < 31, Hence safe.
g) Effective Depth
15.2.2 Design Example of Two-way Slab
~
7.3xlO'
d- - 90.06mm
- Qb - 0.91 x 10'
Design a two-way slab for a residential.floor to suit the following datil:
Effective depth adopted = d = 120 mm. Hence safe.
h) Main reinforcement a) Data

A
"
=(~)=[
a,Jd
7.3xlO' ]=294mm'
230xO.9x 120
Size of floor = 4 m by 6 m
Edge conditions: slab simply supported on all the sides without any provi- I,

Minimum reinforcement = 0.12 percent = (0.0012 x 150 x 1000) =180 sion for torsion at comers. Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 I,'
"

,. ,
HYSDbars. !'),
mm' < 294 mm' . ,
. . (10000,,) (I000X79) =268 mm
Spacmg of 10 m~ dIameter bars::;: A:;-::;: . 294 b) Permissible Stresses
G,,,, =7 Nlmm' Q= 0.91
Use 10 mm diameter bars at 260 mm centres.
G.. •= 230 N/mm' j~0.90 ,!
i) Distribution Reinforcement m = 13.33
II'j
A" = (0.0012 x 1000 x 150) = 180 mm' c) Type of Slab ,
.
Spacmg of 6 mm diameter bars::;:
(1000180
x 28.2) ::;: 156.6 mm
Simply supported on all sides without any provision for torsion at comers.
Adopt 6;;"m diameter bars at 150 mm centres Hence
476 Rein!orced·COllcrete Design Working Stress Method of Design 477

Lx =4m Effective depth adopted for short span = 120 mOl ,

L y=6m Ratio (L/L,) =(6/4) = 1.50 Effective depth for long span(using 10 0101 diameter bars) = (120 - 10) =
1100101
d) Depth ofSlab
i) Reinforcements

From Table 5.1,

Steel for short span = ASl =[--"!.-"]=[
0st:jd 23011.2xlO'
x 0.9 x 120]=4510101'
Overall depth = D = ( -n-
short span) (4000) 4 8
= 28 = I 2. 0101
Use 10 0101 diameter bars at 170 0101 centres
Adopt overall depth = ISO 0101
=
Effective depth (ISO - 30) 1200101 = 4.96xlO' ]
Steel for long span = [ 230xO.9x 110 = 218 0101
,

e) Effective Span Use 10 0101 diameter bars at 300 0101 centres

Effective span is the least of the following two criteria. j) Shear and Bond Stresses-
=
a) Centre to centre of supports (4 + 0.2) 4.201 =
=
b) Clear span + effective depth (4 + 0.12) 4.12 01 = Sheat and bond stresses in two-way slabs are very small and not generally
checked since they will be within safe permissible limits.
.. Effective span;:: Lxe ;:: 4.12 m
The reinforcement details -are similar to that in the design example
worked out under limit state design.
f) ~oads
15.3 DESIGN OF'BEAMS
Self weight of slab = (0.15 x 25) = 3.75 kN/m'
Live load on floor = 2.00 kN/m' 15.3.1 Design of Singly Reinforced Beam
Floor finishes = 0,60 kN/m'
Total service load = VI = 6.35 kN/m' Design a rectangular reinfoteed concrete beam simply supported on'
masonry walls 300 0101 thick and 601 apart (centre to centre) to support a
g) Bending Moments distributed live load of 10 kN/m and a dead load of 5 kN/m in addition to
its own weight. Assume M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
From Table-5.5, for (L/L,) = 1.5, read out the momentcoefficients,
0:, = 0.104 and 0:, = 0.046 a) Data

(M, = (rt,w.L;J =--- 'k

(0.104 x 6.35 x4.12) N ,01
= 11.20 Span (centre to centre of supports) p 6 01
My = (o:,w.L;J = (0.046 x 6.35 x4.12') = 4.96 kN.m
=
Live load 10 kN/m
=
Dead load 5 kN/m
M-20 grade concrete and Fe-4l5 HYSD bars
h) Cheek for Depth
b) Permissible Stresses
~=
11.2Xl0'
111.50101
Effective depth = d = 0.91 x 10' ,O'cb= 7 N/mm 2 Q=0.91
,0"" = 230 N/mrn' j=0.90
mo' = 13.33
 ;'t47,8 Reinforced Concrete Design Working Siress Methodoj Design '479_

c) Cross Sectional Dimensions Provide 3 bars of 20 mm diameter, (A" = 942 mm')

Adopt width of beam = b = 300 mm i) Shear Stresses and Reinforcements

As the loading on beam is heavy adopt,

Effective depth 0: d O:w

(
,pan) , (6000)
=. W 0: 600 mm • ( V)
Nominal shear stress = 't = -
bd
= (60XIO') ::: 0.33Nlmm,
300 X600

Overall depth = D = (600 + 50) = 650 mm . (IOOA,,)=(IOOX942)=052

Rallo bd 300 x 600 '

d) Effective Span Refer Table-23 (IS: 456-2000) and read out the permissible shear stress in
concrete as
Effective span is the least of the following two criteria. ~,= 0.30 N/m~' <~,
i) Centre to centre ofsupports = 6 ill Hence, shear reinforcements in the form of stirrups are required.
ii) (Clear span + effective depth) = (6 - 0.3 + 0.6) = 6.3 m . Since'tc is nearly' equal 'tv, provide nominal shear reinforcements(us-
Hence, adopt effective span = L = 6 rh ing 6 mm diameter bars) given by the equation,
~
'·1
eJ Loads S.
= (A...0.87
0\4 b
1,) =(2 x280.4x300
xO.87 X415) = t68 mm

=
Self weight of beam (0.3 x 0.65 x 25) =4.875 kN/m Provide 6 mm diamete;two legged stirrups at 150 mm centres up to quar-
Dead load = 5.000 kN/m ter span length from supports and gradually increased to 300 mm towards
ftl'JI1
I =
Live load 10.000 kN/m the centre of span.
1If.');~
=
Finishes 0.125 kN/m \
I
Total load = w = 20.000 kN/m 15.3.2 Design of Doubly Reinforced Beam

I) Bending Moment and Shear Forces A doubly reinforced beam is to be designed having an overall cross sec,-
tional dimensions of 250 mm by 400 mm with an effective span of 4 m.
.,, =
M= 0.125 w L' (0.125 x 20 x 6') 90 kN.m = The beam -has to support an uniformly distributed dead load of 2.5 kN/m
, V = 0.5 w L = (0.5 x 20 x 6) = 60 kN together with a live load of 20 kN/m in addition to its self weight. Adopt-
IL ing M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. design suitable rein-
, I',

I
g) Check for Depth forcements in the beam.
I
1 ~. 6
I 90 X 10 _ 578 mm 0) Data
0.91 x 300
l'
"
1: Effective span = L = 4 m
Effective depth provided = d = 600 mm. hence adequate.
,,I Breadth of beam = b = 250 rnm I

=
Overall depth D '= 400 mm
h) Main Tension Reinforcement =
Dead load 2.5 kN/m
=
Live load 20 kN/m
_(!!!-)=( 90xlo' )=724mm' M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
A Sl - asJd 230xO.9x600
 Working Stress Method of Design 481
480 Reinforced Concrete De::ign
_[ 13 x 322(350-99.05) ]_ ,
b) Permissible Stresses
A" - (1.5xl:i-I)(99.05-50) -1172mm
O'eb = 7 N/mm
2
Q = 0.91
j = 0.90 Provide 4 bars of 20 mm diameter (A" = 1256 mm')
a" = 230 N/mm'
m = 13.33 h) Shear Stresses and reinforcements

,, =(.!".) 50x to') =0.57 NI mm'

e) Loads
bd
=( 250x350
Self weight of beam = (0.25 x 0.4 x 25) = 2.5 kNIt;;
Dead load = 2.5
tOOA,,) = ( tOO x 804) = 0
=
Live load 20.0 ( bd 250x350, .91
Total load = w;" 25.0 kN/m
=
Adopt an effective cover of 50 mm. effective depth (400 - 50) = 350 mm Refer Table-23 (IS: 456-2000) and read out the permissible shear stress as
~,= 0.37 N/mm' <~,
. d) Bending Moments and Shear Forces
Hence, shear reinforcements have t,o be designed to resist the balance shear
, M = (0.125 wL') =(0.125 x 25 x 4') ;"50 kN.m
given by
V =(0.5 w L)= (0.5 x 25 x 40)= 50kN
V. = [V - ~,.b.d] = [50 - (0.37 x250 X 350)/10'] = 17.625 kN
e) Resisting Moment
Using 6 mm diameter two legged stirrups, spacing is computed as
The resisting moment of singly reinforced section is computed as··
M, = (Q b d') = (0.91 x 250 x 400')";' 27.8 kN.m < M = 50 kN.m
_(A"""d) _(2 x17.625 to' -255 mm '
28 x 230 x 350) _
S, - V, - X
""
Balance moment = M, = (M - M,) = (50 - 27.8) = 22.2 kN.m Provide 6 mm diameter two legged stirrups al250 mm centres at supports "
1) Tension reinforcement gradually increased to 300 mm towards the centre of span.
Tensile steel required for balaneed singly reinforced section is given'by
15.3.3 Design of Flanged Beam
_[. M, ] _[ 27.8 x 10' ] =381 mm'
Design a Tee-beam for a commercial office floor to suit the following data: I'M
A.<I- a.Jd - 230xO.90x350
Additional tensile steel for balanced moment M, is computed as a) Data
_[ M, ]=[ 27.8x10' ]=38Imm'
A", - a,,(d _ do) 230 x 0.90 x 350 ',' Clear span = 10 m
Centre to centre of wall supports = 10.5 m
Where de = cover to compression steel = 50 mm Spacings of tee beams = 2.5 m
:. Total tensile steel = A" = (A.<1 + A,a) = (381 + 322) = 703 mm' Live load (office floor) = 4 kN/m'
Provide 4 'bars of 16 mm diaOleter (A" = 804 mm') Slab thickness = 150 mm
Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
g) Compression reinforcement
mA.a(d -no) ]
b) Permissible Stresses
[
A. = (1.5m -I)(n, -do)
0eb = 7 N/mm 2 2 Q = 0.91 m = 13.33
Where n, = 0.283 d = (0.283 x 3~0) = 99.05 mm 0u = 230 N/mm j = ..0.90
 4*2 Reinforced C;oncre/e Design Working Stress Method ofDesign'" 483"
\
ej Effective Span br,"') =m.AstCd - n )
( -2~

CA'''''''ve
Off •
dep.h ~ d ~ (span)
15 ~ (10500)
15 ~ 700 mm [(2950XIl')/2j ~ [I3x2464(700- 1l )]

(!'terall depth =D =(700 + 50) = 750 mm Solving, II = 122 mm

'Width of rib =bw =300 mm Lever arm = a ~ [d - (n/3)] = [700 - (122/3)] = 659.4 mm
FJfective span is the least of the following two criteria. 6

=
') (Clear span + effective depth) (10 + 0.70) =10.70 m Stress in steel ~(J". = ( 358xlO ) = 220 N/mm' < 230 N/mm'
2464 x 659.4
=
ii) Centre to centre of supports 10.5 m
Hence, effective span =L = 10.5 m . concrete = 0' ,~ (220
Stress In , - 122) 2
13 x -578 = 3 .57 N/rnm < 7 N/mm
2

d) toads Hence, the stresses in steel and concrete are within safe permissible limits.

Self weight of slab =(0.15 x 25 x 2.5) =9.375 leN/m i) Shear stresses .and Reinforcement
Live load =(4 X 2.5) =10.000 leN/m
Floor finish =(0.6 x 2.5) =1.500 leN/m Maximum shear force = V= 137 leN
Self weight of rib =(0.3 x 0.6 X 25) =4.500 leN/m
Plaster finishes (I~mp sum) = 0.625 leN/m
Total load = w = 26.000 leN/m
'. ~,;Vd)=G~~:~g~)=0.65N/mm'
e) Bending Moments and Shear Forces
(100A,,)
bwd
= ( 100 x 2464) =
3OOx700 1.17
M = (0.125 w L') =(0.125 x 26 x 10.5') =358 leN.m Refer Table-23 (IS: 456-2000) and read out the permissible shear stress as,
V =(0.5 w L) =(0.5 x 26 x 10.5) = 137 leN
~,= 0.40 N/mm' < ~,
. f) Main Reinforcements Hence, shear reinforcements are to be designed to resist the balance s4ear
given by

~ (J~d) ~t2303~~.;~~6700) ~ 2454 mm'

An ( V, = [V - ~, bw d] = [137 - (0.40 x 300 x 700) 10-3] = 53 leN
Using 6 mm diameter two legged stirrups, the spacing is calculated as;
Provide 4 bars of 28 mm diameter (An = 2464 mm')
~) I!ffeclive Flange Width S ~(A ..(J,,d)~(2X28X230X700)~170mm
'V. 53xlO'
Effective flange width is the least of the following two criteria.
Provide 6 mlp diameter two legged sti'qlps at 170 mm centres near sup-
i) b, = [(L.,I6) + b w + 6 D,]
= [(10500/6) + 300 + (6 x 150) = 2950 mm . ports and gradually increased to 300 mm centres towards the centre of
ii) b, = (centre to centre of ribs) = 2500 mm . span.
Hence. b, =2500 mm
15.4 Design of Column and footings
h) Check for Stresses
Design a suitable R.C.C. column of rectangular section and a suitable
Let';1 = depth of neutral axis footing to support an axial service load of 1000 kN. Size of the column is
 Working Stress Method of Design 485
484 Reiiiforced Concrete Design

300 mm by 500 mm. Safe bearing capacity of the soil is 200 kN/m'. Adopt e) Size of footing
M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
Working load on Column = 1000 kN
Self weight of footing (10%) = 100 kN
a) Data
Total load = 1100 kN
Area of footing = (1100/2000) = 5.5 m'
Axial load = p = 1000 kN
Size of column = 300 mm by 500 mm Proportioning the footitig in the same, proportion as the sides of the col-
Safe bearing capacity of soil =200 kN/m' umn,
Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. :. x=0.604
(3 xX 5 x) = 5.5

b) Permissible Stresses Short side offooting = (3 x 0.604) = 1.814 m

Long side offooting = (5 x 0.604) = 3.02 m
(J = 5 N/mm'· Q=0.91 Adopt a rectangular footing of size 3 m by 2 m
a:: N/mm
=7
2 j=0.90 Upward soil pressure = [1000/(2 x 3)] = 167 kN/m'
(J"= 230 N/mm' m =13
(J" = 190 N/mm' o Bending Moments
c) Main Column Reinforcement _ Cantilever projection from the face of short side of column = 0.5(3-0.5)
I = 1.25 m
P = Q"sc Asc + ocC<A c - A.c) Cantilever projection from the face of long side of column = 0.5(2-0.3)

I
Ii
Area of concrete = A, = (300x500) = (15 x 10') mm' Bending moment at short side face of column is computed as,
= 0.85 m

(1000 x 10') = 190 A" + 5 [(15 xlO') - A,,]

. . _ " "
Solving, the area of steel reIllforcement = Asc = 1350mm
,2 M =( IV~') =C 67 ~1.252) = 130 kN.m

Minimum steel area = 0.8% =·(0.008 x 300 x 500) = 1200 mm'

';Ben?ing moment at long side face Qf column is calculated as,
provide 4 bars of 22 min diameter at comers (A" ;, 1520 mm')
M =(IV~') =( 167 X
2
0.85') =60 kN.m
d) Ties

Greater of the diameters of g) Depth of Footing

i) (22/4) = 5.5 mm
i) From bending moment considerations, effective depth is computed as,
il) 6 mm
Adopt 6 mm diameter ties
Pitch of the ties is the least of the following:
i) Least bteral dimension = 300 mm il) Depth reqnired from shear stress considerations is very much larger
il) (16 x diameter of smallest longitudinal bar) = (16 x 22) = 352 rom and nearly double the value obtained from moment consideration.s.
iii) 300 mm
Hence assume an overall depth = D = 600,mm and effective depth = d =
Adopt 6 mm diameter ties at 300 mm centres. 55Omm. . "
 Working Stress Method ofDesign 487
Reinforced Concrete Design"

Rebiforcemcnts in footing a) Data

i) Longer direction Embankment height aboveground level = 4 m

Safe bearing capacity of soil = 200 kN/m'
Angle of repose = 300
A
"
=(~)=(
(J,jd
130 x 10' )=1134mm'
230xO.90x550
Density of soil = 18 kN/m'
Coefficient of friction between soil and concrete;:;;: 0.5
Adopt 20 mm diameter bars at 200 mm centres (A" = 1571 mm2) Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.

Ii) Shorter direction b) Permissiblestresses

A
"
=(~)=(
(J,Jd
60xlO'
230xO.90x534
)=539mm' U Cb == 7 N/mm
2 Q = 0.91'
U Sl = 230 N/mm2 j = 0.90
3 2
But minimum reinforcement;:;;: Asl,min == (0.0012 X 10 x 600)::; 720 mm /m m= 13
Adopt 12 mm diameter bars'at 150 mOl centres in the shorter direction
c) Dimensions of Retaining Wall
i) Check for Shear stresses
.. . p(I-Sin$]_200(1)'_
Mlmmum depth offoundaUon;:;;: 1:
1 +sin$ -18 3, -1.2
Shear force at a distance 'd' from the face of the column is c9mputed as
V=(167xO.7xl)= 116.9kN
", Provide depth offoundation = 1.2 m
'

Overall depth of wall =H =(4 + 1.2) = 5.2 m

T =(l:.)=(116.9XIO')=0.21'N/mm' Thickness of base slab = (H/12) = (5200/12) = 433 mm
, bd 1000 x 550
Adopt thickness of base slab = 450 mm
IOOA,,) =(100XI571)=028 (Height of stem = h = (5.2-0.45) = 4.75 m .'
( bd 1000 x 550 . Coefficient of active earth pressure is expressed by the relauon,
Refer Table-23 (IS: 456-2000) and read out the permissible shear stress as, .:.(; -Sln$] =(I-sin30'] = 0.333
\ C?- 1 +sinlj> 1 + sin 300
T, = 0.22 Nlmm' > T,

Hence. shear stresses are within safe permissible limits.

:. Width of heel slab =xh =H..jC/3;= 52~0.333/3 = 1.73 m
The reinforcement detaiJing in the column and footing ~s similar to that Width of base slab = B = 1.5 Xh = (1.5 xf.73)= 2.6 m
shown in the example under limit state design of columns and footings. Adopt width of base slab = B = 3 m
Width of toe slab;= (1/3) B = (1/3)3 = 1 m
15.5 DESIGN OF RETAINING WALLS Width of heel slab = 2 m
Fig. 15.1 shows the overall dimensions oO~e retaining wall.
Design a cantilever type retaining wall to retain an earth embankment 4 m
high above ground level. The density of earth is 18 kN/m' and its angle of d) Design of Stem
repose is 30·. The emb'lllkment is horizontal at its top. The sMe bearing
capacity of the soil is 200 kNlm' and the coefficient of friction between
soil and concrete is 0.5. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD
==
Height of stem h 4.75 m .
Maximum bending moment in stem at the base is given by the expreSSIOn,
bars.
 488 Reinforced Concrete Design 'Working Stress Metho~ of Design 489
I
I
j
M=(C.' 6"') '.V
.
where C
8
=[l-Sin~]=~
l+sin$ 3
Provide 20 mm diameter bars at 200 mm centres (A" 1571 mm')
Distribution reinforcement =(0.0012 x 1000 x 450) =)40 mm'lm
=
)' provide 10 mm diameter bars at 300 mm centres on both faces. '.
I 18X4,75')
= (3 X . 6 . = 107,17 kN,m
e) Stahility Computations

. Ji.1 107,17xlO'
----=346mm
The soil pressure distribution at base is computed by stability calculations.
Effective depth = d = " Qb = 0,91xlO' The.overall dimensions oflhe wall·are shown in Fig; 15.1.
The stability computations are compiled in Table-15A.
Adopt d = 400 mm and overall depth =D =450 mm Distance of point of appllcation of resultantforce from end 'a' is given by
Top width of stem = 200 mm
A =(.!'!-)=( 107,17x106 )_ , z =(~~) =(;~~::~) = 1.6 m,
" cr,jd 230xO,90x400 -1295 mm
Table 15.4 Stability calculations for one metre length of wall
+-+-200 Moment
- ~-0' /~. ." At" Loads .Magnllude of load DIstance from 'a'

I (m) (kN.m)

r
(kN)
23,80 1,85 39,27,
W, =(0.2 x 4.75><-25) 1.83 27.15
(0.5 x 0.25 x 4.75 x 25) 14,84
33.75 1.50 50.62
W2 = (3 x 0,45 x 25)
132.51 0.78 103.35
W3 = (1.55 x 4.75 x 18)
4m Moment of earth
W3 Pressure = (Ca wh3/6)
I
! h
G)('8X:75') . - - 107.06

r
.Il

, .

I-- Tolal .
-
204,90 'l:;M= 327A5
LW=

J.~N "
0,75m Eccentricity =e =(z - 0.5E) =[1.6-(0.5 x 3)] =0,1 m
I =(3/6) =0.5, Hence e < (816) 1_:1.-1

1'2m
J-
+- r
,f-l'Om,-fo'45m~I<-'-----'-. !'SSm -~,r-
0'45m

+
(816)
Since eccentricity is less than (816), no tension develops at base.
Maximum and I?inimum pr~ssures developed at base are computed as,
. =LW[I±6e]=~[1±(6XO.l)]kN/m'
P(max,mlll) B B.3 3'
d·r_--t,.c_ _-,b~':'-':'- ---iQ
Pmu = 82,00 kN/m'
I
1 . ... , ,
Iri'------- h Pm;, = 54.64 kN/m·
I 4,t3 54,64 kN/m' The maximum pressure developed is less lhan the S.B.C of soil = 200
j ·kN/m'.
Fig. 15.1 shows the pressure distribution at the base of the retaining wall,
... ,
•
82,0 kN/m'
}'rg:ISJ Forc·~ Acting on Cantilever Retaining Wall
o Design of Heel Slab
Moment computations for one-metre le.ngth·ofheelslab·are sh"W1LirtT'ibl".-1:5.5;
 "'490 ; Reinforced Concrete Design
Maximum bending moment in heel slab at 'b' = (116.18-71.28) = 44.90 kN.m
.
..
A _(~) _( 44.90 x 10' ) _ 538
s'- osJd - 230XO.90X400.- mm
'
h) Check for Sliding

Total horizontal earth pressure =(C.'

",...tit.g Stress Method ofDesign

~"i =Ox 18 x5~') = 8t.12 kN

491

I
I
!

Minimum reinforcement = (0.0012 x 450 x 1000) = 540 mm'/m I"!

Adopt 12 mm diameter bars at 200 mm centres (A" = 565 mm') Maximum possible frictional for« = "IV = (0.5 x 204.90) = 102,45 kN t'i
f-i-'
Table 15.5 Moment Computations in Heel Slab 'l')~.~S) t 26 I 5 \
Loads Magnitude of
load (kN)
Distance from 'b' Bending moment
(m) (kN.m)
.. Factor of safety against slidinO':! - - - ;::::. <.
~ " SU2
I, I

I
The wall is unsafe againsl sliding.
W3 =(1.55 x 4.75x18) 132,50 0.775 102.68
A shear key is to be designed ~ll:'" the stem to increase the' factor of
Serf weight of heel slab 17.43 0.775 13.50
(1.55 x 0.45 x 25) safety.
Total 116.18 'j
Deduct for upward pres.sure
(abitl)-= (54.64 x 1.55) 84.69 0.775 65.63
1) Design of Shear Key
r
Upward pressure (ghi) Let P = Intensity of passive pressure developed just in front of the shear n,J
0.516 5.65 p
(0.5 x 1.55 x 14.13) 10.95
key • ;d
Total deduction 71.28
This passive pressure intensity dep~?lhi$ upon the soil pressure I p ' just in it
front of shear key.
g) Design of Toe Slab'
Moment computations in toe slab for 1 m length is compiled in Table- I S·6
_
Pp' - Cp.p -l'
where Cr - t1_
+5in$)'=(-'-)=3
sin.p Ca
1'·1
: j

And P = 72.88 kN/m' (Refer Fig. 15.1) "I

Table 15.6 Moment computations in Toe Slab
Pp = (3 x 72.88) = 218.64 kN/m'
loads Magnitude of Distance from 'c' Moment about 'c~
(kN.m)
..
,If!
load (kN) (m)
I If a = depth of shear key ,
p ... '
Upward pressure (edit)
(72.88 xl)
Upward Pressure Ole)
72.88 0.50 36.44 Total passive force = P p = (pp. a) = (218.,64 x 0,45) = 98.38 kN
:. Factor of safety against sliding is computed as,
'I',,i
.', !
, !
,
I,'

0.67 3.05
(0.5 x 1 x9.12)
Total
4.56
39.49
,
F.S.aginstsliding= - IP
[I'W+p]~ = [102.45+98.38]
81.12"
4 15
=2.7>.
Deduct self weight of Toe slab
(1 x 0.45 x 25) 11.25 0.50 5.62
Hence, the retaining wall is safe against failure due to sliding.
Dead weIght of soil over Toe slab The reinforcement in the stem is extended up to the shear key.
(0.75 x 1 x 18 13.50 0.50 6.75
Total deduction 12.37
27.12 j) Cbeek for Sbear stress at jnnetion of Stem and Base slab
Maximum B.M in Toe slab
I

..
A -(~)-( 27.12xlO' )- 2 nm'
- 230xO.90x400 - 3 51
,,- a,j d
Net shear force = [1.5 LP _ WI = [(1.5 x 81.12) -102.45] =19.23 kN

, = (19.23 x 10') = 0.048 N/mm'

Minimum reinforcement = (0.0012 x 1000 x 450) = 540 mm'/m • 1000x400
Hence,! adopt 12 mm diameter bars at 200 mm centres as main reinforce·
ment a1nd also distribution steel.
IOOA,,) = (ti2())( t 571) = 0.39
( bd IOOOx400
 492 ' Reinforced Concrete Design Working Stress Method of Design 493

i
From Table-23 (IS: 456-2000), read out the permissible shear stress as (01 2700 tlYll000i

t
c
=0.25 N/mm:l> tv
Hence, shear stresses .are within safe permissible l.imits.
The details of reinforcements in the cantilever retaining wall is similar to
that shown in limit state method of design in chapter-I L

15.6 DESIGN OF STAIRCASE

" Design one of the flights of a doglegged staircase of a multi-storied build-

ing using the followin? data: I
'a) 'Data ..,j<- L =(0 + X + T) = 3700-----~,~
'Number of steps (Risers) in the Going ,= 10
Tread (1)= 300 mm, Rise (R) = 150 mm
Width oflanding slab on either side = llll '

~.~::';,:.C'__~_/_m_2_ 1-
Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.

b) Permissible Stresses
. ._,_,_,_,_,,_c_.:_._" "
,
i _ a cb 7N/ mm:l
;:; Q = 0.91 Fig. 15.2 DimensIons and Loading on Stair Case Flight
alit = 230 N/mm:l j = 0.90
m= 13 Load of steps/m length = [0.56 x (1000/300)] = L86 leN/m
Weights of finishes = 0.60 leN/m
c) Effective span ... Total dead load = (4.62 + L86 + 0.60) = 7.08 leN/m
Live load (Liable for over crowding) = 5.00 kN/m
According to IS: 456-2000 code Fig,17, Total design working load = W = 12.08 leN/m
Effective span = L = (0 + X + 1') ,
= =
0= Going = Number oftreads = (9)<-.300)= 2700 JnII1 and X Y 0.5 m ,
e) Bending Moments and Shear Force.;
/
+
... 'Effective span = L = (2.7 4- 0.5 0':5) = 3.7 m ,
~ig. 15.2 shows the flight ofstliircase." " ." '," M = (0.125 W L') = (0.125 x 12.08 x 3.7') = 20.67 leN.1\1 •
Assume thickness ofwaist slab based on spatildepth ratio of 20: V = (0.5 w L) = (0.5 x 12.08 x 3.7) = 22.35 leN

•
Depth= (,pan)
20 = (3700)
20 ='185 mm
' l) Check for effective depth

Adopt overall ,depth = D = 185 mm and effective depth = d = 160 mm 20.67 x 10' = 151.8 mm
0.91 x 10'
d) Loads • Effective depthpiovided = d = 160 mm (Hence, safe)
, Selfweight of w~ist slab (oil slope) = WI = (0.185 x I x 25) = 4.62 leN/m
Self weight of one step = (0,5 x 0;15 x 0,3 x 25) = 0.56 leN/m,
 Reinforced Conct:e~e,Design Working Stress Method'o!Design 495'

g) Reinforcements (i) Square

(ii) Rectangular
(iii) Circular
_ _M_)_ ( 20.67 X10') - 620 mmm 'I
A" - ( (J,J d - 230'X 0.90 x 160 - Conical shaped tanks are also adopted due to aesthetic considerations
but the storage capacity of these tanks are comparatively smaller than other
Pro~ide 12 mm diameter bars at 180 mm centres (A" 628 mm')
= types.
= =
Distribution reinforcement (0.0012 x 1000 x 185) 222 mm'lm E1e~ated water tanks of large capacity are circular in shape or of Intz I
Use 8 mm diameter bars at 200 mm centres (A" = 251 mm') ,type. CIrcular tanks are generally preferred to other shapes since the walls' L
ofsu~hta.nks ~e ~ubjected to hoop tension and the whole cross' section is
h) Check fr- Shear stress

= (~) =(22.35 x 10') = 0.139 Nlmm'

effechve m reslstmg the tensile forces, leading to efficient utilization of
matenal and reduction of costs. '",

L
' l
t, bd 1000 Xt60 ,G
100A")=( tooX628)=039
( bd 1000 X160 .
Refer Tabl<>-23 (IS: 456-2000) and read ont the permissible shear stress as
k.~, =(1.. 23 x 0.25) =0.30 Nlmm' >~, L

Hence, shear stresses are within safe permissible limits.

The reinforcement details are similar to that shown in the example 12k (0) Tank' Ruling "nthe Ground lb) 'Underground' Tank
presented under limit state design of stairs in chapter-12. .
HI'HI

15.7 DESIGN OF WATER TANKS

15.7.1 Introduction

Reinforced concrete water tanks are widely used to store large quantities of
water in urban and rural water supply· schemes. Water tightness is an
important criterion in water tanks and to achieve th,is, richer concrete
mixes of grades M-20 to M-30 are commonly used in·the construction of
water tanks. High quality concrete, in addition to providing water tight-
ness, also has higher resistance to tensile stresses developed in the tank
walls.There are three main types of reinforced concrete water tanks which
are grouped as :\\
a) Tanks resting on ground
b) Underground tanks .. G L
",,", ' il.·.II'
I';

il:'1;
c) Elevated water tanks. II,
(e) Elevated Waler Tank I
Fig. 15.3 shows the typical details of various types of water tanks.
The most common shapes of tanks are Flg.IS.3 TyP"S of Water Tanks III:,
I, :l

!, 'I'.\
 496 Reinforced Concrete Design Working Stress Method of Design 497
15.7.2 Permissible Stresses and Reinforcement Details not less than 0.15 percent of the concrete section.
The minimum cover to all reinforcement should be not less th~~ 25 m
a) Permissible Stresses or the diameter of the·bar whichever is,greater. ' m

The permissible stresses in water retaining structures like tanks. are speci-
fied in the Indian Standard Code IS: 3370-1965 101 • In water tanks, it is
essential to ensure proper crack control which is achieved by reducing the
permissible tensile stresses both in concrete and steel reinforcement.
The permissible stresses in concrete and steel in calculations relating to
resistance to cracking in water retaining structures are compiled in Tables-
15.7 and 15.8 respectiv~ly.
'15.7.3
• t , - _ Junctions of Tank wall and Base Slab
, The joint between the walls of the tank and floor slab may be anyone of
·the following three types as showo in Fig. 15.4.
Tank wall

Table 15.7 Permissible Concrete Stresses In calculations relating to Resistance to

Cracking in Water retaining Structures (IS: 3370-Part-II-196S) Sealing compound
Neoprene or
rubber pad
Grade of Concreto ,

Base slab (0) Flexible Base

Stress (Nfmm~ M·15 M·20 M·25 M·30 M·35 M·40
PVC
Direct Tension 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.6 1.7 water slop
Bending Tension 1.5 1.7 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4

Table 15.8 Permissible Stresses in Steel reinforcement rorStrength CalculatIons in

Water retaining Structures ([S: 3370-Part-n-196S) Tank wall

Stress Plain Mild Steel HYSD

(N/mm2 ) bars bars ealing compound
Tensile stresses In members 115 150
Under direct tension Base slab
(b) Hinged Base
Tensile stresses In members
/ In BendIng
a) On liquid retaining face .of members 115 150
b) On face away from liquId for members less 115 150
than 225 mm thick
c) On face away from llquld for members 225 125 190
mm or more In thIckness
d) Compressive stresses In columns subjected 125 175 Tank wall
to direct load

Base slab

b) Reinforcement Details
(e) Fixed Base
Minimum area of steel is 0.3 percent of gross area of section up to 100 mm
tbick, reduced to 0.2 percent in sections up to 450 mrn thick. For sections
above 225 mm tbick, provide two layers of reinforcement. Tbe percenfage
of reinforcement in base or floor slab resting directly on ground must be Fig. 15.4 Junctlons·ofTank Wall and Base Slab

.Flexible or Free base b) Hinged'base c) Fixed base

 498 Reinforced Cpllcrele Design" Working Slress Melhod ofDesign "499 f
I

The type of junction between the tank walls and base slab influences >' :gL{)C\jL{)«)~OOCIJf'-.<Ogj~oO)
r
the hoop tcnsion and bending moments developed in the tank walls. ~ x C'JR!g~~ regj~:;!:.,....,...8r:>

.
q r;qqqqq9qqqqqqq
In the case of free or flexible base between tank wall and base slab, the
walls are free to slide and expand and the hoop tension developed in the ~.... I I I t I I r J I ! I I I

~ ~:: ~ng ~~ ffl ~ gj~:g"'" 5

c,ircular walls can be calculated easily due to the hydrostatic pressure,
However for hinged and fixed bases, the coefficients for moments and ring
'" u
r:'!~
'"-.,.
'019
. x
'0"
OJ3MC\J.,....,...oooooo8o
q .qqqqqqqqqqqq
I I I • J r I I I I I I + +

tension are compiled in Tables-15.9 to 15.12 as recommended in IS:

3370(Part-4). These coefficients are expressed as a function of the non
_
0
~
;;;,s
.
•
0
O>'<;tco.,... .........
x ~gj~8~~8~~~N~NO
C?COO>C)«l<OMO)

dimensional parameter (H'/Di),

Where H = height of water tank
-.~'j
~i 0 ~ c;. ~ J' (~
'"
x (~f8gjffl~-~~mU;gsre~~~
")80000 0000000
.,: ~~~~~~~
D = diameter-of tank
I = thickness of the tank wall
£~ 0": ( - J' ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
R a
~n~~::~~~n;;f::~~ree~~~
x C")MO~-<O(,,)
"''il
~ .S .§ X ..... 0 0 ........ 0 0 8 0 0 0 8 ° 0
0q n~~§~
.
15.7.4 Ring Tension and Bending Moments in Cylindrical Tank Walls
i!l6I
'0" ~~~~~~~+~~~+~~
Q.
I IJI r I
Q, 'lij 1;;
{:.
In cylindrical tanks subjected to hydrostatic pressure, the walls of the tank
~"' .•
> i1 ~g~(\j~sn8~~~~85o
~
,~ x «lMOJLOC") ....
develop hoop tension and bending moments depending upon the following
~~ IE "1 ~ ~ q q q ~~ ~ ~._~ ~~ ~ ~ X
0.........8 000
0000
0 I + + + + + + + + + + + I
ill ~ ,. ~(~" 8
~~ '"
factors.
I) Type of fixity between tank wall and base slab
0
()
t;g~t3m;:::/'-.ro~tO~~8~
x 00~-88;g08§8008
i
"'~ 1ij
2) Diameter of the tank
0 ~ ~ ~ ~ .,: + ~ ~+ .,: .,: ~
It)''''/'-.ll)r.o~

3) Thickness of the wall

1""
'.
~~
II: '" q " i1 0x "8888°8
qqqq~q
§.0. . '"
"'- ~ '"
4) Elastic constants of the wall material ..... ........ ++++++
.. X
N ~f::lO«l""CO<OCON
''''<O~C\I ..... 0800
~'" X
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~-~ ,~
.,.ll'~
The analysis is generally based on Timoshenko's general theory'of "l ()

cylindrical shells'02 with the valid assumption that the thickness of the tank
0 VN(W)lO ..... g
x 008
'C ~ , 80 8
wall is small in relation to the diameter. The bending moments M w and the
L" '8
'<;f'/'-.~"""~VLOCOM""'8""oO
8 "' ~ ~ ~ . .,: ~ q
hoop tension Nd • developed in the tank walls. At a distance 'x' from the
x
0"!
.... M
~~q ,~~~~q~~~~~
C\I ..... 0 0 0 0 0
'"
base of the tank (Refer Fig. 15.5) are expressed as, .; ~
() + + + .+ + + + + + + ,
g88 x lOt\i/'-.C\I0§:
5= U) ..... C\I ..... 0 CD 'M C\I .... 0 0
0 .......... 000

n ~~ ~ ~~~ ~.~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~888

x
(~}e-j\< {M,~ (cosllx +sinllx) +N,sin~J
Mw =
:;;~
~

0 '" + +. + + ' ,

Nd =(D~:K) e-jl, {M,~ (cosllx -sinllx) + N,cosllx} ''""

~

:il
~c:.qC\jCC!qqqqqqqqqq
qqqqqq
?;l~gj~~m
'" 1<5
OO .......... NMVLO<O«lONV<O ...................
~
Where D = diameter of the tank
I= thickness of the tank wall
E = modulus of elasticity of material of the tank wall
The parametric constants Pand K are expressed by the relation, ! ..

13=
'/,
I,
I"
1
\'"
~:.
l'
 >:1=.,--------
..==""::
~.-~"',~,',~

Table 15.10 Ring Tension Cylindrical Walls-Fixed B1'Se Free at Top (IS:3370-Part IV) «Table-9 oflS:3370.-l'art-1V)
Ring tension Nd '; (Coefficient) (wHR) kNIm U>
o
o
H' Coefficients, at point
Vr
- 0.0 H '0.1 H 0.2H 0.3H 0.4H 0.5H 0.6H 0.7H 0.8 H 0.9H '"
"
~
0.4
0.8
+0.149 +0.134 +0.120
+0.263 +0.239 +0.215
+0.101
+0.190
+0.082 +0.066
';:0.160 +0.130
+0:049 +0..029
+0.096" +0.063
+0.014 +0.004
+0.034 +0.010
'["
1.2 +0.263 +0.271 +0.254 +0.234 +0.209 +0.180 +0.142 +0.099 0.054 +0.016
1.6 +0.265 +0.268 +0.268 +0.~66 +0.250 +0.226 +0.185 +0.134 +0.075 +0:023 ~
~
2.0 +0.234 +0.251 +0.273 +0.265 +0.285 +0.274 +0.232 +0.172 +0.104 +0.031
3.0 +0.134 +0.203 +0.267 +0.322 +0.357 +0.362 +0.330 +0.262 +0.157 +0.052
4.0 +0.067 0.164 +0.256 +0.339 0.403 +0.429 +0.409;' +0.334 +0.210 +0;073
5.0 +0.025 +0.137 +0.245 +0.34.6 +0.428 :"0.477 :"0.469 +0.398 +0.259 +0.092 ~
0;'
6.0 +0-018 +0.119 +0.234 +0.344 +0.441 +0.504 +0.514 +0.447 +0.301 +0.112
8.0 -0.011 +0.104 +0.218 +0.335 0.443 +0.534 +0.575 .+0.530 +0.381 +0.151 "
10.0 -0.011 +0.098 +0.208 +0.323 +0.437 +0.542 +0.608 +0.589 +0.440 +0.179
12.0 -0.005 +0.097 +0.202 .0.31;2 +0.429 0.543 +0.628 +0.633 +0.494 +0.211
14.0 -0.002 +0.098 +0.200 +0.306 +0.420 +0.539 +0.639 +0.666 +0.541 +0.241
16.0 -0.000 +0.099 +0.199 +0.304 +0.412 +0.531 +0.641 +0.687' +0.582 '+0.265

Coefficients at point
.75H .80H .85H .90H .95H
20.0 +0.716 +0.654, +0.520 +0.325 +0.115
24.0 +0.746 +0.702 +0.577 +0.372 +0.137
32.0 +0.782 +0.768 +0.663 +0.459 +0.182
40.0 +0.800 ' +0.805 +0.731 +0.530 +0.217
48.0 +0.791 +0.828 +0.785 .+0.593 +0.254
56.0, . +0.763 +0.838 +0.824 +0.536 +0.285

.-;:,;:;,;,.d;~""ii.~~,:,'<:::·~,", ,;, '.:''': :',~-'

::~{~:- '"
Table 15.11 Moments in Cylindrical WaIls-Hinged Base Free at 'fop (IS: 3370-Part IV) (Table-130fIS:3370·
Part-IV) Moment M. =(Coefficient) x (wH 3) kN 'ni/m Positive sign iodi.cates tension at the outside

H' Coefficients at point

Dr
0.1 H 0.2H 0.3H . 0.4 H 0.5 H 0.6H 0.7H 0.8 H 0.9 H 1.0 H
0.4 +.0020 +.0072 +.0151 +.0230 +.0301 +.0348 +.0357 +.0312 +.0197 0
0.8 +.0019 +.0064 +.0133 +.0207 +.0271 +.0319 +0.329 .0292 +.0187 0
t.2 +.0016 +.0058 +.0111 +.O·l77 +.0237 +.0280 +.0296 +.0263 +.0187 0
1.6 +.0012 +.0044 +.0091 +.0145 +.0195 +.0236 +.0255 +.0232 +.0171 0
2.0 +.0006 +.0033 +.0073 +.0114 +.0158 +.0199 +.0219 +.0205 +.0155 0
3.0 +.0004 +.0018 +.0040 +.0063 +.0092 +.0127 +.0152 +.0153 +.0145 0
4.0 +.0001 +.0007 +.0016 +.0033 +.0057 +.0083 +.0109 +.0118 +.0111 0
5.0 .0000 +.0001 +.0006 +.0016 +.0034 +.0057 +.0080 +.0094 +.0092 0
6.0 .0000 .0000 +.0002 .0000 +.0019 +.0039 +.0062 +.0078 +.0078 0
8.0 .0000 .0001 -.0002 .0000 +.0007 +.0020 +.0038 +.0057 +.0068 0 t
10.0
12.0
.0000
.0000
.0000 -.0002
.0000 -.0001
-.0001
_ .0002
+.0002 +.0011 +.0025 +.0043 +0054
.0000 +.0005 +.0017 +.0032 +.0045
0
0
~
""
~
14.0 .0000 .0000 .0000 -.0001 .0001 .0000 +.0012 +.0026 +.0039 0
16.0 .0000 .0000 .0000 -.0001 -.0002 -.0004 +.0008 +.0022 +.0033 0
+.0029 0 ''""''
~
~
Coefficients at point
"'-
~
.75H .80 H .85H .90H .95H ti
20.0 +.0008 +.0014 +.0020 .0024 +.0020 "'"'
;;'
24.0 +.0005 +.0010 +.0015 +.0020 +.0017 :::
32.0 .0000 +.0005 +.0009 +.0014 +.0013
40.0 .0000 +.0003 +.0006 +.0011 +.0011 U>
0
48.0 .0000. +.0001 +.0004 +1>008 +.0010 ~

56.0 .0000 .0000 +.0003 . +.0007 +.0008

 Working Stress Method of Design 503
502 .Reinforced Concrete Design

Thickness
of wall It)
1 H

r
W"t"'1
1 Fig.IS.S Analysis of Circular Cylindrical Tank

Et'
K~ ( 12(1-V~)
J
1
.s

~
2-
1ii Where V == Poisson's ratio of wall material and Mo and No are the moment
and sheatc acting at the base of the tank with their values depending upon

,\
1
1

1t
j
i
o
the pressure distribution and the conditions of fixity at the base. A dia-
grammatic representation of the .variation of bending moments and hoop
tension in the walls of the tank for different types of bases is shown in Fig.

r4
,!J1"1
15.6.
• Fixed base
" I
I
I
, ""~~
1 Sliding
1 base (AI .0·5)
j
H
j

• j :z:
o
VMO..-Ll)V,...CO .... l.OCONON
t;;:~~~o,..... .... o.-.-OOOO
' . . . ~ooooooooo
1 I
o ~~~~oo+·odcicicicidd
+ + j. I I I I +
I~

1
VCONCDOOOOOOOOOO
+ WH--+ Sliding Tensl'on -0\4- 'Tension
j dd....:.,..:Nc?'<iLricDo:i~~i~ No

Tank Wall Fluid

base ,u .0·5
Hoop TensIon
outside (+) inside (-)

Vertical Bending Moment

I
, I Pressure \'
1 Fig. 15.6 Hoop Tension and Bending Moments in Cylindrical Tank Walls
1
i
, The hoop tension is maximum at base in the case of tanks with sliding or
1
" free base while the bending moment is maximum for tanks with a fixed

H
11 j
504 Reinforced Concrete Design Working Stress Method of Design 505

I
base. In the case of tank walls resting on neoprene or rubber pads, a com-
paratively smaller magnitude of bending moments are generated due to the tt<-j- - - D ------tttt
radial frictional force developed at the base junction. Investigations by
Crom JU3 , indicates that the base shear can be estimated for a maximum H==:==:=~_:::::h O2
'
coefficient of friction 'f" of 0.5, which is not likely to be exceeded. Tan~~ - -
wall ......
The maximum bending moment developed in the tank wall due to a 4m
base shear force No has a value of 0.247 No (Ri, where 'R' is the internal
radius of the tank and 't' is the thickness of the tank wall. The maximum
moment generally develops at approximately one-fifth the height of the
wall under pressure, measured from the base. The design moments and
"""-Bose slob
1
hoop tension in cylindrical walls can be computed by using the coefficients
104
compiled in Tahles-15.9 to 15.12 recommended in IS: 3370 • The design Fig. 15.7 Circular Water Tank
coefficients are expressed" as a function of the non-dimensional parameter 3
(H'/Dt), where' H' is the depth of water stored. The coefficients are tahu- nD' ) _(5000006X 10 )
-x4 -
l~ted for various points froll'. O.IH to H. ( 4 10

15.7.5 Design Example of Circular Tank with Freebase Solving, the diameter of the tank = D = 12.6 m " "L

Design an R.C.C. circular water ta~k resting on the ground with a flexible d) Design of Spherical Dome
L, ,1;1
hase and a spherical dome for storing 500 000 liters of water. The depth of
storage is to be 4 m. Freeboard = 200 mm. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Diametei' of dome at base:::; 12.6 m
Central risc =(1/5) Diameter = (1/5)(12.6) =2.5 m
Fe-415 HYSD bars. Permissible stresses should comply with the values
recommended in IS: 3370 and IS: 456-2000 codes: Sketch the details of Let R = radius of the dome
Referring to Fig. 15.8, we have the relation,
reinforcements in the dome, tank walls, and the floor slab.
(II _ 2.5)' =(R' - 6.3')
a) Data Solving, R = 9.2 m

Capacity of circular tank = 500,000 litres

Depth of water storage = 4 m -
Semi-central angle = e = 43.2 degrees

=J
1
D= 12·6 m (Diameter)
Free board = 200 mm
Materials: M-20 grade concrete and FeAI5 HYSD bars. r=2·5m
(Rise)
,." ...
b) Permissible Stresses

au = 1.2 N/mm1 (for tank walls)

1
R =9·2 m
(Radius)
I
= 2.8 N/mm (for dome ring beam) . ,43'2'
cree = 5 N/mm 1 2
cr.l = 150 N/mm
m = 13
Fig. 15.8 Details of Dome of Circular Water Tank
c) Dimensions of Tank
Let D = diameter;of the ciicular tank (Refer Fig. 15:'7)
 ',I
j',

il~t'(r""·"506
"
Working Stress Method (~( Design 507
. Rein/orced Concrete Design
"'\\,i
i~;
provide 4 bars of 16 mm diameter (A" = 804 mm')

I
,.--.,.,.,!
e
Hence.sin = 0.6847 Let Ac = cross sectional area of ring beam. .....
.. '

cos e = 0.7289 Allowing a tensile stress of 2.8 N/mm 2 in concrete we h:\\,(' th~ relation.
. . I.'I
fc·
,.
L
Assume the thickness of dome = f :::; 100 mm
F,
[ A+(m -1)A"
]=[ IlOxlO'
A,+(I3-1)8Q-l
]=,~
_.
ill.
1

,,
I i) Loads
Solving A, = 29638 mm'
I Self weight of domc = (0.1 x 25) = 2.5 kN/m' Adopt a ring beam of size 200 mm by 200 mm with 4 I'ars of 16 mm
l Live load and Finishes = 2.0 diameter as hoop reinforcement and stirrups of 6 mm di:.lIlle(CI' at 150 mOl
I
= =
Total load w 4.5 kN/m' centres.
,,,,J,
I ii) Stresses in Dome e) Reinforcements in Tank Walls
I
,
I

I Meridional thrust = TJ :::: (~)

l+cose
= ( 4,5 x ~) = 23.94 kNlm
1+0.7289
2
Maximum hoop tension '= (0.5.wHD) =(0.5 x 10 x 4.2 x 12.6)
1 = 264.6 kN
1 3

~
. stress = (23.94 X 10 ) :::: 0.2394 N/mm" < 5N/mm Tension reinforcement per metre height of tank wall is computed as,
Men·d·1
JOlla compressive
1000 x 100 .
I A = (264.6 x 10') = 764'
I S! 150;' 1 mm
Hoop stress :::: IV R [cos e I ]
1 (l +cosS)
1 Using 12 mm diameter bars on both faces '
-,""

~n, (4.5 x 9.2) [ 0.7289- 1.7289

=-0.1--) 1 ] =62.1 kN/m'. = 0.0621 N/mm'<5N1mm'
. = (1000XI13X2)
Spacmg . = 128 mm
1764
W!f11
,
I
Hence, the stresses are within safe permissible limits.
Provide 12 mm diameter bars at 120 mm centres at the base section on
I
Iii) Reinforcements in Dome either face of the wall.
rn-'=1
.,,
I
Since the stresses are very low, nominal reinforcement of 0.3 percent of f) Thickness of Tank Wall
I the'gross cross sectional area is provided.
1 =
If I thickness of tank wall. from cracking considerations we havc the
I
I
A" =(0.003 x 1000 x 100) =300 mm' relation,
11
Spacing of 8 mm diameter bars = [(1000 x 50)/300] = 166 mm
Provide 8 mm diameter bars at 150 rum centres both meridionally and cir-
O.5WHD.] _[. 264.6x 10' ]_ - I2
1 [ 10001+(m-l)A" - 10001+(13-1)1764 _lJ,,- .
1 cumferentiallY.
1 Solving we have. I = 199.3 mm
!, Iv) Ring Beam Provide 200 mm thick wall

,I. Horizontal component of thrust = T, cos e = (23.94 x 0.7289) = 17.45 g) Curtailment of Reinforcement in Tank Walls
kN/m .
Hoop tension in ring beam = F, = [(17.45 x 12.6)12J = 110 kN Minimum reinforcement 'at the top of tank wall ::= 0.3 percent of cross sec-
.• A" = [(11 0 x 1000)1150 = 734 mm' tional area.
 Working Stress Method of Design 509
508 Reinforced Concrete Design
Provide 8 mm diameter bars at 200 mm centres in both directions at the to
ASI
= (0.3 x 1000 x 200) = 600
100 mm
' and bottom faces of the tank floor slab. The details of reinforcements in th~
dome, tank walls and floor slab are shown in Fig. 15.9.
Spacing of 10 mm diameter hoops on both faces is computed as,
. (I000 X 79X2) ,
Sp,acing of bars:::: 600 :::: 263mm
250 x 250
Provide 10 mm diameter bars at 250 mm centres on both faces for a height Ring beam #8-150IMfridiOnf Oond
,ircuterenl all
of I m from the top of tank. "4-20 Tank
wall
Area of reinforcement required at mid height (2 m below top) is given -'>-l'tjf'-r-"::::!~"p;;:::12'6m
-I I ' TL 1". 10)
~
by

=(0.5150'
WHD) =(0.5 x lOx2x 12.6x 10') = 882 '
_t .+
1m 10-250 (hooPsr=---
f-
1m .#12-250 (hoops) 200 Neoprene or
A" 150 mm

Spacings of 12 mm diameter bars are given by the ralation,

Spacing of bars ~ (
1000 X 113X2)
882 =256mm
t
2-2 m
"'lO~250 (vfrticall .J.- I-,_"_"_or_
P
_'d
Detail at A
,-_...-

. Provide 12 mm diameter bars at 250 mm centres on both faces.

Distribution and temperature reinforcement is provided in the vertical
direction.
~;~ii~~~20~o~m~m~lh~;C~k~W~.~"~~~
A Lay.r of f,lt ;8·200
'tiso eM-2j) grad. eoner.te)
+75 (M-10 grad. coner.t.)

Area of vertical reinforcement = 0.3 percent =(0.003 x 1000 x 200) =600 Sectional Elevation
mm'
Spacings of 10 mm diameter bars on both faces is computed as, 6-3 m

. (IOOOX78.5X2)
Spacing of bars = 600 = 261mm Top doom r.infofc.m.nls·
Y''---'''''l-#8~150 (M.ridional and
Provide 10 mm diameter bars at 250 mm centres on both faces in the ver- circumf.n·ntiall
tical direction.

Tank floor slob

h) Design of Tank Floor Slab /H-f-H--+.+:::t-
"'Si-j-j-l-l~-1~";J8-200 clc (both lacts
;\. and bOth -ways)

Provide nominal thickness of 150 mm for the base slab over a layer of
M-10 lean concrete of75 mm thick. Reinforcement is provided in the form
of a mat with bars in the mutually perpendicular directions.
Area of reinforcement =0.3 percent = (0.003 x 150 x 1000) =450 mm' in Plan
each direction.
Provide half tlie reinforcement near each face. Fig. 15.9 Reinforcement Details in Circular Water Tank
Hence, A" = (0.5 x 450) = 225 mm'
IOOOXSO)
Spacing of 8 mm diameter bars :::: ( . 225 :::: 220>mm
 15;7.6. Design of Rectangular Tanks
and A", =[ ;J
Rectangular tanks are frequently used for storage of water of small capaci-
ties due to ease of construction where form work costs of circular tanks is
pr~hibitive. The tank walls are subjected to llloments and c1i!.ect tension
due to ,bydrostatic pressu~. The ~act analysis is ~ather complex being
three dimensional in nature and hence rectangular tanks are designed by
approximate methods.
TH

I
'\T<>J"
I

I
The following parameters are used in the design of tanks.
Longerside of tank wall (length) = L
Shorter side of tank waH (Breadth) = B 1 L- -t

I
I
I
I
I
I
Height of tank wall = H
The moments developed in the tank walls depends upon the ratio (UB).

a) Tanks of Ratio (LIB) < 2

t ~2 fr~::.;:=;;=~;::;:::;l- W_IH_;h_1B

t B psw(H-hl

~~i For rectangular tanks in which the ratio of length to breadth is less than 2 Ii
I
I
I
as shown in Fig. 15.10, the tank walls are designed as·continuous frame
subjected to water pressure varying from zero at top to maximum at (HI4)
or 1 ill whichever is more.
Lw(H-hll
-,-
l~~~~~~~~~~~w(H-hIB
-2-
I
Ii':
I For the bottom portion (H/4) or I m, the bending is in the vertical plane
I i
and this portion is designed as a cantilever. The corners are designed for':
'it "'il
the maximum moment obtained after moment distribution with the inten-·,
i
sity of pressure p = w (H-h). In the absence of moment distribution, the·
T
I
bending moments may be computed by the following approximate . II
expressions.

Bending moment at centre of span =( Pl~') and (~~') respectively producing len- Fig. 15.10 Forces in Walls of Rectangular Tanks 1
sian on the outer face. b) Tanks of Rado (LIB) > 2
II
Bending moment at centre of span = (Pl~') and (Pl~') respectively producing ten- In this case, the long walls are assumed to bend vertical~y and hence
designed as cantilevers. Short walls are assumed to bend honzontallysup-
sion on water face. ported by long walls above (H/4) or I m from the bottom of the tank.
"Iti addition to the bending moments, the tank walls are subjected to direct
tension computed using the following expressions. 3
Direct tension in iong walls = TL = [w(H - h)B/2]
T
Bending moment for long walls =( WH )
Direct tension in short walls = T a = [w(H - h)Ll2] . [W(H -hlB']
Design moment = (M-Tx) Bending moment for short walls (above 1 m from base) = 16 '
Where x = distance of steel reinforcement from the centre of section.
The total steel area ASI = (As!1 + A s12) is computed as that required for bend-
ing moment and direct tension using the following expressions.
w H.h') (WH x
Maximum cantilever moment for short wall;:: (' - '6- or -6-,-
I)
 512 Reillfo1'ced Concrete Design

I whicheverlis greater.
Working Stress Method of Design 513

[']
,i
I' . In addition to bending moment, short walls and long walls are subjected to
direct tension.

15.7.2 Design Example

m

~
1\.
wu\
H

A rectangular R.C.C water· tank with an open top is required to store r --, "j'--250-+
80.0PO liters of water. The inside dimensions of the tank may be taken as 6 f25t 125 f
m by 4 m. The tank rests on walls on all the four sides. Design the side (a) Tank Dimensions
o
walls of the tank using M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
o
6m
a) Data o
Volume of tank = 80.000 litres +75 -34 o
.34 -75
Size of tank = 6 m by 4 m +25 .16 -16 -25
Free board = 150 mm
Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars
.59 -59 kN·m +59 -59
"225~
(b) Moment Distribution (c) Moments in Cross Section

b) Permissible Stresses -f50-01'-1- - - 6 m ,~250t

-.I<-
2 .j

r
O'cb :::: 7 N/mm Q = 1.20 250
k.lIl
a SI ::: 150 N/mm2 j = 0.86
m= 13 420-140

c) Dimensions of Tank 4m '-

1>-#20-280

Referring to Fig. 15.11 (a)

80000 x 103J
Height of water = ( 600x400 =335 em
1
250
-./'-
[trlleal bars # 8-130
(all round bath facos)
,.. --;

Height of tank walls = H = (335 + 15) = 350 em = 3.5 m (d) Reinforcements in Tank- WaH.s
Fig.IS.II Design of Rectangular Tank (UB < 2)
L=6 m and B=4 m ... Ratio (UB) = (6/4) = 1.2 < 2
Hence walls are designed as continuous slab subjected to water pressure i) Long walls:
. above (H/4) or 1 m from bottom, whichever is greater.
2
(H -h)= (3.5-1) =2.5 m (PL'J =(25 x6 i = 75 kN.m

At section XX, the intensity of pressure = p = w (H - h) = 10(2.5) = 25

12 17 )
2
f
kN/m 2 (p~2J =( 25; 6 ) = 112.5 kN.m
~ ,.:j
Ii) Short walls • -:J ;~
d) Moments in Sidewalls
,
The moments in sidewalls is determined by moment distribution.
. I' •(~~2J =(251~42J= 34kN.m
Fixed end moments:
 Working Stress Mer/lOd ofDesign 515
514 Reirif'0fced Concretepe~i8~"
A".m'" = 0.3 percent =, (0.003 x 1000 x 250) = 750 mm'
(P:')=( 25;4') =50kN.m Steel on each face = (0.5 x 750) = 375 mm'
1000 x 50)
Moment distribution is shown in Fig. 15.1 I(b) Spacing of 8 mm diameter bars =( 375 = 130 mm
Moment at snpport = 59 kN.m
Adopt 8 mm diameter bars at 130 mm centres on both faces as shown in
Moment at centre (Long walls) = (112 - 59) = 53 kN.m
Moment at centre (Short walls) = (50 - 59) = -9 kN.m Fig. 15.11 (d).

15.7.3 Design Example

e) Design of Long and Short walls
n:·'"'·'''
Design the sidewalls of a rectangular reinforced concrete water tank of
Maximum moment::; 59 leN.ill dimensions 6 m by 2 m and having a maximnm dcpth of 2.5 m, nsing M-20
59x 10' _ 222 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
d= 1.2 x 10)- mm
a) Data
Adopt effective depth = d = 225 mm and overall depth = D = 250 mm
Direct tension in long wall = Tc = [(25 x 4)/2] = 50 kN Size of tank = 6 m by 2 m
Direct tension in short wall = T B = [(25 x 6)12] = 75 kN \ Length = L = 6 m and breadth = B = 2 m
Depth of tank = H = 2.5 m
AS1 (Long wall comers) =[:~~~ ]+[~J Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars

Referring to Fig. 15.II(c), b) Permissible Stresses

A =[(59X 1O')-(50x IO'x 100)] +[50X 10'] = 2194 m '
Q =1.20
i-Vii·
" 150xO.86x225 ISO m <r,b = 7 N/mm'
Provide 20 mm diameter bars at 140 mm centres (A" = 2244 mm'/m) at,
<r" = 150 N/mm' j =0.86
comers.
Reinforcement at centre of span (Long walls) is compnted as, c) Design of Long walls
A =[(53 x 10')_ (SOx 10')] +[50X 10'] = 1987 mm' L=6m and B=2m
.. 150xO.86x225 150 = =
(Ratio (UB) (612) 3 > 2
Provide 20 mm diameter bars at 140 mm centres (A" = 2244 mm') Long walls are designed as vertical cantilevers and short wall as a slab
For sl10rt walls, the moment being small, provide 50 percent of the bars spanning horizontally between long walls.
at corn~rs i.e. 20 mm diameter bars at 280 mm centres at centre of span. Maximum bending'moment at base of long wall is computed as.

l) Reinforcement for Cantilever moment L W:') =( IOX62,5')= 26.o4'c~,m

M =(
(For 1 m height from boltom)

Cantilever moment =(3.5 x 10 x 0.5 x 0.333) =5.833 kN.m

.. A =( 5.833xlO' )=20Imm' Adopt effective depth = d = 150 mm and overall "")t.h = D = 180 mm
I .. 150XO.86x225
j
I
'I' Minimum reinforcement in the vertical direction is computed as,
I
 Working Stress Method of Design 517
JI 516 Reinforced Concrete Design
:'1 Effective depth using 10 mm diameter bars = (180 - 40) = 140 mm
,ii A =(26.04XIO')=1340mm'
A _( 4.2XIO')_ ,
·1 ,_ SI 1.20 x 10
3
.
,,- 150xO.86x140 -232mm
I
provide 16 mm diameter bars at ISO mm centres (A" = 1341 mm') at the
bottom of the tank. Spacing increased to 170 mm for the top I m portion of Minimum reinforcement =0.3% =(0.003 x 180 x 1000) = 540 mm'
\ Provide 10 rom diameter bars at 280 rom centres in the vertical direct
the tank. on both face's.
Intensity of pressure 1 rn above the base is computed as The details of [;,inforcements in the tank walls are shown in Fig. 15.12.
p = w (H - h) = 10(2.5 - I) = IS kN/m'

Direct tension in long walls = TL = [(15 X 2)12] = IS kN ~I<-'--~6000 -~---.l,~

•• 51. 150
3
A =(15XI0 )=100mm' 1;7'-# 10-280 (horizontal)
Minimnm area· of steel = 0.3% = (0.003 x 180 x 1000) = 540 mm' .11""#16-150 (verlieal)

1000X79)
Spacing of bars =.
( 540 = 146 mm

Since steel is distributed on both faces, provide 10 mm diameter bars at

280 mm centres on both faces in the horizontal direction.

Sectional Elevation
d) Design of Short walls
2
i Intensity of pressure::::; P = 15 kN/m
I
Effective span of horizontally spanning slab = (2 + 0.18) = 2.18 III 1--... '6-150 (vertical)
U
;j
Bending moment (corner section) = (~~') =( IS xl~·18') = 5.94 kN.m 2000 ~ 10-280 (horizontal) .
I
Tension transferred per metre height of short wall =(15 x I) = IS kN

A =[Mas\j-T.X] + [I-]
•• SI d ,OSl 6000----~

A"
=[(5.94 X 10') - (IS x 10')(150 -90)]
(150 x 0.86 x 150)'
+[ IS x 10'] = 360 mm'
ISO
Sedion at XX
Fig.lS.12 Reinforcement Details in Rectangular Tank
Minimum reinforcement =0.3 percent =(0.003 x 180 x 1000) = 540 mm'
Hence, provide 10 rom diameter'bars at 280 mm centres on both faces in 15.8 EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE
\
the horizontal direction with an effective cover of 30 rom
i I) A simply supported reinforced concrete slab with a clear span 00.5 m
is supported on concrete masonry walls 300 mm thick along the edges.
~ Design for Cantilever effect of short wall If the service live load on the slab is 2 kN/m' and the floor finish is 0.6
".' . kN/mi,design the slab using M-20grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD
Maximum bending moment at bottom of wall is computed as, bars. . " c:;" ~ f)~j!.;' •

M= (0.5 x 10 x 2.5 x I x 0.333) =4.2 kN.!?

 518 Re~Jlforced Cq/icrete Design
2) Design a simply supported slab supported on masonry walls 200 mm
thick and having a clear span of 2.5 m. Live load = 4 kN/m', Floor
finish = 0.6 kN/in 2. Assume the permissible stresses in steel and con-
crete as a cb =. 7 N/mm 2, a~l = 230 N/mm and the modular ratio 'm'=
2
13.
3) A simply supported verandah slab of clear span 3.3 m is supported on
brick walls 400 mm thick on one side and 200 mm thick on the other
side. Adopting M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 grade HYSD bars,
design the slab and sketch the details of reinforcements in the slab. ,
4) Design a two-way reinforced concrete slab for a ·foom having clear
dimensions of 3.5 m by 4.5 m. The slab is supported on masonry walls
300 mm thick on all the four sides and the corners are held down.
Assume the live load on the slab inclusive of finishes as 3 kN/m 2.
Adopt M-25 grade concrete and Fe-500 grade reinforcements.
5) Design a two way R.CC. slab for a an office floor building having
clear dimensions of 4.5 m by 5.5 m. The slab is continuous onall the
four edges being supported on reinforced. concrete beams 300 mm
wide. The live load on the slab inclusive of finishes may be taken as 5
kN/m'. Use M-20,grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars,
6) Design a singly reinforced concrete beam to support a class room
floor over a clear span of 6 m, The beam is supported on 300 'mm
thick stone masonry walls, The beams are spaced at 3 m intervals, The
thickness of the slab is 150 mm, Adopt M-20,grade concrete and Fe-
415 HYSD bars.
7). A singly reinforced concrete beam of effective span 6 m hps a rectah-
gular section 300 mm wide by 650 mm deep. The beam is reinforced
with 4 bars of 25 mm diameter at an effective depth of 600 mm,The
super imposed dead load on the beam is 6 kN/m, Calculate the maxi-
mum permissible live load on the beam, AdoptM-25 grade concrete
and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
8) Design a balanced singly reinforced concrete beam section having an
effective depth twice that of the width to support a uniformly distrib-
uted total (dead + live) load of 10 kNlm over an effective span of 5 m,
Assume cover to tensile steel as 50 mm. Adopt M-20 grade concrete
and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
9) A doubly reinforced concrete beam of overall dimensions 250 mm by
600 nun is simply supported over an' effective span of 6 m' and has to
support a uniformly distributed live load of 25 kNlm. Assuming the
effective cover to tensile and compression reinforcement as 50 mm,
oesign the steel reinforcements in the beam using M-25 gr~de__con-
crete and Fe-500 grade reinforcement.
Working Stress Method of Design 519
10) A reinforced concrete Tee beam with an effective flange width of 2 m
and slab thickness of 120 mm and rib width 300 mm has an ov~rall
depth of 600 mm. The beam is reinforced with 6 steel bars of 25 mm
diameter with an effective cover of 60 mm. If M-20 grade concrete
and Fe-415 HYSD hars are used, estimate the moment of I'esista~ce of
the section.
J I) The Ooor of an educational institution is made up of a Tee beam and
slab having the following details:
Effective span = 6 m, Effective width of flange = 2.5 m
Thickness of flange = 150 mm, width of rib = 300 mm
Depth of rib = 550 mm
Tension reinforcement:::: 8 bars of25 rnm diameter
Effective depth = 600 mm
Materials: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars
Estimate the llloment of resistance of the tee beam section and calcu-
late the maximum permissible live load on the beam.
12) Desig~ a Tee beam for an office floor to suit the following data:
Clear span = !l.5 m '
Centre to, centre of supports = 12 m
Loading (Office floor) = 4 kN/m'
Thickness of slab = 150 mm
Spacings of tee beams = 3 m
Material's: M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
Sketch the details of reinforcements in the tee beam.
13) The cross section of an R.C.C.column is 400 mm by 400 mm. The
service axial load on the column is 1600 kN. The safe bearing capacity
of the soil atsite is 150 kN/m'. Usiag M-25 grade concrete and Fe-415
HYSD bars, design the reinforcements in the column and footing aad
sketch their details.
14) A rectangular column 400 mm by 600 mm in section is required to
support an axial service load of 2000 kN. Design suitable reinforce-
ments in the column. Also design a suitable footing for the column
assnming the safe bearing capacity of soil at site as 200 kN/m'. Adopt
M-20 grade concrete aad Fe-415 HYSD bars.
15) Design a cantilever type R.C.C. retaining wall to retain earth level
with the top of the wall to a height of 5 m. The safe bearing capacity
of soil at site is 200 kN/m'. The density of earth-fill is 18kN/m'.
Angle of shearing resistance = 30° and the· coefficient of resistance
between soil and concrete is 0.5. Sketch the details of reinforcements
in the stem, heel and toe slabs.
5::!0 Reinforced Concrete Design

16) A stair case room measures 4 m by 2.5 m and the height between the CHAPTER 16
floors is 3 m. design a suitable doglegged stair case with mid landing
slab. Assume the tread as 270 mm and rise as 150 !TIm. Adopt M-20
grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. Sketch the details of rein-
Reinforcement Detailing in
forcements in one of the flights. Structural Concrete Members
17) Design a single flight straight stair-case, with 10 risers each of 150
mm and with the tread of 300 mm, The upper and lower landings are
1.25 m wide in the direction of the stair case flight. The edges of the
two landings are simply supported on masonry walls 300 10m thick. 16.1 INTRODUCTION
Design the waist slab type stair case flight assuming M-20 grade con-
crete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. Adopt the live loads as specified in IS: The primary aim of structural design is to produce economical, safe, ser-
875 for an office building. viceable and durable structures conforming to the national codes. The
18) A circular water tank resting on ground with ..l..sliding base is required design should not only produce aesthetic structures but also· should serve
to store four hundred thousand liteI~ of water. The depth of stomge is the intended function for which they are designed. While analysis and
to be 5 m. Free board = 300 10m. Adopting M-20 grade concrete and design form the first phase, the more important job is the process of struc-
Fe-415 HYSD bars design the tank walls and a suitable spl)erical tural construction which translates the design into a sound and solid high
dome and ring beam and base slab. Sketch the. details of reinforce- quality structure. To facilitate the construction process, good detailing of
ments in the various structural elements. reinforcements with proper drawings are essential at the site of construc-
19) A rectangular reinforced concrete water tank is to be designed to store tion.
100 000 liters of water. The inside dimensions of the tank may be The prominence. given to the limit state design in the revised Indian
ass~med as 6 m by 5 m. The tank rests on reinfC?rced concrete beams standard code IS: 456-2000 implies that the structural concrete members
on all the four sides. Design the side walls of the tank adopting M-25 should satisfy the limit states of failure as well 'as serviceability.
grade concrete and Fe-SOO grade reinforcements. Very rarely concrete members fail due to the limit state of collapse
20) Design the sidew~lls of a rectangular reinfo:ced concrete water tank since the failure loads are significantly higher than the service loads.
of interior dimensions 5 m by 2 m with the depth of storage water However, in most of the cases, the structural concrete members do not
being 2 m. Adopt M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars. perform satisfactorily under service loads due to local damage in the form
Sketch the details of reinforcements in the tank walls. of cracks and excessive deflections leading to distress of floors and parti-
tion walls.
The working stress method with lower permissible. stresses and
approximate methods of analysis usually resulted in larger sections of the
members with increased quantities of steel reinforcement. The conserva-
tive designs of the working stress method generally assured safety against
both collapse and serviceability limit states even with minor deviations in
detailing of reinforcements.
The introduction of limit state method of design using higher strength
materials associated with higher stresses and with partial safety factors,
lower than the factor of safety adopted in the working stress method has
resulted in slender members. Consequently, any minor deviation in detail-
ing of reinforcements and lack of quality control of concrete ,and supe~v~-,
sian of construction process may seriously affect the serviceability· crjteria
of the structures. Hence, it is very important tonote that w.~Ale
 522 Reinforced Concrete Design Reinforcement Detailing in Structuml Concrete Members 523
limit state ;nethod of design, the structural engineers should pay special ent shapes such as straight or cranked bars, single or double ;legged stir:'
attention not only to plan and design but also detailing, fabrication and rups, or bundled bars. The most common shnpes used in structural concrete
construction of structural concrete members. members like slabs, beams and columns are compiled in Fig. 16.1 as
It is important to note that the cost of concrete and reinforcement con- . ha 116
reported by Kalgal an d J ayaslll1
stitutes a fraction of the total cost of any project. Hence, proper care has to
SLABS
be taken about the durability and serviceability criteria of the strllcture with
r-----o;:;r~---~
judicious use of materials and quality construction. The reader may refer to Top bar
r---~-------~
the specialist Iiterature I05 . 115 , for exhaustive information on quality control,
detailing and construction practices, types of failure, methods of pre- c~~ ~~ Bollom bar
vention of cracks in structural concrete members.
Cranked bar

16.2 STRUCTURAL DISTRESS and COLLAPSE Cranked bar

..# Bundled bars

Improper design and detailing results in failure of buildings' due to ser-
viceability exhibited in the for!TI of local cracks and large deflections or
rn' 'IJ
ultimate collapse of the structural elements. The various reasons for
serviceability distress are attributed to the following factors:
~1P nOrl.1inal bar
a) Large deflections of floor slabs and beams affecting the partition
walls. ~--------} l,f-:lin tension bar (bottom)
b) In sufficient cover leading to corrosion of reinforcement and spilling
':r'lnked or bent up bar
of concrete.
c) Improper slopes on roofs resulting in ponding of water and dampness;
due to poor drainage. ( =~nt bar

d) Local cracking of beams and slabs.

e) Growth of algae and moss on wet surfaces of rbof slabs and chajjas
leading to discoloration and dampness.
The ultimate failure or collapse of the structural concrete elements are due
[O[JJ l'!i"tical stirrups
'.:;:',I)le. two and four legged)

to the following reasons> COLUMNS

a) Improper design and -detailing leading to primary failure of load bear-
ing members. ~.-:;.; .., vertical bars
b) Lack of quality control during construction may significantly reduce
tbe design strength of concrete leading to sudden collapse of the
memb'ers.
c) Use of poor quality materials may lead to the collapse of the members..
d) Failure may also occur due to over loading or due to natural calamities
like bomb blasts and earthquakes.
DC]] f"fVi2ontal ties

e) Improper maintenance may lead to progressive collapse of the struc-:· Fig. 16.1 Common St~ ofnars
ture.
Straight bars are commonly used ir~:,') and beams. Sometimes the
bars are cranked up near the supports tt ~~.ist the negative moments that
16.3 COMMON SHAPES OF REINFORCEMENTS
may develop due to fixity at the suppo:: -.-'NO legged stirrups are com·
manly used in most of the beams. In bn~ -:eams, where the shear forces
Reinforcements used in t'he structural concrete members may be in differ-
 Reinjorcemelll Detailing ill Structural Concrete Members 525
524 Reinforced Concrete Design
Typical reinforcement detailing in cantilever, simply supported and con-
near the supports are large, four legged stirrups are required. In the case of
very thin beams such as I-sections, single legged stirrups are used nomi- tinuous slabs is shown in Fig. 16.3
nally throughout the length of the member. Development length Main reinforcement
Main column reinforcements are normally straight with single 01'
double ties depending upon the spacing of longitudinal bars.

16.4 DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENTS IN SLABS

Distribution reinfort:ement

Details of Reinforcement requirements in reinforced concrete slabs arc

cumpiled in Fig. 16.2. Based on durability and ease of construction the '--~, (a) CANTILEVER SLAB
minimum and maximum tl1crmetefSof bars, the percentage or reinforce- Distribution reinforcement
ment and their spacing in the sectiqI1 is shown in Fig. 16.2
SLABS

f· +S-+
• ·t! 0·1 L
Main remforcement
(Alternate bar cranked)

(b) SIMPLY SUPPORT EO SLAB

0·1 L
' ..u

,.-,/;).
REINFORCEMENTS Distribution Extra bar at top
reinforcement
Minimum Maximum

Diameter 8mm (main I Y8 x t (thickness

of slab)
6 mm (distribut"lon)

Quan tHy 0;12 % IHYSO bars) For M-20·concrete .1

Fe-415 0·96.%. (Fe-415 steel I
0·15 (plain bars) 1· 76 r. Fe-250 steel I
Fe-250
Ie) CONTINUOUS SLAB
Spac ing 1·5 (aggregate 3 d (main) Fig. 16.3 Reinforcement Dctailing in One Way Slabs
size) 5d (di stribution)
or 4.50 mm In the case of one-way simply supported slabs. the main bars are
.cranked up ai a distance of O.ILfrom the.inside edge of the supporis or
Fig. 16.2 Reinforccmcnt Dctails in Slab (IS: 456·2000 and 81'-34)
O.l5L from the center line of the supports to resist any negative moments
Slabs are generally singly reinforced memhcrs and are generally rein- w~ich may develop due to partial fixity at the SUPPOl;tS. Typical detailing in
forced with main steel on the tension face to resist the tensile stresses one-way slab as per the specification of SP: 34 IS shown m Fig. 16.4. The
developed due to loads in the direction of span. In the case of one-way distribution bars are -generally straight as shown in Section BB. In two way
slabs, distribution reinforcement should be provided in the transverse ,.slahs spanning in mutualiy perpendicular directions as shown in the plan of
direction to resist the effects of shrinkage and temperature. .·Fig. 16.5, the main bars are cranked near the supports in both dire?tio~s .as
Indian standard code of practice IS:. 456-2000, has specified .the rules .~<iwn in sections AA and BB along the short and long span dIrections
regarding the detailing of reinforcements in the slabs under clauses 26.3.2 r~spectively ..
and 26.5.2: The essence of these,spedfi,cations are compiled in Fig. 16.2.
 •• Reinforcement Detailing in Structural Concrete Me.mbers 527 .
8-, ,
L , 1 and extended up toO.3L as shown in section AA to resist the hogging
-,I
:
, I
d
I,
moments developed" at the interi?r"supports.

I
I
I A-
I
I
I I
I ,-...------ -jo------ ., c
I I I 0·' Ly I
I
I Main b\: I
I
I
I -+- I
I
"
0-

'"en
L :
I
\
I
J Ol
,
Ol
I
I
I Bars in longer
I span direction
I
I
I
I
c
.2
en
c
0
Z a
~
I
to:iL;' o
;::
u
A
I
I
Bars in shorter
span direction
I
I
A
'"
~
c
g,
Ol
Ol
~
I
I
I
w
Vl
M Z
o
I ;::
I L u
I 't J W
I I ~ O'!Lx: 'Ly Vl
I
I 10·1 Lx
I
I r I
Distr ibution I
t I
I bars I
I Specify I
: Specify I
t
J thic kneS5 :
I thickness
I I of slab
I in pian.
I I !
I
"I +
O'IL y
..,j.
i
.JI
I
L' _
8.J
0·5Asl Distribution bars

SECTION A A
Fig. 16.4 Typical Detailing In One Way Slab (SP.34)

In tjJe case of two way slabs, simply supported on bOlh edges meeting
at the c~rner, lorsion reinforcement in the form of a mesh should be pro-
Fig. 16.5 TypJcal Detai~Jng in Two Way Slabs (~P-34)
vided wIth bars placed parallel to Ihe sides of the slab and extending from
Ihe edges to a· minimum dislance of one fifth of the shorter span. The area· In multislOrey buildings comphsing reinforced concrete columns and
of reinforcement in each of these four layers shall be three quarters of the beams, Ihe. floor slabs are generally continuous over beams and built with
area required for the maximum mid span moment of Ihe slab accOl'ding to edge beams. Hence, torsion reinforcement at com~rs is not required. In the
the clause D-1.8, 1.9 and 1.10 ofI.S: 456·2000. c"ase, of simply supported continuous slabs, forsion reinforcement shall be
. In the case of continuous slabs shown in Fig. 16.6, the main bars pro- provided at corners as per the specifications laid down in IS: 456·2000.
vided at the mid span tension face are cranked up al a distance of 0.25L
-')
528 Reinforced Concrete Design Reinforcement Detailing in Structural Concrete Members 529

A typIcal arrangement of two layers of reinforcements in a Tee beam at

~ ~ mid span and support sections is shown in Fig. 16.7. Beams ai;e subjected
~Distribution
bars to heavy shear forces in the vicinity of the supports and hence shear rein-
forcements in the form of stirrups and or bent up bars are provided to resist
Main
rt- the diagonal tension developed due to the shear forces. StirTUPS can be

t 3ars to'3Ll~ 0·25 L2::t

i S2 A

l1 either vertical or inclined. However, vertical stirrups are prefened due to

ease of fabrication and detailing. Stinups can also be of open or closed
015 L,'I
./
As, Jo.25
~ f-O·3 L2- f+ type, single or multilegged as shown in Fig. 16.8,

.
+
..
L,
..
I
PLAN
L2 ,S'
--r-----tffective flange width ---~,~
~+-----,------+---l
~---+---i+
+-
Df

to'3L,-+
AS2
t o'3L2 -+-
~Sl •
rvertical sp,ocing,<t::15mm
4- or diameter of bar or ~3
\-_---,
-t-b
w
-+ of nominal size of aggregate
whichever is greater

u L MID-SPAN SlOCTION

+ - - - L, - - - - f - - - L2 -----H",'- rbw+2Df~
SlOCTION AA )---;::=;;:::;::::;:==;----1+
• r-------'-~
Fig. 16.6 Typical Detailing in One Way Continuous Slab (SP~34) •
16,5 VET AILING OF ~INFORCEMENTSIN BEAMS
Horizontal spacing
Reinforcements are provided in beams to resist tensile stresses due to flex-
-et:: diameter of bar or
ure and shear in the case of singly reinforced members. However, if the nominal. size of aggregate
d.epth of .the beam is restricted as in the case of basement floors, + 5 mm whichever is greater .
reinforcements are required at the compression face rendering the be~m as
f-bw-+
doubly reinforced. Beams subjected to torsion in addition to flexure and
shear require additional longitudinal and shear reinforcements to resist the SUPPORT SlOCTION
equivalent shear and flexural stresses developed due to torsion. Fig. 16.7 Detailing of Bars in Tee Section
Reinforcements comprising straight bars are generally provided in
most of the beams resisting tensile and or compressive stresses. In rectan- Standard bends and hooks required for reinforcing bars is shown in
gul~r sections, the tension and compression reinforcements may be pro-
Fig. 16,9. The specifications regarding detailing of reinforcements in
beams are given in clause 26.5, I of IS: 456-2000. The important provi-
vid6d :in different layers if the width of the beam is insufficient to
sions regarding the minimum and· maximum percentages o~ main rein-
accommodate all the bars in a s.ir:tg1e layer.
, . forcements and stirrupsin beams are compiled in Table, 16,1.
 ~.:Su Reinforced Concrete Design Reinforcement Detailing in Structural Concrete M(~/lIbers 531

f;' Table 16.1 Detailing of Reinfor«ments in BeamH

-. ,
.,,--'-r

[ [ [J"-'""
d - 'stirrups (Asv)
Sid./oc, bars

MaIn bars {Asl

Diameter of Sars
SINGLE LEG DOUBLE LEG (Open type)
Diameter Min. Max. Max.
(Limit state) (Heavv struet.)
Main bars 10mm 32 mm 50 rn",

o0 00
16 rnm 20 rn",
"'-
Hanger bars 8 mm
16 mm 16 r,;;;:-
stirrups 6mm

.
Percentage Remforcement As
0·85 bd
"4:(....,-J
--
. . Y
DOUBLE LEG (Par tiall open type) Fe-250 Plain M S bars Min: 0·34 ~ I
Max: 4 r.
'DOUBLE LEG (Closed type)
Fe-415 HYSD bars Min: 0'20 ~ I
Max: 4 ~ - - ' -
5
A >(9'4 bS¥) ---
Stirrups sv Iy
:'1 ---

o 0 [ill [[]J Side Face Min: 0·10" (0) 750 rnm

Spacing of Bars
-1:0 Refer to.btt j~
Main bars Min: Max: (IS: 456'2(1'/)
:to- 5mm + Size
oleA
DOUBLE LEG (Welded type) MULTIPLE LEG TYPE
Stirrups Min:
50 mm Q'75 d --
(SP:IS) Max: 300 mm
Fig. 16.8 Types of Stirrups
Side Face . Max :300 mm
In beams. the reinforcement can be curtailed along its length depending
...
- ... ~

upon the magnitude of bending moment at the section. Typical details of

curtailment of bars in cantilever and cohtinuous beams are shown in Fig.
16.10. Another salient aspect in detailing of reinforcement in beams is the
anchorage or development length required at supports. The anchorage
length required for main reinforcement in tension and compression out-
lined in clause 26.2 of IS: 456-2000 is shown in Fig. 16.J I for structural
concrete members'subjected to tension and compression.
16.6 DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENTS IN COLUM.~
Column reinforcements are generally subjected to compr"",;'"" and in
cases of brackets attached to columns, eccentric cOll,1preSSioD I!:'?)'-tevek9
tensile stresses in some bars of the column. Ties or ti'ans\'e.rv.: .1~rtfo;ce­
rnents are invariably provided to prevent. buckling of the main f~f).Jdjnal
bars at regular intervals. Typital cross sections of co.lumns "-.itt .:tIa-in and
transverse reinforcements are shown in Figs. 16.12 and 16.13.
 Reinforcement Detailing in Structural Concrete Members 533
- 532 Reinforced Concrete Design
Table 16.2 Detailing of Reinforcements in Columns

Min.
Max.
,
Diameter
Building Bridge /Ast /0'5 Ast
32mm 50-mm
12mrn
Diameter
4.0% ]
II Quantum
Number of Bars
0.8%
4-10 Rectangular Columns
3-10 triangular Columns
4.0%
r
\\ 6 In Circular Columns "-Ase
Ii I~

Spacing of bars i Aggregate Size 300mm I<-- 0· 5 L------t

IiI Column Ties Min.
Max.
, L

II
~, Diameter ~
•
bardiaor5mm 12mm 165mm

Least Lateral Dimension or 16 (Column bar CURTAILMENT IN CANTILEVER BEAM

1,50 r:n m diameter) or 300 mm

B C D +~ L ---~-- L-------J-
A
VARIOUS FORMS OF LINKS
CURTAILMENT IN CONTINUOUS BEAMS
.--t +
'11
135' '80
8d
~d;K 11 Fig. 16.10 Curtailment in Beams
90
J- J- 4d
Noles:-
4d 4d 4d a) If distance between bars :5 75 mm, only alternate bars to be tied in
both ways.
b) If distance between bar> 75 mm, all bars to be tied both ways.
d d
d Detailing provisions specified in· clause 26.5.3 of IS: 456-2000 is com-
piled in Table:16.2 and Fig. 16.14. In the case of circular columns with
helical ties. the pitch of the ties should not exceed 75 mm and it should not
180' HOOK be less than 25 mm nor less than three times the diameter of.the steel 'bar
90' BEND 1§5' HOOK
forming the helix.
STANDARD BENDS AND HOOKS 16.7 DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENTS IN FOUNDATIONS
_}'ig. 16.9 Standard -n~nds. Hooks and Links
AND WALLS'·
, '"" ~

Isolated column 'footii,tgs' are widdy used -as ~foundations for columns due'
 Reinforcement Detailing in Structural Concrete M~mbers' 535

D m [IT] rID
.... ,>',,'.,'\',' .' .
to economy and ease _of construction. Combined footings' are used when
columns are closely spaced and- the bearing capacity of soil is less sn that
the bearing area of individual footings overlap_ Camhined footings are
designed as slab with beam tied between the columns. Hence, the guide
lines and specifications for detailing of reinforcements in foundations are
similar to that for slabs and beams. A typical detail of an isnlated column DOUBLE TIE SINGLE TIE SINGLE TIE
SINGLE TIE
footing is Shown in Fig. 16.15. StNGLE LINK DIAMOND TIE

, 1
~

t-Ld~

(
Ld - -
+

SINGLE TIE DOUBLE TIES DOUBLE TIES SINGLE TIE

DOUBLE LINKS SINGLE LINK DOUBLE LINK
-, ,
v
ANCHORAGE LENGTH I Tension) I ,Tie diameter
--I; 1/ bar diameter nor tess than 5 01 fn
4
- 2 Tie spacing
Anchorage lenglh lLd) :}- 16 x bar diameter
:}-48 x lie dlameler
Grade of Concrete
--
M-20 I M-25 M-30 :t- Leasl lateral dimension of member
Tension 47 d I_ 40 d 38 d

Compression 38 d - 32 d 30 d Fig. 16.12 Typical Lay Out oeTies In Columns

d =Diameter of bar IOOmm. Walls are intended to carry vertiCal loads and are designed in
Fe-415 HYSD bars accordance with the recommendations specified for columns The rein~
; forcements in walls comprise of vertiCal and horizontal bars provided in
single or two layers near the faces. The specifications regarding the
detailing of reinforcements in walls given in clause 32.5 of IS: 456-2000
code is compiled in Fig. 16.16 _I

ANCHORAGE LENGTH 16.8 DETAILING AT JUNCTIONS

(Compression)
Fig.16.11 Anchorage Lenglh oeBars (IS 456·2000) In Structural concrete members particular care should be taken to arrange
the 'reinforcements at junctions· of beam to beam, column to beam and at
Reinforced concrete wall is a structural member whose length exceeds c~rners where beams in p,erpendicular directions mee~ the columns.
4 times .its thickness. R.C.Walis may be used as panitions in which case
they are non-load bearing members._ They may also be designed as load
bearing walls. The thickness of waHs should generally be not less than
 Reinforcement Detailing in Structural COl/crete Members 537
536 Reinforced Concrete Design

HEXAGONAL CIRCULAR HEXAGONAL

CIRCULAR
I TIE
TIE _ TIE TIE

Diameter ~
MULTIPLE L"TYPE COLUMN T:TYPECOLUMN. INCLINEO
SQUARE TIES TIES TIES TIES Fjg. 16.14 Arrangement of Ties in Columns (IS: 456·2000)

column bars

lDJ >15~
[JJ]] Ties

~15~ ~~15 mm
t---+>15
mm
If > 20' double form
mm mm work to be used
Fig. 16.13 Typical Lay Out ofnes in Columns
,.
16.8.1 Beam"to"Beam Junctions "
In multistorey reinforced concrete buildings, the following main types of
beam-to beam junctions are encountered.
a) Secondary beam shallower than main beam.
b) Main beam and secondary beam of same depth. SPECfFICATIONS FOR FOOTINGS (I S: 456-2000) .i

The detailing of reinforcements forcase(a) is shown in Fig. 16.17(a) as Diameter 10 mm (min) -

recommended in SP: 34. In this case, the bottom layer reinforcements of
Quantum 0-12 ¥ (mini -
secondary beam should be placed above the bottom layer reinforcements 0-15 ¥ (mini
of main beam: The secondary beams are generally shallower than the main 3d
Spacing 1· 5 (Aggregate size)
beam and placing of main steel of secondary beam over that of main beam (min) 300 mm(max)
will not pose any problems. -
In the case of main and secondary beams having the same depth, the ~g.16.15 DetaUl~gofFootings
detailing of reinforcements .at t~ejunction,_of the beams can be as shown in
Figs. 16.17 (b) or (c).To provide continuity and integrity at the junction, it
- .-
 Reinforcement Detailing in Struc.tural ~o,,!crete-Membe.rs 539
Reinforced Co~crete Dl!sign

~isnecessary to provide extra diagonal open stirrups and horizontal loops at a) The breadth of beam and column are the same at the junction.
all beam to beamjUllctions as shown in Fig. 16.18: b) Breadth of beam is smaller than column side at the junction.
c) Rare cases in which the breadth of the beam is larger than the size of
the column- at the junction.
, ..
- Top layer bars

--- -
- - r- -- Main beam

Horizontal bar tied,

- I
I
I
,:- I
..,.
to vertical bars I I
.
l.- Secondary beam
Tie connecting
two layers of Lo.....
vertical bars
(a) SECONDARY BEAM SHALLOWER THAN
MAIN BEAM

..,
,, - I
r-
I
- Main beam

THIN WALL THICK WALL , .

I
I
I
I
I
I
::- Secondary beam

(100 to 200 mm,) (>200 mm)

(b) MAIN AND SECONDARY BEAMS OF

MINIMUM REINFORCEMENT IN WALLS SAME DEPTH
Load bearing Non load bear ina

Vertical bars
0·12 %
0·40 r. (preferred
0'12 % ., r
I Main beam
I

''1':''.
Horizontal bars 0·20 % 0·20 X ~ .
I
I
I
:- I ~r:-:Secondary beam
I
SPACING OF BARS ,............
Min, Max.
Verlical bars 75 mm ~I or 450 mm (c) MAIN AND SECONDARY BEAMS OF
whichever ,Is. less SAME DEPTH
Horizontal bars 75 mm 3t or 450 mm Fig. 16.17 Typical Detailing at Beam to Beam Junctions
whichever is less
The reinforcement detailing for case(a) is shown in Fig. 16.19. The
beam bars should be housed inside the comer reinforcements of the col-
Fig. 16.16 Detailing of Walls
umn and the ties of columns should be continued within the junction.
16.8.2 Beam to Column Junctions In case(b) where the breadth of the beain is smallel' than the side of the
columns, the beam reinforcement should be housed within the column

~
In multistorey framed structures, column-beam junctions require special reinforcement cage ~s shown in Fig. 16.20, where the beam is located at
attention regarding detailing since the reinforcements from beams and col- the edge of the column. The outer face bars of the beam should be bent so
umns crowd together at the junction. Detailing should be done with care to that they are enclosed within the cage of the coJumn bars. The column ties
1
1 ensure 'proper integrity of the connections. should be continued within the junction.
L
1 The following three types are identified in beam-column junctions.
I
I
I
 540 Reinforced Concrete ueslgn Reinforcement Detailing in Structural Concrete Members 541

ElCtra horizon~ I a) Juuctions of beams and columris in a framed building.

,f loops b) Junction of sloping members of a gable bent.

r
r Secondary beam c) Junction of horizontal and vertical members of a box culvert.
/ '..' '..'..' Typical examples of closing types where the members meeting at a
'..'

d
I
"
~ ~,
joint tend to move towards each other developing a crack at the outer face
are:-

1 +--,-d--+ -+--d----t
a)
b)
Junctions of vertical w·alls of a rectangular tank.
Junction of vertical wall and base slab of an aqueduct carrying water.

/ /" ;olumn
HORIZONTAL LOOPS

Secondary beam Be~ yeam

1/ / /
t/
"
1/

"

EXTRA OIAGONAL OPEN STIRRUPS 1/

Fig. 16.18 Relnrorcem~nt Detailing at Jundion.of Beams BEAM - COLUMN JUNCTION

Fig. 16.21 illustrates the detailing of reinforcements when the beam

width exceeds that of column side. In this case, lhe column bars are taken
mn _______
within the outer face bars of the beam with the beam stirrups continued Colu
within the junction. In all these cases it is important to note that column
bars should no be bent or kinked within the junction.. A
L
16.8.3 Corner Junctions II I
,c;;=
Cornerjunctions arise when structural members meet at a joint at corners. ~/
Typical examples being the vertical·wall and base slab or ihe side walls of
I a tank or comers of a building frame or the landing slab and sloping slab of
,
a stair case flight or the sloping members of a gable bent. B SECTlON·BB
sEcrfoN'AA
Junctions may be of opening type or closing type depending upon the PLAN
nature of momedts at the junction of the members. Typical examples of Nole:
opening types where the members meeting at a joint tend to move apart Column ties continued at junction
-developing cracks at the inner comer are:- Fig. 16.19 Detailing atColumll·Beam Junction
 Reinforced C(Jncrete Design Reinforcement Detailing·in Strueiural·C~nc/'ete Memb"/'s . 543

Column
earn
column

Beam

BEAM- COLUMN JUNCTION

BEAM- COLUMN JUNCTION
~B

VColumn_______. . Beam
stlrru ps
Column - ~-
V'
L

A
l
.A
.J
1:- rt· 1/ 1/
V 11
A A -- --
~~
L ~':+;::=::;]...J

: Column
.~
~

( ---
Colum':'!
Column ,/ .~ ties
- B earns
.
l-e
L.B
PLAN SECTION-AA SECTION' BB
PLAN SECTION-AA SECTION-Be

Fig. 16.21 Detallin~ at Column-Beam Junction

Fig. 16.20 J:>etaiUng at Column-Beam Junction
Fig. 16.23 shows the detailing of reinforcements at the crown of a mill
The reinforcement detailing at the junction of opeuing and closing cor-
bent and at the junction of landing and sloping. waist slab of a staircase
ners should be able to arrest the initiation and propagation of cracks at
flight involving opening corners. Typical examples of detailing at junc-
these joints. Fig. 16.22(a) illustrates the layouts ofreinforcements at corner
tions of walls of water, tanks and aqiltducts involving closing: corners' is
junctions in a box culvert where slabs form the structural members. In the
case ?f knee bent or portal frame where the horimntal beam and vertical shown in Fig. 16.24.
columns ,are relatively thick, it is important to provide inclined stirrups in
addition to the main reinforcements to resist the diagonal tension cracks as 16.9 DETAILING IN CORBELS
shown in Fig. 16.22(b).
Corbels or brackets are provided to columns in industrial structures to
support the :tracks of overhead gantry cranes. The design aspects of such
corbels has been deali in detail in Chapter-13.
 Reinforcement Detailing in Structural Concrete Members 545
544 Reinforced Concrete Design

A Earth pressure

:1 1/ --\-
I

7 r--Addilional
reinforcement
Road way

BOX-CULVERT CROWN OF MILL BENT (Opening Corner)'

(Elevation)
"0Y
DETAILS AT A

(a) BOX CULVERT (Thin Slabs) (Opening Corners)

Inclined stirrups to JUNCTION OF WAIST AND LANDING SLABS

resist diagonal cracks OF STAIR CASE (Opening Corner)
KNEE- BENT
Fig. 16.23 Detailing at Opening Corners
DETAIL AT B
Typical detailing of different types of reinforcements' in single and double
type brackets are shown in Fig. 16.25. Experimental investigations have
(b) KNEE-BENT-JUNCTION OF BEAM AND
shown that horizontal loops are superior to the other types in resisting the
COLUMN (Opening Corners!
forces developed in corbels.
Fig. 16.22 Detailing at Opening Corners
.,
16.10 LAPPING, SPLICING AND WELDING OF
The shear stresses developed in brackets being very high, adequate REINFORCEMENTS
reinforcement is required in the form of
In the case of continuous beams of long spans, it becomes necessary to join
a) Horizontal loops
reinforcement bars by tieing the ends of one bar with t~e other so that the
b) Inclined slirrups
lap length is equal tothe anchorage length. In the case of larger diameter
c) Vertical s.!iITUPS and
bars. to avoid wastage, the bars may be welded together using a lap weld or
d) Combinations of the above types.
butt weld as shown in Figs. 16.26 and 16.27 respectively. .
The following guide lines have to be followed while lapping
 , Reihforced- eoricr~te Design Reinforcement Detailing in Structural Concrete Membt'rs 547

,
A col umn bars
A Cro sS,bar
Ir
"Ma in bars oin "bars

II I m ! c r o s s bar
>Ill\.
Ho~ontal
lao ps
::x:
Detail at A
PLAN HORIZONTAL LOOPS
y PLAN 'Column bars
Cross bar
Main bars 1t==l!:;:=;=~ Main bars
(a) DETAILING AT JUNCTION OF WATER TANK WALLS
(Closing Corner) Cross bar

Aqueduct
VERTICAL LOOPS
, --=-=--
IP'V" , Main bar

Detail at B
",..-"....J.!:;~'o1
Cross bar

ELEVATION

ELEVATION

fbI DETAILING AT JUNCTION OF VERTICAL AND BASE INCLINED STIRRUPS

SLAB OF 'AQUEDUCT (Closing Corner)
Fig, 16.25 Detailing in Corbels
FJg.16.24 Detailing at Closing Corners
In multistorey' buildings, the columns towards the top floors are of
a) Lapping should be avoided at points of maximum tensile stress such
smaller cross section when compared to the lower storey columns. Proper
as the center of beams and slabs, detailing of reinforcements is' necessary irl the case of tral,lsitions in col-
b) In structun;l concrete members, no more than 50 percent of the bars
umns. Detailing at column'transitions is shown in Fig. 16.28.
should be lapped at one place, In the case of junctions of heavily reinforced columns, lapping may
c) The lap length provided should be sufficient to transfer the entire
lead to congestion of reinforcements. Alternatively splicing may be used to
force from one bar to the other. join the bars. The splices may be bonded type or strap type or coupler type
d) Thdap length should be based on the basis of smaller diameter bar
as shown in Fig. 16.29.
when two bars of different diameters are lapped,
 J~O I\I:-~I':I!.II LotU. \..-UIIL.1 cae; L.'C:,)~O'~

!, Reinforcement Detailing in Structural Concrete Members 549

,!
I.
l
-+ I
+- 5~ -J.- 5~ ----+-5 ~-+
+ 8.:#:0.29 1=-9-(._'==_'==_,=~_, \fh
~emov.~·bY
9

power sheet
'i of grinder

-t 8'*0.2 ~
,(60";
i
+-5~-+
+ +~.~.*>---.-
~'3­
~3mm
1t-'1 mm
+ I
II + 8=to.u 60' 0.v
+--109 L
1 +'~Jl':_'=+ rong

+ 2=5
t-5~-+
+ §'=!:0'2
,*"0'2
~
~

Fig. 16.26 Typical Lap Welds,

16.11 BUNDLING OF REINFORCING BARS Fig. 16.27 Typical Butt Welds

In Ihe case of heavily reinforced sections such as the columns in ground
floors of multistorey buildings, it is advantageous to bundle the bars in
groups of 2,3 and 4 to prevent congestion of reinforcements and effeclive
concreting of the members. Bundling is generally preferred for bars in the
range of 20 to 40mm. The commonly accepted method of bundling bars in
columns and beams is shown in Figs. 16.30 and 16.31 respectively. The
bars in each bundle should be tied together firmly so that they act as a unit
and the specifications regarding ties in columns and stirrups in beams is
I the same as that when individual bars are used. Bundling helps for proper
compaction of concrete by using poker vibrators resulting in dense con-
crete.
. concrete is I?oured. There,are differem types .of suppo~ing d.e~i_~fs '''''~-",
16.12 COVER TO REINFORCEMENT AND REINFORCEMENT
SUPPORTS
In st~uctural concrete members, it is very important to ensure proper cover
to reinforcements to prevent corrosion and deterioration due to aggressive
atmospheric and chemical,actions. Proper cover all-round the bars acts as a
protective barrier and safe gaurds the reinforcement.
The Indian Standard code IS: 456-2000, clause 26.4 specifies Ihe cover
requirements for different types of environmental conditions. Table-I 6 and
l6A of IS: 456-2000 code gives the nominal cover requirements'for dif-
ferent types of exposure and for specified periods orrii~'resistance and the
same has been detailed in chapter-2 of the text.
The cover specified is achieved oniy when the reinforcing bars are
properly supported al regular intervals by supporting devices before
 55U Reinforced Concrele Design', Reinforcement Det~iling in Structural Concrete M~m-bers 551

"
t~ ~

"'T-
Ld
j--.,-
:tSlope not more
than 1 in 10 -r-
Ld
75~ I
ss MORTAR
.~

DE'ORMED 8Ar1

t;t.
- DEFORMED SAR

--,-
SleeVE
Is = Spacing of column lies
Ld = Oevelopment length

Pl1'"
~~,-ci:'
TLd -t-
Ld

75 +- Slope not
BONDED TYPE
PRESSED TypE

rf10re than
1 in 10
,n:ri-x
,.,11lr
.,.. t~

Fig. 16.28 Column Transitions

up of concrete blocks, steel chairs and moulded plastic supporting devices,

COUPLER TypE
The different types of reinforcement supports commonly used are shown in
Fig. 16.32.

16.13 EXPANSION JOINTS IN CONCRETE STRUCTURES

Fig. 16.29 V~riou_s Types of Splices

In the construction of large structural concrete- structures, joints are inevi-
table due to suspension of concreting work at the end of the day. These
joints are termed as construction or cold joints. When concreting work is
resumed, special care in the form of scrapping and removing loose material
at the joint and coating with rich cement slurry on the old surface is essen-
tial before regular concreting is _started at the construction joint. In addi-
tion, proper care has to be taken -to select the location of the construction
joint
In general c,onstruction joints should be avoided at location.of ,.naxi-
mum tensile stress (Ex: Centre of slabs and beams) the cons~ructlOn Jomts
should preferably be located in the vicinity of sections of contra
flexure(where moments change from positive to negative) in the case of .
continuous members and far away from sections of maximum moment in
simply supported members. Typicaliocation of construction joint, in a one
way slab'is shown inFig. 16.33.
 552 Reinforced Concrete Design Reinforcement Detailing Structural COliC rete Members 553
i ill

I
40d 40d
I-
I

TWIN BUNDLE TWIN BUNDLE ELL- BUNDLE

(Vertical) (Horizontal) column
Beam

o 8 cg ffi BUNDLING OF BARS IN BEAM

1 2 3 4

TRIANGULAR SQUARE
BUNDLE BUNDLE
i40d 140d ,,40 d~
[4 3 I I
b
U I U U IU
,[ I [2 I
I [1I ..
g (
ffi cg 8 0
4 3 2

~"
Fig. 16.31 Dundling and Curtailment of Bars in Beams
"
Normally structures exceeding 45m in length should be provided with
COLUMN WITH COLUMN WITHOUT one or more expansion joints. Fig. 16.34 and 16.35 shows the location and
BUNDLED BARS BUNDLED BARS salient details of expansion joints. The thickness of the expansion joint
«,ig. 16.30 Bundling of Bars in Columns depends upon .the length of the structure, variat~on of temperature at the

. In the ~ase o~ large. b~ildings o~ considera~le length and abrupt ,hanges

site, type of building and several other factorso-The IndIan Standard Code,
gives the guidelines for the design of expansimt:Joints in reinforced con-
•
In plan dImensiOns, It IS essential to provide expansion joints which
accommodate the movement of the structure due to changes in tempera-
crete structures. ':i~';~:f."
"- ".'~:-.,
ture. According to the Indian Standard Code clause 27 of IS: 456-2000 16.14 DO's AND DONT's IN DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENTS
expansion joints should be provided at junctions of structures with fl.brup~
changes in plan dimensions. Detailing of reinforcements in structural conc,rete members involves many "
Expansion joints should facilitate the necessary ,movements of the operations such. as bending of bars, formation of end hooks, lapping, splic,
structures on either side of the joint due tc variations i~ temperature. The ing, welding and positioning, the reinforcements at appropriate locations a~
structure adjacent should preferably be supported on separate columns or
per detailed structural drawings.
walls but not necessarily on separate foundations. Reinforcements should
not extend across the expansion joint and ther.e should be a complete break
between the adjacent structure.
 '.554 Reinforced ConcreteD.'sign Reinforcement Detailing in Structural Concrete Members 555

and dont's in fabrication and detailing of reinf01Ccmcnts in structural con-

crete members and these are compiled in various Fig. 16.36 to 16.48 for
the benefit of the site engineer.

I
I I
-t
---I , - - -
---J_r--
I I
steel reinforcement , I
Mor lar block , I
reinforcement support supporf
1'1
I I

, I
Slee bor
reinforc('ment ,,
, I

Stul
chair
jDf fJf{<~' X

L~~~~~,
, :;;j..J
c.nslrJcllon
) di1nt X

steel chair reinforcement supports ~

I Beam
, I
_ j1 _

--i*'--
~ IColumn

PLAN

Plastic chair reinforcement support Direction of ..... Construction

concreting joint
Fig. 16.32 Typical ReInforcement Supporting Devices

It requires special skill 0)1 the part of the bar bender to translate the
information given in structural drawings to the actual structure at the
.worksite. Inspite of ail the precautions, wrong detailing of reinforcing bars SECTION-XX
is still a cmillllon feature in. many- construction sites leading to serious
problems affecting the strength and serviceability of the structure. Fig. 16.33 Typical Construction Joint in One Way Slab
Sudarshan ll8 has identified some common. mistakes based on his fie~d
supervision over a number of years and has suggested a few do's
 " l{euIjU(Cefllelll Vt:;luntlll> IH LJH HL.tlM u< ....... UIl.LIt:;le lVJClllvers JJI
556 Reinforced COllcrete Design

/Expansion jo iot "

1--1..1 ----1

compressible Expansion
fitter Joint
ox''
i!!<" -«<,' $-' ",
""'" Ii

(a) EXPANSION JOINT AT JUNCTION OF TALL

AND SHORT BUILDINGS

Foundation

~ExpanSion
joints
, .
PLAN

(b) EXPANSION JOINTS AT MAJOR CHANGES OF BUILDINGS

Fig. 16.35 Expansion Joint Between Building Blocks
]?ig. 16.34 Loc~tion of E~panslon Joints In Buildings
558 Re(nforced (oncrete Design Reinforcement Detailing in StruCtural Concrete Member, 559

,~
'I
~

¢I----_
Mandrel
diameter
4d

o
Typical General

wrong,
~ I .

,
~ \I

X J
Wrong Right
Mandrel Mandrel

(j)
R;§ht
diameter
4d
o
.-Fe-415 bars
o
.-Fe-415
0- Fe-500 bars or- 500
Fig. 16.36 Choice of Mandrel For Bar Bending Fig. 16.37 Mix-up'ofDifTerent Grade Reinforcements
560 Reinforced Concrete Design Reinforcement Detailing in Structural Concrete Members 561

l-------- Co lumn bars- Hole drille d and

bar antho red;wlth
boJln g enemicol
Co tumn ties
V
/' ~ I I 150min
Tie pref~ble " "+

1 Ld . i"--.. III !f-_-column ba r o _

l-i-
I-

j / 1/ (0
®
Be am Zs f
Beam stirrups
Wrong Right

Recommended
weld length

,
Ld = Lap length

Wrong Right
(0
,. .
Fig. 16.38 I,lIpping of Bars at Column-Beam Jllllclion
Right

/
-- V
Column ties """"==.::::
t----..
\
Fig~ 16.40 Discontinuity of B!lfS in Columns'
eors straightened as
and when construction Dummy col u mn
Slope not mar is taken up /
than 1 tz,10 Bar coat ed
B eam "-
I· I
V
: /1Ben t at top
V
with zinc rich
rich prl mer

-7 . " I

V "7- '- . .\0-

setm Tie , /
pr eferable

1'---. Co (umn
b ars ,, ,
,
0 (]) o
Wrong Right
(2)
wrong 'R.ight Fig. 16.41 Prome of Bars"For Future Expansion
Fig. 16.39 Abrupt Kinking of Bars In Columns
 562 Reinforced COhcreteDesign Reinforcemelll Derailing in Structural Concrete Members 563

• •• 1------------ _ r 1
.

. OOf»ot
• • •
.
•
.
."-
f- > 0-2L--+ c~tailed
(>50r.)
bars t-->O- 2L r ,,-, ~
CD
SECTJc>N-AA
o
Wrong
Wrong

· -. . ---------------
r
,
)
)

111 T -,

o 0 0 Aboul ;fcJia 0-1 L

•• •••• +--'------- L ----~~
SECTION-BS
sr--l \
Kink in 1 in 10
(2) preferable - - (})
Right
Right
Fig. 16.43 Curtailment of Bars in Bemus

••• -+ o 0 •

T-
.Effective

• •• ••
depth CD
•• •• ••
L 000
Wrong

® (1)
000

Wrong Right

Ftg.16.42 LappIng Arrangement of B8"rs In Beams

T _ 1-'----,

Effective
OO.

,-----J

o
L
,-". -'-j

Spacer Right
bar
-t:~~i=tClearcover
Fig. 16.44 Defective Positioning of Bars in Beams
564 Reinforced Concrete Design
Reinforcemem D(':,:ihllg ill Structural Concrete Members 565
Main reinforcement j"
~'
,
.. )1
CD
~. C. Beam Cant Hever --l Wrong
beam I
, \
X
Wrong

fJJ:
, 0" s: •. f
r Main reinforcement
.",'--------- L ----i'-j'

, I
~!J (])
\
Right
Fig. 16.46 Phll'l'llIl'nt of Bars at Slab Support
,
oV
Right
,,

~12 times design

~ lap length
,
~ll
i Waist slab
r
'- , «

CD
Wrong
'\

(})
..; ,\

Right

Fig. 16.45 Lap~lng of Bars In Cantilever Beams

(0
Right
Fig. 16.47 Plncement of Bars' in Waist Slab
566 Reinforced Concrete Design

Wall reinforcement Ar;.c~ rage length

A CHAPTER 17
1+ / -+
Earthquake Resistant
IrWall ~forcement Design and Detailing
~.
R.C, wall
/
"'-R. C. wall

,• ®
Wrong
. o
Right
17.1 INTRODUCTION

Earthquakes of destructive intensity can be classified as major natural

disasters confined to a relatively few areas of the world but resulting in
PLAN PLAN considerable damage to buildings. During the last decade of 20111 century.
four major earth quakes of magnitude 6 or more on the Richter scale have
already occurred in India. The earthquake which occurred in Uttarakashi in
Wall reinforcement Anchorage length 1991 with a magnitude of 6.6 on the Richter scale, damaged hundreds of
buildings..
The Latur earthquake of 1993 with a magnitude of 6.4 o~ Richter scale
resulted in the destruction of thousands of houses. The Jabalpur earthquake
of 1997 measuring 6 on the Richter scale destroyed thousands of houses,
The 1999 earthquake at Chamoli district of UttarPradesh with a magnitude
of 6.8 destroyed more than 4000 houses and partially damaged 25,000
. C. wall' dwellings. Recently in January 2001, a major earthquake of intensity 6.9
R. C: wall
destroyed several towns in Gujarat with considerable loss of life and prop-
erty.

® (]) During an earthquake. ground motions develop in a random manner

both horizontally and vertically in all directions radiating from the epi-
Wrong Right centre. The ground motions develop vibrations in the structure inducing
inertial forces on them. Hence structures located in seismic zones should
. PLAN PLAN be suitably designed and detailed to ensure strength, serviceability and sta-
bility with acceptable level,S of safety nnder seismic forces.
The satisfactory performance of a large number of reinforced concrete
Fig. 16.48 Reinforcements at Wall Intersections
structures subjected to severe earthquakes in various parts of the world has
demonstrated that it is possible to design such structures to successfully
withstand the destructive effects of major earthquakes.
The Indian standard codes IS: 1893_1984" 9, IS: 4236-1976 120 and IS:
13920-1993 121 have specified the minimum design requirements of earth-
quake resistant design based on the probability of occnrrence of earth-
quakes, the characteristics of the structure and the foundation and the
acceptable magnitude of damage. The A.C.1. Committee-31R I22 and other

568 Reinforced Concrete Design
national codes 123 •12<l give detail~ of codal requirements in several earth~
quake zones of the world. . .
The main criteria enshrined in the codes for fIxing the level of the
125
design seis.mic loading based on the SEAOC report are as follows: -
1) The structures should be able -to resist minor earthquakes without
damage which implies that the structural behaviour under minor
earthquake shocks should be"within the elastic range of stress.
2) The structures should-be able to resist moderate earthquakes with
minor structural and some non-structural damage. With proper design
and construction, it should be possible to restrict the damage so that it
.is repairable. . .
3) The structure should be 'able to resist major earthquakes without col-
lapse but with some structural and non-structural damage.
Depending upon the intensity of earthquake, forces are i~duced in. t.he
structural system. These forces are influenced by the dampmg, ducttltty
l26
and energy:-dissipation capacity of the structure .
The b~sic.principleof design of earthquake resistant structures is by
a) Enhancing the ductility (rotation capacity) of the structural members.
b) Increasing the energy dissipation capacity of the structure.
If the structure is designed to have the above mentioned properties, the
induced seismic forces are considerably reduced resulting in an economi-
cal structure with the added advantage of reduced probability of collapse of
the structural system,
In general buildings designedto resist the lateral loads are subjected to
very low seismic forces. Typical structural systems, 'which are generally
.,:.i.
used to resist earthquakes, are
a) Ductile moment resisting space frame.
b) Dual system, comprising ductile moment resisting frame and ductile
flexural (shear) wall.
According to Fintel 127 , a ductile structural system is one in which the
members undergo significant inelastic deformations beyond the initial
yield and the loads are resisted by the redistribution of moments so that
there is no decrease in the ultimate load resistance of the structural system.
The present day codes recommend proper ductility requirements in'
reinforced concrete members to reduce the seismic forces and their
destructive effect.
17.2 EARTHQUAKE FORCES
Determination of design· earthqti.ike· forces is computed by the following
..' . -- -- ,
Earthquake Resistant Design and Detailing 569
methods:-
a) Equivalent static lateral loading.
b) Dynamic Analysis.
In the former method, different partial. safety factors are applied to
dead,live, wind and earthquake forces to'arrive at the d~sign ultimate load.
In the IS: 456-2000 code, while considering earthquake effects, wind loads
are replaced by earthquake loads assuming that both severe wind and
earthquake do not act simultaneously. The American and Australian code
recommendations are similar but with different partial safety factors.
The dynamic analysis involves the rigorous analysis of the entire
structural system by studying the dynamic response of the struCture by
considering the total response in terms of component modal responses,
which is outside the scope of this text, and the reader may refer to special-
J28
ist texts by Clough and Penzien , New Mark l29 and various other
authorsl30-135
This chapter mainly deals with the major codal specifications of IS:
13920-1993 121 regarding the designing and detailing for ductility in
moment resisting frames and shear walls. These provisions are essential
for the design of structural sy~tems located in high intensity earthquake
zone.o;; categorized as Zones III, IV'and V in the Indian standard code IS:
1893-94 119
17.3 DUCTILITY OF REINFORCED CONCRETE MEMBERS
17.3.1 Concept of Ductility
Ductility of reinforced concrete members is defined as its ability to
accommodate large magnitude of inelastic deformations beyond the first
yield deformation without any decrease in its collapse strength or
resistance to loads. Ductility can also be defined with respect to strains,
rotations, curvatures or deQections.
Ductility based.on deflections comprises the entire configuration of the
structural member which includes thf? material and section properties,
loading, support configuration and span of the member. Fig. 17. I (a)
shows the Force-deformation behaviour of.a flexural member under
increasing loads 136. The force may be load,'moment or stress while the
deformation comprises of elongation, rotation, curvatures or strain as
shown in Fig. 17. I (b)
Let 6. 0 , lPo and eo are the ultimate deformation, curvature and rotation
respectively and Ii" ~, and S, are the .corresponding values at first yield,
then a quantitative measure of ductility "Il' c~n be expressed as tl)e rati?,.
 570 Reinforced Concre.te Design Earthquake Resistallt Design mid Detailing 571
Force . /srittle
StructuniI concrete members are subjected to several cycles of reversed
I

.~.
I cyclic loading under seismic forces. Fig. 17.2 shows typical load-
I a
deflection curves for cantilever reinforced concrete beam subjected to
I reversed cyclic loading. The beam· is reinforced on both faces to resist
I
I
tension under reversed cyclic loading. The structure responds in an elasto-
/, plastic (ductile) manner with increased deflection compared to the elastic
/;y /;u stage. The stiffness of the beam decreases with number of cycles. The
Deformation load-deflection curves tend to pinch_in near Zero Load. The stiffness deg-
radation and pinch-iIi: cft-ects are characteristic features of reinforced con-
(01 LOAD- DEFORMATION BEHAVIOUR crete beams and columns IJ7 Lood (PI
kN
Moment~ M
40
Ec

• 30
2

li:n,,· o -_(Ec+Esl)
d 20
(j)- Cycle number
Est.
curvatur~ (~)

(bl MOMENT-CURVATURE CHARACTERISTICS

-30
Fig. 17.1 Ductility of Reinforced Concrete Members

!' = ( ~J Displacements

= (~). eurvatures

(~J
-30
= Rotations Fig. 17.2 Hystersis Behaviour ~ia Reinforced Concrete Cantilever Beam

Also the curvature at any section can be expressed as The elasto-plastic behaviour of reinforced concrete is influenced
mainly by the degree <:>f cracking in concrete, strain hardening and Baus-
$=[ e,;e,,] chinger effect in steel reinforcements, bond and· anchorage between con-
crete and steel reinforcements and the 'presence of shear.
Where Eo: = strain at compression face The stiffness of the structural member gradually decreases with
ESl = strain in the tension zone. increasing cycles of loading. The primary a'im in designing structural con-
d = effective depth. crete members should be to increase the ductility so that the structure can
sustain large inelastic deformations in order to avoid sudden col\apse.
I
iI
572 Reillforced Concrete Design Earthquake Resis~a1lt Design and De/ailing 573 '

A ductile structure under overloading deforms inelastically and redis~ hk == characteristics .'coinpressi1ve strength of concrete.
tributes the excess load to elastic parts of the structure. In the case of duc- /y == yield stress of tension reinforcement. '"
tile structures. there will be sufficient warni.ngs in the form of cracks and f/ == stress in compression reinforcement ;;::; 0.87 cry
deflections of members before impending failure so that the probability of
n == -mpl +.-Ym2p? + 2mpl
I loss of life is reduced in the event of collapse of the structure.
In the limit state design procedure, it is assumed that all the critical From Fig. 17.3 Ca)
i sections in the structure will reach their maximum capacities at the design
collapse load for the structure. To. fulfill this requirement. it is essential ~ =(-'!_) and <I> =(",")"
Y n -nd U . x
that the structure should be ductile to withstand forces and deformations ,

corresponding to the yielding of the reinforcements.

Where x
u
=(0.871, AM) =
O.36fckb
(0.
_
87J,M) <x
.fck
O. 36 ~ m
17.3.2 Ductility Computations
Where X
m
maximum permissible neutral axis depth depending upon
;;::;

The d.uctility of reinforced concrete beams is influenced by the behaviour the grade of steel. '
of the cross sectional properties involving the following parameters:- = 0.53 d for Fe-250 grade steel.
= 0.48 d for FeAlS grade steel.
a) Shape, of cross sectionCRectangular or Flanged)
b).Tension reinforcement ratio.
c) Compl'ession reinforcement ratio.
d) Grade of concrete.
e) Grade of steel reinforcement.
f) Ultimate compressive strain in concrete. - 1 - . _.. -1-
g) Yield and Ultimat.e strain of reinforcement. d

An expression for the curvature ductility of a reinforced concrete beam

can be derived using the above parameters. Referring to Fig. 17.3 and
using the following notations:-
Ast • • •• ~ €ym

d = effective depth. Section Strain

ASl ;;::; area of tension reinforcement. (a) SINGLY REINFORCED ?ECTION
Asc == area of compression reinforcement. Ecu
'.'
nd = depth of neutral axis based on elastic theory.
III = =
modular ratio [280/3 "'b] A sc +::::::::::l1 ' ,

p, = percentage tension steel [100 A)bd]= ,-_._._f- d

p, = Percentage compression steel [ 100 A.Jbd]

J
Ey ;;::; Yield strain of Tension steel.

~ Curvature ductility = (~)

Asti::::::::J Eym
E ;;::; ultimate compressive strain in concrete.
cu
Xu ;;::; neutral axis depth at ultimate stage. Section Strain
<1>, = yield curvature.
(bl DOUBLY REINFORCED SECTION
CPu == ultimate curvature. of
Fig. l'i~3 D~ctility Jiiiiiforce<fconcreteSe"dlons
E, = modulus of elasticity of eoncrete.
 Reinforced C?flCrete Design
Earthquake Resistant Design-andDetaililzg 575

.. Curvature d uel.'1'uy :::: J.l:::: (~")

- :::: -E,"(d
$y
--
$y
-lid)
Xu
17.3.3 Factors Influencing Ductility

a) Tension steel ratio (p,)

or - - [1 + mpl ~ YI1l 2P/ + 211lPI ]
1_' -feu ...(17.1)
WE,) (xjd)
The ductility of a reinforced concrete section increases with the decrease in
Using this equation, the varintion of curvature ductility )l with the ten- steel ratio Pt or (Pt - pJ as shown in Figs. 17.4 (a) and (b). Excessive steel
sion steel ratio PI can be studied. reinforcement will result in the crushing of concrete before the steel yields
Similarly for doubly reinforced concrete beams, a similar expression resulting in brittle failure corresponding to ~l :::; 1.0. Hence it i.s advanta-
for ductility factor can be derived. geous to design the sections as under reinforced nne! the code IS; 456~2000
Stress i~ compression steel at ultimate stage = f'y prohibits the use of over reinforced sections. which are prone to brittle
failure.
Then from force equi.1ibrium, we have
[0. 36 10, b.x. +1,' A,J = 0.87 II'". b) Grade of steel and concrete

d =[0 .87 fl - (f
(=-) ~ Y
The ductility is influenced by the grade of concrete and steel. The Ultimate
J;,fl ] 0.36.fck
I
)
e
strain in concrete(EcJ is a function of the charactcristic strength of con-
Since .Iy :::: 0.87 J; crete, rate of loading and strengthening effect of stirrups. The IS: 456"2000
code recommends a value of E", = 0.0035. Figs 17.4(a) and (b) clearly
('dx.) (0.871,)
= (fl, - p,) 0.36J;k
indicate that the ductility incrcases with the characteristic strength of con-
crete (fcJ and decreases with the increase in characteristic strength of steel
and C/y). According to Jain J37 , ductility is inversely proportional to the square
of cry. From the ductility point of view, it is more desirable to lise Fe-250

(x.) = (p, - p,) ( 0.36J;k

0.87 1 ,d) grade steel having a larger percentage of elongation than the Fe-415 grade
deformed bars, which have comparatively lower value of percentage elon-
gation.
and Lower g~ade steel has defined and longer yield plateau and hence the
plastic hinges developed at 9ritical sections will have larger rotation
capacity leading to greater energy dissipation. It is important to note that
I'=(~)
~Y
and E,=(J/E,)
.
lower grade steels have a higher ratio of ultimate to yield strength ~nd the
higher ratio of (/'/1,), is desirable since it results in an increased length of
plastic hinge and also increased plastk rotation capacity of the critical sec-
tions.

I' = [(0.00035)(0.3 610.)(1'- n )E,]

(fl, - p,)(0.871,)
Equatio~s 17.1 and 17.2 can be used to evaluate the curvature ductility
of smgly remforced and doubly reinforced sections respectively.
The variations of curvature ducti.lity with steel ratio PI and (Pt - Pc) is
shown for different grades of steel Fe-250 and Fe-415 and for different
grades,of concrete from M-15 to M-30 in Figs. 17.4 (a) and (b)
...(17.2)
Based on these factors, Fe-250 grade mild. steel is better suited for use
as reinforcements in- earth-quake resistant design. However the use of Fe-
250 grade mild steel results in larfer cross sections of flexural members.
Hence the Indian Standard Code IS: 13920_1993'" permits the use of
commonly used Fe-415 grade steel but prohibits the use of grades higher
than Fe-415. The code also "limits the minimum grade of concrete to M-20.
High strength concrete is also undesirable due to its lower ultimate com-
pressive strain (Ecu ) which reduces the ductility. Low density concrete is
also undesirable -due to its relatively poor performance under reversed
 576 Reinforced Concrete Design
Earthquake Resistant Design and Detailing 577
~yc.lic loadin~.Based o,n this factor, t~e American J22 and Canadian!24 codes
12
IIiTIlt the max~mum cylinder strength of low density concrete to a value of
M-30 for use 111 earth quake ~esistant design.
3-
c)· Compression steel ratio (p,) ~ 8
v
~
~

The curvature ductility (~) is inver~~ly proportional to the parameters (P, _ ~

Pc) as shown 111 Eq. 17.2 the ductilIty Illcreases with the decrease in the 5 4
.value. of (PI - Pc). Hence the ductility inGreases with the increase in com-
pressIOn steel. Most of the national codes prescribe limits for the m· .
"">
~
~
u
' . Intmum O!:--'--....".-;;--'-+~'-""~~
an d maximum steel ratIos to be used in earthquake resistant desi n of o 0·8 1-6 2,4 3·2
structural m e m b e r s . ' g Percentage_$teel, Pt or (Pt -Pcl
(a) CURVATURE DUCTILITY tN BEAMS WITH Fe-250 STEEL
d) Shape of cross seclion

In the case of .flanged (Tee) beams, due to the enlarged compression face,
the neutral axIS. at collapse stage falls within the flange resulting in the
IOcrease of ductllIty.ln such cases the ductility can be estimated . F'
17.4. . usmg Ig,
;
~
8 \~~
~,~'&

e) Lateral Reinforcements i 4

o
~::=§~§E;;~~~-,
aO~~--c;;';;_~-t,.-~--;;~~-i
0·8 1-6 2'4 3·2
The.provision of Lateral reinforcements in the form of stirrups and the Use
Percentage $Ieel, Pt or (,Pt - Pcl
?f
circular hoops. t? confine the concrete in the compression zone tends to
Improve the' ductilIty
. by preventing premature shear and compression f m'1- (b) CURVATURE DUCTILITY IN BEAMS WITH Fe-415 STEEL
ure, ~ hus mcreasmg the deformation capacity of reinforced concrete beams. Fig. 17.4 Ductility Characteristics of Reinforced Concrete Beams

17.4 DESIGN PRINCIPLES and CODE PROVISIONS
The basic principles of modern code provisions dealing with earth ak
'd . . que
reslsta~t eSlg? have evolved from rather simplified concepts of the
dynamIc behavlO~r of structu~es and have been influenced to a large extent
by field observatIOns of the performance of structures subjected to actual
earthquakes.
It is pertinent to note that many structures built in the 1930' d energy resultingfrorn the earthquake. The codes have accepted the fact
d' d s an
eSlgne on the basis of more or less arbitrarily chosen lateral forces ha
successfully with st?od se.vere earthquakes. The satisfactory performan~:
of such structures IS attflbuted to one or more of die followin fac-
tors. 138,139 I g
I) Yielding at critical sections of members, which increased the period of
vlhratlon o~ such structures but allow~d them to absorb greater
amounts of mput energy resulting from an earthquake:
2) Greater actual strength of such structures resulting from non-structural
elements, which were generally ignored, in the analysis.
3) The significant energy dissipation capacity of non-structural elements.
4) The reduced response of the structure due to yielding of the founda-
lions,
.The buildings designed under the present code provisions would be
expected to undergo fairly large inelastic deformations absorbing the
that it is uneconomical to design buildings to resist major earthquakes
elastically and the recognition of the capacity of structures possessing ade-
quate strength and ductility to withstand major earthquakes by inelastic
hehavior. '
The capacity of a structure to deform in a ductile manner beyond the
'yield limit without significant loss of strength results in absorption of
major port.ion ~f energy from an earthquake without serious
 578 Reinforced Concrete Design
Extensive Laboratory investigations o- l4
have demonstrated that rein~
144
forced concrete members and their connections designed and detailed
according to the provisions of the present day codes do possess the
necessary ductility required to respond inelastically to earthquakes of
major iritensity without significant loss of ultimate strength.
The major objective of the special design and detailing provisions of
the Indian standard code IS: 13920 is to ensure adequate ductility without
loss of strength for structural members such as beams, columns and wa"Hs
and to prevent sudden or non ductile types of failure.
The principal design considerations to be followed to ensure sufficient
ductility of the members are,
a) Use of low percentage of tensile reinforcement of relatively low grade
and use of compression reinforcement.
b) Prevent. shear failures by using adequate stirrups and ensuring flexural
failure associated with under reinforced sections.
c) Use of confined concrete in the compression zone by using closely
spaced hoops or spirals to avoid compression failure of concrete asso-
ciated with over reinforced sections.
d) Reinforcement detaifing with regard 10 anchorage. splicing and quan-
tity of minimum reinforcement in the section.
e) Continuity in construction to improve the inelastic behaviour of the
structure with moment redistribution and energy dissipation at several'.
plastic hinges. . ,
Structural stability and stiffness are also important factors to be con-
sidered in the design of earthquake resistant structures. The structural sys-
tem should be so designed such that the plastic hinges are formed at
suitable locations resulting in the failure of individual structural elements·
only without leading to the instability or progressive collapse of the struc-
ture. The use of redundant structures such as continuous rigid frames will
ensure the development of alternative load paths thus helping the
redistribution of forces and dissipation of energy, preventing progressive
collapse of the structure.
In order to ensure ductile behaviour with minimal damage it is impor-
.tant that the foundations should not yield prior to the failure of the super
structure. Hence the moments, shear and axial forces transfelTed from the
super structure to the foundation system under conditions of actual yield-
ing. should be resisted by the foundations with the margin of safety of 1.5
applied to the loads and 1.15 applied to the materials. Correspondingly the
ultimate moment corresponding to actual yielding at a section in super
structllr~' is obtained as its characteristic or nominal moment capacity
without applying the partial safety factors. This will ensure that the foun-
uation is relatively stronger when compared to the super structure. This
Earthquake Resistant Design and Detailing
recommendation is yet to be incorporated in the Indian Codes J2O while the
l22
American and Canadian l24 codes contain this concept which will result
in ductile behaviour of the superstructure without any serious distress in
the foundation system.
17.5 INDIAN STANDARD CODE PROVISIONS FOR
EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DESIGN
The salient features of the specifications of the Indian Standard code IS:
13920-1993 for design and detailing of flexural members, columns and
shear walls in earthquake resistant design are summarized in the following
sections '26 • I
17.5.1 Flexural Members (!learns)
I) Flexural members should have an overall depth 'h' not exceeding one
fourth of the clear span mainly to limit shear deformations. The width
of the member (b) should be not less than 200mm and (b/h) ratio of·
more th~n 0.3 to avoid lateral instability and greater resistance totor-
sian.
2) The percentage tensile reinforcement in the section (P,) should not
exceed 2.5 toensure ductile behaviour of the member under reversals
of displacements in the inelastic range and to avoid congestion of
reinforcements and to limit shear stresses.
3) Minimum reinforcement ratio of Pm" = 0.24-"//o,lf, is specified at both
top and bottom faces of the member for the entire length (with mini-
mum of 2. bars placed at each face) to prevent sudden brittle failure
due to cracking of concrete.
4) Reinforcement detailing in flexural members of a 'd·uctile-framed
structure in which the beams are assumed to yield under design earth-
quake forces with the development of reversible plastic hinges in the
vicinity of beam-column junctions should comply with the following
specifications. .
a) The reinforcements resisting positive moments at a joint face
should be not less than half the negative moment reinforcement at
that joint face. .
b) The top and bottom face reinforcement at any section along the
length of the member should be not less than one-fourth of 'he
negative moment reinforcement at the joint face on either side.
 580 Reinforced Concrete Design Earthquake Resistant Design and Detailing 581

cJ' The top and bottom reinforcements should be taken through col- [
u'mn and extended to the adjacent span so that continuity is main-
tained in the case of interior junctions. In the case of end junctions
of a beam and colu'mn, the beam reinforceme~ts must be extended
to the far face of the column core and provided with an anchorage
length of (Ld + 1O~) where L d is the development length of the bars
of diameter ~ in tension as shown in Fig. 17.5.
,
,,(Anchorage length) Bars extende d
Fig. 17.6 Lap Splice In a Flexural Member
/" Ld + 10 ~bottom fo/ntlnuit y
/~top faces is computed by considering the equilibrium of forces shown
~ '--
,
'~
in Figs. 17.7(b) and (c) for the right 'and left sway conditions
respectively. Fig. 17.7 (a) shows the uniformly distributed dead
+ .(g) and live loads (q) on the beam of clear span L,. Accordingly,
"'-~bottom the maximum design shear forces are cbmputed as follows:-
'C
,.

i'
1 .. w. = 1.2(g + q)

(01 END JUNCTION (bIINTERIOR JUNCTION

Fig. 17.5 Arrangement of Reinforcements at End and Inte~ior Junctions
d) Lap splices of flexural reinforcement is not permitted in the vicin-
ity of plastic hinges to safeguard against spalling of concrete under
large reversed strains. However welded splices or:'mechanical
connections are permitted in locations far away from plastic hinge
zone.
e) Lap splices if required are provided at regions other than plastic
hinge zones. Concrete is confined in these zones by transverse
reinforcement in the form of closed hoops (135 hook and 1O~
0
extension) spread over the entire splice length at a spacing not
exceeding 150mm as shown in Fig. 17.6
f) The reinforcements provided should account for possible shifts in
the contraflexure points, which occur under the combined effects
of dead and earthquake loads.
g) In earthquake resistant· design of flexural members, shear failures
should not occur before the development of plastic hinges due to
flexure. Hence the shear forces are suitably over estimated by
considering the plastic moment capacities of 1.4 MU1 and 1.4 Mur at
the ends of the beam as shown in Fig. 17.7 (a) and (b). The maxi-
mum design shear forces Vul and Vur at the left and right support
The sign conventions and shear force diagrams are shown in Figs.
17.7(b) alid (c)
h) Due to the alternate direction of shear forces developed due to
earthquake forces, the directions of diagonal tension also changes
and hence inclined bars are generally not allowed as shear rein-
forcement. Only· vertical stirrups cali effectively resist the shear
whether it is positive or negative depending upon the sway in the
member as shown in Fig. 17.8(a) and (b)
i) Web reinforcement in .earthquake resistanFstructures must .be in
, the form of closed stirrups or hoops place perpendicular to the
longitudinal reinforcement and provided throughout the length of
"
the member. The hoops should \lave a minimum diameter of ~, = 8
mn1 in beams with a clear span- exceeding 5m. The free ends of the
hoops should be bent at.l35' ,vith a minimum bar extension of 1O~
as shown in Fig. 17.8 (a) to ensure proper anchoring of the bar
. ends in the core of concrete.
'j) The purpose ,of the hoops is to confine the c"itcrete and prevent
' .•. buckling of the longitudinal bars particularly- in the vicinity
 Reinforced·Concrete Design I Earthquake Resistant Design and Detailing 583

/10
H 0Ps tor
vertical shea r 135'

o
Wu .1·2(g+g)
+ 1/ 1/ ~~s
(a) Dead and live loads
on beam
- JJ-¢~"
.,p--- Ln---,j<

(0) Hoops or closed stirrups

1·4MuL

Plastic Hoop spacing

hinge ~d/4 & 8~1

:=50mm
2d --i Hoop spacing //
~d/2
(bl Design shear farces In beam (Sway to RighI)

(b) Spacing of hoops

Fig. 17.8 Type of Web Reinforcement for Reversed Shear Condillon

r-' 17.5.2 Framed Members subjected to flexure .nd

.xi.llo.ds (Columns)

a)
(c) Design shear forces in beam (Sway to left)
Fig. 17.7 CombJnatlon of Design Shear Forces in Beams
b)
of the beam-column junctions where reversible plastic hinges
develop with the likely hood of the concrete cover spalling after a
few cycles of inelastic rotations. The I.S Code-13920 121 .specifies
closer spacing of hoops over a length equal to twice the effective
depth from the face of the column. The spacing of the hoops
should not exceed (d/4) or 8 times the diameter of the smallest
longitudinal bar, with the first hoop located at a distance not
exceeding 50 mm from the column face. The spacing of the hoops
beyond 2d should not exceed half the effective depth as shown in
Fig.17.8(b).
Columns subjected to a factored axial stress greater that 0.1 fc, under
the effect of earthquake forces are grouped.under this category. The
minimum cross sectionaf dimension Jf the member should be
not less
than 200mm and the ratio of short cross sectional dimension to the
perpendicular (large) dimension should preferably be not less than
0.4. Also for columns wit.h unsupported length exceeding 4m, the
shortest dimension should be not less than 300mm
In earthquake resistant design of framed members, the combined flex-
ural resistance of the columns should be greater than the beams at the
column-beam junctions, to ensure that plastic hinges develop first at
the beam ends rather than the column ends facilitating ductile beha-
viour of the frame. In this regard, the I.S.Code 13920 does not make
any specific recommendations. However the American code- ACI
318-89 and the Canadian code CAN-A23.3-M-84 specify that the sum
of the factored moment resistances of the columns framing into the
joint should be at least'! 0 percent higher than the slim of the charac-
teristic moment resistances of the beams framing into the joint as
shown in Fig. 17.9(a). •
 584 Reinforced Concrete Design Earthquake Resistant Design and Detailing 585
Joint-A
Where Mobl and MUb2 are the factored moments of resistance of beam
j ends 1 and 2 framing into the column from opposite faces and 'h st ' is
the height of storey as shown in Fig. 17.9 (b).
e) In the case of column joints, special confining reinforcements in the
form of hoops on both sides extending over a length L, from the joiill
face as shown in Fig. 17.IO(a) should be provided.
t- Special confining
Lo reinforcement (hoops)

t (a)'Detailing 0'
hoops at
Muc' ::Factored ultimate moment column-beam" junction
capacity of column end
Lo II--~I
Mukb:: Characteristic ultimate moment
capacity"of beam end
= '·4 Mub
+...lJ...+-ll
(Mu'1+ MUC2) 1,' (Mukb,+ Mukb2) n::::t:;HiY':,pecial contini ng
r.einforcement (hoop~'
(a) MOMENT RESISTANCE
REQUIREMENT (b) Detailing at column
.. footing junction
Vu = 1-4 (Mub, + MUb2 ) I hsl

(b) SHEAR RESISTANCE

(c) Detailing In column
REQUIREMENT
under discontinued walls

Fig. 17.9 Column Moment and Shear .Resistance Requirements

c)

d)
Lap splices are permitted in the central half of the column length and
not at tne ends where spalling of the concrete due to plastic hinge is
likely to develop in the member. Hoops are recommended over the
splice length with spacing of 150 mm and at any section, only 50 per-
cent of the bars should be spliced,
The design shear force in a column should be taken as the larger of the
- 0
iii
,
o _ Mezzanin.
f10re or
loft
D ,
Cd) Columns with
varying stiffness

following computations: -
I) The shear force due to the factored loads.
2) The shear force in the column due to the development of plastic
Fig. 17.10 DetalUng of Columns in Ear.thquake Resistant Design
moments in the beams framing into the column computed as
V, = 1.4 (M,,, tM,,,)/h,, , The length L, should be not less than the following:-

i
"
 ~86 Reinforced Concrete Design
1): The larger lateral dimension of the member at the section where
yielding may occur"
2) 1/6 orthe clear length of the column.
3) 450mm
The spacing of the hoops used as confining reinforcement should not
exceed one-fourth of the minimum dimension of the member but need not
be less thr1ll75mm or more than 100 mm. The cross sectional area (11'1) of
the bar to be_ used as confining reinforcement is given by the relation,
O.09\D'(%.J[~.-I]
I
for circular hoops I spiral
A,~
,
O.185.rDh
(f..7; )[A~-l ]
d g
for rectangular hoops
Where
s = pitch of spiral or spacing of hoops.
D k = Diameter of core, measured to the outside of the spiral or hoop.
DII = Longer dimension of the rectangular hoop measured to its outer
face, but not to exceed 300mm.
AJ,1 = gross area of the column section, and
~k = area of the concrete core (contained within the outer dimension, <?f
the hoop/spiral)
f) At the junction of the column and footing or 'mat, special confining
reinforcement should be provided to a distance of at least 300mm; to
. account for possible development of plastic hinges at the column base
as sllOwn in Fig. 17.10 (b)
The following design and detailing specifications of 1$:13920-1993
code shvuld be followed in the case of ductile shear walls.
a) The thickness of any part of the wall should preferably be not less than
150 mm. Thinner walls are susceptible to local buckling at regions of
high compressive strain. The walls can be thickened at highly con~­
pressed zones or by providing flanges or cross walls to improve bend-
ing resistance and ductility. The LS. Code restricts the effective flange
width of flanged walls to
1) Half the distance to an adjacent shear wall web and
2) One-tenth of the total wall height.
b) Shear walls should be reinforced with a minimum percentage rein-
forcement of 0.25 percent of the gross cross section in both vertical
and horizontal directions. The diameter of the bar lIsed should not
exceed one-tenth of the wall thickness and the spacing of the bars
should not exceed,
Earthquake Resistant Design w"d.q~!~(ji{/I!g
I) 1/5 of the horizontal length of wall.
2) Thrice the wall(web) thickness.
3) 450mm
The vertical reinforcement comprising both the distributed reinforce.
ment and concentrated reinforcement near wall ends should be
designed to resist the flexural and axial forces.
c) In the case of walls, which do not IlaVC t1angcs(boundary clcments),
concentrated vertical reinforcement should be provided towards each
end face of the wall in addition to the uniformly distributed reinforc~­
ments. A minimum of 4 bars of 12 mm diameter arranged in at least
two layers should be provided near each end face of wall. The
concentrated vertical flexural reinforcement near the ends of the wall
should be tied together by transverse ties as in a column. This will
confine the concrete in the core and ensure yielding withollt buckling
of the com pression bars when a plastic hinge is formed.
d) The shear wnll must be designed to prevent premature brittle shear
failure before the development of its full plastic resistance in bending.
Similar to column design, it is desirable to design the shear resistance
of the' wall for an over estimated shear force. Due to severe shear
cracking under reversed cyclic loading, the shear resisted by concrete
in the plastic hinge zone is neglected.
In the case' orcolumns supporting discontinued stiff members such as
walls or trusses" special confining reinforcement should be provided over
the entire height of the column as shown in Fig. 17.1O(c).
Special confining reinforcement over the full height of column is nec-
essary where there is significant variation of stiffness along the height of
columns, which are provided in mezzanine floors or lofts a's shown in Fig.
17.IO(d)
17.5.3 Detailing of Joints in Ductile Frames
a) The joints of beam-columns in ductile frames should be designed to
have adequate shear strength and ductility to accommodate large
inelastic reversible rotations under severe earthquakes. The shear
strength ofjoints depends primarily on the grade of c~ncrete and is not
sensitive to the magnitude of shear reinforcement'22. Hence the ACI-
ASCE Committee140 recommends the use of high strength concrete
at joints of ductile frames resulting in good compaction and higher
strcngth.
 588 Reinforced Concrete Design
Earthquake Resistam /)('~h'~' . dD '['
r--<Or-----~ , """ • {U! elm mg 589
b) When the beams and columns meet at a joint, the special 'confining
r--- ,
I
reinforcement (hoops) should be provided near the column ends as I I
shown in Fig. 17.10 (a). In the case of externally confined joint where I ,
I ,
the beams frame into all the vertical faces of the joint, having a beam I ,
width at least three-fourths of the column width, the spacing of hoops Shear I ,
to be provided in the joint region maybe taken as twice that required wall II 'I
at the end of the column but the spacing is limited to 1'50 mm accord, I I
ing to the codal specifieations. I
I
c) In the case of beams joining the columns from one side only, devel- I
opment length requirement of the flexural reinforcement within the I
,
joint as shown in Fig. 17.8(b) should be provided. The junction zone I
of beams and columns is an area of high concentration of beam, col- I
umn and hoop bars. Hence extreme care should be taken in detailing I
PI .
of reinforcements at joirts to provide for proper stress transfer and to
o I.;, .'...;.." "
, /'1' ", -cHc'
'.".....<';i~ h'Inge
I
~ usllc
avoid congestion and faeilitate placing of concrete with proper com- n ;;>7,..........
'-n.?/;;~J

paction, Shear wall sUbjecte~

Deformotion of ductile
d) In the case of precast construction subject to seismic loading, the most to lateral loads "
shtlar wall
critical location is the beam-column connection. Investigations by
PiIlai and Kirkl'l has shown that by careful detailing it is possible to
produce ductile beam-column connections having adequate strength,
stiffness and ductility and energy-dissipating capacity. ••

17.5.4 Detailing of shear wall structures

P'I an
Shear wall or more appropriately termed flexural wall'struetures are verti-
Fig. 17.11 Shear Wall Slnl('hu....,
cal cantilevers from the foundations and form'the lateral load resisting
system. Shear walls are subjected to axial load, bending moment and shear shock-isolation
. concepts
. as applied to earthquukl' ft's',st .. an I tT'
s ructures. hiS
"
forces. A typical shear wall deforming under lateral loads is shown in Fig. concept IS a radical departure from current Nt'ism ',,, d . . I
. . ' "- eSlgn practice. ts
17. II. Unlike beams, shear wall is relatively thin and deep and is subjected successful Implementation on a large scale pnllHisc.'s s','fi . l'fi
.. . . ' ' •. gm lCant simp 1 1-
to large axial forces. The wall is generally designed as an axially loaded catIOns In the. deSign of tall remforced concn~ll'' ,struct,nes In . cart hqua ke
beam, capable of forming reversible plastic hinges with sufficient rotation zones.
capacity at the base. In a significant deviation from the presenl philost'l,l f d eSlgmng
. . an
.. . ' -.. 'ly 0
The I.S. Code also provides guide lines regarding the design of bound- enttre structure to WIthstand the dlstortlOlls H,sultil,g f rth k
. . ' . . . ' rom ea qua e
ary elements, coupled shear walls with openings and the reader may refer mottons, an adaptive system IS deSigned to !f.;ollllL' til" u . f
142·146 for f urt her lOlonnation
, , . - '" pper portIOns 0 a
to the speci'fiIed vanous
. relerences
& . ." . on t he structure
, from .destructtve" vibrations by confininl', I1lt'....,cvere ,. . d'IstortlOns
. to
design and detailing of structures subjecled to seismic forces. a speCially deSigned portIOn at Its base.
A number of isolation devices 'or mechulli~nH: h'\ b"! d
f
o

• ld' 11'1" <ve eenpropose

me u mg a so t storey with hmgtn~ col~mn,'\' III c"Olubination ball bearin
0 0 , " •

17.6 Isolation Concepts in Earthquake Resistant Design

and rod system I", steel balls on ellIpSOIdal cavitl"A"" A n exh aus t'IVe ana·
• ." , , . f ,
19
Recent advances in EarthquaUresistant design and the results of observa- YSls of as~l~mlc base Isolation IS, pr~senled ?y I<olly"n'and the reader may
tion of structures subjected to recent earthquakes have brought about the refer to th,s refe(ence for upto date Informall<lIl Oil Ihe subject ,J' " ..

examinatiory of earthquake,adaptiye systems and the development' 'of " Ba~ically ap ,isolation sys'e-')' f'lE a mu~tislpl'CY, structure 'co,mpns"S
 590 Reinforced Concrete Design
Earthquake Resistant D'es/gll and Delailing 591
resisting element which exhibits linear elastic behavior under the maxi-
strong earthquakes would I· . ..
mum wind loading, but yields under earthquake forces slightly greater than J resll t In slgmflcant savings in the rep'lir and
~that corresponding to the maximum wind loading. By allowing the :e~ a~ement c~sts. ~eveloped COUlltri.CS like U.S.A and Japan haver dC~CJ­
isolation mechanism at the base of the structure as shown in Fig. 17.12 to P d tInct lIsed 150lat1OI1 systems in multi storeyed buildings located in earth
qua k e zones. <
yield at a predetermined lateral load, the structure above it is effectively
isolated or shielded from the forces that would otherwise cause inelastic
deformations. In this way, the isolating mechanism sets an upper limit to
the forces that can be transmitted to the structure from the foundation. The
structure supported on an isolating mechanism need only to be designed
for vertical and wind loads, with special attention for earthquake resistance
focused only on the isolating mechanism at its base. This concept clearly
offers economic and technical ,~dvantages when compared to the tradi-
tional method of analyzing a complex structure under ea(th quake motion
and providing ductile members and connections throughout the entire I
i:
structure. ij

1/

f
Mulli storeyed
building

Shock ISolot:.:io~n:::JE=t_E::1_J::=L! Foundation level

system
Fig. 17.12 Shock Isolation Mechanism

Field observations of buildings in earth-quake damaged areas has con-

clusively shown that an effective isolation system not only allows the
structure above to remain elastic during a strong earthquake but spares the
non structural elements from extensive distress. The non structural ele~
ments comprising partitions. glazing, mechanical equipment etc in a typi-
cal Illultistorey structure account for about 80% of the building's cost and
hence a positive means of preventing distress in such elements during
 Refereneees 593

14. SP: 24-1983, Explan~tory Hand Book on IS: 456, B'i,reau of Indian
Standards, New DeIhl, 1983.
References 15. SP: 3~, Hand Book of Concrete Reinforcement and Detailing, Bureau
oflndlan Standards, New Delhi, 1987.
16. SP: 23-1982, Hand Book of Concrete Mixes (Based on Indian Stan-
I. NEVILLE, A.M., Propelties of Concrete, Third Edition, E.L.B.S, dards), Bureau oflndian Standards, New Delhi, 1982.
Longman, London, 1981. 17. IS: 875(Part-I)-1987, Code of Practice for Design Loads (Other than
2. RAINA, V.K., COllcrete Bridge Practice, Analysis, Design and . Earthquake) for Buildings and Structures, Part-I, Dead Loads (Sec-
Economics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, ond Revision), B.I.S., 1989.
1991,p.589. 18. IS: 875(Part-2)-1987, Code of Practice for Design Loads (Other than
3. EV ANS, R.H., The Plastic Theories for the Ultimate Strength of . Earthquake) for Buildings and Structures, Imposed Loads (Second
Reinforced Concrete Beams, Journal of the Institution of Civil Engi:-- revision), B.I.S., 1989.
neers, London, Dec.1943, pp.98-121. 1.9. IS: 875(Part-3)-1987, Code of Practice for Design Loads (Other than
4. ROWE, R.E., CRANSTON, W.B., and BEST, B.C., New Concepts Earthquake) for Buildings 'and Structures, Part-3, Wind Loads (Sec-
in the Design of Structural Concrete, Structural Engineer, Vo1.43, ?nd revision), B.I.S., 1989.
I
1965, jJp.339-403. 20. IS: 875(Part-4 & 5)-1987, Code of Practice for Design Loads (Other

I 5., BATE, S.C.c., Why Limit State

,
1968,pp.103-108.
Desi~n, Concrete, March than Earthquake) for Buildings and Structures, Part-4, Snow Loads &
Part-5, Special loads and Load Combinations (Second Revision),
B.I.S., 1989.
I
i
6. KRISHNA RAW, N, Limit State Design for Structural Concrete,.
Proceedings of the Institution of Engineers (India), Vo1.51, Jan.1971,
pp.138-143.
21. IS: 1893-1984, Criteria for Earthquak,e resistant Design of Structures
(Fourth Revision), B,I.S., 1984. .
7. BS: 8110-1985, Code of Practice for Ilse of Concrete (Part-1 & 2), 22. IS: 383-1970, Specifications for Coarse and Fine Aggregates from
I British Standards Institution, London, 1985. Natural sources for concrete, (second revision), B.I.S., 1970.
k 8. ACI: 318-1989, Building Code Requirements (or Reinforced Con- 23. SHORT, A., and KINNIBURGH, W., Light Weight Concrete, Asia
crete, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan. 1989. Publishing House, 1968, p.3-29.
9. AS: 3800-1988, Concrete Structures, Standards Association of Aus- 24. BLAKE, L.S., The Development of Concrete Blocks in Great Brit-
tralia, 1988. ain, Fifth International Congress of the Precast Industry, London,
10. DIN: 1045-1988, Structural use of Concrete, Design & Construction, British Precast Industry & British Precast Federation, 1966, pp.
Din Deutsches Institute Fir Normung E.V., 1988. 61-71.
11. IS:456-2000, Indian Standard Code of Practice for Plain and Rein- 25. GERWICK, B.C., Effective utilization of Prestressed Light weight
forced Concrete (Fourth Revision), Bureau of Indian Standards, July concrete, VoU Cement and Concrete Association London 1968 pp.
2000, pp.100. 243-250.
12. UNNIKRISHNA PILLAI,S., DEVDAS MENON., 'Reinforced Con- 26, KRISHNA RAJU, N., DWARAKANATH, H.V., and GAURI-
crete Design, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co, New Delhi, 1998, SHANKARA SINGH, Production and Properties of ffigh density
p.9. Concrete Using Haematite aggregates, proceedings of the
13. SP: 16-1980, Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS: 456, International Symposium on Innovative World of Concrete 1993
Bangalore, pp,3:305. . . , ,
Bureau of Indian Standards, New Deihi, 1980.
I
·1
·1\"

i
I
 Referencees 595
594 Reinforced Concrete Design
42. CORNELL, C.A., A Probability based Structural Code, Journal of
27. DAVIS, B.S., BROWNE, F.L and WITTER,H.C., Properties of High
R the American Concrete Institute, Vol.66, Dec.1969, pp.974-985.
Density Concrete made with Iron Aggregate. Journal of the Amen
can Concrete Institute, Procecdings, '<01.52,1956, pp.705-26. 43. RANGANATHAN, 1'., Reliability Analysis and Dcsign of StnIC-
tures, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co, Ltd, New Delhi, 1990.
28. KRISHNA RAJU.N and KRISHNA REDDY, Y., A Critical Review
of of the Indian, British and American methods of Concrete MlX 44. ACI: 318-1989, Building Code requirements for Reinforced Con-
Design, The Indian Concrete Journal, April. 1989, pp. 196-201. crete, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, 1989.
ACI: 613, American Concrete Institute Standard Recommended 45. SP: 16-1980, Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS: 456, 13.I.S,
29.
Practice for selecting proportions for Concret~. ACI manual of Con- New Delhi, 11th Reprint, 1999.
·
crete Prae tIce,
Pa·t I American
<I - • •
Concrete Inslltute, 1967, pp.211-1 to 46. VARYANI, U.H., and RADHAJI,A., Manual for Limit State Design
211-7 of Reinforced Concrete Members, Khanna Technical Publications,
TEYCHENNE, D.C., FRANKLIN and ERONTROY, H.C., Design New Delhi, 1984.
30.
. te MI'xcs
of NOfma I Canelc ., DelJartment of the EnvIronment, London, 47. McGREGOR,J.G and HANSON, J.M., Proposed Changes in Shear
H.M .S.O, 1975,pp.31. Provisions for Reinforced Concrete and Prestressed concrete beams,
IS: 10262-1982, Indian Standard Recommended Guide lines for Proceedings of the A.C.l, Vol.66, No.4, 1969, pp.276-288.
31.
Concrete Mix Design, B.I.S., New Delhi, 1980, pp. 1-21. 48. MURASHEV, V., SIGALOV,E., BAIKOV, V., Design of Reinforced
KRISHNA RAJU.N., Design of Concrete. Mixes (Fourth Edition), Concrete Structures, Mir Publishers, Moscow, 1968.
32.
C.B.S. publishers & distributors, New Deihl, 1988, pp.I-316. 49. KRISHNA RAJU,N., Prestressed concrete (Third Edition) Tata
BS: 8110-1985, British Standard Code of Practice for the Structural McGraw Hill Publishing Co, Ltd, 1995.
33.
Use of Concrete (Parts I & 2), British Standards InstItutIOn, London, 50. ACI: 318-1989, A.C.1. Building Code requirements for Reinforced
1985. Concrete, American Concrete, Detroit, Michigan. U.S.A., 1989.
34. IS: 432(Part-I)-1982, Specification for Mild steeland Mediiun Ten- 51. VARGHESE, P.c., Limit State Design of Reinforced concrete,
sile bars for Concrete Reinforcement (ThIrd ReVISIOn), 1982. Prentice hall of India Private Ltd, New Delhi, 1994, pp.388-419.
35. IS: 1786-1985, Specification for High st;ength Deformed steel bars 52. TIMOSHENKO,S and GOODIER, J.N., Theory of Elasticity, Third
for Concrete Reinforcement (Third RevisIOn), 1985. Edition, McGraw Hill, New York, 1970.
36. IS: 1566-1982, Specification for Hard drawn steel wire fabric for 53. POPOV, E.P., Mechanics of Materials, II Edition, Prentice hall
concrete reinforcement (Second revision), 1982. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1978..
37. IS: 2062-1992, Specification for steel for general structural purpo- 54. SRINATH, L.S., Advanced Mechanics of Solids, Tata McGraw Hill
ses(Fourth Revision), 1992. Publishing Co,Ltd, New Delhi, 1980, pp. 223-259.
38. ROWE I' E CRANSTON, W.B., BEST, B.C., New Concepts in the 55. KRISHNA RAJU,N., and GURURAJA, D.R., Advanced Mechanics
Design 'or S'tructural Concrete, Structural Engineer, Vol.43, 1965, of Solids and structures, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 1997.
399-403. 56. COLLINS, M.P., The Torque-Twist Characteristics of Reinforced
39. BATE,S.C.C., Why Limit State Design, Concrete, March Concrete Beams, Inelasticity and Non Linearity in Structural Con-
1968,pp.103-108. crete, SM study No.8;University of Waterloo Press, Waterloo, 1972,
40. KRISHNA RAJU N., Limit State Design for Structural Concrete, pp.211-232.
Proceedings of th~ Institution of Engineers (India), Vol.51, January 57. VERGHESE, P.C., Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete,
1971, pr.138-143 Prentice Hall of India Private Ltd, New Delhi, 1994, pp. 388-419.
MADSEN,H.C., KRENK,S and LIND,N.C., Methods of Structural
41.
Safety, Prentice hall Inc, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1986.
 596 Reinforced Concrete Design
58. TIMOSHENKO, S and GOODIER, J.N., Theory of Elasticity,
McGraw Hill, New York, 1970.
59. HSU, T.T.C., Ultimate Torqueof Rectangular Reinforced Concrete
Beams, ASCE Journal of Structural Division, Vol.94, February 1968,
pp.485-51O.
, 60. COLLINS, M.P., WALSH, P.F., ARCHER, F.E and HALL, A.S.,
!. Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Beams subjected to'
combined Torsion and Bending, ACI Publication, SP-18, "Torsion of
Structural Concrete", American Concrete Institute, Detroit, march
1966.
61. IYENGAR, K.T.S., RAMPRAKASH,N., Recommendations for the
Design of R~jnforced Concrete Beams for Torsion, Bending and
Shear, Bridge and Structural Engineer, March 1974.
62. WARNER,R:F., RANGAN, B.V., and HALL, A.S., Reinforced
Concrete, Pitman, Australia, 1976.
63. UNNIKRISHNA PILLAI,S & DEVDAS MENON, Reinforced Con-
crete Design, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1998.
64. SP: 34(1987), IjPnd Book on Concrete Reinforcement and Detailing,
Bureau ofIndian Standards, 1987.
65. ACI Committee 224, Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures,
Journal of the American Concrete Institute, Vol.69, No.12,
Dec. 1972, pp.717-753.
I· 66. BEEBY, A.W., The Prediction and Control of Flexural Cracking in
Reinforced Concrete Members, Proceedings of the A.C.I. Sympo-
sium on Cracking, Deflection and Ultimate load of Concrete Slab
Systems, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, 1971,pp. 55-75.
67. KRISHNA RAJU, N., Prestressed Concrete (Third Edition), Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1995, pp. 358-371.
68. PURUSHOTHAMAN, P., Reinforced Concrete Structural Elements,
Behaviour, Analysis and Design, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
1984.
69. TAYLER, R, HAYES, Band BHAI, M., Coefficients for Design of
Slabs by Yield line Theory, Concrete VoU3, No.5, 1969.
70. KRISHNA RAJU, N., Design of Rectangular Reinforced concrete
slabs supported on all the sides with a short discontinuous edge,
Building Science Journal; VoU5, 1970, pp.18i-185.
Referencees 597
71. KRISHNA RAW, N., Limit State Design of Rectangular Reinforced
Concrete Slabs, Proceedings of the Symposium on Recent Develop-
ments in Analytical, Theoretical and Experimental Techniques in
Engineering Structures, Warangal (A.P), VoU, 1971, pp. 69-76.
72. Building code requirements (or reinforced Concrete, A.C.1. Standard
318-89, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, U.S.A.,
1989.
73. INGERSLAV, A., The Strength of Rectangular Slabs, Journal of the
Institute of Structural Engineering, Vol. I, No.1, Jan. 1923, pp.3-14.
74. JOHANSSEN, K.W., Brudlinieteorier, Jul, Gjellarups Forlag,
Copenhagen, 1943, p.l91 (Yield line theory, Cement & Concrete
Association, London, 1962, p.181).
75. 75. JOHANSSEN·,. K.W., Pladeformler, Polytechnisk, Forening,'
Copenhagen, 1946, p.186 (Yield Line formula,for Slabs), Cement &
Concrete Association, London,. 1972, p. 106.
76. WOOD, R.H., Plastic and Elastic Design of Slabs and Plates, Thames
and Hudson, London, 1961, p.344.
77. WOOD,R.H., A Partial Failure of limit Analysis for Slabs and the
consequences for future research, Magazine of Concrete Research,
Vol.2I, 1969, p.79.
78. JONES,L.L., Ultimate load Analysis of reinforced and Prestressed
concrete Structures, Chatto and Windus, London, 1962, p.248.
79. SHUKLA, S.N., Hand Book for Design of Slabs by Yield Line and
Strip Methods, Structural Engineering research Centre, Roorke,
India, 1973, p.180.
80. WESTERGAARD, H.M., and SLATER, W.A., Moments and
Stresses in Slabs, proceedings of the American Concrete Institute,
VoU7, 1921, ppAI5-538.
81. WESTERGAARD,H:M., Formulas for the design of rectangular
Floor slabs and the Supporting girders, Proceedings of the American
concrete Institute, Vol.22, 1926, pp.26-46.
82. HILLERBORG, A., Jamviksteori for Armerde, betongplatter,
betong, VoIAI, 1956, p.17\.
83. RAJU,N.K., Design of rectangular Reinforced concrete Slabs sup-
ported on all the sides with a short discontinuous edge, Building sci-
ence Journal, Vol.5, Pergamon press, U.K, 1970; pp.181-185.
 Referencees 'JY'J

KRISHNA RAJU, N., Design of Bridges (Third Edition), Oxford &

84. KRISHNA RAJU,N.,Optimized Strip method for the Design of
Freely supported slabs, The Indian Concrete journal, Vo1.45, no.9, 99. IBH Publishers, New Delhi, 1998, pp. 414-420.
. f Pile Foundations, Bureau
Sept.I971, pp. 390-393. 100. IS: 2911-1979, Design and ConstrucU on a
85. ACI 318M-89, Building Code requirements for reinforced' concrete, oflndian Standards, New Delhi,1979.
f for Concrete Structures
American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, 1989, pp.119-128. 101 . IS'. 3370 f P
- , Indian Standard CodeII)a rac . f Ice
rced Concrete S tructures,
86. TARANATH, B.S., Structural An~lysis and design of Tall Buildings for storage of Liqllids (Part- ,re~n a 3 14
Bureau of Indian standards, New Delhi, 1965, pp. - .
McGraw Hill International Edition, 1988.
102. TIMOSHENKO, Sand WOINOWSKY KRIEGER, S., Theory of
87. Bresler. B., Design Criteria for reinforced Concrete columns under
Axial load and Biaxial bending, Journal of the American concrete Plates and Shells, McGraw HiIl, New york, 1959.
J M Design of Prestressed Tanks, Transactions of the
institute, Vo1.57, 1960, pp.481-490. . 103. CROM . . . , . .' 52 89-118.
88. UNNIKRISHNA PILLAI, Sand DEVDAS MENON, Reinforced American Society of Crv,l Engmeers, 19 , pp.
d d C d f Practice for the storage
Concrete Design, tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 104. IS: 3370(Part-IV), Indian Stan ar (f°h.erd° print) Bureau of Indian
1998, pp. 583-588. of Liquids, Part-IV- Design Tables I re ,
PECK, R.B., HANSON, W.H.,THORNBURN, T.H., Foundation Standards, May 1974, pp. 14-49. ..
89. R . forcement and DetaI1mg,
E;ngineering, John Wiley & Sons, Ncw York, 1974. 105. SP: 34-1987, Hand Book on Conc~ete em ewDelhi,1987.
Special Publication, Bureau of Indian Standards, N .
90. BERGMAN, V.R., Helicoidal Stair Cases of reinforced concrete, d Responsibilities, Amencan
A.C.1. Journal, Vo1.53, October 1956, pp.403-412. 106. Structural Failures Modes, Causes ~n 1973 .
Society of Civil Engineers, New Yor " . . . I
9!. SCORDELIS, A.C., Internal forces in Uniformly Distributed loaded . fCracks in BUlldmg s, Spec"
Helicoidal Girders, A.C.I. Journal, Vo1.56, April 1960, pp.1013- 107. Hand Book on Causes aud PreventlOn a . d rd New Delhi,
1026. publication, SP-25, and B"reau of Ind,.n stan a s,
-'~ 1984. . CSA
92. GOULD, PL., Analysis and Design of a Cantilever Stair case, A.C.I. h d of concrete ConstructIOn,
Journal, Vo1.60, July 1963, pp.881-889. 108. Concrete Materials and met a s . fan Rexdale (To-
Standards A 23.1-94, Canadian Standards AssoC,., ,
93. SOLANKI, H.T., Free Standing stairs with Slab less Tread-Risers,
ronto), Canada, 1994. N
Journal of "the American Society of Civil engineers, Structural Divi- . '1 J hn Wiley & Sons, ew
sion, Vol 101, August 1975, pp.1733-1738. 109. FELD JACOB., Const,uctlOn Fa' ures, a .
94. KRISHNA RAJU,N., Design of Bridges (Third edition), Oxford and York, 1968. J hn
110. PARK, R. and PAULAY, T., Reinforced Concrete Structures, a
IBH Publishers, New Delhi, 1998, pp.250-295.
Wiley & Sons, New York, 1975. . '1
95. IS: 8110-1985, British Code of practice for use of Concrete (Part 1 & . II C nadian JOllrnal of Crv'
' 'fAYLOR D.A. ProgressIve Co apse, a
2), British Standards institution, 1985. . III . " 517-529.
Engineering, Vol.2, No.4, Dec.1975, pp.
96, VARGHESE,P.C., Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete,Pren- W'R P ogressive Coilapse, Abnor-
tice Hall of India, New Delhi,1998, pp.450-464. 112. ALLEN, D.E., and SHRIEVER, . ., r 'I F ',Iure Modes Causes,
'Id' C des in Structura a , ,
mal loads and BUI 109 a . f Civil Engineers, 1973, pp.
97. ACI: 318-1989, Building Code requirements for Reinforced con- responsibilities. Amencan SocJety 0
crete, American concrete institute, Detroit, Michigan, 1989, pp.162-
166.
21-47.
L d LEAVENWORTH, R.S., Statistical Qua Ity
r C
on-
ll3. GRANT,~. E an . N York 1988.
98. SP: 34-1987, Hand Book on Concrete Reinforcement and Detailing, trol, VI Edition, McGraw HIU Boolio Inc, ew , ,
Indian Standards Institution, New Delhi, 1987, pp.76-8!.
 600 Reinforced Concrete Design
114. HOOVER: C.A. and GREEN. M.R., Construction Quality, Education
and Seismic safety, Earthquake Engineering Research Institute, Oak.
land California, 1996.
115. WESTLUND, G., Use of High Strength Steel in reinforced Concrete
Journal of the American Concrete Institute, Vo1.30, No.12, Jun~
1959, pp.1237·1250.
116. KALGAL, M.R. and JAYASIMHA, K.S., Detailing of reinforce.
ments, Proceedings of Workshop on Reinforcements in Concrete.
Tor steel research Foundation, Sept. 1994, Bangalore, paper No.3.
117. ~S: 3414·1968, Code of Practice for Design and Installation of joints
In BUlldmgs, B.I.S., and New Delhi, 1968.
118. SUDARSHAN, M.S., rio's and Dont's in Reinforcement fabrication
and Detailing, Proceedings of the Workshop on Reinforcements in
Concrete, Torsteel Foundation of India, Sept.l994, Bangalore, paper
,NoA.
119. IS: ~893.1984, Criteria for Earthqnake Design of Structnres (Fourth
, RevISIon), B.I.S., New Delhi, 1984.
120. IS: 4236·1976, Code of Practice for Earthquake resistant design and
, Construction of Buildings, B.I.S., New lJelhi, 1976.,
121. IS: 13920·1993, Dnctile detailing of reinforced Concrete Structures
subjected to Seismic Forces, B.I.S. New Delhi, 1993.
f22. ACI Committee·318, Commentary on Building Code Requirements
for reinforced Concrete, (ACI: 318-89), American Concrete Institute
Detroit, Michigan, 1989.
123. National Building Code of Canada, 1985, Part·~; Structural Design
National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa, 1985. ' 139. BERG, G.Y., Response of Multistorey Structures to Earthquake,
124. CSA Standard CAN-A 23.3-M84, Design of Concrete Structnres for
Buildings, Canadian Standards Association, Rexdale, Ontario, 1984.
125. SEAOC, Recommended Lateral Force requirements and Commen-
tary Seismology Committee, Structural Engineers Association of
California, Sanfransisco, 1980.
126. UNNIKRISHNA PILLAI, S, and DEVDAS MENON, Reinforced
Concrete Design, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co, Ltd, New Delhi,
1998, pp.705-726.
127. FINTEL, Mark: GHOSH, S.K, ARNALDO and DERECHO, T.,
Earthq~ake ReSistant Structures, Hand Book of Concrete Engineer-
Ing Edltedby Mark FIntel,(Second Edition), C.Ii.S. Publishers, New
Delhi, 1986; ppAII-513. ' -
Referencees 601
128. CLOUGH, R.W and PENZIEN, J., Dynamics of Structures, McGraw,
Hill Book Co, New York, 1975.
129. NEW MARK, N.M., Design of Structures to resist Seismic motions,
proceedings of Earthquake Engineering Conference, University of
South Carolina, Jan.1975, pp.235-275.,
130. HURTY, W.C and RUBINSTEIN, M.P., Dynamics of Structures,
Prentice hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1965.
'131. DOWRICK, DJ., Earthquake Resistant Design, John Wiley & Sons,
Chichester, U.K, 1977.
132. PILLAI, S.U and KIRK, D.W., Ductile Beam-Column Connection in
Precast Concrete, ACI Journal, Vol.78, Nov-Dec, 1981, pp. 480-487.
133. Reinforced Concrete Structures in Seismic Zones, ACI Publication
SP:53, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, 1977.
134. Reinforced Concrete Structures subjected to Wind and Earthquake
Forces, ACI Publication SP: 63, American concrete Institute" Detroit,
1980.
135. Earthquake effects on Reinforced Concrete Structures, ACI Publica-
tion SP:84, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, 1985.
136. PILLAI, S.U and DEVDAS MENON., Reinforced Concrete design,
Tata McGraw H Publishing Co, New Delhi, 1988, pp.707-725.
137. JAIN, A.K., Reinforced Concrete {Limit State Design), Nemchand &.
Bros, Roorke, 1984, ppA87-505.
' 138. BLUME, J.A., Structural Dynamics in Earthquake Resistant design,
. Transactions of ASCE, YOL.125, Part-I, Paper No.3054, 1960,
. JEMD'Paper No.2790, April 1961.
140. ACI-ASCE COMMIITEE-352, Recommendations for Design of
,,Beam.Column Joints in Monolithic Reinforced concrete Structures
(ACI 352, R-76, Reaffirmed 1981), American Concrete Institute,
Detroit, 1976..
141. PILLA1: S.U and KIRK, D.W., Ductile Bearn-Column Connection in
Precast Concrete, American Concrete Institute , Journal, Yo1.178,
Nov-Dec, 1981, pp,480-487.
142. ARNOLD,C and REITHERMAN, R., Building Configuration and
Seismic D~sign, John Wiley & Sons Inc, New York, 1982.
 602 Rein!orcedCOllcrete D~sigJl

143. Applied Technology Council, Tentative provisions for the Develop-

mentof seismic Regulations for Buildings, ATC-3-06, National Subject Index
Bureau of Standards, SP: 510, U.S. Government Printing offke,
Washington, D.C, 1978.
144. PARK and PAULAY, T., Reinforced Concrete Structures, John
Wiley & Sons Inc, New York, 1975. Bu.:£ling, 4, 31,531, 587
Aggregate Cement Ratio, 19
145. Explanatory hand Book of Codes for Earthquake Engioeering, Spe-
uggregntc volume, 15
cial Publication SP: 22, Bureau of Indian standards, New Delhi, C2.!;ulatioll of crack width, 207
Aggressive environment, 203,·207,
1982. Cr,ileverbeam, 147, 183, 187,
372 :C.;, 248, 564
146. NEWMARK, N.M, and ROSENBLEUTH, E., Fundamentals of Aglite, 16 C2.:-::;!cvcr retaining wall, 384, 488
Earthquake Engineering, Prentice Hall, Engle wood Cliffs, New Agloporite, 16 Cellevcr slab, 6, 175.272,424,
Jersey, 1871. Air entrained concrete, 20, 21 il
Aircrafthangers.4
147. FINTEL, M and KHAN, F.R., Shock Absorbing Soft Storey Concept
for Multistorey Earthquake Structures, ACI Journal, proceedings,
V.66(5), May 1969, pp.381-390.
148. CASPE, M.S., Earthquake Isolation of Multistorey Concrete Struc-
Airport runwayS. 5
Arch dams,4
Alkaline environment, 22
Allowable stress, 196
Ca" in situ, 446
Ce:.:roid.al axis, 201
cr'":1",522
Ct.2.:iClcristic load, 57, 4 I 6
Cr.':'--':i.etcristic strength. 56, 331,
!
,

tures, ACI Journal Proceedings, 67(11), November 1970. Anchorage, 60.172, 177, 183,424,
5-5
149. Anonymous, Ball Bearing Seismic resistance (On Matushita Sys~ 451,530,534,545,571,578,580
Ch;c;ncys,20
tem), Engineering News Report, 73, March 16, 1967. Anchorage bond stress, 175
Ci,:c!ar footing, 374
Applied moment, 237
.~ 150. KELLY, J.M., Aseismic Base Isolation: its History and Prospectus.
Atomic structures, 5
C:--:-.:.:,,"r girder, 5
Joint Sealing and bearing Systems for Concrete Structures, V.l
~, American Concrete Institute, SP: 70, 1981, pp.549-586. Average strain, 208
cla,:,::ng unit, 13
, CkEring, I
C0:;':'~ aggregate, 15
Balanced section, 40, 380, 400
Cc,:::;cd deflection limits, 196
Barytes, 17 C"c-,,:';nt of friction, 486
Bearing moment coefficients, 250,
C0;:~:ient of thermal expansion,
262
Bearing plate, 434
CO:::'_;""" 338,522
Bearing stress, 371,431
Co'·"-.'" footing, 361
Biaxial bending, 5, 345, 346
Co:·:::.n head, 281
Biological shield, 16
CoL:.n strip, 280, 286
Bond, 1,2,172,470
Co:::.::ned footing, 363, 534
Bond mechanism, 172
Cc::-,:",ibility torsion, )48, 149
Bond stress, 477 c('.~~;r,.;'ite action, 60, 172
Bond stresses, 172 C:-':-:-:;r,.;,ite columns, 321
Bow girder, 147 C:::-.:·o>sion chord, 127
Bracing elements, 325
C:::-.:-';>sion flange, 236
Brackets, 430.543,545 C,-,:~,>,::;."ion reinforcement, 199
Brittle shear failure, 136,587 .,:- ':'~0

I
604 Subject !mh'x
! Effective modulus of elasticity.
t Compression steel ratio, 576
1
,(
Compression strain, 62
Concrete grade, 26, 130, 131
Confined concrete, 578
Construction joints. 551
Continuous beam, 249, 250, 253,
463,530,545
Continuous slab, 6, 275, 278,525
526
Contraflexure, 580
Control of crack width, 196
Control of deflection, .195
Cprbel, 430, 431,432,543
Corner columns, 5, 322
Comer junctions, 540
Counterfort retaining wall, 385
386,399,406
Cover requirements, 22, 24, 29
549
Cracked section, 34, 216
Creep, 19,57,58
Creop coefficient, 20, 203, 214
Creepdeflection,·202, 214, 217
Creep strain, 20
Critical neutral axis, 38'
Critical section, 138,284,365,
3Q6, 369, 576
Curtailment, 404, 507
Curvature ductility, 576
Curvatures, 260, 569
Dead loads, II, 12, 415, 423
Deep beams, 127, 206
Deflection computations, 199,201
216
Deflection control, 196,215,217
223,226,229,233,240,246,248,
253,259,275,278,364,475
Design aids, 11, 79, 80, 81, 89,
94, 98, 105, 113, 159
Design bond stress, 176
Design charts, 67, 171, 224,241,
338
Design mix concrete, 17
Design moment, 262, 267, 282,
423,504
Design strength, 56, 61 , 155, 336
Development length, 175, 177,
372,588
Diagonal compression, 131
Diagonaltensioi), 126, 127, 129,
542
Differential shrinkage, 201
Dilatancy, 172
Direct design method, 281,282
Distribution bars, 258, 419,525
Doglegged staircase, 492
Dome, 4, 505, 506
Double cantiIver Precast tread
slab,409
Double curvature, 355
Doubly reinforced beam, 109, J 10,
Ill, 113,191, 231, 233,479
Dowels, 368
Drop panel, 281
Drying shrinkage, 19
Ductile frame,587
Ductility, 568, 569, 572
Durability, 20
Dynamic analysis, 569
Dynamic loading, 56
Earth, pressure, 385
Earthquake forces, 568
Earthquake loads, 14,569
Earthquake resistant design, 567,
579
Earthquake zones, 569
Eccentric loading, 147
Eccentricity, 237, 336, 379
Effective depth, 130, 198,235,
380,472,474,493
!'ffective length, 323, 324
Subject IJldex 60S
Flexural stiffness, 282, 354
214 . ,7
Flexural strength, IS, 60, 84, 109
Effective span, 239, 242, 249, 2_ ,
267,271, 413, 421,474,
Floor system, 5, 6, 7:237
FI~wability, 15
Folded plate, 4
476,478,482,492
Effective width offlange, 234 Frame structure, 325
Framing system, 8
Elastic constants, 498
Freebase, 504
Elastic design, 2
Fricti~nal resistance. 172
Elast.ic instability, 321
Elastic strai!" 20 Grade of concrete, 64, 176,447,
Elastic.theory,33
471,575,587
. Hlasto-plastic, 571
Grading, 16
Elongation, 569
Gravity loads, 355, 387
Embankment, 393 .
Grid floor system, 7 .
EllJpirical rrf.ethod, 195, J96
Encrgy dissipation, 577
Helical reinforcement,)31, 333,
Enhanced sh~ar, 137,431,434,
334
437 ,Heel slab, 384
Entrained air, 21
Hexagonal slab, 302
Environmenf, 4,19, 549
High strength concrete, 129,575
Equilibrium method, 113, 293, 300
High strength deformed bar>, 27
Equilibrium torsion, 147
High alumina cement, 16
Equivalent bending moment, 160,
High density concrete, 16
164,244
'Equivalent frame method, 283 Highways, 5
Equivalent shear force, 161, 164, Hinged base, 497
Hinging columns, 589
244 Hogging moments, 527
Expansion joints, 552, 556
Hooks, 177, 529
Exterior panel, 281, 282
Hoop tension, 498,503
Horizontal loops, 538, 545
Factored load, 418 Hydrophobic cement, 16
Factored moment, 363
Fire resistance, 22, 25
Imposed loads,12
Fixed base, 497- Inclined stirrups, 132,542
Flanged beams, 84, 89, 199, 233,
Industrial structUres, 2, 543
236 . Inelastic deformations, 568, 569
Flanged sections, 84, 198
Jnftll walls, 326
Flat slab floor system, 7
Interaction diagrams, 336
Flat slabs, 256,279,284
Interior panel, 282, 284
Flexibility, 249 .
Intz ty~, 495 .
Flexible base, 498 . Isolated cantilever tread slab, 409
Flexural bond stress, 173

Isolated footing, 361
Isolation concepts, 588
Isotropically reinforced slab, 292
Junctions, 497, 535
Key, 390, 398
Lap length, 184, 185, 189,546
Lap slice, 188, 580
Lap welding of bars, 177
Lapping, 545, 562
Lateral Instability, 579·
Lateral ties, 31, 321, 333, 342, 345
Lever ann factor, 42, 236
Lever ann lenth, 236
Lifting holes; 456
'1 Lighthouses; 4
I
, Lightweight concrete, 16
Limit state design, 3, 54, 126,
220, 256, 572
Limit state method, 54, 521
., Limit state of cracking, 195
Limiting crack width, 203
Limiting moment of resistance, 66,
82,108,124,125,187,228,
231, 252, 258
., Limonite, 17
Live loads, 12, 41~, 423
Load factor, 19
Long term deflection, 201,213,
217
Long walls, 515
Longitudinal reinforcements, 24,
150,165,166,167,168,170,171,
332,334,343,344,454
Low heat portland cement, 16
Magnetite, 17
Marine structures, 4
Mass concrete, 15
Matrix methods, 249
Maximum shear stress, 131, 473
Mean strength, 59
Mechanical connections, 580
Mechanical connqctor, 368
Medium tensile steel, 27
Middle strip, 262 . Percentage redistribution, 204
Mild steel, 27, 36, 37, 111,575
Modification factors, 197,211,215
Modular ratio, 38
Modulus of elasticity, 19
Modulus o(rupture ofconcrete,
206
Moment distribution, 514
Moment ofinertiil, 201, 283
Moment of resistance, 33; 40, 47,
64,
77, 113, 207,236,237
Multiplying factor, 131, 139
Multistorey building, 463, 527,
547
Neutral axis, 33, 34, 35, 51,
63,84,86,95,123,163,576
Nibs,430; 436
Nomina! cover, 24, 25
Nominal diametr, 27
Nominal mix concrete, 17
Nominal ;hear stress, 126, 129,
284,471,472,473
Non dimensional parameters, 338
Non structural elements; 590
Nonnal distribution, 54
Nuclear reactoJ vessels, 5
One way slab, 5, 256, 260,
525,526, 551, 555
One well staircase, 412
O'rthotropically reinforceo, 292,
297
Over reinforced section, 40,42,
62,63
Parametric-constants, 498
Panial safety factors, 56, 57,
195,569
Partitions, II, 534
Passive pressure, 390
Pedestal,321
Percentage reinforcement, 1"40,
141,211,397
Permissible deflection, 196
Pennissible shear stress, 151, 162,
165,259,462,471
Permissible stress, 33, 36, 37,
49,470,496,512
Permissible tensile stress, 496
Pile cap, 446, 448
Piles, 5, 446, 448, 449, 45 1,453
Plastic hinge, 575, 578
Plasticity, 15
Poisson's ratio, 503
. Poker vibrator, 548
Portland pozzonlona cement, 23
Portland slag cement, 16, 24
Precast, 5, 446, 588
Preliminary, 236
Pressure coefficient, 14
Pressure vessel, 5
Primary torsion. 147
Probabilistic concepts, 54
Progressive collapse, 522, 578
Pure torsion, 147, 158
Quality control, 2, 521, 522
Quay walls, 4
.' Radiation, 5
Raft foundation, 463
Rapid hardening ponland cement,
16
Rectangular tanks, 510
Redistribution of moments, 249,
276,568
Reduction factor, 56, 200
Subject Index 6U'I
Reinforcement index, 66
Reinforcement splicing, 177
Relative stiffness, 283, 328
Reliability theory, 54
Restrained slabs, 262
Retaining walls, 384, 385, 389,
390,393,395,400,486,487
Ring beam, 506
Ring tension, 498
Roquefort cement, 2
Rotation, 148, 149,289,324,
326; 355
Rotation capacity, 289, 568,
575,588
Safe bearing capacity, 361, 393,
463 '
Safety factors, 56
Sr.- .-: moment of area, 326
Secondary moments, 353
Seismic forces, 567
Seismic zone, 567
Semi probabilistic approach, 55
Service loads, 3, 33, 195, 212
363,521
Serviceability, 3, 54, 56,195,522
Serviceability criteria, 220
Shallow foundation, 361
Shear force coefficients, 249,250,
252,463
Shear key, 390, 491
Shear reinforcement, 30, 136,
144,168,229,230,232,240,
241,245,247,252,257,284,
365,436,442,467,528
Shear resistance, 140, 141, 431,
584
Shear span/depth ratio, 430,431,
432
Shear stresses, 126, 424, 462,
471,472,479,481,483,486,544
Shear wall boX, 10

608 Subject Index
Shear wall system, 10
Shear walls, 10, 326, 586, 588
ShOit columns, 330, 331, 336,
345 . Underground tanks, 494
ShOlt term deflection, 201, 217
Short walls, 511, 513, 514, 516
Shrinkage, 19
Shrinkage curvature, 202
Shrinkage deflection, 202, 214,
217
Side face reinforCement, 30, 205,
206,244
I Sidesway,355·
I.
Sidewalls, 512
Silos, 20
Simple bending theory, 172
Singly reinforced beam, 477
Slag, 16,24
Slender coltimns, 352, 353
Slenderness ratio, 321, 322,
332,334,358,448
Snow loads, 14
Soft storey, 589
Soundness, 16
Spacer forks, 456
Span/depth ratio, 197, 220, 221,
235,250,256,266,463
I, , Span moments, 250
Spandrel beam, 414
Specific gravity, 16
Spiral reinforcement, 321, 455
Spiral stair case, 412
Spirals, 177,334,447,448,578
Splicing, 177. 189, 545
Stability calculations, 388, 395,
489
Stability index, 325, 326
Standard deviation, 59
Steel·beam theory, 109
Stem, 384, 385, 390, 392, 395, 400
Stiffness, 148, 354, 571, 578, 588
Storey drift, 326
Subject Index 609
Unbraced column, 325, 328 Width of web, 235
Strain compatibility method, I 12 Wind loads, 13,569,590
Underreinforced section, 39, 62,
Strap footing, 363 Wind velocity, 13
Stress blocks, 85 96,578
Workability, 18
Stress distribution, 34, 129, 234 Working load design, 2
Uniaxial eccentric compression,
Structural distress, 522 Working moment, 37
Structural element, 5, 24; 401 338 Working stress, 3, 470
Vertical force, 388, 432
Structural safety, 10 Working stress method, 33, 470,
Vertical stirrups, 143; 146, 147,
Structural stability, 578 521
529, 544, j81
Structural systems, 5, 568 Works cube strength, 57
Vibrations, 567, 589
Strut action, 432, 440, 449, 451
Virtual work method, 293
Sulphate attack, 22 Yield line analysis, 287, 293, 300
Sulphate resisting portland cement Yield line mechanism, 289
Waist slab, 414, 417, 418, 421
16 . '
Water/c~mentratio, 22, 24
Yield line theory, 262, 287
Supersulphated cement, 16 Yield lines, 287, 289, 299
Support moments, 250 Water pressure, 510
Yield moment, 2.90, 292, 309
Water retaining structures, A, 496
Support section, 139, 148, Yield strain, 62, 63,64, 572
Web reinforcement, 129, 154,
160;237,424,529 Yield strength, 27, 36, 57, 575
Surface crack width, 207 581
Welding, 177, 185, 545
Tall towers, 4
Tank walls, 498, 504, j07, 510,
517
Target strength, 18, 126
Tension reinfor~e:ment, 29, 49,
62,87,107,198,199,209,
222,240,241,258,441,472
Tension steel ratio, 575
Thickness of flange, 235
''''
Tie, 2
Tied columns, 321
Toe slab, 384, 402
Torsional moment, 148, 243
Torsional reinforcement, 150
Torsional shear stress, 150
Torsional stiffness, 149
Torsional strength, 147, 162
Transverse reinforcement ·165
166,168,169,170,171:236:
531,580
Tfiangularslab, 295
Truss action, 451, 457, 458, 462
Two way slab, 6, 200, 525, 526

Author Index
;j
•
Allen, D.E 599
Archer, F.E 596
Arnaldo... 600
Arnold, C... 60 I
Baikov, V 595
Bate, S.C.C 592, 594
Beeby, AW 596
Berg, G.V... 601
Bergman, V.R... 598
Best, V.c... 592, 594
Bhai,M... 596
Blake, L.S ... 593
Blume. G.A. .. 601
Bresler, B... 598
Browne, FL .. 594
Caspe, M.S ... 602
Clough,' R.W 601
Collins, M.P 595, 596
Cornell, C.A 595
Cranston, W.B ... 592,594
Crom,I.M... 599
Davis, H.S ... '594
Derecho, T... 600
Devdas Menon." 592, 596, 598,
600, 601
Dowrich, D.1... 601
Erontroy, H.C. .. 594
Evans, R.H." 592
Feld lacob ... 599
Author Index 611 .
Krishna Reddy, Y... 594 Shriever, W.R... 599
Shukla, S.N... 597
Leavenworth, RS ... 599 Sigalov, E 595
Lind, N.C. .. 594· Slater, W.A 597
Solanki, H.T 598
Madsen, H.C... 594 Srinath, L.S 595
McGregor, J.G... 595 Sudarshan, M.S ... 600
Murashev, V... 595
Taranath, B.S... 598
Fintel Mark... 600, 602
Neville, A.M... 592 Taylor, D.A... 599
Franklin, R.E... 594
Taylor, R... 596
Park, R... 599, 602 Teychenne, D.C. .. 594
Gerwick, B.C... 593
Paulay, T 599, 602 Timoshenko, S ... 595, 596, 599
Ghosh; S.K... 600
Peck, RE 598
Goodier, I.N... 595, 596
Penzien, I 60 I Unnikrishna, Pillai,S ... 592, 596,
Gould, PL... 598
Popov, E.P 595 598, 600
Grant, E.L. .. 599
Pumshothaman, P... 596
Green. M.R.. 600
Varyani, U.H 595
Gurnraja, D.R .. 595
Raina, V.K... 592 Verghese, P.C 595
Raju, N.K." 597
Hall, A.S... 596
Ramprakash, N... 596 Walsh, P.F 596
Hansen, I.M ... 595, 598
Rangan, B.Y." 596 Warner, R.F 596
Hayes, B... 596
Ranganathan, R.. 595 Westergaard, H.M... 597
Hillerborg, A... 597
Reitherman, R." 601 Westlund, G... 600
Hoover, C.A... 600
Rosenbleuth, E... 602 Witter, H.C... 594
Hsu, T.T.C 596
Woinowsky Kriegar, S ... 599
Hurty, W.C 601
Scordelis, A.C... 598 Wood, R.H... 597
Short, A... 593
Ingerslav, A. .. 597
Iyengar, K.T.S ... 596
lain, AX .. 601
layasimha, K.S ... 600
lones, L.L... 597
Kalgal, M.R... 600
Kelly,I.M 602
Khan, F.R 602
Kinniburgh, W... 593
Krenk, S 594
Krieger, S 599
Krishna Raju, N... 592, 593, 594,
595, 596, 597, 598, 599
I
 l.',~,

! LJJj

iii
i~I
I
'i
",,',11
I
f

I: